Part Modeling

Pro/ENGINEER
Part Modeling Users Guide
Parametric Technology Corporation
DOC-U0058-EN-200
COPYRIGHT 1998 PARAMETRIC TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. This document may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or reduced to any form, including electronic medium or machine readable form, or transmitted or publicly performed by any means, electronic or otherwise, unless Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) consents in writing in advance. Use of the software has been provided under a Software License Agreement. Information described in this manual is furnished for information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual. The software contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information and is protected by United States copyright laws and copyright laws of other countries. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF
SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER, and Pro/MECHANICA are registered trademarks; and Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CMM, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/ENGINEER BASIC LIBRARY, Pro/ENGINEER CONNECTOR LIBRARY, Pro/ENGINEER ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LIBRARY, Pro/ENGINEER HUMAN FACTORS LIBRARY, Pro/ENGINEER MOLD BASE LIBRARY, Pro/ENGINEER PIPE FITTING LIBRARY, Pro/ENGINEER PIPING AND HEATING SYMBOL LIBRARY, Pro/ENGINEER TOOLING LIBRARY, Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEATURE for BODY ENGINEERING, Pro/FEM, Pro/FEM-POST, Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE for CATIA, Pro/INTERFACE for STEP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/INTRALINK Web Client, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/NC-ADV, Pro/NC-MIL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NC-CHECK, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PERSPECTA-SKETCH, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLOT, Pro/PROCESS for ASSEMBLIES, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/TOOLKIT, Pro/3DPAINT, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web-Publish, and Pro/WELDING are trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation in the United States and in other countries. All other company and product names referenced herein have trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This Commercial Computer Software and Documentation, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 22.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), is provided to the Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Parametric Technology Corporation, 128 Technology Drive, Waltham, Massachusetts 02453-8938. Printed in U.S.A.
Revised 6/98
Contents
About This Guide
Purpose ....................................................................................................................... ii Audience...................................................................................................................... ii Contents ...................................................................................................................... ii Prerequisites............................................................................................................... iii Documentation............................................................................................................ iii Conventions ......................................................................................................... iv Software Product Concerns and Documentation Comments ..................................... v
Chapter 1: Starting Out in Part Mode

Setting Up the Part .................................................................................................. Opening a Part File ........................................................................................... Setting Up Units ................................................................................................ Using Layers ..................................................................................................... Creating a Model Grid ....................................................................................... Creating the First Feature........................................................................................ Creating the Initial Solid Feature ....................................................................... Creating Datums as the Base Feature .............................................................. Creating a User-Defined Feature as the First Feature ...................................... Adding Features ...................................................................................................... Creating Incomplete Features ................................................................................. Using the Model Tree in Part Mode ......................................................................... Modifying Geometry and Dimensions...................................................................... Fractions ........................................................................................................... Reference Dimensions ...................................................................................... Negative Dimensions Environment ...................................................................
1-1
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-8 1-8
Contents - i
Chapter 2: Sketcher
2-1
Working in the Sketcher Environment ..................................................................... 2-2 Using Sketcher Mode ........................................................................................ 2-2 Using the Toolbar Icons .................................................................................... 2-2 Saving a Section ............................................................................................... 2-3 Restarting a Sketch ........................................................................................... 2-3 Sketcher Color................................................................................................... 2-3 Setting the Sketcher Environment Options ....................................................... 2-3 Using the Grid ................................................................................................... 2-4 Modifying the Grid....................................................................................... 2-4 Setting the Grid Snap ................................................................................. 2-6 Creating Geometry in Sketcher Mode ..................................................................... 2-6 Using the Mouse to Sketch Geometry............................................................... 2-6 Sketching Lines with the Line Option ................................................................ 2-8 Sketching a Rectangle .................................................................................... 2-10 Sketching an Arc ............................................................................................. 2-11 Fillet Arcs .................................................................................................. 2-11 Sketching Circles............................................................................................. 2-13 Sketching Advanced Geometry....................................................................... 2-14 Conics ....................................................................................................... 2-14 Coordinate Systems ................................................................................. 2-15 Splines ...................................................................................................... 2-15 Using Sketcher Text ........................................................................................ 2-19 Blend Vertex.................................................................................................... 2-20 Manipulating Sketcher Geometry .......................................................................... 2-20 Dividing Entities............................................................................................... 2-20 Dividing an Entity into Two or More Entities ............................................. 2-20 Dividing Two Intersecting Entities ................................................................... 2-21 Trimming Entities............................................................................................. 2-21 Different Ways to Trim .............................................................................. 2-22 Untrimming Entities................................................................................... 2-23 Splitting or Trimming Entities with Dimensions ......................................... 2-24 Mirroring Geometry ......................................................................................... 2-24 Copying Imported Drawings ............................................................................ 2-24 Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry ......................................................................... 2-25 Relations ......................................................................................................... 2-25 Fractions.......................................................................................................... 2-25 Dimension Precision........................................................................................ 2-25 Automatic Dimensioning.................................................................................. 2-26 Linear Dimensions........................................................................................... 2-26
Contents - ii
Creating Linear Dimensions ..................................................................... Diameter Dimensions ...................................................................................... Dimensioning Arcs and Circles................................................................. Dimensioning Revolved Sections ............................................................. Radial Dimensions .......................................................................................... Angular Dimensions ........................................................................................ Spline Dimensions .......................................................................................... Linear Dimensions .................................................................................... Tangency Dimensions .............................................................................. Radius of Curvature Dimensions .............................................................. Dimensioning Interpolation Points ............................................................ Associating to a Coordinate System......................................................... Conic Dimensions ........................................................................................... The rho Dimension ................................................................................. The Three-Point Dimension...................................................................... Perimeter Dimension....................................................................................... Ordinate Dimensions....................................................................................... Creating a Baseline Dimension ................................................................ Creating an Ordinate Dimension .............................................................. Replacing a Dimension ................................................................................... Adding Relations to Sections................................................................................. Moving Sketcher Entities ....................................................................................... Dragging Individual Entities............................................................................. Dragging Multiple Entities ............................................................................... Rotating Entities .............................................................................................. Moving Dimensions ......................................................................................... Moving a Spline Created with the Control Poly Option ................................... Regenerating a Section ......................................................................................... Sketcher Constraints ....................................................................................... Graphical Display of Sketcher Constraints ............................................... Manipulating Constraints .......................................................................... Overriding Implicit Rules........................................................................... Terminating a Regeneration............................................................................ Unsuccessful Regeneration of a Section ........................................................ Sketch Misinterpretations ......................................................................... Underdimensioning................................................................................... Overdimensioning..................................................................................... Segment Is Too Small .............................................................................. Zero-Length Segments ............................................................................. Inappropriate Sections..............................................................................
2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-37 2-37 2-38 2-38 2-39 2-39 2-40 2-40 2-41 2-41 2-41 2-42 2-42 2-44 2-44 2-45 2-45 2-45 2-46 2-46 2-47 2-47 2-48 2-48
Contents - iii
Sketcher Accuracy .......................................................................................... Unregenerating a Sketch ....................................................................................... Unregenerating a Section and Disabling Unwanted Constraints .................... Modifying a Section Sketch ................................................................................... Restoring Dimensions ..................................................................................... Dynamic Modification ...................................................................................... Using the Drag Dim Val Option................................................................. Using the Drag Entity Option .................................................................... Using the Drag Vertex Option ................................................................... Setting an Anchor Point................................................................................... Animated Modification with the Modify Entity Option ...................................... Zero Dimension ........................................................................................ Negative Dimensions ................................................................................ Relations ................................................................................................... Modifying Spline Points ................................................................................... Modifying the Tangency of a Spline.......................................................... Modifying the Spline Using the Mouse ..................................................... Modifying the Spline Using the Control Poly Option ................................. Modifying the Spline by Its Coordinates ................................................... Modifying the Number of Points on a Spline............................................. Modifying Text Entities .................................................................................... Deleting Entities .............................................................................................. Section Geometry Information ............................................................................... Sketcher Hints ....................................................................................................... Delete - Dimension - Undelete ........................................................................ Using Points to Locate Fillets and Arcs........................................................... Using Centerlines to Locate Points and Lines................................................. Using Horizontal and Vertical Lines to Draw Tangent Arcs............................. Creating Small Angles..................................................................................... Specifying the Orientation of the Sketch ......................................................... Regenerating Complex Geometry...................................................................
2-48 2-49 2-49 2-50 2-51 2-51 2-52 2-52 2-53 2-53 2-53 2-54 2-54 2-55 2-55 2-56 2-56 2-57 2-58 2-60 2-61 2-62 2-63 2-65 2-65 2-66 2-67 2-68 2-68 2-69 2-69
Chapter 3: Datums
Datum Display ......................................................................................................... Datum Planes .......................................................................................................... Datum Plane Colors and Names....................................................................... Selecting Datum Planes .................................................................................... Creating Datum Planes On-the-Fly ................................................................... Datum Planes for Creating Cross Sections ................................................ Sizing Datum Planes ......................................................................................... Creating a Datum Plane ....................................................................................
3-1
3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5
Contents - iv
Continuous Datum Plane Creation ............................................................. 3-5 Creating Default Offset Datum Planes........................................................ 3-5 Datum Constraints that Can Only Be Used Alone ...................................... 3-6 Datum Constraints that Can Be Used Alone .............................................. 3-6 Datum Constraints that Are Used in Pairs .................................................. 3-7 Offset and Angled Datums.......................................................................... 3-7 Using a Composite Curve as a Reference ........................................................ 3-8 Datum Axes ............................................................................................................. 3-8 Datum Axes Names .......................................................................................... 3-9 Creating a Datum Axis ...................................................................................... 3-9 Continuous Datum Axes Creation ............................................................ 3-10 Creating New Datum Points for a Datum Axis.......................................... 3-10 Datum Points ......................................................................................................... 3-10 Creating Datum Points Using Model Geometry .............................................. 3-11 Creating Datum Point Arrays .......................................................................... 3-13 Creating On Curve Datum Points.................................................................... 3-15 Creating Datum Points On-the-Fly .................................................................. 3-16 Creating Offset Datum Points ......................................................................... 3-16 Datum Curves........................................................................................................ 3-17 Sketched Datum Curves ................................................................................. 3-17 Datum Curves at Surface Intersections .......................................................... 3-18 Datum Curves Created with the Thru Points Option ....................................... 3-19 Creating a Curve Through Points that Lie on a Surface ........................... 3-21 Tweaking a Spline Curve Between Two Points ........................................ 3-22 Modifying the Display of Curves ............................................................... 3-24 Previewing the Curve................................................................................ 3-25 Importing Datum Curves ................................................................................. 3-26 Composite Datum Curves ............................................................................... 3-27 Using Approximate Curves ....................................................................... 3-28 Composite Curve with a Redefinable Start Point...................................... 3-32 Chain Processing...................................................................................... 3-33 Redefining Composite Curves .................................................................. 3-36 Naming Composite Curves....................................................................... 3-36 Datum Curves Using Cross Sections .............................................................. 3-36 Projected Datum Curves ................................................................................. 3-37 Projecting Sketched Curves ..................................................................... 3-38 Projecting 3D Curves and Edges.............................................................. 3-40 Formed Datum Curves .................................................................................... 3-42 Forming a Datum Curve on Part Surfaces................................................ 3-42 Forming a Datum Curve on Surface Features.......................................... 3-43
Contents - v
Split Datum Curves ......................................................................................... Offset from Surface Datum Curves ................................................................. Datum Curve Offset From a Curve.................................................................. Datum Curve Offset From a Boundary............................................................ Restrictions on the From Bndry Option..................................................... Two-Projection Datum Curves ........................................................................ Datum Curves from Equations ........................................................................ Copied Datum Curves ..................................................................................... Coordinate Systems .............................................................................................. Referencing Model Geometry ......................................................................... Creating a Coordinate System ........................................................................ Creating an Offset Coordinate System............................................................ Using the Transformation Matrix File .............................................................. Transformation File Format....................................................................... Cartesian, Cylindrical, and Spherical Coordinate Systems ............................. Graphs ................................................................................................................... Creating Graphs .............................................................................................. Creating an Evaluate Feature................................................................................
3-44 3-45 3-47 3-48 3-50 3-51 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-53 3-54 3-56 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-59 3-60
Chapter 4: Sketching on a Model
4-1
Creating Feature Sections ....................................................................................... 4-2 Basic Steps for Creating a Section on the Model.............................................. 4-3 Entering the Sketcher Environment................................................................... 4-3 Setting Up the Sketching Plane .................................................................. 4-3 Orienting the Sketching Plane .................................................................... 4-4 Sketching in 3-D Orientation ............................................................................. 4-5 Sketcher Grid .................................................................................................... 4-5 Sketching Section Geometry ................................................................................... 4-6 Creating Sketcher Geometry from Model Geometry ......................................... 4-6 The Use Edge Option ................................................................................. 4-6 The Offset Edge Option .............................................................................. 4-8 Using Offset Edge to Offset a Loop .......................................................... 4-13 The Pick Curve Option.............................................................................. 4-14 Retrieving an Existing Section ............................................................................... 4-14 Dimensioning a Section to a Part .......................................................................... 4-16 Aligning or Dimensioning to a Model Edge or Surface.................................... 4-17 Avoiding Implicit Alignment ....................................................................... 4-17 Rules to Remember .................................................................................. 4-18 Aligning to Points............................................................................................. 4-18 Unaligning Geometry....................................................................................... 4-18 Tips for Dimensioning to Part Edges............................................................... 4-19
Contents - vi
Known Dimensions ......................................................................................... Using Automatic Dimensioning ....................................................................... Regenerating a Section Sketch ............................................................................. Leaving Sketcher with an Incomplete Section .......................................................
4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23
Chapter 5: Feature Creation Basics
5-1
Creating a Protrusion............................................................................................... 5-2 Selecting Feature Direction ............................................................................... 5-4 Thin Features........................................................................................................... 5-5 Specifying the Depth ......................................................................................... 5-9 Blind............................................................................................................ 5-9 The Through Options ............................................................................... 5-9 The Up To Options ................................................................................. 5-11 Creating an Extruded Feature ............................................................................... 5-13 Basic Procedure for Creating an Extruded Feature ........................................ 5-13 Using One Side and Both Sides with Depth Options ...................................... 5-14 Open and Closed Sections for Extruded Features.......................................... 5-15 Creating a Revolved Feature................................................................................. 5-16 Specifying the Revolved Feature Attributes .................................................... 5-16 Sketching the Revolved Feature Section ........................................................ 5-17 Specifying the Angle of Revolution ................................................................. 5-17
Chapter 6: Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features
6-1
Sweep...................................................................................................................... 6-2 Rules for Defining a Trajectory.......................................................................... 6-2 Swept Feature Corners............................................................................... 6-6 Non-Tangent Trajectory Segments............................................................. 6-7 Three-Dimensional Sweeps .............................................................................. 6-7 Blend........................................................................................................................ 6-8 Techniques Common to All Blend Types ........................................................ 6-10 Blend Sections.......................................................................................... 6-10 Starting Point of a Section ........................................................................ 6-10 Smooth and Straight Attributes................................................................. 6-11 The From To Depth Option .................................................................... 6-12 Creating a Blend ............................................................................................. 6-12 Parallel Blends ................................................................................................ 6-13 Parallel Blend Sections............................................................................. 6-13 Projected Parallel Blend ........................................................................... 6-14 Non-Parallel Blends ........................................................................................ 6-15 Sketched Versus Selected Sections......................................................... 6-15 Open and Closed Blends.......................................................................... 6-16 Specifying Tangent Surfaces.................................................................... 6-16
Contents - vii
Using IGES Files to Create Imported Sections for Non-Parallel Blends... Functions Applicable to Both Types of Blends ................................................ Using a Blend Vertex ................................................................................ Capping Blends ........................................................................................ Rotational Blends ............................................................................................ General Blend ................................................................................................. Advanced Features................................................................................................ Options Common to Variable Section Sweeps and Swept Blends ................. Variable Section Sweeps ................................................................................ Restrictions ............................................................................................... Creating a Variable Section Sweep .......................................................... Specifying Tangency Conditions .............................................................. Using Relations in Sweeps ....................................................................... Parametric Graph Relations ..................................................................... Swept Blends .................................................................................................. Creating a Swept Blend ............................................................................ Controlling the Perimeter of the Swept Blend ........................................... Modifying Swept Blend Geometry Using an Area Graph.......................... Helical Sweep.................................................................................................. Section-to-Surfaces Blends............................................................................. Surfaces-to-Surfaces Blends........................................................................... Importing Blends .............................................................................................
6-17 6-18 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-29 6-30 6-34 6-35 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-44 6-45 6-47 6-53 6-54 6-55
Chapter 7: Construction Features
7-1
Protrusions............................................................................................................... 7-2 Sketching Multiple Contours.............................................................................. 7-2 Slots and Cuts ......................................................................................................... 7-3 Holes........................................................................................................................ 7-3 Straight Holes.................................................................................................... 7-4 Sketched Holes ................................................................................................. 7-6 Placing a Hole ................................................................................................... 7-7 Selecting the Placement Surface................................................................ 7-7 Determining Dimension References ........................................................... 7-8 Shafts..................................................................................................................... 7-12 Chamfers ............................................................................................................... 7-13 Edge Chamfers ............................................................................................... 7-13 Corner Chamfers............................................................................................. 7-14 Necks..................................................................................................................... 7-15 Flanges .................................................................................................................. 7-16 Ribs........................................................................................................................ 7-17 Straight Ribs.................................................................................................... 7-18
Contents - viii
Rotational Ribs ................................................................................................ Shells ..................................................................................................................... Creating Shells ................................................................................................ Restrictions on Shells...................................................................................... Pipe........................................................................................................................ Creating a Pipe Feature .................................................................................. Specific Aspects of Pipe Creation ................................................................... Modifying and Redefining a Pipe Feature................................................. Creating Pipes in Assembly Mode............................................................ Creating a Part Consisting Only of a Pipe Feature................................... Creating Pipe Connections ....................................................................... Specifying Part Accuracy for Pipes........................................................... Creating Pipes with Multiple Radii ............................................................ Cosmetic Features................................................................................................. Sketched Cosmetic Features .......................................................................... Regular Section ........................................................................................ Creating a Sketched Cosmetic Feature.................................................... Projected Section...................................................................................... Cosmetic Threads ........................................................................................... Creating Threads ...................................................................................... Creating Custom Cosmetic Threads......................................................... Groove ............................................................................................................ Creating a Groove .................................................................................... User-Defined Cosmetic Features ....................................................................
7-18 7-20 7-20 7-21 7-22 7-22 7-25 7-25 7-26 7-27 7-27 7-28 7-28 7-29 7-29 7-29 7-30 7-30 7-31 7-33 7-35 7-37 7-37 7-38
Chapter 8: Rounds
8-1
About Rounds .......................................................................................................... 8-2 Simple and Advanced Rounds .......................................................................... 8-2 Creating a Simple Round......................................................................................... 8-3 Using the Chain Menu Options ......................................................................... 8-4 Examples of Round References ....................................................................... 8-5 Entering Radius Values..................................................................................... 8-6 Resolving Placement Ambiguity........................................................................ 8-7 Specifying the Round Extent Element............................................................... 8-7 Variable Radius Rounds .......................................................................................... 8-9 Creating Advanced Rounds................................................................................... 8-11 Round Sets ..................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic Procedure for Creating an Advanced Round ........................................ 8-13 Defining the Round Shape Element ................................................................ 8-14 Defining the Transitions Element .................................................................... 8-15 Creating Corner Transitions ............................................................................ 8-19
Contents - ix
Creating a Patch Transition............................................................................. Defining a Stop Transition by Terminating Surfaces ....................................... Creating Transitions with Existing Geometry .................................................. Creating Full Rounds ............................................................................................. Creating a Round Through a Curve....................................................................... Changing the Attachment Type .............................................................................
8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-28 8-29
Chapter 9: Tweak Features
9-1
Tweak Features ....................................................................................................... 9-2 Drafts ....................................................................................................................... 9-3 Neutral Plane Drafts .......................................................................................... 9-7 Creating a Split-at-Sketch Neutral Plane Draft ......................................... 9-10 Multiple Draft Areas .................................................................................. 9-12 Using the Loops Surfs Option to Select Draft Surfaces ............................ 9-13 Neutral Curve Drafts........................................................................................ 9-14 Creating a Curve-Driven Draft .................................................................. 9-17 Restrictions on Curve Driven Drafts.......................................................... 9-19 Modifying Draft Angles .................................................................................... 9-19 Local Push ............................................................................................................. 9-20 Sketching the Local Push Boundary ............................................................... 9-21 Defining the Local Push Height ....................................................................... 9-21 Radius Dome ......................................................................................................... 9-21 Section Domes ...................................................................................................... 9-23 Creating a Swept Section Dome ..................................................................... 9-24 Creating a Blended Section Dome Without a Profile....................................... 9-26 Creating a Blended Section Dome with a Single Profile ................................. 9-27 Offset ..................................................................................................................... 9-28 Ears ....................................................................................................................... 9-29 Sketching the Ear Section ............................................................................... 9-31 Lip Feature............................................................................................................. 9-33 Toroidal Bend ........................................................................................................ 9-35 Spinal Bend ........................................................................................................... 9-39
Chapter 10: Creating Surface Features

Definition of a Quilt ................................................................................................ Naming a Quilt................................................................................................. Major Surface Operations ............................................................................... Displaying Quilts.............................................................................................. Blanking Quilts .......................................................................................... Assigning Colors to Quilts and Surfaces................................................... Shading Quilts .......................................................................................... Meshing Quilts and Surfaces ....................................................................
Contents - x
10-1
10-2 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-4
Defining a New Surface Feature............................................................................ 10-5 Creating a Surface Feature ............................................................................. 10-5 Surface Forms................................................................................................. 10-5 Attributes Unique to Surfaces ......................................................................... 10-6 Open or Closed Ends ............................................................................... 10-6 Joined or Unattached Sweeps.................................................................. 10-7 Creating a Flat Surface Feature ...................................................................... 10-7 Creating Surfaces by Offsetting ...................................................................... 10-8 Using Different Offset Methods ..................................................................... 10-10 Leaving Out Surfaces During the Offset Operation ................................ 10-13 Creating a Quilt by Copy...................................................................................... 10-14 Selecting Surfaces ........................................................................................ 10-14 Using the Include Command .................................................................. 10-15 Using the Exclude Command ................................................................. 10-18 Using the Redefine Command................................................................ 10-19 Excluding Loops from the Surface Selection ................................................ 10-19 Filling Loops .................................................................................................. 10-20 Creating a Fillet Quilt ........................................................................................... 10-21
Chapter 11: Creating Advanced Surface Features
11-1
Advanced Surface Types....................................................................................... 11-2 Creating a Quilt by Defining Its Boundaries........................................................... 11-2 Surface Types Created Using the Boundaries Option.............................. 11-2 Creating a Blended Surface ............................................................................ 11-3 Specifying Reference Entities................................................................... 11-5 Using Antitangent Curves as Surface Boundaries.................................... 11-7 Defining Boundary Conditions .................................................................. 11-9 Specifying Blend Control Points ............................................................. 11-12 Defining the Boundary Influence Element .............................................. 11-15 Defining the Advanced Element ............................................................. 11-18 Modifying the Surface Shape by Stretching............................................ 11-20 Creating a Conic Surface .............................................................................. 11-21 Creating an Approximate Blend Surface ....................................................... 11-22 N-Sided Surface ............................................................................................ 11-24 Creating Quilts with the TangentToSrf Option ..................................................... 11-25
Chapter 12: Working with Quilts

Merging Quilts........................................................................................................ Parental Hierarchy of Quilts ............................................................................ Adding Rounds on Surface Edges......................................................................... Trimming Surfaces of Quilts .................................................................................. Using Form Options ........................................................................................
12-1
12-2 12-3 12-5 12-5 12-6
Contents - xi
Using Existing Surfaces .................................................................................. 12-6 Trimming with the Use Curves Option............................................................. 12-7 Trimming with the Vertex Round Option ......................................................... 12-8 Trimming by Using Silhouette Edges .............................................................. 12-9 Extending Surfaces of Quilts ............................................................................... 12-10 Extending a Quilt with the Same Srf Option .................................................. 12-12 Creating a Boundary Blend Extension .......................................................... 12-17 Extending a Quilt with the Tangent Srf Option .............................................. 12-17 Extending a Quilt with the Along Dir Option .................................................. 12-19 Obtaining Information on Extension Parameters........................................... 12-20 Transforming Quilts ............................................................................................. 12-21 Creating Draft Offsets .......................................................................................... 12-22 Creating Solid Geometry Using Quilts ................................................................. 12-26 Surface Replacement.................................................................................... 12-27 Restrictions and Requirements............................................................... 12-27 Creating a Replace Feature .......................................................................... 12-28 Deleting a Replace Feature........................................................................... 12-29 Surface Patching ........................................................................................... 12-29 Using Surfaces to Create Solid Features ...................................................... 12-30 Creating Solid Protrusions and Cuts....................................................... 12-30 Creating Thin Protrusions and Cuts........................................................ 12-34 Retrieving Pro/DESIGNER Data.......................................................................... 12-36
Chapter 13: Freeform Manipulation
13-1
Creating Freeform Features .................................................................................. 13-2 Solid Tweak Freeform Features ...................................................................... 13-2 Using the Existing Surface Boundary ....................................................... 13-3 Sketching a Boundary Region .................................................................. 13-3 New Freeform Surfaces .................................................................................. 13-4 Manipulating Freeform Features............................................................................ 13-4 Using the SetupDisplay Option ....................................................................... 13-5 Using the Control Poly Option ......................................................................... 13-7 Setting the Poly Motion Region ................................................................ 13-8 Moving Control Points............................................................................. 13-10 Previewing a Modified Surface ............................................................... 13-12 Redefining the Surface Grid ................................................................... 13-12
Chapter 14: Patterning Features

About Patterns ....................................................................................................... Pattern Types ........................................................................................................ Pattern Options ............................................................................................... Identical Patterns ......................................................................................
Contents - xii
14-1
14-2 14-3 14-3 14-4
Varying Patterns ....................................................................................... 14-4 General Patterns....................................................................................... 14-5 Dimension Patterns ............................................................................................... 14-6 Creating a Dimension Pattern ......................................................................... 14-7 Rotational Patterns.......................................................................................... 14-8 Rotational Patterns of Holes and Shafts................................................... 14-8 Rotational Patterns of Sketched Features ................................................ 14-9 Creating an Angular Reference .............................................................. 14-11 Patterning Datum Axes ................................................................................. 14-12 Varying the Spacing and Direction of Instances ........................................... 14-12 Varying the Location and Size of Instances............................................ 14-13 Pattern Increment Relations.......................................................................... 14-13 Example Pattern Using MEMB_V in a Relation...................................... 14-15 Example Pattern Using MEMB_V and MEMB_I ..................................... 14-17 Tips for Creating Dimension Patterns ........................................................... 14-18 Reference Patterns.............................................................................................. 14-19 Modifying Patterns ............................................................................................... 14-19 Pattern Relations........................................................................................... 14-20 Reducing a Pattern to a Single Feature ........................................................ 14-21 Deleting a Pattern ......................................................................................... 14-21 Restoring Pattern Relations .......................................................................... 14-21 Restoring Pattern Dimensions in the Backup Model .............................. 14-22 Table-Driven Patterns.......................................................................................... 14-23 Modifying Table-Driven Patterns ................................................................... 14-25 Variations of a Pattern Driven by the Same Dimensions .............................. 14-26 Pattern Table Example.................................................................................. 14-28
Chapter 15: Copying Features
15-1
Feature Copying Terminology and Uses ............................................................... 15-2 Copying Features .................................................................................................. 15-3 The Copy Feature Menu ................................................................................. 15-3 Rules to Remember ........................................................................................ 15-4 Using the Copy Command in Assembly Mode................................................ 15-5 Copying Features by Using Placement References ....................................... 15-5 Copying Features Using New References................................................ 15-6 Copying Features with the FromDifModel and FromDifVers Options....... 15-6 Copying Features by Mirror............................................................................. 15-8 Copying Features by Moving with Rotation and Translation ......................... 15-10 Copying Features by Selection ..................................................................... 15-11 Making Dependent Copied Features Independent ....................................... 15-11 User-Defined Features ........................................................................................ 15-12
Contents - xiii
Required Information for UDFs ..................................................................... Restrictions on UDFs .............................................................................. Dimension Types .................................................................................... Creating a UDF ............................................................................................. Defining Optional Elements .................................................................... Example for Creating a UDF ......................................................................... DBMS Functions with UDFs.......................................................................... UDF Library Directory.................................................................................... Placing a UDF...................................................................................................... Types of Group Created from a UDF ............................................................ Changing the Group Type ...................................................................... Procedure for Placing a UDF in a Model....................................................... Redefining the References Element.............................................................. Defining Skipped References........................................................................ Failed Regeneration ...................................................................................... Feature and Dimension Names in a Group................................................... Local Groups ....................................................................................................... Operations on a Group ........................................................................................ Selecting a Group by Name .......................................................................... Replacing a Group ........................................................................................ Replacement Procedure ......................................................................... Replacement Conditions......................................................................... Deleting a Replacement Group .............................................................. Patterning a Group ........................................................................................ Using the Group Menu............................................................................ Rules to Remember ................................................................................ Mirroring the Model..............................................................................................
15-12 15-14 15-14 15-15 15-17 15-21 15-24 15-25 15-25 15-25 15-26 15-26 15-29 15-30 15-31 15-32 15-32 15-33 15-34 15-34 15-35 15-35 15-36 15-36 15-37 15-38 15-39
Chapter 16: Modifying the Part

Read-Only Features .............................................................................................. Modifying Dimensions............................................................................................ Modifying Dimension Values ........................................................................... Modifying the Number of Decimal Places of Dimensions................................ Modifying Tolerance Values ............................................................................ Adding Text to a Dimension ............................................................................ Modifying Dimension Symbols ........................................................................ Making Copied Feature Dimensions Independent .......................................... Modifying the Dimension Format..................................................................... Modifying Dimension Locations....................................................................... Moving Dimension Text and Datum Name Text.............................................. Switching Dimension Arrowheads...................................................................
16-1
16-2 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-5 16-5 16-6 16-6 16-7 16-8 16-8 16-9
Contents - xiv
Modifying Points in a Datum Point Array ............................................................... 16-9 Modifying Features .............................................................................................. 16-11 Modifying Feature Names ............................................................................. 16-11 Modifying Features with Multiple Sections .................................................... 16-12 Modifying Merged and Cutout Reference Part .............................................. 16-12 Modifying the Line Style of a Datum Curve ................................................... 16-13 Redefining Features ............................................................................................ 16-14 Redefining Features with Elements .............................................................. 16-15 Redefining Features with No Elements ......................................................... 16-15 Redefining Patterns....................................................................................... 16-16 Redefining Sections ...................................................................................... 16-18 Replacing Section Entities ...................................................................... 16-18 Redefining Text Sections........................................................................ 16-19 Adding or Replacing Sections in Blends................................................. 16-19 Redefining Dimensioning Schemes .............................................................. 16-22 Side Effects of Modifying Schemes ........................................................ 16-23 Redefining Imported Geometry ..................................................................... 16-23 Redefining Merged Surface Features ........................................................... 16-24 Redefining Merged and Cutout Features ...................................................... 16-24 Redefining Datum Features................................................................................. 16-25 Datum Points................................................................................................. 16-25 Datum Planes................................................................................................ 16-25 Coordinate Systems ...................................................................................... 16-26 Datum Curves from File ................................................................................ 16-26 Creating New Curves.............................................................................. 16-27 Modifying Imported Curves..................................................................... 16-27 Adjusting the Curve ................................................................................ 16-29 Splitting a Curve ..................................................................................... 16-31 Trimming or Extending a Curve .............................................................. 16-31 Merging Curves ...................................................................................... 16-32 Composite Curves......................................................................................... 16-33 Graphs .......................................................................................................... 16-34 Inserting Features................................................................................................ 16-34 Reordering Features............................................................................................ 16-35 Suppressing and Resuming Features ................................................................. 16-36 Suppressing Features ................................................................................... 16-37 Resuming Features ....................................................................................... 16-38 Deleting Features ................................................................................................ 16-39 Deleting Suppressed Features...................................................................... 16-39 Side Effects of Deleting Features.................................................................. 16-39
Contents - xv
Rerouting Features .............................................................................................. Rerouting Features and Replacing References ............................................ Simplified Representations .................................................................................. Creating a Simplified Representation............................................................ Using the Features Option ...................................................................... Using the Model Tree to Edit a Simplified Representation ..................... Using the Work Region Option ............................................................... Using the Surfaces Option ...................................................................... Using the Accelerate Option ................................................................... Creating a Geometric Snapshot ............................................................. Erasing a Simplified Representation ............................................................. Changing Part Accuracy ...................................................................................... Modifying the Part Accuracy.......................................................................... Overriding the Lower Limit ............................................................................ Working with Absolute and Relative Accuracy .............................................. Specifying Relative Accuracy ................................................................. Specifying Absolute Accuracy ................................................................
16-40 16-41 16-42 16-43 16-45 16-47 16-48 16-49 16-49 16-50 16-50 16-51 16-52 16-52 16-52 16-53 16-53
Chapter 17: Regenerating the Part
17-1
Resolving Feature Failures.................................................................................... 17-2 Resolving Feature Failures During Creation/Redefinition ............................... 17-2 Using the Feat Failed Menu ............................................................................ 17-2 Working in the Resolve Environment........................................................ 17-3 Using the Resolve Feat Menu .................................................................. 17-4 Relation Constraint Violation ........................................................................... 17-8 Reducing the Regeneration Time .......................................................................... 17-8 Regeneration Information ...................................................................................... 17-9 Geometry Checking ............................................................................................. 17-10 Misalignment Example .................................................................................. 17-11
Appendixes
Appendix A: Sketcher with Intent Manager A-1
About Sketcher Mode .............................................................................................. A-2 Entering Sketcher Mode.................................................................................... A-2 Using Sketcher with Intent Manager ................................................................. A-2 Read Me File ..................................................................................................... A-2 Terminology in Sketcher.................................................................................... A-3 Basic Steps for Creating a Section.................................................................... A-4 Using Shortcuts with the Right Mouse Button ................................................... A-5 Using the Toolbar Icons .................................................................................... A-5 Saving a Section ............................................................................................... A-5
Contents - xvi Part Modeling Users Guide
Exiting Sketcher Mode ...................................................................................... A-6 Creating Geometry in Sketcher Mode ..................................................................... A-6 Drafting Commands .......................................................................................... A-7 Sketching Lines ................................................................................................. A-7 Sketching a Rectangle ...................................................................................... A-8 Sketching an Arc ............................................................................................... A-8 Fillet Arc...................................................................................................... A-9 Sketching a Circle ............................................................................................. A-9 Creating Advanced Geometry ......................................................................... A-10 Sketching a Conic..................................................................................... A-11 Adding a Coordinate System .................................................................... A-11 Sketching an Elliptic Fillet ......................................................................... A-12 Sketching a Spline .................................................................................... A-12 Using Sketcher Text ................................................................................. A-15 Creating an Axis in Sketcher .................................................................... A-16 Sketcher Constraints ............................................................................................. A-16 Graphic Display of Constraints........................................................................ A-17 Constraints for the Entities Created with Use Edge or Offset Edge ......... A-18 Turning the Display of Constraints On or Off .................................................. A-18 Strengthening a Constraint ............................................................................. A-18 Creating Constraints ....................................................................................... A-19 Obtaining Information About a Constraint ....................................................... A-20 Deleting a Constraint....................................................................................... A-20 Conflict Resolution .......................................................................................... A-20 Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry ......................................................................... A-21 Strengthening Weak Dimensions .................................................................... A-21 Deleting Weak Dimensions ............................................................................. A-21 Turning the Display of Dimensions On or Off.................................................. A-22 Relations ......................................................................................................... A-22 Fractions ......................................................................................................... A-22 Adding Dimensions ......................................................................................... A-22 Different Types of Dimension ................................................................... A-22 Linear Dimensions .................................................................................... A-23 Diameter Dimensions ............................................................................... A-23 Radial Dimensions .......................................................................................... A-25 Angular Dimensions ........................................................................................ A-25 Spline Dimensions .......................................................................................... A-26 Linear Dimensions .................................................................................... A-27 Tangency Dimensions .............................................................................. A-27 Radius-of-Curvature Dimensions.............................................................. A-27
Contents - xvii
Dimensioning Interpolation Points ............................................................ A-28 Associating a Spline to a Coordinate System ........................................... A-28 Conic Dimensions ........................................................................................... A-28 The rho Dimension ................................................................................... A-29 The Three-Point Dimension ...................................................................... A-30 Dimensioning an Elliptic Fillet.......................................................................... A-31 Perimeter Dimension....................................................................................... A-31 Reference Dimensions .................................................................................... A-33 Baseline (Ordinate) Dimensions...................................................................... A-33 Replacing a Dimension ................................................................................... A-34 Adding Relations to a Section ......................................................................... A-35 Modifying Dimension Values ................................................................................. A-35 Negative Dimensions ...................................................................................... A-36 Updating Geometry................................................................................................ A-36 Restoring Dimensions ..................................................................................... A-36 Modifying a Section ............................................................................................... A-37 Scaling a Dimension........................................................................................ A-37 Modifying a Section by Dragging..................................................................... A-38 Using the Drag Dim Val Option................................................................. A-38 Using the Drag Entity Option .................................................................... A-39 Using the Drag Vertex Option ................................................................... A-39 Setting an Anchor Point................................................................................... A-39 Modifying a Spline ........................................................................................... A-40 Displaying Spline Curvature ..................................................................... A-40 Modifying the Spline Points Location ........................................................ A-41 Modifying the Tangency of a Spline.......................................................... A-42 Modifying the Spline by Its Coordinates ................................................... A-43 Modifying the Number of Points on a Spline............................................. A-45 Modifying Text Entities .................................................................................... A-46 Using the Dialog Box to Modify the Text................................................... A-46 Moving Entities ...................................................................................................... A-47 Deleting Entities..................................................................................................... A-48 Undoing Sketcher Operations................................................................................ A-49 Manipulating Sketcher Geometry .......................................................................... A-49 Intersecting Two Entities ................................................................................. A-49 Trimming Entities............................................................................................. A-50 Trimming to a Bounding Entity.................................................................. A-50 Trimming to a Specific Length .................................................................. A-51 Trimming an Entity by an Increment ......................................................... A-52 Trimming Two Entities to Each Other ....................................................... A-52
Contents - xviii
Splitting or Trimming Entities with Dimensions......................................... Dividing Entities............................................................................................... Mirroring Geometry ......................................................................................... Moving Sketcher Entities................................................................................. Dragging Individual Entities ...................................................................... Dragging Multiple Entities ......................................................................... Rotating Entities........................................................................................ Moving Dimensions .................................................................................. Moving a Spline Created with the Control Poly Option ................................... The Right Mouse Menu .................................................................................. Copying Imported Drawings ............................................................................ Section Geometry Information ............................................................................... Setting the Sketcher Environment Options............................................................ Using the Grid ................................................................................................. Modifying the Grid ........................................................................................... Setting the Grid Snap ...................................................................................... Sketcher Color ................................................................................................ Dimension Precision ....................................................................................... Resolving Problems in Sketches ........................................................................... Inappropriate Sections .................................................................................... Sketcher Accuracy .......................................................................................... Sketcher Hints ....................................................................................................... Shortcut for Sketching Lines and Tangent Arcs .............................................. Using Points to Locate Fillets and Arcs........................................................... Using Move in Conjunction with Locking Dimensions .....................................
A-52 A-52 A-53 A-54 A-54 A-55 A-55 A-55 A-55 A-56 A-57 A-57 A-59 A-60 A-60 A-62 A-62 A-62 A-62 A-63 A-63 A-63 A-64 A-64 A-64
Appendix B: Sketching on a Model with Intent Manager
B-1
Creating Feature Sections ....................................................................................... B-2 Basic Steps for Creating a Section on the Model.............................................. B-3 Entering the Sketcher Environment .................................................................. B-3 Setting Up the Sketching Plane .................................................................. B-4 Orienting the Sketching Plane .................................................................... B-5 Sketching in 3-D Orientation ............................................................................. B-5 Defining Model References for a Section.......................................................... B-6 Sketching Section Geometry ................................................................................... B-7 Query Alignment ............................................................................................... B-7 Creating Sketcher Geometry from Model Geometry ......................................... B-7 The Use Edge Option ................................................................................. B-7 The Offset Edge Option ............................................................................ B-10 Using Offset Edge to Offset a Loop .......................................................... B-14 The Pick Curve Option.............................................................................. B-15
Contents - xix
Creating Reference Entities by Intersection .................................................... B-15 Retrieving an Existing Section ............................................................................... B-15 Dimensioning a Section to a Part .......................................................................... B-17 Tips for Dimensioning to Part Edges............................................................... B-18 Known Dimensions.......................................................................................... B-19 Working in the Sketcher Environment ................................................................... B-20 Sketcher Grid .................................................................................................. B-20 Leaving Sketcher with an Incomplete Section ....................................................... B-21
Index
Contents - xx
About This Guide
About This Guide explains the contents of this manual and the conventions used in it. Topic Purpose Audience Contents Prerequisites Documentation Software Product Concerns and Documentation Comments Page ii ii ii iii iii v
About This Guide - i
Purpose
The manual is designed with two purposes in mind: To help you learn how to create parts with Pro/ENGINEER. To describe the more advanced modeling and surface manipulation techniques.
Audience
This guide is intended for a broad range of Pro/ENGINEER users designers, mechanical engineers, and project managers. This manual is useful to all Pro/ENGINEER users.
Contents
This manual contains the following chapters: Starting Out in Part ModeDescribes how to start creating a part with Pro/ENGINEER. SketcherDescribes how to create sketches in a stand-alone Sketcher mode. DatumsDescribes how to create datum features: datum planes, datum points, datum curves, datum axes, coordinates features, graphs, evaluate features. Sketching on a ModelDescribes how to create 3-D sections in the process of feature creation. Feature Creation BasicsDescribes how to create extruded and revolved protrusions. Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced FeaturesDescribes how to create sweeps, blends, and advanced features. Construction FeaturesDescribes how to create construction features, such as holes, slots, and cuts. RoundsDescribes how to add rounds to part geometry. Tweak FeaturesDescribes how to create tweak features, such as draft, local push, and section dome. Creating Surface FeaturesDescribes how to create surface features.
ii - About This Guide
Creating Advanced Surface FeaturesDescribes how to create advanced surface features. Working with QuiltsDescribes operations that you can perform on quilts. Freeform ManipulationDescribes how to dynamically manipulate a surface of a part or quilt. Patterning FeaturesDescribes how to pattern features. Copying FeaturesDescribes how to create and place groups of features, and how to copy features. Modifying the PartDescribes how to modify and redefine the part. Regenerating the PartDescribes how to regenerate the part and resolve regeneration problems.
About This Guide
Prerequisites
You should be familiar with your workstation and have some knowledge of your operating system.
Documentation
The documentation is divided into several manuals that compose a comprehensive guide to Pro/ENGINEER. Each manual deals with a major function of the software; you can usually determine which manual you need by reading the title. If not, each book has a corresponding index, and there is also a Master Indices manual that indexes the entire Pro/ENGINEER documentation family. For a complete list of Pro/ENGINEER user guides, see Chapter 1 of Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
About This Guide - iii
Conventions
The following table lists conventions and terms used throughout this book. Convention Description Enhancements and other changes that are new this release are documented beside the "New for 20" icon. Look for this icon in the margins of Release 20.0 books.
SMALLCAPS
Pro/ENGINEER-type menu name (for example, PART). Windows-type menu name or menu or dialog box option (for example, View), or utility (for example, promonitor). Code samples appear in courier font like this. Key names appear in smallcaps (for example, ENTER). Important information appears in italics like this. Highlight a menu option by placing the arrow cursor on the option, and pressing the left mouse button. A synonym for choose as above, select also describes the actions of selecting elements on a model, and checking boxes. An element describes redefinable characteristics of a feature in a model. An environment in Pro/ENGINEER in which you can perform a group of closely related functions (Drawing, for example). A part, subassembly or top level assembly. The selected part of the model you view and manipulate. An item in a menu or an entry in a configuration file or a setup file.
Boldface
Monospace (Courier)
SMALLCAPS
Emphasis Choose
Select
Element Mode
Model Object Option
iv - About This Guide
Notes: About This Guide Important information that should not be overlooked appears in notes like this. All references to mouse clicks assume the use of a right-handed mouse.
Software Product Concerns and Documentation Comments

For resources and services to help you with PTC software products, see the PTC Customer Service Guide. It includes instructions for using the World Wide Web or fax transmissions for customer support. In regard to documentation, PTC welcomes your suggestions and comments. You can send feedback in the following ways: Send comments electronically to doc_webhelp@ptc.com. Fill out and mail the PTC Documentation Survey in the customer service guide.
About This Guide - v
1
Starting Out in Part Mode
This chapter provides an overview of the part building process. Topic Setting Up the Part Creating the First Feature Adding Features Creating Incomplete Features Using the Model Tree in Part Mode Modifying Geometry and Dimensions Page 1-2 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-7
1-1
Setting Up the Part

You start the modeling process by opening a new part file, adding a set of default datum planes, and creating the first solid or surface feature. You then continue to add or remove material to achieve the desired shape by creating various construction features.
Opening a Part File

To create a new part, choose File > New. Enter the name for the new part in the New dialog box and click OK. To retrieve a part, choose File > Open and select a part file from the appropriate directory.
Setting Up Units
Before you start to create features, make sure the unit value for the part is correct by using Set Up, then Units. This is important because certain aspects of the part cannot be modified appropriately if, for example, you decide to change the units of the part from inches to centimeters. If you change the units of a part, Pro/ENGINEER automatically scales the parameters in a relation. However, any constant values used in the part might have to be changed manually.
Using Layers
You can blank datum entities, coordinate systems, and dimensions from subsequent displays by adding them to a layer and blanking that layer. Construction features (such as rounds) added to a layer are not affected when the layer is blanked. However, you can add them to a layer and then use the Suppress, Resume, or Delete option in the FEAT menu to affect all these features. For more information on using layers, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Creating a Model Grid

You can create a three-dimensional grid for the model using the PART SETUP menu. You can view this grid in Drawing mode only, where it can be displayed for a selected view or for an entire sheet.
1-2
How to Create a Model Grid 1. Choose Grid from the PART SETUP menu. 2. The system displays the MODEL GRID menu, which lists the following options: Set OriginSpecify the origin of the grid and select an existing coordinate system. If the grid currently has a set origin, you can change the origin by selecting another coordinate system. Delete GridRemove the grid. Grid SpacingSpecify a spacing different from the spacing set by the model_grid_spacing option in the configuration file. The grid spacing is measured from the coordinate system you selected when you defined the grid origin. Starting Out in Part Mode
Choose Set Origin. 3. The MODEL GRID menu displays a submenu with the Grid On and Grid Off options. The Grid On option allows you to display the grid if the model is in a valid orientation (that is, when one of the coordinate planes of the origin coordinate system is parallel to the screen). The following configuration file options allow you to control the model grid: solid_grid_neg_prefixAllows you to specify the prefix to use for negative numbers in the balloon capture of the grid. The system default symbol is -. solid_grid_num_digControls the number of decimal places displayed in the balloon capture. The system default value is 0 (that is, only integers will be displayed).
If you attempt to delete the coordinate system that acts as the grid origin, the system notifies you that doing so will clear the grid definition and asks for confirmation.
1-3
Creating the First Feature

The first feature you create in the model can be a solid, datum, or a group of features copied from your UDF library.
Creating the Initial Solid Feature

The first solid feature is the working block of material that is refined and modified until the final design. The first feature extrusions are always extruded in the positive direction (out of the screen towards you).
Creating Datums as the Base Feature

The first feature in the part can be a datum feature. Creating a set of orthogonal datum planes as the base feature is helpful when the first solid feature is going to be a sphere, toroid, or sculptured surface because it usually does not have the planar surfaces needed to reorient the model or specify sketching planes. How to Create a Datum Feature as the First Part Feature 1. Choose PART > Feature > Create > Datum. 2. Select the datum feature type from the DATUM menu: PlaneCreate a set of datum planes using options in the
MENUDTM OPT menu:
DefaultCreate three orthogonal datum planes that intersect at the default origin. If you choose this option, three datum planes with the names DTM1, DTM2, and DTM3 appear in the center of the screen at right angles to each other. OffsetCreate three orthogonal datum planes with specified offsets along the x-, y-, and z-axis. The system prompts you for the offset value for the x-direction, yand z-directions. The system assumes that the x-axis is horizontal and pointing to the right, the y-axis is vertical and pointing up, and the z-axis is normal to the screen and pointing towards you. You can specify offset = 0. The system creates three datum planes with the names DTM1, DTM2, and DTM3. The system also displays a coordinate system named DEFAULT, which is located in the center of the screen.

1-4
Coord SysCreate a default coordinate system. GraphCreate a graph to be used for relations.
Creating a User-Defined Feature as the First Feature

If you have the Pro/FEATURE module, you can create a group from your UDF library as the base feature (see Copying Features on page 15 - 3), as long as it has no references to other features. For example, you might have a UDF that is a solid feature that references two datum planes, which reference the default coordinate system (created as the base feature). All the features must then be included in the UDF to become the base feature for a new part.
Adding Features
After you have created the base feature, you can add other features. The order of creating features is important. A feature does not know anything about the features that are created later. For example, if you create a hole using the Thru All option, then add a protrusion at its bottom, the hole will not penetrate the protrusion. You can change the order in which features are regenerated using the Reorder option in the FEAT menu (see Reordering Featureson page 16 - 1). Using this example, if you reordered the protrusion before the hole, the hole would then penetrate the protrusion. For placement or dimensioning references, each feature depends on one or more of the earlier features and is considered to be the child of these features. This parent-child relationship is very important when you modify a part. When you suppress or delete a parent, the system asks what action to take for its children, including whether to suppress or delete them. Note that you cannot reorder features so the child is earlier in the feature list than the parent. However, you can modify parent-child relationships using Reroute (see Rerouting Features on page 16 - 40), or Redefine > Scheme (see Redefining Features on page 16 - 14) in the FEAT menu.
Creating Incomplete Features

For features that use the dialog user interface, you can suspend feature creation without losing data that you have already defined. This produces an incomplete feature, which you can complete later (for example, when required geometric references are available for feature definition). Because you have not finished feature creation, the system cannot generate geometry for the incomplete feature.
1-5
An incomplete feature differs from a failed feature in the following respect: it is intended to be left unfinished until the design intent is clarified or geometry it depends on becomes available. A fully defined feature cannot be made incomplete. Incomplete features are listed in the feature status column of the Model Tree as Incomplete. The following operations cannot be performed on incomplete features: Pattern Copy UDF creation Local group Reroute Modify Feature relations
To leave a feature incomplete when creating a feature, choose OK from the dialog box. When the system asks you if you want to leave the feature incomplete, choose Yes. You can exit Sketcher with an incomplete section by choosing Done from the SKETCHER menu (for more information, see Leaving Sketcher with an Incomplete Section on page 4 - 23). To finish an incomplete feature, choose Redefine and complete definition of all required elements.
Using the Model Tree in Part Mode

In Part mode, you can access some of the common feature operations through the Model Tree tool. These shortcuts enable you to do the following: Open a menu to access those feature operations which are used most frequently. To do this, select a feature in the Model Tree with the left mouse button. Press the right mouse button to open a menu. Note that the menu lists only commands that are valid for the selected feature. The menu on the right of the screen also restricts the choice of options in the menu.
1-6
Edit simplified representations of the model by excluding or including features through the Model Tree (this method is described in Using the Model Tree to Edit a Simplified Representationon page 16 - 47).
Additionally, you can use the Model Tree to create parameters and set their values (for details, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). Starting Out in Part Mode
Modifying Geometry and Dimensions

You dimension part features as you create them. After the feature is created, you can display its dimensions at any time by choosing Modify and selecting the feature. Follow these recommendations when placing dimensions: Add relations immediately after feature creation (for information on relations, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). This allows you to capture the design intent of your feature right away. For example, you can add a relation to center a slot on a particular protrusion. Place dimensions driven by relations on layers, then blank the layers. This helps you understand which dimensions are really driving the model. You can change the dim symbol to explain the function of important dimensions. For more information, see Modifying Dimension Symbols on page 16 - 6.
Fractions
When you enter a fraction dimension, you can enter it in decimal format (1.125) or as a fraction equation (1+1/8). To display dimensions as fractions, use the following configuration options: create_fraction_dimSet to yes to display all the dimensions as fractions. dim_fraction_denominatorThe only denominators allowed are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64. If you enter a decimal or fraction value that does not convert exactly to a fraction having one of these denominators, the value will be changed to the closest value. For example, entering 1+5/27 displays a value of 1-3/16.
1-7
use_major_unitsThis option is not used when you are in Sketcher mode, but controls the display of dimensions in the model. Set this to yes to display dimensions as feet-inches or meter-millimeter. For example, 25.75 can appear as 25-3/4 or 2 1-3/4. Similarly, 1024 millimeters appears as 1024 or 1m24. Millimeters are never converted to fractions.
After a dimension exists as a fraction or a decimal, you can modify the format of the dimension, as described in the Modifying the Part chapter.
Reference Dimensions
You can create reference dimensions on existing part geometry. These dimensions have the suffix REF, or are in parentheses when they are displayed. Reference dimensions are intended for information only. They have one-way associativity: you cannot modify them, but they reflect modifications made to the basic dimensions of the part. For more information on reference dimensions, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Negative Dimensions Environment

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to enter negative dimension values for sketched sections. You set the mode of operating with negative dimensions using the configuration file option show_dim_sign. The possible modes are as follows: yesOperate in a true signed dimension environment. In Part and Assembly modes, section negative dimensions are displayed with the negative sign. Negative dimensions always display the sign in Sketcher mode. When you modify a dimension, you must enter its true signed value. noDisplay all section dimensions in Part and Assembly modes as positive. This is the default value of the configuration file option. Modifying the value with a negative dimension causes the section geometry to reverse (if possible), even though its true signed value is negative (because it is displayed as positive).
1-8
2
Sketcher
Sketcher mode enables you to create sections. This chapter describes how to use stand-alone Sketcher mode. For information on sketching on a three-dimensional part, see the chapter Sketching on a Model. Topic Working in the Sketcher Environment Creating Geometry in Sketcher Mode Manipulating Sketcher Geometry Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry Adding Relations to Sections Moving Sketcher Entities Regenerating a Section Unregenerating a Sketch Modifying a Section Sketch Section Geometry Information Sketcher Hints Page 2-2 2-6 2 - 20 2 - 25 2 - 39 2 - 39 2 - 42 2 - 49 2 - 50 2 - 63 2 - 65
2-1
Working in the Sketcher Environment

Sketcher techniques are used in many areas of Pro/ENGINEER. Using Sketcher mode, you create geometry without regard for the exact relationships between parts of the sketch or the exact values of dimensions. When you regenerate the section, Pro/ENGINEER makes assumptions explicit. For example, a nearly horizontal line becomes exactly horizontal. These assumptions are displayed graphically, and are preserved through the feature dimension modification.
Using Sketcher Mode

The following basic procedure outlines how to create a section in Sketcher. How to Create a Section 1. Sketch the section geometry. Use Sketcher tools to create the section geometry. See Creating Geometry in Sketcher Mode on page 2 - 6 for more information. 2. Dimension the section. Use a dimensioning scheme that you want to see in a drawing, or that makes sense for controlling the characteristics of the section. See Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry on page 2 - 25 for more information. 3. Regenerate the section. Pro/ENGINEER analyzes the section and encodes necessary assumptions and dimensions into a parametric representation of the sketch. See Regenerating a Section on page 2 - 42 for more information. 4. Add section relations. Add relations to control the behavior of your section. See Adding Relations to Sections on page 2 - 39 for more information.
Using the Toolbar Icons

Once you enter Sketcher, the toolbar displays the icons for the Disp Const, Disp Verts, and Grid On/Off options.
2-2
Saving a Section
To save the section before exiting Sketcher, choose File, Save or select the Save icon from the toolbar. The system creates a file with the extension .sec.
Restarting a Sketch
To restart a sketch without quitting, delete everything from the screen with the Delete All option in the SKETCHER menu, and then start sketching again. For more information on the Delete All option, see Deleting Entities on page 2 - 62.
Sketcher Color
Sketcher The default color for section geometry is cyan. You can change this color by using the configuration file option system_section_color. You can also change the color by selecting Utilities > Colors > System. The new color applies to both new and modified geometry.
Setting the Sketcher Environment Options

The following procedure explains how to set the Sketcher environment. How to Set the Sketcher Environment Options 1. Choose Sec Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Sec Environ from the SEC TOOLS menu. 3. The SEC ENVIRON menu lists the following options: Disp Verts Toggle the display of vertices by placing or removing a checkmark. You can preset the display of vertices by setting the configuration option sketcher_display_vertices. Disp ConstrToggle the display of constraints by placing or removing a checkmark. You can preset the display of constraints by setting the configuration option sketcher_display_constraints. For more information on constraint display, see Sketcher Constraints on page 2 - 42. Disp DimsToggle the display of dimensions by placing or removing a checkmark. GridAccess the grid options. For details, see the following section.
Sketcher
2-3
Num DigitsChange the number of decimal places for dimensions you will enter. For more information, see Dimension Precision on page 2 - 25. on page 2 - 25. AccuracyChange Sketcher accuracy. For more information, see Sketcher Accuracy on page 2 - 48.
Using the Grid

Sketcher mode supports both Cartesian and polar grids. When you first enter Sketcher mode, the system displays a Cartesian grid. Before beginning the sketch, the grid can be one of two sizes: For the first feature section of a part and for auxiliary sketches such as blind holes, the grid has a spacing equal to one model unit. For example, sketching a box 4x6 grid spaces creates a box measuring 4x6 units. Additional section sketches for a model use a grid for reference only. You can modify this grid spacing, but the first grid displayed is scaled for the current part size and does not have a value of one unit between grid lines.
Modifying the Grid

You can modify the grid spacing to suit the intended size of your sketch, making it easier to adjust to actual dimension values when you are done. To modify the grid, use the command sequence Sec Tools, Sec Environ, Grid, and choose an option from the MODIFY GRID menu. The MODIFY GRID menu lists the following options: Grid On/OffToggle the display of the grid on or off. TypeModify the type of the grid. OriginModify the origin of the grid. ParamsModify the parameters of the grid.
The following sections describe these options in more detail. Displaying the Grid To toggle the display of the grid, choose Grid On/Off from the MODIFY GRID menu. Note that this does not affect the snapping of sketched entities to grid intersections. See Setting the Grid Snap on page 2 - 6 for information on turning the grid snap on or off.
2-4
Modifying the Type of Grid To change the type of grid being used, choose Type from the MODIFY GRID menu, then choose one of the GRID TYPE menu options: CartesianUse a Cartesian grid. PolarUse a polar grid.
Moving the Grid Origin You can set the grid intersection at the following locations: Sketched entity endpoint and center Sketched point and coordinate system Sketcher Datum point and coordinate system Edge or curve vertex
To do so, choose Origin from the MODIFY GRID menu. Select the appropriate geometry to locate the origin. Modifying the Grid Spacing The Params option allows you to modify the grid spacing and angle. You can use this option when you first start a sketch (before any geometry has been created) to control the approximate size of the section. For example, if you have a blank sketch and a 20x17 Cartesian grid in your window, and you change the X and Y spacing from 1.0 to 0.5, instead of seeing a 40x34 grid, you will have decreased the size of the sketching area to 10 x8.5 units. If you have sketched at least one entity, when you modify the grid spacing the grid spacing changes while the sketched entities remain unchanged. To modify the grid spacing or angle, choose Params from the
MODIFY GRID menu. The options available depend on the grid type.
For a Cartesian grid, the available options are as follows: X&Y SpacingSet the spacing in both the X- and Ydirections to the same value. X SpacingSet the X-direction spacing only. Y SpacingSet the Y-direction spacing only. AngleModify the angle between the horizontal and the X-direction grid.
Sketcher
2-5
For a polar grid, the available options are as follows: Ang SpacingSet the angular spacing between radial lines. The specified value must divide evenly into 360. Num LinesSet the number of radial lines. The angular spacing is 360 divided by the number of lines. Rad SpacingModify the spacing of the circular grid. AngleModify the angle between the horizontal and the 0 degree radial line.
Setting the Grid Snap

With grid snapping turned on, each pick of the mouse causes Pro/ENGINEER to snap a point to the intersection of grid lines. By default, grid snapping is turned off. To enable grid snapping, choose the Grid Snap option from the ENVIRONMENT menu. You can also turn on grid snapping by default by setting the grid_snap configuration option to yes.
Creating Geometry in Sketcher Mode

Choose Sketch from the SKETCHER menu to start sketching geometry. Except for entities created by using the Mouse Sketch command, you create all geometry by using the left mouse button. Using the middle mouse button to abort the process will allow you to restart the same creation process.
Using the Mouse to Sketch Geometry

You can use the mouse to directly sketch simple lines, circles, and arcs. In addition, you can use specific options to create various kinds of entities. How to Set up the Mouse for Sketching 1. Choose Sketch from the SKETCHER menu. The GEOMETRY menu appears. 2. Choose the Mouse Sketch option. As described in the following sections, the three mouse buttons can be used to create lines (left button) and circles (middle button) anywhere in the sketch, as well as arcs (right button) that begin on an endpoint of existing geometry.
2-6
How to Sketch a Line 1. Click the left mouse button at the location where you want to start the line. A red rubberband line appears, attached to the cursor. 2. Click the left mouse button at the location where you want the line to end. Pro/ENGINEER creates a line between the two points and starts another rubberband line. 3. Repeat Step 2 until all the lines have been created. 4. Click the middle mouse button to end line creation. The rubberband line disappears.
How to Sketch a Circle Sketcher 1. Click the middle mouse button at the desired location for the center point. A red rubberband circle appears, centered on this point and attached to the cursor. 2. To size the circle, move the mouse away from the centerpoint. 3. To complete the circle, use the middle mouse button. Use the left mouse button to abort the circle.
How to Sketch an Arc 1. Click the right mouse button on the endpoint of an existing entity. A red rubberband arc appears, attached to the cursor at its other end. The arc will be tangent to the existing entity. 2. To size the arc, move the mouse away from the first pick. 3. To complete the arc, use the right mouse button. Use the middle mouse button to abort the arc.
How to Sketch a Point 1. Choose Sketch from the SKETCHER menu and Point from the GEOMETRY menu. 2. Pick where you want to place the point. The system displays the point. You can add points to a sketch to make it easier to dimension section geometry. Points can be sketched on geometry or away from it. However, points placed off geometry are considered reference points. You can also select points for creating splines.
Sketcher
2-7
When you add points to a sketch, unless their location is implicitly defined, they must be dimensioned. A point is implicitly defined when it is placed at the end of a line, spline, or arc, at the center of arcs and circles, or at the intersection of two entities.
Sketching Lines with the Line Option

You can create two types of lines: geometry lines and centerlines. Geometry lines are used to create feature geometry. Centerlines are used to define the axis of revolution of a revolved feature, to define a line of symmetry within a section, or to create construction lines. Centerlines are not used to create feature geometry. Note: You must dimension the orientation of angled centerlines. How to Sketch Lines With the Line Option 1. Choose Line from the GEOMETRY menu. The system displays the LINE TYPE menu. 2. Choose Geometry or Centerline from the top portion of the menu to indicate the type of line. 3. Choose a command from the bottom portion of the menu to indicate how you want to create the line. The possible options are as follows: 2 PointsCreate a line by picking the start and end points. Geometry lines created using this option are automatically chained together. ParallelPick an existing line to determine the direction of the new line, then pick the start and end points. For a centerline, only a single pick is needed to determine the parallel placement of the linePro/ENGINEER selects the ends of the centerline to fit model or section outlines. PerpendicularPick an existing line to determine the direction of the new line, then pick the start and end points. For a centerline, only a single pick is needed to determine the perpendicular placement of the linePro/ENGINEER selects the ends of the centerline to fit model or section outlines.
2-8
TangentPick an endpoint of an arc or spline to start the new line and determine its direction, then pick the end point of the line. For a centerline, only a single pick is needed to determine the tangent placement of the linePro/ENGINEER selects the ends of the centerline to fit model or section outlines. 2 TangentPick two arcs, splines, or circles to determine the direction of the new line. Pro/ENGINEER creates the line between the selected entities, and splits the entities at the tangency points. A 2 Tangent line created to construction entities will not split the entity. Similarly, a 2 Tangent centerline, created as a 2 Tangent line defined using two circles, will not split the circles. Pnt/TangentPick a point anywhere in the current section, then pick an arc, spline, or circle to which the line must be tangent. Pro/ENGINEER creates the line. HorizontalCreate a line that is horizontal, relative to the orientation of the section. For a geometry line, the endpoint is automatically the start point of a chained vertical line. For a centerline, only a single pick is needed to determine the vertical location of the line. VerticalCreate a line that is vertical, relative to the orientation of the section. For a geometry line, the endpoint is automatically the start point of a chained horizontal line. For a centerline, only a single pick is needed to determine the horizontal location of the line. Sketcher
Note: You can continue to create lines that are parallel or perpendicular to a specified reference line without reselecting the Parallel or Perpendicular command. To choose a new reference line, press the middle mouse button and pick the new reference line. When you create a tangent line, if more than one tangency exists for the entity selected, such as the spline in the following figure, the system creates the line to the tangency closest to your pick point.
Sketcher
2-9
Tangent Line to a Spline and Circle
Pick points
If two lines are drawn tangent to the same entity, that entity will be divided at the tangency points so you can delete any unwanted segments.
Sketching a Rectangle
You can create rectangles with the Rectangle option in the GEOMETRY menu. This option allows you to create a rectangle with vertical and horizontal sides by selecting the start and end points of a diagonal. How to Sketch a Rectangle 1. Choose Rectangle from the GEOMETRY menu. 2. Select the start point by clicking with the left mouse button at the desired location in the Sketcher window. 3. To size the rectangle, drag the endpoint of the diagonal. 4. To accept the rectangle, click the left mouse button. Click the middle mouse button to abort the process. The four lines are independent, as if you had sketched them separately. The lines can be individually aligned, moved, trimmed, dimensioned, and so on.
2 - 10
Sketching an Arc
The following procedure explains how to create an arc with the Arc option. How to Sketch an Arc 1. Choose Arc from the GEOMETRY menu. The the ARC TYPE menu appears. 2. Choose one of the following options from the ARC TYPE menu: Tangent EndThis is the same as creating an arc using Mouse Sketch, except you must use the left mouse button. Pick an end of an existing entity to determine tangency, then pick a location to place the other endpoint of the arc. Sketcher ConcentricPick an existing circle or arc as a reference, then pick the start and end point of the new arc. As you create the arc, the system displays a radial line through the center of the arc to help you align the endpoint. 3 TangentSelect three entities that the new arc will be tangent to, then create the arc in the same direction as the reference picks. FilletPick two entities between which to create a tangent arc. See Fillet Arcs on page 2 - 11 for more information. Ctr/EndsPick the center point of the arc, then pick the endpoints of the arc. 3 PointPick the endpoints of the arc, then pick a point on the arc.
Fillet Arcs
Fillets create a rounded intersection between any two entities. When a fillet is inserted between two entities, the two entities are automatically divided at the fillet tangency points. If the fillet is between two non-parallel lines, the lines are automatically trimmed to the fillet. If the fillet is between any other entities, the entities will be divided and the unwanted sections must be deleted manually. You cannot create a fillet arc between the following: Parallel lines A centerline and another entity
Sketcher
2 - 11
Note: Filleting entities with dimensions may result in losing dimensions. For more information, see Dividing Entities on page 2 - 20. How to Create a Fillet Arc Between Two Lines 1. Choose Fillet from the ARC TYPE menu. 2. Pick the first line using the left mouse button. 3. Pick the second line using the left mouse button. Pro/ENGINEER creates the fillet from the selected point that is closest to the intersection point of the two lines, and trims the lines to the intersection points. You can also create fillets between entities other than two lines, as shown in the following figure. Fillets Between Different Entities
Division points

Resulting geometry after deleting entities between division points
Fillets between lines, splines, and circles
Filleting between two arcs, circles, or splines can result in any number of fillets. The size and location of the fillet depends on the pick locations. The letter pairs in the diagram shown in the following figure illustrate the approximate pick locations to achieve certain concave or convex variations in the fillets.
2 - 12
Fillets Between Two Circles d a b c a d
b c Sketcher
Sketching Circles
You can create two types of circles: geometry circles and construction circles. Geometry circles are used to create feature geometry. Construction circles are used as guides or references and are not used to create feature geometry. Like geometry entities, construction circles are displayed in cyan. However, construction entities appear in phantom line style. How to Sketch Circles 1. Choose Circle from the GEOMETRY menu. The system displays the CIRCLE TYPE menu. 2. Choose Geometry or Construction from the top portion of the menu to determine the circle type. 3. Choose a command from the bottom portion of the menu to indicate how you want to create the circle.pickpick The possible options are as follows: Center/PointThis is the same as creating a circle using Mouse Sketch, except you must use the left mouse button. ConcentricPick a reference circle or arc, then a point on the radius of the new circle. 3 TangentCreate a circle tangent to three reference entities. FilletCreate a circle tangent to two specified entities. 3 PointPick three points that lie on the circle.
Sketcher
2 - 13
Sketching Advanced Geometry

To sketch advanced geometry, choose the Adv Geometry option from the GEOMETRY menu. The ADV GEOMETRY menu has the following options: ConicSketch conic splines. Coord SysAdd a coordinate system to the sketch. SplineSketch a spline. Elliptic FilletCreate an elliptic arc. TextInclude a text entry in the sketch. Axis PointCreate an axis that is normal to the sketching plane and goes through the pick point (available only in 3-D Sketcher). For information, see Creating an Axis in Sketcher on page Appendix A - 16. Blend VertexSketch blended features with unequal numbers of segments in their sections.
The following sections describe these options in detail.
Conics
The Conic option allows you to sketch a conic (see the following figure). Conic
How to Create a Conic 1. Choose Conic from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. 2. Pick the first endpoint for the conic using the left mouse button. 3. Pick the second endpoint for the conic using the left mouse button. 4. Pick the location for the shoulder using the left mouse button. The conic will rubberband as you do this. To abort the conic, use the middle mouse button.
2 - 14
See Conic Dimensions on page 2 - 32 for information on dimensioning conics. All conics must be able to determine their end tangency angles. In this way, conics are like splines with both end tangencies set (see Splines on page 2 - 15). This tangency angle can come from a dimension, an adjacent entity (including another conic), or a centerline.
Coordinate Systems
You can add coordinate systems to sections to be used with the following: SplinesYou can dimension splines to a coordinate system. This allows you to modify the spline points by specifying the X-, Y-, and Z-axis coordinates, with respect to the coordinate system. ReferenceYou can add coordinate systems to any sketch to aid dimensioning. Blend feature section sketchesUsed to establish the relative origin for each of the sections used for blends.
Sketcher
How to Add a Coordinate System to a Sketch 1. Choose Coord Sys from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. 2. Pick a location to locate the coordinate system. Note: As with points, coordinate systems must be dimensioned within a sketch, unless they are placed at the endpoint of a line, spline, or arc, or at the center of an arc or circle.
Splines
Splines are curves that smoothly pass through any number of intermediate points. The tangency angle and radius of curvature can be set at the ends of a spline to control its shape further.
Sketcher
2 - 15
Spline Curve
Intermediate points
Endpoint
You can define spline tangency for the endpoints before you create the spline using the Tangency menu options, or by modifying the spline after it is sketched. If the spline is to be tangent to other geometry, the sketched geometry does not have to be present when you first sketch the spline. However, when the section is regenerated, either adjacent entity or angular dimensions must exist. The tangency to the sketched entities will not actually be displayed until the section is regenerated. Conversely, if a spline endpoint is dimensioned with an angular dimension and the endpoint has not been defined with a tangency, you must add the tangency, or remove the dimension. You must also set tangency if you are controlling curvature of the spline at its endpoints with curvature dimensions. You can modify tangency conditions after the spline has been created (see Modifying the Tangency of a Spline on page 2 - 56). A closed spline must have a tangency condition of None and will be made tangent at its endpoints. Closed splines that are non-tangent at their endpoints cannot be created. In a spline with one or more tangent endpoints, if you move the first or last interior point on the spline, the spline immediately adjusts to its new shape. Creating a Spline The following procedure explains how to create a spline.
2 - 16
How to Create a Spline 1. Choose Spline from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. The system displays the SPLINE MODE menu, which is modal (each button stays selected until you explicitly select another button). 2. Choose an option from the SPLINE MODE menu. The possible options are as follows: Sketch PointsCreate a spline by picking screen points through which the spline will pass. Select PointsCreate a spline by selecting existing Sketcher points. Once the point has been selected, there is no further link between the point and the spline. Sketcher
3. The system displays the TANGENCY menu. Select one of the following options: NoneCreate a spline with no tangency. StartCreate a spline with explicit control of the tangency angle at the start. EndCreate a spline with explicit control of the tangency angle at the end. BothCreate a spline with explicit control of the tangency angle at both ends. Control PolyCreate a spline with both endpoints tangent to a control polygon. Pick spline points as usual. The line entities that form the control polygon of the spline will be added to the section database as parents of the spline. These lines can be dimensioned as if they were regular sketched entities. If you delete the control polygon, the spline becomes a standard spline with no tangency conditions. If you delete the spline, the entities of the corresponding control polygon are also deleted. For a spline created using the control polygon, you cannot dimension to coordinate systems or to interpolation points, nor can you specify radius of curvature dimensions for it. If no entities of its control polygon are dimensioned, you can modify the spline using the MOD SPLINE command options Move Pnts and Control Poly. Approx ChainCreate an approximate chain spline, which replaces a chain of entities. The spline will approximate the chain very closely, but the curvature will vary continuously along the spline, smoothing out any jumps in curvature in the original chain of entities.
Sketcher
2 - 17
4. Click the left mouse button at the start point of the spline. 5. Continue the spline by selecting or sketching points using the left mouse button. You may, at any time, click the right mouse button to abort the spline. ...or... If you are creating an approximate chain spline, select the entities (lines, arcs, splines, and conics) in the section that form a continuous chain. Pro/ENGINEER transforms the selected entities to phantom line font and creates the approximate chain spline on top of the entities. 6. If you are sketching points, click the middle mouse button to end spline creation. The red rubberband spline is replaced by a spline between the first and last points placed. ...or... If you are selecting Sketcher points, choose Done/Return to complete the spline. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to confirm deletion of the sketched or imported points. Enter [yes] to remove the points from the sketch. Using Approximate Chain Splines Note the following rules for deleting approximate chain splines: If you delete an approximate chain spline, Pro/ENGINEER removes it and turns the entities from the chain back into geometry. If you delete an entity from the chain, Pro/ENGINEER deletes the entire chain. The spline itself will remain in the section, but will no longer be driven by the entity chain from which it was created. You can then modify the spline like any other spline in Sketcher mode. If you restore a deleted chain, Pro/ENGINEER pops the whole chain back into the section. If you modified the spline in the meantime, the system regenerates it back to its original form and reattaches it to the controlling chain.
If you move the approximate chain using the Move Entity option from the GEOM TOOLS, note the following: If you select an internal of the spline, Pro/ENGINEER translates it along with the construction entities. If you select an endpoint of the spline or the adjacent construction entity, the system applies an extend and rotate transformation to both the spline and the chain.
2 - 18
If you select an entity of the approximated chain, Pro/ENGINEER translates the spline together with the chain.
Using Sketcher Text

You can include text in a sketch for extruded protrusions that do not use the Thin option and cuts, trimming surfaces, and cosmetic features. The characters that are in a sketch for an extruded feature must use the font font3d. For cosmetic features, any font can be used by modifying the text after creating the sketch (see Modifying Text Entities on page 2 - 61 for more information). How to Include a Text String in a Sketch 1. Choose Sketch and Adv Geometry. Sketcher 2. Choose Text from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. 3. Enter a single line of up to 79 characters of text, followed by a carriage return for each line of text you want to enter. 4. To complete the text entry portion of the process, enter a carriage return in an empty text input line. 5. Place the text by picking two opposite corners of a text box using the left mouse button. The box determines the original text height, width factor, and location. After you place the text, the box becomes invisible (see the following figure). Text Placement Box
Text box
Text origin
If you are creating Sketcher text, press the middle mouse button to abort the current text placement only. You can then select another location for the text placement. 6. Dimension the text to the part or Sketcher geometry. To dimension the text, choose Dimension from the SKETCHER menu, pick anywhere on the text, pick a geometry entity, and place the dimension with the middle button. The dimension will be created from the text origin (the lower-left corner of the text box).
Sketcher
2 - 19
Blend Vertex
Blend vertices are used to create blended features with unequal numbers of segments in their sections. For complete instructions on using this option, see Open and Closed Blends on page 6 - 16.
Manipulating Sketcher Geometry

To access tools for manipulating sketcher geometry, choose SKETCHER > Geom Tools. For 2-D Sketcher, the GEOM TOOLS menu lists the following options: IntersectIntersect two entities. TrimTrim an entity using options in the DRAFT TRIM menu. DivideDividing an entity into multiple segments. MirrorMirror geometry about a centerline. Move EntityMove geometry by dragging or rotating (see Moving Sketcher Entities on page 2 - 39).
Dividing Entities
You can divide a section entity into two or more new entities using the GEOM TOOLS menu Divide command. When you choose Divide and pick on an entity, Pro/ENGINEER divides the entity at the pick locations, then replaces the original entity with the new entities. You can also use the Intersect command to determine the intersection point of two entities that cross, and divide both of them at the point of intersection.
Dividing an Entity into Two or More Entities

The following procedure explains how to divide an entity. How to Divide an Entity into Two or More New Entities 1. Delete the dimensions for each entity you are dividing. 2. Pick the entity to be divided. For each pick, Pro/ENGINEER divides the entity at that location and replaces it with two new entities. 3. If desired, continue to use the Divide command to divide entities. When you have finished, choose Done.
2 - 20
4. Dimension the divided entities and regenerate the section.
Dividing Two Intersecting Entities

The Intersect option determines the intersection point of two entities that cross, and divides both of them at the point of intersection. This provides a way to delete a portion of one or more intersecting entities. You can also use the Trim option to trim (shorten or extend) a single entity where it intersects another (for example, a bounding entity) without dividing the other. How to Divide Two Intersecting Entities 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Intersect from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Pick the first entity near the intersection point. 4. Pick the second entity near the intersection point. 5. Pro/ENGINEER splits the entities. If desired, delete any unnecessary entities. Notes: Centerlines, edges, axes, and planes can be used for intersections, but they cannot be split. You cannot divide entities that are tangent to each other and do not actually intersect. Sketcher
The following figure illustrates the Intersect option.
Pick at these points.
Both circle and line are divided here.
Trimming Entities
You can trim two entities to each other using the Trim and Corner options, or trim a single entity to another bounding entity using the Trim and Bound options.
Sketcher 2 - 21
Different Ways to Trim

The following procedures describe various trimming techniques. How to Trim a Single Entity to Another Bounding Entity 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu, Trim, and the DRAFT TRIM Bound option. 2. Select a bounding entity. This entity indicates the limit of the entity to be trimmed. The bounding entity is not changed in any way during the operation. Centerlines, datum planes, datum axes, and tangent edges are all valid bounding entities. Feature axes and cosmetic feature entities are invalid choices for bounding entities. 3. Select the entity to trim. Pro/ENGINEER will shorten or extend this entity up to the intersection with the bounding entity, or its extension. If the trimmed entity is to be shortened, select the portion of the entity that will be kept. 4. Continue to trim any entities with that same bounding entity. 5. To select a different bounding entity, choose Trim again, or use the middle mouse button. 6. To extend two entities so they intersect, first select one of them as the bounding entity and trim the other, then reverse the process. The following figure illustrates the Trim/Bound option
Bounding entity
Select this line to extend.
Select this line to shorten.
How to Trim an Entity to a Specific Length 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Trim from the GEOM TOOLS menu, then choose Length from the DRAFT TRIM menu.
2 - 22
3. Enter the length. 4. Select an entity to trim. Select near the end of the entity to lengthen or shorten it. 5. If the dimension exists, Pro/ENGINEER asks if you want to delete the highlighted dimension. Answer yes to trim the entity; answer no to abort the process. 6. The system trims the specified entity to the specified length. How to Trim an Entity by an Incremental Length Change 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Trim from the GEOM TOOLS menu, then choose Increm from the DRAFT TRIM menu. Sketcher 3. Enter the incremental length. A positive value lengthens an entity, while a negative value shortens it. 4. Pro/ENGINEER asks if you want to delete the highlighted dimension. Answer yes to trim the entity; answer no to abort the process. 5. The system trims the entity by the specified incremental value. How to Trim Two Entities to Each Other 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu, Trim, and the DRAFT TRIM option Corner. 2. Select any two entities (they do not have to intersect) on the portion of the entity that you want to keep. 3. Reply yes to the prompt that asks if you want to delete the highlighted dimensions. 4. Repeat step 2, or choose another command.
Untrimming Entities
To undo the last completed trim action (while you are still using the DRAFT TRIM menu), choose Trim and then Untrim Last from the DRAFT TRIM menu. Note: Portions of entities that have been removed using Trim cannot be brought back by using Undelete.
Sketcher
2 - 23
Splitting or Trimming Entities with Dimensions

If splitting (intersecting or filleting) or trimming an entity causes existing dimensions to be deleted, the system issues a warning. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the dimensions to be deleted in red. If you answer no to the prompt, the system aborts the split or trim. If you enter yes, it splits or trims the entities and deletes the dimensions.
Mirroring Geometry
You can mirror Sketcher geometry entities about a sketched centerline. Use this when your sketch has symmetrical characteristics. You can solve half the sketch, then mirror it. Pro/ENGINEER uses the dimensions of one side to solve the other. This reduces the number of dimensions necessary to solve a sketch. Note: You cannot mirror dimensions or text entitiesonly geometric entities. How to Mirror Sketched Geometry 1. Make sure the sketch contains a centerline. 2. Choose Mirror from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Pick the centerline geometry about which the entities will be mirrored. The system displays the MIRROR menu, which has the following options: PickSelect individual entities for mirroring. AllSelect all sketched entities for mirroring.
4. Select the geometry to mirror, then choose Done.
Copying Imported Drawings

You can create a new section by selecting and copying imported two-dimensional geometry into an empty Sketcher file using the Copy Draw option in the SEC TOOLS menu. First, import a two-dimensional drawing in Drawing mode. When you choose the option Copy Draw, Pro/ENGINEER asks you to name a drawing from which to copy. The system displays the imported geometry in a separate window. Select all the entities to import. The system places the copied entities in the section. You can dimension the entities, or move them using the Move option from the GEOM TOOLS menu.
2 - 24
Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry

To regenerate a section sketch successfully, you must dimension it properly. There are two steps to dimensioning an entity: pick the entity or entities using the left mouse button, then place the dimension at the desired position using the middle mouse button. Pro/ENGINEER initially displays the dimensions in symbolic format. The dimensions are given unique names (sd0, sd1, sd2, and so on) in Sketcher mode, which may change to a new symbolic name when the solid geometry is created. When you choose the SKETCHER menu commands Dimension or Align, you can dimension or align ends of sketched entities to edge-on surfaces, as well as to edges on the surfaces. An edge-on surface is like a side viewfor example, a plane appears as a line, and a tabulated cylinder appears as a curve. You can select a plane, cylinder, or tabulated cylinder as an edge-on surface. You can use the AutoDim option to dimension the section automatically. To select a surface normal to the screen, pick the edge. If you use the Query Sel command, Pro/ENGINEER displays a selection on the surface itself, with red highlighting, while the edges you actually select are displayed in blue. In regular Pick selection, you get the surface selection.
Sketcher
Relations
You can create relations between dimensions in Sketcher mode. This allows you to lock in design relations as soon as you create the section. For information on how to add relations to a section, see Adding Relations to Sections on page 2 - 39.
Fractions
You can create dimensions in decimal format or by using fractions. For more information on using fractions, see Fractions on page 1 - 7.
Dimension Precision
You can set the default number of decimal places by specifying the configuration file option sketcher_dec_places, or you can choose the Num Digits option in the SEC ENVIRON menu.
Sketcher
2 - 25
How to Modify the Number of Decimal Places in the Dimension 1. Choose SEC TOOLS > Sec Environ > Num Digits. 2. Enter a value from 0 to 14. 3. Regenerate the sketch. Pro/ENGINEER rounds off dimension values that have more than the specified number of decimal places.
Automatic Dimensioning
After you sketch a section, you can automatically dimension it by choosing AutoDim from the SKETCHER menu. The system adds all dimensions that are necessary to constrain the section, and then regenerates it. You can also use AutoDim on a partially dimensioned section. Once the system places all dimensions, you can move them to the desired location by using Move from the GEOM TOOLS menu and then Dimension from the MOVE ENTITY menu. For information on how to use AutoDim with sections created in a part with existing geometry, see Using Automatic Dimensioning on page 4 - 21.
Linear Dimensions
Linear dimensions indicate the length of a line segment or the distance between two entities (lines, arcs, circles, points, and splines).
Creating Linear Dimensions

The commands in the DIMENSION menu work in continue mode: you continue creating dimensions of one type until you choose another option. You can create linear dimensions, as follows: To dimension the explicit length of a linePick the line, then place the dimension. To dimension the distance between two parallel linesPick the two lines, then place the dimension. To dimension the distance between a point and a linePick the line, pick the point, and place the dimension.
2 - 26
To create a dimension between two pointsPick the points and location for the dimension. Note that centerpoints and coordinate systems are included, but vertices are excluded. The system displays the DIM PNT menu, which has the following options: HorizontalIndicate the horizontal distance between the points. VerticalIndicate the vertical distance between the points. SlantedIndicate the shortest distance between the points.
Note: You cannot dimension the length of a centerline. When you are creating a dimension between two arc or circle extents (tangency points), only horizontal and vertical dimensions are allowed. Pro/ENGINEER creates the dimension to the tangency point closest to the pick point. Sketcher
Diameter Dimensions
Diameter dimensions measure the diameters of sketched circles and arcs, or diameters for sketching sections about an axis. The following sections describe how to dimension arcs and circles, and revolved sections.
Dimensioning Arcs and Circles

To create a diameter dimension for an arc or a circle, pick the arc or circle twice, then place the dimension. Diameter Dimension for a Circle
Place dimension here.
Pick twice on circle.
Sketcher
2 - 27
Dimensioning Revolved Sections

The following procedure explains how to dimension a section of a revolved feature. How to Create a Diameter Dimension 1. Pick the entity to be dimensioned. 2. Pick the centerline that will be the axis of revolution. 3. Pick the entity again. 4. Place the dimension. Note: The diameter dimension for a revolved feature extends beyond the centerline, indicating that it is a diameter dimension, not a radius dimension. The following figure shows how to create a diameter dimension for a revolved feature section.
Pick 4 - places dimension Pick 2 - on centerline
Pick 3 Pick 1
Section
Radial Dimensions
Radial dimensions measure the radii of circles or arcs, and circles and arcs created by revolving a section about an axis. To create a radial dimension for an arc or circle, pick on the circle or arc, then place the dimension (see the following figure).
2 - 28
Pick the arc segment. Place the dimension.
To create a radial dimension for a section that will be revolved, pick the entity, pick on the centerline axis, then place the dimension.
Angular Dimensions
Angular dimensions measure the angle between two lines, or the angle of an arc between its endpoints. To create an angular dimension between lines, pick the first line, pick the second line, then place the dimension. Where you place the dimension determines how the angle is measured (either acute or obtuse). The following illustrates angular dimensions.
Sketcher
Pick edges, then place a dimension.
Sketcher
2 - 29
How to Create an Arc Angle Dimension 1. Pick one endpoint of the arc. 2. Pick the other endpoint of the arc. 3. Pick the arc. 4. Place the dimension (see the following figure). Arc Angle Dimension
Pick 1 - on endpoint
Pick 2 - on endpoint Pick 3 - on arc Pick 4 - places dimension
Spline Dimensions
A spline is dimensioned using its endpoints or interpolation points. You can pick the endpoints of a spline and dimension them as you would any point. You need only the dimensions of the endpoints of the spline to create the spline. If a spline is attached to other geometry, dimensioning the geometry dimensions the spline. You can dimension spline endpoints using linear dimensions, tangency (angular) dimensions, and radius of curvature dimensions. The Sketcher can solve for a point on a spline, given a tangency angle as a dimension. The Sketcher looks for lines and centerlines that are tangent to the trimmed ends of splines created by the Use Edge option. If the angle of the line can be determined without solving for the point, the Sketcher will solve the point by finding where the tangent to the spline has the specified angle. The following sections describe linear dimensions, tangency dimensions, radius of curvature dimensions, dimensioning interpolation points, and associating to a coordinate system.
2 - 30
Linear Dimensions
The following procedure explains how to create linear dimensions. How to Create Linear Dimensions 1. Select the spline, then select the spline endpoint. This ensures you have selected the correct endpoint when other geometry ends near the spline end. However, if no other geometry is nearby, simply select the endpoint. 2. Select the model or Sketcher geometry to which to dimension.
Tangency Dimensions
You can create tangency dimensions for endpoints and intermediate control points of the spline. Note that the spline must have tangency defined before you can use a tangency dimension at the ends. You can modify the spline to add tangency and then create angle dimensions. How to Create a Tangency Dimension 1. Select the spline twice. 2. Select the endpoint where the tangency is defined or any spline interpolation point. 3. Select the model or Sketcher geometry to which the spline tangency is defined. 4. Place the dimension. Sketcher
Radius of Curvature Dimensions

The following procedure explains how to create radius of curvature dimensions. How to Create a Radius of Curvature Dimension 1. The spline must have tangency defined before you can use a radius of curvature dimension. If no tangency exists and the endpoint is dimensioned with a radius of curvature dimension, you must modify the spline to add tangency, or Pro/ENGINEER will report the dimension as extra. 2. Select the spline endpoint with the left mouse button. 3. Place the dimension with the middle mouse button.
Sketcher
2 - 31
Dimensioning Interpolation Points

You can dimension the spline interpolation points (the points you picked to define the spline). How to Dimension the Spline Interpolation Points 1. Select the spline. The system displays the interpolation points. 2. Select the interpolation point to dimension. 3. Select the model or Sketcher geometry to which you want to dimension. Note: When you have dimensioned a spline interpolation point, you can no longer modify the spline using the options in the MOD SPLINE menu. If you select the spline for modification, the system prompts you to delete the dimensions.
Associating to a Coordinate System

To dimension the interpolation points of the spline using coordinate values, you need to associate the spline to a coordinate system. How to Associate a Spline to a Coordinate System 1. Choose Dimension from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Pick the spline twice. 3. Select the coordinate system, then click the middle mouse button. The spline is now associated to a local coordinate system. However, the system does not display any dimensions. For information on how to modify spline points to change the shape of the spline, see Modifying Spline Points on page 2 - 41.
Conic Dimensions
There are two dimensioning schemes to dimension a conic. One uses an rho value to define the shape of the conic. The other requires you to add a distinct Sketcher point to anchor the conic at the selected location. The resulting conic is defined by the two endpoints and the distinct third point. How to Dimension the Conic 1. Dimension the endpoints to locate the conic spline. 2. Create angular dimensions to define the endpoint tangency.
2 - 32
How to Create a Conic Tangency Dimension 1. Select the conic, then select the endpoint where the tangency is to be defined. 2. Select the model or Sketcher geometry to which the spline tangency is defined (such as a centerline or straight edge). 3. Place the dimension. Because a conic can get its end tangency from another conic, you need to create only one tangency dimension if you intend for two conics that have a common endpoint to be tangent. For some end tangency angles, a conic cannot be regenerated. For example, it is not possible to make a single conic that represents one half or more of an ellipse. If a conic cannot be recreated, modify the tangency angles. If no tangency angles are present, add them, because the problematic tangents must then be determined by adjacent entities.
Sketcher
The rho Dimension

The rho dimension of a conic segment PQ defines the shape of the conic. The rho dimension specifies a ratio along a vector from the chord (PQ) through a point C to the vertex (R). Point C is at the maximum distance (CD), measured by a normal from the chord PQ to the conic segment PQ. Conic rho Dimension
R
b
C a D
rho = a/(a+b)
Sketcher
2 - 33
How to Dimension the rho Parameter Value of the Conic 1. Pick once on the conic with the left button and create the dimension with the middle button. When you first regenerate the conic, the rho is 0.5 by default. 2. You can modify rho to be one of the following values: For an ellipse: 0.05 < parameter < 0.5 When you are creating a closed ellipse section from four conic segments, the only value for rho that gives a true ellipse is (sqrt (2)1). Enter this value exactly as shown (not as the approximation .4142). For a parabola: parameter = 0.5 For a hyperbola: 0.5 < parameter < 0.95 Ellipse Consisting of Four Conics
Centerlines
.414
.414
rho dimension enter as sqrt(2)-1 Conic
.414 .414
Angular dimension at common endpoint
Linear dimensions
The Three-Point Dimension

For conics that are defined by three distinct points, the system determines the shoulder point from the user-defined point through which it passes. If this is a model point (vertex or datum), you need not add another dimensionyou can align the conic to this model point. However, if it is a Sketcher point or vertex, you must dimension the point to regenerate the sketch.
2 - 34
How to Dimension a Conic Defined by Three Points 1. First perform the two rho dimensioning steps to define the conic endpoint and tangency dimensions (see The rho Dimension on page 2 - 33). 2. Create a Sketcher point on the conic where the conic is to remain anchored. Note: If you place the conic close enough to the sketch point on a curve (such as during creation of a swept feature), the conic passes through that point, behaving the same as a conic for which you define a third point.
Perimeter Dimension
You can use the Perimeter option in the DIMENSION menu to dimension the total length of a chain or loop of entities. You must select a dimension that the system can adjust to obtain the desired perimeter. This dimension is called the varying dimension. When you modify the perimeter dimension, the system modifies the varying dimension accordingly. Note the following information about the perimeter dimension: You cannot modify varying dimensions, because they are driven dimensions. If you delete the varying dimension, the system deletes the perimeter dimension. Sketcher
The following figure shows a sample sketch with a perimeter dimension.
Sketcher
2 - 35
Using the Perimeter Dimension

Perimeter dimension
Varying dimension When you modify the perimeter dimension, the varying dimension adjusts accordingly.
How to Add a Perimeter Dimension 1. Fully dimension the section so it can regenerate successfully. 2. Choose Dimension, Perimeter. 3. Select an entity from a chain or loop. 4. All vertices in the chain or loop highlight in white. Do one of the following: If you want to select the entire chain/loop, choose Done Sel. ...or... If you want to select a portion of the chain/loop, select two vertices and then use options in the CHOOSE menu to highlight the desired portion. Conclude the selection by choosing Accept.
5. Select a dimension that the system can vary and regenerate the sketch. The perimeter dimension shows up with the current value of the perimeter, and points to the chain/loop that it is dimensioning. Note: Perimeter dimensions are not supported for parallel blends and variable section sweeps.
2 - 36
Ordinate Dimensions
You can create linear dimensions in ordinate format in Sketcher mode. To do so, select the baseline geometry and create the baseline dimensions before you select any other geometry to dimension. You can establish the baseline dimension on lines, arc and circle centers, and geometry endpoints (lines, arcs, conics, and splines). You can even select model geometry to dimension as a baseline. Note that if the baseline resides in the model, the ordinate dimension to that baseline must also reside in the model.
Creating a Baseline Dimension

The following procedure explains how to create baseline dimensions. How to Create the Baseline Dimension 1. Choose Dimension, then Baseline from the DIMENSION menu. 2. Select the geometry to dimension as a baseline, then locate the dimension text. For lines, the baseline is oriented the same way. For arc and circle centers, and geometry endpoints, choose one of the following options from the VERT HORIZ menu: VertOrient the baseline vertically. HorizOrient the baseline horizontally. Sketcher
The following figure illustrates how to create an ordinate baseline. Creating an Ordinate Baseline
Pick 1 - select entity Pick 2 - place baseline dimension
Sketcher
2 - 37
Creating an Ordinate Dimension

The following procedure explains how to create an ordinate dimension. How to Create an Ordinate Dimension 1. Choose Dimension. 2. Select the baseline dimension, then select the entity to dimension using the left mouse button. 3. Place the ordinate dimension using the middle mouse button. The following figure illustrates how to create an ordinate dimension. Creating an Ordinate Dimension
Pick 1 - select baseline dimension
Pick 2 - select entity to dimension
Pick 3 - place dimension
Replacing a Dimension
You can replace an existing Sketcher dimension with an equivalent one so that the new dimension retains the symbolic dimension (sd#) of the original. Replacing a dimension is useful when you want to preserve additional data associated with the original dimension (for example, geometric tolerance symbol or extra text added in Drawing mode). How to Replace a Dimension 1. Choose SKETCHER > Dimension. 2. Choose Replace from the DIMENSION menu. 3. Select a dimension to replace. The dimension is deleted. 4. Create a new equivalent dimension.
2 - 38
Adding Relations to Sections

You can add relations to sections while you are in Sketcher mode. Relations in Sketcher mode follow the same rules as in Part mode, except the parameters must belong to a part or assembly and cannot be created in Sketcher mode. The relations apply to the section, but you can modify and use them in part or assembly relations. How to Create a Relation in Sketcher Mode 1. Choose Relation from the SKETCHER menu. The system displays the dimensions as symbols. 2. Choose Add from the RELATIONS menu. Sketcher 3. When you add the relation, use the Sketcher dimension symbol, sd#, or known dimension symbol, kd#. See Known Dimensions on page 4 - 20 for more information. Note: Only Sketcher and known dimensions are allowed in relations created within Sketcher mode. You can also enter a section relation when you modify the driven dimension. After initial regeneration, enter the relation (for example, sd4=sd2+sd3/2) when you are modifying dimension values. Pro/ENGINEER displays the new relation and prompts you to accept it.
Moving Sketcher Entities

The Move Entity command in the GEOM TOOLS menu displays the MOVE ENTITY menu, which enables you to move Sketcher entities, including dimensions. The MOVE ENTITY menu lists the following options: Drag ItemDrag a selected entity to a new location. Drag ManyDrag one or more selected entities simultaneously to a new location. Rotate90Rotate the selected entities counterclockwise in multiples of 90 degrees. DimensionMove a Sketcher dimension to a new location. Note: Pro/ENGINEER removes alignments that have become invalid as a result of the move operation, and keeps those alignments that are still valid.
Sketcher
2 - 39
The following sections describe each of these options in detail.
Dragging Individual Entities

The following procedure explains how to use the Drag Item option. How to Drag a Single Sketcher Entity 1. Choose Drag Item from the MOVE ENTITY menu. 2. Pick an entity or one of its endpoints. The system highlights the entity and attaches the entity to the cursor. If you pick an endpoint on a vertex, the system briefly highlights the point in red and briefly highlights the rest of the entity in blue to indicate that you have selected it. If you pick an endpoint that is a common endpoint to more than one entity, all the entities move. 3. Move the entity to its new location. Click the left mouse button to place the entity.
Dragging Multiple Entities

The following procedure explains how to use the Drag Many option. How to Drag Multiple Sketcher Entities 1. Choose Drag Many from the MOVE ENTITY menu. 2. Select one or more entities to move, then choose Done Sel, or click the middle mouse button to finalize your selections. Or, choose the Pick Many command to draw a pick box around the entities you want to select. All the entities completely within the pick box are selected. 3. Once you have selected the entities, pick a drag starting position on one of them. The selected entities become attached to the cursor at that position. 4. Move the entities to a new location and click the left mouse button to place them.
2 - 40
Rotating Entities
The following procedure explains how to rotate entities. How to Rotate Sketcher entities 1. Choose Rotate90 from the MOVE ENTITY menu. 2. Pick one or more entities to rotate. Choose Done Sel, or click the middle mouse button to finalize your selections. Or, choose the Pick Many command to draw a pick box around the entities you want to select. All the entities completely within the pick box are selected. 3. Enter a multiple of 90 degrees by which to rotate the selected entities. If desired, you can enter a negative value. Sketcher 4. Pick a center point for the entities around which the geometry will be rotated.
Moving Dimensions
The following procedure explains how to move dimensions in Sketcher. How to Move a Sketcher Dimension 1. Choose Dimension from the MOVE ENTITY menu. 2. Select the dimension that you want to move; the system highlights the dimension in red. The witness lines expand or contract as necessary, and you can move the text box that contains the dimension value freely along the leader line. 3. To place the dimension in its new location, click the left mouse button.
Moving a Spline Created with the Control Poly Option

You can move a spline that was created using the Control Poly option in the TANGENCY menu using the options in the MOVE ENTITY menu. If you choose the Rotate90 or Drag Many option from the MOVE ENTITY menu, the system moves the spline and the control polygon used to create it as a single unit.
Sketcher
2 - 41
If you choose the Drag Item option, Pro/ENGINEER moves the spline in one of four ways, depending on what entities you pick. The possible ways are as follows: If you pick a point on the spline other than an endpoint, the system drags the spline and all the entities belonging to its control polygon as a single unit. If you pick a point on the control polygon other than an endpoint, the system drags the spline and all the entities belonging to its control polygon as a single unit. If you pick an endpoint on the spline, the system scales and rotates the spline and all its control polygon entities as you drag the endpoint. If you pick a vertex on the control polygon, the system moves the two adjacent control polygon lines only as you drag the vertex. The spline changes its shape in the same way as if you had selected the Control Poly option from the MOD SPLINE menu.
Regenerating a Section
During regeneration, the system checks the dimensioning scheme and analyzes your section based on the geometry you have sketched and the dimensions you have created. In the absence of explicit dimensions, the system can use implicit information based on the sketch. If Pro/ENGINEER recognizes and accepts your dimensioning scheme, the section regenerates successfully, and the system redraws it. In addition, the system replaces the symbolic dimensions with numeric values based on the size of the sketch.
Sketcher Constraints
If a sketch is not fully dimensioned with known dimensions or alignments, Sketcher begins to make assumptions. If Sketcher can assume enough constraints to find a unique solution to the sketch, it solves the sketch. The following table lists assumptions that Pro/ENGINEER uses to regenerate a section.
2 - 42
Implicit Rules Rule Equal radius and diameter Symmetry Horizontal and vertical lines Parallel and perpendicular entities Tangency Equal segment lengths Point entities lying on other entities or collinear with other entities Equal coordinates Description If you sketch two or more arcs or circles with approximately the same radius, the system may assume that the same radii are equal. Entities may be assumed to be symmetric about a centerline. Lines that are approximately horizontal or vertical may be considered to be exactly so. Lines that are sketched approximately parallel or perpendicular may be considered to be exactly so. Sketcher Entities sketched approximately tangent to each other may be assumed to be tangent. Lines of approximately the same length may be assumed to have the same length. Point entities that lie near lines, arcs, or circles may be considered to be exactly on them. Points that are near the extension of a line may be assumed to lie on it. Endpoints and centers of the arcs may be assumed to have the same X- or the same Y-coordinates.
Consider the following information on how Sketcher uses dimensions and constraints to solve the sketch: Use line options such as Parallel and Tangent to create visually accurate sketches. Remember, however, that these options do not constrain entities to be tangent or parallel. For example, if you sketch a line parallel to another line, parallel is not a known constraint for the line, and Sketcher does not necessarily list Parallel as an assumed constraint. Moreover, Sketcher may even solve the sketch so that the line is no longer parallel, depending on what known dimensions and constraints are assigned. Pro/ENGINEER does not display assumptions for known entities, such as edges selected while using Use Edge. These assumptions cannot be disabled.
Sketcher
2 - 43
Graphical Display of Sketcher Constraints

After a successful regeneration, the system shows the section with graphical symbols denoting all constraints used to solve the sketch. The following table lists constraints with the corresponding graphical symbols. Sketcher Constraints Constraint Horizontal entities Vertical entities Line segments with equal lengths Perpendicular entities Parallel lines Equal coordinates Tangent entities Symmetry Equal radii Point entity R with an index in subscript H V L with an index in subscript (for example: L1) Perpendicularity symbol with or without an index number in subscript Parallel symbol with an index in subscript Small thick dashes between the points T Symbol
Manipulating Constraints
For a regenerated section, the system displays appropriate graphical constraints next to the entities. You can turn the display of constraints on or off in one of the following ways: Choose Constraints from the SKETCHER menu and place or remove a checkmark in front of the Display option in the Constraints menu. Choose Sec Tools from the SKETCHER menu, then choose Sec Environ from the SEC TOOLS menu, and add or remove a checkmark in front of the Disp Constr option. To disable the constraints display by default, set the configuration option sketcher_display_constraints to no.
2 - 44
To work with individual constraints, choose Constraints from the SKETCHER menu and select one of the following options in the Constraints menu: ExplainSelect a constraint symbol to highlight entities to which it applies. A message in the Message window explains the selected constraint. EnableSelect a constraint symbol to enable. DisableSelect a constraint symbol to disable. The system shows a disabled constraint in a circle with a line going across. For example, V .
Overriding Implicit Rules

Sometimes Sketcher makes assumptions you do not want. For example, two adjacent lines may be assumed to be horizontal and vertical, respectively, while the angle between them is marked extra. You can disable the unwanted constraint, or you can avoid the undesired assumption by exaggerating while sketching. If you sketch the nearly vertical line at 60 degrees, the system will not assume it is vertical. The angle can then be modified to the desired value. Sketcher
Terminating a Regeneration
Use the STOP sign button to terminate a regeneration of a sketch that takes too long. The system considers a stopped regeneration a regeneration failure.
Unsuccessful Regeneration of a Section

If a section cannot be solved using the dimensioning scheme and implicit sketched information, Pro/ENGINEER issues a message and highlights the error. The basic categories of errors are as follows: The sketch does not communicate the intent. The sketch is underdimensioned. The sketch is overdimensioned. The segment is too small. The segment is of zero length. There are inappropriate sections.
Sketcher
2 - 45
The following sections describe these errors in more detail.
Sketch Misinterpretations
When you sketch entities, you generally need not be concerned with sketching precisely (lines sketched nearly horizontal or vertical are determined as such, and so on). However, if you sketch too far away from your intended assumptions, Pro/ENGINEER will fail to recognize your intent. You will have to add dimensions, move the entities, or recreate the entities more closely to your intent. The following figure shows two examples of sketch misinterpretations.
Too far from horizontal
Too far from tangency
Underdimensioning
If there is not enough information to solve the section, Pro/ENGINEER tells you the sketch is underdimensioned and highlights all the unsolved vertices. Pro/ENGINEER then enters dimension mode so you can add dimensions. In the absence of dimensions, Pro/ENGINEER may rely on implicit information to solve the section.
2 - 46
The following figure illustrates underdimensioned sections.
Unsolved points
Solved, assuming segments are of equal length
Underdimensioned section
Sketcher
Overdimensioning
If you include too much dimensional information in a section, Pro/ENGINEER solves the section and issues an appropriate warning message. If these dimensions are truly redundant, you should delete them in Sketcher mode and add them later as reference dimensions. Dimensions that are flagged as extra do not affect the geometry when modified, unless they are used to drive dimensions. Pro/ENGINEER permits overdimensioning. An extra dimension can be used to measure a quantity without affecting it. Also, there may be some valid dimensions that Pro/ENGINEER does not recognize. Therefore, you can set up relations for extra dimensions which you want to use for driving other section dimensions.
Segment Is Too Small

The segment is too small problem occurs when a sketch entity is drawn in a zoomed-in view and you attempt regeneration from a zoomed-out view. You can usually correct the problem by zooming back in and regenerating, or by increasing the Sketcher accuracy. If not, you must delete the segment, or redraw it larger before the section regenerates. See Sketcher Accuracy on page 2 - 48 for more information.
Sketcher
2 - 47
Zero-Length Segments
If you sketch a segment very small, Pro/ENGINEER issues a message informing that there is a zero-length segment in the section. Increasing the Sketcher accuracy might alleviate the problem. If not, delete the segment, or redraw it larger before the section regenerates. See Sketcher Accuracy on page 2 - 48 for more information.
Inappropriate Sections
If Pro/ENGINEER knows the purpose for which a section will be used, it also checks to make sure the section is appropriate. For example, if you create a revolved feature, Pro/ENGINEER checks to make sure you have a centerline and that the section is closed.
Sketcher Accuracy
Modify the Sketcher accuracy to help solve certain section regeneration problems. For example, if Pro/ENGINEER issues the message that says an entity has zero length (because its length is less than the accuracy used by the Sketcher), increasing the accuracy by entering a smaller number makes the length appear to be non-zero. The system can then solve the section (assuming no other problems arise due to increasing the accuracy). How to Change the Sketcher Accuracy 1. Choose Sec Environ from the SEC TOOLS menu. 2. Choose Accuracy from the SEC ENVIRON menu. 3. At the prompt for the new accuracy, enter a value between 1.0E-9 (0.000000001) and 1.0. 4. Regenerate the section. If the section still fails to regenerate successfully, try increasing the accuracy again (entering a smaller number), or evaluate the section for other problems. Note that the system remembers the relative accuracy of each section when you redefine a feature that contains the section.
2 - 48
Unregenerating a Sketch
You can restore a section to the state it was in prior to regenerating by using the Unregenerate option in the SKETCHER menu. This option is available only when the section has been successfully regenerated. When you select this option, your sketch geometry reverts back to what it was, but any dimensions that were modified remain with their modified values.
Unregenerating a Section and Disabling Unwanted Constraints

If a section has changed undesirably after a regeneration, you can undo the regeneration and then disable some of the constraints used by Sketcher. How to Restore the Original Geometry and Disable Constraints 1. Unregenerate the section by using the Unregenerate command. The system restores the section to a pre-regeneration state. 2. Choose the Constraints option and disable unwanted constraints. 3. Regenerate the section again. For an example, refer to the following diagram. Sketcher
Sketcher
2 - 49
Example of Unregenerating the Section and Disabling Constraints
1) Create angular, horizontal, and vertical dimensions for this section.
2) After regeneration, the system highlights the angular dimension as extra.
4) The angle dimension is no longer extra. Modify the angle value as required.
3) Unregenerate the section, disable the Vertical constraint, and regenerate again.
Modifying a Section Sketch

Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu to modify the size and shape of the section. The MOD SKETCH menu lists the following options: Mod EntityModify dimensions, splines, or sketch text entities. To modify a dimension, pick this dimension and enter a new dimension value. Drag Dim ValSelect up to five dimensions. The system displays a thermometer-type scale you can use to change the selected dimensions. Drag EntitySelect a dimension and then an entity to drag to the desired location using the mouse buttons. Drag VertexPick two dimensions, then a vertex, and drag the vertex to the desired location using the mouse buttons.
2 - 50
Set AnchorSet the point that will be fixed during drag operations. This option is available only when there is no solid object present.
Restoring Dimensions
If a regeneration fails as a result of dimensional changes, the system displays the Section Fail menu with the following options. RestoreDimPick individual dimensions that you want to restore to their original values. RestoreAllRestore all the dimensions to their original values. Sketcher
Unless you selected the RestoreAll option, you must still regenerate the model successfully. If necessary, modify additional dimensions, or delete features before regenerating. Note: If a regeneration could not continue because values were changed in a relation, either edit the relation or modify the dimensions used in the relation. For more information, see Working in the Resolve Environment on page 17 - 3.
Dynamic Modification
After you successfully regenerate the section, you can use Drag Dim Val, Drag Entity, and Drag Vertex options to dynamically modify the section. These options enable you to change dimensions over a continuous range and watch the sketch update smoothly. The system maintains all constraints during the dynamic modification and automatically regenerates the sketch. As you dynamically modify a dimension, the sketch may fail regeneration. For example, if the sketch cannot be regenerated so as to follow the cursor, it remains displayed in the last generated position until you move the cursor into a region where the sketch can follow it. If the sketch fails regeneration, the system issues a warning message. With the options Drag Vertex and Drag Entity, you drag the geometry to the desired location, and Sketcher calculates the dimensions for you. With the Drag Dim Val option, you change dimensions by using a thermometer-type scale. The following sections describe the different kinds of dynamic modification in detail.
Sketcher
2 - 51
Using the Drag Dim Val Option

The following procedure explains how to vary dimensions by using the Drag Dim Val option. How to Use the Drag Dim Val Option 1. Choose Drag Dim Val from the MOD SKETCH menu. 2. Select up to five dimensions and choose Done Sel. 3. The system displays a thermotool with the Modify Dims sliders and the Scale slider. Use the appropriate Move Dims sliders to vary corresponding dimensions. Use the Scale slider to vary all the selected dimensions at once. When you use the Scale slider, the system multiplies all dimensions in other sliders by the scale, except for dimensions that do not control length directly (for example, angular dimensions and conic rho dimensions). 4. By moving the mouse, slide the red arrows to point to new values. The Sketcher automatically changes the sketch to reflect your changes. The system displays only the dimensions that you are changing. If you are satisfied with the change, click the left mouse button in the top bar of the thermotool. To reset the tool, click the right mouse button. Use the middle mouse button to abort the process. Note that you can change the Sensitivity value, which in effect changes the range of the slider scales.
Using the Drag Entity Option

The following procedure explains how to drag an entity by using the Drag Entity option. How to Use the Drag Entity Option 1. Choose Drag Entity from the MOD SKETCH menu. 2. Select a dimension to vary, then select an entity. When you move the mouse, the Sketcher modifies the dimension to make the entity follow the cursor. Note that only the selected dimension changes; all the other dimensions remain fixed. 3. To accept the new value of the dimension, click the left mouse button. To abort the changes and restore the original value, click the middle mouse button. 4. To continue the process, select another entity for dragging or pick a new dimension.
2 - 52
Using the Drag Vertex Option

The following procedure explains how to drag vertices with the Drag Vertex option. How to Use the Drag Vertex Option 1. Choose Drag Vertex from the MOD SKETCH menu. 2. Select two dimensions to vary, then select a vertex. The sketch adjusts so the vertex always stays on top of the cursor. 3. To accept the new value of the dimension, click the left mouse button. To abort the changes and restore the original value, click the middle mouse button. 4. To continue the process, select another vertex for dragging or pick new dimensions. Sketcher
Setting an Anchor Point

The notion of anchor point is applicable only when you are not sketching on preexisting geometry. The system stores the anchor point with the sketch. Note that if you later create a coordinate system feature by using the default location, the system places it on the anchor point and updates its location if the anchor point is changed while redefining the section of the base feature. How to Change the Anchor Point 1. Choose Set Anchor from the MOD SKETCH menu. This option is available only when no three-dimensional geometry exists for locating the section. 2. Select the point that you want to use as the anchor for the sketch.
Animated Modification with the Modify Entity Option

With Modify Entity in the MOD SKETCH menu, you can enter a new value for the selected dimension. To update the sketch after you have changed dimension values, regenerate the section with the Regenerate command. The system then performs animated modification, enabling you to see how the size and shape of the section changes according to new dimension values. The system dynamically refits the section into the window, if necessary.
Sketcher
2 - 53
If a regeneration fails, the system terminates the animated modification at the point of failure so you can see which dimensional changes caused that failure. Use RestoreDim or Restore All to restore original dimesnions. Then you can try to modify the section dimensions again. Animated modification is enabled by default. If you want to turn animation off, set the sketcher_animated_modify configuration option to no. How to Modify the Value of a Dimension 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu. The Mod Entity option is active by default. 2. Pick the dimension to be changed with the left mouse button. The system highlights the dimension in red. 3. Enter a new dimension value or relation. The modified value changes from red to white. 4. Modify any other values as necessary. 5. Choose Regenerate to recalculate and update the section.
Zero Dimension
You cannot enter an angular dimension value of zero in Sketcher mode. The allowable range of values is 1.0000e-5 to 1.0000e+5. Two possible ways to achieve a zero-value angular dimension are as follows: Use Align to align an entity to the part. Enter a very small value, then delete the dimension after regenerating the sketch. Pro/ENGINEER then assumes that the entities are aligned.
Negative Dimensions
For linear dimensions, you can enter a negative dimension value in Sketcher mode. This causes the geometry to reverse direction. The sign of the dimension is always maintained in the section sketch. In Part mode, the sign of the dimension always appears to be positive. The following figure illustrates negative dimensions.
2 - 54
Modify to -40.
Sketcher
Relations
You can create a relation for section dimensions simply by entering the relation as you modify the dimension value. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you with the relation and asks if you want to keep it. In this way, you can build in the necessary relationships between geometry. You can also use the Relation option in the SKETCHER menu (see Adding Relations to Sections on page 2 - 39 for more information).
Modifying Spline Points

To modify the location and orientation of a spline, modify the location of its endpoints. As the endpoints move, Pro/ENGINEER resizes and rotates the spline to fit. The resulting spline is geometrically similar to the original spline. Note: You cannot move the endpoints of a spline if they are dimensioned. To modify the shape of the spline, you must move the interpolation points. Several ways to do this are described in the following sections. When you modify the endpoints of a spline, Pro/ENGINEER adjusts the spline point coordinates automatically. The adjustments are in accordance with mathematical rules established in Pro/ENGINEER.
Sketcher
2 - 55
How to Modify a Spline 1. Modify the X,Y, Z coordinates and the tangency of the spline endpoints. Modifying the endpoints alters the other definition points of the spline. 2. Modify the X, Y, Z coordinates of the other spline definition points. You need to do this only if the Pro/ENGINEER adjustments to the spline are not satisfactory, or if the spline needs to be explicitly defined with specified input values.
Modifying the Tangency of a Spline

After you create the spline, you can modify the tangency of the endpoints. How to Modify the Tangency of Endpoints 1. Choose Modify > Mod Entity. 2. Pick a spline. 3. Choose Tangency from the MOD SPLINE menu. 4. Pick the start or end point. The system displays the current status of the point (tangent or non-tangent). 5. The system displays the MOD TANG menu, which has the following options: AddAdd a tangency condition to the selected point. RemoveRemove a tangency condition from the selected point.
6. To modify another endpoint, pick the other endpoint and choose Add or Remove. 7. Choose Done Modify to exit the MOD SPLINE menu.
Modifying the Spline Using the Mouse

The following procedure explains how to modify a spline by using the mouse and the Move Pnts option. How to Modify the Shape of the Spline 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu, then pick on the spline. The system displays the spline points as white circles. 2. Choose Move Pnts from the MOD SPLINE menu. The system displays the MOVE PNTS submenu, which has the following options:
2 - 56
Single PntMove individual spline points. Pick a spline point to be moved using the left mouse button. The system highlights the point in red and the spline rubberbands until you click the left mouse button again. Pnt RangeMove a range of spline points using the left mouse button to select them. You do this by picking two points to bound the range to be moved. You then select any point within this range and pick a new position for that point on a section plane. After you move the individual points, choose Done Move.
3. The spline immediately adjusts to display its new shape. Continue to pick and relocate points until you have moved all the desired points. 4. When you have modified the spline as desired, choose Done Modify and regenerate the section. If you decide not to change the spline before choosing Done Modify, choose Quit Modify to leave the spline unchanged. Sketcher
Modifying the Spline Using the Control Poly Option

The Control Poly option enables you to intuitively modify the shape of a spline. When you choose Control Poly (short for control polygon), spline control points appear with line segments between them on the spline. The line segments begin and end at the beginning and end points of the spline, and intermediate segments always remain tangent to the spline. These line segments are visual aids for modifying the shape of the spline. To move the spline control points, pick and drag them to a new location. The spline curve rubberbands with the point movement to display how the spline shape changes with the movement of the points. Notes: You cannot move spline endpoints using the Control Poly option. You cannot use Control Poly on a spline that has a tangency condition defined for one end only.
Sketcher
2 - 57
How to Modify a Spline Using the Control Poly Option 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu and pick the spline that you want to modify. The system displays the MOD SPLINE menu. 2. Choose Control Poly. The system displays the control polygon of the spline in white. 3. To adjust the shape of the spline, pick a point on the control polygon and drag it to a new location. You cannot pick endpoints. The spline rubberbands to its new shape as you move the point. 4. To place the control point, click the left mouse button in the desired location for the point.
Modifying the Spline by Its Coordinates

When a spline has been associated to a local coordinate system, you can move the spline points by entering values relative to the coordinate system. You can change the type of coordinate system between Cartesian (X, Y, and Z), cylindrical (radius, theta, and Z), and spherical (radius, theta, and phi) when you read or save points to a file. However, when you enter new values from the keyboard, you can enter Cartesian values only. The MOD SPLINE menu options used for coordinates are as follows: CoordsModify the X- and Y- coordinates of the points by entering values. Read PntsRead in coordinates from a specified text file. Save PntsWrite the current coordinates into a specified text file. You can then edit and read this file using the option Read Pnts. Info PntsDisplay the coordinates of a spline in an Information Window. You must select the coordinate type you want used in the value display.
How to Modify Spline Point Coordinates by Entering Their Values 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu, then pick on the spline. The system displays the spline points. 2. Choose Coords from the MOD SPLINE menu. This option is valid only if the spline was defined to a local coordinate system. 3. Pick the point you want to move.
2 - 58
4. Respond to the prompts by entering values for the X and Y coordinates. Enter a new value, or accept the default value. 5. Choose Done Modify to save the changes. Note: If you have a license for Pro/FEATURE, you can also modify the Z-coordinates of a spline when you create certain features (for example, a sweep). For more information, see Three-Dimensional Sweeps on page 6 - 7. Saving Spline Points to a File You can save spline points to a file with values representing Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate systems. How to Save Spline Points to a File 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu and pick on a spline. 2. Choose Save Points from the MOD SPLINE menu. 3. Enter a file name. 4. Choose the coordinate system type from the COORD TYPE menu. 5. Pro/ENGINEER creates a spline point definition file with the coordinate system type printed in the file. This is a standard text file and can be edited using the operating system editor. You can then use the edited file by choosing Read Points. Modifying Spline Points Coordinates through a File The following procedure explains how to modify coordinates of spline points by reading in a data file. How to Modify Spline Point Coordinates Using a File 1. Create a spline point definition file and modify it. 2. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu, then pick on the spline. The system displays the spline interpolation points as white circles. 3. Choose Read Points from the MOD SPLINE menu and enter the name of the spline points. 4. Choose the coordinate system type from the COORD TYPE menu. 5. The system reads the spline points file. Sketcher
Sketcher
2 - 59
6. If the number of points in the file is not equal to the number of points in the spline, Pro/ENGINEER asks if you want to automatically add to, or remove points from, the spline. Respond yes to adjust the number of spline points to correspond to the number of points in the file. Respond no to abort the reading of the point file. If the spline does not appear as expected, you probably specified the wrong coordinate system type. Pro/ENGINEER does not check what you selected in Step 4 against what is written in the spline file. Try reading in the file again and specifying a different coordinate system type. If the spline endpoints are dimensioned, the system ignores the modifications to the endpoint coordinates.
Modifying the Number of Points on a Spline

After you have created a spline, you can add points to, or remove them from the spline. How to Add Points to a Spline 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu and select the spline you want to modify. The spline disappears and the system displays the spline points. 2. Choose Add Pnts from the MOD SPLINE menu, then choose one of following options from the NEW POINTS menu: InteriorAdd points to the interior of the spline. Pick any location on the spline between any two existing points. ExteriorExtend the spline by adding points beyond its current endpoints. Pick the spline endpoint to extend, then pick additional points.
Note: If you try to add a new spline point very close to an existing point, Pro/ENGINEER may tell you that the new point is too close to the existing point. In this case, add the new point farther away, then move it to the desired location. How to Delete Points from a Spline 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu and select the spline you want to modify. The spline disappears and the system displays its points. 2. Choose Delete Pnts from the MOD SPLINE menu. The spline reappears in red and its points remain visible.
2 - 60
3. Pick a spline point to be removed. The point disappears. How to View the Current Coordinate Values of Spline Points 1. Pick a spline. 2. Choose Info Pnts from the MOD SPLINE menu. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays the current values for spline coordinates in the Information Window. Note: You can use the Sparse option to decrease the number of points on a spline, or the Smooth option to make the spline smoother. These options work the same way in Sketcher mode as they do for redefining curves. See Modifying Imported Curves on page 16 - 27 for a complete description of these options.
Sketcher
Modifying Text Entities

When you choose Modify and select Sketcher text, the system displays the MOD SEC TEXT2 menu, which lists the following options: Text LineModify the text message. Text StyleModify the text style.
If you choose the Text Line option, Pro/ENGINEER prompts you for the new text string in the Message Window. The system then replaces the old text string with the new string. If you choose Text Style, the system displays the Sketcher Text Style dialog box, as shown in the following figure. Dialog Box for Text Style
You can change the following text attributes: FontSelect a new font from this drop-down list (see the following table). The available fonts are as follows:
Sketcher
2 - 61
Font Name font3d
Description Pro/ENGINEER 3-D font used for extruded text (also the default for all text features) Pro/ENGINEER ASCII font Leroy Calcomp Greek characters Calcomp alphanumeric characters
font leroy cal_grek cal_alf
HeightEnter the new text height in this field. AngleEnter the new text angle in this field. This value affects the rotation angle of the rectangle containing the text. A positive value rotates the rectangle counterclockwise. WidthEnter the new text width factor in this field. Note that this option is not available in Part mode. Slant AngleEnter the new text slant angle in this field. This option affects how the text is slanted with respect to the sides of the rectangle that contains it.
The action buttons are as follows: ApplyApply the new values to the text. ResetReset the value to the default value. CancelExit from the dialog box.
To change any of the fields, enter the new value in the appropriate field. Select the Apply button to apply the new value. When you have finished changing the text style attributes, select the Cancel button.
Deleting Entities
Selecting Delete from the SKETCHER menu brings up the DELETION menu with the following options: Delete ItemDelete selected items. Delete ManyDelete several items by enclosing them in the selection box.
2 - 62
Delete AllDelete all section geometry, similar to erasing everything off a sheet. Delete All affects only entities and dimensions and does not undo changes made to the Sketcher environment. If you have sketched multiple subsections for a blend, Delete All deletes all entities in all subsections. To delete all the entities of the current subsection without affecting those in other subsections, use Delete Many. Note: When you redefine a section with Redefine/Scheme, Delete All deletes only all section dimensions without deleting geometry.
Undelete LastRestore the most recently deleted entity, one at time. Use this option repeatedly until you restore all items you need. Any dependent entities, such as dimensions, also reappear with the restored entities. Undelete Last restores entities only before you regenerate the section. After the regeneration, deleted items cannot be restored. Undelete Last restores all entities deleted with Delete All.
Sketcher
You can use Delete Item in combination with Delete Many. Note: If two entities lie on top of each other, the system deletes the entity that was created first.
Section Geometry Information

The Sec Info option in the INFO menu accesses information about the section geometry. The following options are listed in the SEC INFO menu: EntitySelect a single entity about which to get information. The system displays the type of geometry, endpoint tangencies, and endpoint coordinates (only if a coordinate system is selected). Intersect PtSelect two entities to determine their intersection points. If the selected entities do not physically intersect, the Sketcher extrapolates the entities to find an intersection. If the extrapolated entities do not intersect (for example, parallel lines), the system does not return an intersection value. The system displays the angle of slope at the intersection point for both entities and the intersection coordinate values (if a coordinate system is selected).
Sketcher
2 - 63
Tangent PtSelect two entities to determine where their slopes are equal. The selected entities do not have to be touching. The system displays the angle of slope at the tangency points, the distance between the two tangency points and, if a coordinate system is selected, the coordinates of the tangency points. ReferencesGraphically highlight the references used by the section. The color code is as follows: SurfacesYellow EdgesBlue Axes, datums, and featuresRed
AngleMeasure the angle between any two lines. Select the two lines. Pro/ENGINEER displays the measured angle in the Message Window. DistanceMeasure the distance between any two parallel lines, two points, or a point and a line. CrvtureDispDisplay the curvature of splines in the section using the CRV DISPLAY menu options. The CRV DISPLAY menu options are as follows: Select CurveSelect a curve for curvature analysis display. ScaleChange the scale of the curvature display. DensityChange the density of the curvature display.
Grid InfoDisplay the current grid values in the Message Window (spacing and angle, in degrees).
For the options Entity, Intersect Pt, and Tangent Pt, you can also choose a coordinate system to identify pertinent coordinate values for the Sketcher entities, as follows: Use CsysSelect a coordinate system from which to obtain entity coordinate values.You can select only Sketcher coordinate systems that were created in the current sketch. When you pick on the coordinate system, it highlights in magenta until you do one of the following: Exit SEC INFO processing. Choose No Csys. Choose Use Csys again and pick another coordinate system.
2 - 64
Choose an option from the SEC INFO menu that does not require a coordinate system.
No CsysThe system does not give any coordinate values in the section information. Pro/ENGINEER determines other information, such as length or angles, relative to the sketch coordinate system. The sketch coordinate system has the X-axis along the horizontal and the Y-axis along the vertical.
Sketcher Hints
This section provides hints that may be helpful when you are in Sketcher mode: Use the delete-dimension-undelete process when it is difficult to select geometry for dimensioning. Use points to locate fillets and arcs. Use centerlines to locate points and lines. Use horizontal and vertical lines to draw tangent arcs. Exaggerate small angles when you create them, then modify the values. Explicitly specify orientation of the sketch. Regenerate complex geometry one section at a time. Manipulate Sketcher constraints to obtain the desired geometry. Use automatic dimensioning to complete dimension schemes after all critical design dimensions have been created manually. Sketcher
Delete - Dimension - Undelete

When geometry lies on a centerline or axis, it may be difficult to select the geometry for dimensioning. To select geometry that lies on a centerline or axis, use Query Sel. Optionally, you can delete the center lines as follows. How to Delete the Centerline or Axis 1. Dimension the geometry. 2. Undelete the centerline or axis. The following figure illustrates an example of when you would need to use this process.
Sketcher
2 - 65
Deleting a Centerline When Dimensioning
This centerline has to be temporarily deleted to create dimension d1.
Using Points to Locate Fillets and Arcs

When you create fillets between non-horizontal and non-vertical lines, create a point at the intersection of the lines to dimension to theoretical sharps (see the following figure). Using a Point When Dimensioning
2 - 66
Using Centerlines to Locate Points and Lines

You can use centerlines to locate points and lines (see the following figures). Using a Centerline to Locate Circular Entities
This centerline locates the centerpoints of the two circular entities at the same horizontal location.
Sketcher
Using a Centerline to Locate a Sketched Feature at an Angle

This centerline locates the rectangular sketched feature at an angle so it can be dimensioned as if it were simply vertical and horizontal lines.
Sketcher
2 - 67
Using Horizontal and Vertical Lines to Draw Tangent Arcs

To ensure that an arc will be tangent to the horizontal (or vertical) plane, sketch a horizontal (or vertical) line, then use the right mouse button to create the arc (see the following figure). Sketching an Arc
If this line is already present, delete it, sketch the arc, undelete, then delete the temporary line. Draw this temporary line to create a tangent arc.
If there is another line sketched at this point, use the delete-sketch-undelete technique.
Creating Small Angles

To create small angles, you can slightly exaggerate the sketch so Sketcher does not make any unintended assumptions about the angle and does not consider the angle dimension extra. Then you can modify the angle to the required value (see the following figure). Alternatively, you can use the Constraints option to disable this constraint. Creating Small Angles
1.0 10.0
Sketched angle
Modified angle
2 - 68
Specifying the Orientation of the Sketch

When you sketch geometry, you must create at least one horizontal or vertical line, or an explicit coordinate dimension for Pro/ENGINEER to determine the section orientation. For example, when you create a triangle, as shown in figure a, the regenerated sketch appears as in figure b. Note that the orientation of the triangle has changed because the system assumed that one line was horizontal. To clearly communicate your design intent, you must add an explicit angle to the sketch (see c in the following illustration). Adding an Angle to Specify Orientation
Sketcher
12o
a)
b)
c)
Regenerating Complex Geometry

Sketch and regenerate complex geometry in steps, as shown in the following figure.
Sketcher
2 - 69
Regenerating Complex Geometry in Steps
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
2 - 70
3
Datums
Datums are used as references for constructing the model. They are not geometry features, but they aid in geometry construction by acting as references for when you sketch a feature, orient the model, assemble components, and so on. Because of their versatility, you use datums frequently. Topic Datum Display Datum Planes Datum Axes Datum Points Datum Curves Coordinate Systems Graphs Creating an Evaluate Feature Page 3-2 3-2 3-8 3 - 10 3 - 17 3 - 53 3 - 59 3 - 60
3-1
Datum Display
To control the display of datum planes, datum axes, datum point symbols and tags, and coordinate systems, choose View > Datum Display, and set the appropriate options in the Datum Display dialog box. Note: You can display all datum points with or without name tags. You can also control the display of datum features by setting the appropriate configuration options to yes or no (see the following table).
Datum feature Datum plane Datum axis Datum point
Configuration option controlling display datum_display axis_display datum_point_display datum_point_symbol_display datum_point_tag_display display_coordinate_sys
Coordinate system
Datum curves are unaffected by any of these options for datum display. If you want to blank a datum curve, place it on a layer and blank the layer. Similarly, you can turn off the display of individual datum features or datum name text by placing them on a layer, then blanking the layer. You can also reassign the colors of datums and datum tags by choosing View > Model Setup > Color & Appearances.
Datum Planes
You can use datum planes to create a reference on a part where one does not already exist. For example, you can sketch or place features on a datum plane when there is no appropriate planar surface. You can also dimension to a datum plane as if it were an edge. When you are constructing an assembly, you can use datums with assembly commands.
3-2
Datum planes are infinite. You can size datum planes, except those made on-the-fly, to visually fit a part, feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius (see Sizing Datum Planes on page 3 - 4). You create a datum plane by specifying constraints that locate it with respect to existing geometry. For example, you might make a datum plane pass through the axis of a hole and parallel to a planar surface. The constraints you choose must locate the datum plane relative to the model without ambiguity (except for the option Thru Cyl).
Datum Plane Colors and Names

By default, datum planes have two sides: yellow and red. You use the colors when you assemble components, orient views, and sketch references. Pro/ENGINEER displays datum planes as red or yellow, depending on which side is facing the screen. When you create datum planes, the system assigns them names in sequential order (DTM1, DTM2, and so on). You can change the names of the datum planes using the Setup option in the Part menu and the Name option in the PART SETUP menu. Datums
Selecting Datum Planes

To select a datum plane, you can pick on its name, or select one of its boundaries. The visual boundaries of the datums sometimes get in the way of selecting surfaces or edges of the model. If this happens, use Query Sel, or set the configuration file option select_on_dtm_edges to sketcher_only so the visual edges of the datum are selectable only when you dimension sketched sections.
Creating Datum Planes On-the-Fly

In the process of feature creation, the system lets you create a datum plane on-the-fly using the Make Datum option in the Setup Plane menu. Consider the following rules about the datum planes created on-the-fly: Datum planes that you create during feature creation are internal to and belong to that feature.
Datums
3-3
Datum planes on-the fly become invisible after you create the feature. Any associated dimensions positioning the datum plane are included with those of the feature. This gives you more choices for varying dimensions when you create a feature pattern (see Rotational Patterns of Sketched Features on page 14 - 9). Datum planes created on-the-fly cannot be referenced by other features. When you use Copy/Mirror to copy features and use datum planes on-the-fly as the mirror plane, this datum plane stays visible because it can be referenced by more than one feature.
Datum Planes for Creating Cross Sections

When you create datum planes on-the-fly to use in creating a cross-sectional view of a model or quilt, Pro/ENGINEER puts them on a layer named xsec_datums. The layer xsec_datums is automatically blanked.
Sizing Datum Planes

Although datum planes are actually infinite planes, by default the system displays them scaled to the model size. The size of a displayed datum plane changes with the dimensions of a part. You can size all datum planes, except those made on-the-fly, to visually fit a part, feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius using the Redefine command. When you select the plane to redefine, the OPTIONS menu displays the following options for sizing the datum plane: DefaultSize the datum plane to the model (part or assembly). Fit PartSize the datum plane to the selected part. This option applies to assemblies only. Fit FeatureSize the datum plane to a part or assembly feature. Fit SurfaceSize the datum plane to any surface. Fit EdgeSize the datum plane to fit an edge. Fit AxisSize the datum plane to an axis. Fit RadiusSize the datum plane to a specified radius, centering it within the outline of the model.
3-4
Creating a Datum Plane

The following procedure describes basic steps for creating a datum plane. How to Create a Datum Plane 1. Choose FEAT CLASS > Datum or SETUP PLANE > Make Datum (see Setting Up the Sketching Plane on page 4 - 3), then choose DATUM > Plane. 2. Choose the desired constraint option from the DATUM PLANE menu. 3. Pick the necessary references on the model. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until you have established the necessary constraints. 5. Choose Done to create the datum plane, Restart to respecify all the constraints, or Quit to abort.
Continuous Datum Plane Creation

Datums Normally, you create a single datum plane, then you have to redo the menu picks Feature, Create, Datum, and so on to create additional planes. However, when you set the configuration file option repeat_datum_create to yes, you can continue to make the same type of datum feature (plane, axis, and so on) without redoing all the menu picks, until you want to end. This option does not work when you are making datum planes on-the-fly.
Creating Default Offset Datum Planes

If your first feature in the model is a solid feature, you can add a set of default planes that are offset from the default coordinate system by using the Offset Planes option. How to Create a Set of Default Offset Datum Planes 1. Choose Feature > Create > Datum. 2. Choose DATUM > Offset Planes. Note: If the model has already a coordinate system with the name DEFAULT, that coordinate system will be used as a reference. 3. Enter the offset distances in the X-, Y-, and Z-direction with respect to the default coordinate system.
Datums
3-5
Datum Constraints that Can Only Be Used Alone

The following datum constraints can only be used alone, because each completely locates the datum plane: Through/PlaneCreate a datum plane coincident with a planar surface. Offset/PlaneCreate a datum plane that is parallel to a plane and is offset from the plane by a specified distance (see the figure below). Offset/Coord SysCreate a datum plane that is normal to one of the coordinate system axes and offset from the origin of the coordinate system. When you select this option, the system prompts you to select the axis to which the plane will be normal. Enter the offset along this axis. BlendSectionCreate a datum plane through the section that was used to make a feature. If multiple sections exist, as for a blend, the system prompts you for the section number.
The offset of an Offset, Plane and Offset, Coord Sys datum plane is a parameter that can be used (for example, in patterns or relations) and modified.
Datum Constraints that Can Be Used Alone

The options Through > AxisEdgeCurv and Through > Cylinder can be used alone. When the options are used alone, Pro/ENGINEER establishes the orientation of the datum. These placement types are intended for revolved geometry, where the orientation of the datum makes no difference (see the next figure). Through/AxisEdgeCurv Datum Plane
Select this axis
3-6
When you specify the orientation of these datum planes, use additional constraints, otherwise the system may change the orientation when you modify the part.
Datum Constraints that Are Used in Pairs

The following constraints must be used in combination with other constraints: Through > AxisEdgeCurv Normal > AxisEdgeCurv Normal > Plane Parallel > Plane Tangent > Cylinder Through > Point/Vertex Angle > Plane
You can pair the Through > Point/Vertex option with the options Through > AxisEdgeCurv, Through > Cylinder, Parallel > Plane, or Normal > Plane. With Normal > Plane, two constraints of the type Through > Point/Vertex define the plane explicitly. If you specify Normal > Plane and one constraints of the type Through > Point/Vertex, Pro/ENGINEER creates the plane in the default orientation. You can also use Through > Point/Vertex to select three datum points through which the datum plane will pass. You can use the option Through > AxisEdgeCurv to create datum planes through imported wireframe geometry and datum curves. The option can be used as a standalone when the selected entity is a circle or an arc, or a spline that lies in a plane. When you use lines, you need two lines to establish the proper constraints.
Datums
Offset and Angled Datums

The options Offset > Plane, Offset > Coord Sys, and Angle > Plane create datum planes whose location or orientation is governed by a parameter. These parameters are especially useful when you are making patterns of datum planes. The possible options for specifying the offset distance are as follows: Thru PointDefine the location by picking a point on the model through which the datum plane will pass.
Datums
3-7
Enter ValueEnter a value for the offset and angle. An arrow appears on the part that indicates the positive direction of the offset and angle. Use this option when the datum does not pass through any other point on the model.
Datum Using Through with AxisEdgeCurv and Angle with Plane
Angle
Datum references this surface for angle.
Using a Composite Curve as a Reference

It is good practise to use a composite curve as a references, rather than its underlying segments. This will prevent the feature from failing if any segment has been deleted. Note that when you constrain a datum plane to be normal to a composite curve at the connection point of two non-tangent segments of the curve, the features orientation is determined by the curve segments closest to the start of the composite curve.
Datum Axes
Like datum planes, datum axes can be used as references for feature creation. Datum axes are particularly useful for making datum planes, placing items concentrically, and creating radial patterns. Datum axes, as opposed to feature axes, are individual features that can be suppressed, blanked, or deleted. Note: The system automatically creates an axis for extruded arcs only when you set the configuration file option show_axes_for_extr_arcs to yes.
3-8
The next figure illustrates how to use datum axes.
Through edge Through cylinder Normal through point on surface (normal to surface)
Intersection of two planes
Through two points
Datum Axes Names

Pro/ENGINEER names datum axes A_#, where # is the number of datum axes that have been created. You can change the default name of the axis (see Modifying Feature Names on page 16 - 11). You can select an axis by its name, or by selecting the axis itself.
Datums
Creating a Datum Axis

This section explains how to create a datum axis. How to Create a Datum Axis 1. Choose Datum from the FEATURES menu, then Axis from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose the desired constraint option from the DATUM AXIS menu. The possible options are as follows: Thru EdgeCreate a datum axis through the specified straight edge. Normal PlnCreate an axis that is normal to a surface, with linear dimensions locating it on that surface. Pnt Norm PlnCreate an axis through a datum point and normal to a specified plane.
Datums
3-9
Thru CylCreate a datum axis through the imaginary axis of any surface of revolution (where an axis does not already exist). Select a cylindrical surface or revolved surface. Note that some features that only appear to be cylindrical, such as a remove surface round, cannot be selected. Two PlanesCreate a datum axis at the intersection of the two specified planes (datum planes or surfaces). The two planes cannot be parallel, but they do not have to be shown to intersect on the screen. Two Pnt/VtxCreate an axis between two datum points or edge vertices. Select the datum points or edge vertices. Pnt on SurfCreate an axis through any datum point located on a surface. You did not have to create the point using the On Surface option. The axis will be normal to the surface at that point. Tan CurveCreate an axis that is tangent to a curve or edge at its endpoint or any datum point on the curve. Select the curve or edge to be tangent to, then select an endpoint of the curve or edge.
3. Pick the necessary references for the selected option.
Continuous Datum Axes Creation

You can set a configuration file option to specify continuous datum axes creation (instead of making multiple menu picks for each axis). To do this, set the configuration file option repeat_datum_create to yes. For more information, see Continuous Datum Plane Creation on page 3 - 5.
Creating New Datum Points for a Datum Axis

In the process of defining a datum axis, you may need to create a datum point on-the-fly, for example, when you use the Pnt on Surf or Pnt Norm Pln option. For more information, see Creating Datum Points On-the-Fly on page 3 - 16.
Datum Points
Datum points are used to specify point loads for mesh generation, attach datum targets and notes in drawings, and create coordinate systems and pipe feature trajectories. You can also place axes, datum planes, holes, and shafts at a datum point.
3 - 10
By default, Pro/ENGINEER displays a datum point as an X, with the associated text in the form PNTn, where n is the number of the datum point. To select a datum point, pick on the datum point text or on the point itself. You can change the display symbol used for datum points using the configuration file option datum_point_symbol. A datum point can use any of the following symbols: CROSS, CIRCLE, TRIANGLE, or SQUARE. You can rename datum points using the Name command in the SETUP menu (see Modifying Feature Names on page 16 - 11). For a datum point feature with multiple points, you can rename each point individually. Datum points declared in a layout cannot be renamed.
Creating Datum Points Using Model Geometry

The following procedure explains how to create datum points using model geometry. How to Create a Datum Point Using Model Geometry 1. Choose Point from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose one of the following options from the DATUM POINT menu: On SurfaceCreate a datum point on a surface. Dimension the datum point from two planes or edges. Datum points created using this option can be patterned. You can select the locating dimensions to establish pattern direction. If you create a datum point on a surface that belongs to a quilt, the point references the whole quilt rather than the particular surface on which it was created. Offset SurfCreate a datum point offset in a specied direction from a surface at a specied distance from two referenced placement planes or edges. Curve X SrfCreate a datum point at the intersection of a curve and a surface. The curve can be a part edge, surface feature edge, datum curve, axis, or an imported datum curve (see Importing Datum Curves on page 3 - 26). The surface can be a part surface, surface feature, or datum plane. Datums
Datums
3 - 11
The system creates the datum point at the location at which the surface and the curve intersect that is closest to the pick used to select the curve. The system remembers the initial pick location on the curve, not on the surface. For example, if you modify the angle used to place a datum plane, Pro/ENGINEER places the point at the nearest corresponding intersection of the curve and planar surface. On VertexCreate a datum point on the vertex of a part edge, surface feature edge, datum curve, or imported wireframe. Offset CsysCreate a datum point array at an offset from one or more coordinate systems.
Note: You can only change the array of one or more datum points created using Offset Csys by using the Redefine command. Three SrfCreate a datum point at the intersection of three surfaces. Each surface can be a part surface, surface feature, or datum plane. At CenterCreate a datum point at the center of an arc or circle. On CurveCreate a datum point on an edge or curve with a parameter value for its location that references the length along the curve from one of its vertices. Crv X CrvCreate a datum point on one curve that is located where it is the minimum distance to another curve. The curves do not need to intersect. Offset PointCreate one or more datum points at an offset from a point or vertex.
3. Choose Done from the DTM PNT MODE menu. 4. Select the necessary entities to constrain the location of the point. Note: In certain cases, you cannot individually select multiple datum points created as a single feature. In these cases, Pro/ENGINEER does not allow you to pick the points.
3 - 12
Creating Datum Point Arrays

A datum point array is a single feature consisting of one or more datum points. You create these datum points by specifying three coordinate values, relative to some coordinate system. You can enter the coordinate values from the keyboard, or they can be read in from a file. You can create dimension patterns of datum point arrays. How to Create a Datum Point Array 1. Choose Point from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose Offset Csys from the DATUM POINT menu. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays the POINT ARRAY menu, which has the following options: With DimsCreate a parametric datum point array that can contain up to 100 points. Without DimsCreate a non-parametric datum point array. The system does not assign names or modifiable dimensions to individual points in the array. This point is recommended when the number of points is large.
Datums
Note: The values in a non-parametric datum point array can be changed using Redefine, References. However, the number of points in the array can only be added by using Enter Points. 4. Choose Set Crd Sys to select or create a coordinate system. The system displays the GET COORD S menu. Choose Select and select an existing coordinate system from the namelist menu, or choose Create to create a new one (for more information, see Coordinate Systems on page 3 - 53). 5. Set the coordinate system type by selecting Cartesian, Cylindrical, or Spherical from the SET CSYS TYP menu. 6. Choose one of the DTM PNT ARR menu options: Enter PointsAt the prompt in the Message Window, enter the directional offsets (X, Y, and Z; r, theta, and Z; or r, phi, and theta) for one or more datum points. The datum point array table will not be saved to disk unless you subsequently save the points using the option Edit Points
Datums
3 - 13
in this menu, or Output in the PNT ARR TBL menu. In this case, these points appear in the NAMES menu namelist when you choose Redefine or Modify and select by name. Once added to an array table, these points also appear in table arrays for the Modify or Redefine commands. Edit PointsUse the system editor to enter rows of offsets for each datum point in the array, then exit from the editor. Pro/ENGINEER saves the array table for this array of points in a disk file named coordsysname.pts.#, where # is the version number that is automatically updated each time you write the file. Read PointsRead coordinates of the datum points from a file. Enter the name of an ASCII file that contains rows of offsets in the appropriate format, or the name of an IGES file. The ASCII file format can contain point numbers in the first column. When the system reads the file, these numbers are ignored. The ASCII file should be formatted so the three coordinates for each point are on one line. If more than three numbers are on one line, the system assumes the second, third, and fourth are the coordinates of interest. This means that you can number datum points, if desired. You can separate the coordinates using spaces or tabs, and the coordinates can be integers or floating-point numbers. The file name should end with the extension .pts. You can use any combination of these techniques for the current coordinate system. When a datum point array is created, the system immediately displays points that have been successfully read or entered (before you select Done) as white Xs without tags. 7. If desired, you can set up a new coordinate system and specify more points by repeating Steps 4 through 6. 8. When you have finished, choose Done. The system displays the datum point names in yellow and displays their tags in white. In the feature information, Pro/ENGINEER displays a table of the coordinate system names and the offsets of the points for the datum point array. Modify the array by choosing Modify from the PART menu and picking a point in the array. For details, see Modifying Points in a Datum Point Array on page 16 - 9.
3 - 14
Creating On Curve Datum Points

You can create a datum point on a curve or edge, with a parameter value for its location that references the length along the curve from one of its vertices. How to Create a Datum Point on a Curve or Edge 1. Choose On Curve and Done from the DATUM POINT menu. 2. To dimension the point, choose one of the PNT DIM MODE menu options: OffsetDimension the point to a planar surface. Select the surface from which to measure the offset distance. The default value given in the dimension prompt is the location at which you selected the curve or edge. If you modify the location of the point on the curve, the dimension measures the distance from the surface to the point. Length RatioExpress the distance from the point to the curve vertex as a ratio of the total length of the curve, shown as a fraction in decimal form. Enter a ratio value between 0 and 1, where 0 is at the vertex from which you are measuring, and 1 is at the other end of the curve. For example, entering .25 places the datum point at 1/4 of the curve length from the vertex from which the measurement is made toward the end. The default value given in the dimension prompt is the location at which you selected the curve or edge. Pro/ENGINEER displays the dimension as # REL. Actual LenDimension the point by measuring a specific distance from the vertex of the curve. Enter a value between 0 and the total length of the curve. The system displays this range in the prompt for the value. Pro/ENGINEER displays the dimension as # LEN.
Datums
3. Select the edge or curve at the location where you want to add the datum point. 4. If desired, continue adding points along this curve or edge. 5. Choose Done when you have finished adding points. 6. Enter dimensions for each of the datum points.
Datums
3 - 15
Note: If you choose Length Ratio or Actual Len, the dimensions are only within a tolerance limit determined by the part accuracy and are not necessarily exact. After you complete the feature, the system displays the accuracy in a message. However, if you choose Offset, the dimensions used are exact.
Creating Datum Points On-the-Fly

When you must select or create points while creating a feature, the system displays the GEN PNT SEL menu, which lists the following options: SelectSelect an edge vertex, curve end, or datum point. UnselectUnselect a previously selected edge vertex, curve end, or datum point. Create PointsCreate datum points.
How to Create New Datum Points 1. Choose Create Points from the GEN PNT SEL menu. 2. The DTM PNT MODE menu appear with the following options: Add NewCreate new datum points in the feature. select an option from the DATUM POINT menu, and follow the system prompts to locate the points.
Note: For the current master feature, the DATUM POINT menu shows only valid options for creating datum points. ChangeChange the placement of an existing datum point. Select the point you want to change, choose an option from the DATUM POINT menu, and define the point as usual. RemoveRemove selected datum points from the feature.
3. Once you create all required points, choose DTM PNT MODE > Done. Upon creation, the system automatically selects all new points for an operation.
Creating Offset Datum Points

Using the Offset Point option, you can create a datum point by specifying an offset direction, then selecting another point (datum point, vertex, or coordinate system) from which the new datum point is to be offset.
3 - 16
How to Create an Offset Datum Point 1. Choose Offset Point from the DATUM POINT menu. 2. Select how to specify the offset direction using one of the following options in the OFFSET DIR menu: Entity/EdgeThe offset direction is along a straight edge, axis, or straight curve. Plane NormThe offset direction is normal to a plane. 2 PointsThe offset direction is indicated by a line passing through two points (two vertices, points, or coordinate systems). Coord SysThe offset is along the axes of a coordinate system.
3. Select the appropriate references for the direction of the new points. 4. Pick the points from which to offset. Choose Done Sel when you have finished. 5. Enter the offset distance along the direction shown (if you selected Coord Sys, the system prompts you for an offset distance along each axis in turn). A negative value creates an offset in the opposite direction. Datums
Datum Curves
You use datum curves to create surfaces and other features, or as sweep trajectories. By default, Pro/ENGINEER displays datum curves in orange. You can modify this color using either the Appearances dialog box, or by setting the configuration file option system_curves_color percentages for red, green, and blue.
Sketched Datum Curves

You sketch datum curves in the same manner as any other features. Sketched curves can consist of one or more sketched segment and of one or more open or closed loop. However, using datum curves for other features is usually restricted to a single curve (which can consist of many segments) of an open or closed loop.
Datums
3 - 17
As you sketch the datum curves, Pro/ENGINEER creates a single composite datum curve on top of discrete sketched datum curves. For this type of composite curve, you cannot redefine a start point. The composite curve created from a sketched curve can be selected as a trajectory, for example as a sweep trajectory. Use Query Sel to select underlying sketched curve entities. How to Create a Sketched Datum Curve 1. Choose DATUM > Curve > Sketch > Done. 2. The feature creation dialog appears with two elements: SectionSketch datum curves. X-hatching(Optional) Add cross-hatching to the area bounded by the curve. This element is available only for closed sections.
3. Set up a sketching plane using the SETUP SK PLN and SETUP PLANE menus. 4. Select the direction of viewing by choosing Flip or Okay from the DIRECTION menu. 5. Set up a horizontal or vertical reference for sketching. 6. Sketch the curve and dimension it. Choose Done to exit Sketcher. 7. To add cross-hatching, choose X-hatching and Define from the dialog box. Choose one of the options in the DISPLAY HATCH menu, followed by Done. The options are: DisplayCrosshatch the area bounded by a closed loop section. The cross-hatch will be visible in all modes (if you have Pro/DETAIL), but is modifiable in Drawing mode only. No DisplayDo not create any crosshatching.
8. Choose OK from the dialog box.
Datum Curves at Surface Intersections

You can create datum curves at the intersection of any part surface or surface feature and a datum plane. Each pair of intersected surfaces produces a separate segment of the curve. Pro/ENGINEER combines each connected segment loop into a composite curve (see Composite Datum Curves on page 3 - 27). Note: Datum curves cannot be created at the intersection of two datum planes.
3 - 18
How to Create a Datum Curve Through the Intersection of Surfaces 1. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose Intr. Surfs, then Done. 3. For each surface, choose one of the following options from the INTR SURFS menu and select the appropriate references: SingleSelect single surfaces. This is a face of a part, or a bounded portion of a surface. You can select several surfaces at one time with this option. WholeSelect a whole quilt or all the surfaces on a part. You can select only once with this option.
Note: If the first surfaces selected are solid, the second surface selection cannot be solid.
Datum Curves Created with the Thru Points Option

You can create a Thru Points datum curve as a spline, or a sequence of alternating tangent lines and arcs. Datums How to Create a Curve Through Datum Points or Vertices 1. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose Thru Points, then Done. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays the Datum Curve dialog box with the following elements: AttributesSpecify whether the curve should lie on a selected surface. See Creating a Curve Through Points that Lie on a Surface on page 3 - 21. Curve PointsSelect points for the curve to connect. Tangency(Optional) Set up tangency conditions for the curve.
Note: The Tangency element can be defined only if at least one end segment of the curve is a spline. Tweak(Optional) Modify the shape of the curve that goes through two points by using the polyhedron manipulation. See Tweaking a Spline Curve Between Two Points on page 3 - 22.
4. The system displays the CONNECT TYPE menu. Select the type of curve shape to create and the datum points and vertices that will use that shape. The possible options are as follows:
Datums
3 - 19
SplineConstruct a curve using a three-dimensional spline that passes through the selected datum points and vertices. Single RadConstruct a curve using the same radius through all the bends. Multiple RadConstruct a curve by specifying a radius for each bend.
Note: The Attributes element of the curve defined with either the Single Rad or Multiple Rad option cannot be changed to On Surface. Single PointSelect individual datum points and vertices. You could have created these points individually or as a datum point array. Whole ArraySelect all the points in a Datum Point/Offset Csys feature, in consecutive order. Add PointAdd to the definition of the curve an existing point, vertex, or curve end through which the curve will pass. Delete PointDelete from the definition of the curve an existing point, vertex, or curve end through which the curve currently passes. Insert Point Insert a point between already selected points, vertices, and curve ends. This option modifies the curve definition to pass through the inserted point. The system prompts you to select a point or vertex before which to insert the point.
Note: You can add, delete, or insert points during the creation or redefinition of the curve. 5. Choose Done from the CONNECT TYPE menu to create the curve, or Quit to abort the process. 6. To define tangency conditions, select the Tangency element and Define in the dialog box. The system displays the DEF TAN menu with the following options: StartApply tangency condition at the start point of the curve. The system displays a red point or circle cross-hair at the start of the curve. EndApply tangency condition at the end point of the curve. The system displays a red circle cross-hair at the endpoint of the curve.
3 - 20
Crv/Edge/AxisSelect an edge, curve, or axis to specify tangency or normal direction at the start or end point, as prompted. Create AxisCreate an axis to specify tangency or normal direction at the start or end point using the DATUM AXIS menu. SurfaceSelect a surface or plane to specify the tangent or normal direction. Srf Nrm EdgeSelect a surface to which the curve will be tangent at its start or end point. Select an edge of that surface to which the curve will be perpendicular at its start or end point.
Note: The start or end point of the curve must lie on the surface edge used for the normal reference. ClearRemove the current tangency constraint at the selected end. To have no tangency constraint at either end, choose Clear for both ends. TangentMake the curve tangent to the reference at this end. NormalMake the curve normal to the reference at this end. CurvatureSet continuous curvature for the curve end where the tangency condition is specified. Activate this option by placing a checkmark in front of it. This makes the curvature at the end of the curve equal to that of the connecting end of the tangent entity. Datums
7. Specify the direction for the curve at this tangency location by choosing Flip or Okay from the DIRECTION menu. The system displays an arrow at the end of the curve. 8. If you created a datum curve through two points, you can tweak the curve in 3D space and dynamically update its shape. To manipulate the curve, choose the Tweak element in the dialog box and click on Define. Proceed as described in Tweaking a Spline Curve Between Two Points on page 3 - 22.
Creating a Curve Through Points that Lie on a Surface

If you want to create a curve that lies on a specific surface, redefine the Attributes element in the dialog box. Choose Attributes and click Define. Choose the On Surface option from the CRV TYPE menu, followed by Done.
Datums
3 - 21
The options in the CRV TYPE menu are: FreeConnect the points without requiring the curve to lie on a surface. This option is set by default. On SurfaceCreate the curve so that it lies on a specific surface patch. Specify the surface to which the curve will belong using options in the GET SELECT menu. Select a surface or a datum plane.
Consider the following rules for a curve through points: The On Surface attribute does not apply to a curve defined with the Single Rad or Multiple Rad option. Setting the On Surface attribute may conflict with some of the previous conditions that you defined for that curve. For example, the points selected to define the curve lie on the surface, and the tangency conditions must be possible for the selected surface. When the system detects a conflict, it prompts you to resolve it by removing invalid references. When you change the attribute from Free to On Surface, any tweaking of the curve is removed.
Tweaking a Spline Curve Between Two Points

You can modify the shape of a spline curve created through two points by tweaking it in 3D space or on a specific surface; the system automatically updates the shape of the curve according to your changes. In addition, a number of curve analysis tools are available for you to monitor various curve characteristics. To access this functionality, define the Tweak element in the dialog box. Note: When you tweak the curve between two points, the system maintains tangency conditions that you assigned at the ends of the curve. How to Tweak a Datum Curve Created Through Two Points 1. Select the Tweak element in the dialog box and click Define. 2. Select an option from the CRV TWEAK menu: SetupDisplaySet the display of the curve, showing its curvature, inflection points, or tweak points. Add PointsAdd tweak points to the curve. Delete PointsDelete tweak points from the curve. Move PointsMove tweak points of the curve.
3 - 22
Move PolygonMove the control polygon of the curve. Reset CurveRemove all changes you have made to the curve.
A more detailed explanation of the CRV TWEAK menu options follows. You can tweak a curve by using the following methods: Move tweak points directly with the Move Points option in the CRV TWEAK menu. Move vertices of the curves control polygon with the Move Polygon option in the CRV TWEAK menu.
How to Tweak the Curve 1. To move tweak points of the curve directly, choose Move Points. To manipulate the control polygon, choose Move Polygon. 2. If the curve is not an On Surface curve, set up the movement plane and motion region using the following options: Datums Movement PlnSet up the movement plane by choosing one of the following options in the MOT PLANE menu: View PlaneThe movement plane is parallel to the screen. Select PlaneThe movement plane is parallel to a reference plane. Select the reference plane. Curve PlaneThe movement plane passes through the curves normal and tangency vectors, created at the movement point. This option is not available for linear curves.
Poly MotionUse the POLY MOTION menu to define the region of the curve to which the changes will apply. This is the same menu you use to set up the region for free-form surface manipulation (see Setting the Poly Motion Region on page 13 - 8). Crvtr SetupSet curvature display by entering a relative scale for smoothness and relative smoothness density.
3. Choose Move Points from the CONTROL POLY menu. Pick the tweak point and drag it to its new location. The system updates the shape of the curve automatically.
Datums
3 - 23
4. As you tweak the curve, use the Preview option in the CONTROL POLY menu to preview its shape before and after modification (see Previewing the Curve on page 3 - 25). You can set up the curves display to show its curvature, inflection points, and tweak points. 5. When you finish, choose Done Poly from the CONTROL POLY menu. Tweaking an On Surface Curve When you tweak a curve defined on a spline surface and the curve extends beyond the boundaries of the surface, the curves shape may become unpredictable (see the next figure). This happens because the extended portion of the curve follows the surface definition beyond the boundaries of the visible surface. Tweaking an On Surface Curve
Modifying the Display of Curves

The following procedure describes how to set up the display options for the curve. How to Set Up the Curves Display 1. Choose SetupDisplay from the CRV TWEAK menu. 2. Choose DisplayOnCrv from the SETUP DISP menu.
3 - 24
3. The CRV OPTS menu appears. Place checkmarks in front of the display options that you want to enable, and choose Accept. The options are: CurvatureShow smoothness of curvature. InflectionsShow inflection points (points on the curve where curvature changes the sign). The inflection points appear as yellow crosses. PointsShow tweak points of the curve as green crosses.
4. To adjust the curvature display, choose Parameters from the SETUP DISP menu. Set the following options in the SET PARAMS menu: Crvtr ScaleSet a value for the curvature scale parameter. Increasing this value scales up the length of normal segments displayed. CrvtrDensitySet a value for the curvature scale density value. Increasing this value, increases the number of normal lines displaying curvature. Datums
Note: These parameter settings remain valid for the current Pro/ENGINEER session. Displaying Curvature on a Curve
Datum curve
Previewing the Curve

With the Preview option, you can compare a specific display option (for example, curvature) before and after the curve changes.
Datums
3 - 25
How to Preview a Modified Curve 1. Choose Preview from the CONTROL POLY menu. 2. In the PREVIEW menu, choose Crvs To Disp. Specify whether to preview the modified curve, the old curve, or both curves by choosing the appropriate options from the CRV TO DISP menu. 3. Indicate to which curve display options will apply by selecting DispOnNewCrv or DispOnOldCrv from the PREVIEW menu. 4. For the selected curve (new or old), modify the display to show curvature, inflection points, or tweak points. Enable the desired display options by choosing the Display On Crv option in the SETUP DISP menu. To adjust the curves curvature display, choose Parameters from the SETUP DISP menu (see Step 4 on page 3 - 25).
Importing Datum Curves

An imported datum curve can consist of one or more segments. Multiple segments are not necessarily connected. The From File option imports a datum curve from a Pro/ENGINEER .ibl, IGES, SET, or VDA file. Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically combine the curves imported using From File into a composite curve. Pro/ENGINEER reads all the curves from an IGES or SET file, then converts them to spline curves. When you import a VDA file, the system reads the VDA spline entities only. The .ibl file format is very much like that of a blend file, except you should precede the coordinates of each segment of the curve with both begin section and begin curve. Two points in a section define a line, while more than two define a spline. To connect curve segments, make sure the coordinates of the first point are the same as the last point in the previous section. You can redefine datum curves that are created from a file and you can trim or split them with other curves that are imported from a file. See Datum Curves from File on page 16 - 26 for more information. A sample .ibl file follows. The point numbering (the first column of numbers) in an .ibl file is optional.
3 - 26
open arclength begin section ! 1 begin curve 1 20 30 40 2 40 50 70 3 30 60 80 begin section ! 2 begin curve 1 30 60 80 2 40 70 40 3 50 40 60 begin section ! 3 begin curve 1 50 40 60 2 40 20 30
Datums
How to Import a Datum Curve 1. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose From File, then choose Done. 3. The system displays the GET COORD S menu. Create or select a coordinate system that the curve will reference. 4. Enter the file name. If it is an IGES, SET, or VDA file, include the appropriate file extension when you enter the name.
Composite Datum Curves

You can interactively create composite datum curves by combining several datum curves, part edges, and surface feature edges. Edges can be selected in any order. Selected references must either form one continuous chain (with two open ends), or one closed loop (with no open ends). Pro/ENGINEER creates individual curves on top of each entity and a single composite curve on top of the combined individual curves. Pro/ENGINEER combines each continuous chain of a new datum curve into a composite curve with no redefinable start point. However, datum curves imported using the From File option (see Importing Datum Curves on page 3 - 26) will likely have multiple chains. Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically combine these into
Datums
3 - 27
a composite curve, but you can pick them to define a composite curve interactively. You can also create a composite curve with a redefinable start point by using the Composite option. For more information, see Composite Curve with a Redefinable Start Point on page 3 - 32. When you pick a composite curve, the system highlights that entire curve. To select an underlying edge or a component curve, use Query Sel. It is good practice to create a composite curve out of individual components and use this curve as a feature reference. The composite curve automatically updates when its underlying segments are changed. Subsequent sketcher entities cannot directly reference composite datum curves for alignment. Instead, you must align these entities to the underlying curves that make up the composite curves. You can use the value of the trajectory parameter trajpar_of_pnt with composite curves in relations to locate a specific point along the composite curve (for more information, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). This is particularly beneficial when you are locating a specific cross section in a variable section sweep (see Using Relations in Sweeps on page 6 - 35). Typically, you can create composite curves that exactly follow the original curves and edges with the CURV TYPE menu option Exact. Alternatively, you can use the Approximate option from the CURV TYPE menu to create composite curves that approximate a chain of tangent (C1 continuous) curves by a single continuous curvature (C2 continuous) spline. When you use the option Approximate, the new approximate curve always maintains the same endpoint and tangency at the endpoint as the original curve that it approximates.
Using Approximate Curves

Before you create approximate curves, you should be aware of the benefits and cautions of using them. When you use an approximate composite curve as a reference for a surface blend from boundary, you create a single surface patch, with the following benefits: Remove small surfaces from the design, preventing the occurrence of small edges and misalignment that characterize small patches. Create a single surface with continuous curvature.
3 - 28
Attain better surface aesthetics.
Because an approximate curve is an approximation, the new curve does not exactly follow the original edges and curves. Therefore, you could have the following problems: Gaps between the original reference and the approximate curve, which prohibits merger by joining or intersecting of surfaces. For example, a surface that is swept along the approximate curve might not attach directly to the original surface, so the two surfaces cannot be quilted together (see Definition of a Quilt on page 10 - 2). The solution to this problem is to extend one or both surfaces so they intersect. However, the surfaces might never intersect, such as when the surface normals are parallel. Alternatively, do not use the Approximate option if you need to merge the corresponding surfaces. No reference to the original edge and surface. For instance, this prevents you from creating a sweep feature that references the edge and surface normal. The solution to this problem is to create a variable section sweep using the Pivot Dir option. This also prevents you from creating a variable section sweep feature with tangency to the surface. Undesired inflection in the approximate curve. Datums
This problem is illustrated in the following figure.
Datums
3 - 29
Approximate Composite Datum Curve

Surf2 extruded from sketched curve.
Two curves
See details below of deviation of approximate curve from the original sketched curve. Surf1extruded from approximate curve.
Approximate curve Approximate curve
Original curve
Approximate curve
Deviation of approximate curve from the original sketched curve.
Surf2 Surf1
Gaps in surfaces prevent the surfaces from merging; they cannot be stitched together.
3 - 30
Creating a Curvature Continuous Surface

Surf 1
Approximate curve on edge of Surf1
Surf2
A. Surf2 is swept along the approximate curve normal to Surf1 Surfaces are meshed for ease of viewing.
Datums
Approximate curve
Approximate curve
Original curve
Approximate curve
B. You can overcome the gaps caused by the approximate curve by extending one or both surfaces so they intersect.
Datums
3 - 31
Curvature of Approximate Curve Versus a Sketched Curve
Sketched Approximate
Inflections of curvature can be caused by the approximate curve, depending on the rate of change of curvature of the approximate curve from that of the original curve.
Note: Features that reference an approximate curve inherit inflections that exist in the curve. For example, a surface built on approximate curve may have undesirable inflections.
Composite Curve with a Redefinable Start Point

The following procedure describes how to create a composite datum curve with a redefinable start point. How to Create a Composite Datum Curve 1. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose Composite and Done from the OPTIONS menu.
3 - 32
3. A feature creation dialog box appears with the following elements: AttributesSpecify whether you want to create an exact or approximate curve. ReferencesSpecify geometric references.
4. The system displays the CURV TYPE menu, which lists the following options: ExactUse the curves exactly as they are. ApproximateApproximate a chain of tangent curves by a single continuous curvature spline. Pro/ENGINEER replaces multiple discrete segments of a curve with a single, smooth curve. If you sweep along the approximate curve or blend a surface, the resulting surface maintains the curvature continuity and, therefore, does not have any breaks in it.
5. Use the CHAIN menu options to select a chain of curves and edges to be used as geometric references (see the following section for chain selection). For an approximate curve, you must select a chain of tangent curves/edges. When finished defining a chain, choose Done from the CHAIN menu. 6. Choose OK from the dialog box. If you choose Approximate, you can select a chain of edges or curves to be approximated by a continuous curvature spline. If the selected chain is tangent within 5 degrees, Pro/ENGINEER approximates it by a continuous curvature spline. Otherwise, the system highlights the points of discontinuity and you can either reselect the chain or abort the feature creation.
Datums
Chain Processing
In many places in Pro/ENGINEER, you need to select a chain of curves and edges using options in the CHAIN menu. How to Select a Chain of Edges or Curves 1. The system displays the CHAIN menu. 2. Select the chain type and pick the defining entities. When you have finished, choose Done from the lower part of the CHAIN menu. The CHAIN menu options are as follows: One By OneDefine a chain by selecting individual edges and curves, including composite curves, one at a time. You can select the edges or curves in any order.
Datums
3 - 33
Tangnt ChainDefine a chain by selecting an edge, including all the edges tangent to this edge. Curve ChainDefine a chain by selecting a curve. The system displays the CHAIN OPT menu to allow you to select additional curves, including composite curves. The CHAIN OPT menu options are as follows: Select AllSelect all curves that are connected to the currently selected loop in the same feature. From-ToSelect the from and to vertices or curve ends. The system highlights the vertices of the loop in green. Once both are selected, the system prompts you to pick the portion of the loop to keep, using the CHOOSE menu options Accept and Next.
Bndry ChainDefine a chain by selecting a quilt and using its one-sided edges. If the quilt has more than one loop, select a specific loop to define the chain. The system displays the CHAIN OPT menu. Choose either Select All or From-To. Surf ChainDefine a chain by selecting a surface and using its edges. If the surface has more than one loop, select a specific loop to define the chain. The system displays the CHAIN OPT menu. Choose either Select All or From-To. Two Points(This option is available only for surfaces from boundaries.) Connect two points to create a curve and specify tangency conditions for this curve using options in the DEF TAN menu. The possible options are as follows: StartSpecify tangency at the start of the curve. EndSpecify tangency at the end of the curve. Crv/Edge/AxisSelect an edge, curve, or axis to specify the tangency direction at the start or end point. Create AxisCreate an axis to specify the tangency direction at the start or end point. SurfaceSelect a surface on which the start or end point of the datum curve will lie and to which the created curve will be tangent. The curve pivots so as to follow its natural direction, while remaining tangent to the surface.
3 - 34
CurvatureSet continuous curvature for the curve end where the tangency condition is specified. Activate this option by placing a checkmark in front of it. This makes the curvature at the end of the curve equal to that of the connecting end of the tangent entity. Srf Nrm EdgeSelect a surface on which the datum curves start or end point will lie and to which the created curve will be both tangent to the surface and normal to one of the surface boundaries. ClearClear the tangency conditions.
SelectSelect a chain by displaying the CHAIN menu. UnselectRemove a curve or edge from the current selection for a chain. For chain types other than One By One, use the CONFIRMATION menu to confirm or cancel the Unselect command. For the chain type One By One, select the curves or edges to remove from the chain. Trim/ExtendTrim or extend the chain ends. Use the CHOOSE menu to determine the end to be processed. The system displays the TRIM/EXTEND menu, which lists the following options: Enter LengthTrim or extend by a specified amount. Enter a negative value to shorten the curve, or a positive value to extend the curve.
Datums
Note: A negative value is not allowed for trimming a spline curve. DragUse the mouse to adjust the chain end interactively (the left button finalizes the position, the middle button aborts the move, and the right button toggles between pausing or continuing the operation). Trim AtTrim the end segment of the curve using the TRIM AT menu, which has the following options: A specified point (such as a datum point, vertex, or curve end An intersecting datum curve An intersecting surface or datum plane
Point Curve Surface
Start PointSelect the start point of the chain.
Datums
3 - 35
Redefining Composite Curves

You can redefine a composite curve from Exact to Approximate, or vice versa. When you attempt to redefine a composite curve from Exact to APPROXIMATE, the system checks if the curve is tangent. If it is not, the system aborts the redefinition process. Redefining or replacing sketcher entities used as references for a composite curve causes the curve to fail regeneration. To minimize the possibility of such a problem, redefine the curve references to exclude the missing entity, then add the new entity to the composite curve after it has regenerated.
Naming Composite Curves

Composite curves do not have names when they are first created. To add a name to a composite curve, use Set Up, Name, and Feature (see Modifying Feature Names on page 16 - 11), then pick the curve.
Datum Curves Using Cross Sections

A datum curve can be created from a planar cross section boundary (that is, the intersection of the planar cross section with the part outline). However, you cannot use a boundary from an offset cross section to create a datum curve. How to Create a Datum Curve Using a Cross Section 1. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose Use Xsec and Done from the OPTIONS menu. 3. Select a planar cross section from the namelist menu of all the available cross sections. 4. The cross-section boundary is used to create a datum curve. If a cross section has more than one chain, each chain has a composite curve.
3 - 36
Projected Datum Curves

You create projected datum curves by sketching a section, or selecting an existing datum curve, and then projecting it onto one or more surfaces. You can project datum curves onto solid surfaces, a set of non-solid surfaces, quilts, or datum planes. The surface or quilt you project onto does not have to be planar (see the following figure). Projecting a Sketched Curve on a Surface
Sketched curve Select this surface. Projected curve
Sketching plane
Datums
If you create a curve by sketching on plane, it can be patterned. Projected curves cannot be cross-hatched. If you select a cross-hatched datum curve for projection, the system ignores the cross-hatching. There are two types of curves that you can project; they are listed in the PRJCRVTYPE menu: SketchSketch a curve to project. SelectSelect a curve or edge to project.
Datums
3 - 37
Projecting Sketched Curves

You can sketch a curve and then project it normal to the sketching plane, or normal to a reference surface or plane (see the following figure). Projecting with the Sketch Option
Section in Sketcher Sketch a curve on this surface. Select the bottom surface to project onto.
Projected curve created with the Norm To Sket option
Projected curve created with the Norm To Surf option
How to Create a Projected Datum Curve by Sketching 1. Choose DATUM > Curve. 2. Choose CURVE OPTIONS > Projected > Done. 3. Choose PRJCRVTYPE > Sketch > Done. 4. A feature creation dialog box appears with the following feature elements: SectionSketch a curve to project. SurfacesSelect the surface to project onto. Proj TypeSpecify the projection method.
3 - 38
5. Create or select the sketching plane. Specify the direction of viewing the sketching plane. Specify a view orientation by picking the sketcher reference plane. 6. The system prompts you to specify a direction of feature creation, and displays an arrow. Choose Flip if desired, then choose Okay. 7. The system places you into Sketcher. Specify reference entities to dimension the curve to the model. Sketch and dimension the curve. Choose Done to exit Sketcher. 8. Select the type of surface to project onto by choosing an option form the PROJCRVREFS menu: SurfacesUse the SURF SELECT and SURF OPTION menus to select the surfaces or quilt onto which to project the curve (see Selecting Surfaces on page 10 - 14). When finished selecting surfaces, choose Done from the SURF SELECT menu. Datum PlanesSelect or create datum planes onto which to project the curve. Choose Select Plane or Make Plane from the GET DTMSEL menu.
Datums
9. The system automatically defines the projection method as Norm To Sket. If you want to project the curve normal to the surface, choose the Proj Type element in the dialog box and click Define. 10. The PROJ TYPE menu lists the Norm To Sket and Norm to Surf options. Choose Norm to Surf option and Done to project normal to the reference surfaces. 11. Choose OK from the dialog box. Pro/ENGINEER creates the datum curve by projecting the sketch onto the selected surfaces.
Datums
3 - 39
Projecting 3D Curves and Edges

You can project a curve or edge along the specified direction or normal to a reference surface or plane (see the following figure). Projecting with the Select Option
Project this curve.
Select the bottom surface to project onto. Define the direction of projection as normal to the plane.
Projected curve created with the Along Dir option
Projected curve created with the Norm To Surf option
How to Create a Projected Datum Curve by Selecting Entities 1. Choose DATUM > Curve. 2. Choose CURVE OPTIONS > Projected > Done. 3. Choose PRJCRVTYPE > Select > Done. 4. A feature creation dialog box appears with the following feature elements: ReferencesSelect curves and edges to project.
3 - 40
SurfacesSelect the surface to project onto. Proj TypeSpecify the projection direction.
5. Select curve segments and edges by using options in the CHAIN menu. You can select multiple chains. After you select a chain, choose Done Sel and proceed to select the next chain.When finished selecting entities, choose CHAIN > Done. 6. Select the type of surface to project onto by choosing an option form the PROJCRVREFS menu: SurfacesUse the SURF SELECT and SURF OPTION menus to select the surfaces or quilt onto which to project the curve (see Selecting Surfaces on page 10 - 14). When finished selecting surfaces, choose Done from the SURF SELECT menu. Datum PlanesSelect or create datum planes onto which to project the curve. Choose Select Plane or Make Plane from the GET DTMSEL menu.
7. The system brings up the PROJ TYPE menu. Select one of the following options, followed by Done: Datums Along DirProject the curve along the specified direction. Use options in the GEN SEL DIR menu to specify the direction of projection. The options are: PlaneProject the curve normal to a planar surface. Select a planar surface or datum plane, or create a datum. Crv/Edg/AxisProject the curve along the direction specified by an axis, edge, or curve. Select an axis, edge, or curve segment. If the edge or curve is not linear, select a datum point on it at which tangency will be determined. CsysSelect an axis of the coordinate system as the projection direction. For additional information, see Coordinate Systems on page 3 - 53.
The system displays a red arrow that indicates the direction. Use Flip to toggle it, if necessary, then choose Okay. Norm to SurfProject the curve normal to the reference surfaces.
8. Choose OK from the dialog box. Pro/ENGINEER projects the datum curve onto the selected surface.
Datums
3 - 41
Formed Datum Curves

You can transfer a datum curve onto a surface as a formed curve, much like you can transfer a decal to a surface. The formed curve preserves the length of the original curve. In contrast, a projected datum curve distorts the original curve length. Datum curves can only be formed on surfaces that can be developed, such as cones, planes and cylinders. Formed Versus Projected Datum Curve
Sketched curve Projected curve Sketched curve Formed curve
Forming a Datum Curve on Part Surfaces

The following procedure describes how to create formed datum curves. How to Create a Formed Curve on Solid Part Surfaces 1. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose Formed and Done from the OPTIONS menu. 3. Choose Solid Surfs from the SURFACE LIST menu. 4. Select or create the sketching plane, then specify the direction of viewing the sketching plane by choosing Flip or Okay. 5. The system prompts you to specify a direction of feature creation, and displays a corresponding arrow. Choose Flip, if desired, then choose Okay. 6. Specify a view orientation by picking a Sketcher reference plane.
3 - 42
7. Sketch the datum curve. Using the Adv Geometry option, include in the sketch a coordinate system that determines the curve reference point. Locate it on the sketch where you want curve projection to start (the curve will be formed outward from that point). Make sure the location does not correspond to a point on the surface that is perpendicular to the screen (for example, do not align it to the silhouette edge of a cylinder). 8. When you choose Done from Sketcher, Pro/ENGINEER creates the curve by projecting the reference point onto the part surface. As shown in the following figures, this point is projected normal to the sketching plane. Pro/ENGINEER forms the curve onto the first surface it encounters in the feature creation direction, with the length of the curve segments preserved. Formed Datum Curve Creation
Formed curve Sketched curve Reference point (sketch coordinate system) Sketching plane Feature creation direction
Datums
Forming a Datum Curve on Surface Features

The following procedure explains how to create a formed curve on surfaces. How to Create a Formed Curve on Surface Features 1. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose Formed and Done from the CURVE OPTS menu.
Datums
3 - 43
3. Choose Quilt Surfs from the SURFACE LIST menu. If there is only one surface feature in the part, the system highlights it automatically. If there is more than one, select a surface feature onto which to form the curve. 4. Set up the sketch plane and direction of feature creation, then sketch the datum curve. Include in the sketch a coordinate system that determines the curve reference point. Locate it on the sketch where you want curve projection to start. Pro/ENGINEER will form the curve outward from that point. 5. Choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. Pro/ENGINEER creates the curve. The following figure shows how to create a formed curve on a solid surface. Placement of Formed Datum Curve on a Solid Surface
Sketching plane
Sketching plane
Feature creation direction
Feature creation direction
Split Datum Curves

A split datum curve is a copy of another curve. The new datum curve terminates at the intersection with a surface, datum point, or datum plane. When creating the split datum curve, you can keep the curve segment on one or both sides of the terminating entity. Once you create a split curve, the original curve becomes invisible. How to Create a Split Datum Curve 1. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose Split from the OPTIONS menu. 3. The dialog box lists the following elements:
3 - 44
CurveDefine the datum curve to split.

DividerSelect the dividing entity. FlipDefine which portion of the curve to keep.
4. Select a datum curve to split. The curve cannot form a closed loop. 5. Select the dividing entity. You can pick a surface (solid surface or surface feature), datum point, or datum plane. 6. A green arrow indicates the portion of the curve to keep. Select an option from the TRIM CURVE menu: BothSelect the entire curve. FlipFlip the direction of the arrow to select the other portion of the curve. OkayAccept the selection. QuitQuit the process.
7. Choose OK from the dialog box.
Offset from Surface Datum Curves

Datums You can create a datum curve at an offset from an existing curve, and normal to a surface. A datum curve uses a reference curve, a surface from which to offset, and an existing graph feature to specify the offset values. The graph curve can consist of one entity only. Note: Graphs used for creating offset datum curves should have X-axis values ranging only from 0 to 1. If the range extends beyond 1, only the portion from 0 to 1 is used. How to Create an Offset Curve 1. Create a graph feature (see Graphs on page 3 - 59). 2. Choose Curve from the DATUM menu. 3. Choose OffsetFromSrf from the OPTIONS menu. 4. Select the reference datum curve to copy. It must lie on the surface or plane from which the offset will be determined. 5. Select the start point for the curve using Flip and Okay. This is the origin for the graph offsets. 6. Select a surface or plane from which to offset, then specify the direction in which to offset. 7. Select the graph feature that determines the offset values. Use Sel By Menu and select its name.
Datums
3 - 45
8. Enter a scale factor for the offset. Pro/ENGINEER creates the curve. To modify the scale factor of a curve created using the option OffsetFromSrf, use the Modify command. Using Redefine and References, you can change the start point of the curve (using Point), the surface offset (using Surface), or the values of the offset (using Graph and Scheme). If you try to redefine the graph section, the system displays the CHILD OPTS menu. This menu allows you to delete or suspend the corresponding data curve, which is a child of the graph feature. The following figure illustrates the OffsetFromSrf option. Sample OffsetFromSrf Curve
Start point
Offset direction
Reference curve, on surface
Surface from which to offset
Start point
The graph feature controls the offsets from the surface: the resulting offset curves with offset value of 1.
The graph used to define offset curve. A value of 0 on the graph causes the curve to touch the surface.
Start point
3 - 46
Datum Curve Offset From a Curve

You can create a datum curve at an offset from an existing curve along a surface (see the following figure). You can modify both the direction and offset distance using either a positive or negative dimension value. Sample Curve Offset in a Surface from a Curve
Reference curve, on surface
Resulting offset curve with offset value of 1
Datums
How to Create a Curve Offset From Another Curve 1. Choose FEAT > Create > Datum > Curve > From Curve > Done. 2. Select a curve to offset from. 3. Select a surface along which to offset the curve. 4. A red arrow shows the direction of offset. Choose Flip or Okay from the DIRECTION menu. 5. Enter the offset distance.
Datums
3 - 47
Datum Curve Offset From a Boundary

You can create a curve by offsetting from an existing surface boundary (see the next figure). Sample Curve Offset in a Surface from a Boundary
Reference boundary
For these vertices, the distance was measured using Along Edge
Resulting datum curve
Before
After
How to Create a Curve Offset From a Surface Boundary 1. Choose FEAT > Create > Datum > Curve > From Bndry > Done. 2. Use options in the CHAIN menu to select surface edges. You can only select edges that belong to one surface. When finished selecting edges, choose Done form the CHAIN menu. 3. Indicate where you want to specify the offset by selecting an option from the GET EXT DIST menu. The possible options are as follows:
3 - 48
Vert By VertSpecify the offset distance for vertices in the selected chain of edges. The system highlights each vertex in the selected chain consecutively to allow you to specify the offset. When you specify an offset distance for a vertex shared with another edge from the selected chain, you can enter two different offset values if an inner edge does not originate at this vertex. However, if a vertex has a corresponding inner edge, you can specify only one offset distance for this vertex.
Sel Pnt/VertSelect a datum point or vertex for which the offset will be specified. Entering Two Offset Distances
inner edge
Datums
You can enter two different offsets for this vertex.
You can enter only one offset for this vertex.
4. For the selected point, specify the offset distance using the MEASURE DIST menu. A positive value offsets the curve inside the boundary, while a negative value offsets the curve outside the boundary. Select from the mutually exclusive pairs of options available for this operation. Select one of these options: Specify DistOffset at a specified distance. Up To VertexOffset up to a vertex and choose from the MEASURE DIST menu. After the system highlights the vertex, choose Accept.
Datums
3 - 49
Select one of these options: Norm To BndMeasure the offset distance normal to the boundary. This option is for Specify Dist only. Along EdgeMeasure the offset distance along the highlighted edge (see the following figure). Once the reference is established, choose Accept and enter an offset value.
Select one of these options (available for Specify Dist only): Next NormalIndicate another boundary to reference multiple surface boundaries. Next AlongIndicate another edge to reference multiple edges.
Select one of these options: SkipSkip a point and move to the next one. AcceptAccept the specified options.
5. To continue specifying offsets at other points, repeat Steps 3 and 4. 6. When finished specifying the offset distance, choose Done/Return from the GET EXT DIST menu. 7. If you want to redefine the offset curve, choose Define from the SURF EXTEND menu. To obtain information about the offset curve, choose Info from the SURF EXTEND menu. 8. To complete the feature, choose Done Extend from the SURF EXTEND menu.
Restrictions on the From Bndry Option

You cannot successfully define a curve from a boundary (From Bndry) when your intent is not clear. For example, consider the following figure. When three patches meet at a common vertex on the boundary of a quilt and there is more than one two-sided edge at the vertex, the system will not know your design intent if you are trying to offset inside the boundaries. You cannot use this option to offset from boundary B, which consists of Edge 1 and Edge 2. Instead, you can offset from Edge 1 and Edge 2 as separate chains (one at a time) using the From Bndry option, then connect the resulting curves with a projected sketched datum curve.
3 - 50
Restrictive Condition for Offset in Srf and From Bndry

Boundary A Offset curve from boundary A
Two-sided edges
Boundary B Vertex with two two-sided edges
Datums
Two-Projection Datum Curves

The 2 Projections option enables you to create a projected datum curve from two sections on non-parallel sketching planes. The system extrudes (or projects) these sections until they intersect and creates a datum curve at the intersection. How to Create a Two-Projection Datum Curve 1. Use the command sequence Create, Datum, Curve. 2. Choose 2 Projections, then Done. 3. Select a sketching plane and reference plane for the first curve, then sketch, dimension, and regenerate the curve. Choose Done. 4. Select a sketching plane and reference plane for the second curve, then sketch, dimension, and regenerate the curve. Choose Done. Pro/ENGINEER creates the two-projection datum curve.
Datum Curves from Equations

You can create a datum curve from an equation using the option From Equation, as long as the curve does not intersect itself.
Datums
3 - 51
How to Create a Datum Curve From an Equation 1. Choose Feature, Create, Datum, Curve. 2. Choose From Equation and Done. 3. A curve creation dialog box comes up with the following elements: CsysDefine the coordinate system. Csys TypeSpecify the type of the coordinate system. EquationEnter an equation.
4. Use options in the GET COORDS menu to create or select a coordinatesystem. 5. Use options in the SET CSYS TYPE to specify the type of the coordinate system. The options are: Cartesian, Cylindrical, Spherical. 6. The system displays an editor window so you can enter the curve equation as a regular feature relation. The editor window header contains instructions for specifying the equation, depending on the type of coordinate system you have chosen. The equation is specified in terms of parameter t, which varies from 0 to 1, and three coordinate system parameters: X, Y, and Z for Cartesian; r, theta, and Z for cylindrical; and, r, theta, and phi for spherical. Note: You cannot use the following statements in an equation that defines a datum curve: abs, ceil, floor, else, extract, if, endif, itos, and search.
Copied Datum Curves

In Assembly mode, you can create a datum curve on any part in the assembly. In the process of defining the datum curve, the CURVE OPTS menu contains an additional option, the Copy command. This command copies composite curves from one of the members of the assembly. Pro/ENGINEER creates the resulting assembly datum curve in exactly the same location as the datum curve from which it was copied. The system also copies the referenced edges and adjacent surfaces of the datum curve to the new datum curve features. You can then use the copied curve as a sweep trajectory with normal surfaces defined (see Rules for Defining a Trajectory on page 6 - 2).
3 - 52
How to Copy a Datum Curve From an Assembly Member 1. Choose Copy from the CURVE OPTS menu. 2. Pick a datum curve or composite curve to copy. The system creates the new curve in the assembly.
Coordinate Systems
Coordinate systems are reference features that can be added to parts and assemblies to do the following: Calculate mass properties. Assemble components. Place constraints for Finite Element Analysis (FEA). Provide manufacturing operation reference for tool paths. Use as a reference for locating other features (coordinate systems, datum points, planes and axes, imported geometry, and so on).
Datums
Normally, you can create only a single coordinate system, then you have to redo the menu picks Feature, Create, Datum, and so on. If you set the configuration file option repeat_datum_create to yes, you can to continue to make the same type of datum feature until you choose to end the process.
Referencing Model Geometry

You use the following options to reference model geometry: 3 PlanesSelect three planes (planar surfaces or datum planes), with their intersection as the origin of the coordinate system. The planes do not have to be orthogonalthe normal to the first plane selected defines a direction for one axis, the normal for the second direction defines the approximate direction for another axis, and the system determines the third axis using the right-hand rule. Pnt + 2AxesSelect a point as the origin, then define the direction of one coordinate axis. The third pick defines the orientation of a plane through the origin and the first axis (the plane will be parallel to the second axis). If you select a coordinate system as the origin (the first pick for Pnt + 2Axes), the system displays the TRANS DIR menu. This menu allows you to translate the origin of the new coordinate system with respect to the old one.
3 - 53
Datums
2 AxesSet the origin at the intersection of the two axes, then define the orientation of a plane through the origin and the first axis (the plane will be parallel to the second axis). OffsetCreate a coordinate system by offsetting from a reference coordinate system. Select a coordinate system to offset from. To specify the location of the new coordinate system, use the Translate or Rotate option from the MOVE menu. Offs By ViewCreate a coordinate system that is orthogonal to the screen (Z-axis normal to the screen and pointing at you) by offsetting from a reference coordinate system. The system asks you to select the reference coordinate system and then prompts you to specify two rotation angles and an additional translation. Pln + 2AxesDefine the origin as the intersection of the plane and the first selected axis. The third pick defines the orientation of a plane through the origin and the first axis (the plane will be parallel to the second axis). Orig + ZAxisSelect a point as the origin, then define the direction of the Z-axis first. Define the direction of the X-axis. The system determines the Y-axis using the right- hand rule. From FileUse a data file to construct a new coordinate system relative to an existing coordinate system (see Using the Transformation Matrix File on page 3 - 56). DefaultUse a default location for the coordinate system. If the base feature is a solid feature, the default location is the anchor point of the section belonging to that feature. The X-axis will point right along the section horizontal, while the Y-axis will point up along the section vertical. The Z-axis is created using the right hand rule.
Creating a Coordinate System

The following procedure describes how to create a coordinate system. How to Create the Coordinate System 1. Choose Coord Sys from the DATUM menu. 2. Choose one of the following: 3 Planes, Pnt + 2Axes, 2 Axes, Pln + 2Axes, Orig + ZAxis, From File, or Default. Then choose Done.
3 - 54
3. Select the appropriate geometry. If an axis selection is required, the system displays the SET AXIS menu. The SET AXIS menu lists the following options: Entity/EdgeSelect a datum axis, straight edge, or straight curve. Plane NormUse the normal to a plane. This option is not available while the origin is undefined. 2 PointsSelect two points to define a vector. Orig + PntUse the coordinate system origin and a point to define a vector. This option is not available while the origin is undefined. Note that whenever a point is required, you can select a datum point, vertex, curve end, or another coordinate system.
4. Except for Orig + ZAxis, once you select all the entities successfully, the system draws three arrows at the origin of the coordinate system, indicating the default direction of the axes. One of the arrows is red. The system displays the COORD SYS menu, which allows you to specify the orientation and direction of an axis. The choices are as follows: X-AxisSet the highlighted arrow to be the X-axis. Y-AxisSet the highlighted arrow to be the Y-axis. Z-AxisSet the highlighted arrow to be the Z-axis. NextHighlight another arrow (without designating the current one). PreviousHighlight the previous arrow (without designating the current one). ReverseReverse the direction of the highlighted arrow.
Datums
5. Choose which axis you want the red arrow to represent. 6. The red arrow shifts to another axis. Repeat the process for the second axis. 7. Pro/ENGINEER creates the coordinate system. The system determines the direction of the third axis using the right-hand rule.
Datums
3 - 55
Creating an Offset Coordinate System

The following procedure describes how to create a coordinate system. How to Create an Offset Coordinate System 1. Choose Feature, Create, and Datum. 2. Choose Coord Sys from the DATUM menu. 3. Choose one of the following options in the OPTIONS menu: OffsetCreate a coordinate system that is offset from another. Offs By ViewCreate a coordinate system whose XY-plane lies in the plane of the screen and whose origin is offset from another, but lies in the same plane (which is parallel to screen when the coordinate system is created).
Choose Done. 4. Select a reference coordinate system by picking on its name. 5. Choose Translate or Rotate from the MOVE menu. 6. Select a translation or rotation axis from the corresponding menu. Enter the values for the offset and angle. 7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 as many times as desired. The process has a cumulative effect. 8. When you have finished, choose Done from the MOVE menu to create the coordinate system with the specified offset, or Quit to abort the creation of the coordinate system.
Using the Transformation Matrix File

A coordinate system that is created using a transformation matrix uses a data file to construct a new coordinate system relative to an existing coordinate system. The file data defines two vectors, as follows: The first vector specifies the X-axis direction. The second vector, which is in the XY-plane (in the general direction of the new Y-axis), determines the new coordinate system origin. Pro/ENGINEER constructs the Z-axis using the right-hand rule.
The following figure illustrates the transformation of the coordinate system.
3 - 56
Coordinate System Transformation

New coordinate system origin The X-axis direction is determined from the matrix file and is then translated to the new coordinate system origin.
Y
Ty Tz Tx X1
The XY-plane is constructed from Y1 the second vector in the file and translated to the new coordinate Z1 system origin.
Transformation File Format

The transformation file, with the name filename.trf, has the following format: Transformation File Format
X1 X2 X3 TX Y1 Y2 Y3 TY Z1 Z2 Z3 TZ
Datums
Translation coordinate locates the origin of the new coordinate system. Can be anything, because the Z-axis is determined using the right hand rule. Determines the vector that lies in the XY-plane and the general direction of Y-axis. Determines the X-axis direction.
For example, the file below creates a new coordinate system with the origin at (200, 0, 150), as determined from the reference coordinate system. The new X-axis is pointing in the negative X-direction and the new Y-axis is pointing in the positive Z-direction, all relative to the reference coordinate system.
Datums
3 - 57
Sample Transformation File

! Comments can be added to the file with "!". ! X -1 0 0 0 0 1 Y 0 0 0 Z 0 150 T 200
One way to generate a transformation file is described in Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Cartesian, Cylindrical, and Spherical Coordinate Systems

Pro/ENGINEER always displays coordinate systems with an X-, Y-, and Z-axis. When referencing a coordinate system to make other features (for example, a datum point array), the system can interpret the coordinate system in three ways: CartesianThe system interprets the coordinate values as X, Y, and Z. CylindricalThe system interprets the coordinate values as radius, theta (), and Z. SphericalThe system interprets the coordinate values as radius, theta (), and phi ().
The following figure illustrates how these values are applied to the standard X, Y, and Z coordinate system. Coordinate System Types
Z
Z
Z
Z
Spherical
Cartesian
Cylindrical
3 - 58
Graphs
A graph feature allows you to associate a function with the part. Graphs are intended for use in relations, especially in multi-trajectory sweeps. Pro/ENGINEER usually evaluates a graph feature for its defined X-axis values. When the graph is evaluated beyond the defined range, Pro/ENGINEER extrapolates the Y-axis values. The system calculates the extrapolated value for values of X lower than the initial value by extending a tangent line back from the initial point. Similarly, the system calculates the extrapolated value for values of X greater than the final value by extending a tangent line out from the final point.
Creating Graphs
The following procedure describes how to create a graph. How to Create a Graph Feature 1. Choose Datum from the FEAT CLASS menu, then Graph from the DATUM menu. 2. Enter a name for the graph. 3. Sketch the graph. The section must be open and can contain only one contour (chain) that can consist of lines, arcs, splines, and so on. Each point along the X-axis can have only one corresponding Y value. A coordinate system must be present in the section. Note: Sketch centerlines through the coordinate system and graph endpoints to help you establish alignment. 4. Dimension the section. After the system regenerates the sketch successfully, choose Done. Pro/ENGINEER creates the graph feature. Datums
Datums
3 - 59
Valid Graph
y x
Valid graph
y x
Multiple solutions
Invalid graph
A graph feature is not displayed anywhere on the partit is not part geometry. Its existence is reflected in the part information. Use Sel By Menu to pick the name of the graph feature. You can view or modify existing graph features using the Modify and Redefine commands (see Graphs on page 16 - 34).
Creating an Evaluate Feature

Use the Evaluate option in the DATUM menu to create an evaluate feature. An evaluate feature consists of one or more parameters, each of which gets its value from a measurement you perform on the model. These measurement parameter values are updated when you regenerate the feature. The Evaluate option, which is available in Part, Assembly, Manufacturing, Mold, and Dieface modes, uses the MEASURE PARAM menu to process measurement parameters. This menu remains active until you choose Done. How to Create an Evaluate Feature 1. Choose Evaluate from the DATUM menu. At the prompt, enter a name for the evaluate feature. The system displays the MEASURE PARAM menu, which lists the following options: CreateCreate and name a measurement parameter. When you name the measurement, the system displays the GET MEASURE menu. The possible options are as follows: Edg/Crv LenMeasure an edge or a curve length using the GET SELECT menu.
3 - 60
Edg/Crv CurvMeasure the curvature of an edge or curve at a point on the edge or curve using the GET SELECT menu. AngleMeasure the angle between two selected planes, axes, planar edges, and curves. DistanceMeasure the distance between any combination of two points, vertices, planes, axes, and coordinate systems using the FROM and TO menus. AreaMeasure a surface or quilt area using the EVAL AREA menu. DiameterMeasure the surface diameter of any revolved surface of a part. Min RadiusMeasure the minimum radius of any revolved surface using the MIN RADIUS and GET SELECT menus. The system places a red circle or cross hair marker temporarily at a location on the minimum radius. Srf ClearanceMeasure the clearance between two surfaces. Datums
DeleteDelete an existing measurement parameter. RedoRedefine a measurement parameter. InfoDisplay measurement information for all the parameters. ShowHighlight the references of the selected measurement parameters.
2. Choose Create from the MEASURE PARAM menu and name the measurement parameter. 3. Choose the GET MEASURE option. 4. When you have made all the desired measurements, choose Done from the MEASURE PARAM menu. Using relations, the evaluate feature is used to create features in other models that are dependent on the measurement parameters. For details about relations, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Datums
3 - 61
Use one of the following formats to access measurement values in relations: measurement_name:fid_N ...or... measurement_name:fid_feature_name In these formats, measurement_name is the name of the measurement within the evaluate feature, N is the internal feature identifier number (as shown by using Info), and feature_name is the name of the evaluate feature.
3 - 62
4
Sketching on a Model
This chapter explains how to create feature sections by sketching on the model. Topic Creating Feature Sections Sketching Section Geometry Retrieving an Existing Section Dimensioning a Section to a Part Regenerating a Section Sketch Leaving Sketcher with an Incomplete Section Page 4-2 4-6 4 - 14 4 - 16 4 - 22 4 - 23
4-1
Creating Feature Sections

When you create features, often you must create sections to define the feature geometry. When you sketch sections on a part, sketch only what is necessary to do the job. If you do not want to create a new surface, do not sketch a line in the section. For example, when sketching the corner cut as shown in the following illustration, sketch the open section as shown, and not the closed section. If Pro/ENGINEER has problems intersecting the feature with the part, you must close the section. Sketching on a Part
Sketch only these two lines (open section). An open section is easier to sketch and is more efficient.
This closed section creates extra work, but may be necessary, such as in an Up To Surface cut.
When sketching on the model, you use the same tools as standalone Sketcher, plus additional techniques. The latter are described in the following sections. Note: If you have the Pro/PIPING license, you can use the centerlines of pipe segments as references in the 3-D Sketcher just as you use curves in the following descriptions. You cannot import any IGES features into Sketcher environment.
4-2
Basic Steps for Creating a Section on the Model

The following basic procedure outlines how to create a feature section when working with the part. How to Create a Feature Section 1. Select and orient the sketching plane. 2. Sketch the section geometry. 3. Refine the section. You may wish to change the dimensioning scheme or to apply constraints. 4. Optionally, you may want to save the section. 5. Choose Done to exit Sketcher.
Entering the Sketcher Environment

Before you start creating a feature section, the system prompts you to do the following: Select or create a sketching plane (see Setting Up the Sketching Plane on page 4 - 3). Specify the direction of feature creation (see Selecting Feature Direction on page 5 - 4). Orient the sketching plane (see Orienting the Sketching Plane on page 4 - 4). Sketching on a Model
After the sketching plane is defined, the system automatically places you in Sketcher so you can start creating the section.
Setting Up the Sketching Plane

All sections are created on two-dimensional planes. Therefore, when you sketch on a three-dimensional part, you must define and orient the sketching plane. You can select a datum plane or a planar surface as the sketching plane. Optionally, you can create a datum plane on-the-fly on which to sketch. The sketching plane is infinitely large.
4-3
How to Specify the Sketching Plane 1. When the SETUP SK PLN menu appears, choose one of the following options: Use PrevUse the sketching plane and orientation of the previous sketch. Setup NewSelect or create a sketching plane and define its orientation. Choose an option from the SETUP PLANE menu: PlanePick an existing planar surface or datum. Make DatumCreate a datum plane to use as a reference. See Datum Planes for information on creating datum planes.
2. Define the feature direction, as described in Selecting Feature Direction on page 5 - 4, and orient the sketching plane, as described in Orienting the Sketching Plane. It is possible to create several datum planes on-the-fly and use the last one created as the sketching plane. To make such a chain of internal datums, create the first one by using Make Datum. Choose Setup New again and then choose Make Datum. The plane that you previously created on-the-fly is then available as a reference for the current one. You can use Make Datum repeatedly without Setup New. However, only the plane that you create or select immediately after the last Setup New will be used for the sketching plane.
Orienting the Sketching Plane

Before you start sketching, you must orient the sketching plane to the screen normal axis. Do this in one of the following ways: Use the default system orientationYou can let the system orient the sketch for you by choosing Default from the SKET VIEW menu or by pressing the middle mouse button. The Default option is available only if the system has sufficient information to orient the plane. Using this option does not add new parent/child relationships. ...or...
4-4
Specify a horizontal or vertical referenceChoose Top, Bottom, Right, or Left from the SKET VIEW menu and pick the corresponding plane. The reference plane or edge must be normal to the sketching plane. If the Default option is not available, the Top option is the default selection in the Sket View menu when you first start the session. Otherwise, the previous selection becomes the default.
If you are creating a feature that is not aligned with the existing edges of the part, you may want to create a datum plane as a horizontal or vertical reference that will be added. This is especially useful when you create radial feature patterns (see the Patterning Features chapter for information about creating patterns). When you create a datum plane as a reference, first select the direction you want the plane to represent (Top, Bottom, and so on), then create it. The yellow side of the datum plane will face towards the specified side of the screen.
Sketching in 3-D Orientation

The Use 2-D Sketcher option in the ENVIRONMENT menu controls whether Sketcher reorients the solid object when it starts up. When this option is set (the default), Sketcher makes the sketching plane parallel to the screen. If this option is not set, Sketcher does not reorient the solid object when it starts. Use the Sketch View option in the SKETCHER menu to reorient the model so the sketching plane is parallel to the screen. You can use the sketcher_starts_in_2d configuration option to set the starting value of the Use 2D Sketcher option. While in Sketcher, the model can be reoriented by using View > Orientation, or by using the CTRL key and mouse. Sketching on a Model
Sketcher Grid
When you enter Sketcher, the system displays the grid and enables grid snap for any sketching plane orientation except perpendicular. If you select a new origin for the grid, the system projects that point onto the sketching plane to determine the new origin. Note: Only the Cartesian grid is supported for sketching in 3-D.
4-5
Sketching Section Geometry

When sketching on a part, you use the same techniques as in 2-D Sketcher mode (see the Sketcher chapter), and also additional tools, detailed in the following sections.
Creating Sketcher Geometry from Model Geometry

The following tools in the GEOM TOOLS menu are used exclusively in 3-D sketching: Use Edge, Offset Edge, and Pick Curve.
The Use Edge Option

The Use Edge option in the GEOM TOOLS menu creates Sketcher geometry by projecting selected model edges onto the sketching plane. The system aligns endpoints of the entity to the endpoints of the edge. After you create geometry with the Use Edge option, you can use Intersect, Trim, Divide, and Fillet on it. In Sketcher mode, the Use Edge option allows you to pick an existing part axis to create a centerline that is automatically aligned to the axis. Note: The Use Edge option is especially useful for duplicating splines in nonparallel planes. Note the following restrictions: A circle is broken into two arcs. You must select each segment separately. You cannot select a composite datum curve for Use Edge. Instead, use Query Sel to select the underlying segments. A spline silhouette edge is not selectable for the Use Edge operation.
For the Use Edge option, you can orient the model any way that is convenient (see the next illustration).
4-6
Creating a Section Using Use Edge and Sketched Entities

Select this contour, to be projected onto the sketching plane.
Sketching plane
Sketched geometry dimensioned to part can be used to intersect the projected geometry.
How to Create Geometry With the Use Edge Option 1. Choose Use Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 2. To create sketched entities offset from a single edge, choose Sel Edge from the USE EDGE menu. To create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities, choose Sel Loop from the USE EDGE menu. Select a face containing the edges or entities. If more than one loop is possible, use Next and Previous from the CHOOSE menu to select the desired loop. To create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities, choose Sel Chain from the USE EDGE menu. Select the beginning and ending entities of the chain. If you select curves, they must both belong to the same datum curve. If you select edges, they must belong to the same surface or face. You can pick two edges on a parts geometry or two one-sided edges of a quilt. With Sel Chain, if you pick two entities that belong to an IGES wireframe or a datum curve in a uniquely defined plane, the Sketcher tries to choose a chain that connects the entities and lies in that plane. If more than one chain is possible, use Next and Previous from the CHOOSE menu to select the desired chain. Sketching on a Model
4-7
3. The selected geometry is highlighted temporarily in blue, then in sketching color (cyan or white). After the process has been completed, Pro/ENGINEER displays an appropriate message in the Message window. The following figure shows an example of using the Use Edge option. Completed Feature Created with Use Edge
The completed section
The completed feature
Determining the End of a Trimmed Use Edge Spline Sketcher can determine the end of a trimmed Use Edge spline by using the end tangency angle as a dimension. Sketcher looks for lines and centerlines that are tangent to the trimmed ends of the spline created by the Use Edge option. If the angle of the line can be determined without determining where the point is, Sketcher determines the point location by finding where the tangent to the spline has the specified angle.
The Offset Edge Option

The Offset Edge option in the GEOM TOOLS menu creates Sketcher geometry by offsetting. You can create offset entities from edges that are lines, arcs, or splines. When you create an offset entity, each point of the original lines, arcs, or splines is first projected onto the sketching plane. Each point is then offset normal to the projected entities by the specified distance. For example, creating an offset arc results in a concentric arc of a different diameter, rather than in a translated copy of the same arc.
4-8
Offset entities can be created from a single entire edge (untrimmed), a portion of a single edge (trimmed), a chain of edges or entities, or a loop of edges or entities. Note the following restrictions: A circle is broken into two arcs. You must select each segment separately. You cannot offset edges that have tangency that meets in a sharpened point. When you select tangent edges to offset, select them all at the same time using the Sel Chain option. Otherwise, the section will fail regeneration because the individual offsets of the tangent entities will not be connected. Invalid Tangency for Offset Edge
Direction of offset
Select Loop cannot be used here to create the offset edge because the tangency meets in a sharpened point.
4-9
Figure Created with Offset Edge, Sel Chain

Protrusion created with Offset Edge, Sel Chain
Select these edges to indicate the chain to offset.
The following sections describe how to use the Offset Edge option to offset an entire edge, a portion of an edge, a chain, and a loop. Using Offset Edge to Offset an Entire Edge To use the whole edge to create an offset entity, you must create an untrimmed offset edge from a single edge. How to Create an Untrimmed Offset Edge From a Single Edge 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Offset Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Choose Sel Edge from the OFFSET SEL menu, or Sel Loop or Sel Chain, if desired. 4. Select the desired edge. You can select two edges on a part geometry, or two one-sided edges of a quilt. 5. If you chose Sel Edge, choose one of the options in the OFFSET TYPE menu: FixedCreate an entity with fixed offset at any point. TaperedCreate an entity with different offsets for each endpoint.
6. Choose Untrimmed from the OFFSET TYPE menu. 7. Choose Done. 8. If you chose Fixed, Pro/ENGINEER displays a red arrow near the middle of the edge. Enter an offset in the indicated direction. If you chose Tapered, the system displays an arrow at each end and prompts for the offset value for both endpoints of the edge.
4 - 10
The following figure shows an example of using the Offset Edge > Tapered options. Feature Created with Untrimmed Offset Edge, Tapered
Protrusion created using Offset Edge, Tapered
Select edge to offset.
Select edge to offset
When you delete an offset edge, Pro/ENGINEER retains the corresponding reference entities. If you do not use these references in the section, the system deletes them when you exit Sketcher. Using Offset Edge to Offset a Portion of an Edge Sketching on a Model To use a portion of the edge to create an offset entity, you must create a trimmed offset edge from a single edge. How to Create a Trimmed Offset Edge From a Single Edge 1. Use the Point option from the GEOMETRY menu to place points on the edge at the locations to which you will trim before you create entities offset from the edge. 2. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 3. Choose Offset Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 4. Select the desired edge. 5. Choose either Fixed or Tapered from the OFFSET TYPE menu. 6. Choose the OFFSET TYPE menu option Trimmed. This option requires that you have first placed points on the edge at the locations to which you will trim the edge. 7. Choose Done. 8. The system prompts you to select a point to trim the edge. Pick one of the points.
4 - 11
9. Enter the offset value in the indicated direction. 10. Select the second point. If you chose Tapered, enter the offset value for the second endpoint. Using Offset Edge to Offset a Chain You can offset a chain of edges and curves with the Offset Edge, Sel Chain options. How to Offset a Chain of Edges or Curves 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Offset Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Choose Sel Chain from the OFFSET SEL menu. 4. Select the beginning and ending entities of the chain to be offset. If you select curves, they must both belong to the same datum curve. If you select edges, they must belong to the same surface or face. 5. If more than one chain is possible, use Next and Previous from the CHOOSE menu to select the desired chain. 6. Enter the offset value. A red arrow indicates the default direction of the offset. To offset in the opposite direction, enter a negative value. Pro/ENGINEER offsets the whole chain in the same direction. The entities are extended and trimmed, as necessary, to remain connected. When you use Offset Edge, Select Chain to offset a chain of entities by a large distance, the system creates offset geometry according to the following guidelines: If the offset is inward along an arc and the offset value exceeds the radius of the arc, the system removes the arc from the offset chain. Similarly, the system might remove other entities because of excessive offset value. If you lower the offset value later, the entities reappear. The following figure illustrates such a case.
4 - 12
Offsetting a Curve
Original geometry
r
Offset distance
Original geometry Offset distance
Offset geometry
Offset geometry
If the offset value is more than the local minimum radius of curvature for entities that compose the offset chain, the system creates an offset chain that might have a different number of entities. In the following example, offsetting a spline by a large value causes the resulting spline to be broken into several pieces. If the offset value is changed, the system can piece together the broken spline so it becomes a single entity again. Offsetting a Spline
Offset distance Original geometry Offset geometry
Using Offset Edge to Offset a Loop

You can offset a loop of edges or Sketcher entities by using Offset Edge, Sel Loop. How to Offset a Loop of Edges or Entities 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Offset Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Choose Sel Loop from the OFFSET SEL menu. 4. Select a face containing the edges or entities to offset.
4 - 13
5. If more than one loop is possible, use Next and Previous from the CHOOSE menu to select the desired loop. 6. Enter the offset value. A red arrow indicates the default direction of the offset. To offset in the opposite direction, enter a negative value.
The Pick Curve Option

The Pick Curve option is available only in 3-D sketching with no sketching plane assigned, such as when you create composite datum curves. With this option, you can select edges or three-dimensional curves, as you do for the Use Edge operation. You can pick two edges on the geometry of a part, or two one-sided edges of a quilt. For each entity selected, Pro/ENGINEER creates a three-dimensional sketched entity (displayed in cyan) directly on top of it. The system displays the CRV SKETCHER menu with the options described in Datum Curve Offset From a Curve on page 3 - 47.
Retrieving an Existing Section

The Place Section option in the SEC TOOLS menu allows you to retrieve a section from disk or from memory and place it on the current sketch as an independent copy of the original section. The target section can be empty or can contain existing entities (and dimensions). Placing a section does not alter other sketched geometry. In a parallel blend, the retrieved section is added to the current subsection. The Place Section option copies the entities and relations (if any) of the original section without reference to the original context in which they were created. Thus, the accuracy, grid parameters, and units of measure are those of the current model. The placed section behaves as a regular sketched section. After you place the section, it is no longer associated with the source section. You can easily replace the retrieved section with another one. For parallel blends, you can place the retrieved section into different subsections with variations in rotation angle and size.
4 - 14
How to Retrieve an Existing Section 1. Choose Place Section from the SEC TOOLS menu. 2. Select a section file in the Open dialog box. 3. The system retrieves the section and displays it in a subwindow. 4. If the section sketch is being placed on a part sketching plane (not an auxiliary section, such as for a sketched blind hole or a shaft), you can modify the location, orientation, and scaling of the section. For these actions, continue with Step 5. 5. Enter a rotation angle for the sketch. Be aware that some dimensioning schemes may change because of the change of sketch orientation, as shown in the following illustration. Effect of Sketch Orientation on Dimensions
Vertical dimension
8.00
0.00
Original section
Section rotated 90 degrees
6. Select an origin point on the sketch for scaling. When scaling the section using the mouse, the origin point remains stationary. 7. Select a drag point on the sketch. This is the point that will follow the mouse during positioning. The drag point cannot be coincident with the scaling point. 8. Enter a preliminary scale factor for the sketch. 9. Move the mouse from the subwindow to your part window. The section appears in red and follows your mouse pointer as it moves around the screen. 10. Using the mouse, you can do any of the following: Click the left button to place the section. The section changes from red to the normal section color and the system displays any dimensions.
4 - 15
Click the middle button to abort the section placement and return to step 5. Click the right mouse button to switch between scaling and drag modes. When scaling, your scale origin remains stationary, and moving the mouse increases or decreases the size of the section. Returning to drag mode causes the drag origin to follow the mouse again.
11. Locate the section with respect to the part by dimensioning or aligning.
Dimensioning a Section to a Part

Sections sketched on a part must be dimensioned for size and relative placement on the part. For dimensioning, the sketching plane does not have to be parallel to the screenthe part can be in any orientation. In fact, sometimes dimensioning the section with the model in a 3-D view helps avoid invalid dimensioning (see the illustration Dimensioning to Part Edges on page 4 - 20). When sketching on a part, you can create the four dimension types by using the DIMENSION menu: NormalCreate a dimension that references sketched entities only, or between a sketched entity and part geometry. These dimensions are used to solve the section and eventually become regular part dimensions. PerimeterCreate a perimeter dimension. See Perimeter Dimension on page 2 - 35. ReferenceCreate a dimension that you want to use for reference. Reference dimensions have the symbolic form rsd#. KnownCreate a dimension that references part geometry only. These dimensions are used to drive Sketcher dimensions through a relation. They are necessary to solve the section, and are not displayed anywhere except in this section. Known dimensions have the symbolic form kd#. BaselineEstablish a baseline for ordinate dimensioning. See Ordinate Dimensions on page 2 - 37 for more information.
In Sketcher mode, you can dimension to known entities, shown as phantom orange line.
4 - 16
Aligning or Dimensioning to a Model Edge or Surface

Aligning or dimensioning to a model entity (edge, curve, and so on) adds the existing geometric entity to the list of known entities that Pro/ENGINEER uses with its implicit rules to solve a section. All open ends must be explicitly aligned to the model edges. Aligning to a model edge does not automatically move sketched geometry to be coincident with the model. Instead, the system considers the proximity of sketched geometry to aligned model edges when solving the sketch. You can align straight lines, circular edges and circular centers, and entity endpoints. Composite curves cannot be directly referenced when aligning sketcher entities. Instead, you must align the sketcher entities to the underlying curves that make up the composite curve. You can also align to surfaces by selecting an edge of the perpendicular surface. Use Query Sel to toggle to the edge of the surface (displayed in blue) for alignment. The system chooses the edge-on surface for aligning and dimensioning by default, rather than the edge of this surface. There are two ways to align to an edge of a part using the Align option: You can select the model geometry to add to the list of known entities before doing any sketching. To do this, select the model geometry with the left mouse button, then click the middle button. The system highlights the geometry and informs you that the geometry is aligned. You can align the sketched geometry to the model by selecting one model edge and one sketched entity. Sketching on a Model
Known entities are displayed in orange phantom font. If you align a sketcher entity to an edge or curve in a model, the edge or curve will be displayed in phantom orange.
Avoiding Implicit Alignment

When geometry is close to a model edge, it may be within the accuracy for the Sketcher to assume alignment, even though to validate the section you must explicitly align it. However, you may want sketched geometry to be close to model geometry, while still being able to maintain dimensional control on this placement. This
4 - 17
means you want to override a Sketcher assumption. To do this, set the configuration file option use_dimensioned_edges to no. This means that you do not want Pro/ENGINEER to assume any implicit alignment with edges to which features have already been aligned or dimensioned.
Rules to Remember
When you align entities, remember the following rules: When you align a circular edge, both the size and location of the circle are considered to be known. You can align splines and conics to edges as a way to establish tangency at their endpoints. The sketched conic or spline must lie close to the edge, and must be close to tangent to be aligned successfully. To align conics, select the endpoint, then pick the edge. To align splines, select the spline twice, then select the edge. It is possible to align to a silhouette edge of a cylinder, cone, or other revolved features, even though no physical edge exists there. The silhouette edges must be on the sketching plane.
Aligning to Points
You can align and dimension entities to known points of the model. Known points are vertices, datum points, and axes normal to the sketching plane (so they are projected as a point). When you sketch on a part, you can align to the known points to capture relationships between features. The procedure of aligning to points is the same as for edges. To select a vertex, pick close to it. To select a datum point or axis, pick on the text. You can also select the known points for dimensioning.
Unaligning Geometry
Geometry previously aligned in Sketcher mode can also be unaligned by choosing Unalign, Unalign Many, or Unalign All. The system highlights those entities that are explicitly aligned (using the Align option) in green. Choose Unalign to remove the alignment from an individual entity, then select it. As each section entity is selected, the green highlighting disappears. If you remove the alignment from a model edge, all section entities aligned to it will be unaligned.
4 - 18
Unaligning Multiple Entities The option Unalign Many simultaneously removes the alignment from several section entities. After choosing Unalign Many, use the Pick Many option in the Get Select menu to rubberband a box around the entities to be unaligned. All entities completely within the box are selected. Both Unalign Many and Pick Many can select known entities (representing projections to the sketching plane of referenced part geometry and displayed in orange phantom font). If you choose Unalign Many and Query Sel, the system prompts you with messages denoting section selections of regular or known entities, and what kind of entity was selected. Use Unalign All to unalign all aligned entities in the sketch. When you choose this option, the system prompts you to confirm the request. When you choose Done Sel or click the middle mouse button, the selected entities will be unaligned. When you remove the alignment an entity, you may need to add dimensions to solve the section.
Tips for Dimensioning to Part Edges

When dimensioning to a part edge, you must consider what type of entity the part edge is. Splines and arcs may appear in the sketching plane as straight lines to which you can dimension. But, if the plane that was used as the sketching plane is modified (for example, if the angle of a datum plane changed), the spline or arc no longer appears as a straight line. Thus, the dimensioning scheme becomes invalid, Pro/ENGINEER will not be able to place the feature, and the feature creation or regeneration will fail. One way to avoid this situation is to not dimension to splines or arcs that project onto the sketching plane as straight lines. However, if the situation does occur, modify the dimensioning scheme to dimension section geometry to linear geometry. You can orient the part in an iso-type view to help you select proper geometry on the part. The next figure illustrates how to dimension to part edges.
4 - 19
Dimensioning to Part Edges

When dimensioning in 3-D, select this edge.
When the datum angle is modified, projection of this edge on the sketching plane becomes a spline.
This feature fails because d16 cannot be placed.
Feature regenerates successfully.
Known Dimensions
Known dimensions allow you to establish meaningful parametric dependencies when creating a section of a feature. How to Use Known Dimensions in Sketcher Mode 1. Sketch and dimension as usual. 2. Create Known dimensions on part geometry that will be used to drive the feature section. 3. From the SKETCHER menu, choose Relation.
4 - 20
4. Add relations connecting Normal section dimensions with the Known ones (see the following illustration). 5. When the system updates the section, values of normal dimensions change according to the relations. Dimensions driven by Sketcher relations cannot be modified directly. To access Sketcher relations, choose Redefine and Section. You can also do it in Part mode by choosing Relations, Feat Rel, selecting the feature, and choosing Section. Using Known and Normal Dimensions
Sketched entity
sd0 kd4
Part geometry sd1 kd3 Add relations: sd1=kd3/2 sd2=kd4/2
sd2
Using Automatic Dimensioning

With automatic dimensioning, the system adds dimensions to your sketch so it is fully constrained and then regenerates it. When you create a section in a part with existing geometry, the system must locate the section with respect to the part. For this, Sketcher uses known geometry. There are several ways to make geometry known: When you specify horizontal and vertical references for orienting the sketching plane, the system uses these as known geometry. You can make geometry known by referencing it before you use AutoDim (for example, by aligning it, using a model edge for sketching, or dimensioning to it.) When you align the section to the part geometry at the system alignment query, that geometry becomes known.
4 - 21
To make any known geometry unknown, use the Unalign command. How to Dimension a Section Automatically 1. Sketch geometry and choose AutoDim. 2. If the system needs additional references for locating the section with respect to the part geometry, it prompts you to select these references by picking edges and vertices. When finished, choose Done Select from the GET SELECT menu or press the middle button. 3. The system adds all necessary dimensions to constrain the section. Notice that projections of known geometry onto the sketching plane appear in orange with a dotted font. 4. The system checks the section if it should be aligned to the part geometry. If such alignment is possible, the system brings up the query menu so you can select the desired action. Choose one of the following options: AlignAlign geometry as prompted in the alignment query. Dont AlignDo not align geometry for that alignment query. DontAlignAnyDo not align any geometry in the current auto dimensioning operation.
5. After the system regenerates successfully, you can move dimensions to the desired location by using Move from the GEOM TOOLS menu and then Dimension from the MOVE ENTITY menu. Note: Any known geometry that is not used by the system is remembered by section and becomes its parent.
Regenerating a Section Sketch

During the section regeneration, Pro/ENGINEER checks the section geometry for validity and whether the section is placed adequately with respect to the part. If the section to be sketched is small, you should sketch in a sufficiently magnified view to avoid zero-length segments (see the following illustration). Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the section with respect to the scale of the part on the screen when the section was sketched.
4 - 22
Magnified Sketching
Section for protrusion is too small to regenerate segment is considered zero length.
Zoo m in on s
Segment is not zero length.
ecti
on
Part
Part
Another way to avoid zero-length segments is to sketch the section larger than actual size, then modify the dimension to the desired size.
Leaving Sketcher with an Incomplete Section

You can exit Sketcher with unfinished sections by choosing Done from the SKETCHER menu. This creates an incomplete section, which you can finish later. A feature that has an incomplete section becomes an incomplete feature. For more information on how the system handles incomplete features, see Creating Incomplete Features on page 1 - 5. How to Exit Sketcher With an Incomplete Section 1. When you want to exit Sketcher with an unfinished section, choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. 2. The system informs you that the section is unresolved and asks you for a confirmation to exit. Press ENTER. 3. You can leave feature creation by choosing OK from the feature creation dialog box, or you can continue feature definition by selecting another element from the dialog box. The following procedure explains how to complete the section. How to Complete a Section 1. Choose Redefine. 2. Select a feature with an incomplete section. 3. Choose Section from the dialog box. 4. Complete the section.
Sketching on a Model 4 - 23
5
Feature Creation Basics
The most common way of adding material to a part is to create a protrusion. When you create a protrusion, you select one of the forms (extrusion, revolution, and so on), sketch the features section, and define the protrusion attributes. This chapter describes the most common basic formsextruded and revolved protrusions. Basic forms of protrusions are used to create various Pro/ENGINEER features (for example, a cut, quilt, and so on). Creating other forms, such as sweeps and blends, is described in the next chapter. Topic Creating a Protrusion Thin Features Creating an Extruded Feature Creating a Revolved Feature Page 5-2 5-5 5-5 5 - 13
5-1
Creating a Protrusion
The following procedure explains how to create a protrusion. How to Create a Protrusion 1. Choose Feature > Create > Solid > Protrusion. 2. Specify a method of adding material by choosing an option from the SOLID OPTS menu. The options are: ExtrudeCreate a feature by extruding its section. See Creating an Extruded Feature on page 5 - 13. RevolveCreate a feature by revolving its section. See Creating a Revolved Feature on page 5 - 16. SweepCreate a feature by sweeping a section along a trajectory. See Sweep on page 6 - 2. BlendCreate a feature by blending multiple sections. See Blend on page 6 - 8. Use QuiltCreate a feature by adding material to a quilt. See Creating Solid Geometry Using Quilts on page 12 - 26. AdvancedCreate features using advanced feature forms. See Advanced Features on page 6 - 23.
3. Select an option from the lower portion of the SOLID OPTS menu: Solid(Default) Create a feature as solid. ThinCreate a thin feature by specifying the features thickness as a parameter. For information on how to create thin features, see Thin Features on page 5 - 5.
Choose Done from the SOLID OPTS menu. 4. Define the feature as prompted by the system. The following figure shows the different protrusion features.
5-2
Different Types of Protrusions
Extrude
section
axis of revolution Revolve section
subsection 1
subsection 2 Smooth
Blend Straight
subsection 3
trajectory
Sweep
section
It is good practice to create the simplest feature possible. For example, if an extruded cut will work, do not use a general blend.
5-3
To create a cut to remove material, you use the same techniques as when you add material. If you have sketched an open section, the system displays a red arrow indicating the side where material is to be added or removed (see the next illustration). Use the Flip and Okay options in the SEL SIDE menu to specify the side. Specifying the Side for a Cut Feature
Flip arrow Okay
Flip Arrow points toward area to be removed.
Selecting Feature Direction

Before you start, Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to specify in which direction the feature should extend, or the direction of viewing the sketching plane. How to Specify the Direction of Feature Creation 1. Pro/ENGINEER displays a red arrow on the selected sketching plane to indicate the default direction of feature creation. The direction of the arrow depends on the part orientation. If the part is oriented such that the feature will be created into the screen, the arrow points directly into the screen with the feathered end closest to you. If the part is oriented such that the feature will be created out of the screen, the arrow points out of the screen with the rounded head end towards you. In any other orientation, you will see the arrow from the side.
5-4
Direction Arrows
Into screen
Out of screen
2. Pro/ENGINEER also displays the ARROW FLIP menu. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of feature creation, or Okay to accept the direction shown. Note: To reset the size of the flip arrow, set the configuration option flip_arrow_scale. The default size is 1. Selecting the Sketching Plane and Feature Direction
Select this plane for sketching. Direction of feature creation
After you specify the reference plane, the system orients the sketching plane so it is parallel to the screen. If you are creating a feature that adds material to the part (such as a protrusion), the system orients the plane so the feature grows towards you. If you are adding a feature that removes material (such as a slot), Pro/ENGINEER orients the plane so the feature extends away from you.
Thin Features
Use the Thin option in the SOLID OPTS menu to create simplified section sketches with a uniform thickness (see the illustration Extruded Thin Feature) by applying a thickness to the section as it is extruded, revolved, swept, imported, or blended (for blends that are general, rotational, or closed).
5-5
Extruded Thin Feature
The thickness is to the outside.
Sketch this section.
Create this feature.
Thin features can be used as a base feature or as cuts, slots, and protrusions in secondary features. You can add material to create a a thin feature to either side of the sketched section. Choose Flip or Okay from the THIN OPT menu to specify the side or Both to add material equally to both sides of the section. You can modify both the section and thickness after the feature is created. Revolved Thin Feature
The thickness is to the inside.
Sketch this section.
Create this feature.
Thin features follow the contour of the part if an endpoint of the section is on a part edge (see the illustration Terminating Thin Feature Edges).
5-6
Terminating Thin Feature Edges

Create this feature. Sketch this line.
Note that the thickened line follows the base feature contour.
If only one endpoint is on the part edge, the corresponding created surface will follow that edge (see the illustration Thin Feature Endpoint on a Single Edge). Thin Feature Endpoint on a Single Edge
Thin feature surface automatically follows the edge.
Endpoint of original section Original section
If a thin section endpoint is located at a vertex, it lies on multiple edges. In this case, Pro/ENGINEER prompts you (with a small red circle and crosshair at the section endpoint) to select the edge that the end surface will follow (see the illustration Thin Feature Endpoint on a Vertex). You cannot include text in a sketch of a thin feature (see Using Sketcher Text on page 2 - 19).
5-7
Thin Feature Endpoint on a Vertex
Selected edge
Thin feature was created to both sides of the original section.
Endpoint of original section is at this vertex; the edge is ambiguous.
How to Create Thin Extrusion 1. Choose SOLID > Protrusion > Extrude > Thin > Done. 2. Choose One Side or Both Sides. 3. Select a sketching plane and orient the section. 4. Sketch the feature section. Remember that thickness is being added automatically, so you can use a simplified stick figure approach to the sketch. 5. Choose a thin feature direction using the THIN OPT menu (see Thin Features on page 5 - 5). 6. Enter the thickness of the thin section. 7. Choose a depth option and enter a depth, if required. See Specifying the Depth on page 5 - 9 for more information. If an endpoint of the sketched feature terminates on a part vertex that causes ambiguity, you must select the terminating edge or surface for the highlighted endpoint of the sketched section. Otherwise, the thin feature will be terminated with its end face normal to the sketched sectionit will not follow the part contour.
5-8
Specifying the Depth

When you define the Depth attribute of a feature (for example, a protrusion, cut, slot, hole, or surface feature), the SPEC TO (or SPEC FROM) menu appears with the following options: BlindEnter a dimension for the feature depth. You can then control the feature depth by changing the depth dimension. 2 Side BlindFor a feature defined as Both Sides, enter a separate depth value for each side with respect to the sketching plane. Thru NextTerminate the feature at the next part surface. Thru AllThe new feature intersects all surfaces. Thru UntilExtend the feature until the intersection with the specified surface. Pnt/VtxSpecify the depth up to a plane parallel to the sketching plane, and passing through the selected datum point or vertex. UpTo CurveSpecify the depth up to a plane parallel to the sketching plane, and passing through the selected edge, axis, or datum curve. UpTo SurfaceSpecify the depth up to a selected surface.
Blind
A blind feature has a user-defined depth dimension that governs its depth. A 2 Side Blind feature has two depth dimensions with respect to the sketching plane. In the special case of a sketched blind hole, the depth is indicated in the feature section. Feature Creation Basics
The Through Options

The system creates a through feature from the placement surface until its intersection with the specified termination surface. Consider the following rules for using the through options: For all through intersections, the feature being created must lie entirely within the surface (or quilt) on which it is terminated.
5-9
When you use the Thru Until option for an extruded feature, the feature cannot terminate on a datum plane. Use the UpTo Surface option to select the terminating datum. When you use the THRU UNTIL option for a blend, you can select a datum plane to terminate the feature, but the datum plane must be parallel to the sketching plane. Protrusions created with the THRU NEXT option cannot terminate on a datum plane. Thru Next, Thru Until, and Thru All are not available when you create surface features. Thru All is available for protrusions only if the part has existing geometry.
The next illustration shows the valid depth options for removing material in holes, cuts, and slots. Depth Options for Removing Material
Placement surface Thru Next
Thru All Thru Until
Next surface
Until surface (blend) or UpTo surface (extrude)
Thru All surface
Some tips for using the through options: Use a through option (Thru All, Thru Until, or Thru Next) when you want the feature to terminate on a specified surface. Use Thru Next when the feature should stop at the first surface it reaches. Use Thru All when the feature should stop at the last surface it reaches.
5 - 10
Use Thru Until when you want to pick the termination surface. Through features do not have a parameter associated with the extrusion depth. Modifying the terminating surface alters the depth of the feature.
The following illustration shows valid depth options for adding material. Depth Options for Adding Material
Placement surface
Thru All (Blend) Thru Until Thru Next Blind
Next surface
From surface From To (Blend), or UpTo surface (Extrude)
To surface Until surface
Thru All surface
The Up To Options
Feature Creation Basics The up to options are available for extruded (protrusions, cuts, and slots), revolved, and surface features. When you use the UpTo Surface option, you can select an existing surface or create a datum plane. Choose the desired method by selecting one of the following options: Select SurfSelect any part surface, quilt (composed of one or more surfaces), or datum plane. Make DatumCreate a datum plane be used as an Up To reference.
For solid features, you can select the surfaces of the following types: Another part surface, which need not be planar (see the illustration Using Both Sides and Up To Surface)
5 - 11
A datum plane, which need not be parallel to the sketching plane Quilt composed of one or more surfaces Note: For a surface feature, the terminating surface can only be a datum plane, which must be parallel to the sketching plane.
When creating features in Assembly mode, you can select geometry of another component as references for the up to options. Using a quilt as the terminating surface allows you to create features intersecting with multiple surfaces and is very useful for creating patterns consisting of multiple terminating surfaces. The next illustration shows an example of using a datum plane as an up to reference. Using Both Sides and Up To Surface
Sketch on datum plane.
Up To Surface Up To surface From surface Sketching plane Up To surface Feature created using Both Sides
5 - 12
Creating an Extruded Feature

The Extrude option in the SOLID OPTS menu creates a feature that is formed by projecting the section straight away from the sketching plane. It is the most basic and frequently-used form option. The following figure illustrates some sketched extruded features. Sketching Extruded Features
Closed section multiple contours
Protrusion
Open section
Cut
Basic Procedure for Creating an Extruded Feature

How to Create an Extruded Feature 1. Choose SOLID OPTS > Extrude > Done. 2. Specify the location of the extruded feature with respect to the sketching plane. The possible values are as follows: One SideSpecify the depth of the feature to one side of the sketching plane. Both SidesSpecify depth for both sides of the sketching plane separately.
3. Specify the sketching plane.
5 - 13
4. Specify the direction of feature creation. 5. Orient the sketching plane. 6. The system places you in Sketcher. Select model references for placing the section. 7. Sketch the section, then choose Done. 8. If prompted, specify the side to add or remove material using Flip and Okay. 9. Define the Depth element. 10. Click OK in the dialog box.
Using One Side and Both Sides with Depth Options

If you choose One Side, the feature starts from the sketching plane and is extruded in the direction of feature creation according to the selected depth option. If you choose Both Sides, for options other than Blind, you must define the from and to sides of the feature. Which side is considered from or to depends on the direction of feature creation. Note the following rules for the both sides features: For a Blind feature, the depth you enter is divided symmetrically by the sketching plane (see the illustration Location of a Blind Feature Relative to the Sketching Plane on page 5 - 15). The system applies the through options with respect to the sketching plane. For example, if you select Thru Next from the SPEC FROM menu, the system looks for the next valid surface from the sketching plane, in the direction opposite to the direction of feature creation (see the illustration Thru Options for Both Sides on page 5 - 15). Up to options allow you to locate the feature completely aside from the sketching plane. They also allow you to use vertices, edges, datum planes, and non-planar surfaces as termination references.
5 - 14
Location of a Blind Feature Relative to the Sketching Plane
One side
Both sides
Thru Options for Both Sides

Direction of feature creation Sketching plane SPEC TO option Thru All SPEC FROM option Thru Next
Open and Closed Sections for Extruded Features

Extruded sections can be open or closed. Note the following: Open sections cannot have more than one loop. All open ends should be explicitly aligned to the part edges. Closed sections may consist of one or more closed outside loops, or of one outside loop with one or more inside loops. In the last case, Pro/ENGINEER takes the largest loop as the outside, and each other loop is considered to be a hole in the large loop. The loops must not intersect each other.
5 - 15
Creating a Revolved Feature

The Revolve option creates a feature by revolving the sketched section around a centerline (see the illustration Revolve Cut or Slot). Revolve Cut or Slot
Section Axis of revolution
A revolved feature can be created either entirely on one side of the sketching plane, or symmetrically on both sides of the sketching plane. To create or redefine a revolved feature, specify the elements in the following order: Attributes Section Direction Angle
Specifying the Revolved Feature Attributes

The ATTRIBUTES menu elements One Side and Both Sides are available for all but the first feature. For Both Sides (see the next illustration), the feature will be revolved symmetrically in each direction for one half of the angle specified in the OPTIONS menu, whether preset or variable.
5 - 16
Revolved Cut or SlotBoth Sides Option
Axis of revolution
Sketching plane
60.00
Sketching the Revolved Feature Section

To create a revolved section, create a centerline and the geometry that will be revolved about that centerline. Rules for sketching a revolved feature: The revolved section must have a centerline. The geometry must be sketched on only one side of the axis of revolution. If you use more than one centerline in the sketch, Pro/ENGINEER uses the first centerline sketched as the axis of rotation. The section must be closed.
Specifying the Angle of Revolution

Use the options in the REV TO menu to specify the angle of revolution of the feature, and whether that angle is to be measured entirely on one side of the sketching plane, or symmetrically on both sides of the sketching plane. The options are as follows: VariableSpecify any angle of revolution less than 360 degrees. The angle is controlled by a dimension that the system displays when you modify the part, and in drawings. A corresponding dimension will not appear if you choose a preset angle.
5 - 17
90Create the feature with a fixed angle of 90 degrees. 180Create the feature with a fixed angle of 180 degrees. 270Create the feature with a fixed angle of 270 degrees. 360Create the feature with a fixed angle of 360 degrees. UpTo Pnt/VtxCreate the revolved feature up to a point or vertex. The revolved feature ends when the section plane reaches the point or vertex (see the next illustration). UpTo PlaneCreate the revolved feature up to an existing plane or planar surface that must contain the axis of revolution. If you are revolving to a datum plane, identify the plane and use the flip arrow to indicate on which side of the axis of revolution to stop revolving when the feature reaches the datum plane (as it is created in the direction of revolution). The feature ends when its revolving section plane reaches the plane (see the illustration Creating a Revolve Feature with UpTo Plane on page 5 - 19). If you are revolving to a non-datum plane surface, indicate the side by the location at which you select the surface as a reference (see the next illustration).
In the next illustration, the revolve feature is created using the UpTo Plane option by selecting DTM1. Depending on the direction of the axis of revolution, you will get two different results.
5 - 18
Creating a Revolve Feature with UpTo Plane

Direction of feature creation Axis of revolution
Axis of revolution
Section
5 - 19
6
Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features
This chapter provides basic information on how to create sweeps, blends, and advanced feature forms. Topic Sweep Blend Advanced Features Page 6-2 6-8 6 - 23
6-1
Sweep
A sweep is created by sketching or selecting a trajectory and then sketching a section to follow along it. You can create more advanced sweeps using the Advanced option (see Advanced Features on page 6 - 23). Swept Cut
Open section
Trajectory
Rules for Defining a Trajectory

A constant section sweep can use either a trajectory sketched at the time of feature creation or a trajectory made up of selected datum curves or edges. As a general rule, the trajectory must have adjacent reference surfaces, or be planar. When you define a sweep, the system checks the specified trajectory for validity and establishes normal surfaces. A normal surface is the surface whose normal is used to establish the Y-axis of the trajectory. When ambiguity exists, the system prompts you to select a normal surface. Depending on the type of chain selected as a trajectory, the system behaves as follows: All chain segments reference edgesThe normal surfaces are the adjacent surfaces of the edges. If the edges are two-sided, the system prompts you to choose one set of surfaces. All chain segments reference entities that belong to a datum curve, created by referencing surfaces (for example, by using the Projected option)The normal surfaces are reference surfaces of the curve. If the curve references two sets of surfaces, the system prompts you to choose one.
6-2
All chain segments reference a sketched datum curvethe normal surface is the sketching plane of the curve. The chain of edges/curves is planar (other than a straight line)The normal surface is the plane defined by the chain. Datum curves that you select for the trajectory must be created with one of the following options: Sketch Intr. Surfs Use Xsec Projected Formed OffsetfromSrf 2 Projections from any curve that lies in a plane
Consider the following special cases: If a datum curve and its adjacent surfaces were bent by a toroidal bend feature, you can use that curve as a trajectory. If you extend the chain with Trim/Extend in the CHAIN menu, the system accepts that chain if it is planar.
The following figure illustrates a constant section sweep. Constant Section Sweep
DTM1
Sweep uses as a trajectory a datum curve created from the intersection of two surfaces.
6-3
Note that a sweep may fail if: A trajectory crosses itself. You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when its is swept along the 3-dimensional trajectory (for more information, see Aligning to Part Geometry on page 6 - 33). An arc or a spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself traversing around the arc (see the following illustration). Self-Intersecting Feature
Trajectory R 1.0
R 1.5 Section
How to Create a Swept Feature 1. Use the command sequence Feature, Create, Solid, Protrusion. 2. Choose Sweep and Done from the SOLID OPTS menu. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays the feature creation dialog box for sweeps. 4. Sketch or select the trajectory using a SWEEP TRAJ menu option. The trajectory can be open or closed. The options are as follows: Sketch TrajSketch the sweep trajectory using Sketcher mode. Select TrajSelect a chain of existing curves or edges as the sweep trajectory. The CHAIN menu allows you to select the desired trajectory (see Chain Processing on page 3 - 33).
5. If the trajectory lies in more than one surface, such as a trajectory defined by a datum curve created using Intr. Surfs, the system prompts you to select a normal surface for the sweep cross section. Pro/ENGINEER orients the Y-axis of the cross section to be normal to this surface along the trajectory.
6-4
6. Create or retrieve the section to be swept along the trajectory and dimension it relative to the crosshairs displayed on the trajectory. Choose Done. 7. If the trajectory is open (the start and end points of the trajectory do not touch (see the illustration Free and Merged Ends) and you are creating a solid sweep, choose an option from the ATTRIBUTES menu, then Done. The possible options are as follows: Merge EndsMerge the ends of the sweep, if possible, into the adjacent solid. To do this, the sweep endpoint must be attached to part geometry. Free EndsDo not attach the sweep end to adjacent geometry. Free and Merged Ends
Merged ends
Free ends
The trajectory ends at intersection with solid geometry, but the sweep end is unattached.
8. If the sweep trajectory is closed (see the illustration Solid Sweeps with Closed Trajectories on page 6 - 6), choose one of the following SWEEP OPT menu options and Done: Add Inn FcsFor open sections, add top and bottom faces to close the swept solid (planar, closed trajectory, and open section). The resulting feature consists of surfaces created by sweeping the section and has two planar surfaces that cap the open ends. No Inn FcsDo not add top and bottom faces.
6-5
9. Choose Flip, if desired, then Okay from the DIRECTION menu to select the side from which to remove material for swept cuts. 10. Select OK in the dialog box to create the sweep. Solid Sweeps with Closed Trajectories
Closed trajectory, No Inn Fcs. Section must be closed.
Closed trajectory, Add Inn Fcs. Section must be open.
Note: When creating a surface sweep with a closed trajectory, the No Inn Fcs option may be used with an open or closed section, but the Add Inn Fcs option requires only an open section.
Swept Feature Corners

The sweep will have a mitered corner if the trajectory has straight line segments that form an angle (see the following illustration).
6-6
Sweep with Mitered Corner

Angles in sweep trajectories create sweep corners.
Non-Tangent Trajectory Segments

Sweeps can be made along trajectories consisting of non-tangent entities. However, as the section is swept along, the resulting geometry should not have any gaps, as shown in the following illustration. Sweeping Along Non-Tangent Entities
Trajectory Gap in the sweep geometry
Trajectory RIGHT WRONG
Three-Dimensional Sweeps
With Pro/FEATURE, sweeps can be created along a three-dimensional path with a three-dimensional spline for the sweep trajectory. That is, Pro/FEATURE allows you to modify the Z-coordinates of spline points (all other Sketcher entities must lie on a two-dimensional sketching plane). In all other respects, three-dimensional sweeps are created in the way same as
6-7
two-dimensional sweeps. Beyond the three-dimensional sweeps described here, for such applications as creating springs, you can create an advanced feature helical sweep by sweeping a section along a helical trajectory (see the illustration Sample Area Graph and Information Window on page 6 - 46). Spring Created from a 3-D Spline
3-D spline
Cross Section
How to Create a Three-Dimensional Spline 1. Create a two-dimensional spline and dimension it to a Sketcher coordinate system. 2. Modify the X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates for one or more spline points. You can modify the spline coordinates manually, or by using a spline definition file. See the Sketcher chapter, for more information on modifying splines. Note: You cannot modify coordinates of the spline if its endpoints are attached to other entities in the sketch.
Blend
A blended feature consists of a series of at least two planar sections that Pro/ENGINEER joins together at their edges with transitional surfaces to form a continuous feature. Blends with parallel sections can be created in basic Pro/ENGINEER, but the Pro/FEATURE and Pro/SURFACE modules are required to create blends from non-parallel sections.
6-8
Blend Types Blend Type ParallelAll blend sections lie on parallel planes in one section sketch.
Subsection 1
SectionSmoothStraight
Subsection 2
Subsection 3
RotationalBlend sections are rotated about the Y-axis, up to a maximum of 120 degrees. Each section is sketched individually and aligned using the coordinate system of the section. GeneralSections of a general blend can be rotated about and translated along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. Each section is sketched individually, and aligned using the coordinate system of the section.
Section 1 and 3
Section 2
Sections 1 to 5 (differ only in size)
6-9
Techniques Common to All Blend Types

This section describes the techniques that are common to the creation of to all blend types.
Blend Sections
The illustration Straight Parallel Blend shows a parallel blend for which the section consists of three subsections. Each segment in a subsection is matched with a segment in the following subsection; the blended surfaces are created between the corresponding segments. With the exception of capping a blend (see Capping Blends on page 6 - 19), blends must always have the same number of entities in each section. It is possible to make surfaces of non-parallel blends and parallel smooth blends disappear using Blend Vertex (see Using a Blend Vertex on page 6 - 18). Straight Parallel Blend
Subsection 1 Subsection 2 Subsection 3
Each subsection contains four segments.
Starting Point of a Section

To create the transitional surfaces, Pro/ENGINEER connects the starting points of the sections and continues to connect the vertices of the sections in a clockwise manner. By changing the starting point of a blend subsection, you can create blended surfaces that twist between the sections (see the illustration Starting Points and Blend Shape on page 6 - 11). The default starting point is the first point sketched in the subsection. You can place the starting point at the endpoint of another segment by choosing the option Start Point from the SEC TOOLS menu and selecting the point.
6 - 10
Starting Points and Blend Shape
Start points
Smooth and Straight Attributes

The following types of transition surfaces are used for creating the blend: StraightCreate a straight blend by connecting vertices of different subsections with straight lines. Edges of the sections are connected with ruled surfaces. SmoothCreate a smooth blend by connecting vertices of different subsections with smooth curves. Edges of the sections are connected with spline surfaces. Smooth and Straight Blends
Smooth blend
Straight blend
6 - 11
The From To Depth Option

The From To depth option is applicable for blends only. The From To option extrudes a feature from a selected surface to another surface. It is designed to create features between sculptured surfaces, but can be used for any type of surface, with the following restrictions: Intersection surfaces must be physical surfaces, therefore datum planes are not allowed as From or To surfaces. The feature section must intersect the From To surfaces completely.
Creating a Blend
The following procedure explains how to create a blend. How to Create a Blend 1. Use the command sequence Feature, Create, Solid, Protrusion. 2. Choose Blend and Solid or Thin from the SOLID OPTS menu, then Done. 3. Choose options from the BLEND OPTS menu, then Done. The BLEND OPTS menu options are as follows: ParallelAll blend sections lie on parallel planes in one section sketch. For more information, see Parallel Blends on page 6 - 13. RotationalThe blend sections are rotated about the Y-axis, up to a maximum of 120. Each section is sketched individually and aligned using the coordinate system of the section. GeneralThe sections of a general blend can be rotated about and translated along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. Each section is sketched individually and aligned using the coordinate system of the section. For more information, see General Blend on page 6 - 22. Regular SecThe feature will use the sketching plane. Project SecThe feature will use the projection of the section on the selected surface. This is used for parallel blends only. For more information, see Projected Parallel Blend on page 6 - 14.
6 - 12
Select SecSelect section entities. This option is not available for parallel blends. Sketch SecSketch section entities.
Parallel Blends
You create parallel blends using the Parallel option in the BLEND OPTS menu. A parallel blend is created from a single section that contains multiple sketches, called subsections. First and last subsections can be defined as a point or a blend vertex. Whenever you modify or redefine the section for a parallel blend feature, the system displays the dimensions and contours for all the subsections. Note: If you make cuts in a parallel projected blend, the sections must be closed.
Parallel Blend Sections

A parallel blend section cannot be retrieved into Sketcher mode or into any feature other than a parallel blend. You can retrieve a saved section using Place Section (see Sketching Section Geometry on page 4 - 6) only when the blend is a secondary feature and is going to be placed on an existing feature. The retrieved section will be added to the current subsection and can be placed into different subsections with variations in rotation angle and size. How to Create a Parallel Blend 1. When you choose Done from the BLEND OPTS menu, the system displays feature creation dialog box and the ATTRIBUTES menu. Choose either Straight or Smooth. 2. Create the first subsection using Sketcher. You determine the direction of feature creation as you set up the sketching plane. 3. A parallel blend requires more than one subsection. To continue creating other subsections, choose Sec Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 4. Choose Toggle from the SEC TOOLS menu. The first subsection turns gray and becomes inactive. 5. Choose Sketch and sketch the second subsection. Make sure its starting point corresponds to the starting point of the first by selecting the Start Point from the SEC TOOLS menu. Dimension the subsection. Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features
6 - 13
6. If you are sketching more than two subsections, choose Toggle until all the current geometry is gray, then sketch the subsection. Repeat this step until all subsections are sketched. Each subsection must be fully dimensioned to define its geometry and to locate it with respect to the other subsections. If you began your part with three default datum planes, every subsection can be dimensioned to them. Otherwise, each subsection should be dimensioned to another subsection or a local coordinate system. 7. To modify an existing subsection, toggle through until the subsection you want is active. While you can place or move the starting point of a subsection only when it is active, you can modify the dimensions of any subsection at any time. 8. When you have sketched all the subsections, choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. Enter the distances between each subsection in response to the prompts. 9. Specify the Depth element. 10. Choose OK from the dialog box. Note: Parallel blend sections cannot be saved and retrieved as ordinary sections.
Projected Parallel Blend

Projected section blends allow you to create a sketch on a planar surface or datum plane and project the sections onto any two solid surfaces to create a blended feature. Note: In Assembly mode, you cannot use an external reference as a surface to project onto. A projected parallel blend can have only two sections, each of which must lie within the boundaries of its selected surface, and cannot intersect other surfaces. When the sections are regenerated, the system projects them onto their selected surfaces, normal to the sketching plane (see the following illustration). How to Create a Projected Section Blend 1. Choose Project Sec from the BLEND OPTS menu. 2. Select or create the sketching plane. 3. Select the from and to solid surfaces onto which the blend sections will be projected.
6 - 14
4. Sketch and dimension the two subsections, one for each surface, in the same order as you selected the From To surfaces (the first sketch will be projected onto the first surface selected). The next figure illustrates a projected parallel blend. Projected Section Blend
Sketching plane Section 1 Section 2 From surface Projected section 1
Projected section 2 Note: The sections maintain their true dimensions when projected parallel to the sketching plane (DTM1).
To surface (bottom)
Non-Parallel Blends
Non-parallel blends (Rotational and General options) have some particular advantages over parallel blends: Sections can be non-parallel, but do not have to be. Parallel blends can be created simply by entering a 0 angle between sections. A section can be created by importing from an IGES file. See Using IGES Files to Create Imported Sections for Non-Parallel Blends on page 6 - 17 for detailed information.
Sketched Versus Selected Sections

Non-parallel blend sections can be created by sketching them (using Sketch Sec), or by selecting three-dimensional entities (using the option Select Sec).
6 - 15
The restrictions for selecting section entities are as follows: All the entities must lie in the same plane. For rotational blends, the planes of all sections must intersect at a single axis. For rotational blends with only two sections, there is never ambiguity. However, if more than two sections are defined and they do not form a single axis, the feature fails.
Open and Closed Blends

Non-parallel blends can be open or closed. If you specify Closed, Pro/ENGINEER uses the first section of the blend as the last section and creates a closed, solid shape. Open and Closed Blends
Open blend
Closed blend
Specifying Tangent Surfaces

You can create a smooth transition between the surfaces of a blend feature and surfaces of an adjacent feature on the same part. Open, smooth blends can have a tangent surface specified for each segment in the first and last sections. How to Specify Surface Tangency Conditions 1. Choose the Tangency element and Define from the dialog box. 2. The system asks you if the blend should be tangent to any surfaces at the first end. 3. If you answer yes, the system highlights each segment in the first section sequentially. Select a surface for each highlighted entity. If you do not want to specify tangency for the highlighted segment, choose Done Sel to move to the next segment. 4. Repeat the process for the other end of the blend.
6 - 16
The following figure illustrates tangent surfaces. Blend Tangent to Adjacent Surfaces
Using IGES Files to Create Imported Sections for Non-Parallel Blends

The following sections describe how to use IGES files to create non-parametric and parametric sections for non-parallel blends. Non-Parametric Section Importing an IGES feature during feature creation can produce a non-parametric feature that has no dimensions to modify interactively. You can use the imported feature to define a section. How to Use an Imported Feature to Define a Section 1. When creating a non-parallel blend, select or sketch a section. If you sketch a section, create a coordinate system and align the section to the part. 2. Choose Interface from the SEC TOOLS menu. 3. Choose Import from the INTERFACE menu and IGES from the INTF IMPORT menu. 4. Enter an IGES file name for a two-dimensional section. An Information Window displays a summary of the IGES import data. Blends created in this way are subject to the following restrictions: Modifying the dimensioning scheme of the feature causes Pro/ENGINEER to prompt you for a new IGES file name. There must be a one-to-one correspondence between existing IGES entities and the replacement IGES entities (the first entity in the IGES file replaces the first entity in the section).
6 - 17
The IGES entities are placed using their absolute coordinate values. There is no option to scale or dimension the resulting sketch. The IGES file section must be closed and all endpoints must be matched exactly with another endpoint. Otherwise, import of an IGES file may fail.
Parametric Section You can create a parametric section using an IGES file by importing the section into the Sketcher, dimensioning the entities, and regenerating the section. This type of section is more useful, because the resulting feature is fully parametric.
Functions Applicable to Both Types of Blends

This section describes how to use a blend vertex and capping blends.
Using a Blend Vertex

With the exception of capping a blend (see Capping Blends on page 6 - 19), each section of a blend must always contain the same number of entities. For sections that do not have enough geometric entities, you can add blend vertices. Each blend vertex adds one entity to the section. However, a blend surface can be made to disappear using a blend vertex on a sketched or selected section. A blend vertex acts as a terminator for the corresponding surface of the blend, but is counted in the total number of entities for a section. You can use a blend vertex in either a straight or smooth blend (including parallel smooth blends), but only in the first or last section. How to Add a Blend Vertex 1. Choose Adv Geometry from the GEOMETRY menu in Sketcher. 2. Choose Blend Vertex from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. 3. Select the vertex of an existing geometry entity. A circle will be placed there. More than one blend vertex can be created at the same point. Each additional vertex will create a concentric circle of increasing diameter, as shown in the following illustration, Adding a Blend Vertex. You can delete a blend vertex entity using Delete > Query Sel.
6 - 18
Adding a Blend Vertex
2 3 4
2 (blend vertex) 3
+ 1
4
1
4 Section 3
Section 1
Section 2
Capping Blends
The first and last sections of a blend can each be a point. This caps the end of the blend feature with either a sharp or smooth transition to a tip. The end subsection of a parallel blend must always form a sharp cap. Smooth and sharp caps create very different features, as shown in the following illustration. The smooth cap is created by forcing all geometry to be tangent at the point section. The sharp cap allows the geometry to flow straight towards the point section. The best way to control the shape of the feature as it approaches the cap is to use as many sections as are necessary to achieve the desired result. Cap Type Affects the Feature Shape
Smooth cap
Sharp cap
Note the following information about capped blends: The Z-axis is normal to the surface at the point entity. Entering rotation values for the X- and Y-axis affects the feature definition of a smooth cap.
6 - 19
For a smooth cap, the point entity must be located within the boundaries of the previous section (picture where it would be if you used the same dimensions, but had sketched it on the previous section).
How to Cap a Non-Parallel Blend 1. For the last section of the non-parallel blend, create a coordinate system and a point entity. Dimension the point, if necessary. 2. Regenerate the section and choose Done. 3. Choose an option from the CAP TYPE menu: SmoothCreate a cap that is smooth. SharpCreate a cap that is sharp.
Rotational Blends
A rotational blend is created by sections that are rotated about the Y-axis. You enter angular dimensions to control section orientation and can dimension sections from their Sketcher coordinate system to control radial placement. You must add a section coordinate system in Sketcher mode. You cannot use the default coordinate system. If you define a rotational blend as being closed, Pro/ENGINEER uses the first section as the last section and creates a closed solid feature. There is no need to sketch the last section. How to Create a Rotational Blend 1. When you choose Rotational, other options, and Done from the BLEND OPTS menu, the system displays feature creation dialog box with the required elements Attributes and Section. You can also choose the Tangency element if you want to specify optional tangency. When you have selected all the elements, click Define. 2. Choose from the mutually exclusive pairs of elements in the ATTRIBUTES menu, then choose Done. The possible choices are as follows: StraightCreate a straight blend by connecting vertices of different subsections with straight lines. Edges of the sections are connected with ruled surfaces.
6 - 20
SmoothCreate a smooth blend by connecting vertices of different subsections with smooth curves. Edges of the sections are connected with spline surfaces. OpenCreate an open solid shape. ClosedCreate a closed solid shape. Pro/ENGINEER uses the first section of the blend as the last section.
3. Use Sketch Sec to sketch the sections of the blend, or Select Sec to select three-dimensional entities. When sketching the section, add a coordinate system using Coord System in the ADV UTILS menu. 4. For sketched sections, first enter the Y-axis rotation angle for the next section (120 maximum). After regenerating the section, the system displays a separate window for you to sketch the next section. After sketching and regenerating the section, choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. The system prompts you whether to continue to the next section. If you reply yes, repeat this step until you are done with all the sections. 5. If you are creating a smooth blend and selected Tangency in the dialog box, create the blend with surfaces tangent to adjacent geometry. See Specifying Tangent Surfaces on page 6 - 16 for more information. 6. When you have sketched or selected all sections, select OK in the dialog box to create the feature. Sketched Rotational Blend
Section 2 is rotated at 45 degrees with respect to Section 1 around the Y-axis.
Section 3 is rotated at 90 degrees with repsect to Section 2 about the Y-axis.
Section 1
6 - 21
General Blend
How to Create a General Blend 1. When you choose General and Done from the BLEND OPTS menu, the system displays the feature creation dialog box and the ATTRIBUTES menu. Choose either Straight or Smooth from the ATTRIBUTES menu. 2. Use Sketch Sec to sketch the sections of the blend, or Select Sec to select three-dimensional entities. When sketching the section, add a coordinate system using Coord System in the ADV UTILS menu. For sketched sections, enter the X-, Y-, and Z-axis rotation angle (120 maximum) as prompted to determine the orientation of the next sketch, or reply no to the prompt (after the second section is defined) whether to continue to next section. General Blend Sections
SEC1
SEC2
SEC3
3. Repeat step 2 until you are done with all the sections. 4. After all the sections of the blend are finished, enter an offset depth value for all sections but the first. This dimension is the straight-line distance between coordinate system origins. 5. If you are creating a smooth blend and selected the Opt Tangency element in the dialog box, create the blend with surfaces tangent to adjacent geometry. See Specifying Tangent Surfaces on page 6 - 16 for more information. 6. If you are creating a smooth blend, select tangency and section options. You can create the sections of the blend by sketching (using Sketch Sec), or by selecting three-dimensional entities (using Select Sec). See Sketched Versus Selected Sections on page 6 - 15 for more information. 7. When you have sketched or selected all sections, select OK in the dialog box to create the feature.
6 - 22
General Blend
Advanced Features
The Advanced option in the SOLID OPTS menu accesses options for advanced features, some of which are combinations of blend and sweep functionality. The ADV FEAT OPT menu contains the following options for creating swept, blended, and free-form features: Var Sec SwpCreate a variable section sweep using a single variable or constant section. Swept BlendCreate a swept blend using multiple variable sections. Helical SwpCreate a sweep feature by sweeping a section along a helical trajectory. Sect to SrfsCreate a transitional surface between a set of tangent surfaces and a sketched contour. Srfs to SrfsCreate a smooth transition between two surfaces. From FileCreate a blended feature by reading in data points from an ASCII le. Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features
6 - 23
Options Common to Variable Section Sweeps and Swept Blends

The following table lists terminology common to variable section sweeps and swept blends.
Option NrmToOriginTraj
Definition The section plane remains normal to the Origin Trajectory throughout its length. The generic Sweep behaves this way. Two trajectories must be selected to determine the location and orientation of the section. The Origin Trajectory determines the origin of the section along the length of the feature. The section plane remains normal to the Normal Trajectory along the length of the feature. The section plane remains normal to the Origin Trajectory as it is viewed along the Pivot Direction. The upward direction of the section remains parallel to the Pivot Direction (see the following figure).
Norm To Traj
Pivot Direction
6 - 24
Orienting the Section Using the Pivot Direction
Projection of the Origin Trajectory in the Pivot Direction Origin Trajectory Pivot Direction selected as the X-direction of the CSI
Projection of the Origin Trajectory in the Pivot Direction Origin Trajectory Pivot Direction selected as the Y-direction of the CSI
Variable Section Sweeps

A Variable Section Sweep enables you to create a feature by sweeping a section along the selected trajectories by controlling the sections orientation, rotation, and geometry along the trajectory. If you have a Pro/FEATURE license, you can define a solid variable section sweep feature using one or more longitudinal trajectories and a single section. With the optional Pro/SURFACE module, you can select trajectories instead of sketching them and you can create variable section sweeps of surfaces. Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features
6 - 25
A variable section sweep allows you to create a swept feature by controlling the following characteristics: You can specify the section orientation and rotation. The section can be normal to: the Origin TrajectoryChoose NrmToOriginTraj from the SWEEP OPTS menu. This method requires selecting the Origin Trajectory and the X-Trajectory. The X-Trajectory defines the sections horizontal vector. The origin of the section (crosshairs) is always located on the Origin Trajectory with the X-axis pointing towards the X-Trajectory. reference directionChoose Pivot Dir from the SWEEP OPTS menu. The Y-axis of the section is always normal to the selected direction. The section normal trajectory is determined by projecting the Origin Trajectory in the Pivot Direction onto a plane normal to the Pivot Direction. This method requires selecting the Origin Trajectory and defining the Pivot Direction. a selected trajectory (not the Origin Trajectory)Choose Norm To Traj from the SWEEP OPTS menu. This method requires selecting the Origin Trajectory and the trajectory to which the section will be normal.
You can define multiple additional trajectories to which the vertices of the section can be aligned (see the next figure). As the section plane is swept along the Origin Trajectory, its intersections with the longitudinal curves represent the known points for section alignment and dimensioning.
6 - 26
Using Additional Trajectories

Additional trajectories
Origin Trajectory
X-Trajectory
Section: section vertices are aligned to trajectories.
You can specify whether you want to vary the section as it moves along the sweep trajectories by defining the Section Type element in the Variable Section Sweep dialog box. Choose Constant from the SECTION TYPE menu to maintain the same section, or Variable from the SECTION TYPE menu to adjust the section size as it sweeps along the trajectory. For more detail, see Constant Versus Variable Section on page 6 - 33.
6 - 27
The following figure illustrates a variable section sweep created with the NrmToOriginTraj option. Notice how geometry changes depending on how the section is defined. Creating a Variable Section Sweep with NrmToOriginTraj
X-Trajectory Origin Trajectory
Origin Trajectory
X-Trajectory
Origin Trajectory
X-Trajectory
a) Section dimensioned only to the Origin Trajectory Origin Trajectory
b) Section aligned to the X-Trajectory Origin Trajectory
X-Trajectory Swept sections vary as feature follows the X-Trajectory.
X-Trajectory
6 - 28
The following figure illustrates a variable section sweep that uses the Pivot Dir option. Pivot Dir Variable Section Sweep
Origin Trajectory
Pivot plane
Side View The section remains normal to the pivot plane.
The following figure illustrates a variable section sweep that uses the NrmToOriginTraj option. NrmToOriginTraj Variable Section Sweep
X-Trajectory
Origin Trajectory
Side View The section remains normal to the Origin Trajectory.
Restrictions
The restrictions on sweep trajectories (see Rules for Defining a Trajectory on page 6 - 2) also apply for variable section sweeps. Note the following rules for selecting a trajectory: For NrmToOriginTraj sweeps, the Origin Trajectory can only consist of tangent entities. For Pivot Dir sweeps, projection of the entities must be tangent as viewed along the Pivot Direction (the entities themselves could be non-tangent in 3-D).
6 - 29
When you create a variable section sweep with the Norm To Traj option, the entities in the Origin Trajectory must be tangent. The X-Trajectory and the origin trajectories cannot intersect, through they can meet at one of their ends. All additional trajectories of the feature must intersect the sweeps sketching plane. The additional trajectories do not need to be as long as the Origin Trajectory; the sweep feature will be created as far as the endpoint of the shortest trajectory. Modifying the lengths of trajectories will modify the length of the sweep. All trajectories must be continuous. You can use a composite curve as a trajectory.
Creating a Variable Section Sweep

The following procedure explains how to create a variable section sweep. How to Create a Variable Section Sweep 1. Choose Advanced and Done from the SOLID OPTS or SRF OPTS menu. The system displays the ADV FEAT OPT menu. 2. Choose Var Sec Swp, then Done from the ADV FEAT OPT menu. Pro/ENGINEER displays the feature creation dialog box and the VAR SEC SWP menu. 3. Choose an option from the SWEEP OPTS menu, then choose Done. The options are as follows: NrmToOriginTrajSelect the Origin Trajectory. Pivot DirUse the GEN SEL DIR menu to specify the Pivot Direction. The possible options are as follows: PlaneSelect a plane or create a new datum plane to which the direction will be normal. Crv/Edg/AxisSelect as the direction an edge, curve, or axis. If you select a non-linear edge or curve, the system prompts you to select an existing datum point on the edge or curve to specify a tangent. CsysSelect an axis of the coordinate system as the direction.
6 - 30
Norm To TrajSelect the Origin Trajectory and an additional trajectory to which the section will remain normal.
4. Sketch or select the Origin Trajectory using the VAR SEC SWP menu options, then choose Done. The possible options are as follows: Sketch TrajSketch a new trajectory to use for the sweep. Select TrajDefine a chain from curves and edges (such as a datum curve) to use as the sweep trajectory. Sel Tan TrajDefine a chain from curves and edges to use as a trajectory and specify a tangency condition by selecting tangency reference surfaces (see Specifying Tangency Conditions on page 6 - 16). Remove TrajRemove a trajectory that you previously sketched or selected. You cannot remove the Origin Trajectory.
5. If you chose Pivot Dir in Step 3, go to Step 8; otherwise, proceed as follows. Sketch or select the X-Trajectory, which defines the horizontal vector of the section. The sketching plane is located at a datum point or the endpoint of the Origin Trajectory. The orientation of the sketch plane is such that the positive X-axis passes from the endpoint of the Origin Trajectory through the point at the intersection of the second trajectory with the normal plane. 6. If you chose Norm To Traj in Step 3, select the trajectory to which the section will be normal. Choose an option in the SEC ORIENT menu, followed by Done: Norm to SurfSelect a surface that determines the sections upward direction, then select or sketch the trajectory that defines the section plane normal. Choose Flip an Okay to select the upward direction. This option is available only if the Origin Trajectory belongs to a surface. Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features Use Norm TrajSelect a trajectory that defines the section plane normal.
7. If the Origin Trajectory has datum points, the system highlights an endpoint of the Origin Trajectory so you can define the start point. Choose an option from the SEC POINT menu to select the start point: Origin StartUse the highlighted endpoint as the start point for the Origin Trajectory.
6 - 31
Pick PointPick a datum point on the Origin Trajectory to be its start point.
Note: For a Norm To Traj swept blend, the system checks if the normal plane to the selected trajectory has a defined intersection with the Origin Trajectory. If the intersection cannot be found, the system issues a warning so you can redefine the normal trajectory. 8. You can sketch or select as many additional longitudinal trajectories as you want, such that if the section is dimensioned to or aligned to these trajectories, the sweep feature also follows these trajectories as it travels along the origin. The trajectories can be accessed by selecting the Trajectories element in the dialog box. You can remove a trajectory by choosing Remove Traj from the VAR SEC SWP menu. 9. Choose Done to complete the trajectory definitions. 10. Sketch the sweep section. The section can be dimensioned to known points (to the points of intersection of the longitudinal curves with the sketching plane). The section remains aligned and dimensioned to the point as it sweeps along the curve.Use relations to create a meaningful parametric section. Notes: When you dimension the section to known points or part edges, consider the relative position of the X-Trajectory throughout the length of the Origin Trajectory. Dimensions that are valid at the start point of the sweep could become meaningless as the section turns around the origin. To capture your design intent when sketching a variable section sweep section, you can use known dimensions and graph evaluation. You can map a graph, or any function, along the variable section sweep Origin Trajectory using the trajectory parameter, trajpar, in a relation. For additional information, see Using Relations in Sweeps on page 6 - 35.
11. Choose Done to exit Sketcher. 12. Click OK in the dialog box.
6 - 32
Constant Versus Variable Section If you define the Section Type element in the Variable Section Sweep dialog box as Constant, the system maintains the same section geometry along the trajectory. This can be useful when the section geometry references adjacent part geometry (for example, when you used Use Edge from the GEOM TOOLS to create the section). Depending on whether you define the section as Variable or Constant, you get two different geometries of the variable section sweep (see the next figure). Using Constant and Variable Options
The section created with Use Edge follows the Origin Trajectory.
Origin Trajectory Using Constant
For the Variable option, the section is constantly reevaluated along the trajectory. For the section created with Use Edge, the system projects the referenced geometry at every point of the trajectory to define the section.
Origin Trajectory
Using Variable
Aligning to Part Geometry Consider the following recommendation: Do not align or dimension the section to part geometry unless the alignment or dimensions can be held throughout the sweep, as this alignment may become invalid as the section is swept along its trajectory (see the next figure).
6 - 33
Example of invalidated Alignment
X-Trajectory
Sweep section
Aligned entities Origin Curve
As the section is swept along the trajectory, alignment of the section side edge and the base side edge becomes invalid, and the feature fails.
Specifying Tangency Conditions

If you chose Sel Tan Traj to specify a tangent trajectory, you must specify a control surface for each segment of the trajectory. When the sweep section is created, the direction tangent to the control surface will be shown as a centerline and can be used for section dimensioning (see the following illustration, Sweep Tangent to a Surface). How to Specify Tangency Conditions 1. After you selected the trajectory, the system highlights default tangent surfaces. 2. The system displays the DEFAULT TAN menu. Choose Accept to accept all the default surfaces, or choose Reject to select individual tangent surfaces. When you start sketching the sweep section, all the specified tangencies are displayed as centerlines. You can use them for dimensioning in Sketcher mode; this way, a sweep surface can be forced to stay tangent to the adjacent part surface.
6 - 34
Sweep Tangent to a Surface

Origin Trajectory Control surface Sweep section Tangency centerline
X-vector trajectory
Additional trajectory The sweep is created tangent to the selected surface.
Using Relations in Sweeps

Using the trajectory parameter, trajpar, in a relation for variable section sweeps allows you to map a graph, or any function, along the sweep Origin Trajectory (see the following illustrations, Mapping a Graph to a Variable Section Sweep and Variable Section Sweep Driven to a Point). The value of trajpar changes from 0 to 1 as the section is swept along the Origin Trajectory. When a sweep is created along a composite curve, you can evaluate the trajpar of this curve at a specific point, the trajpar_of_pnt, and use this value in relations. For an example, see Parametric Graph Relations on page 6 - 37. If you set relations when sketching the section, connecting section dimensions with the trajectory parameter by some function, the section changes according to this function as it is swept along the Origin Trajectory.
6 - 35
Mapping a Graph to a Variable Section Sweep y

Origin trajectory
1 x
Graph name: form1
Section sketch Origin trajectory sd0 X-Trajectory sd1 sd0 = evalgraph (form1, trajpar) 0 d0 X-Trajectory
Variable Section Sweep Driven to a Point

Graph name: gr1 Graph name: gr2
Section Origin trajectory
X-Trajectory Completed sweep Sketcher relations: sd4 = evalgraph (gr1, 200*trajpar) sd5 = evalgraph (gr2, 250*trajpar)
6 - 36
You can also create variable section sweep features with sections driven to zero area at the endpoint (see the preceding illustration, Variable Section Sweep Driven to a Point), or at some intermediate point of the trajectory of the feature (see the following illustration Origin Trajectory and Graph Relations). Note: The surface cannot be degenerate at the starting point of the trajectory. The dimension driven by a graph must evaluate to a non-zero value when you create the sweep section. Origin Trajectory and Graph Relations
Origin trajectory X-Trajectory
Graph name: gr1
Section
Sketcher relation for the sweep section: sd3 = evalgraph (gr1, 250 * trajpar)
This surface is driven to zero.
Origin Trajectory
X- trajectory
Parametric Graph Relations

If the driving graph is apt to change, you can include the dimensions of the graph instead of absolute values in the Sketcher relations of the sweep. The sweep then updates automatically with the changes to the driving graph.
6 - 37
How to Create Parametric Graph Relations 1. Before creating the sweep, choose Feat Info for the graph feature and determine the part dimension symbols corresponding to the appropriate section dimension of the graph. 2. When you dimension the sweep section, enter the relation for the corresponding graph dimension. In the previous example, the relation would be as follows: sd3 = evalgraph (gr1, d0 * trajpar) Modifications to the graph function may change its shape so the sweep feature geometry cannot be created. If the sweep feature fails because of modifications to the driving graph, you have two options: Choose Undo Changes to restore all the dimensions of the graph. Choose Quick Fix and then Redefine to redefine the sweep trajectories and section Origin Trajectory. For more information, see Resolving Feature Failures on page 17 - 2.
Swept Blends
A swept blend requires a single trajectory (the Origin Trajectory) and multiple sections. To define the Origin Trajectory of the swept blend, you can either sketch a curve or select a chain of datum curves or edges. You sketch the sections to be blended at specified segment vertices or datum points on the Origin Trajectory. To orient a section, you can specify the rotation angle about the Z-axis, and/or use the Pick XVector or Norm to Surf options. Note the following restrictions: A section cannot be located at a sharp corner in the Origin Trajectory. For a closed trajectory profile, sections must be sketched at the start point and at least one other location. Pro/ENGINEER uses the first section at the endpoint. For an open trajectory profile, you must create sections at the start and end points. There is no option to skip placement of a section at those points. Sections cannot be dimensioned to the model, because modifying the trajectory would invalidate those dimensions.
6 - 38
A composite datum curve cannot be selected for defining sections of a swept blend (Select Sec). Instead, you must select one of the underlying datum curves or edges from which a composite curve is determined. If you choose Pivot Dir and Select Sec, all selected sections must lie in planes that are parallel to the Pivot Direction.
If you have a Pro/SURFACE license, you can control swept blend geometry by using an area graph and by controlling the perimeter of the feature between the sections. An area graph represents the exact area of the cross section of the swept blend at selected locations on the Origin Trajectory. You can add or remove points on the Origin Trajectory at which to specify the swept blend sectional area. You can also change the graph value at user-defined points (see Modifying Swept Blend Geometry Using an Area Graph on page 6 - 45).
Creating a Swept Blend

To create a swept blend, you can define the trajectory by sketching a trajectory, or by selecting existing curves and edges and extending or trimming the first and last entity in the trajectory. How to Create a Swept Blend 1. Choose Advanced from the SOLID OPTS menu, and Swept Blend and Done from the ADV FEAT OPT menu. 2. Choose the desired options from the BLEND OPTS menu, then choose Done from the BLEND OPTS menu. The possible options are as follows: Select SecSelect existing curves or edges to define each section using the CRV SKETCHER menu. Sketch SecSketch new section entities to define each section. NrmToOriginTrajSelect the Origin Trajectory. Pivot DirUse the GEN SEL DIR menu to specify the Pivot Direction. The possible options are as follows: PlaneSelect a plane or create a new datum plane to which the direction will be normal. Crv/Edg/AxisSelect as the direction an edge, curve, or axis. If you select a non-linear edge or curve, the system prompts you to select an existing datum point on the edge or curve to specify a tangent. Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features
6 - 39
CsysSelect an axis of the coordinate system as the direction.
Norm To TrajSelect the Origin Trajectory and an additional trajectory to which the section will remain normal.
Note: For a Norm To Traj swept blend, the system checks if the normal plane to the selected trajectory has a defined intersection with the Origin Trajectory. If the intersection cannot be found, the system issues a warning so you can redefine the normal trajectory. 3. A Swept Blend dialog box appears with the following elements: Pivot Dir(If selected) Specify the Pivot Direction. Normal Traj(If selected) Select the normal trajectory. Origin TrajSpecify the trajectory that defines the section origin. SectionsDefine the sections. Blend Control(Optional) Define how to control the blend geometry along the Origin Trajectory. Tangency(Optional) Specify tangency conditions for the feature.
4. Define the type of Origin Trajectory by choosing an option from the SWEEP TRAJ menu: Sketch TrajSketch the Origin Trajectory. Select TrajDefine the Origin Trajectory using existing curves and edges. Choose Done from the CHAIN menu when finished defining the chain.
Note: The Origin Trajectory can have sharp corners (a discontinuous tangent to the curve), except at the endpoint of a closed curve. At non-tangent vertices, Pro/ENGINEER mitres the geometry as in constant section sweeps (see Swept Feature Corners on page 6 - 6).
6 - 40
5. If you selected the NrmToOriginTraj option, the system brings up the SEC ORIENT menu. Select one of these options, followed by Done: Pick XVectorSelect an axis, straight edge/curve, or plane normal to determine the sections positive X-axis. Use options in the GEN SEL DIR menu to select a horizontal reference. The system displays a red arrow, indicating the positive direction for the X-vector. Choose Flip or Okay to determine the direction for the operation.
Note: The Pick XVector option is available only for the trajectories defined with the Select Traj option. AutomaticThe system automatically determines the sections orientation. If you select this option for the first section, then the X-axis is determined by the curvature vector at the beginning of the Origin Trajectory. When you select Automatic for a section other than the first, the system determines the X-vector automatically based on the previous section orientation and the behavior of the Origin Trajectory. Norm to SurfUse the adjacent surface section normal to determine the section upward direction. If you select this option for the first section, then all sections use the same reference surfaces as the upward direction. If the Origin Trajectory has only one adjacent surface, then the system automatically selects this surface, highlighted in blue, as the reference for the section orientation. A red arrow appears, indicating the upward direction. Choose Flip or Okay to specify the upward direction. If the Origin Trajectory has two adjacent surfaces, the system prompts you to select a surface for the section orientation. The default surface is highlighted in blue. You can accept the default surface or select the other one. A red arrow appears, indicating the upward direction. Choose Flip or Okay to specify the upward direction.
6 - 41
6. The system highlights endpoints and vertices along the Origin Trajectory. Use options in the CONFIRM menu to select points at which you want to specify additional sections. AcceptSketch or select a section at this highlighted location. NextGo to the next point. PreviousReturn to the previous point.
7. If you chose Norm To Traj in Step 6, select the trajectory to which the section will be normal. Choose an option in the SEC ORIENT menu, followed by Done: Norm to SurfSelect a surface that determines the sections upward direction, then select or sketch the trajectory that defines the section plane normal. Choose Flip an Okay to select the upward direction. This option is available only if the Origin Trajectory belongs to a surface. Use Norm TrajSelect a trajectory that defines the section plane normal.
8. For each vertex or datum point where you define a section, specify the sections rotation angle about the Z-axis (with a value between 120 and +120 degrees).
6 - 42
Section Definition
The sections must be sketched at the first and last Origin Trajectory points.
This point was added using an Area Graph.
Origin Trajectory
Note: Each section remains displayed as the next section is created.
9. Select or sketch the entities for each section, depending on whether you chose Select Sec or Sketch Sec, respectively. Choose Done to exit Sketcher. 10. When all cross-sections are sketched or selected, unless you want to define optional elements, select OK in the dialog box to generate the swept blend feature. If you want to define optional elements, continue as described in the following sections.
6 - 43
Completed Swept Blend
Controlling the Perimeter of the Swept Blend

The Blend Control element lets you select a method for controlling the shape of the swept blend between its sections. When you choose Blend Control and Define from the dialog box, the BLEND CONTROL menu appears with the following options: Set PerimeterControl the shape of the feature by controlling its perimeter between the sections. If two consecutive sections have equal perimeters, the system attempts to maintain the same cross-section perimeter between these sections (see the next illustration, Using the Set Perimeter Option). For sections that have different perimeters, the system uses smooth interpolation along each curve of the trajectory to define the perimeter of the feature between its sections. Note: You cannot specify both perimeter control and tangency conditions for the swept blendonly one of these conditions is allowed. Area GraphControl the shape of the feature through control points and area values (see Modifying Swept Blend Geometry Using an Area Graph on page 6 - 45). NoneDo not set any blend control for the feature. Center CrvShow a curve connecting the centroids of the features cross-sections. This option is available only with the Set Perimeter option.
6 - 44
Using the Set Perimeter Option

Section 2, Perimeter 2
Section 1, Perimeter 1 Perimeter 3 If Per. 1 = Per. 2, then Per. 3 = Per. 1 = Per. 2
Origin Trajectory
Modifying Swept Blend Geometry Using an Area Graph

The Area Graph option lets you add or remove control points to/from the Origin Trajectory at which you can specify or change area values. The GRAPH menu options are as follows: DefineDefine an area graph using the DEFINE GRAPH submenu. The Define Graph submenu options are as follows: Add PointDefine a control point using the GET DTM POINT submenu to select or create a datum point on the Origin Trajectory, then enter the area values. Remove PointSelect a control point to remove. Change ValueSelect a control point and enter a new area value.
Note: If a value is zero on the area graph at a parameter, the swept blend self-intersects. To correct this, add control points to change the area graph value to a positive value. InfoDisplay an Information Window (see the following figure), which contains the following information: The normalized length of a parameter (point or cross section) measured from the starting point of the current segment of the Origin Trajectory, in the form i.rrrr. A Origin Trajectory consists of one or more segments. The integer, i, identifies on which of the segments of the Origin Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features
6 - 45
Trajectory the parameter is located. The value of i ranges from 0 to n, where 0 corresponds to the first segment and n to the last segment. The decimal .rrrr is the ratio of the length from the starting point on the segment to the parameter location. The section area values at each parameter. The driving dimension, if any, for the value of a user-defined area. The location type specifies whether the area is at a section or at a user-defined point.
Sample Area Graph and Information Window
Area graph
Solid lines at user-defined locations Dashed lines at fixed cross-section locations
Area values
csys
6 - 46
Helical Sweep
You create a helical sweep by sweeping a section along a helical trajectory. The trajectory is defined by both the profile of the surface of revolution (which defines the distance from the section origin of the helical feature to its axis of revolution) and the pitch (the distance between coils). The trajectory and the surface of revolution are construction tools that do not appear in the resulting geometry. See the following illustration Types of Helical Sweep Features for an example of the different types of helical sweep features. The Helical Swp option in the ADV FEAT OPT menu is available for both solid and surface features. Use the following ATTRIBUTES menu options in mutually exclusive pairs to define the helical sweep feature: ConstantThe pitch is constant. VariableThe pitch is variable and defined by a graph. Thru AxisThe cross section lies in a plane that passes through the axis of revolution. Norm To TrajThe cross section is oriented normal to the trajectory (or surface of revolution). Right HandedThe trajectory is defined using the righthand rule. Left HandedThe trajectory is defined using the left-hand rule.
6 - 47
Types of Helical Sweep Features

Using the Constant option Using the Variable option
Constant distance between the coils Using the Norm To Traj option
Variable distance between the coils Using the Thru Axis option
Axis of revolution This section is normal to trajectory Using the Left Handed option This section is in a plane which passes through the axis of revolution Using the Right Handed option
How to Create a Helical Sweep with Constant Pitch Value 1. Choose Advanced and Done from the SOLID OPTS menu, then Helical Swp and Done. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. 2. Define the feature by selecting from the ATTRIBUTES menu, then choose Done. 3. Pro/ENGINEER places you in Sketcher mode. Sketch the profile of the surface of revolution. Specify the sketching plane and its orientation, and the axis of revolution.
6 - 48
4. Sketch, dimension, and regenerate the profile (see the following illustration, Profile for a Helical Sweep). Follow these rules: The sketched entities must form an open loop. You must sketch a centerline to define the axis of revolution. If you chose Norm To Traj, the profile entities must be tangent to each other (C1 continuous). The profile entities must not have a tangent that is normal to the centerline at any point. The profile starting point defines the sweep trajectory starting point. You can modify the starting point using the options Sec Tools and Start Point. Profile for a Helical Sweep
This centerline is the axis of revolution.
This line will be rotated about the centerline to define the surface of revolution.
5. When you have finished sketching the section, choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. 6. Enter the pitch value (the distance between the coils). 7. For a surface feature, specify if the feature will have closed or open ends by selecting Open Ends or Capped Ends from the SURF END menu (see Open and Closed Blends on page 6 - 16), then Done. 8. Pro/ENGINEER places you in Sketcher mode to sketch the cross section that will be swept along the trajectory. Sketch the cross section based about the visible cross hairs. Dimension and regenerate the cross section (see the following illustration, Cross section of the Helical Sweep). Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features
6 - 49
9. When the cross section is finished, choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. See Helical Sweep Feature with Constant Pitch for an illustration of the resulting feature. Cross section of the Helical Sweep
This circular section will be swept along the trajectory.
Helical Sweep Feature with Constant Pitch
Variable Pitch Helical Sweeps You can also create a helical swept feature with a variable pitch. In this case, the distance between the coils is controlled by a pitch graph. The initial graph (see the following illustration, Initial Pitch Graph) is created when you specify the pitch value at the start and end points. You can then add more control points to define a complex curve that governs the distance between the coils along the axis of revolution.
6 - 50
Special considerations for using the Variable option are as follows: In a pitch graph, control points with different pitch values are connected by a monotonic curve. Control points with equal pitch values are connected by a line. In the resulting geometry, the average distance between coils along each portion of the axis (the segment between two control points in the pitch graph) is the average of the pitch values given at two consecutive control points.
How to Create a Helical Sweep With a Variable Pitch Value 1. Complete Steps 1 through 4 from the procedure How to Create a Helical Sweep with Constant Pitch Value on page 6 - 48. 2. While in the profile section, sketch points to be used as the control points in the pitch graph. These control points define how the pitch value changes along the axis of revolution. To sketch points, choose Sketch, Point, then select points on the profile geometry and dimension them. It is easier to dimension the control points if you put them on the centerline that defines the axis of revolution. 3. After you regenerate your profile sketch successfully, choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. 4. Enter pitch values at the trajectory start and end. 5. While the profile section is displayed in the original window, the system displays a subwindow with the initial pitch graph in it (see the following figure). Initial Pitch Graph
Pitch value
The end point
The start point
Distance along the axis of revolution
6 - 51
6. Finalize the graph by transferring the pitch control points from the profile sketch onto the graph (see the following illustration, Finalizing the Pitch Graph). Choose Define from the GRAPH menu. Using options in the DEFINE GRAPH menu, do one of the following: Add PointAdd a reference point to the graph by selecting a point in the profile section, or the start or end point. Enter the desired pitch value at this point. The system locates the selected control point along the X-axis of the graph and draws a line with the length equal to the specified pitch value. Remove PointRemove a pitch control point by picking it in the profile section. Change PointChange the value of the pitch at any selected control point, including the start or end point. Select a point in the profile section to change its value and enter the new value. Finalizing the Pitch Graph
The resulting graph
Pick each control point in the profile section and enter the corresponding pitch value.
7. After the graph is defined, choose Done/Return from the DEFINE GRAPH menu. To check the graph data, choose Info in the GRAPH menu. The system displays the Information Window with the pitch data table. 8. Choose Done from the GRAPH menu.
6 - 52
9. Pro/ENGINEER places you in Sketcher mode to sketch the cross section that will be swept along the trajectory. Sketch, dimension, and regenerate the cross section. 10. When you have finished, choose Done. The resulting feature is shown in the following figure, Helical Sweep Feature with Variable Pitch. Helical Sweep Feature with Variable Pitch
Section-to-Surfaces Blends
If you have the optional Pro/SURFACE module, the ADV FEAT OPT option Sect to Srfs allows you to create a transitional surface between a set of tangent surfaces and a sketched contour. This option can be used for creating surface and solid features. The sketched contour and the set of surfaces selected for the tangent boundary must both be closed. How to Create a Section-to-Surfaces Blend 1. Choose Sect to Srfs from the ADV FEAT OPT menu. 2. Pick surfaces to form the tangent boundary. The surfaces must be tangent to each other. Pick all the surfaces, then choose Done Sel. 3. Select or create the sketching plane for the section boundary. Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features 4. Specify the direction of feature creation and enter Sketcher mode. 5. Sketch the section boundary, dimension and regenerate. 6. Choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. Pro/ENGINEER creates the feature.
6 - 53
Section-to-Surfaces Blend
Select all rounded surfaces. The rounded surfaces must be tangent.
Sketch the section.
Surfaces-to-Surfaces Blends
If you have the optional Pro/SURFACE module, the ADV FEAT OPT option Srfs to Srfs allows you to create a smooth transition between two surfaces. This option can be used for creating surface and solid features. The surfaces used for this feature must have matching tangency points for each point on their surfaces, such as two spheres have. The surfaces must be inclined toward each other by at least a 30 angle. How to Create a Surfaces-to-Surfaces Blend 1. Choose Srfs to Srfs from the ADV FEAT OPT menu. 2. Select the first surface to form the tangent surface boundary. 3. Select the second surface. Pro/ENGINEER creates the blend.
6 - 54
Surfaces-to-Surfaces Blend
Pick these two surfaces.
A straight blend is created between the surfaces.
Importing Blends
Blends can be created by reading in data points from an ASCII file. The data file defines the type of blend, as well as the Cartesian coordinates of all the blend section points. All blend section points are located relative to a single coordinate system. If you are importing data points from a measuring device, you should import them as curves first to insure smoothness. There are several techniques in Pro/ENGINEER for smoothing imported curves. You can then create a blended surface from the smoothed curves. Blend File Format Use the From File option to import the blend data file with the extension .ibl. The system prompts you to select or create a coordinate system to locate the imported blend data.
6 - 55
Sample Blend File

closed arclength begin section ! 1 begin curve ! 1 1 2 3 begin curve ! 2 1 2 3 begin curve ! 3 1 2 3 begin curve ! 4 1 2 3 begin section ! 2 begin curve ! 1 1 2 begin curve ! 2 1 2 begin curve ! 3 1 2 begin curve ! 4 1 2 25 30 30 50 50 40 40 25 25 30 30 25 25 15 15 25 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 20 20 30 30 50 60 60 60 50 50 30 20 20 30 40 40 40 30 30 20 10 10 10 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The following figure shows an imported blend.
6 - 56
Imported Blend
Notes: Two points in a curve define a line; more than two points define a spline. The endpoint of one curve and the start point of the next curve must be coincident. For closed sections, this is true for the last point of the last curve and the first point of the first curve. There can be only one closed curve for each section, and that curve must consist of at least two segments.
When the points that are used to create a blend section from a file do not all lie on a plane, the system creates the best fit plane and projects the points down onto the plane. To modify the blend created from the imported data, choose Modify and edit the blend data file. This creates a new file, feat_#.ibl, in your current working directory. Modifications of a blend feature do not affect the original file from which it was created.
6 - 57
7
Construction Features
After you create the first solid feature, you can add construction features to achieve the desired geometry of the part. Features that you create using the Tweak option are described in the next chapter. Topic Protrusions Slots and Cuts Holes Shafts Chamfers Necks Flanges Ribs Shells Pipe Cosmetic Features Page 7-2 7-3 7-3 7 - 12 7 - 13 7 - 15 7 - 16 7 - 17 7 - 20 7 - 22 7 - 29
7-1
Protrusions
After you have created the initial solid feature, you can add material by creating secondary features with the Protrusion option in the SOLID menu. In creating a protrusion, you choose one of the forms and follow the procedure described in Creating a Protrusion on page 5 - 2. A protrusion cannot be unattached with one-sided edges.
Sketching Multiple Contours

When you sketch a protrusion, it is possible to sketch several sections or contours on the same sketching plane (see the following figure). These contours may not overlap; however, they can be nested. Two contours must be separate from each other and behave like two different protrusions. However, they have the same depth and will always be selected together. You can also sketch geometry to create a void inside a protrusion. You can sketch one or more loops within this outside loop to create voids in the protrusion. Multiple Contour Protrusions
A protrusion with two outside loops
A protrusion with one outside loop and two inside loops
7-2
Slots and Cuts

Construction Features To remove material from a part, use one of the following features: SlotRemove material within a section. If the section is open, the system tries to guess from which side to remove the material. CutRemove material from a specified side. See Thin Features on page 5 - 5 for more information.
How to Create a Cut or Slot 1. Choose Feature from the PART menu, then Create from the FEAT menu. 2. Choose Slot or Cut from the SOLID menu. 3. Choose the desired option from the SOLID OPTS menu. 4. Pro/ENGINEER displays the appropriate dialog box. Proceed creating the feature according to the chosen form, and the solid or thin option.
Holes
The Hole option creates many types of holesthrough, counterbored, and blind (see the following figure). All the holes are based on two basic types of hole geometry: Straight holeAn extruded slot with a circular section. It passes from the placement surface to the specified end surface. Sketched holeA revolved feature defined by a sketched section. Counterbored and countersunk holes, for example, are created as sketched holes.
The hole feature is different from a slot or cut in the following aspects: The hole feature has a predefined placement scheme which can be more desirable than the dimensioning scheme of a slot. Straight holes do not require a sketch.
7-3
Different Hole Types

Counterbored hole (sketched hole)
Thru All Straight hole
You select the options to determine the dimensioning scheme for placement, whether it is straight or sketched. If you choose straight, you also specify where the hole terminates. You can change the placement constraints for an existing hole, and the dimensioning scheme for a blind hole.
Straight Holes
All straight holes are created with a constant diameter. How to Create a Straight Hole 1. Choose Hole from the SOLID menu. 2. The system displays the HOLE OPTS menu. Choose Straight, then Done. 3. Set up the placement scheme (see Placing a Hole on page 7 - 7). 4. The system displays the SIDES menu. Choose One Side or Both Sides, then Done. 5. Select the extent to which the hole will be created, then choose Done. The SPEC TO menu options are as follows: BlindCreate a hole with a flat bottom. Thru NextCreate a hole that continues until it reaches the next part surface. Thru AllCreate a hole that intersects all the surfaces.
7-4
Thru UntilCreate a hole that goes through all the surfaces until it reaches the specified surface. Construction Features UpTo Pnt/VtxCreate a hole with a flat bottom that continues until it reaches the specified point or vertex. UpTo CurveCreate a hole with a flat bottom that continues until it reaches the specified curve that you draw in a plane parallel to the placement plane. UpTo SurfaceExtrude the hole from material until the bottom of the hole conforms to the selected bounding surface.
6. Enter the depth of the hole. 7. Enter the diameter of the hole. 8. Click OK in the dialog box to create the hole. The following figure illustrates a straight hole. Straight Hole End Constraint Types
Hole drilled up to point PNT0. Hole drilled up to datum plane DTM8
Blind hole, drilled to specified depth
Hole drilled up to datum curve
7-5
Sketched Holes
A sketched hole is created by sketching a section for revolution in Sketcher mode, then placing the hole onto the part. Sketched holes are always blind and one-sided. How to Create a Sketched Hole 1. Choose Hole from the SOLID menu. Choose Sketch and Done from the HOLE OPTS menu. 2. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. 3. Choose the dimensioning scheme for the hole using the PLACEMENT menu options (see Determining Dimension References on page 7 - 8). 4. Pro/ENGINEER displays a grid in a subwindow. Sketch the cross section of the hole, dimension it, and regenerate it. If necessary, modify the dimensions. Choose Done. 5. Set up the placement scheme (see Placing a Hole on page 7 - 7). 6. Click OK in the dialog box to create the hole. Sketched holes must have a vertical centerline, with at least one entity normal to this axis of revolution. The system aligns this surface with the placement plan and the remainder of the sketched feature cut from the part, as a revolution of the sketched profile. When two normal entities exist in the sketch, the top entity (when looking at the sketch in the default sketch orientation) is aligned with the placement plane (see the following figure).
7-6
Sketched Hole Placement Conventions WRONG Construction Features RIGHT RIGHT
Hole cannot be placed (no normal surface to align with the placement plane).
This surface will be aligned with the placement plane and the hole cut from the part interior.
The top surface will be aligned with the placement plane.
Placing a Hole
The placement sequence involves two stepsspecifying the placement plane on which the feature is created and selecting the dimension references.
Selecting the Placement Surface

You place holes on datum planes or planar part surfaces. The hole is always placed normal to the placement surface. To create a hole directly on a curved surface, the hole must be a radial hole and the surface must be convex (cones or cylinders). Optionally, you can use the On Point placement option that will merge the end of the hole to any surface on which the point is defined. You can use datum planes to create holes through other surfaces (see Placing Holes on a Concave Surface on page 7 - 11). How to Place a Hole on a Datum Plane 1. Pick the datum plane name. 2. Pick a point on the datum plane. 3. For a One Side hole, the system displays a red arrow. Choose the direction of hole creation using the options Flip and Okay.
7-7
Determining Dimension References

After you position the hole on a plane, Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to specify the dimensioning references that correspond to the chosen option. The PLACEMENT menu options are as follows: LinearDimension the hole from two edges (using linear dimensions). RadialPlace the hole around an axis (using polar dimensions). CoaxialPlace the hole coaxially, by using an existing axis (no placement dimensions will be created). On PointPlace the hole center directly on an on surface datum point. The feature will be created normal to the surface on which the point is located. The ends of the hole are merged with the surface.
When you select axial references, pick on the dashed line of the existing axis. When you select other references, you can pick the following: Any edge in a plane normal to the placement surface Any plane normal (perpendicular) to the placement surface, including datum planes
When you place a hole very close to a dimension reference, the system asks you to confirm if the hole is to be aligned to the reference. Upon confirmation, the system aligns the hole. If you choose not to align the hole, the system prompts you to specify the dimension of the hole, relative to the reference. Linear References To specify the references for a linear scheme, pick two edges, planar surfaces, or axes, or any combination thereof (see the next figure).
7-8
Using Linear Placement Construction Features
d1 d2
Radial References When you create a radial hole, you can dimension the hole relative to a reference axis by using the radial, diameter, or linear dimension type. You can redefine the dimension type by choosing the Dim Type element from the dialog box for this feature. How to Specify the References for a Radial Hole 1. Select the placement plane. 2. Select the reference axis. 3. Select the reference plane. 4. Specify the angle that defines the placement of the hole relative to the reference plane. 5. Select the dimension type for locating the hole relative to the reference axis. Choose one of these options in the DIM TYPE menu, and then choose Done: DiameterUse a diameter dimension with the diameter symbol (see example a in the figure below). RadiusUse a radial dimension shown with the R prefix (see example b in the figure below). LinearUse a linear dimension.
6. Enter a value for the dimension to locate the hole relative to the axis.
7-9
The following figure shows placement of a radial hole by using radial and diameter dimensions. Notice that when you choose Modify, for radial and diameter dimension types the system displays a bolt circle. Note that the bolt circle does not show up for the dimension of this feature in drawings. Diameter and Radial Dimension Types
Bolt circle
Reference axis a) Diameter Dimension Type
Radial hole
Reference axis b) Radial Dimension Type
Radial hole
The next figure shows placement of a radial hole with the linear type dimension.
7 - 10
Linear Dimension Type

Reference plane for angular (polar) dimensioning
Linear dimension Linear dimension Axis for radial dimensioning a) On plane
Angular dimension
Reference plane for radial dimensioning
b) On cylinder or cone
Placing Holes on a Concave Surface Pro/ENGINEER does not allow you to place radial holes directly on concave cylindrical or conical surfaces, because the hole ends do not cut through the concave surface (see the following example).
Hole
Ends of the hole do not intersect the concave surface.
Concave surface
To place a hole on a convex surface, use the linear dimensioning scheme. Note that for a cylindrical concave surface, you can use the Through > Axis, Angle > Plane datum to place the hole (specify the hole as One Side). In this case, the angular dimension driving the hole placement will be at 90 to the holes axis (see the following figure).
7 - 11
Placing a Hole on a Concave Surface

Select this axis for Through/Axis. 2) Pick on the axis for holes placement point. 4) Select as second dimensioning reference.
Select this plane for Angle/Plane.
3) Select axis as dimensioning reference.
1) Select this plane as placement plane.
Shafts
Shafts are analogous to sketched holes. Both are created by sketching sections of revolution, then placing them on the model. However, shafts add material instead of removing it. As with sketched holes, you must sketch the centerline axis of revolution as vertical, and place the topmost portion of the section on the placement plane. Because material is added for a shaft, the shaft projects away from the part instead of into the part. See Sketched Holes on page 7 - 6 for information on creating sections for shafts and placing them on a part. The following figure illustrates a shaft feature. Shaft Feature
Shaft
7 - 12
Chamfers
Construction Features You can create both edge and corner chamfers using Pro/ENGINEER. The following sections describe edge and corner chamfers in detail.
Edge Chamfers
An edge chamfer removes a flat section of material from a selected edge to create a beveled surface between the two original surfaces common to that edge. You can select multiple edges to create an edge chamfer. Edge Chamfer
Select this edge.
There are four dimensioning schemes for edge chamfers: 45 x dCreate a chamfer that is at an angle of 45 degrees to both surfaces and a distance d from the edge along each surface. The dimension appears as 45 x d, but you can modify the distance, d, only. You can create 45 x d chamfers only on an edge formed by the intersection of two perpendicular surfaces. d x dCreate a chamfer that is at a distance d from the edge along each surface. If you modify the chamfer, the system displays the distance as the only dimension. d1 x d2Create a chamfer at a distance d1 from the selected edge along one surface and a distance d2 from the selected edge along the other surface. The system displays both distances along their respective surfaces when you modify the chamfer.
7 - 13
Ang x dCreate a chamfer at a distance d from the selected edge along one adjacent surface, at a specified angle to that surface. The system displays both values as dimensions when you modify the chamfer. You can use this option between two planar surfaces only. Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes
d d d d 45 90
45 x d d1
dxd
d d2 angle Reference surface d1 x d2 Reference surface Ang x d
Corner Chamfers
A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part. How to Create a Corner Chamfer 1. Choose Chamfer from the SOLID menu, then choose Corner from the CHAMF menu. 2. Select the corner you want to chamfer. 3. The system displays the PICK/ENTER menu, which allows you to specify the location of the chamfer vertex on the highlighted edge. The PICK/ENTER menu options are as follows: Pick PointPick a point on the highlighted edge to define the chamfer distance along that edge. Enter-inputType in a value for the chamfer distance along the highlighted edge.
7 - 14
4. Pick or enter values to describe the chamfer lengths along the edge. After you have selected the first vertex, Pro/ENGINEER highlights the other edges, one at a time, so you can place the other two vertices 5. To create the chamfer, click OK in the dialog box. The following figure shows a corner chamfer. Corner Chamfer
Necks
A neck is a special type of revolved slot that creates a groove around a revolved part or feature. You always create a neck on a Through > Axis datum plane and sketch it inside the part. You must align both ends of the section to the revolved surface of the parent feature. How to Create a Neck 1. Choose Neck from the SOLID menu. 2. Choose an option from the ANGLE menu to specify the number of degrees in the revolution. 3. Create or select a Through > Axis datum plane as the sketching plane. 4. Sketch the neck cross section open with the ends aligned to the silhouette edge of the part or feature. 5. Sketch the centerline that becomes the axis of rotation.
7 - 15
In creating a neck, Pro/ENGINEER revolves the section around the part to the specified angle measure, removing the material inside the section. The following figure illustrates a neck feature. Neck Feature
Sketching the section
View of section
Section
Flanges
A flange is analogous to a neck, except it adds material to the revolved solid. Therefore, you should sketch the section outside the part. How to Create a Flange 1. Choose Flange from the SOLID menu. 2. Choose an option from the ANGLE menu to specify the number of degrees of revolution. 3. Set up or select a Through/Axis datum plane as the sketching plane. 4. Sketch the flange cross section open with the ends aligned to the silhouette edge of the revolved part or feature.
7 - 16 Part Modeling Users Guide
5. Sketch the centerline that will become the axis of rotation. The following figure illustrates a flange feature. Flange Feature
Sketching the section
Section View of section
Ribs
A rib is a special type of protrusion designed to create a thin fin or web that is attached to a part. You always sketch a rib from a side view, and it grows symmetrically about the sketching plane. Because of the way ribs are attached to the parent geometry, they are always sketched as open sections. A rib must see material everywhere it attaches to the part; otherwise, it becomes an unattached feature. There are two types of ribsstraight and rotational. The following sections describe ribs in detail.
7 - 17
Straight Ribs
Ribs that are not created on Through/Axis datum planes are extruded symmetrically about the sketching plane. You must still sketch the ribs as open sections. Because you are sketching an open section, Pro/ENGINEER may be uncertain about the side to which to add the rib. The system displays the DIRECTION menu after the rib section has been regenerated. Pro/ENGINEER adds all material in the direction of the arrow. If the incorrect choice is made, modify the arrow direction using the FEAT menu option Redefine. Straight Rib
Section sketch Material is added to both sides of datum.
Side view
Front view
Rotational Ribs
You create rotational ribs on Through > Axis datum planes. You sketch the rib to the silhouette of the parent feature. To create the solid geometry, Pro/ENGINEER revolves the section about the axis of the parent, making a wedge that is symmetrical about the sketching plane. Pro/ENGINEER then trims the wedge with two planes parallel to the sketching surface; the distance between these planes corresponds to the thickness of the rib. You can place a rotational rib on any surface of revolution (see the following figure). Note that the angled surface of the rib is conical, not planar.
7 - 18
Rotational Rib Construction Features

Material is added to both sides of datum.
conical surface
The following figure shows valid and invalid rotational ribs. Valid and Invalid Rotational Ribs
The rib cannot be revolved about both protrusions.
The rib does not pass through the axis. Valid Invalid
7 - 19
Shells
The Shell option removes a surface or surfaces from the solid, then hollows out the inside of the solid, leaving a shell of a specified wall thickness. When Pro/ENGINEER makes the shell, all the features that were added to the solid before you chose Shell are hollowed out. Therefore, the order of feature creation is very important when you use shell.
Creating Shells
How to Create a Shell 1. Choose Shell from the SOLID menu. 2. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. If desired, select the optional element Spec Thick to specify thicknesses individually. Click Define. 3. Select a surface or surfaces to be removed. When you have finished, choose Done Refs from the FEATURE REFS menu. 4. Enter the thickness of the wall. This thickness applies to all surfaces except those to which you assign a different thickness. 5. If you chose the Spec Thick element, Pro/ENGINEER displays the SPEC THICK menu, which lists the following options: Set ThicknssSet thicknesses for the individual surfaces. Reset to DefReset the surfaces to the default thickness.
Choose Set Thicknss. Select a surface and enter the thickness. Continue this process until you have specified all the surfaces you want. When you have finished, choose Done from the SPEC THICK menu. 6. To create the shell, select OK from the dialog box (see the following figure). If you entered a positive value for the thickness, material will be removed, leaving the shell thickness inside the part. However, if you entered a negative value, the shell thickness is added to the outside of the part.
7 - 20
The following figure shows a sample part to be shelled. Creating a Shell

Shell created around all existing features with constant thickness
Thru hole
Reorder hole to come after shell.
Restrictions on Shells
Note the following restrictions on creating shell features: You cannot add shells to any part that has a surface that moves from tangency to a point. You cannot select a surface to be removed that has an adjacent surface to which it is tangent. You cannot select a surface to be removed that has a vertex created by the intersection of three curved surfaces.
7 - 21
If the part has a corner between more than three surfaces, the shell feature may be geometrically undefined; in this case, Pro/ENGINEER highlights the trouble area. The surface to be removed must be surrounded by edges (a fully revolved surface of revolution is not valid) and the surfaces that intersect the edge must form an angle through the solid geometry of less than 180 degrees. As long as this condition is met, you can pick all the sculpted surfaces as the surface to be removed. When you select surfaces that have other surfaces tangent to them for independent thickness, all surfaces that are tangent must have the same thickness, or the shell feature fails. For example, if you shell a part that contains a hole and you want the thickness of the hole wall to be different from the overall thickness, you must pick both surfaces (cylinders) that make up the hole, then offset them the same distance. A shell creates geometry with constant wall thickness. If the system cannot create a constant thickness, the shell feature fails.
Pipe
The pipe feature is a three-dimensional centerline that represents the centerline of a pipe. Given the diameter of a pipe (and, for a hollow pipe, the wall thickness), a pipe connects selected datum points either with a combination of straight lines and arcs of specified bend radius, or a spline. After the pipe feature has been created, you can determine its length by using Info from the toolbar.
Creating a Pipe Feature

Before you start to create a pipe feature, reference datum points must already exist. How to Create a Pipe Feature 1. Choose Feature either from the PART menu in Part mode, or from the ASSEMBLY menu in Assembly mode. Then, choose Create from the FEAT menu and Solid from the FEAT CLASS menu. The system displays the SOLID menu. 2. Choose Pipe, then choose from the following option pairs: GeometryCreate a pipe feature with a hollow or solid geometry.
7 - 22
No geometryCreate the pipe trajectory only. HollowCreate a hollow pipe with a specified wall thickness. SolidCreate a pipe with solid geometry (a rod). Constant RadThe bend radius for all arc segments of the pipe will be the same. Multiple RadThe bend radius for each arc segment is specified and can be modified separately. Construction Features
3. Choose Done from the OPTIONS menu. 4. If you selected Hollow, enter the values for the outside diameter and wall thickness in response to the prompts. 5. The system displays the CONNECT TYPE menu, allowing you to add, delete, and insert points to redefine a pipe trajectory, as well as specify tangency to a linear trajectory. 6. You can create the pipe trajectory by connecting the datum points. One of the CONNECT TYPE menu options can be used interchangeably on the same pipe to construct the trajectory. The options are as follows: SplineCreate the trajectory as a three-dimensional spline passing through the datum points. Single RadCreate the trajectory by connecting datum points with alternating straight lines and arcs with a constant radius, starting and ending with straight lines. The datum points are connected with straight lines, then the breakpoints are lleted with the arcs of the specied bend radius. Multiple RadCreate the trajectory by connecting datum points with alternating straight lines and arcs with a variable radius, starting and ending with straight lines. The datum points are connected with straight lines, then the breakpoints are lleted with the arcs of the specied bend radii.
You can connect datum points in a datum point array using one of the CONNECT TYPE menu options: Single PointSelect individual datum points. These points can have been created individually or as part of a datum point array. Whole ArrayConnect in consecutive order all the points in a datum point array (see Creating Datum Point Arrays on page 3 - 13).
7 - 23
7. You can add, delete, or insert points while creating or redefining the pipe feature using the following options: Add PointAdd to the definition of the curve an existing point, vertex, or curve end through which the curve will pass. Delete PointDelete from the definition of the curve an existing point, vertex, or curve end through which the curve currently passes. Insert PointInsert a point between already selected points, vertices, and curve ends. This modifies the curve definition to pass through the inserted point. The system prompts you to select a point or vertex before which to insert.
8. Use one of the techniques below to complete the creation of the pipe trajectory, depending on the option you chose: SplineStart picking points; the system connects them with a spline. Single RadPro/ENGINEER prompts you to enter a bend radius value after you have selected the third datum point of the trajectory. The system uses this radius for all the other bends in the current pipe feature. Multiple RadPro/ENGINEER prompts you to enter a radius value for each bend defined by three consecutive points. The SEL VALUE menu lists all the existing radius values for this pipe. Either select one of the listed values, or choose the New Value option and enter the new value. Spline (alternating with either Single Rad or Multiple Rad)Create a trajectory for the first option, then the other. Connect the trajectory points accordingly.
Note: As you select datum points, the system constructs segments of the pipe feature. If a segment cannot be constructed, Pro/ENGINEER ignores the last datum point selection. 9. When you have finished creating the trajectory, choose Done.
7 - 24
The next figure illustrates a pipe feature. Pipe Feature with Geometry Construction Features
Hollow pipe
Specific Aspects of Pipe Creation

The following sections describe the specific aspects of pipe creation.
Modifying and Redefining a Pipe Feature

When the pipe has been created, you can modify the diameter, wall thickness (if any), and bend radii. You can redefine the feature attributes by toggling between the following OPTION menu options: Geometry and No geometryIf you choose Geometry, Pro/ENGINEER constructs the pipe feature with hollow or solid geometry. If you choose No geometry, the system constructs the pipe trajectory with no hollow or solid geometry. Hollow and Solid.
7 - 25
You cannot redefine the pipe trajectory type. In addition, you cannot toggle between the following pipe attributes: Line/Arc and Spline Constant Rad and Multiple Rad
You can redefine the feature references. When you choose References from the REDEFINE menu, Pro/ENGINEER redisplays the CONNECT TYPE and GET SELECT menus. Note: You can insert datum points as you redefine a pipe feature. To do this, the datum points must be older than the pipe feature. If they are not, you can reorder them (see Reordering Features on page 16 - 35).
Creating Pipes in Assembly Mode

You can construct pipes in Assembly mode as either a part feature or an assembly feature. When you create a pipe as a part feature in Assembly mode, you can use datum points on other parts. However, when you attempt to retrieve and regenerate the model in Part mode, the system issues a warning if some of the datum points belong to other parts. Although the system displays the pipe trajectory, it will not show the external datum points. To resolve the conflict, you can change the pipe trajectory in Part mode by modifying the remaining datum points. A pipe can also be an Assembly feature (see the next figure), although it will have no geometry. The process of creating an Assembly pipe feature is the same as described previously, but the system does not display the Geometry and No geometry options.
7 - 26
Creating a Pipe Feature in Assembly Mode Construction Features
Creating a Part Consisting Only of a Pipe Feature

To create a part consisting only of a pipe feature, start with three default datum planes, create a datum point array, then create a pipe.
Creating Pipe Connections

For two separate pipes to be connected without creating an unattached feature, you must align their segments. How to Create Pipe Connections 1. Create both datum point arrays using the same coordinate system. 2. Create an intermediate one-point array using that coordinate system. 3. Write relations to determine coordinates of the intermediate point, relative to those of its neighbors. For instance, in the example below, the relations are as follows: DX6 = (DX2 + DX3) / 2 DY6 = (DY2 + DY3) / 2 DZ6 = (DZ2 + DZ3) / 2
7 - 27
To find the dimension symbols corresponding to the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the points, use the Info option. For more information, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER. 4. Create the pipes, using the intermediate point as the last point in one pipe and the first in another. 5. Regenerate the model. The following figure illustrates a compound pipe. Compound Pipe First array
Intermediate point, located on the line connecting points 2 and 3.
Second array
First pipe created through points 0, 1, 2, and 6 with bend radius R1; second pipe created through points 6, 3, 4, and 5 with bend radius R2.
Specifying Part Accuracy for Pipes

The part accuracy value is very important, especially when you are creating long, thin pipes. For more information, see Changing Part Accuracy on page 16 - 51.
Creating Pipes with Multiple Radii

If you create a pipe with multiple radii, make sure all the radial values are different. Otherwise, the system creates only one dimension for equal radii and you will not be able to control them individually. If equal radii are required, modify the pipe after it has been created.
7 - 28
Cosmetic Features
Construction Features There are four types of cosmetic features: sketched, thread, groove, and user-defined. The following sections describe these types in detail.
Sketched Cosmetic Features

Sketched cosmetic features are drawn on the surface of a part. They include such things as company logos or serial numbers that are stamped on an object. Sketched cosmetic features are also used to define the boundaries of a region for FEM partial loads. Other features cannot reference the cosmetic feature (dimensions, Use Edge, and so on). Sketched cosmetic features do not have to be regenerated or dimensioned. However, when in a non-parametric state, their section or location cannot be modified. If you want a non-parametric section and you dimension the section anyway, you can use Sketcher mode to modify the shape of the feature. Then delete all the dimensions before you choose Done. When the system prompts that the section is unresolved, enter yes to continue. Unlike other features, cosmetic features can have a line style (see Redefining Datum Features on page 16 - 25). You can use the Cosm Font option from the GEOM TOOLS menu to set the color, font, and style of the feature. Each individual geometry segment of the feature, whether a single feature or a pattern, can be set to a line style; they do not all have to be the same. When you redefine a cosmetic feature, the line style cannot be changed. If the line style does not have the default width, or if it uses a user-defined font, it is replaced with the appropriate default values.
Regular Section
A regular section cosmetic feature stays right where you sketch it, whether in space or on a part surface. It is a flat feature. Regular section cosmetic features can be cross-hatched when they are created. The cross-hatching is displayed in all modes, but is modifiable only in Drawing mode. In Part and Assembly mode, the cross-hatch will be displayed at 45. If you create a cosmetic feature as a pattern, any changes to a member of the pattern, including cross-hatch modification, also changes every other member of the pattern.
7 - 29
Creating a Sketched Cosmetic Feature

How to Create a Sketched Cosmetic Feature 1. Choose Cosmetic from the FEAT CLASS menu, then Sketch from the COSMETIC menu. 2. Choose Regular Sec, and Xhatch or No Xhatch. 3. Set up sketching references and sketch the feature. You can dimension and regenerate the section even if it will be non-parametric. 4. If the feature is to be non-parametric, delete all the dimensions before you select Done, without regenerating the sketch. When Pro/ENGINEER prompts that the section is unresolved, enter yes to create the non-parametric feature. 5. The system displays the cosmetic feature in cyan. If you selected Xhatch, the cross-hatch is displayed in yellow. The following figure illustrates a feature with cross-hatching. Patterned Cosmetic Feature with Cross-Hatching
Projected Section
Projected section cosmetic features are projected onto a single part surface; they cannot cross part surfaces. They cannot be cross-hatched or patterned. How to Create a Sketched Cosmetic Feature That is Projected 1. Choose Cosmetic from the FEAT CLASS menu, then Sketch from the COSMETIC menu. 2. Choose Project Sec and select the surfaces onto which the feature will be projected.
7 - 30
3. Use the FEATURE REFS menu to set up sketching references and sketch the feature. You can dimension and regenerate the section even if it is to be non-parametric. 4. If the feature is to be non-parametric, delete all the dimensions before you select Done, without regenerating the sketch. When Pro/ENGINEER prompts that the section is unresolved, enter yes to create the non-parametric feature. The following figure illustrates a sketched cosmetic feature that is projected. Sketching a Projected Section Cosmetic Feature
Sketched section
Resulting feature
Surface for projection
Cosmetic Threads
A cosmetic thread is a cosmetic feature that represents the diameter of a thread. It is displayed in magenta. Unlike other cosmetic features, you cannot modify the line style of a cosmetic thread, nor are threads affected by hidden line display settings in the ENVIRONMENT menu. Threads are created with the default tolerance setting of limits. Cosmetic threads can be external or internal, and blind or through. You create cosmetic threads by specifying the minor or major diameter (for external and internal threads, respectively), starting surface, and thread length or ending edge. For a starting surface, you can select a quilt surface, regular Pro/ENGINEER surface, or split surface (such as a surface that belongs to a revolved feature, chamfer, round, or swept feature). For an up to surface, you can select any solid surface or a datum plane.
7 - 31
Note: A thread that uses a depth parameter (a blind thread) cannot be defined from a non-planar surface. Note that a blind external cosmetic thread fails if the minor diameter is equal to the diameter of the placement surface. The following table lists the parameters that can be defined for a thread at its creation, or later when the thread is added. In this table, pitch is the distance between two threads.
Parameter Name MAJOR_DIAMETER THREADS_PER_INCH THREAD FORM CLASS PLACEMENT METRIC
Parameter Value Number Number String Number Character TRUE/FALSE
Parameter Description Thread major diameter Threads per inch (1/pitch) Thread form Thread class Thread placement (A-external, B-internal) Thread is metric
You can manipulate thread parameters as you can manipulate other user-defined parametersyou can add, modify, delete, or display them using options from the MODEL PARAMS menu. To access the MODEL PARAMS menu, choose Parameters from the appropriate SETUP menu, then choose Feature from the OBJ PARAMS menu and select a thread to have its parameters modified. For more information, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
7 - 32
Sample threads appear in the following figure. Sample Threads Construction Features
a) Internal thread from the round up to the chamfer
b) External thread from the round up to the chamfer
Creating Threads
You can create cosmetic threads using cylinders, splines, and non-normal planes as the references. How to Create a Cosmetic Thread 1. Use the command sequence Feature, Create, Cosmetic. 2. The system displays the COSMETIC menu. Choose Thread. Pro/ENGINEER displays the COSMETIC THREAD dialog box that lists the required elements for the threadThread Surf, Start Surf, Direction, Depth, Major Diam, and Note Params. 3. Select the cylindrical thread surface. 4. Select the starting surface of the cosmetic thread. 5. Pro/ENGINEER displays a red arrow that indicates the direction of feature creation. Choose Flip, if necessary, then Okay. 6. The system displays the SPEC TO menu with the options Blind, UpTo Pnt/Vtx, UpTo Curve, and UpTo Surface. Choose one of the options, then Done. If you select UpTo Surface, you can select a solid surface or datum plane, or you can create a datum plane on-the-fly.
7 - 33
7. The system then prompts for the necessary depth information, depending on which option you chose. For example, if you chose Blind, the system prompts for the depth. 8. Enter the diameter of the thread. The system displays a default value of the diameter of the cylinder. Whether a thread is external or internal is determined by the geometry of the thread surface. If it is a shaft, the thread is external; if it is a hole, the thread is internal. For an internal thread, the default diameter value is 10% larger than the hole diameter. For an external thread, the default diameter value is 10% smaller than the shaft. 9. Pro/ENGINEER displays the FEAT PARAM menu with the options Retrieve, Save, Mod Params, and Show. If desired, select one of these options. Choose Done/Return. 10. If you are satisfied with the definition of the thread, click OK in the dialog box. The system creates the cosmetic thread. The parameters file lists all the information on the thread parameters. You can edit the parameter file as needed. For example, the system prompts you twice for information about the diameter. One benefit of this redundancy is that you can place a metric thread on an English unit part, and vice versa. Note the following: Options that can be specified in both the parameter file and the creation user interface are displayed with the values from the creation user interface by default. If you change these values, or if you read in another parameter file, these new values remain in the file. However, the values in the creation user interface remain unchanged. For example, if you specified a thread diameter of 2.5, then change the parameter file so the diameter is 3.5, the thread diameter remains 2.5. Note that if you modify the values in the parameter file, they lose their associativity with the model. The associativity between the parameter file and the creation user interface exists only during feature creation. After you accept the default values, or make changes in the parameter file, these values remain the same until you select the option Note Params from the SEL ELEMENTS file. Even if you redefine the feature and the diameter or the thread type, the parameter file remains unchanged unless you manually change it.
7 - 34
Pro/ENGINEER calculates the THREAD PLACEMENT value in the parameter file based on whether the thread is external (the thread surface geometry is a shaft) or internal (the thread surface geometry is a hole). The system displays the values of the feature in the dialog box, which may not be the same as the values in the parameter file. However, if you choose the Feat Info option, Pro/ENGINEER displays both the values you specified during feature creation and the values in the parameter file.
The following figure illustrates blind and through thread features. Sample Blind and Through Threads
surface Thread surface Length
Thread
Ending edge
surface
a) Blind thread
b) Through thread
Creating Custom Cosmetic Threads

A thread is a grouped cosmetic feature. You can create your own (custom) thread by creating a new group. After the custom thread exists, you can step through the appropriate directory path to reach it. However, the menu option UP is not available for custom cosmetic threads. To create a cosmetic thread as a UDF, set the configuration file option allow_udf_style_cosm_threads to yes. To create a custom cosmetic thread, create a UDF and store it in a custom directory in the same path as the external and internal directories: <loadpoint>/intudfs/threads. You can then select this group using the option Search/Retr.
Construction Features 7 - 35
Note: Custom cosmetic threads stored in the loadpoint may be preserved during a system update installation. Therefore, be sure to back up the custom cosmetic thread directory before updating an installation. The benefit of using a UDF as a thread feature is that thread parameters can be assigned to a cosmetic thread. These parameters can then be shown in a drawing by choosing Detail, Show, Note, Feat & View to select a feature in a picked view. To include thread parameters in an assembly drawing, you must add the part that contains the thread to the drawing. Creating Custom Cosmetic Threads You can create a custom cosmetic thread that matches the profile of a surface by using Pro/SURFACE. To create a custom cosmetic thread that will match the profile of the surface it goes through. How to Create a Custom Cosmetic Thread 1. Create a simple part on which you want to create the thread. For example, extrude a cylinder, then extrude a radial hole through it. 2. Create an extruded surface that completely goes through the solid material, using a circle as its section. This will be the main feature of the thread. Note: When you create the surface features, try to pick the minimum number of references to make a simpler UDF. 3. Create a surface copy feature using the SURF FORM Copy option to copy the surface whose profile you want to match. If this thread is being created on an existing hole, use the Fill option from the SRF GATHER menu when you copy the surface to fill in the hole. Choose Loops from the GATHER FILL menu, then pick the edge of the hole on the surface. 4. Create a surface TRIM feature, choosing Use Quilt from the SOLID OPTS menu as the trim type. Pick the thread as the surface to trim and the copied surface as the surface to create the trim. 5. Group the surface features together in a UDF.
7 - 36
Groove
Construction Features A groove is a projected cosmetic feature. You create a groove by making a sketch and projecting it onto a surface. However, the groove feature cannot cross surface boundaries. Because it is a cosmetic feature, you can modify the display of its geometry using Redefine > Line Style (for more information, see Modifying the Line Style of a Datum Curve on page 16 - 13). Groove features can be patternized. You can use the groove feature in the manufacturing process with the Groove option, where the tool follows the groove path.
Creating a Groove
How to Create a Groove 1. Choose Cosmetic from the FEAT CLASS menu. 2. Choose Groove from the COSMETIC menu. 3. Select the surface onto which to project the feature. 4. Set up the sketching plane and reference. 5. Sketch the groove section. 6. Choose Done after the section is successfully regenerated. The groove feature is projected onto the selected surface and has no depth. The following figure illustrates how to create a groove feature. Creating the Groove Feature
Sketching the groove feature
7 - 37
User-Defined Cosmetic Features

The option User Defined accesses groups from the FEAT CLASS menu. It functions like the option Create from the GROUP menu (see User-Defined Features on page 15 - 12).
7 - 38
8
Rounds
This chapter describes how to add rounds to a part using the Round option in the SOLID menu. Topic About Rounds Creating a Simple Round Variable Radius Rounds Creating Advanced Rounds Creating Full Rounds Creating a Round Through a Curve Changing the Attachment Type Page 8-2 8-3 8-9 8 - 11 8 - 25 8 - 28 8 - 29
8-1
About Rounds
Use the Round option to create a round between surfaces or in place of a middle surface. Consider these recommendations for creating rounds: Try to add rounds as late in the design as possible (but before machining features). You can place all the rounds on a layer and then suppress that layer to speed up your working session. To avoid creating dependent children of the round features, do not dimension to edges or tangent edges created by rounds.
Simple and Advanced Rounds

You can create two different types of roundssimple and advanced. Which type of round you create depends on the complexity of the reference geometry and on your need to customize the default round geometry. Generally, after you specify placement references and the radius of the round, the system generates the default round geometry by using some default attributes (for example, the round shape, cross section, and so on). The system normally terminates the round geometry whenever it encounters a non-tangent edge (see the following figure). Terminating a Surf-Surf Round at a Non-Tangent Edge
Non-tangent edge
8-2
A simple round uses the rolling shape and circular cross section. When you create an advanced round, you can define several round sets (segments of the round feature). The system creates default transitions between the round sets, allowing you to modify the transition later. The following sections describe how to create simple and advanced rounds in detail. Rounds
Creating a Simple Round

The following procedure lists basic steps to create a simple round. 1. Choose Round from the SOLID menu. 2. Choose Simple and Done from the ROUND TYPE menu. 3. A dialog box appears, listing elements of the round feature. 4. The Attributes element in the feature list is selected by default. Use the RND SET ATTR menu options to specify the attributes of the round. Specify the type of round by selecting one of these options: ConstantCreate a round between two sets of surfaces with a constant radius. VariableCreate a round between two sets of surfaces with variable radii. Specify radii at the ends of the chain of edges or at the ends of the spine (when the spine is required) and, optionally, at additional points along the edges or along the spine. Thru CurveCreate a round between two surfaces by following a curve. See Creating a Round Through a Curve on page 8 - 28. Full RoundCreate a round by removing a surface: the consumed surface becomes a round.
Specify the type of references for placing the round by selecting one of these options: Edge ChainPlace a round by selecting a chain of edges. To select the chain, use options in the CHAIN menu (see Using the Chain Menu Options on page 8 - 4). Surf-SurfPlace a round by selecting two surfaces. Edge-SurfPlace a round by specifying a chain of edges and a surface.
Rounds
8-3
Edge PairPlace a full round by specifying a pair of edges. See Examples of Round References on page 8 - 5, for more information on selecting geometric references.
5. Choose Done from the RND SET ATTR menu. 6. Select placement references, as the system prompts you. 7. For a constant radius round, enter the radius for the round (see Entering Radius Values on page 8 - 6). For variable radius rounds, specify the radii, as described in Creating Full Rounds on page 8 - 25. 8. Optionally, for other than a full round, define the extension boundaries of the round by specifying the Round Extent element. See Resolving Placement Ambiguity on page 8 - 7. 9. If necessary, define the Attach Type element (see Changing the Attachment Type on page 8 - 29). 10. When you finish defining the feature, choose OK from the dialog box.
Using the Chain Menu Options

When you select reference edges with the Edge Chain option, the system displays the CHAIN menu. Note that you can choose more than one option: choose an option, select the references as prompted by the system, and then choose the next option. The CHAIN menu lists the following options: One By OneDefine a chain by selecting individual edges and curves, one at a time. Tangnt ChainDefine a chain by selecting an edge. All tangent edges are included in the selection. Surf ChainDefine a chain of edges by selecting a surface. UnselectUnselect references selected with one of the above options.
When you finish defining the chain of edges, choose Done from the
CHAIN menu.
8-4
Examples of Round References

The following table shows examples of how to use the Edge Chain, Surf-Surf, Edge-Surf, and Edge Pair options when you select geometric references for a round. Different Methods of Selecting Round References Reference Type (a) Edge Chain/ One By One Original Geometry Rounded Geometry Rounds
Select these edges.
Resulting round
(b) Edge Chain/ Tangnt Chain
An edge from a tangent chain
Resulting round
(c) Surf-Surf
Select these two surfaces.
Resulting round
Rounds
8-5
Reference Type (d) Edge-Surf
Original Geometry
Select this edge.
Rounded Geometry
Select this surface.
Resulting round
(e) Edge Pair (full round)
Select this pair of edges
Entering Radius Values

To enter radius values for a round, use options in the RADIUS TYPE menu. They are as follows: EnterType in the radius value. The system prompts you to enter a value. If you want to use one of the previous values, press <Esc> and select a value from the SEL VALUE menu. The first radius value that appears in the SEL VALUE menu is the default value calculated by the system. For a variable round, the system places all radius values that you entered (with the Enter option) in this menu for subsequent use. Pick On SurfSelect a point on the surface for the round to pass through. For an Edge Chain round, select an edge from the chain. Thru Pnt/VtxSelect a datum point or vertex for the round to pass through. Note: When the system prompts you to enter a radius value, the Enter option is preselected and you can type in the value in the Input Window. If you want to use the Pick On Surf or Thru Pnt/Vtx option, press the <Esc> key or pick the red icon (located next to the Input Window) to cancel the input mode, then select the desired option.
8-6
Resolving Placement Ambiguity

When there is more than one possible placement location for the round set, the system prompts you to indicate the desired location. In such situations, the system displays one case and prompts you to select the location by using options in the CHOOSE menu. These options are as follows: NextShow the next possible geometry. Rounds AcceptAccept this geometry.
The following figure shows two possible locations of the round set for a round created as Surf-Surf round. Resolving Placement Ambiguity
Possible locations of the round set.
Select these two surfaces as placement references.
When there are two possible locations for the round set, select the desired location with the Next and Accept options.
Specifying the Round Extent Element

Specify the optional element Round Extent if you want to extend the round feature beyond the selected references. This element is available for simple and advanced rounds.
Rounds
8-7
How to Specify the Round Extent Element 1. Select the Round Extent element and click Define in the dialog box. 2. The RND EXTENT menu appears with the following options: Term SurfsSpecify terminating surfaces by picking on the model surfaces. You can select any number of terminating surfaces. You cannot select a surface that is tangent to one of the surfaces between which you want to create a round. Auto BlendCreate blend transitions when a non-tangent edge is encountered.
Place a check mark in front of the option(s) that you want to specify and choose Done. You can use these options separately or in combination. The following figure demonstrates the difference between a round without terminating surfaces (example a) and the one that uses terminating surfaces and blend transitions (example b). Creating Terminating Surfaces and Blend Transition
Select these surfaces. Blend transition at corners Select this surface as terminating surface.
a
The Round Extent element is not defined.
b
Define the Round Extent element and select Term Surfs and Auto Blend
8-8
The following figure demonstrates the use of the Auto Blend option. Using the Auto Blend Option
The round geometry stops at the non-tangent edges.
Rounds
After the system creates this round segment, define the Round Extent element and select the Auto Blend option.
Note: the round is shown with a mesh for illustration purposes.
Variable Radius Rounds

For a variable radius round, you must specify the radii at the endpoints of the chain of edges, and, optionally, at the selected datum points along these edges. If the edges being rounded are not explicitly selected (for example, if you used the Surf-Surf option), you must select the spine so you can enter the radii for its endpoints, vertices, and additional points. The next figure shows a simple variable round. Adding optional intermediate points provides additional control over the radius of the round.
Rounds
8-9
Creating a Variable Radius Round

You must enter the radius values for these vertices.
Optionally, you can create datum points to enter additional radii.
For an advanced variable round, within each round set the system can calculate the minimum radius of the round between points with known radii. This can be done in one of the following waysby approximating the radius value along the spine with a standard spline function (default), or by using the smallest user-specified value as the minimum radius value for each round set. To select the desired method, define the Round Shape element in the Round dialog box and select Spline or Min Radius from the ATTRIBUTES menu. For more information, see Defining the Round Shape Element on page 8 - 14. How to Create a Simple Variable Radius Round 1. Start creating a round as usual. Choose Round, Simple, and Done. 2. Specify attributes and placement references for the round. 3. For placement types other than Edge Chain, define the spine for the variable round. Select continuous curves or edges by using options in the CHAIN menu. When you finish, choose Done from the CHAIN menu. 4. The GEN PNT SEL menu appears so you can specify additional datum point for which you want to enter a radius value. If no additional points are required, choose Done from the GEN PNT SEL menu and enter the radii only for the endpoints of the chain/spine. To select existing datum points, choose Select. To create new datum points on the spine, choose Create Point. The system automatically selects the new datum points for the operation. After you finish defining intermediate points, choose Done from the GEN PNT SEL menu.
8 - 10
Note: To automatically select all points at tangent edges along the spine, choose Select All. 5. The RADIUS TYPE menu appears so you can enter the radius values for vertices and datum points. 6. Continue creating the round as usual. When you create an advanced round with variable radii, you define the variable radii within each round set. After you have defined the attributes for the current set, the system prompts you to do the following: Specify the spine, if required. Select and/or create additional points. Enter radius values for all selected points.
Rounds
The following figure shows an example of an advanced variable radius round. Advanced Variable Radius Round
Three round sets
Additional points
Creating Advanced Rounds

Use advanced rounds when you need more control over the resulting round geometry. Advanced rounds, as opposed to simple rounds, enable you to define the following: Multiple round sets. Round shape: Rolling Ball or Normal to Spine. Cross section of the round: Circular or Conic.
Rounds
8 - 11
The type of transition between round sets. The type of corner transition for intersecting round sets and corner transitions between new and previously created geometry.
Generally, when you add a round, the system attempts to generate intermediate round geometry by using a few basic guidelines that you specify (for example, geometric references, radius of the rounds, and so on) and certain default attributes, defining the shape and transitions of the round feature. With advanced rounds, you can customize the default geometry by defining attributes and transitions of the round.
Round Sets
An advanced round is made up of one or more round sets, or segments of the round. Each round set may have unique attributes, references, and radius values. As you define each round set, the system generates intermediate geometry. After all round sets are defined, the system creates default transitions between round sets, which you can then customize. A sample advanced round with three round sets appears below. Defining Round Sets
Round set 2 Default corner transition
Round set 3
Round these edges.
Round set 1
8 - 12
When you define a round set, the Round Set dialog box appears with the ROUND SETS menu. The options in the ROUND SETS menu are as follows: AddCreate a new round set by specifying its attributes, geometric references, and radius of the round. RemoveRemove a round set. Select the set to remove by choosing from the RND SET SEL menu. RedefineRedefine a round set. Select the set to redefine by choosing from the RND SET SEL menu. Done SetsExit the ROUND SETS menu. Rounds
After you define round sets, you can modify or remove them by defining the Round Sets element in the dialog box.
Basic Procedure for Creating an Advanced Round

How to Create an Advanced Round 1. Choose Round from the SOLID menu. 2. Choose Advanced and Done from the ROUND TYPE menu. 3. A dialog box appears, listing elements of the round feature. Note: At this point, you can pre-set attributes of the round by choosing Done Sets from the ROUND SETS menu, selecting the Round Shape element, and then clicking Define in the dialog box. Alternatively, you can redefine the Round Shape element later in the process of round creation. For more information on the Round Shape element, see Defining the Round Shape Element on page 8 - 14. 4. To define the first round set, choose Add from the ROUND SETS menu. 5. The dialog box for the current round set appears. 6. Define the attributes of the current round set, as you do for simple rounds (follow Steps 4 and 5 of the procedure on page 8 - 3). 7. Specify references for placing the round set. 8. For other than a full round, enter the radius for the round set (see Entering Radius Values on page 8 - 6). For variable rounds, see Creating Full Rounds on page 8 - 25.
Rounds
8 - 13
9. Optionally, you can define the Round Extend element if you want to extend the round set beyond its current boundaries. See Resolving Placement Ambiguity on page 8 - 7. 10. After the round set is defined, click OK in the Round Set dialog box. 11. To add another round set, choose Add from the ROUND SETS menu, and then define the round set by repeating the Steps 5 through 10. 12. When you finish defining round sets, choose Done Sets from the ROUND SETS menu. 13. If you want to define the transition type between round sets, select the Transitions element and then click Define. For more information on transition types, see Defining the Transitions Element on page 8 - 15. 14. If necessary, define the Attach Type element (see Changing the Attachment Type on page 8 - 29). 15. To complete the round feature creation, click OK in the dialog box.
Defining the Round Shape Element

When you create an advanced round, the system uses default attributes to create intermediate round geometry. By default, the round shape is defined as the Rolling Ball model and Circular section. The default corner transition is Corner Sphere. If you want to set different default attributes for the entire round feature, define the Round Shape element in the feature list. Select this element, and then click Define in the dialog box. When the ATTRIBUTES menu appears, select an option from each submenu. Define the method of creating the round by choosing one of these options: Rolling BallThe round is created by rolling a ball. Norm To SpineThe round is created by sweeping an arc or conic cross section normal to a spine. Select a spine for this type of round. This option is not available for full rounds. Define the cross section of a round by choosing one of these options: CircularThe cross section of the round is circular.
8 - 14
ConicThe cross section of the round is conic. Specify a conic parameter for the round (from 0.05 to 0.95). This option is not available for full rounds. For the conic round, the system adds a new element, Conic Parameter, to the dialog box, so you can redefine it at any time. Define the default transition type for a corner round by choosing one of these options:
Corner SphereThe corner round is a sphere whose radius equals that of the largest round set. This option is available only for circular cross-sections. Corner SweepThe corner round is a sweep that wraps around the edge with the largest radius. This option is available only for circular cross-sections. PatchThe corner round is a patch transition between three edges. Note: You can later customize the default corner geometry by defining the Transitions element. For more information on corner transitions, see Creating Corner Transitions on page 8 - 19. Define the minimum acceptable variable radius value:
Rounds
SplineApproximate the radius by a spline. Min RadiusMaintain the minimum radius at the smallest user-specified value within each variable round set.
Defining the Transitions Element

The Transitions element allows you to specify how Pro/ENGINEER should handle the intersections of round sets. The following types of transitions appear in the TRANS TYPE menu: StopThe system stops the round geometry at the specified point, or extends it to an intersecting solid surface. Blend SrfsThe system creates a blend transition between two round sets. IntersctSrfsThe system intersects the round set geometry with the next adjacent round set. ContinueThe round set geometry continues into the next adjacent round set. Corner SphereThe system creates a corner round as a sphere whose radius equals that of the largest round set. You can modify the radius of the sphere.
Rounds
8 - 15
Corner SweepThe system creates a corner round as a sweep that wraps around the edge with the largest radius. PatchThe system creates a corner round as a patch transition between any number of intersecting round set edges. Note: The Corner Sphere and Corner Sweep transitions apply only to corner intersections between three round set edges. The Patch transition applies to corner transitions between three or four round edges. For more information on these transitions, see Creating Corner Transitions on page 8 - 19.
The following table shows examples of different transition types. Transition Type Stop Sample Transition
The round stops here.
Comments Round geometry terminates at the selected surface.
IntersectSrfs
Round set geometry extends until it is intersected by an adjacent round set.
Blend (for corner intersections of two round sets)
Blend transition
8 - 16
Transition Type Blend Srfs (for blending two collinear round sets)
Sample Transition
Blend transition
Comments This is a true Rolling Ball modelas if a marble were rolled along the references, and the resulting round geometry is the area that the marble could not intersect. Pre-existing edges of the part are maintained. The resulting geometry looks as if the round was placed first, and then geometry was cut away.
Rounds
Continue (for blending two collinear round sets with the same radius value)
Corner Sphere (for corner transition of three intersecting round sets)
Transitions
Sphere
This type of corner transition was referred to as Corner Round in previous releases. The system creates a Ball corner at the intersection of three round sets. By default, the sphere has the same radius as the largest round set. You can modify the radius of the sphere as well as the distance between the sphere and the round sets. Round geometry wraps around the round set with the largest radius. The resulting geometry looks as if the round set with the largest radius was created first, and then the remaining two sets were created subsequently.
Corner Sweep (for corner transition of three intersecting round sets)
Rounds
8 - 17
Transition Type Patch (for corner transition of three converging round sets)
Sample Transition
Comments Patched surface is created between intersection points of three or four round sets. You can select three or more round reference edges to create a patch transition, and you can select one surface on which you want to place fillet curves. Select four edge references for this patch transition.
Patch (for corner transition of four or more converging round sets)
IntersectSrfs (for corner transition of two or more converging round sets)
Consider the following tips for a round with user-defined transitions: When you copy, reroute, or place a group with an advanced round which contains user-defined transitions, the system removes user-defined transitions from the resulting feature (in the copied/rerouted/placed version of the round feature). Redefine the round transitions in the new feature, as appropriate. If a round feature fails due to missing transition references, the system prints an error message and instructs you to redefine the Transitions element by selecting references for each transition. If a transition has invalid references, first remove that transition and then recreate it with new valid references.
8 - 18
How to Define the Transitions Element 1. Select the Transitions element in the dialog box and click Define. 2. Pro/ENGINEER displays the ROUND TRANS and TRANS TYPE menus so you can specify the transition types to use between round sets. The ROUND TRANS menu options are as follows: AddAdd a transition. Rounds RemoveRemove a transition. RedefineRedefine a transition.
3. Choose Add and select one of the transition types from the TRANS TYPE menu (see page 8 - 15). 4. For the selected type of transition, the system prompts you to pick the required number of edges, defining the boundary of the transition. Choose Done Sel to finish selecting references for a specific transition. You can select references for several transitions at the same time. 5. After you create a transition, you can remove or modify it by choosing Remove or Redefine, respectively. The system displays the TRANSITIONS menu, which lists all the user-defined transitions (not the transitions that are created by default). Select the transition you want to modify. 6. When you finish defining the transitions, choose Done Trans from the ROUND TRANS menu. 7. The system creates the specified transitions.
Creating Corner Transitions

You can set the default type of corner transition by specifying the Round Shape element in the dialog box, and then choosing the desired corner transition from the ATTRIBUTES menu (see Defining the Round Shape Element on page 8 - 14). You can change the default corner transition at any point while defining the round. When you reset the default corner transition, the system automatically changes the corner geometry according to the new setting.
Rounds
8 - 19
Possible combinations of corner transitions appear in the following figure. Various Corner Transitions
R1= R2 = R3 Corner Sphere (R1 = R2) < R3 (R1 = R2) > R3 R1 < R2 < R3
Corner Sweep
Patch
Modified Patch (one fillet surface)
Modified Patch (one fillet surface)
Modified Patch (one fillet surface) Notes: 1. R1, R2, and R3 are radii of respective round sets. 2. A patch corner transition can be created on three or four round edges. 3. You can modify a patch corner transition to add a fillet curve to one surface between round edges (fillet surfaces are indicated with an arrow in this illustration).
8 - 20
The default corner type applies to all default corner transitions in your round feature. If you want to customize a particular corner transition, choose the Transitions element and then Define from the dialog box. The following corner transitions appear in the TRANS TYPE menu: Corner SphereThe corner transition creates the sphere with the largest radius of the round sets to be blended (see the following figure). You can customize the default corner sphere transition by entering the radius of the sphere and transition distances between the sphere and rounded edges. Corner Sphere Transition
Rounds
Corner SweepThe corner transition is created as a sweep that wraps around the round set with the largest radius (see the figure below). If two of the three round sets are larger than the third set and have equal radii, the system creates a sphere at the corner transition. Corner Sweep Transition
The largest radius
The largest radius
The corner sweep wraps around the round set with the largest radius.
Rounds
8 - 21
Note: When you create a Corner Sweep transition and the round sets are defined as Variable radii, the system creates the transition based on the radius values at the end of each set where these round sets are intersected. PatchThe corner transition is a patch geometry between three or more surfaces (see the following figure). Optionally, you can customize the patch by placing a fillet curve between any two adjacent round edges. Patch Transition
Fillet is added at this location.
a) Default Corner Patch Transition
b) Customized Corner Patch Transition
Creating a Patch Transition

How to Create a Patch Transition 1. Define round sets. 2. Select the Transitions element and then Define in the dialog box. 3. Choose Patch and Done from the TRANS TYPE menu. 4. Select the edges of the round surfaces to be blended together. Choose Done Sel. 5. The system creates an intermediate patch geometry. If you are satisfied with the geometry, choose Accept and Done from the PATCH menu. 6. If you want to customize the patch geometry by placing fillet curves between adjacent round edges, continue with the next step. 7. Choose Modify and Done from the PATCH menu. Select a surface where you want to place a fillet curve and choose Done Sel. The system highlights the selected surface and prompts you to enter the radius of the fillet curve.
8 - 22
8. Choose Done Trans from the TRANS TYPE menu to finalize the transition.
Defining a Stop Transition by Terminating Surfaces

When you create a stop transition, you can select adjacent surfaces whose extensions will be used to terminate the round. This enables you to create a different round geometry depending on which surfaces you select to define the transition (see the next figure). Rounds
This surface was selected to define the Stop transition.
These three surfaces were selected to define the Stop transition.
How to Modify a Stop Transition 1. Define round sets. 2. Select the Transitions element and Define in the dialog box. 3. Choose Stop and Done from the TRANS TYPE menu. 4. Select the edges of the round surfaces to trim and choose Done Sel. 5. The system creates an intermediate transition geometry. If you are satisfied with the geometry, choose Accept and Done. 6. If you want to select terminating surfaces, choose Modify and Done. 7. Select surfaces that will be extended to trim the round geometry and choose Done Sel. 8. Choose Done Trans from the TRANS TYPE menu to finalize the transition.
Rounds
8 - 23
Creating Transitions with Existing Geometry

You can create a corner transition between the new round and existing round geometry by using the Corner Sphere, Corner Sweep, or Patch transition. In addition, you can create corner transitions between the round and other existing geometry (for example, chamfer, cut, and so on) by using the Patch transition. Note: Creating a patch transition with existing geometry is supported only for three converging round set edges. A patch transition with more four round sets must be created in one operation. How to Create a Corner Transition With Existing Geometry 1. Start creating an advanced round as usual. 2. After you have defined one or two round sets, define the Transitions element from the dialog box. Choose Corner Sphere, Corner Sweep, or Patch from the TRANS TYPE menu. 3. Select one (if you defined a single round set) or two (if you defined two round sets) corner transition references and choose Done Sel. 4. The system searches the area around the selected references and creates a corner round geometry based on the references it finds. The next figure shows a round with the Corner Sphere transition to the existing round.
8 - 24
Creating a Corner Sphere Transition to Existing Geometry

Existing round geometry
Rounds
Create a round on this edge.
Select this edge as a reference for creating a corner transition.
Corner Sphere Transition
Creating Full Rounds

Use the Full Round option to create a round by replacing a surface with a round. The Full Round option is available for simple and advanced rounds. You can apply a full round to solid or surface geometry. The next figure shows an example of a simple full round. Simple Full Round
Full round
Rounds
8 - 25
The following figure shows an example of an advanced full round. Notice that if the system encounters a non-tangent edge, it terminates the round geometry at this location. Therefore, you need to define two round sets for this part (see example b in the following figure). You can change the user-defined transition type to achieve the desired geometry. Notice that the Continue and Blend Srfs transition types create different geometries (see examples c and d in the following figure). Advanced Full Round
Round this surface Create two round sets (you can use the same references).
a
Transition type Blend Srfs Transition type Continue
Non-tangent edge
View A
View A
8 - 26
Consider the following restrictions when you create full rounds. You cannot create a full round if: More than two sets of edges border the same surface. You define the Round Shape element as Conic. You define the Round Shape element as Norm to Spine.
How to Create an Advanced Full Round Rounds 1. Choose Create, Round. 2. The Round feature creation dialog box appears with the ROUND TYPE menu. Choose Advanced and Done from the ROUND TYPE menu. 3. Choose Add from the ROUND SETS menu to create a first round set. 4. The Round Set dialog box appears. From the RND SET ATT menu, choose Full Round. From the lower submenu, choose one of these placement options, followed by Done: Surf-SurfSelect two surfaces bounding the surface to be replaced by a round. Select the surface to be replaced by the round. Edge-SurfSelect an edge and a surface bounding the surface to be replaced by a round. Select the surface to be replaced by the round. See the next figure.
Surface to be removed Edge reference
Surface reference
Resulting round SIDE VIEW
Edge PairSelect a pair of edges bounding the surface to be replaced by the round.
5. Choose OK from the Round Set dialog box. 6. To select another round set, choose Add from the ROUND SETS menu and repeat Steps 4 through 5. 7. When you finish selecting the sets, choose Done Sets.
Rounds
8 - 27
8. The system creates an intermediate geometry. If you want to change the transitions, choose the Transitions element from the dialog box. 9. Choose OK from the dialog box. Creating a simple full round is similar to creating an advanced full round, except that when you create a simple full round, you can specify only a single set of references and you cannot modify the transition type.
Creating a Round Through a Curve

Use the Thru Curve option in the RND SET ATTR menu to create a round through a curve. This type of round is formed by rolling a ball tangent to two surfaces. The radius of the round at each point along the spine is determined by the selected curve. The following figure illustrates a round through curve.
Select this curve.
How to Create a Round Through a Curve 1. Choose Round > Simple or Advanced > Done. 2. From the RND SET ATTR menu, choose Thru Curve, Edge Chain or Surf-Surf, and Done. 3. If you selected Edge-Chain, pick an edge between two surfaces to be rounded. If you selected Surf-Surf, pick two reference surfaces. 4. Pick a curve at which the round will terminate. 5. Complete the round creation as with other types of rounds.
8 - 28
Changing the Attachment Type

Pro/ENGINEER predefines the attachment type of a round as Make Solid. This means that the resulting feature will intersect the existing geometry when it is created (or previewed). For example, if the round geometry cannot be attached to the part, redefine the round type from Simple to Advanced, and the attachment type from Make Solid to Make Surface. This allows you to save the round geometry until you have fixed some geometry errors. How to Change the Attachment Type of a Round 1. Select the Attach Type element in the dialog box, then click Define. 2. The system displays the ATTACHMENT menu, which lists the appropriate subset of the following options: Make SolidThe round will intersect with the existing geometry. Make SurfaceThe round will not intersect with the existing geometry. Same QuiltThe feature intersects the reference quilt. This option is not available for solid references. New QuiltThe feature creates a new quilt. This option is not available for solid references.
Rounds
3. Choose the desired attachment type, then click OK in the dialog box. Pro/ENGINEER updates the part to reflect your changes. The following table shows possible attachment types for different combinations of geometric references of the round feature. Attachment Types Geometric References of the Round Solid-Solid Quilt-Quilt (same quilt) Quilt-Quilt (different quilts) Solid-Quilt Default Attachment Type Solid Same quilt New quilt Surface Optional Attachment Type Surface New quilt N/A N/A
Rounds
8 - 29
9
Tweak Features
This chapter describes how to create features by altering surfaces of the part using the Tweak option in the SOLID menu. Topic Tweak Features Drafts Local Push Radius Dome Section Domes Offset Ears Lip Feature Toroidal Bend Spinal Bend Page 9-2 9-3 9 - 20 9 - 21 9 - 23 9 - 28 9 - 29 9 - 33 9 - 35 9 - 39
9-1
Tweak Features
Pro/ENGINEER offers several features to deform or alter (tweak) the surface of the part. The TWEAK menu lists the following options: DraftAdd a taper of a specific angle to a surface. You must have a Pro/FEATURE license to create any drafts except Neutral Plane (with constant draft angle). See Drafts on page 9 - 3 for more information. Local PushDeform a surface by pushing or pulling on a circular or rectangular region of a surface. See Local Push on page 9 - 3 for more information. Radius DomeCreate a dome on a limited region of a surface. See Radius Dome on page 9 - 21 for more information. Section DomeCreate a dome from sketched sections. You must have a Pro/FEATURE license to use this option. See Section Domes on page 9 - 23 for more information. OffsetCreate a feature by offsetting either a whole surface or a specified area with a constant thickness. You must have a Pro/FEATURE license to use this option. See Offset on page 9 - 28 for more information. ReplaceReplace a part surface with a surface feature (see the Creating a Replace Feature on page 12 - 28). You must have a Pro/SURFACE license to use this option. EarCreate a protrusion that is extruded along the top of a surface and bent at the base. See Ears on page 9 - 29 for more information. LipCreate a lip on selected edges that can be used for interlocking parts. This feature cannot be created as an Assembly feature, but the dimensions on mating parts can be controlled through relations. You must have a Pro/FEATURE license to use this option. See Lip Feature on page 9 - 33 for more information. PatchReplace a part of a surface (or surfaces) by a surface feature (see Surface Patching on page 12 - 29). You must have a Pro/SURFACE license to use this option. ToroidalBendBend a selected solid, surface, or datum feature in two directions to produce a toroidal or revolved shape. You must have a Pro/FEATURE license to use this option. See Toroidal Bend on page 9 - 35 for more information.
9-2
Spinal BendBend an object about a curved spine by continuously repositioning cross-sections along a curve. You must have a Pro/SURFACE license to use this option. See Spinal Bend on page 9 - 39 for more information. Free FormTweak a surface by dynamic manipulation. You must have a Pro/SURFACE license to use this option. For detailed information, see the Freeform Manipulation chapter. Draft OffsetCreate a surface offset with drafted surfaces. You must have a license for Pro/FEATURE in order to use this feature. See Creating Draft Offsets on page 12 - 22.
Drafts
The Draft feature adds a draft angle to individual surfaces, or to a series of selected planar surfaces. The following table lists the terminology used in drafts.
Tweak Features
Term Draft surfaces Neutral plane (or Pivot plane) Neutral curve
Definition Model surfaces selected for drafting. Draft surfaces are pivoted about the intersection of the neutral plane with the draft surfaces. The curve on the draft surfaces that is used as an axis of rotation for draft surfacesdraft surfaces are rotated about the neutral curve. Direction that is used to measure the draft angle. It is defined as normal to the reference plane. Angle between the draft direction and the resulting drafted surfaces. If the draft surfaces are split, you can define two independent angles for each portion of the draft. Direction that defines how draft surfaces are rotated with respect to the neutral plane or neutral curve. Areas of the draft surfaces to which you can apply different draft angles.
Draft direction
Draft angle
Direction of rotation (or Reference direction) Split areas
Tweak Features
9-3
The range for the draft angle is -30 to +30. Consider the following when creating drafts: You can draft only the surfaces that are formed by tabulated cylinders or planes. The draft direction must be normal to the neutral plane if a draft surface is cylindrical. You cannot draft surfaces with fillets around the edge boundary. However, you can draft the surfaces first, then fillet the edges.
The following figure shows a sample draft feature created using a neutral plane and a draft angle -8o. Sample Draft
Neutral plane Draft direction Positive direction of rotation (yellow arrow)
-8o
Both surfaces of the cylinder are selected for drafting.
Drafts are created by pivoting draft surfaces around a neutral plane or a neutral datum axis. Choosing Draft from the Tweak menu brings up the Draft Opts menu with the following options: Neutral PlnDraft the surfaces by pivoting around a neutral plane. Neutral CrvDraft the surfaces by pivoting about a neutral datum curve or edge.
Surfaces selected for drafting can be split; the following types of split drafts are supported: Drafts that are split at a plane
9-4
Drafts that are split at the neutral curve: one-sided Split at Crv drafts two-sided Split at Crv drafts with one dependent angle two-sided Split at Crv drafts with two independent angles
Drafts that are split at a parting quilt: one-sided Split at Srf draft two-sided Split at Srf drafts with one dependent angle two-sided Split at Srf drafts with two independent angles
Drafts that are split using sketched geometry Tweak Features
Different variations of the draft feature are shown in the following figure.
Tweak Features
9-5
Different Types of a Draft Feature

No Split
Neutral Plane
Split at Plane
Split at Sketch (All drafts use Constant or Variable angle options except Split at Skt) No Split
Drafts
One Side Neutral Curve Split at Curve Both Sides
Independent Angle
Dependent Angle
One Side Split at Surface Both Sides
Independent Angle
Dependent Angle
Drafts may use a variable or constant draft angle. Specify the type of angle by selecting one of the following options in the ATTRIBUTES menu: ConstantApply a constant angle to the draft along the entire drafted surface. VariableApply a variable draft angle at discrete points along the drafted surface. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to enter a value for the vertices at the intersection between the draft direction plane and the draft surfaces. Optionally, you can select or create additional datum points, and then specify a draft angle at those locations. To select existing datum points, choose Select from the GEN PNT SEL menu. To add datum points, choose Create Point from the GEN PNT SEL menu.
9-6
Note: Variable draft angle cannot be used with Split at Skt drafts. For the chosen draft type, specify the corresponding attributes by using the ATTRIBUTES menu (see Neutral Plane Drafts on page 9 - 7 and Neutral Curve Drafts on page 9 - 14).
Neutral Plane Drafts

Pro/ENGINEER rotates the surfaces being drafted around their intersection with the neutral (pivot) plane. When creating a neutral plane draft, you need to define the type of split by choosing one of these options in the ATTRIBUTES menu: Tweak Features No SplitDo not split the selected surfaces when creating the draft. Split at PlnSplit the draft surfaces at the neutral plane. Split at SktSplit the draft surfaces using a sketch.
The next figure shows different types of neutral plane drafts.
Tweak Features
9-7
Different Types of Neutral Plane Draft

Neutral plane
Draft surface a) Using No Split
Reference plane for defining the draft direction
Neutral plane
Original part Neutral plane
b) Using Split at Pln
Sketch of the split c) Using Split at Skt
As you create a draft, the Draft dialog box displays the element name, information about the element, and the current status of the element. The specific elements listed are a function of the type of draft being processed. How to Add a Draft Angle to One or More Surfaces 1. Choose Tweak from the SOLID menu. 2. Choose Draft from the TWEAK menu. 3. From the DRAFT OPTS menu, choose Neutral Pln and Done. 4. Pro/ENGINEER displays the feature creation dialog box for drafts.
9-8
5. Using the ATTRIBUTES menu, select the draft options as follows: Choose the type of split by selecting No Split, Split at Pln, or Split at Skt. Choose the type of draft angle by selecting Constant or Variable. Choose Done.
6. Select or create the neutral plane for the draft using the Plane or Make Datum option in the SETUP PLANE menu. The intersection of the neutral plane and draft surfaces determines the axis of rotation. Note that the draft surfaces must be perpendicular to the neutral plane. 7. Continue with the specific procedure for the required draft type. The descriptions of these procedure follow. How to Create a No-Split Neutral Plane Draft 1. After you have completed Steps 1 through 7 on page 9 - 8, specify the draft direction by selecting a reference plane. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference plane. Choose an option from the REF DIR menu: Use Neut PlnUse the neutral plane as the reference plane. SelectSelect a reference plane. Pro/ENGINEER displays the GEN SEL DIR and SETUP PLANE menus so you can set up the reference plane. You can select a datum plane as the reference plane.
Tweak Features
2. If you choose Variable, specify datum points for which you want to enter the draft angle value. 3. A yellow arrow displays the positive direction of rotation axis. Enter the value for the draft angle. 4. To complete the feature creation, click OK in the dialog box.
Tweak Features
9-9
How to Create a Split-at-Plane Neutral Plane Draft 1. After you have completed Steps 1 through 7 on page 9 - 8, specify a reference plane. The reference plane is used to determine the direction from which the draft angle is measured. Select a planar neighbor of the draft surfaces as the reference plane. Choose an option from the REF PLANE menu: Use Neut PlnUse the neutral plane as the reference plane. This options is available only when the neutral plane is adjacent to draft surfaces. SelectSelect a reference plane. Pro/ENGINEER displays the GEN SEL DIR and SETUP PLANE menus so you can set up the reference plane.
Note: The reference plane cannot be a datum plane. 2. If you chose Variable, specify datum points for which you want to enter the draft angle value. 3. A yellow arrow displays the positive direction of rotation axis. Enter the value for the draft angles. 4. To complete the feature creation, click OK in the dialog box.
Creating a Split-at-Sketch Neutral Plane Draft

The Split at Skt option creates drafts that are divided by sketched parting lines. Each side of the parting lines has a separate draft angle (see the following figure). You create a split at sketch draft by specifying the neutral plane and sketching the split lines (the lines where the drafted surface will be divided into two areas). Split lines can be sketched either directly on the part surface or on a datum plane. After you have created the draft section, it is projected through the part, in the direction normal to the sketching plane. You can specify any surfaces onto which the draft section can be projected so the surfaces are completely divided by the split lines, including surfaces normal to the sketching plane (where the split line is projected as a point). The neutral (pivot) plane in split-at-sketch drafts always serves as the draft direction reference; you cannot select a separate draft direction reference. Pro/ENGINEER rotates the surfaces to be drafted around the intersection with the neutral plane. The direction of rotation depends on the sign of the draft angle and the indicated positive direction of the rotation axis.
9 - 10
How to Create a Split at Sketch Draft 1. Complete Steps 1 through 7 on page 9 - 8. 2. Select or create the sketching plane using the SETUP SK PLN and SETUP PLANE menus. 3. Sketch the split lines. The draft section may be open (see example a in the following figure) or closed (see example b in the following figure). Dimension the section, regenerate, and choose Done. 4. Pro/ENGINEER indicates the side with a red arrow, and indicates the positive direction of the rotation axis with the yellow arrow. Enter a draft angle with the appropriate sign, using the right-hand rule. 5. Repeat Step 3 for the second side. 6. When you have finished, select OK from the dialog box.
Tweak Features
Tweak Features
9 - 11
Split at Sketch Drafts
Neutral plane
Sketched parting lines a) Open Section
Neutral plane
Sketched parting lines
b) Closed Section
Multiple Draft Areas

You can create more than two draft areas on one surface in stages. First, sketch two areas and create a split at sketch draft. Then, create a second split at sketch draft on the same surface. Finally, sketch the third area and, for the rest of the surface, specify a draft angle of 0 degrees. The next figure illustrates multiple draft areas.
9 - 12
Multiple Draft Areas
Surface selected for second draft (draft angle for this area is 0)
Parting lines for first draft
Parting lines for second draft
Tweak Features
Using the Loops Surfs Option to Select Draft Surfaces

When selecting draft surfaces, you can use the Loop Surfs option from the Surf Option menu to select surfaces for drafting (see the following figure). When the draft surfaces form a single continuous loop, the same draft angle is added to all of the surfaces. Sample No Split Draft with the Loop Surfs Selection Option
Face for loop and neutral plane
Loop edge
Material added
The original part (left)the part with drafts (right) The draft angle is the same for all the surfaces.
When you select multiple loops, the system rotates the inner and outer surfaces in the opposite directions (see the next figure).
Tweak Features
9 - 13
Part with Two Draft Loops

Face for loop and reference plane Loop edge
Material removed
Neutral Curve Drafts

You create a neutral curve draft using the Neutral Crv option to pivot draft surfaces about a neutral datum curve or edge. You would use a neutral curve draft if the neutral and reference planes are not parallel. In addition, neutral curve drafts allow the use of non-planar curves while in plane driven drafts the intersection of the neutral plane and draft surfaces is always planar. Neutral curve drafts may have split and non-split draft surfaces. To determine the type of split, choose one of the following options in the ATTRIBUTES menu: No SplitDo not split the selected surfaces when creating the draft. Split at CrvSplit the draft surfaces at a neutral curve to create one-side or two-side draft, while the neutral curve remains fixed. Split at SrfSplit the draft surfaces at a parting quilt on one side or both sides of the parting quilt, while each neutral curve remains fixed. The quilt should intersect the drafted surfaces and split them. For this type of draft, you need to specify two neutral curves, on both sides of the split.
9 - 14
Different Types of Split Drafts
Draft surfaces
Neutral curve Neutral curve Parting quilt
Tweak Features
a) Using No Split
b) Using Split at Crv
Neutral curves c) Using Split at Srf
Drafts created with Split at Crv or Split at Srf option can be one-sided or two-sided. Select the desired type by choosing one of these options in the ATTRIBUTES menu: Both SidesCreate a draft on both sides of the neutral curve (if you are using Split at Crv) or parting quilt (if you are using Split at Srf). One SideCreate a draft on one side of the neutral curve (if you are using Split at Crv) or parting quilt (if you are using Split at Srf).
For drafts created on both sides of the split, you can specify a single or two independent draft angles for both portions of the split draft. To indicate how you want to enter the draft angle, choose one of the following options in the ATTRIBUTES menu: IndependentSpecify a draft angle on each side of the split. The angles are independent of each other such that the drafts do not necessarily meet at the parting curve or quilt. The surfaces pivot about the neutral curve. DependentSpecify a draft angle on one side of the split. The system determines the other draft angle such that the two drafts meet at the parting curve or quilt.
Tweak Features
9 - 15
The following figures illustrate one- and two-sided Split at Srf drafts. One Side Split at Srf Draft
Draft angle = 14 Draft direction
Parting quilt Draft surface Neutral curve
Both Sides Split at Srf Draft with Two Independent Angles

Draft angle 1 = 14
Draft direction
Draft surface
Neutral curve 1
Parting quilt
Draft angle 2 =8 Neutral curve 2
9 - 16
Creating a Curve-Driven Draft

The following procedure explains basic steps to create a curve-driven draft. How to Create a Neutral Curve Draft 1. Use the command sequence Feature, Create, Tweak, Draft. 2. Choose Neutral Crv and Done from the DRAFT OPTS menu. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays the feature creation dialog box and the ATTRIBUTES menu. 4. From the ATTRIBUTES menu, select the following: Tweak Features Specify the type of split by choosing No Split, Split at Crv, or Split at Srf. Specify whether the draft is to be created on one or both sides of the neutral curve/parting quilt by selecting Both Sides or One Side. If you selected Both Sides, define the angle by choosing Independent or Dependent. Specify whether the draft angle is to be constant or variable along the neutral curve by choosing Constant or Variable. Choose Done to conclude.
Note: If you selected the Variable option, you must specify at least two variable draft angle points. 5. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SURF SELECT and SURF OPTIONS menus (see Using the Include Command on page 10 - 15 for more information on these menus). Select the surfaces to draft. When you have finished, choose Done from the SURF SELECT menu. 6. Specify a neutral curve using the CHAIN menu. For detailed information on how to use the CHAIN menu, see Chain Processing on page 3 - 33. 7. For a draft using Split at Srf and Both Sides, specify a second neutral curve. 8. For a Split at Srf draft, specify the parting quilt. 9. Specify the draft direction using the GEN SEL DIR menu. The menu options are as follows: PlaneSelect a plane or create a new datum plane to which the draft direction will be normal.
Tweak Features
9 - 17
Crv/Edg/AxisSelect an edge, curve, or axis in the draft direction. If you select a non-linear edge or curve, the system prompts you to select an existing datum point on the edge or curve to specify a tangent. CsysSelect an axis of the coordinate system to indicate the draft direction.
10. For a one-side draft, specify the side on which to create the draft. The system displays an arrow, along with the DIRECTION menu. Choose Flip or Okay. 11. Enter the draft angle as follows: For a no-split draft or the draft on one side, specify the draft angle, with material removal in the direction of a displayed arrow. To add material in the direction of the arrow, enter a negative angle. For a draft on both sides, specify the draft angle on each side of the neutral curve, with material removal for each portion in the direction of a displayed arrow. To add material in the direction of the arrow, enter a negative angle. The draft surfaces will pivot about the neutral curves at the specified angle. For a draft on both sides with a dependent angle, specify the original angle. The system calculates the draft angle that corresponds to the second neutral curve such that the two drafts meet at the parting curve or quilt.
12. Click OK in the dialog box to create the draft. No-Split Neutral Curve Draft
Draft direction
Draft angle = -15
Neutral curve
Draft surface
9 - 18
Restrictions on Curve Driven Drafts

Consider the following restrictions when creating curve driven drafts: For drafts split by a quilt, the parting quilt must intersect all drafted surfaces (see the figure below). Selecting a Parting Quilt
Tweak Features
Draft surfaces
WRONG
RIGHT
A neutral curve cannot be shorter than the drafted surfaces (see the following figure). Selecting a Neutral Curve
Neutral curve
Neutral curve
Draft surface WRONG
RIGHT
Modifying Draft Angles

To modify a draft angle, choose Modify and pick on the draft angle feature; the system displays the angle value. Note that all the values are displayed as positive, no matter what sign you specified when you created the feature. To change the angle value but retain the direction, enter a positive value. To change the direction of rotation, enter a negative value.
Tweak Features
9 - 19
Local Push
A local push deforms a surface by pushing or pulling on a circular or rectangular region on the surface. The following figure illustrates the process of creating a local push. Local Push Feature
Sketching plane Surface to be pushed Sketched boundaries
Pushes (2) with positive deformation
How to Create a Local Push 1. Choose Tweak from the SOLID menu and Local Push from the TWEAK menu. 2. Set up a sketching plane and sketch the local push boundaries (sketch the section). 3. Pick the surfaces on which to apply the local push. The following sections describe the boundary and the sketching plane for the local push.
9 - 20
Sketching the Local Push Boundary

Sketching a local push boundary is different from all other sketches in that the system displays a rubberband rectangle instead of a rubberband line when you click the left mouse button. All other sketcher options are identical when creating a local push. You can create multiple boundaries for the local push. To sketch a rectangular local push boundary, do the following: 1. Locate the pointer on the sketching grid and click the left mouse button. The system displays a pick box. 2. Enclose the desired area within the selection rectangle and click the left mouse button. This region can extend beyond the surface. To sketch a circle, use the middle button. Pro/ENGINEER always prompts for a surface for placement of the local push for two reasons: Local pushes can be sketched across surface boundaries and can be created on more than one surface. The surface that is the sketching plane does not necessarily have to be the surface upon which the local push is placed. The local push is placed upon the surface that is selected after the prompt.
Tweak Features
Defining the Local Push Height

After you create the local push, the system gives it a default height, measured from the sketching plane. You can modify this parameter to create the desired deformation of the surface. A positive value deforms the local push out from the part surface, while a negative value deforms it into the surface of the part.
Radius Dome
The Radius Dome option allows you to create a dome feature. A radius dome deforms a surface and is parameterized by one radius and one offset distance (see the following figure). It is useful for creating qualitative deformations on a surface. If you want more precise control over the geometry, use a section dome feature. A section dome a Pro/FEATURE license.
Tweak Features
9 - 21
Radius Dome Feature

Reference edge Surface to be domed
How to Create a Radius Dome 1. Choose Tweak, then Radius Dome from the TWEAK menu. 2. Pick a surface to dome. The surface to dome must be a plane, torus, cone, or cylinder. 3. Select a datum plane, planar surface, or edge to which to reference the dome arc. 4. Enter the dome radius. The radius value can be positive or negative, resulting in a convex or concave dome. 5. Pro/ENGINEER creates the domed surface using two dimensions the radius of the dome arc and the distance from the arc to the reference datum plane or edge. The radius of the dome is the radius of an arc that passes through the two edges of the domed surface. Thus, a larger radius value results in less elevation from the original surface. The placement dimension affects the dome steepness: the closer the dome arc to the middle of the domed surface, the less the dome elevation. 6. On non-rectangular surfaces, Pro/ENGINEER trims the dome to the part edges (see the next figure).
9 - 22
Radius Dome Feature on a Cylinder

Reference datum Surface to be domed
Tweak Features
Section Domes
A section dome replaces a planar surface with a sculptured surface. This surface can be defined by a sweep or a blend. The swept dome uses two perpendicular cross-sections to create the sculptured surface. The blended dome uses parallel sections blended together to create the new surface. With the blended dome, you can use a reference profile to help generate the sections. A section dome is available to licensees of Pro/FEATURE only. Before creating the section dome feature, consider the following restrictions: The surface to be domed must be horizontal when you sketch the sections. Specify the sketching plane for the section dome as you would normally sketch on a part. Because the cross-sections must be perpendicular to the profile, it may be necessary to reorient the view between sketches (using the View option in the Main menu). Pro/ENGINEER adds or removes material while creating a section dome, depending on how high or low the section is sketched in relation to the specified surface. For example, if the sections are attached to the surface, some material around the edges will be removed. Sections should not be tangent to the sides of the part.
Tweak Features
9 - 23
You cannot add a dome to a surface that is filleted along any edge. If you want a fillet, add the dome first, then fillet the boundary. It is not necessary to have the same number of segments for each section. Sections should be at least as long as the surface and do not have to be attached to the surface. Sections must be sketched to be open.
How to Create a Section Dome 1. Choose Tweak from the SOLID menu, then Section Dome from the TWEAK menu. 2. The system displays the SECTION DOME menu, which lists the following options: SweepCreate a dome by sweeping the first profile along the second profile, sweeping the second profile along the first profile, then using the mathematical average of the two surfaces to create the dome. BlendCreate a dome by blending two or more sections. No ProfileCreate a blended dome without using a profile. This option is not accessible when you have selected the Sweep option. One ProfileCreate a dome feature using a reference profile.
Creating a Swept Section Dome

You can create a swept section dome using a profile and one section that is perpendicular to it. The next figure illustrates a swept section dome.
9 - 24
Swept Section Dome

Profile Section The domed surface
Tweak Features
How to Create a Swept Section Dome with a Profile 1. Choose Sweep and One Profile from the SECTION DOME menu. 2. Pick the planar surface to be domed. 3. Create the profile by indicating the sketching plane, then sketching and regenerating the section. 4. Return to the default view and choose Done. 5. Create one section perpendicular to the profile by selecting or creating a sketching plane and sketch the section. 6. Choose Done to complete the dome. Pro/ENGINEER sweeps the first section along the second section to create a swept surface. The system then sweeps the second surface along the first to create another swept surface. The final dome is the mathematical average of the two swept surfaces. A dome is always be created over the entire specified surface. If the sections are sketched where they do not cover the entire surface, Pro/ENGINEER continues the dome as necessary to complete it. In addition, the second section does not have to be dimensioned to, or intersect the profile section. If the second section is not dimensioned to the profile, the profile can be modified without affecting the position of the second section. To dimension to the profile, select on the horizontal or vertical axis.
Tweak Features
9 - 25
Creating a Blended Section Dome Without a Profile

You can create a blended section dome feature without using a profile. In this case, the system creates the domed surface by blending parallel sections. How to Create a Blended Section Dome Without a Profile 1. Choose Blend and No Profile from the SECTION DOME menu. 2. Select the planar surface to dome. 3. Specify a sketching plane for the first section and sketch the first section. When selecting a sketching plane, the viewing direction arrow indicates the positive direction for offset sections. Choose Done when you have finished. 4. Enter the distance between the first section and the new section to sketch. The orientation of the sections is the same. Sketch the new section and choose Done when you have finished. At least two sections must be used for this option. Note that the previous sections are toggled to a light gray color when you sketch the new section. Be sure to orient the start points of the sections so the correct points are connected for the dome. The start point is displayed as a small circle on the sketch. To reorient the start point, select Start Point from the SEC TOOLS menu and pick a new start point on the section. 5. If other sections are required, enter yes to continue and enter in new sections as needed. If no other sections are required, answer no to the prompt. Pro/ENGINEER then generates the dome. Blended Section Dome Without a Profile
Section 1 Section 2 Note that the entire surface was domed - even though only two sections were sketched.
9 - 26
Creating a Blended Section Dome with a Single Profile

You create a blended section dome with one profile and two or more sections. Pro/ENGINEER adds or removes material, as necessary, from the edges of the specified surface to create the dome. Whether material is added or removed depends on the sections being sketched. A section that dips below the surface removes material. A section that is above (to the positive side of) the surface adds material. The profile and the sections of a single-profile blended dome are not necessarily related. This feature allows you to dimension to the profile by selecting the horizontal and vertical centerlines displayed while sketching a section. The centerlines are put there for your convenience, but you do not have to dimension to them. If you do not dimension to the profile, you can modify the profile without affecting the resulting dome. If you dimension to the profile, modifying the profile automatically moves the sections and modifies the dome. How to Create a Blended Dome With One Profile 1. Choose Blend and One Profile from the SECTION DOME menu. 2. Pick the surface to dome. 3. Specify a sketching plane for the profile and sketch the section. After regeneration, choose Done. 4. Create the first section by indicating a sketching plane that is perpendicular to the profile. The viewing direction of the section indicates the positive offset direction for additional sections. After orienting the sketching plane, the system displays a set of crosshairs at the intersection of the sketching plane and the profile. When you sketch the section, the system displays a circular start point at the beginning of the sketch. All start points for additional sections should be lined up. When you have finished with the sketch, choose Done. 5. Sketch the next section by choosing the sketching plane and completing the sketch. At least two sections are required for a blended dome. 6. If another section is required for the dome, answer yes to the prompt asking if you want to proceed to the next section, then sketch the next section. Note that the previous parallel sections toggle to a light gray color. If no other section is required for the dome, answer no to the prompt to complete the dome.
Tweak Features
Tweak Features
9 - 27
A dome is always created over the entire specified surface. If the sections are sketched where they do not cover the entire surface, Pro/ENGINEER continues the dome as necessary to complete it. Blended Section Dome with One Profile
Section dimensioned to part Profile
Centerlines
Section dimensioned to profile
Offset
You can create an offset feature on a surface by choosing Tweak, Offset. This displays the Options menu. The Options menu commands are grouped in mutually exclusive pairs, as follows: Normal OffOffset in a direction normal to the original surface. Transl OffFor selected surfaces, translate the offset a specified distance in a given direction. For sketched regions, translate the offset a specified distance normal to the sketching plane. Curved surfaces do not change shape when they are translated. Sket RegionOffset an area of the surface defined by a section.The section of an offset feature is sketched on a plane. The section is projected onto the selected surfaces along the sketch plane normal direction. Then, the offset is applied to give the feature depth. Whole SurfOffset a whole surface, defined by a loop selection. SideNrmToSrfMake the side surfaces of an offset area normal to the original surface. SideNrmToSktMake the side surfaces of an offset area normal to the sketching plane.
9 - 28
Whether you are offsetting a whole surface or an area of the surface, you can select several surfaces to offset. A positive offset value adds material to the surface, while a negative offset value removes material from the surface (see the following figure). Offset Area Feature
Section sketched on an offset datum plane DTM2
Tweak Features
with positive offset
with negative offset
Ears
An ear is a protrusion that is extruded along the top of a surface and can be bent at the base (see the next figure).
Tweak Features
9 - 29
Ear Feature
Section Sketching plane (hidden surface)
There are two types ear features: VariableThe ear is bent at a user-specified, modifiable angle, measured from the surface from which the ear is extruded. 90 deg tabThe ear is bent at 90. No dimension is created for the angle.
You can redefine ears from one type to another. The dimensioning of the two types of ear is as follows: Variable earThe length of the sketched section represents the overall length of the inside edge (including the length of the bent portion). TabThe length of the sketched section represents the distance between the bottom and the top of the outside edge (including the projection of the bent portion on the plane of the straight portion).
9 - 30
The following figure illustrates the differences in the dimensioning of the two types of ears. 90 deg tab Versus Variable Ear Dimensions
90 deg tab Variable ear
Length1 Length2
Tweak Features
Overall height = 70
length1+ length2 = 70
Sketching the Ear Section

When you sketch an ear, remember the following rules: The sketching plane must be perpendicular to the surface to which the ear will be attached. The section for the ear must be open with the endpoints aligned to the surface to which the ear will be attached. The entities that are attached to the surface must be parallel to each other, perpendicular to the surface, and long enough to accommodate the bend.
The radius of the bend is measured from the sketching plane out of the screen.
Tweak Features
9 - 31
The following figure illustrates how to dimension an ear to the part. Dimensioning an Ear to the Part
Straight edge
Parallel lines perpendicular to edge
Pro/ENGINEER bends the ear at the specified angle, measured from the surface from which the ear is extruded. The ear bends towards you, out of the screen, and is extruded into the screen to the specified thickness.
9 - 32
The following figure illustrates the bend dimensions of an ear feature. Ear Feature Bend Dimensions
Tweak Features
Bending line (normal to page)
Lip Feature
You can create a lip feature on mating surfaces of two different parts in an assembly to ensure that the interlock geometry is the same on both parts. A lip is created as a protrusion on one part and a cut on another. A lip is not an assembly featureit must be created on each part separately. You can set appropriate connections between dimensions on both parts through relations and parameters. A lip is constructed by offsetting the mating surface along the selected edges. The edges must form a continuous contour, either open or closed. The top (or bottom) surface of the lip copies the geometry of the mating surface; you can draft the side surface with respect to the lip direction. Lip direction (the direction of the offset) is determined by the normal to a reference plane. The draft angle is the angle between the normal to the reference plane and the side surface of the lip.
Tweak Features
9 - 33
The following figure shows the lip feature parameters. Lip Feature Parameters
This surface repeats the shape of the mating surface. Lip offset Draft angle Mating surface (could be reference plane too)
Selected edge
Side offset
Usually, the reference plane is coincident with the lip (mating) surface. You must select a separate reference plane in the following cases: The mating surface is not a plane. You want the lip creation direction not to be normal to the mating plane. The lip feature will then be distorted.
At any point of lip feature creation, the normal to the mating surface must be either coincident, or form a slight angle with the normal to the reference plane. The closer the normals, the less the lip geometry distortion. How to Create a Lip Feature 1. Choose Lip from the TWEAK menu. 2. Select adjacent edges to form a lip. You can select edges using Single, Chain, or Loop (the same way as for a round feature). Choose Done when you have finished. 3. Select the mating surface (the surface to be offset). 4. Enter the lip offset from the selected surface. 5. Enter the side offset (from the selected edges to the draft surface). 6. Select the drafting reference plane. 7. Enter the draft angle.
9 - 34
8. Pro/ENGINEER creates the lip feature (see the following figure). Lip Feature Creation
Tweak Features
Enter the positive offset from the mating surface. Select this plane. Select this surface (and edges).
Enter the negative offset from the mating surface.
Toroidal Bend
The ToroidalBend option bends solids, non-solid surfaces, or datum curves into toroidal (revolved) shapes. For example, you could use this option to create an automobile tire from a flat solid object. The feature creates two bends at the same time. The first bend is a sketched section that defines the sectional curvature of the toroid shape. The second bend is determined by two parallel planes that define the radius of the toroid.
Tweak Features
9 - 35
The following figure illustrates how to use the ToroidalBend option to create a tire. Sample Tire Creation
Added optional cuts for treads
Solid base object
Object with optional features
Toroidal bend feature
How to Create a Toroidal Bend Feature 1. Choose Tweak from the SOLID menu. 2. Choose ToroidalBend from the TWEAK menu. 3. The system displays the OPTIONS menu. Choose Variable, 90, 180, 270, or 360 to indicate the angle of the bend. Next, indicate whether to extrude on one side or both sides of the sketching plane, then choose Done. 4. The system displays the DEFINE BEND menu with the following options: AddSelect objects to bend. RemoveUnselect objects from the bend feature.
9 - 36
5. Choose Add and pick the surfaces, curves, or any other objects to include in the bend. The features selected to be bent can be of any type or shape (such as solid, non-solid surface, or datum curve). If you choose to bend datum curves, they are displayed in both the bent fashion and in their original location. These features, if included in the toroidal bend feature, must not exceed the geometric boundaries of the surface to be bent. For example, if the datum curve (circle) in the following figure exceeds the bounds of the base solid, the toroidal bend will fail. Note: To modify the selected features, you must pick on the displayed original unbent feature (see the following figure). If you use Query Select in the GET SELECT menu, you can pick on the toroidal bend and choose Next to display the original solid or quilt, highlighted in red. Sample of Applying Toroidal Bend
Sketched curve and surface included in the toroidal bend Datum curve This original entity must be selected to modify. Datum surface After toroidal bend of 360 degrees
Tweak Features
Bent instances of curve and surface
6. Choose Done to finish picking the objects to bend. 7. Pick a sketching plane and a sketcher reference plane to sketch the sectional bend profile. 8. Sketch a chain of tangent entities with open ends that resembles the desired shape of the cross section of the toroid and dimension it to the existing geometry. The entity can be any geometric entity (spline, arc, line, and so on). See Step 3 in the following figure.
Tweak Features
9 - 37
Create a sketcher coordinate system and dimension it to the existing geometry. The X-vector of the coordinate system defines a neutral plane in the bent object. This point does not have to lie on the geometric entity, but for geometric clarity, it is recommended. See Step 3 in the following figure. The neutral plane defines the theoretical plane of zero deformation (elongation or compression) along the sectional thickness of the bent material. The material that lies outside the plane is elongated to compensate for the bend deformation, and the material that lies on the inside of the bend is compressed to accommodate the deformation (see the following figure). Neutral Plane Defined by an X-Vector
Region of elongation deformation Neutral plane (no deformation)
Region of compressed deformation
9. Regenerate the section and return to the default view of the model. 10. Pick two parallel planes to pull toward each other and define the radius of the bend. These parallel planes only define the radius of the toroid; all geometry will be bent, regardless of the plane location. The section that you sketched in Step 7 will be visible while you do this. For a 360 degree bend, these planes meet. In the bend used to create the tire in the illustrations, the plane at each end of the solid feature was chosen. 11. Pro/ENGINEER creates the toroidal bend.
9 - 38
The following figure illustrates the steps for creating a toroidal bend. Creating a Toroidal Bend 1. Base object.
Cuts added to base object (optional) Sketching plane (DTM 3)
2. Select the features to bend.
Surface picked to bend (includes cuts)
Tweak Features
3. Sketch the bend profile and

the axis of revolution. Sketched 3-point arc Sketcher coordinate system
Spinal Bend
The Spinal Bend option bends a solid or quilt about a curved spine by continuously repositioning cross-sections along a curve. Planar cross-sections perpendicular to an axis are repositioned perpendicular to the trajectory with no distortion. All compression or distortion is done longitudinally along the trajectory.
Tweak Features
9 - 39
How to Create a Spinal Bend 1. Choose Spinal Bend from the TWEAK menu. 2. Specify the feature attributes by choosing from the OPTIONS menu. The options are as follows: Sketch SpineSketch the spine (trajectory). Select SpineSelect an edge or chain of edges to define a spine trajectory. For more information on the CHAIN menu, see Chain Processing on page 3 - 33. No Prop CtrlDo not adjust the resulting geometry. SecProp CtrlAdjust the resulting geometry to control the distribution of a varying cross section mass property along the spine. See the Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER manual for more information. This property is defined by relations. Choose one of the following options: LinearThe section property varies linearly between the values at the start and end points. GraphThe section property varies, per the graph values, between the values at the start and end points.
The resulting spinal bend feature is defined by the same family of cross-sections, regardless of whether you choose No Prop Ctrl, SecProp Ctrl and Linear, or SecProp Ctrl and Graph. However, the distribution of the cross-sections in the spinal bend differs for each of these choices. 3. Select a solid or quilt feature to bend (see the following figure). You can bend only one quilt feature, or you can bend all the solid features in the part. If you select a solid feature, the system makes the original solid feature invisible after the spinal bend feature is created. However, the feature and its geometry can still be selected. If you select a quilt feature, the original quilt feature remains visible. 4. Sketch or select the spine, per the selection made in Step 2. The spine must be C1 continuous (tangent). If the spine is not also C2 continuous (curvature continuous), the feature surfaces might not be tangent. If you chose SecProp Ctrl, the plane that passes through the start point of the spine, and is normal to the spine, must intersect the original quilt or solid feature. 5. If you chose No Prop Ctrl, go to Step 8.
9 - 40
6. If you chose SecProp Ctrl, Pro/ENGINEER displays the SKETCHER menu. Sketch the coordinate system to be used in the calculation of cross section properties. This coordinate system will be projected onto the plane of each cross section. 7. Enter feature relations that define the symbol SEC_PROP as a function of the mass properties of the original quilt or solid cross-sections. For more information on relations, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER. The right side of the relations can include the following: AREA CENTROID_X, CENTROID_YCoordinates, with respect to the sketched coordinate system, of the center of area of the cross section IXX, IXY, IYYPlanar moments of inertia of the cross section, with respect to the sketched coordinate system IXX_AT_CENTROID, IXY_AT_CENTROID, IYY_AT_CENTROIDPlanar moments of inertia of the cross section, with respect to a coordinate system at the centroid and with axes parallel to the specified coordinate system PRINCIPAL1Greater planar principal moment of inertia PRINCIPAL2Lesser planar principal moment of inertia
Tweak Features
8. Use the SETUP PLANE menu to specify a second plane, which must be parallel to the first, to define the volume of the original quilt or solid to be bent. If you chose the SecProp Ctrl option, both planes must intersect the original quilt or solid. The system creates and displays the first plane, which defines the volume. It is normal to the spine, passes through the start point of the spine, and can be referenced when you are creating the second plane. 9. If you chose Graph, select an existing graph feature (see Graphs on page 3 - 59). The graph must pass through the points (0, 0) and (1, 1) and must be monotonically non-decreasing (that is, with no horizontal tangent to the curve) in the interval 0 to 1. 10. If you chose SecProp Ctrl, the system places each cross section of the original quilt or solid at the trajectory parameter (trajpar) on the spine, according to the following formula: F(p) F(p0) G(Trajpar) = -------------------------------F(p1) F(p0)
Tweak Features
9 - 41
In this equation, the variables are as follows: G()If you chose Graph, this is the function defined by the reference graph feature. If you chose Linear, this is the function defined by trajpar itself (the identity function). F()The cross section property function defined by feature relations. pThe properties of the original quilt or solid cross section (AREA, CENTROID_X, and so on). p0, p1The properties of the first and last cross sections defined by the two planes specified in Step 8.
The following figure illustrates a linear spinal bend. Linear Spinal Bend with SEC_PROP = AREA
Feature to be bent
Spine
Before Spinal Bend
After Spinal Bend
Cosmetic Mesh View of Linear Spinal Bend
9 - 42
If you use Query Select in a GET SELECT menu, you can pick on the spinal bend and choose Next to display the original solid/quilt, highlighted in red (see the following figure). Modifying or Redefining a Spinal Bend
Original feature appears in red.Pick the spinal bend . feature
Tweak Features
(1) Linear spinal bend after selecting to redefine.
(2) Redefine spinal bend to use Section Property Control and Graph.
(4) Spinal bend redefined as No Prop Control.
(3) Cosmetic mesh view after redefining section property control to Graph.
Using the REDEFINE menu, you can redefine the following for spinal bends: AttributesRedefine the attribute value SecProp Ctrl or NoProp Ctrl; Linear or Graph. SectionRedefine the spine, if sketched; redefine the cross section, if you chose SecProp Ctrl. ReferencesReselect the quilt, graph, end plane, or cross section properties.
Tweak Features
9 - 43
How to Redefine the Attributes of a Spinal Bend 1. Choose Redefine, Attributes. 2. If you next choose SecProp Ctrl, Pro/ENGINEER displays a default coordinate system and asks you to sketch a coordinate system for the first section. You can either align the sketched coordinate system to the default or offset it. Regenerate the section.
How to redefine the references 1. Choose Redefine, References. 2. Choose one of the following SPINAL BEND menu options: Quilt/SolidRedefine the spinal bend to be a quilt or solid. End PlaneRedefine the second plane picked in Step 8. EquationsRedefine the relations. GraphRedefine the graph feature.
9 - 44
10
Creating Surface Features
With a license for Pro/SURFACE, you can create non-solid surfaces using some of the same techniques as when creating solid geometry, plus more sophisticated surface modeling methods. Using surface features, you can create a patchwork of connected surfaces that is referred to as a quilt in Pro/ENGINEER documentation. Topic Definition of a Quilt Defining a New Surface Feature Creating a Quilt by Copy Creating a Fillet Quilt Page 10 - 2 10 - 5 10 - 14 10 - 21
10 - 1
Definition of a Quilt
In Pro/ENGINEER, when you create or manipulate non-solid surfaces, you are working with quilts. A quilt represents a patchwork of connected non-solid surfaces. A quilt may consist of a single surface or a collection of surfaces (see the following figure). Quilts with a Single and Multiple Surfaces
Extruding this arc ....
Creates this single surface quilt. Surfaces of the quilt
Extruding this curve .... Creates this multiple surface quilt.
A quilt contains information describing the geometries of all the surfaces that compose a quilt, and information on how quilt surfaces are stitched (joined or intersected). A part can contain several quilts. Creating or manipulating quilts is done through the use of a surface feature. To access the surface feature functionality, choose Surface from the FEAT CLASS menu.
Naming a Quilt
You can assign a name to an entire quilt or an individual surface using the command sequence Set Up/Name/Other. Then, a named quilt or surface can be selected by its name with the Sel By Menu option in the GET SELECT menu.
Major Surface Operations

Selecting Surface from the FEAT CLASS menu displays either the QUILT SURF or SRF OPTS menu, depending on whether surfaces or curves exist in your model. If no surface features or datum curves exist in the model, the system displays the SRF OPTS menu, which allows you to create a new surface. For a description of the options, see Surface Forms on page 10 - 5. If surface features are already present in your model, Pro/ENGINEER displays the QUILT SURF menu with the following options: NewCreate a new surface. For a basic procedure, see Creating a Surface Feature on page 10 - 5. MergeMerge two quilts into a single quilt. See Merging Quilts on page 12 - 2. TrimTrim a quilt. See Trimming Surfaces of Quilts on page 12 - 5. Creating Surface Features ExtendExtend surfaces of a quilt. See Extending Surfaces of Quilts on page 12 - 10. TransformTranslate, rotate, or mirror datum curves and surfaces. See Transforming Quilts on page 12 - 21. DraftModify a quilt by adding a draft angle to its surfaces. Draft features can be applied only to inner quilt surfaces. The procedure for creating drafts is the same as for solid features (Solid/Tweak/Draft). See Drafts on page 9 - 3. Note: The resulting drafted surfaces must remain inner surfaces. Area OffsetCreate new surfaces by offsetting an area of a quilt. The procedure for creating area offsets is the same as for creating solid features (Solid/Tweak/Offset). See Offset on page 9 - 28 for more information. Draft OffsetCreate a surface offset with drafted side surfaces. Note: If your model does not contain surfaces but has datum curves, the QUILT SURF menu displays only two options: New and Transform. You can redefine a surface feature as any other feature using the Redefine option (see Redefining Features on page 16 - 14 for more information).
10 - 3
Standard feature operations can be performed on surface features in the same way as on regular solid features. For example, a surface feature can be suppressed, patterned, put on a layer, deleted, and so on.
Displaying Quilts
One-sided, or outer edges of quilts, are displayed in yellow. Two-sided, or inner edges of quilts, are displayed in magenta.
Blanking Quilts
To turn off the display of individual quilts, you can place them on a layer and then blank the layer. Note: You can blank individual quilts in a merge feature. If the first quilt in the merge is blanked, the whole merge is blanked. If only the second quilt is blanked, the merge will not be blanked.
Assigning Colors to Quilts and Surfaces

You can choose a color from the existing user-defined colors and assign this color to a specified side of the quilt or surface. To assign colors to the quilt, choose View > Model Setup > Color & Appearances. Assign the color using the Appearances dialog box and select Surface as the object type. Each side can be colored differently, and it is only visible when shaded edges do not change color with this method.
Shading Quilts
To shade an entire model, choose View > Shade. You can set the shading by default by using View > Model Display > Shading, or by setting the shade_surface_feat configuration option. For information on plotting shaded surfaces, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Meshing Quilts and Surfaces

You can mesh individual surfaces or an entire quilt by choosing View > Advanced > Mesh Surface. In the Mesh dialog box, choose the object typeSurface or Quilt.
10 - 4
Defining a New Surface Feature

You can create a surface feature before creating the first solid feature after creating three orthogonal datum planes as the base feature (see Creating Datums as the Base Feature on page 1 - 4). The following sections describe how to create a new surface feature.
Creating a Surface Feature

How to Create a Surface Feature 1. From the FEAT CLASS menu, choose Surface. 2. If this is the first surface feature to be created, the system displays the SRF OPTS menu. Otherwise, choose New from the QUILT SURF menu. 3. Select the desired option from the SRF OPTS menu (see Surface Forms on page 10 - 5). Create the feature according to the procedure for the feature form option that you specified.
Surface Forms
You can create surface features using any of the following option in the SRF OPTS menu: ExtrudeCreate a quilt by extruding the sketched section to a specified depth in the direction normal to the sketching plane. See Creating an Extruded Feature on page 5 - 13 for complete information on creating extruded features. When you use Up To Surface as a depth option, the new surface can be extruded to planar surfaces, a quilt, or a datum plane that is parallel to the sketching plane. To select a quilt surface, use Query Sel. The new surface must not exceed the boundaries of the terminating surface. RevolveCreate a quilt by rotating the sketched section a specified angle around the first centerline sketched in the section. The rotation angle can be specified as 90, 180, 270, 360, UpTo Pnt/Vtx, or UpTo Plane. See Creating a Revolved Feature on page 5 - 16. SweepCreate a quilt by sweeping a sketched section along a specified trajectory. You can sketch the trajectory, or use an existing datum curve. See Sweep on page 6 - 2.
10 - 5
BlendCreate a smooth quilt connecting several sketched sections. Parallel blends can only be Blind. You can also create Rotational or General blends (if you have a Pro/FEATURE license), or blends From File. See Blend on page 6 - 8. FlatCreate a planar quilt by sketching its boundaries. See Creating a Flat Surface Feature on page 10 - 7. OffsetCreate a quilt offset from a quilt or surface. See Creating Surfaces by Offsetting on page 10 - 8. CopyCreate a quilt by copying existing quilts or surfaces. Specify a selection method and select surfaces to copy. Pro/ENGINEER creates the surface feature directly on top of the selected surfaces. See Creating a Quilt by Copy on page 10 - 14. FilletCreate a new quilt from the geometry of a surface-to-surface round between the surfaces of a solid model or quilts. See Creating a Fillet Quilt on page 10 - 21. AdvancedAccess the ADV FEAT OPT menu, allowing you to create surfaces using complex feature definitions. See Advanced Features on page 6 - 23 for information on using the ADV FEAT OPT menu options Var Sec Swp, Swept Blend, Helical Swp, Sect to Srfs, Srfs to Srfs, From File, and TangentToSrf. For a description of the Free Form option, see the Freeform Manipulation chapter. For a description of the Boundaries option, see Creating a Quilt by Defining Its Boundarieson page 11 - 2. For a description of the TangentToSurf option, see Creating Quilts with the TangentToSrf Option on page 11 - 25.
Attributes Unique to Surfaces

You can specify whether a surface feature will have open or closed ends and whether swept blends and variable section sweeps are joined to existing quilts or unattached. The following sections describe these topics in detail.
Open or Closed Ends

When creating a surface feature with the Extrude, Rotate, Sweep, or Blend option from the SRF OPTS menu, you can create a quilt that describes a closed volume by capping the ends of the feature, or you can leave the ends open.
10 - 6
Indicate whether you want to create an open or closed volume surface feature by selecting one of the following options from the ATTRIBUTES menu: Open EndsCreate a surface feature without closing the ends. For example, an extruded circular section results in an open-ended tube with the open ends displayed with yellow edges. Capped EndsCreate a surface feature with a closed volume. For example, an extruded circular section would result in a closed cylinder so all edges of the quilt are two-sided, shown in magenta. Note that the section must be closed for this option.
Joined or Unattached Sweeps

A sweep created along the outer edges of another quilt, or along datum curves created on these edges may be joined with the reference quilt. A swept blend can be joined along the origin trajectory. Creating Surface Features Once you have selected a valid reference edge or a datum curve, the system displays the SRFS JOIN menu with the following options: JoinJoin the surface feature with the existing quilt. No JoinCreate a surface feature that is not attached to the existing quilt.
When sketching the section of a variable section sweep, make sure at least one section entity has its endpoint at the section origin (the intersection of centerlines). This produces a common edge along which the two quilts will be joined. You can redefine the Join/No Join attribute when you redefine the features trajectory with the Modify option.
Creating a Flat Surface Feature

The Flat option enables you to create a planar surface feature of any shape. Note: In order for you to be able to modify the location of the flat surface by changing the location or orientation of the sketching plane, use an offset or angular datum plane as its sketching plane.
10 - 7
How to Create a Flat Surface Feature 1. Choose Flat and Done from the SRF OPTS menu. 2. The Flat Surface dialog box appears, listing feature elements. 3. Select or create the sketching and reference planes. 4. Sketch a closed section for the surface. 5. Choose OK from the dialog box.
Creating Surfaces by Offsetting

The Offset option in the SRF OPTS menu enables you to create a surface feature, which is offset from the solid surfaces or quilt and has the same shape as the original surfaces. A sample surface offset appears below. Creating an Offset Surface
You can specify the offset method by defining the Offset Type element in the dialog box. For information on the benefits and limitations of different offset methods, see Using Different Offset Methods on page 10 - 10. How to Create Offset Surfaces 1. Choose Offset and Done from the SRF OPTS menu. 2. A dialog box appears, listing elements to be defined: SurfaceSpecify the surfaces from which to offset. DistanceSpecify the offset distance. Offset Type(Optional) Specify the offset method. By default, the system offsets normal to the original surfaces. Leave Out(Optional) Leave out failed surfaces or any other selected surfaces from the offset operation.
10 - 8
3. Select a surface or quilt to offset. 4. Enter a distance value for the direction indicated. You can enter a negative value to offset in the opposite direction. Note: The offset distance should be less than a radius of curvature of the original surfaces. 5. If you want to change the default offset method, choose the Offset Type element and Define. Note: Changing the offset type from Normal to Surf to Controlled Fit or Auto Fit and vice versa will cause all children of the offset feature to fail. The OFFSET TYPE menu lists the following options: Normal to Surf(Default) Offset the surface normal to the original surface. Controlled FitCreate a best-fit offset by scaling the original surface about the specified coordinate system and translating along the specified axes. The system prompts you to select a coordinate system. Once you select the coordinate system, the system adds the corresponding element, Scaling Csys, to the dialog box. The system prompts you to specify the direction along which the scaled geometry can be translated with respect to the selected coordinate system. In the TRANSLATION menu, place a check mark in front of the directions that you want to specify, X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis, and then choose Done. Auto FitThe system scales the surfaces with respect to the automatically determined coordinate system and translates them as necessary. No additional user input is required.
6. Choose Preview from the dialog box. 7. If the system cannot construct geometry with the offset type Normal To Surf, you can exclude some surfaces by defining the Leave Out element. For details, see Leaving Out Surfaces During the Offset Operation on page 10 - 13. 8. To complete the feature creation, click OK in the dialog box.
10 - 9
Using Different Offset Methods

The following figure illustrates the difference in the offset geometry created by using the Normal To Surf, Controlled Fit, and Auto Fit methods. In this example, the Controlled Fit method allows you to select the coordinate system for translation and restrict the translation of the scaled geometry along the Y-axis so the resulting quilt terminates at the same level as the original quilt. Notice that the resulting radius of curvature differs depending on the offset type used. Using Different Offset Methods
Original quilt
Using Normal to Surf Using Controlled Fit Using Auto Fit
Offsets from the original quilt Using Controlled Fit Using Normal to Surf Using Auto Fit
10 - 10
Consider the following recommendations for using the offset methods: If Normal To Surf fails, use Auto Fit. The Auto Fit method automatically calculates the best directions to translate the surfaces so they appear as original ones. However, this method does not guarantee the uniform offset normal to surfaces. If the results of Auto Fit are not satisfactory, use Controlled Fit to aid in calculation. It is recommended to use the methods that involve scaling of geometry (Auto Fit and Controlled Fit) with convex geometry only. For non-convex geometry, the offset distance may vary, as shown in the next figure. Offsetting Complex Surface Shapes
Resulting surface Resulting surface
Original Surface
Using Auto Fit
Using Normal To Surf
When you use Auto Fit or Controlled Fit to create an offset, the system will attempt to make the distance between the original and the offset quilt no less than the input value. The location of the coordinate system that you select for the Controlled Fit option affects how the quilt is scaled. In the following example, the offset quilt is created using the Controlled Fit option with the translation restricted along the X- and Y-axes. In the example a, scaling is done with respect to the CS0 coordinate system; in the example b, scaling is done with respect to the CS3 coordinate system. Notice that the location of the coordinate system determines which edges remain coplanar.
10 - 11
Selecting the Coordinate System for the Controlled Fit Option
Offset quilt
Original quilt
Because translation is not allowed along the X- and Y-axes, the edges and vertices that lie in the plane that goes through the origin of the CS0 coordinate system (the YZand XZ-planes, respectively) remain fixed.
These vertices are coplanar because translation is not allowed along the X-axis.
Original quilt
These vertices are coplanar because translation is not allowed along the Y-axis.
a) Offset created using CS0
Because translation is not allowed along the X- and Y-axis, the edges and vertices that lie in the plane that goes through the origin of the CS3 coordinate system (the YZand XZ- planes, respectively) remain fixed. These vertices are coplanar because translation is not allowed along the X-axis. Original quilt These vertices are coplanar because translation is not allowed along the Y-axis.
b) Offset created using CS3
10 - 12
Leaving Out Surfaces During the Offset Operation

Define the Leave Out element of the offset feature if you want to exclude some surfaces from the offset operation. This may be useful when the original geometry is too curved and the offset feature cannot be successfully created. Alternatively, you can use the Auto Fit option to let the system create an approximate offset. How to Define the Leave Out Element 1. If the system cannot construct geometry normal to the original surface, you can exclude the surfaces that are too curved. Select the Leave Out element in the dialog box and click Define. 2. The system highlights the failed surfaces (those that are too curved) in green, and asks you if you want to exclude them. 3. Choose Confirm from the CONFIRMATION menu to exclude the highlighted surfaces. 4. Additionally, you can add other surfaces to the leave out set by using options in the SURF SELECT menu. When finished selecting surfaces to be excluded, choose Done from the SURF SELECT menu. 5. Choose Preview or OK from the dialog box. An example of leaving out surfaces appears next. Leaving out Surfaces in the Offset Feature Offset surface feature Creating Surface Features
This surface was left out.
10 - 13
Creating a Quilt by Copy

The Copy option in the SRF OPTS menu enables you to create a quilt directly on top of selected surfaces. The resulting quilt contains surfaces that are the same shape and size as their parent surfaces. How to Access the Surface Copy Functionality 1. Choose Surface, New. 2. Choose Copy and Done from the SRF OPTS menu. 3. A dialog box appears, listing elements for the surface copy feature: SurfacesDefine surfaces to be copied. See Selecting Surfaces. Excld Loop(Optional) Exclude loops from the surfaces to be copied. This option is used with the surfaces that contain several outer loops (i.e., islands). See Excluding Loops from the Surface Selection on page 10 - 19. Fill Loop(Optional) Fill inner contours in the surfaces to be copied. See Filling Loops on page 10 - 20.
4. Define each feature element as described in the sections that follow. Once all elements are defined, choose OK from the dialog box. Upon completion, the system highlights the edges of the surface copy feature: outer (i.e., one-sided) edgesin yellow, and inner edgesin magenta.
Selecting Surfaces
The following procedure explains how to select surfaces for an operation. How to Define Surfaces to Be Copied 1. When you start the surface copy operation, the first step is to collect surfaces with the Include command. There are various methods that you may use singularly or in combination to indicate to the system which surfaces you want to collect. 2. If you need to exclude some of the surfaces that you collected with the Include command, unselect them with the Exclude command. 3. If you need to redefine any of the previous actions, use the Redefine command.
10 - 14
4. Additionally, you may need to review the collected surfaces or delete some of them from the selection. When defining surfaces to be copied, you will use the following options in the SURF SELECT menu: IncludeInclude feature references in the current selection by using options in the SURF OPTIONS menu. See Using the Include Command on page 10 - 15. ExcludeExclude feature references from the current selection by using options in the SURF OPTIONS menu. See Using the Exclude Command on page 10 - 18. RedefineRedefine feature references. See Using the Redefine Command on page 10 - 19. DeleteDelete all references specified during a particular action. Specify the action that you want to delete by selecting from the SURF ACTS menu. For example, if you have included surfaces for copying using the Indiv Surf option, Delete will unselect all the surfaces that were selected with this action. Delete AllDelete all references that you specified when collecting surfaces for the current feature. When prompted to confirm your request, choose Confirm or Cancel from the CONFIRMATION menu. ShowShow all feature references. When showing surfaces selected for the operation, choose a display method from the SHOW OPTS menu: WireframeShow selected surface in wireframe. MeshMesh selected surfaces.
Using the Include Command

To include surfaces in the surface copy operation, choose Include from the SURF SELECT menu and choose a desired method from the SURF OPTIONS menu: Indiv SurfSelect individual surfaces.
10 - 15
Surf & BndSelect surfaces by defining a seed surface and bounding surfaces. The Seed Surface option in the SURF&BND menu is active by default so you can pick the seed surface. Once the seed surface is specified, you need to define bounding surfaces using the Boundary option in the SURF&BND menu. Bounding surfaces are not included in the set. Choose a desired method for defining the surface boundaries from the BND METHOD menu: Indiv SurfsSelect surfaces that will act as bounding surfaces. Loop SurfsSelect bounding surfaces by defining loop surfaces. Pick a surface to define a loop. If the picked surface contains more than one loop, the system will ask you to select an edge that will indicate the desired loop. All the surfaces that lie along this loop will become bounding surfaces.
Loop SurfsSelect surfaces by defining loop surfaces. Pick a surface to define a loop. If the picked surface contains more than one loop, the system will ask you to select an edge that will indicate the desired loop. All the surfaces that lie along this loop will be collected. Quilt SurfsSelect a quilt. All surfaces in the selected quilt will be collected. Solid SurfsSelect a part or assembly component whose surfaces you want to copy. All surfaces in the selected solid will be collected. DoneAccept all selected surfaces. All selected surfaces highlight in blue.
10 - 16
Copying Part Surfaces

Copy surfaces of this solid feature to create a quilt
Using the Indiv Surfs Option

Select these surfaces
Using the Surf & Bnd Option

Select this surface as the seed surface
Select these surfaces
Select this surface as the bounding surface
In both cases, the resulting quilt is created on top of the solid feature.
10 - 17
Using the Exclude Command

If you need to exclude entire surfaces from the selection, choose Exclude from the Surf Select menu and use options in the SURF OPTIONS menu to select surfaces that need to be excluded from the surface copy operation. The surface collection mechanism is the same as that for including surfaces. Once all surfaces are selected properly, choose Done from the SURF
SELECT menu.
The following figure illustrates how the exclude operation works. In this example, surfaces were initially selected by using the Loop Surfs option. Then, one surface was excluded from the selection by using Exclude > Indiv Surfs. Excluding a Surface from the Surface Selection
a) Surfaces indicated by arrows were selected with the Loop Surfs option.
b) Choose Exclude and unselect one surface using Indiv Surfs.
c) The resulting surfaces, collected for the surface copy operation, are meshed.
10 - 18
Using the Redefine Command

After you select Redefine, you need to specify the action that you want to redefine by selecting from the SURF ACTS menu. This menu lists actions that may be changed in order to alter the results of the surface collection. The name of the entry will indicate the type and order of the action. For example, an entry Surf&Bnd Inc 1 in the SURF ACTS menu indicates the first Include action that was performed using the Surf & Bnd option. As you move the cursor over the items in the Surf Acts menu, the corresponding selections will highlight in the model window. Once you selected the action, proceed to redefine it using the applicable menu options. When redefining the results of actions performed with the Surf & Bnd option, consider the following rules: Selecting a new seed surface automatically deletes the old one. When you redefine the bounding surfaces selected with the Indiv Surfs option, you can continue adding new surfaces with the Pick or Query Sel option, or you can unselect any of the existing bounding surfaces using Unsel Item. When you redefine a bounding loop selected with the option Loop Surfs, old loop surfaces are automatically removed so you can define new loop surfaces. When you change the method used to define the boundary, all previously selected references will become obsolete, and the system will ask you to confirm their deletion.
Excluding Loops from the Surface Selection

If you want to exclude some of the surface loops from the selection, select the Excld Loop element in the dialog box and choose Define. When the Feature Refs menu appears, the Add option is active by default. Pick an edge that belongs to the loop that you want to exclude. Choose Done Sel and Done Refs. Excluding loops can be useful when a surface has multiple outer loops. For example (see the following figure), if a cut was added to a surface, Pro/ENGINEER will still regard the resulting surfaces as one, and select all surface loops which belonged to the original surface. You can then selectively exclude/restore individual surface loops.
10 - 19
Excluding Surfaces
Original surface Cut dividing the surface When you select this surface both pieces of the original surface will highlight.
Select this edge to define the loop bounding the surface to be unselected.
As a result, only this surface is selected for copy.
Filling Loops
Filling loops in seed surfaces must be done before you start selecting surfaces with the Surf & Bnd option. If you want to fill loops that exist in the surfaces selected for copying, select the Fill Loop element in the dialog box and choose Define. The GATHER FILL menu lists the following methods of filling loops: AllFill all inner contours that belong to the selected surfaces. LoopsFill a selected inner contour. Pick an edge that belongs to the contour that you want to fill.
To finalize the filling operation, choose Done Refs from the FEATURE REFS menu.
10 - 20
Creating a Fillet Quilt

Using the Fillet option from the SRF OPTS menu, you can create a surface-to-surface round between solid surfaces or quilts as a quilt. To create a fillet, choose Fillet and Done from the SRF OPTS menu, and create a fillet quilt as you create general rounds (see the Rounds chapter). Note the following differences for quilts created with the Fillet option: The default reference type is Surf-Surf. The default attachment type is New Quilt.
10 - 21
11
Creating Advanced Surface Features
This chapter explains how to create surface features using advanced modeling techniques. Topic Advanced Surface Types Creating a Quilt by Defining Its Boundaries Creating Quilts with the TangentToSrf Option Page 11 - 2 11 - 2 11 - 25
11 - 1
Advanced Surface Types

To access advanced surface types, choose Advanced from the SRF OPTS menu. The ADV FEAT OPT menu lists the following options: Swept BlendCreate a quilt using a swept blend geometry. See Swept Blends on page 6 - 38. Helical SwpCreate a quilt using the helical sweep geometry. See Helical Sweep on page 6 - 47. BoundariesCreate a quilt from its boundaries. See Creating a Quilt by Defining Its Boundaries on page 11 - 2. Sect to SrfsCreate a quilt as a blend from a section to tangent surfaces. See Section-to-Surfaces Blends on page 6 - 53. Srfs to SrfsCreate a quilt as a blend from a surface to tangent surfaces. See Surfaces-to-Surfaces Blends on page 6 - 54. From FileCreate a blend from file. See Importing Blends on page 6 - 55. TangentToSrfCreate a surface as a blend from a edge/curve to tangent surfaces. See Creating Quilts with the TangentToSrf Option on page 11 - 25. Free FormCreate a surface by dynamic manipulation. See the Freeform Manipulation chapter.
Creating a Quilt by Defining Its Boundaries

The Boundaries option in the ADV FEAT OPT menu allows you to create a surface feature by specifying its boundaries. The surface may be created in one of two ways: By blending datum curves, part edges, and vertices As a conic surface
Surface Types Created Using the Boundaries Option

When you choose Boundaries from the ADV FEAT OPT menu, the system displays the OPTIONS menu. The possible options are as follows: Blended SurfCreate a surface feature by specifying bounding curves, edges, or datum points in one or two directions.
11 - 2
Conic SurfCreate a conic surface by selecting two opposite boundaries and one control curve. Approx BlendCreate a blended surface using boundary curves or edges and additional curves. The system evaluates the curves or edges and creates a blended surface approximating the reference entities, enabling you to control the amount of deviation from the curves. N-Sided SurfCreate a blended surface from more than four bounding curves or edges.
Creating a Blended Surface

A blended surface is created between reference entities that define the surface in one or two directions. The first and last entities selected in each direction define the surface boundary. Adding more reference entities allows you to more fully define the surface shape. The following figures illustrate one- and two-directional blended surfaces. Creating a Surface Feature by Blending Curves in One Direction
1 2
Select these curves in order 1-2-3, or 3-2-1.
Resulting Surface
11 - 3
Creating a Surface Feature by Blending Curves in Both Directions Curves selected in the first direction
3 2
Curves selected in the second direction in order 1-2-3, or 3-2-1.
Resulting surface
How to Create a Blended Surface 1. Choose FEAT > Create > Surface > New > Advanced > Done. 2. Choose ADV FEAT OPT > Boundaries > Done > Blended Surf > Done. 3. The system displays a dialog box, listing elements of the surface feature. They are: CurvesSpecify geometrical references for this feature. Bndry Conds(Optional) Define Boundary Conditions. Control Pts(Optional) Specify blend control points. Bndry Inflnc(Optional) Define boundary influence on the surface shape. Advanced(Optional) Use advanced surface control tools. Stretch(Optional) Modify the surface shape by stretching. The Stretch option is available for the boundary blend only if a Boundary Condition is set to an option other than Free.
4. Proceed to specify the feature elements. For information on specifying reference entities, see Specifying Reference Entities on page 11 - 5. For information on specifying Boundary Conditions, see Defining Boundary Conditions on page 11 - 9.
11 - 4
For information on specifying blend control points, see Specifying Blend Control Points on page 11 - 12. For information on setting the side curve influence, see Defining the Boundary Influence Element on page 11 - 15. For information on setting the tangent inner edge condition, see Defining the Advanced Element on page 11 - 18. For information on how to stretch the surface, see Modifying the Surface Shape by Stretching on page 11 - 20. 5. Choose OK from the dialog box.
Specifying Reference Entities

The rules for selecting reference entities are as follows: Curves, part edges, datum points, and ends of curves or edges can be used as reference entities. In each direction, reference entities must be selected in consecutive order. For blended surfaces defined in two directions, the outer boundaries must form a closed loop. This means that the outer boundaries must intersect. If the boundaries do not terminate at the intersection points, the system automatically trims them and uses the relevant portion. If you want to use edges or more than one datum curve as one boundary, use the Chain option in the SELECT ITEM menu. Boundaries cannot be defined in the second direction only. For boundary blends in one direction, make sure to use the First Dir option. Curves selected for blending need not contain the same number of points.
An example of using all three types of reference entities for creating a boundary blend surface is shown in the next figure.
11 - 5
Reference Entities for Creating a Blended Surface

This surface was created using the Blended Surf option.
Select this point using the Point/Vertex option. Select this curve using the Curve option. Select this edge using the Chain option. Trim the edge at this point using Trim/Extend.
When you specify curves or edges defining the shape of the blended surface, the system remembers the order in which reference entities were selected and assigns an appropriate number to each chain. How to Select Reference Entities in the First or Second Direction 1. Start defining a surface as described in Steps 1 through 3 on page 11 - 4. 2. When you start specifying reference entities, the First Dir and Add Item options in the CRV_OPTS menu are highlighted by default. Select the entity type from the SELECT ITEM menu and start selecting reference items. The SELECT ITEM menu lists the following entity types: CurveSelect a simple or composite curve. After you select a curve, the system highlights it in blue. You can then continue selecting curves, or you can choose another entity type from the SELECT ITEM menu. Point/VertexSelect a datum point or the endpoint of a curve or edge. ChainSelect a chain of edges or curves using options in the CHAIN menu. After selecting a chain of entities, choose Done.
3. While specifying reference curves, you can use the following options in the CRV_OPTIONS menu: Add ItemAdd a new curve or chain of entities to the end of the reference list.
11 - 6
Remove ItemRemove a curve or chain of entities from the reference list by choosing from the SPECIFY menu. Redo ItemModify a selected curve or chain of entities by reselecting, or trimming or extending items. Select the curve or chain to be modified using the SPECIFY menu. Insert ItemInsert a curve or chain of entities in the reference list before the specified item. Show ItemShow all the items in the chain by choosing the name of the chain from the CRV_OPTIONS menu.
4. After you have specified reference entities in the first direction, you can start selecting entities in the second direction by choosing Second Dir from the CRV_OPTIONS menu. ...or... If you want to skip selecting reference entities in the second direction, choose Done Curves. 5. When you have finished selecting entities in the second direction, choose Done Curves from the CRV_OPTIONS menu. 6. Proceed to specify other feature elements.
Using Antitangent Curves as Surface Boundaries

Creating Advanced Surface Features You can create a boundary blend surface between two antitangent boundaries. The following figure shows two antitangent curves, trimmed at a common point. Notice that the angle between tangency vectors of the two curves is 180 degrees. Antitangent Boundaries
Tangency vector of Curve A Tangency vector of Curve B
180
Curve A
Curve B
Creating a blended surface using two antitangent curves will produce a surface as shown in the next figure.
11 - 7
Using Two Antitangent Curves as Surface Boundaries
Note: Specifying tangency conditions for both antitangent boundaries may create contradictory constraints for the resulting geometry. As a result, the feature may fail or produce a surface that does not comply with the specified tangency conditions. Working with Tangent Boundaries A blended surface feature cannot be created when bounding curves become tangent to each other. The following figure shows how to create a surface feature with this type of boundary.
11 - 8
Blending a Surface with Tangent Boundaries
You cannot create a surface through all the curves (marked with crosses) at one time, since these curves are tangent. The workaround is shown in steps 1 through 3, below.
Create a surface using these boundaries.
Create a surface using these curves and set tangency conditions.
Select this curve as the tangency boundary.
Select this surface to be tangent to. Repeat Step 2 for this side.
Defining Boundary Conditions

By setting Boundary Conditions, you can create blended surfaces that are tangent to adjacent references (quilts or solid surfaces), are normal to a reference surface or plane, or have continuous curvature across the boundary with another surface.
11 - 9
How to Define Boundary Conditions 1. From the dialog box, choose Bndry Conds and Define. 2. The BOUNDARY menu lists all surface boundaries. As you move the cursor over the boundary name, the corresponding boundary highlights in cyan. Choose the boundary for which you want to set Boundary Condition. 3. For the selected boundary, the system brings up a dialog with the Bndry Cond element selected for definition. 4. Select the type of Boundary Condition by choosing one of the following options in the BNDRY COND menu, followed by Done: FreeNo tangency conditions are set along the boundary. TangentThe blended surface is tangent to the reference surface along the boundary. NormalThe blended surface is normal to the reference surface or datum plane. Crvtr ContThe blended surface has curvature continuity across the boundary. For restrictions, see Restrictions for Using the Crvtr Cont Option on page 11 - 12.
5. For conditions other than Free, select reference surfaces, as described in Defining Surface References for Boundary Conditions, which follows. 6. When the boundary is defined, choose OK from the Boundary # dialog box. 7. Select another boundary from the BOUNDARY menu to continue setting Boundary Condition, or choose Done. 8. Define other optional feature elements or complete feature creation by choosing OK from the Blended Surface dialog box. Defining Surface References for Boundary Conditions When you define Boundary Conditions, the system attempts to select default references based on the boundaries specified. You can accept the system defaults, or you can select your own references by defining the Ref Type element in the Boundary # dialog box. Consider the following information about the Ref Type element: If Tangent or Crvtr Cont was specified and the boundary consists of a chain of one-sided edges or a curve from one-sided edges, the element Ref Type is set to Default, and the boundary automatically has the same reference surfaces as the one-sided edges.
11 - 10
If Normal was specified and the boundary consists of a sketched curve, the element Ref Type is set to Sketching Plane, and the boundary automatically has the same reference plane as the curve. If Normal was specified and the boundary consists of a chain of one-sided edges or a curve from one-sided edges, the element Ref Type is set to Default, and the boundary automatically has the same reference surfaces as the one-sided edges. For all other combinations of Boundary Conditions and boundaries, the element Ref Type is set to Selected Surface, and the ENTITY menu prompts you to select a reference surface/plane for each segment of the boundary.
To define Boundary Conditions for a multi-segment boundary, follow the procedure below. For a single-segment boundary, start with Step 2. How to Specify References for Conditions Other Than Free 1. For a multi-segment boundary, you must select reference surfaces for each boundary segment. Select a segment by choosing the entity name in the ENTITY menu. Notice that as you move the cursor over each entity name, the corresponding boundary segment highlights in cyan. 2. For the selected segment, the system tries to find a default reference surface and, if found, highlights it in red. You can accept the default, or you can select a different reference surface, as described in the next step. Note: If the system cannot find a default reference, it lets you pick your own, as if you chose the Select option from the SELECT REFS menu (see the next step). 3. To select a reference surface, other than the default one, choose the Ref Type element and click Define in the Boundary # dialog box. This brings up the REF TYPE menu. Choose one of these options, followed by Done: DefaultUse the system default reference. Sketch PlaneUse the curves sketching plane as the default reference. This option is available only for sketched datum curves. Creating Advanced Surface Features
11 - 11
SelectSelect a reference surface for each boundary segment. The system highlights the first boundary segment (or the entire one-segment boundary) so you can select the corresponding reference. Select reference surfaces for all boundary segments. Notice that as you move the cursor over the entity name, the corresponding boundary segment highlights in cyan.
4. After reference surfaces are specified for the entire boundary, choose OK from the Boundary # dialog box and continue setting Boundary Conditions for the remaining boundaries. Note: To reselect reference surfaces, redefine the Sel Ref element in the Boundary # dialog box. Restrictions for Using the Crvtr Cont Option Consider the following restrictions for using the Crvtr Cont option: You cannot specify Crvtr Cont for a multi-segment boundary. For a two-directional boundary blend, you can specify Crvtr Cont only in one direction. In addition, if you choose the Crvtr Cont option, then all curves in the other direction must also be curvature continuous to the surface.
Specifying Blend Control Points

You can control the shape of the surface by using blend control points. For curves in each direction, you can specify points to be connected with each other. Using blend control points may help you to implement the design intent more accurately by allowing you to create surfaces with an optimal number of edges and surfaces. By eliminating unnecessary small surfaces and extra edges, you can achieve a smoother surface shape and avoid undesirable twisting and stretching of surfaces.
11 - 12
The Effect of Using Blend Control Points
This is a small surface.
a) Blending without control points This surface feature consists of 5 surfaces.
b) Using blend control points This surface feature consists of 3 surfaces.
Two types of points can be selected as control points: Vertices of the datum curves or edges used to define the boundary Datum points that lie on the curve
For each set of blend control points, the system assigns a sequential number. How to Specify Blend Control Points in the First/Second Direction 1. After you have defined references for the blended surface, you can optionally define blend control points. 2. Choose the Control Pts element and click Define in the surface creation dialog box. 3. When you start specifying blend control points, the First Dir and Add Set options in the OPTIONS menu are highlighted by default. All vertices in the first boundary are highlighted in red. 4. Select a vertex or datum point from the first boundary. 5. All control points from the consecutive chain will highlight in red. Select a matching blend control point. 6. Continue likewise for all chains in the specified direction. After one set of blend control points is defined, you can specify another set of blend control points by choosing Add Set. You can also use the following options in the OPTIONS menu: Remove SetRemove a set of blend control points from the selection. Select the name of the set from the SPECIFY menu. Creating Advanced Surface Features
11 - 13
Redo SetRespecify points in the set. Select the name of the set from the SPECIFY menu. Show SetShow a set of blend control points. Select the name of the set from the SPECIFY menu.
7. To specify blend control points in the second direction, choose Second Dir from the OPTIONS menu and continue as in Steps 4 through 6. 8. When you have finished defining blend control points, choose Done from the OPTIONS menu. If you did not specify blend control points for a boundary blend surface with curves in one direction, and if the curves consist of only one spline entity with the same number of spline points, the BLEND TYPE menu will appear with the following options: Arc LengthThe curves will be blended using the general blending routine: the curves will be divided into equal pieces and blended piece-by-piece. PointwiseThe curves will be blended point-by-point: point 1 in the first curve will be connected with point 1 in the second curve, and so on. Note: If pointwise blending is not possible, the system uses the Arc Length method. You can select endpoints of curves/edges as blend control points to control the shape of the surface. When you specify corresponding points on each of the curves/edges in the same direction, the system connects them point-by-point and blends the corresponding portions between the points piece-by-piece.
11 - 14
Blending Multi-Segment Curves

First control point
Second control point Corresponding control points on each curve are connected; the rest of the curves are blended piece-by-piece.
Defining the Boundary Influence Element

You can control geometry of a blended surface so that the shape and properties of side curves are propagated into the shape of the blended surface. Note that although the system changes the geometry of the blended surface with respect to the specified side curve influence, in some cases the resulting changes may not be visually apparent without using surface visualization/analysis tools. When you enable side curve influence, the following occurs: In a one-directional blended surface, for boundary conditions specified as Tangent or Curvature Continuous, the system makes the side edges of the blended surface tangent to the side edges of the reference. The following figure demonstrates the effect of side curve influence on a one-direction blended surface.
11 - 15
Blended surface, created tangent or C2 to the reference surfaces Reference surfaces
These side curves are used for determining the shape of the side boundaries (curves a and b) of the blended surface.
d b
Side curves
Bounding curves
Side curves
Select these boundaries. b) Side Curve Influence is on.
a) Side Curve Influence is off.
In a two-directional blended surface, the system propagates the behavior of the side curves (that border the selected boundary) into the surface shape along the specified boundary (see the following figure).
Boundary 1
Curve a
Curve b
If you apply side curve influence to Boundary 1, then the shapes of the side curves a and b are propagated into the surface shape along Boundary 1.
The following figure demonstrates the effect of side curve influence on a two-direction blended surface. Note that the blended surface is shown with Porcupine curvature to illustrate the subtle differences in the surface shape. Notice that when side curve influence is used (example b in the following figure), porcupine curves maintain the same curvature pattern of the side curves longer than in the surface without side curve influence (example a in the next figure).
The Effect of Using the Side Curve Influence

The arrows point to the curves where SideCrvInflnc is specified. These curves properties are propagated into the blended surface.
Side curve influence specified a) No side curve influence b) Using side curve influence
Tips for Using the Side Curve Influence There may be cases when the system cannot create a blended surface without using the side curve influence. One such case appears in the following figure.
You must enable the side curve influence in order to create a blended surface with tangency between these two parallel planes. Side curves
You can create this blended surface only with the side curve influence applied. Blended surface
Bounding curves
11 - 17
Enabling the Side Curve Influence The following procedure explains how to set side curve influence. How to Enable Side Curve Influence 1. Choose the Bndry Inflnc element and click Define in the Blended Surface dialog box. 2. Select a boundary by choosing its name from the BOUNDARY menu. Notice that as you move the cursor over each boundary name, the corresponding boundary highlights in cyan. 3. The INFLUENCE menu appears. Place a checkmark in front of the SideCrvInfInc option to enable side curve influence for the selected boundary. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to apply this option to other boundaries. 5. Choose OK from the dialog box.
Defining the Advanced Element

Define this element to set the tangent inner edge condition for one or both directions of a blended surface. This condition applies only to surfaces with multi-segment boundaries. When the TanInrEdge option is selected, the system attempts to create a blended surface with patches that are tangent across inner edges. In some cases, when geometry is complex, dihedral angles at inner edges may deviate from 0. Notes: When the TanInrEdge option is not set, the system does not attempt to make patches tangent across inner edges. When tangency across inner edges is not critical, it may be benecial not to set TanInrEdge. Specifying less strict tangency conditions may yield a surface shape which may be more suitable for a particular design.
The next example illustrates the effect of using the TanInrEdge option.
11 - 18
Using the TanInrEdge Option
Multi-segment boundary
Create a blended surface between these boundaries and tangent along the multi-segment boundary with the reference quilt.
a) TanInrEdge is off
b) TanInrEdge is on
Tangency across these edges is not required.
Patches are tangent across these edges.
Notice that in examples a and b, the inner edges of the new blended surface have different profiles. When TanInrEdge is on, the inner edges may have greater curvature, as the system attempts to satisfy the tangency requirement across these edges so that dihedral angles on these edges are equal to zero.
How to Set the TanInrEdge Option 1. Choose Advanced and Define in the Blended Surface dialog box. 2. The ADV TECH menu appears. To enable inner edge tangency in the first or second direction, place a checkmark in front of the Dir1 TanInrEdge or Dir2 TanInrEdge option, respectively. 3. Choose Done from the ADV TECH menu.
11 - 19
Modifying the Surface Shape by Stretching

You can stretch the surface by dragging the stretch vector or by entering the stretch factor. Note: The Stretch option is available for the boundary blend only if the Boundary Condition is set to other than Free. The following rules apply to the stretch factor: Default stretch factor is 1.0. The stretch factor cannot equal 0 for a blended surface. Negative values are not allowed for a two-directional blend. Setting the stretch factor to a negative values flips tangency for a one-directional surface blend.
How to Modify the Surface Shape by Stretching 1. Choose Stretch and Define from the Blended Surface dialog box. 2. The STRETCH menu displays the following options: SetupDisplaySetup the surface display. See Using the SetupDisplay Option on page 13 - 5. Srf AnalysisObtain surface analysis information from using options in the SURF INFO menu. StretchFactorSpecify the stretching method by choosing Drag or Enter from the FACTOR OPTS menu. The StretchFactor option is available only if the feature creates a single surface patch. To stretch a shape dynamically, choose Drag, select the stretch vector attached to the boundary of the surface, and drag it. You can also stretch the surface using the sliding scales in the MOVE STRETCH slider. If you want to stretch the surface by entering the stretch factor, choose Enter and enter the coefficient for the direction indicated by the highlighted stretch vector. 3. When you finish stretching, choose Done from the STRETCH menu.
11 - 20
Creating a Conic Surface

There are two types of conic surfaces listed in the OPTIONS menu: Shouldr CrvThe surface passes through the control curve. In this case, the control curve defines the location of conic shoulders for each cross section of the surface. Tangent CrvThe surface does not pass through the control curve. In this case, the control curve defines the line which passes through the intersections of the conic sections asymptotes.
Rules for selecting curves/edges: Only single-segment composite curves can be selected as boundary or control curves. When selecting with the Chain option, the chain can not have more than one edge/curve component.
How to Create a Conic Surface 1. Choose Create, Surface, New. 2. Choose Advanced and Done from the SRF OPTS menu. 3. Choose Boundaries and Done from the ADV FEAT OPT menu. Creating Advanced Surface Features 4. Choose Conic Surf, Shouldr Crv or Tangent Crv, and Done from the BNDRS OPTS menu. 5. A dialog box appears, listing the following elements of the surface feature: CurvesSpecify geometrical references for this feature. Conic ParamSpecify the conic parameter.
6. The Boundaries option in the CRV_OPTS menu is active. 7. Define opposite boundaries of the conic surface by selecting two curves/edges. 8. After bounding curves are defined, choose Shoulder Crv or Tangent Crv from the OPTIONS menu and select the conic curve in the same way as you selected bounding curves. 9. Choose Done from the OPTIONS menu. 10. Enter the conic parameter value; it must be between 0.05 and 0.95. Sections of the surface will be one of the following types, according to their conic parameter value: 0.05 < parameter < 0.5ellipse
11 - 21
parameter = 0.5parabola 0.5 < parameter < 0.95hyperbola
11. Conclude feature creation by choosing OK from the dialog box. Creating a Conic Surface Boundaries
Intersection of asymptotes
Control curve a) Surface Shouldr Crv b) Surface Tangent Crv
Creating an Approximate Blend Surface

Rules for selecting curves/edges: Only single-segment composite curves can be selected as boundary or control curves. When selecting with the Chain option, the chain can not have more than one edge/curve component.
How to Create a Blended Surface by Approximation 1. Choose Create, Surface, New. 2. Choose Advanced and Done from the SRF OPTS menu. 3. Choose Boundaries and Done from the ADV FEAT OPT menu. 4. Choose Approx Blend and Done from the BNDRS OPTS menu. 5. A dialog box will appear, listing elements of the surface feature. They are:
11 - 22
CurvesSpecify geometrical references for this feature. SmoothnessSpecify the smoothness coefficient. Num U PatchSpecify the number of patches in the U direction. Num V PatchSpecify the number of patches in the V direction.
6. Select reference entities to define the surface in one or two directions, and proceed as described in Specifying Reference Entities on page 11 - 5. Note: For curves selected in two directions, the boundary curves must form a closed loop. 7. Specify the additional reference entities to adjust the surface shape. Choose Approx Dir from the OPTIONS menu and proceed in the same manner as when selecting curves in the first/second direction. 8. When you have finished defining geometrical references, choose Done Curves from the OPTIONS menu. 9. Enter a value for a smoothness parameter. The value must be between 0 and 1, with 1 being the maximum smoothness. 10. Enter the number of surface patches in each direction. The greater the number of patches, the closer the surface will follow the curves. If Pro/ENGINEER cannot construct the surface using the number of patches specified, you can enter a different number of patches. 11. Choose Preview from the dialog box. The system will print the maximum deviation of the surface from the optional curves. If this is acceptable, choose OK from the dialog box to finalize the feature. If you want to decrease the deviation, choose Define and respecify parameters of the approximate surface. Creating Advanced Surface Features
11 - 23
N-Sided Surface
The N-Sided Surf option in the BNDRS OPTS menu enables you to create blended surfaces from more than four bounding curves or edges. An example of an N-sided surface appears next. Example of an N-Sided Blended Surface
1
2 5
3 4 N-sided patch
How to Create a Surface From More Than Four Boundaries 1. Choose FEAT > Create > Surface > New > Advanced > Done. 2. Choose ADV FEAT OPT > Boundaries > Done > N-Sided Surf > Done. 3. The system displays a dialog box, listing elements of the surface feature. They are: CurvesSpecify geometrical references for this feature. Bndry Conds(Optional) Define Boundary Conditions.
4. Select at least five boundaries in the consecutive order for the N-sided surface. Using the One By One option in the CHAIN menu, select at least five curves/edges forming a loop. When finished, choose Done from the CHAIN menu. Note: The boundaries of the N-sided surface cannot include tangent edges/curves. 5. To define Boundary Conditions, choose Bndry Cond and Define from the dialog box.
11 - 24
6. The BOUNDARY menu lists all surface boundaries. As you move the cursor over the boundary name, the corresponding boundary highlights in cyan. Choose the boundary for which you want to define Boundary Conditions. 7. For the selected boundary, the system brings up a dialog box with the Bndry Cond element selected for definition. 8. Specify the boundary condition by choosing one of the following options in the BNDRY COND menu, followed by Done: FreeNo tangency conditions are set along the boundary. TangentThe blended surface is tangent to the reference surface along the boundary. NormalThe blended surface is normal to the reference surface or datum plane.
9. For conditions other than Free, accept the defaults or select reference surfaces, as described in Defining Surface References for Boundary Conditions on page 11 - 10. 10. To complete the feature creation, click OK in the dialog box. The shape of the N-sided patch depends on the geometry of the boundaries to be patched together. For some boundaries, the N-sided patch may produce geometry with undesirable shape and characteristics. For example, bad geometry may occur if: The boundaries have inflections The angles between the boundary segments are very large (more than 160 degrees) or very small (less than 20 degrees) The boundaries consist of very long and very short segments
If the N-sided patch does not create a satisfactory geometry, you can either create a series of N-sided patches on a smaller number of boundaries, or use the Blended Surf functionality.
Creating Quilts with the TangentToSrf Option

Use the TangentToSrf option to create a new quilt that is tangent to a surface. How to Create a Quilt With the TangentToSrf Option 1. Choose Surface and New from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. Choose Advanced followed by Done from the SRF OPTS menu.
11 - 25
3. Choose TangentToSrf followed by Done from the ADV FEAT OPT menu. 4. The dialog box appears, listing feature elements. 5. Specify the trajectory of the tangent draft using options in the CHAIN menu. 6. Select curves on the parting surface to define the trajectory of the non-solid tangent draft. 7. Specify the pull direction by selecting a plane normal to the pull direction. 8. Select the approximate location on the reference model where the draft should be tangent to the reference above the draft line. It is recommended to pick near the draft curve (if present) above the parting surface. 9. The INSPECT menu opens, allowing you to perform the following actions: ChangeModify the non-solid tangent draft by changing its pull direction, draft line, point of tangency, or closing its open ends. To close the open ends of the non-solid tangent draft, you must specify surfaces to close to. ShowDisplay the non-solid tangent draft. InfoOpen a window listing information about the feature including: parent feature, internal feature ID, and feature name.
To create a solid draft from a non-solid draft, you should create both sides, cap the ends, and merge the quilted surfaces, then create the solid protrusion using either the Use Quilts or Patch command. Note: The system cannot generate drafts (solid or non-solid) if any portion of the draft line is parallel to the pull direction.
11 - 26
12
Working with Quilts
This chapter describes various surface operations. Topic Merging Quilts Adding Rounds on Surface Edges Trimming Surfaces of Quilts Extending Surfaces of Quilts Transforming Quilts Creating Draft Offsets Creating Solid Geometry Using Quilts Retrieving Pro/DESIGNER Data Page 12 - 2 12 - 5 12 - 5 12 - 10 12 - 21 12 - 22 12 - 26 12 - 36
12 - 1
Merging Quilts
Two adjacent or intersecting quilts can be merged together. The resulting quilt is a separate feature, coincident with the two original quilts. If the quilt is deleted, the original surface features will remain. Note: The surface merge feature is not available in Assembly mode. How to Merge Two Quilts in a Single Quilt 1. Choose Surface from the FEAT CLASS menu. 2. Choose Merge and Done from the QUILT SURF menu. 3. Select the option for the merge: JoinMerge two adjacent quilts. To be merged, the one-sided edges of one quilt must lie on the other quilt. If a portion of one of the surfaces extends beyond the boundaries of the other, you are asked to pick the portion of the original quilt that will be present in the resulting quilt. IntersectMerge two quilts that intersect. The resulting quilt consists of portions of the original quilts that are adjacent to the intersection boundary. The system will ask you which portion of each quilt you want to keep in the resulting quilt.
4. Select the two quilts to merge. Note: It makes a difference which quilt is selected first in the merge. See the following section for an explanation of the parental hierarchy of quilts. 5. If any portion of a surface needs to be trimmed, use the Flip and Okay options to indicate which portion of the original quilt should be kept (see the figure Merging Quilts by Intersection on page 12 - 3). 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for additional quilts to merge. Note that every two quilts that are merged produce a new quilt feature. 7. Choose Done to complete the merging of the quilts. 8. Conclude feature creation using options in the FEATURE EDIT menu.
12 - 2
Merging Quilts by Intersection

Select these two quilts
. will keep this
Accept this direction.
will keep this Accept this direction. Working with Quilts
Parental Hierarchy of Quilts

Every merging of two quilts produces a new quilt feature. When merging two or more quilts, the parental hierarchy of quilts determines how the quilts are affected by such commands as Redefine and Delete. For all merge operations, the quilt selected first becomes the parent quilt. The second quilt is merged into the first. A merged quilt consists of three portions: two or more quilts that provide the geometry, and a merge feature that contains the information for the surface intersection or union, that is, joining (see the figure Example of Merging Quilts on page 12 - 4). The original surfaces are parents of the merge feature. Pro/ENGINEER
Working with Quilts
12 - 3
determines the parent of each successive quilt by the first selected feature of the merge before it. For example, in the following figure, each of the surfaces were added sequentially during the same merge procedure. The quilts containing surfaces S1 and S2 were merged by feature M1. The resulting quilt containing S1 and S2 was then merged with the quilt containing S3 by merge feature M2, and so on. The parents of M3 are S1 and S4 and the parents of M4 are S1 and S5 (see the following figure). Example of Merging Quilts M1 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 M2 M4 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 M3
When you create a datum point or a datum curve projected onto a quilt, the parent of the datum feature is the first parent of the quilt (the first reference selected in the quilting process). Deleting surfaces: Deleting S3 will require deleting M2 and redefining M3. Deleting S1 will require deleting M1, M2, M3 and M4, since it is a parent for all of them. Deleting M3 will delete only M3.
There is a special case for deleting a quilt feature (see the following figure). M2 defines the intersection of S3 with both S1 and S2. When you delete M1, Pro/ENGINEER will indicate that the highlighted portions of the first surface (S1 and S2, combined) now belong to different surfaces (S1 and S2, separately).
12 - 4
Example of Deleting a Quilt M2
S3
S3
S1 S2 M1
S1 S2
Adding Rounds on Surface Edges

You can add a constant or variable radius round on two-sided surface edges: edges created at the joint of surface segments or intersection of quilts. In addition, you can create a full round between two surfaces by removing an intermediate surface. To access the rounds functionality, choose Solid from the FEAT CLASS menu, then choose Round. For information on how to create a round, see the Rounds chapter. Note: When you create a Surf-Surf round, the resulting round cannot go beyond selected surfaces. If a specified radius causes one of the referenced surfaces to be consumed, the feature creation will fail. To resolve the conflict, reselect surfaces or reduce a radius value appropriately.
Working with Quilts
Trimming Surfaces of Quilts

Surfaces of quilts can be trimmed in several ways: By adding a cut or slot in the same way as you would remove material from solid features. By trimming the quilt at its intersection with another quilt or to its own silhouette edge as it appears in a certain view. By filleting corners of the quilt. By trimming along a datum curve lying on the quilt.
Working with Quilts
12 - 5
Using Form Options

When using the FORM menu options such as Extrude, Revolve, Sweep or Blend for trimming, you are creating a surface definition that will not appear in the model. How to Trim a Quilt by Using One of the Form Options 1. Choose Trim and Done from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. Choose one of the FORM options: Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Blend. Choose Done. 3. Select the quilt to trim. 4. Define an extruded feature, as you do for solids. 5. Conclude feature creation by choosing OK from the dialog box.
Using Existing Surfaces

A datum plane or an existing quilt can be selected to trim another quilt. How to Trim a Quilt Using an Existing Quilt 1. Choose Trim from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. From the FORM menu, choose Use Quilt and Done. 3. A dialog box will appear, listing elements that need to be defined for the feature. 4. Select a quilt to be trimmed. 5. Select a datum plane or quilt to which the first quilt will be trimmed. 6. An arrow will appear to indicate which side of the quilt is to be removed. Choose Flip or Okay to indicate the correct direction. 7. Conclude feature creation by choosing OK from the dialog box. The first quilt picked will be trimmed at its intersection with the other quilt or datum plane. Notice that after the operation is complete, the cutting quilt is blanked from display. If you used a datum plane for trimming, it will remain displayed. Note: If you want to keep the trimming quilt, make a copy of it first. See Creating a Quilt by Copy on page 10 - 14.
12 - 6
Trimming to an Existing Quilt Quilt to be trimmed
Surface to trim to
Trimming with the Use Curves Option

With the Use Curves option you can trim a quilt along a chain of datum curves/edges (see the following figure). Trimming a Quilt with the Use Curves Option
Select these datum curves.
This arrow indicates the portion to keep.
Working with Quilts
Rules for defining a surface trim using a datum curve: You can use a continuous chain of datum curves, inner surface edges, or solid model edges to trim a quilt. Datum curves used for trimming must lie on the quilt to be trimmed and should not extend beyond the boundaries of this quilt. If the curve does not extend to the boundaries of the quilt, the system calculates the smallest distance to the quilt boundary and continues the trim in this direction (see the following figure).
Working with Quilts
12 - 7
Example of Trimming with Use Curve
Datum curve
How to Trim a Quilt with the Use Curves Option 1. Choose Trim from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. Choose Use Curves and Done from the FORM menu. 3. A dialog box will appear, listing elements that need to be defined for the feature. 4. Choose a quilt to be trimmed. 5. Using options in the CHAIN menu, select a continuous chain of curves, inner surface edges, or part edges. When you have finished, choose Done from the CHAIN menu. 6. A red arrow will appear on the screen indicating the portion of the quilt to keep. Choose Flip or Okay. 7. Conclude feature creation by choosing OK from the dialog box.
Trimming with the Vertex Round Option

You can create fillets on outer quilt edges by trimming a quilt with the Vertex Round option from the FORM menu. Creating a fillet involves selecting corners to be rounded and entering the radius for the fillet (see the following figure).
12 - 8
Rounding Corners of a Quilt
Select these vertices to be rounded.
How to Trim a Quilt by Filleting its Corners 1. Choose Trim from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. Choose Vertex Round and Done from the FORM menu. 3. A dialog box appears, listing elements to be defined for the feature. 4. Select vertices at the corners to be rounded. Note: All selected vertices must belong to the quilt selected for trimming. 5. When you have finished selecting vertices, choose Done Refs from the FEATURE REFS menu. 6. Enter the fillet radius. This radius will be applied to all selected vertices. Working with Quilts 7. Conclude feature creation by choosing OK from the dialog box.
Trimming by Using Silhouette Edges

A silhouette edge is the outline of a curved surface seen in a particular view orientation. How to Trim to a Silhouette Edge 1. Choose Trim from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. Choose the FORM menu options Silhouette and Done. 3. A dialog box appears, listing feature elements to be defined. 4. Select a quilt to be trimmed.
Working with Quilts
12 - 9
5. Select or create a planar surface or datum plane to specify the viewing direction. The viewing direction is normal to this plane. 6. An arrow appears, indicating which side of the quilt is to be kept. Choose Flip or Okay. 7. Conclude feature creation by choosing OK from the dialog box. Trimming to a Silhouette Edge
Pick this surface to trim. Arrow points to the portion of surface to be kept. The remaining portion of the surface.
Pick this plane as the viewing direction. ORIGINAL SURFACE RESULTING SURFACE
Extending Surfaces of Quilts

To access the surface extend functionality, choose Extend from the Quilt Surf menu. The OPTIONS menu lists the following extension methods (for an illustration of different types of extension, see the following figure): Same SrfThe extend feature is of the same type as the surface being extended (for example, plane, cylinder, cone, spline surface). The original surface will be continued past its selected original boundaries by a specified distance. Approx SrfCreate the extension as a boundary blend. Along DirThe surface edge is extended in a direction normal to a specified terminating plane. This option is valid only in combination with Up To Plane.
12 - 10
Tangent SrfThe extend feature is a ruled surface that is tangent to the original surface. Different Ways to Extend a Quilt
Using Same Srf

ORIGINAL QUILT
Using Along Dir
Working with Quilts
Using Tangent Srf

Note: The figure on page 12 - 17 shows an example of using the Approx Srf option.
Working with Quilts
12 - 11
When extending quilts with the Same Srf or Tang Srf options, consider the following: You can indicate whether the extension distance will be measured along the surface or a datum plane by selecting one of these options in the OPTIONS menu: Dist On SrfThe extension distance is measured along the surface being extended. Dist In PlnThe extension distance is measured along a selected datum plane.
You can specify a single or variable distance extension. To indicate the desired type of extension, choose Single Dst or Variable in the Options menu. You can enter either a positive or negative value for surface extension. You can not mix positive and negative values for the same operation. Entering a negative value will cause a surface to be trimmed.
Extending a Quilt with the Same Srf Option

You can use the Same Srf option to extend the surfaces of a quilt. How to Extend Surfaces of a Quilt by Specifying Multiple Extension Distances 1. Choose Extend from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. From the OPTIONS menu, select the following options: Same Srf Variable Dist On Srf or Dist In Pln Done
3. Using options in the CHAIN menu, specify edges to be extended. 4. The selected edges highlight in cyan. Choose Done from the CHAIN menu.
12 - 12
5. The vertices belonging to the extension boundaries will highlight in green. Indicate where you want to specify the extension distances by selecting from the GET EXT DIST menu: Vert By VertSpecify the extension distance for vertices in the selected chain of edges. Each vertex in the selected chain highlights consecutively so you can specify the extension. To skip a particular vertex, choose Skip from the MEASURE DIST menu. When specifying the extension distance for a vertex shared with another edge (only if two segments are not tangent) from the selected chain, you may enter two different extension values if an inner edge does not originate at this vertex. However, if a vertex has a corresponding inner edge, only one extension distance can be specified for this vertex (see the following figure). Entering Two Extension Distances
inner edge
You can enter two different extensions for this vertex.
You can enter only one extension for this vertex.
Sel Pnt/VertSelect a datum point or vertex for which the extension is specified.
Working with Quilts
6. For a selected point, specify the extension using one of the following methods: To extend a specified distance, choose Specify Dist from the MEASURE DIST menu. Indicate whether the distance should be measured normal to the boundary or along the highlighted edge by choosing either Norm To Bnd or Along Edge (for an example, see the following figure). If you selected Norm To Bnd and more than one surface boundary can be referenced, use Next Normal to indicate the required boundary. If you selected Along Edge and more than one edge can be referenced, use Next Along to indicate the required edge. After the reference is established, choose Accept and enter an extension value.
Working with Quilts
12 - 13
Measuring Extension with Norm to Bnd and Along Edge
Surface to be extended
This extension distance is measured normal to the boundary. Extension
This extension distance is measured along the edge.
To extend up to a vertex, choose Up To Vertex from the MEASURE DIST menu. After the vertex highlights, choose Accept.
7. To continue specifying extensions at other points, repeat Steps 5 and 6. 8. When you have finished defining extensions, choose Done/Return from the GET EXT DIST menu. 9. For each side edge, specify the direction in which it will be extended by choosing from the SIDE EDG DIR menu, followed by Done. The choices are (for an illustration, see the following figure): Ext SideEdgeA side edge is created as an extension of the surfaces side edge. Norm To BndA side edge is normal to the boundary. NextSideEdgeA side edge is an extension of the next available edge.
12 - 14
Using Ext SideEdge and Norm To Bnd Options
Boundary Side edge
This edge was extended using Ext SideEdge.
This edge was extended using Norm To Bnd.
10. If you are extending up to a vertex, choose from the END EDGE DIR menu, followed by Done. The choices are (for an illustration, see the following figure): Parallel EdgeThe surface boundary is parallel to the original boundary. Tangent EdgeThe surface boundary is tangent to an adjacent edge.
Using Parallel Edge and Tangent Edge Options ORIGINAL SURFACE

Extend Up To the vertex
Extend this edge Working with Quilts
The new boundary is tangent at this vertex. The new boundary is parallel to the old boundary.
This surface extension was created using Parallel Edge.
This surface extension was created using Tangent Edge.
Working with Quilts
12 - 15
11. The SURF EXTEND menu appears. If you want to finalize the extension operation, choose Done Extend. To obtain information on extension parameters, choose Info. To redefine the extension parameters, choose Define and complete the following steps. 12. Redefine the extension using options in the DEF EXTEND menu: EdgesReselect the edges to be extended. To reselect edges, choose Edges from the DEF EXTEND menu. Choose Select to add more edge, or Unselect to remove any edges. After you are finished, choose Done from the CHAIN menu. Ext DistRespecify the extension distance for selected points. Choose an option from the GET EXT DIST menu. The MEASURE DIST menu will appear. Pick a datum point or vertex and proceed as you did originally (see Step 6). To remove the extension definition from a particular vertex or datum point, select this point and set it to Free. To conclude the operation, choose Done/Return from the GET EXT DIST menu. End CondFor each side, redefine how a side edge will be extended by choosing Ext SideEdge or Norm To Bnd from the SIDE EDGE DIR, followed by Done.
13. When you have finished, choose Done Extend. How to Extend Surfaces of a Quilt at a Single Distance 1. Choose Extend from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. From the OPTIONS menu, select the following options: Same Srf Single Dst Dist On Srf or Dist In Pln Done
3. Using options in the CHAIN menu, specify edges to be extended. 4. The selected edges highlight in cyan. Choose Done from the CHAIN menu. 5. Select an edge from the chain to measure distance from. 6. Enter the extension distance. 7. For each side edge, specify the direction in which it will be extended by choosing Ext SideEdge or Norm To Bnd from the SIDE EDGE DIR menu, followed by Done.
12 - 16
8. The SURF EXTEND menu will appear. If you want to finalize the extension operation, choose Done Extend. To obtain information on extension parameters, choose Info. To redefine the extension parameters, choose Define and proceed as in Step 12 on page 12 - 16.
Creating a Boundary Blend Extension

When you extend surfaces with the Approx Srf option, the system creates an extension as a boundary blend. This method is particularly beneficial when you extend the surface up to a vertex which does not lie along a straight edge. In addition, this method is useful for extending imported surfaces that may have been poorly created in other systems (for example, when surfaces have high curvature or bad vertices). The following diagram shows an approximate extension.
Curve boundary Extension
To extend a surface with Approx Srf, follow the procedure for the Same Srf option (see the previous section).
Working with Quilts
Extending a Quilt with the Tangent Srf Option

The following procedure explains how to extend a quilt with the Tangent Srf option. How to Create a Multi-Distant Tangent Surface Extension 1. Choose Extend from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. From the OPTIONS menu, select the following options: Tangent Srf Variable
Working with Quilts
12 - 17
Dist On Srf or Dist In Pln Done
3. Using options in the CHAIN menu, specify edges to be extended. 4. The selected edges highlight in cyan. Choose Done from the CHAIN menu. 5. The vertices belonging to the extension boundaries highlight in green. Indicate where you want to specify the extension by selecting from the GET EXT DIST menu: Vert By VertSpecify the extension distance for vertices in the selected chain of edges. Each vertex in the selected chain will highlight consecutively to allow you to specify the extension. To skip a particular vertex, choose Skip from the MEASURE DIST menu. When specifying an extension distance for a vertex shared with another edge from the selected chain, you may enter two different extension values if an inner edge does not originate at this vertex. However, if an inner vertex has a corresponding inner edge, only one extension distance can be specified for this vertex (see the figure Entering Two Extension Distances on page 12 - 13). Sel Pnt/VertSelect a datum point or vertex for which the extension will be specified.
6. For a selected point, specify the extension as follows. Indicate whether the distance should be measured normal to the boundary or along the highlighted edge by choosing either Norm To Bnd or Along Edge (see the figure Measuring Extension with Norm to Bnd and Along Edge on page 12 - 14). If you selected Norm To Bnd and more than one surface boundary can be referenced, use Next Normal to indicate the required boundary. If you selected Along Edge and more than one edge can be referenced, use Next Along to indicate the required edge. After the reference is established, choose Accept and enter an extension value. 7. If you want to continue specifying extensions at other points, repeat Steps 5 and 6. 8. When you have finished defining extensions, choose Done/Return from the GET EXT DIST menu. 9. For each side edge, specify the direction in which it will be extended, as in Step 9 on page 12 - 14. 10. Continue as in Steps 11 and 12 on page 12 - 16.
12 - 18
How to Create a Tangent Surface With a Single Extension Value 1. Choose Extend from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. From the OPTIONS menu, select the following options: Tangent Srf Single Dst Dist On Srf or Dist In Pln Done
3. Using options in the CHAIN menu, specify edges to be extended. 4. The selected edges highlight in cyan. Choose Done from the CHAIN menu. 5. Select an edge for which you want to specify the extension distance. 6. Enter the extension distance for the edges. 7. For each side edge, specify the direction in which it will be extended, as in Step 9 on page 12 - 14. 8. Continue as in Steps 11and 12 on page 12 - 16.
Extending a Quilt with the Along Dir Option

Use the Along Dir option to extend the quilt normal to the plane. Extending a Quilt Using Along Dir
Working with Quilts
Select this quilt to extend. Select this loop to indicate surface edges to be extended. Select this planar surface to extend to.
Working with Quilts
12 - 19
How to Extend a Quilt Using Along Dir 1. Choose Extend from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. From the OPTIONS menu, choose Along Dir and Up To Plane, and Done. 3. Using options in the CHAIN menu, specify edges to be extended. 4. The selected edges highlight in cyan. Choose Done from the CHAIN menu. 5. Create or select a datum plane or a planar surface up to which you want to extend the quilt. 6. At this point, you can: Complete feature creation by choosing Done Extend from the SURF EXTEND menu. Obtain information on extension parameters by choosing Info from the SURF EXTEND menu (see Obtaining Information on Extension Parameters on page 12 - 20). Modify the definition of the extend feature by choosing Define from the SURF EXTEND menu. To reselect edges, choose Edges from the DEF EXTEND menu. To reselect the terminating plane, choose To Plane from the SURF EXTEND menu. When you have finished, choose Done Extend.
Obtaining Information on Extension Parameters

After you have entered all necessary parameters for feature creation, the SURF EXTEND menu appears with the Info option. Selecting Info displays the INFO EXTEND menu with the following options: EdgesShow edges selected for extension. Ext DistDisplay the currently set extension distances.
12 - 20
Transforming Quilts
The Transform command from the Quilt Surf menu allows you to translate, rotate, or mirror quilts and/or datum curves. You can transform either the selected quilts/curves or you can create their copies and manipulate them, leaving the original features intact. Quilts and datum curves selected for displacement will produce a new feature with multiple quilts and curves. Dimensional values that you entered for displacement can be later modified. How to Translate and Rotate Quilts and Datum Curves 1. Choose Transform from the QUILT SURF menu. 2. Choose Move, Copy or No Copy, and Done from the OPTIONS menu. 3. Select a quilt and/or datum curves to move, then choose Done Sel. 4. From the MOVE FEATURE menu, choose Translate or Rotate. 5. Select references for displacement using options in the GEN SEL DIR menu: PlaneUse a normal to a selected plane as a direction. Crv/Edg/AxisUse a curve, edge, or axis as a direction. CsysUse an axis of a coordinate system as a direction.
6. A red arrow will appear, indicating the direction for the operation. Choose Flip or Okay. 7. Enter the offset distance for the translate operation, and/or the angle for the rotate operation. 8. To finish the operation, choose Done Move from the MOVE FEATURE menu. How to Mirror Quilts and Datum Curves 1. Choose Mirror, Copy/No Copy, and Done from the OPTIONS menu. 2. Select curves and surfaces to mirror. Choose Done Sel when you have finished. 3. Select or create a datum plane about which to mirror the entities. Working with Quilts
Working with Quilts
12 - 21
Creating Draft Offsets

Use the Draft Offset option to create an area offset with drafted side surfaces. The following figure shows an example of a part with draft offsets. Example of a Part With Draft Offsets
The draft offset feature is available for solid surfaces and quilts. To access the Draft Offset option for solids, choose Solid from the FEAT CLASS menu, Tweak from the Solid menu, and Draft Offset from the TWEAK menu. To access the Draft Offset option for quilts, choose Surface from the FEAT CLASS menu and then Draft Offset from the QUILT SURF menu. You can apply a bevel angle to side surfaces of the draft offset. The system uses this angle to draft all side surfaces relative to their default position (defined by either the Norm to Surf or the Norm to Sketch attribute). The range for the bevel angle is 0 to 60 degrees (default is 30).
12 - 22
Several closed loops can be selected for the draft offset operation (see the next figure). Multiple Loop Draft Offsett
Follow these recommendations for creating draft offsets: To create a draft offset ending on a surface without drafting the side along this edge, use the following procedure: create a section that extends beyond the edge; this prevents the system from using that edge for drafting. Do not select the terminating surface. The following figure demonstrates such a technique.
Working with Quilts
Select only this surface. Extend the sketch beyond the surface edge.
Resulting draft offset
Working with Quilts
12 - 23
When a draft offset spans across several surfaces, these surfaces should be tangent. Otherwise, the top surface of the draft will be split by an edge. When you draft a section that has rounds, consider the height of the offset in relation to the draft angle. If the angle is too small, the drafted surfaces may overlap at tight corners, causing the feature to fail.
How to Create a Draft Offset 1. Choose Draft Offset. 2. The dialog box for creating the draft offset feature appears with the following elements: AttributesSpecify the direction of offset and the method for creating the offset surface. SurfacesSpecify reference surfaces for creating an offset. SectionSketch the section defining the area of the reference surfaces to be offset. Profile TypeSpecify the profile type for the sides of the draft offset. Offset ValueEnter the offset value. Bevel AngleSpecify the bevel angle.
3. To define attributes, choose the Attributes element and Define from the dialog box. 4. Choose options from the ATTRIBUTES menu by taking one option from each submenu. The options are: Specify the default direction of side surfaces: Norm to SurfCreate a draft offset with side surfaces normal to reference surfaces. Norm to SketCreate a draft offset with side surfaces normal to the sketching plane.
Specify the method of producing the offset surface: OffsetOffset the specified area. TranslateTranslate the specified area. The resulting offset surface uses the same radius as the original surface.
12 - 24
Using the Offset and Translate Options

Side View Resulting Surface Side View Resulting Surface
Reference surface
Reference surface
b) Using the Offset option
a) Using the Translate option
5. Choose Done from the ATTRIBUTES menu. 6. Select reference surfaces by using options in the SURF SELECT menu (see Selecting Surfaces on page 10 - 14). When you finish, choose Done. 7. Define the area to be offset by sketching one or more closed sections. Specify the sketching plane and horizontal references. Sketch and regenerate the section. Choose Done in the SKETCHER menu to finalize the sketch. 8. Define the profile type by choosing one of the following options in the PROF TYPE menu, followed by Done: TangentSide surfaces are tangent to the offset and reference surfaces with a spline profile (see the following figure). StraightSide surfaces are straight (see the following figure). Tangent and Straight Profiles
Working with Quilts
a) Tangent
b) Straight
Working with Quilts
12 - 25
9. Enter the offset value in the direction of the red arrow. If you enter a negative value, it should not be more than a local thickness of the model. 10. Enter a value for the bevel angle. 11. When you finish defining the feature, choose OK from the dialog box. The following figure shows a sample draft offset created with the Norm to Surf option. Sample Draft Offset
Sketch the section on this datum plane. Resulting draft offset with the bevel angle of 30o and straight sides.
Creating Solid Geometry Using Quilts

There are three methods of creating solid geometry by using quilts: You can replace an entire part surface with a quilt. Surface replacement differs from protrusions and cuts because it can add material in some places and remove it in others. Surface replacement is a surface deformation feature, and is created using the Replace option in the Tweak menu (see Surface Replacement on page 12 - 27). You can create a patch, a feature that replaces a portion of a solid surface (or surfaces) with a quilt whose boundaries lie on the surface(s) being patched. This feature is created using the Patch option in the Tweak menu. You can create a construction feature (protrusion, cut, or slot) by using a quilt as the solid features boundaries. Geometry will be added or subtracted up to the border of the quilt used. This is done using the Use Quilt option in the Solid Opts menu.
12 - 26
The following figure illustrates the difference between surface replacement and using a quilt in construction feature creation. Using Surface Feature to Create Geometry
Original part with the quilt
a) Surface replacement
b) Cut created using the quilt
Surface Replacement
The Replace option from TWEAK menu allows you to replace a specified solid surface on the model with a datum plane or a quilt.
Restrictions and Requirements

All restrictions that apply to tweak features apply to surface replacement. For surface replacement, follow these guidelines: If surface replacement both adds material in some places and removes it in others, then the replacing quilt must consist of one surface only. Surface replacement cannot be done in Assembly mode as an assembly feature. However, when modifying a component through Modify, Mod Part in Assembly mode, you can create a tweak feature within this part in order to perform the surface replacement. Choose Feature from the Modify Part menu and proceed to define the replacement feature. Working with Quilts
Working with Quilts
12 - 27
It is not recommended to create two replacement features on top of each other. It is good design practice to delete one replacement quilt before creating a new one, or to redefine the existing tweak/replace feature such that it replaces a different surface or uses a different replacement quilt. A quilt that has replaced a features surface cannot, in turn, be replaced by another quilt. The replacement surface must be deleted first. For correct surface replacement, make sure the quilt extends to or beyond the part boundaries (see the following figure). If this requirement is not met, Pro/ENGINEER will attempt to extend the quilt to intersect the part boundaries. If the replacement fails, the invalid geometry is highlighted, and the system gives an error message. Surface Replacement
Select this quilt as the replacement surface.
Select this solid surface to be replaced.
Creating a Replace Feature

By default, when you replace a solid surface with a quilt, the system consumes the quilt. To preserve the quilt, define the Keep Quilt element in the dialog box.
12 - 28
How to Replace a Surface on the Model with a Datum Plane or Surface 1. Choose Feature > Create > Tweak > Replace. 2. The dialog box appears with the following elements: Replace SurfSelect a surface to be replaced. QuiltSelect a surface to use as a replacement. Keep quiltSpecify if you want to keep the replacement quilt after the operation.
3. Pick a surface of a solid model to be replaced. 4. Pick the replacement quilt. 5. By default, the system consumes the replacement quilt. If you want to keep the quilt, choose the Keep quilt element and click Define. 6. Select an option from the KEEP QUILT menu, followed by Done: YesKeep the quilt. NoConsume the quilt.
7. To complete feature creation, click OK in the dialog box. Note: If a child feature references the quilt that was kept with Keep quilt > Yes, redefining to Keep quilt > No causes the references of the child to be missing.
Deleting a Replace Feature

When you delete a replacement surface using the Delete command, the original solid surface is restored and the quilt reappears intact. Working with Quilts
Surface Patching
The TWEAK menu option Patch enables you to replace a specified portion of a surface, or surfaces, with a quilt. All the boundaries of the replacement quilt must lie on the surfaces being patched. The patch feature can add or remove material using a single surface definition. How to Create a Patch Feature 1. Choose Patch from the TWEAK menu. 2. Select a quilt whose boundaries lie on the solid surfaces.
Working with Quilts
12 - 29
3. A red arrow will appear near the center of the surface, indicating the side of the surface on which the resulting solid will be created. Select the direction using the Flip and Okay options. 4. The unused portions of the solid surfaces are removed, and solid geometry using the contour of the replacement quilt is created. Creating a Patch Feature
Select this direction. Arrow points towards resulting solid.
Using Surfaces to Create Solid Features

Quilts used in a protrusion or cut/slot should extend to or beyond the part boundaries. If the surface does not reach the part boundaries, an unattached feature will be created; to avoid this, modify the surface feature before creating the protrusion or cut.
Creating Solid Protrusions and Cuts

Creating protrusions, cuts, and slots using quilts is done following a basic procedure for regular feature creation (see the Construction Features chapter for more information), except you choose Use Quilt from the FORM menu. Instead of specifying the depth and sketching the section, you pick a quilt that determines the extent and contour of the feature.
12 - 30
How to Create a Solid Protrusion/Cut/Slot 1. Choose Feature, Create, Solid, and Protrusion, Cut, or Slot. 2. Choose Use Quilts, Solid, and Done from the FORM menu. 3. Pick the quilt to use. 4. Indicate the direction of feature creation, using the Flip and Okay options. The protrusion or cut is created. It can be treated as any other feature; deleted, suppressed, resumed, and redefined. Deleting or suppressing the feature does not delete or suppress the quilt used to create it. To avoid creating an unattached feature, the quilt used must, together with existing part surfaces, form a closed volume. Quilt edges must be aligned to corresponding part surfaces; if an open quilt is used, there should not be any gaps between it and the adjacent solid geometry. When creating a protrusion from surfaces, it is useful to think of the resulting solid as if it were water: if there is a leak in the form, the material will spill out and the protrusion will be unattached. The following figure shows the procedure step-by-step.
Working with Quilts
Working with Quilts
12 - 31
Creating a Protrusion with Use Quilt

Align to part surface.
a) Original part
b) Create first surface.
Align to part surface
c) Create second surface.
d) Create two more surfaces to close the volume.
e) Create a quilt by intersecting the four surfaces.
f) Create a protrusion using the quilt.
Note that the rectangular base flat surface did not need to be created because the original geometry serves as the closing surface.
12 - 32
Creating a solid cut To create a cut, the quilt used must remove a closed volume within the existing boundaries of the part (see the following figure). Creating a Through Cut
Use this surface to define the cut.
Note that when creating a blind cut, the quilt must define the closed portion of the original geometry (see the following figure).
Working with Quilts
Working with Quilts
12 - 33
Creating a Blind Cut

Create a surface (A)
Create a surface (B)
a)
Create quilt using (A) and (B)
b)
c)
d)
Creating Thin Protrusions and Cuts

Thin features can also be created from quilts. When creating a thin protrusion or cut, you dont have to select a closed quilt (forming a closed area between its surfaces and the surfaces of the model), as when creating a solid feature. The thin feature is created in such a way that the system will add all the necessary boundaries itself. You can specify the offset method by defining the Offset Type element in the dialog box. How to Create a Thin Protrusion or Cut Using an Existing Quilt 1. Choose Feature, Create, Solid, and Protrusion, Cut, or Slot. 2. Choose Use Quilts and Thin from the SOLID OPTS menu. Choose Done.
12 - 34
3. A dialog box appears, listing the feature elements: QuiltSelect the quilt to be solidified. Leave Out(Optional) When you offset normal to surface, select surfaces to be excluded from the quilt. Define this element, as you do for offset surfaces. See the procedure How to Create Offset Surfaces on page 10 - 8. Offset TypeSpecify the offset method, as you do for offset surfaces. See the procedure How to Create Offset Surfaces on page 10 - 8. By default the system adds material normal to the quilt. Material SideSpecify the side to which to add material. ThicknessSpecify the thickness of the feature.
4. Select the quilt to use for feature creation. 5. A red arrow appears, indicating the side on which material will be added or removed. Choose Flip, Okay, or Both. 6. Enter the thickness value. If you chose Both, half of the thickness will be added on one side of the quilt, and half will be added on the other side. 7. The thickness will be applied to the selected sides of the quilt. 8. Define optional elements, if desired. 9. To complete the feature, click OK in the dialog box. Note: If the system cannot offset some surfaces by the specified value, you can leave out these trouble surfaces by defining the Leave Out element (for information on how to exclude surfaces from an operation, see Leaving Out Surfaces During the Offset Operation on page 10 - 13). Features of uniform thickness are easy to create using quilts. When you create a thin feature using quilts, the system automatically creates an offset surface and adds any necessary closing surfaces. Creating thin features using quilts is similar to creating regular thin features (see the next figure).
Working with Quilts
Working with Quilts
12 - 35
Creating a Thin Slot Using Surfaces

Mirror datum plane
a) Original part
b) Create an extruded surface.
c) Create the second surface using Transform (Mirror and Copy).
Surface 3 Surface 1
Surface 2 d) Create the third extruded surface. e) Merge the surfaces using Intersect. f) Create a thin slot or cut using the quilt.
Retrieving Pro/DESIGNER Data

Use the DesignerIn option in the FEAT CLASS menu to retrieve surface data from Pro/DESIGNER by reading in a Pro/ENGINEER surface file with the extension .neu. After you retrieve Pro/DESIGNER surface data, the system creates a DesignerIn feature, which becomes completely associative to other Pro/ENGINEER featureswhen you change the DesignerIn feature, the system updates all features that reference it. In the Pro/ENGINEER model, you can replace the current DesignerIn feature with a modified DesignerIn feature.
12 - 36
Note: Alternatively, you can transfer surface data as a DesignerIn feature directly from Pro/DESIGNER to Pro/ENGINEER, while the two applications are running on the same workstation. This method uses the Put to Pro/ENGINEER session menu option, available in Pro/DESIGNER (see the Pro/CDRS Modeling Users Guide for more detail). How to Create a DesignerIn Feature by Retrieving a Surface File 1. Choose DesignerIn from the FEAT CLASS menu. 2. Enter the name of the surface file or type a [?] to bring up the menulist. 3. Select or create a coordinate system by using options in the GET COORDS menu. If this is the first feature in your model, the system automatically creates the default coordinate system. 4. The system reads in the file and displays the feature. Note: If Pro/ENGINEER displays gaps between surfaces in the DesignerIn feature, then the default Pro/DESIGNER tolerances may not be set correctly. It is recommended that you reset the Pro/DESIGNER tolerances for this model and repeat the retrieval process. After you create the DesignerIn feature, you can handle it as any other Pro/ENGINEER feature (for example, suppress it, put it on a layer, reorder it, and so on). To redefine the DesignerIn feature, choose Redefine and use options in the REDEF IMPT menu, as you do when you redefine imported surfaces (see Redefining Imported Geometry on page 16 - 23). When you retrieve a model that has a DesignerIn feature and the system finds a more recent surface file with the same name, the system warns you that the DesignerIn feature is outdated and instructs you to regenerate the model to update that feature. If you choose Regenerate, the system ask you for a confirmation. Choose Confirm from the CONFIRMATION menu to update the feature. Note that if you choose not update the DesignerIn feature, the system repeats the warning every time you retrieve the model.
Working with Quilts
Working with Quilts
12 - 37
13
Freeform Manipulation
You can dynamically manipulate a surface using the Free Form option in the ADV FEAT OPT menu. Topic Creating Freeform Features Manipulating Freeform Features Page 13 - 2 13 - 4
13 - 1
Creating Freeform Features

You can create a freeform feature either as a solid tweak feature or as an advanced surface feature. The Free Form option allows you to push or pull on a surface, interactively changing its shape either to create a new surface feature, or to modify a solid or quilt. Whenever the underlying surface changes shape, the freeform feature also changes shape proportionally. The real-time surface definition feedback allows you to immediately evaluate and modify the surface as required. Display options for the surface include porcupine curvature, deviation, Gaussian curvature, sectional curvature, slope, intersection curves, reflection curves, and cosmetic shading. The boundaries of the freeform surface can use the boundaries of the underlying base surface (see the following figure), or they can be sketched and projected on the underlying base surfaces. Notice that the grid boundaries may extend beyond the underlying base surface. Sample Freeform Surface
Base surface grid boundaries Underlying surface boundaries in dashed font
Solid Tweak Freeform Features

When you create a freeform feature as a solid tweak feature, you set up a boundary either by using an existing surface boundary or by sketching a boundary region.
13 - 2
Using the Existing Surface Boundary

Use an existing surface as the reference (base) surface for defining the boundary of a freeform surface. How to Select an Entire Surface for the Freeform Surface 1. Choose Solid, Tweak, Free Form. 2. Choose the FORM OPTS menu option Pick Surf, then Done. 3. The system displays the feature creation dialog box, which lists the feature elements. 4. Select an existing surface. 5. Pro/ENGINEER displays a grid of isolines in red. At the prompt, enter the number Using theof control curves in this direction. 6. The system displays another grid of red isolines in the second direction. At the prompt, enter the number of control curves in this direction. Pro/ENGINEER displays the FREE FORM menu. To continue the process, see Manipulating Freeform Features on page 13 - 4.
Sketching a Boundary Region

The following procedure describes how to sketch the boundary region for defining the freeform surface. How to Sketch a Boundary Region 1. Choose Solid, Tweak, Free Form. 2. Choose the FORM OPTS menu option Sket On Pln and establish the sketching plane. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays the feature creation dialog box, which lists the feature elements. 4. Select the Sketch option from the SKETCHER menu. To sketch a rectangular section press the left mouse button and drag the box, as needed. To sketch a circular section, press the middle mouse button and drag the circle, as needed. Align and dimension the region boundary, then choose Done. 5. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SURF SELECT and SURF OPTIONS menus (see Using the Include Command on page 10 - 15 for a full description of these menus). Select the surfaces to add. When you have finished, choose Done from the SURF SELECT menu.
13 - 3
6. Pro/ENGINEER displays a grid of isolines in red. Enter the number of control curves in the direction of the arrow. 7. The system displays another grid of isolines in the second direction. Enter the number of control curves in the direction of the arrow. Pro/ENGINEER displays the FREE FORM menu. If you are satisfied with the feature, choose Done. 8. To continue the process, see Manipulating Freeform Features on page 13 - 4. 9. Click OK in the dialog box to create the freeform feature.
New Freeform Surfaces

How to Dynamically Create a New Surface as an Advanced Feature 1. Use the command sequence Create, Surface, New, Advanced. Choose Free Form from the ADV FEAT OPTS menu. 2. Select an existing surface to provide the solid or quilt reference (base) surface for the freeform surface definition. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays a grid of isolines in red. Enter the number of control curves in this direction. 4. The system displays a grid of isolines in a second direction.Enter the number of control curves in this direction. Pro/ENGINEER displays the FREE FORM menu. To continue the process, see Manipulating Freeform Features on page 13 - 4.
Manipulating Freeform Features

The FREE FORM menu allows you to manipulate freeform features. Choose one of the following options: SetupDisplaySpecify the visualization tools to be used for surface display. See the section Using the SetupDisplay Option for more information. Control PolyModify the shape of the selected surface using its control polyhedron. See Using the Control Poly Option on page 13 - 7 for more information. Srf AnalysisDisplay information about surfaces.
13 - 4
The following sections describe the SetupDisplay and Control Poly options in detail.
Using the SetupDisplay Option

If you chose the SetupDisplay option from the FREE FORM menu, continue as follows. For more information on obtaining surface and curve analysis information, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER. How to Set Up Display Options 1. The system displays the SETUP DISP menu. Choose the desired options, then Done/Return. The SETUP DISP menu lists the following options: Shaded ImageDisplay the surface as a shaded image showing Gaussian curvature, section curvature, slope, or cosmetic shading. Select the type of shading using the SHADING OPTS menu. The possible options are as follows: Gauss CurvColor the surface according to the Gaussian curvature. Sect CurvColor the surface according to the sectional curvature. SlopeColor the surface according to the local slope. CosmeticDisplay a cosmetic shaded image of the surface. NoneDo not display any shaded image. Keep CurrentKeep the current shading.
DisplayOnSrfDisplay the options selected from the accompanying DISP ON SURF submenu to show porcupine curvature, intersection and reflection curves, grid, and mesh on the surface. These options provide controllable parameters, such as the relative scale of the curvature display (that is, of the normal line segments) in a specified direction, the relative density of the curvature display in both directions, and spacing between the isolines in a given
13 - 5
direction. The parameters can be displayed in any combination except for grid and mesh, which cannot be displayed simultaneously. You can toggle on and off all the desired options. After you enable the desired combination of display options, choose Accept. The DISP ON SURF menu options are as follows: PorcupineRepresent the curvature of the surface in the u (first) and v (second) directions using porcupine display. Reflect CrvsDisplay the reflection curves on the surface. A reflection curve is defined by how a tubular light source reflects off a surface at a specified angle. Before the curves can be displayed, you must set up their display using the SetupOptions menu. IntersecCrvsShow how this surface intersects with other surfaces or datum planes by displaying a curve at their intersection. Before the curve can be displayed, you must set up its display using the SetupOptions menu. GridShow the defining grid of the surface. MeshDisplay a cosmetic mesh of equally spaced mesh lines on the surface in the u and v directions. AcceptAccept the selected combination of display options.
SetupOptionsSet up the display of porcupine curvature, intersection and reflection curves, the surface mesh, and the spectrum of colors used in color shading. Set the display options and parameters using the SETUP OPTS menu options. After you have set up the required display options, choose Done Setup. The possible options are as follows: PorcupineEnter scale values, density, and spacing settings for the porcupine isoline display. Reflect CrvsSelect a viewing plane for the reflection curves, a plane for the light sources, and light sources. IntersecCrvsSelect intersecting surfaces and planes. MeshEnter the number of mesh lines displayed in the u and v directions. SpectrumDefine the spectrum of colors used in the surface display.
13 - 6
2. Modify the surface using any or all the available options. When you have finished, choose Done from the MODIFY SRF menu.
Using the Control Poly Option

You can reshape a freeform surface in real time using the control polyhedron of a surface. If you chose the Control Poly option from the FREE FORM menu, continue as follows. How to Use the Control Poly Option 1. Choose options from the CNTRL POLY menu. The possible options are as follows: Poly MotionSet the poly motion region by specifying the portion of the surface to be modified and the rule according to which to implement the change. See Setting the Poly Motion Region on page 13 - 8 for more information. Crvtr SetupEnter values for the relative density of the curvature display and the relative curvature scale using the SPACING OPTS menu options. The possible options are as follows: UniformUniform spacing in this direction. CustomizedCustomize spacing in this direction by selecting points on the surface through which porcupine curves will pass. Keep CurrentDo not change the current spacing in this direction. NoneDo not display isolines in this direction (display isolines in the other direction only).
Mesh SetupEnter the number of mesh lines displayed in the u (first) and v (second) directions. Move PointSelect a surface point and move it using the displayed control polyhedron. See Moving Control Points on page 13 - 10 for more information. PreviewView the surface before and after reshaping. See Previewing a Modified Surface on page 13 - 12 for more information.
2. Choose Done Poly after the surface has been modified, or Quit Poly to restore the surface to its condition before these changes.
13 - 7
Setting the Poly Motion Region

The region of the surface to be reshaped can be defined by selecting bounding control curves. You can also specify the rule by which to implement the change. How to Define the Region 1. Choose Poly Motion from the CNTRL POLY menu. The system displays a control polyhedron with two arrows, one blue and one red. The blue arrow designates the first gridline direction, while the red arrow designates the second direction. 2. Choose First Dir or Second Dir from the GRIDLINE DIR menu. For each direction, select an appropriate option from the POLY MOTION menu. The possible options are as follows: LocalMove the selected point only. VarySmoothlyMove the points included in the specified region along a cubic curve. VaryLinearlyMove the points included in the specified region along a linear curve. Same OffsetMove all the points included in the specified region the same distance.
3. If you chose VarySmoothly, VaryLinearly, or Same Offset, you need to define the region. Select two bounding curves for the control polygon. For each direction, you can select a different POLY MOTION menu option. Note: If you set a poly motion region to VarySmoothly or VaryLinearly, you can select its boundaries for a move operation. If you set the poly motion region in one direction only, it turns orange; if you set it in both directions, it turns white. The following figure illustrates how setting the poly motion region affects the results of the Move Point option.
13 - 8
Possible Settings of the Poly Motion Region
Move this vertex of the control polygon with the Move Point option.
a) Poly motion region is set to Local.
b) Poly motion region is set to VarySmoothly.
These two points define the extent of the poly motion region for examples b, c, and d. ORIGINAL CURVE c) Poly motion region is set to VaryLinearly.
d) Poly motion region is set to Same Offset.
13 - 9
The following figure illustrates how to set the poly motion region on a surface. Effect of the Poly Motion Region on Move Point
For the first direction, choose VarySmoothly and set these control curves as boundaries of the region. For the second direction, choose Same Offset and set these control curves as the boundaries of the region.
Select this point and drag the attached region to obtain the desired shape of the surface.
Moving Control Points

You can smooth and reshape a surface by selecting and moving its control points. How to Reshape a Surface 1. Choose Move Point from the CNTRL POLY menu. 2. Select the control point to move. 3. Move the selected point using one of the following methods: Select a point and move it with the left mouse button. This method limits the point movement to be along the normal axis to the surface at this point only.
13 - 10
Use the thermometer-type scales. After you select the control point with the left mouse button, use the thermometer-type scales. Using the scales, you can do the following: Specify the move direction. Zoom the display. Pan the display left and right, or up and down. Control the relative distance moved for each point.
You can use the Along 1st Dir and Along 2nd Dir scales with the Pick Surf boundary definition only. For the Sket on Pln method, movement can be normal to the surface only and you must use the Norm to Plane scale. The following figure illustrates the thermometer-type scales that allow you to move the surface control points.
Move normal to the plane. Zoom the display.
Pan the display. Control the distance moved with each pick.
13 - 11
Previewing a Modified Surface

To compare the surface before and after moving the control points of the surface. How to preview changes 1. Choose Preview from the CNTRL POLY menu. 2. Choose an option from the PREVIEW menu. The possible options are as follows: Srfs To DispChoose which surfaces to display. Select New Srf or Old Surf from the SRF TO DISP menu, then choose the corresponding options from the PREVIEW menu. DispOnNewSrfSet up the display for the surface after the modification. Select the desired display options from the SETUP DISP menu and set display parameters where necessary. DispOnOldSrfSet up the display for the surface before the modification. Select the desired display options and set display parameters where necessary.
For the DispOnNewSrf and DispOnOldSrf options, the system displays the SETUP DISP menu. For information on how to set up the surface display, see Using the SetupDisplay Option on page 13 - 5. To toggle between surfaces, choose Srfs To Disp and check New Srf or Old Srf to specify the surface that you want to display. The system updates the screen graphics. When creating a freeform surface, you can trim or extend it to fit the underlying surface boundaries.
Redefining the Surface Grid

You can redefine the density of the surface grid by adding or removing control curves. When you redefine the grid, the system removes all surface manipulations and restores the feature to its original shape. How to redefine the density of the surface grid 1. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu. Use the SELECT FEAT menu to select the freeform feature. 2. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. Highlight the Grid element, then click Define.
13 - 12
3. Enter the new number of control curves in each direction. 4. The system displays the FREE FORM menu. To display the revised grid, choose SetupDisplay, DisplayOnSrf, and toggle on Grid. Choose Accept from the DISP ON SURF menu. 5. When you have finished redefining the feature, choose Done/Return from the SETUP DISP menu and Done from the FREE FORM menu. 6. To create the modified freeform feature, click OK in the dialog box.
13 - 13
14
Patterning Features
Patterns are multiple features created from a single feature (a pattern leader that behaves as one). Topic About Patterns Pattern Types Dimension Patterns Reference Patterns Modifying Patterns Table-Driven Patterns Page 14 - 2 14 - 3 14 - 6 14 - 19 14 - 19 14 - 23
14 - 1
About Patterns
When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. Do not confuse a pattern instance with a family table instance (see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). Except for the pattern dimensions that describe the placement of the pattern instances, each instance in a pattern has the identical dimensions as the pattern leader. You can pattern most features using the Pattern options from the FEAT menu. Patterns offer the following benefits: Creating a pattern is a quick way to reproduce a feature. It may be easier or more effective to perform operations once on the multiple features contained in a pattern, rather than on the individual features. For example, you can easily suppress a pattern or add it to a layer. A pattern is parametrically controlled. Therefore, you can modify a pattern by changing pattern parameters, such as the number of instances, spacing between instances, and original feature dimensions. Modifying patterns is more efficient than modifying individual features. In a pattern, when you change dimensions of the original feature, the system automatically updates the whole pattern. Note: A thin feature remembers the surface to which it is attached and patterns to this surface. The system allows you to pattern a single feature only. However, you can pattern several features as if they were a single feature by arranging them in a local group, then patterning the group. For more information, see Patterning a Group on page 15 - 36. After the group pattern is created, you can unpattern and ungroup the instances, then make them independently modifiable using the option Make Indep (for more information, see the chapter Modifying the Part).
14 - 2
The following figure illustrates examples of patterns. Pattern Examples
Patterning Features
Note: The system does not transfer the line style attributes of a datum curve to its patterns.
Pattern Types
There are two ways to pattern a feature using the PRO PAT TYPE menu: Dim PatternControl the pattern using driving dimensions to determine the incremental changes to the pattern. The dimension pattern must also exist before you can create the next pattern type. Ref PatternControl the pattern by referencing another pattern. For an example of a reference pattern, see the Reference Patterns diagram on page 14 - 19.
When you are working with features or components where it does not make sense to have both Dim Pattern and Ref Pattern, the system does not display the PRO PAT TYPE menu.
Pattern Options
Pro/ENGINEER defines patterns based on the complexity of features and surfaces involved in the pattern creation. Moreover, the system makes certain assumptions for each type of pattern. The less complex the pattern is, the more assumptions Pro/ENGINEER can make and the faster it creates the pattern. Pro/ENGINEER categorizes patterns into three types, using the options Identical, Varying, and General (available in the PAT OPTIONS menu).
Patterning Features
14 - 3
Identical Patterns
Identical patterns, the most simple, have the following restrictions: All instances are identical in size. All instances are placed on the same surface. No instance intersects the edges of the placement surface, any other instance, or any feature other than the placement surface.
Note that identical patterns regenerate the fastest of the three options. For an identical pattern, the system generates the first feature, then copies it exactly, including all the intersections. The following figure illustrates an identical pattern. Identical Pattern
Varying Patterns
Varying patterns are more complicated than identical patterns. The system makes the following assumptions about varying patterns: Instances can vary in size. Instances can be placed on different surfaces. No instance intersects any other instance.
For varying patterns, Pro/ENGINEER generates geometry for each feature individually, then generates all the intersections at one time.
14 - 4
A varying pattern intersects part geometry as a whole group. As a result, if you were to use Thru Next (for more information, see The Through Options on page 5 - 9) with a varying pattern, there would be only one creation direction for determining which is the next surface and you could get undesired results. To avoid this, use only general or identical patterns with the Thru Next option. The following figure illustrates a varying pattern. Varying Pattern
Patterning Features
General Patterns
General patterns allow you to create the most complex patterns. The system makes no assumptions about the instances of general patterns. Therefore, Pro/ENGINEER calculates the geometry of each individual instance and intersects each feature separately. Use this option when you expect the feature to touch other instances, intersect itself, or cross surface boundaries as it gets patterned. General patterns are required even if instances intersect inside the base feature and the intersection is not visible. The following figure illustrates a general pattern. General Pattern
a) Instances intersect inside the disk
b) Intersection of instances is visible
Patterning Features
14 - 5
Dimension Patterns
When you use the Dim Pattern option, you use dimensions called pattern dimensions to drive the direction and incremental changes of the pattern. Patterns are defined as unidirectional (such as a linear pattern of holes) and bidirectional (such as a rectangular array of holes). In other words, bidirectional patterns place instances in rows and columns (see the following figure). Pattern Directions direction 1 direction 1
direction 2 Unidirectional Bidirectional
Depending on what dimensions are chosen to vary, patterns can be linear or angular (see the following figure). Pattern Configurations
Linear
Angular
14 - 6
Creating a Dimension Pattern

To create dimension patterns, after you have created a feature, choose Pattern from the Feat menu, pick the feature, choose Dim Pattern, if necessary, and specify the pattern parameters. How to Create a Pattern 1. Specify the pattern leader. 2. Specify the pattern type. Select an option from the PAT OPTIONS menu: Identical, Varying, or General. 3. Specify the location of instances. To do this, first select how the dimension will be varied. The PAT DIM INCR menu lists the following options: ValueEnter an incremental value for the specified dimension. RelationAdd a relation to drive the dimension variation. See Pattern Increment Relations on page 14 - 13 for more information on using this option. TableAll dimension variations are controlled by a table. Select a dimension to drive the pattern table. See Table-Driven Patterns on page 14 - 23 for more information. Redraw DimsDisplay the dimensions for the pattern leader and pattern dimension.
Patterning Features
4. If you are creating a table pattern, select all dimensions that you want to include in the table and choose Done in the EXIT menu. For other then a table pattern, continues the procedure as follows. 5. Select a dimension to vary, then enter a value or relation for its increment (spacing). Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for every dimension driving the pattern in this direction. 6. When you have finished, choose Done from the EXIT menu. Enter the number of instances of the pattern for this direction. 7. If this is a unidirectional pattern, choose Done from the EXIT menu again, and the system creates the pattern. For a bidirectional pattern, perform Steps 3 through 6 again. When you choose Done for the second time, Pro/ENGINEER creates the pattern.
Patterning Features
14 - 7
Rotational Patterns
Rotational patterns use an angular placement dimension of the pattern leader to specify the location of instances. Any dimension that controls the angular position can be used to create a rotational pattern. Note: When you place a rotational pattern on a revolved or spline surface, always choose Varying or General. This is necessary because revolved surfaces are divided into two halves, and increments may rest on either one surface or both surfaces. Rotational patterns of placed features (holes and shafts) and sketched features (slots, cuts, protrusions, and ribs) are created slightly differently. The following sections describe how to create these two kinds of rotational patterns.
Rotational Patterns of Holes and Shafts

To make a rotational pattern of holes or shafts, use the angular placement dimension of the pattern leader as the driving dimension of the pattern. This dimension is created when you place the feature using the Radial option. In the example below, the General option is used to create the pattern, because the instances can lie on several surfaces (see the figure Rotational Pattern of Radially Placed Holes on page 14 - 9). How to Create a Rotational Pattern of Holes 1. Create DTM1 to be used as a reference surface for the feature location. Create the feature using the Radial placement option. To place the feature, use d4 for an angular dimension from DTM1 and d7 for the distance from the front surface. 2. Select d4 as a pattern dimension in the desired direction. Enter the value for the increment d13 and the total number of instances, p0. 3. After you create the pattern, you can enter the relation d13 =360/p0 to space the holes equally, regardless of the number of instances you choose.
14 - 8
Rotational Pattern of Radially Placed Holes
Patterning Features
Rotational Patterns of Sketched Features

Rotational patterns of sketched features are created by patterning the angle of the sketching plane, or the horizontal or vertical reference plane. To include the angle parameter of the datum plane as one of the pattern parameters, you must create the datum on-the-fly during feature creation by choosing Make Datum from the Setup Plane menu, then Plane, Through/AxisEdgeCurv, and Angle/Plane. If the leader of a pattern is available, it is preferable to modify the dimensions of the leader rather than modify the pattern dimensions. If the feature fails regeneration as a result of modifying leader dimension values, the system aborts the pattern creation. Note: Do not use the angular dimensions that controls centerlines of sketched features for rotational patterns. The results are not predictable.
Patterning Features
14 - 9
How to Create a Rotational Pattern of Sketched Features 1. Create DTM1 as a reference surface prior to feature creation. 2. Create the feature, selecting the front surface as the sketching plane. To create an angular reference, choose the Make Datum option and create a datum plane at an angle (d9) to DTM1. Sketch and regenerate the feature. Note: When you create a datum plane with a feature, the datum is not visible after the feature has been created. The parameter defining the datum plane becomes part of the feature. 3. After the pattern leader has been created, you can specify the pattern type option. Choose Varying. 4. Select the angular dimension, d9, as the first pattern dimension and enter the value for the angular spacing between the pattern features, d14. Choose Done, then enter the total number of instances in the pattern, p0. Choose Done again and the system creates the pattern. Rotational Pattern of Sketched Features
Note: Make sure all dimensioning references still make sense when the angular dimension increases or decreases within the range of the pattern member variation.
14 - 10
Creating an Angular Reference

A sketched feature can be patterned using an angular dimension of an internal datum plane created on-the-fly (either a datum plane used for sketching, or the one used for reference). For some patterns, when you create a pattern leader, you may need to create a number of datum planes on-the-fly. You can do this using the Setup New option in the Setup_Skn_Pln menu. In this case, the last datum you create using Make Datum acts as the sketching plane, while those preceding may be used for vertical or horizontal reference. How to Create a Pattern of Cylindrical Protrusions 1. Create a base feature and a datum plane, DTM1. Proceed to create a cylindrical protrusion by selecting Protrusion, One Side. 2. When the system prompts you to create or select a sketching plane, use the Make Datum option to create a datum plane, DTM2, with the Through/AxisEdgeCurve and Angle/Plane options, at an angle d2 to DTM1. 3. When DTM2 is created, choose the Setup New option from the SETUP_SK_PLN menu. Create a new datum, DTM3, using the options Make Datum and Offset. Enter the offset value d3 from DTM2. This offset datum (DTM3) serves as the sketching plane. 4. Specify the depth attribute as Thru Next. 5. Specify the direction of feature creation and orient the sketching plane. Sketch the section and regenerate the feature. After you have created the feature, DTM2 and DTM3 will not be visible on the screen. However, the feature will retain its angular dimension, d2. 6. To create the pattern, select the feature and choose General for the pattern type. Pick the angular dimension, d2, and enter a value for the increment and the total number of instances. Choose Done to end the process.
Patterning Features
Patterning Features
14 - 11
Creating a Pattern Using Restart DTM3
DTM1 d2
DTM2
Patterning Datum Axes

You can pattern datum axes that were created using the option Two Planes that reference offset or angled datum planes. You can select existing datum planes, or create them on-the-fly using the Make Datum option. After you create the first axis, the dimensions that reference the datum planes will apply to the axis. Select these dimensions as the pattern dimensions.
Varying the Spacing and Direction of Instances

You can modify patterns by varying the spacing between instances, as well as the sizes of the instances. You can specify more than one dimension when you locate instances in rows and columns. A positive or negative value for the increment determines the direction in which instances will be added. A positive increment causes the system to place instances in the same direction as the initial feature was placed, while a negative increment reverses this direction. You can reverse the direction in which instances are added to the pattern leader by specifying a negative increment.
14 - 12
Varying the Location and Size of Instances

The following figure shows how to vary both the location and size of instances. To locate the holes horizontally, pick d5 as the driving dimension and enter the value for d6 (the incremental dimension). To locate the holes vertically, pick d4 as the driving dimension and enter the value for d7 (the incremental dimension). To vary the diameter, pick d3 as the driving dimension and enter the value for the increment in the diameter (d8 - d3). Enter the total number of instances (including the original) in this direction. Pattern of Holes
Patterning Features
d4
d3 d8
d7
d5 d6 P0 HOLES
Pattern Increment Relations

You can use relations to drive patterns in two ways: At the time you select a dimension to drive the pattern in a specific direction (called the leader value), you can add a relation for that increment. This allows the incremental value to vary for each instance of the pattern. This is explained in more detail in the following procedure. You can redefine an existing pattern and use the Relation option to add relations that drive the incremental value for each direction. This affects all the pattern instances exactly the same.
Patterning Features
14 - 13
How to Add a Relation for a Pattern Increment 1. When the system displays the dimensions for the feature to be patterned, it displays the PAT DIM INCR menu. 2. Choose Relation. 3. Select the dimension. 4. Choose Edit. The system displays the relation window. Enter a relation for the pattern increment. You can enter any type of relation, including adding new parameters, simultaneous equations, and so on. You can use the following pattern parameters inside a pattern relation: LEAD_VParameter symbol for the leader value (the dimension you just selected to vary). MEMB_V Parameter symbol for instance value of the varying dimensions. MEMB_IParameter symbol for the incremental value of the varying dimensions with respect to the previous instance. IDX1 and IDX2 Pattern instance index values, which are incremented for each calculated pattern instance (see the following figure).
Note: MEMB_V and MEMB_I must appear in the relations, but they are mutually exclusivethey cannot appear in the same pattern relation together. Pattern Parameters
IDX1 = 1 IDX2 = 1
IDX2 Original feature IDX1 = 0 IDX2 = 0 lead_v IDX1 = 1 IDX2 = 0
IDX1 memb_i
14 - 14
The following relation produces the normal incremental values of a pattern: MEMB_V = LEAD_V + 10 * IDX1 ...or... MEMB_I=10 This relation locates each instance along this direction 10 units from the previous one. In effect, the incremental value of this pattern is 10. Other pattern examples are described in the following section.
Patterning Features
Example Pattern Using MEMB_V in a Relation

How to Create the Bidirectional Pattern 1. Select Pattern and pick the feature to pattern. 2. Select PAT DIM INCR > Relation and then select the dimension for the first direction. In this example, d3 is selected.
3. Enter the following relation: INCREMENT = 10 OFFSET = INCREMENT/2 TEMP = floor(idx2 / 2) if (TEMP * 2 != idx2) memb_v = lead_v + idx1 * INCREMENT + OFFSET else memb_v = lead_v + idx1 * INCREMENT endif
Patterning Features
14 - 15
Note: The function floor returns the next integer lower than its argument. See Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for more information on relations. In this example, floor is used to determine whether idx2, the row number, is an even or odd number. If idx2 is even, then 2*TEMP will be equal to idx2. If idx2 is odd, then 2*TEMP will be one less than idx2. Using the if/else statement we can control the offset for the odd rows, because idx2 starts with zero. If idx2 is odd, then the first expression is evaluated for memb_v. If idx2 is even, then the second expression is evaluated for memb_v. 4. Choose Done for the first direction and then select the dimension in the other direction. In this example, d4 is selected. Enter the increment between rows. This increment is shown as d7 in the next figure. 5. Select Done for the second direction to finish the pattern. If you want to keep the rows centered on the part, enter the following part relation. d7 = (d0- (2*d4))/(p1-1) In this relation d7, the incremental dimension in the second direction, is driven by the relation. d7 is determined by subtracting twice the initial offset d4 from the width of the part d0 and dividing by the number of holes one less in the second direction p1. With this relation, you can modify the number of holes and/or the length of the part, and the pattern will still remain centered with respect to the width of the part.
14 - 16
Example Pattern Using MEMB_V and MEMB_I

When you are including other pattern parameters, such as the number of instances (p#) in the relation, you must build the relation in two steps. You can include the p3 parameter in the relation only after the pattern is created. Therefore, you can use a placeholder, such as 10 in the example below, and then change it to p3 when the relation is created. How to Create This Unidirectional Pattern 1. Create a relation for each dimension in the first direction, including a temporary value instead of the p# value (see the figure Pattern Example: Step 1 on page 14 - 17). 2. After regenerating the pattern, modify the pattern relations because the pattern parameter p# is p3. To do this, select Modify, then choose a pattern member. When the system displays the dimensions, select d4 or d5. Modify the first line of the relation for d4 as follows: [incr = 180/(p3-1)] Modify the relation for d5 as follows: [memb_i = (d1-(2*d5))/(p3-1)] Pattern Example: Step 1
d1
Patterning Features
memb_i = (d1-(2*d5))/10 d5
d4
incr=10 memb_v = lead_v + 5 * sin(incr*idx1)
The resulting pattern for these relations is shown in the following figure. The pattern maintains the same relationship to the part, regardless of the change in the length d1, or the change to the number of instances in the pattern.
Patterning Features
14 - 17
Resulting Pattern
p3 modified to 10
p3 modified to 5
Tips for Creating Dimension Patterns

When you create dimension patterns, remember these tips: You can use a feature as a pattern leader for a single pattern only. After you create the pattern, the leader becomes part of the pattern and can no longer act independently. When you create a pattern leader, think of the dimensions you may need to specify the location of the increments. Keep in mind that for rotational patterns, a feature must have a built-in angular dimension. For other patterns, create a pattern leader with meaningful dimensions that will be used later to control the location and size of the increments. When you create a pattern leader for a rotational pattern of sketched features, introduce an angular dimension by creating a datum plane with the Make Datum option. A angular dimension controlling a centerline of a sketched feature should not be used to establish an angular reference. Only a datum plane constructed on-the-fly will set an angular dimension of the feature. When you select the pattern type, consider the regeneration time. For simple patterns, always use the Identical or Varying options to speed up the regeneration of the model. Use relations to control the location of instances when you expect the number of instances to vary. After you have created a pattern, enter a relation (for example, a relation governing the spacing between instances). In this case, whenever you modify the number of instances, the system calculates the spacing according to the formula you entered.
14 - 18
Reference Patterns
A reference pattern patterns a feature on top of any other patterned feature. Some references to locate the new reference pattern feature (for example, the slot in the following figure) must be to the original patterned feature only (such as the original hole in the following figure). The instance number is always the same as the original pattern; therefore, the pattern parameter is not used to control this pattern. If you add a feature that does not use the originally patterned feature to get its geometry references, you cannot use reference patterning for the new feature. Reference Pattern
Reference pattern of slot and original hole
Patterning Features
Pattern leader
Pattern of holes created using Identical and Dim Pattern.
Add a slot that is concentric to the original hole. It has no dimensions to the other features.
Choose Pattern and select the slot. Choose Ref Pattern and Done. The slot gets patterned automatically to the existing pattern of holes.
Modifying Patterns
After you have created a pattern, all instances, including the leader, act as one element. As a result, if you modify or delete any member of the pattern, all other members of the pattern will be modified or deleted.
Patterning Features
14 - 19
The number of instances in a pattern is a pattern parameter and therefore can be modified. If you decrease the number of instances, the system removes the members farthest from the parent. If you increase the number of instances, the system adds new members in the appropriate direction and increment.
Pattern Relations
How to Modify Pattern Relations 1. Choose Relations from the PART (or ASSEMBLY) menu. 2. Choose Pattern Rel from the MODEL REL menu. 3. Select a pattern by picking on a feature from the pattern. If the selected feature belongs to a feature pattern and group pattern, the PATTERN TYP menu appears with the following options: Feat PatSelect a feature pattern. Group PatSelect a group pattern.
4. To specify the pattern direction, choose First Dir or Second Dir from the PATTERN DIR menu. 5. For the selected direction, the system lists driver dimensions in the DRIVER DIM menu. As you place the cursor on the dimension listed in the menu, the system highlights the corresponding dimension on the screen. Select the desired dimension. 6. The RELATIONS menu appears. Use options from the RELATIONS menu to edit the relations. When you have finished editing, choose Done from the PATTERN DIR menu. 7. Regenerate the model to update the pattern. Note: Pattern member relations are independent from pattern leader relations. For example, if you want to change the relation of a pattern leader, you must change it explicitly.
14 - 20
Reducing a Pattern to a Single Feature

You can reduce a pattern to a single feature (or reduce a bidirectional pattern to a unidirectional pattern) by reducing the number of instance s to 1 in the desired direction. Set the configuration option retain_pattern_definition to one of the following values: yesPro/ENGINEER retains the pattern definition. This way, you can modify the number of instances again to a number greater than 1. noPro/ENGINEER deletes the instances, retaining only the parent feature. To recreate a pattern from this parent, choose Pattern and reenter new parameters for the pattern. If you pick any instance and use the Delete command, it causes all the instances to disappear, including the pattern leader. To recreate a pattern deleted in this way, you must start from creating the original feature.
Patterning Features
Deleting a Pattern
When you have a pattern definition and you want to delete the pattern without deleting the parent feature, use the option Del Pattern. This option removes all instances of the pattern. If the pattern number has been reduced to 1 but is retained, this option removes the pattern definition. How to Delete a Pattern 1. Choose Del Pattern. 2. Select any member of the pattern and select any number of patterns. 3. When you have finished, choose Done.
Restoring Pattern Relations

If a regeneration fails after you make changes to pattern relations, you can resolve the problem by restoring pattern relations. Normally, you need not restore all the pattern relations, but only those that caused the regeneration failure.
Patterning Features
14 - 21
How to Restore Pattern Relations 1. Choose Fix Model from the RESOLVE FEAT menu. 2. Choose Restore from the FIX MODEL menu. 3. Choose Relations from the RESTORE menu. 4. Choose Pattern Rel from the MODEL REL menu. 5. Choose one of the following options from the SELECT FEAT menu: SelectSelect from the screen and/or from the tree tool. Failed FeatSelect the failed pattern to have its relations restored.
6. Specify pattern direction by choosing First Dir or Second Dir from the PATTERN DIR menu. 7. The DRIVER DIM menu lists driver dimensions for the selected direction. Only driver dimensions whose relations have been modified are available for selection. Place a checkmark in front of the dimensions that you want to restore, and choose Done. 8. Choose Done/Return from the RESTORE menu. 9. Regenerate the model to restore pattern relations.
Restoring Pattern Dimensions in the Backup Model

Alternatively, you can perform the restore operation in the backup model by restoring all or selected pattern dimensions. This method gives you the benefit of seeing the failed pattern in the backup model. How to Restore Pattern Dimensions 1. Choose Backup Modl from the FIX MODEL menu. 2. Choose Confirm to continue. 3. Choose Restore in the FIX MODEL menu. 4. The Dimensions option in the RESTORE menu is active by default. To specify how you want to select dimensions to be restored, choose an option from the RESTORE DIM menu: SelectRestore selected dimensions by choosing them from the SEL MOD DIM menu. By FeatureRestore all dimensions of the selected feature. Use options in the SELECT FEAT menu to indicate the feature whose dimensions you want to restore.
14 - 22
AllRestore all modified model dimensions.
Patterning Features
5. The system informs you that the modified dimensions are restored. To transfer the results into the current model, choose Current Modl from the FIX MODEL menu. 6. Regenerate the model to restore the pattern dimensions.
Table-Driven Patterns
You can also pattern features using pattern tables. Pattern tables simplify the creation and modification of patterns, enabling you to control all the dimensions for the pattern instances through a table. Each pattern table drives its pattern throughout its existence. Multiple tables can be established for a pattern, so you can change the pattern by switching the table that drives it. You can modify a pattern table at any time after you create the pattern. Suppressing or deleting a table-driven pattern suppresses or deletes the pattern leader, as well. You can use pattern tables in Assembly mode to pattern assembly features and components. Pattern tables are not family tables. Although some terminology for the two types of tables is similar (such as the term instance), pattern tables drive pattern parameters only, and pattern instances cannot be made independent of their pattern table. You can also include pattern tables in family tables so a particular family instance can use a specified pattern table. See the Fundamentals manual for information on including a pattern table in a family table. Pattern table functionality is accessed through the PATT TABLE menu. This menu contains the following options: EditDisplay an editor window (the default part table editor) to modify the content of the pattern table. AddDisplay an editor window to create a new pattern table for the current feature. RemoveDelete a pattern table for the current feature. RenameChange the name of a pattern table for the current feature.
Patterning Features
14 - 23
SwitchMake a different pattern table drive the pattern for the current feature. WriteOutput the current pattern table to an ASCII file with the extension .ptb. ReadImport a pattern table from an ASCII file with the extension .ptb.
How to Pattern a Feature Using a Pattern Table 1. Choose Pattern from the FEAT menu. Select the feature that you want to pattern. 2. The system displays the PAT OPTIONS menu. Choose Identical, Varying, or General, then Done. If the pattern is identical, the system prompts you to specify the dimensions that vary the section or size of the feature, but they will be not be used. To actually change such dimensions, the pattern must be varying or general. 3. The system displays the PAT DIM INCR menu with the options Value, Relation, Table, and Redraw Dims. If the dimensions of the feature are not visible, choose Redraw Dims to display the dimensions. 4. Choose Table. 5. Pick dimensions to enter into the table in order of their importance (this has no effect on the performance of the table). When you have finished, choose Done from the EXIT menu. 6. The system displays the PATT TABLE menu. Choose Add. 7. Enter the name for the pattern table. 8. The system displays the default part table editor window. Edit the pattern table. If you are using Pro/TABLE, the system will have already created column headings for you, with idx being the first column, followed by each of the pattern dimensions in the order that you picked them. You must enter the index number. 9. Choose Done from the PATT TABLE menu to create the pattern.
14 - 24
How to Create a Table-Driven Pattern by Converting a Value-Driven Pattern 1. Create a value-driven pattern (choose Value from the PATT DIM INCR menu), selecting every dimension that can be changed between pattern feature instances or from one pattern table file to another. If you do not select a dimension now, you cannot add it later without recreating the pattern. 2. Choose Redefine and Done, then pick a feature in the completed pattern. Choose the Pattern element and Define in the dialog box. 3. Choose To Table from the REDEF PATT menu and enter a name for the pattern table. The system creates a table that contains all the instances in the current pattern. To edit this table, choose Modify, PatternTable from the MODIFY menu, select the feature to modify, then choose Edit from the PATT TABLE menu.
Patterning Features
Modifying Table-Driven Patterns

There are three ways to modify a pattern that is table-driven. You can modify any pattern dimensions as you would any other feature by doing the following: Select the values on the screen, enter new values, and regenerate the model. Modifying values on the screen causes them to be permanently modified in the current pattern table as well. This allows you to modify any value for the pattern, except the instance index number. The value of the index number (idx) is determined exclusively by the number of entries in the pattern table. Edit the table directly. This enables you to modify multiple values for multiple instances, and to add or remove instances. If you have multiple pattern tables, replace the current table with another table. This causes the pattern to be driven by a completely different set of values.
Patterning Features
14 - 25
How to Access the Patt Table Menu for Modifying the Pattern After its Creation 1. Choose Modify from the PART menu. The system displays the MODIFY menu. 2. Choose PatternTable. 3. Pick an instance in the pattern that you want to modify, or pick one of its dimensions. The system displays the PATT TABLE menu. You can then make the following changes: Modify the pattern using a pattern parameter. Remove a pattern table. Rename a pattern table. Add new pattern instances by assigning a unique idx. Remove existing pattern instances. Switch pattern tables. Write a pattern table to a file. Read a pattern table from a file.
Variations of a Pattern Driven by the Same Dimensions

A pattern can have several corresponding independent pattern tables. If you modify the dimensions of one, the corresponding feature with the same dimension symbols in the other tables will not update. The following method allows you to create a pattern with multiple pattern tables, each representing a variation of the original pattern. You can then define relations for the dimensions such that a change to the dimensions for one instance of a pattern table will change for the others. For example, suppose you have a part with the following pattern of holes:
14 - 26
You want to create an instance of the part with this pattern of holes:
Patterning Features
In addition, you want the location of each of the corresponding holes in the two patterns to be linked such that if the location of one of the holes in either of the instances moves, the corresponding hole in the other instance also moves. Rather than create each hole as an independent feature, the following method allows you to use reference patterns (for more information, see Reference Patterns on page 14 - 19) and a single entry in the family table, regardless of the number of instances in the pattern. How to Create a Pattern That Has Several Variations, Each of Which is Driven by the Same Dimensions 1. Create a table-driven pattern with the maximum number of instances this pattern can possibly have, and every dimension selected that will be changed between pattern instances or pattern table files. If you do not enter an instance now, you cannot add it later without recreating the pattern. 2. Create a relation (for example, d7=2.0) for every dimension in the pattern table. Note: Each dimension in the pattern table being driven by a relation cannot be selected and edited. A relation updates any additional patterns substituted through the PATT TABLE Switch option, but modifying the dimension value does not update additional patterns. 3. Choose Modify from the PART menu and PatternTable from the MODIFY menu. Select a feature in the pattern. 4. Choose Write to write the pattern table to disk as a .ptb file. Choose Done from the PATT TABLE menu. 5. Choose Misc from the MAIN menu, then System to open a window. Copy the .ptb pattern table file written in Step 4 to as many new names as there are different pattern table variations. This step can be repeated each time you need more pattern tables. Exit the system window.
Patterning Features 14 - 27
6. Next, choose Modify from the PART menu and PatternTable from the MODIFY menu. Select a feature in the pattern. 7. Read in the new pattern tables (from Step 5), then use Switch and Edit from the PATT TABLE menu to change them to represent the desired configurations. 8. Regenerate to see the pattern in the new configuration. The pattern table can now be used in family tables and you can substitute the different variations by entering their names as family table instances (for details, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER).
Pattern Table Example

The following example illustrates how you can create a pattern using a pattern table and how you can then modify the pattern by editing the pattern table. The part used in this example is a rectangular solid that is 20 inches wide, 20 inches long, and 2 inches thick. The feature to be patterned is a straight, through-all hole that is 1 inch in diameter, located 1.5 inches away from both the parts left edge and its top edge. After choosing Pattern from the Feat menu, pick this feature as the feature to pattern. The dimensions of the hole are displayed here in symbolic format so that later you see the order in which they are present in the table. Pattern Leader
d23
d24
d22
To illustrate redefining patterns, this pattern is initially defined as Identical. However, in an actual application, if you may want to vary the size of the instances, define the pattern as Varying.
14 - 28
Select the hole dimensions to enter them into the pattern table. Select the diameter dimension, the distance from the left edge, and the distance from the top edge. Choose Add from the PATT TABLE menu and enter the name hole_1 as the name of the pattern table. The system displays the default part table editor window (Pro/TABLE was used for this example). Edit the pattern table and add seven pattern instances. Enter the values for the index number (idx), diameter, distance from the left edge, and distance from the top edge. Index numbers need not be consecutive or in any order, but they must be unique within a table to correspond to each instance. The figure Pattern Table for Hole_1 Example shows these values as they would appear in the Pro/TABLE editor. To save the values, exit from Pro/TABLE. Choose Done from the PATT TABLE menu to create the pattern (see the next figure). In this example, the pattern instances run clockwise, but it is not necessary to create the instances in any particular order. Pattern Table for Hole_1 Example
Patterning Features
Patterning Features
14 - 29
Hole_1 Example of Table-Driven Pattern
Later, you modify the table, as shown in the figure Modified Pattern Table for Hole_1 Example. In addition, because the diameters of the holes in the pattern will now vary, you must redefine the pattern options from Identical to Varying. To do this, choose Feature and Redefine and pick on a hole in the pattern. Choose Pattern and Define in the dialog box. Choose Pat Options from the REDEF PATT menu. In this case, choose Varying and Done from the PAT OPTIONS menu, followed by Done/Return from the REDEF PATT menu. Note (see the following figure) that there are fewer instances, some of the diameters and distances from references have been changed, and one hole has been located in the middle of the part. After you edit the pattern table, regenerate the part to implement the change.
14 - 30
Modified Pattern Table for Hole_1 Example
Patterning Features
Hole_1 Example of Modified Table-Driven Pattern
Patterning Features
14 - 31
15
Copying Features
The functionality in this chapter is available only with the optional module Pro/FEATURE. However, any Pro/ENGINEER user can retrieve a part that has groups. Pro/ENGINEER provides several tools to copy features quickly within the same part or to different parts. Topic Feature Copying Terminology and Uses Copying Features User-Defined Features Placing a UDF Local Groups Operations on a Group Mirroring the Model Page 15 - 2 15 - 3 15 - 12 15 - 25 15 - 32 15 - 33 15 - 39
15 - 1
Feature Copying Terminology and Uses

The following table presents definitions of and uses for the feature copying functionality.
Copying Features
Definition
Copy features from any model by selecting new references, translating, rotating, or mirroring. Save time by reusing features from any model. Establish dependency between dimensions of different features in the same model. A set of features from any part that can be placed in any other part by specifying new references. Establish a library of commonly placed features. Reuse features from any part. Enforce consistent design techniques by creating dependencies for a UDFs parent model. User-specified prompts for defining references guide you in placing the UDF. Let you specify new values for dimensions when placing the UDF with variable dimensions. Provide a simple way to create variations of features in the UDF with Family Tables. Let you incorporate Pro/PROGRAM into the UDF for further customization. A named set of consecutive features that is the result of copying features, placing a UDF, or creating a local group. Simplify selection for operations involving multiple features such as: Pattern, Delete, Copy, Suppress, and Reorder. Help organize the model tree by collapsing related features into a single node.
Uses
User-defined feature (UDF)
Definition
Uses
Important aspects of UDFs
Group
Definition
Uses
15 - 2
Copying Features
The Copy option in the FEAT menu allows you to copy existing features of the same or a different model and place them at a new location on the active part. You can copy any number of features at one time. The Copy option creates a local group of the copied features. When you copy a feature, you can vary the following: References Dimension values Placement location
Copying Features
You can copy features into the current part, with or without external references, from parts or assemblies. You can copy features from a different model by using new references. You can also copy features from another version of the same model by using the same or new references. When you copy a feature with new references, Pro/ENGINEER makes all the necessary prompts, highlighting each placement reference so you can enter the corresponding reference.
The Copy Feature Menu

The COPY FEATURE menu lists different options for copying features. They are: Specify the placement method by choosing one of the following options: New RefsCopy features with an option to select new references for the copied features. Same RefsCopy features using the same references as the original features. You can vary dimensions in the copied features. MirrorCopy features by mirroring about a planar surface or a datum. Pro/ENGINEER mirrors the features automatically without displaying a dialog box. MoveCopy features by specifying translation and rotation. This option allows for additional transformation beyond what you can achieve by varying dimensions. Specify features to copy by choosing one of the following options: SelectSelect features from the active model to copy.
Copying Features
15 - 3
All FeatSelect all the features to copy. FromDifModelSelect features from a different model to copy. This option is available with New Refs only. See the Independent option. FromDifVersSelect features from a different revision of the current model to copy. This option is available with either New Refs or Same Refs. See the Independent option. Specify whether the resulting features should be independent by choosing one of the following options:
IndependentMake the dimensions of the copied feature independent of the dimensions of the parent. A feature that is copied from a different model or version is automatically independent. DependentMake the dimensions of the copied feature dependent on the dimensions of the parent. When you redefine the section of the dependent copy, all the dimensions show up on the parent. When you modify the original section, the system also updates the dependent copy. This option refers to sections and dimensions only. All other references and attributes are not dependent.
When you redefine a section of a feature that has a child created using Copy > Dependent, you cannot delete entities referenced to external geometry and you cannot align entities to external geometry.
Rules to Remember
Consider the following rules for the copy operation: If you copied geometry with Copy, Mirror, All Feat, any features inserted after you created the copy feature will not be copied. To avoid this, use Mirror Geom. You may not mirror or use the Same Refs option without also copying the features that own the references if those references have been consumed in the process of feature creation (for example, the edge reference of a round is consumed after the round is created). When you copy a round with user-modified transitions, only default transitions are copied with the round. If there is ambiguity between the new and old references, the system will issue additional prompts (for example, if one of references is a datum plane, the system will ask you to select the side of the plane to use).
15 - 4
For specifics of copying features in Assembly mode, see the following section.
Using the Copy Command in Assembly Mode

To copy features in Assembly mode, choose Copy from the ASSY
FEAT menu; this displays the COPY FEAT menu.
Copying Features
Consider the following restrictions in Assembly mode: In Assembly mode, the All Feat option is dimmed in the COPY FEATURE menu. You cannot mirror assembly components using Feature, Copy. Instead, use Component > Create > Mirror. A feature that contains external references to a different assembly component must either be copied in the assembly that contains the external reference, or be redefined in that assembly to eliminate the external reference.
Copying Features by Using Placement References

Use the New Refs and Same Refs options to create a copy by using the placement references (modified or the same) of the features selected for copy. How to Copy a Feature Within the Same Model 1. Choose Copy from the FEAT menu. 2. Choose New Refs or Same Refs, Select, Independent or Dependent, and Done from the COPY FEATURE menu. 3. Select features that you want to copy and choose Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. 4. Pro/ENGINEER displays the Group Elements dialog box. 5. The system shows the dimensions for the selected features and displays the GP VAR DIMS menu, which lists the dimensions. As you scroll down the list, the system highlights the corresponding dimension on the model. Select dimensions to vary by picking the feature dimensions from the screen or by placing a check mark in front of them in the GP VAR DIMS menu. When you have finished, choose Done. 6. At the prompts, enter the new values. If you chose Same Refs, the system copies the selected features.
Copying Features
15 - 5
7. If you choose New Refs, the system displays the WHICH REF menu and highlights each planar or linear reference for every selected feature, sequentially, in the reference color. Choose one of the following options: AlternatePick a new reference for the copied feature. SameIndicate that the original reference should be used for the copied feature. SkipSkip the current reference so you can redefine it later. For more information, see Defining Skipped References on page 15 - 30. Ref InfoProvide information explaining the placement reference.
When you have specified all the references, Pro/ENGINEER copies all the selected features. 8. At this point, you can redefine the dimensions or references, if desired, or choose Done from the GRP PLACE menu.
Copying Features Using New References

If you copy a feature and choose new references (sketching plane and reference plane) for the resulting feature, two different arrows appear to indicate the direction of the new planar references. The system highlights the original reference plane and its corresponding new reference plane in the reference color. The original reference has a reference color arrow attached to it, pointing in the viewing direction for that plane. The new reference has a red arrow attached to it. Flip the direction of the red arrow if necessary, then choose Okay from the DIRECTION menu to indicate which side of the new reference corresponds to the original reference with the reference color arrow.
Copying Features with the FromDifModel and FromDifVers Options

Note: When you copy a feature from one model to another, the feature will regenerate with the accuracy of the model into which it is copied. It is best, if possible, to have similar part accuracy in both models. For more information, see the Modifying the Part chapter. You can copy features from a different model (part or assembly) or from another version of the same model by using the FromDifModel or FromDifVers options, respectively. You can copy features with or without external references.
15 - 6
Before you start the copy operation: Retrieve into a separate window the part or assembly from which you want copy features. Before selecting Copy, make sure your destination model is active. Copying Features
To indicate the source model, the system prompts you to click in the model window; this activates this model so you can select the features to copy. After you select the features, the destination model becomes active again. How to Copy Features From Another Version of the Model by Using the Same Refs Option 1. Choose Copy from the FEAT menu. 2. Choose Same Refs, FromDifVers, and Done from the COPY FEATURE menu. 3. Select a model from which to copy the features. 4. Select the features to be copied. Choose Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. 5. The dialog box appears. 6. The system prints the units in the Message Window. Specify the placement scale, as described in Placing a UDF on page 15 - 25. Choose Done from the SCALE menu. 7. Choose OK from the dialog box. The system copies the selected features into the current model, keeping the same references. If a reference is missing in the destination model, the system instructs you to respecify all feature references. To define a missing reference, choose Alternate and pick a reference on the model (for more information on redefining a skipped reference, see Defining Skipped References on page 15 - 30). How to Copy Features From a Different Model or From Another Version of the Same Model by Using the New Refs Option 1. Choose Copy from the FEAT menu. 2. Choose New Refs, FromDifModel or FromDifVers, and Done from the COPY FEATURE menu. 3. Select a model from which to copy the features. 4. Select the features to be copied. Choose Done from the SELECT FEAT menu.
Copying Features
15 - 7
5. The dialog box appears. 6. The system prints the units in the Message Window. Specify the placement scale, as described in Placing a UDF on page 15 - 25. Choose Done from the SCALE menu. 7. The system displays the WHICH REF menu. As the system prompts you to select a reference that corresponds to the highlighted reference in the source model, choose an option from the WHICH REF menu. Choose Same to keep the same reference, Alternate to choose a new reference, or Skip to skip the current reference so you can redefine it later. Note: When you use the New Refs option to copy a feature and a feature reference is missing in the other version, use Alternate to select a new reference. 8. If any of the references are missing, an Information Window appears with a list of the skipped references. At this point you can do one of the following: If you want to redefine the missing references, choose Confirm from the CONFIRMATION menu. The system places you in the feature creation environment so you can redefine the feature element that uses the skipped reference. For more information, see Defining Skipped References on page 15 - 30. If you do not want to redefine the missing references, choose Cancel from the CONFIRMATION menu. The system displays the GP REFS menu. Place a check mark in front of the references that you want to specify and choose Done. The system brings up the WHICH REF menu with the Alternate, Same, and Skip options so you can resume the process of specifying the references which you identified with the checkmarks.
9. To complete the procedure, choose Done from the GRP PLACE menu, or choose any of the following options in the GRP PLACE menu: RedefineRedefine the group elements. Show ResultPreview the geometry. InfoShow the current status of the group prompts.
Copying Features by Mirror

The Mirror option in the COPY FEATURE menu adds geometry to the part by creating a mirrored copy of existing features and intersecting them with the part.
Note: Sections always regenerate at the pre-mirror location, using the pre-mirror references. Copying by Mirroring Features
Mirror plane Select the protrusion and cut to copy by mirroring. Both the protrusion and the cut are copied.
Copying Features
How to Mirror Features or Geometry 1. Choose Copy from the FEAT menu, then Mirror. 2. Select the features to copy, or choose All Feat. 3. Choose Independent or Dependent to establish whether the dimensions of the mirrored feature depend on those of the parent, then choose Done. 4. If you chose Select, when you have selected all the features you want, choose Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. 5. Select or create the mirror plane (see the figure Copying by Mirroring Features on page 15 - 9). Notes: If features are mirrored about a Make Datum, the datum plane becomes an independent feature in the model to give visual reference for the mirrored copy. Mirroring using the option All Feat creates an additional merge feature that is interdependent with the copied features. The merge feature is both a parent and a child of the copied features. Mirroring using the option All Feat mirrors suppressed features.
Copying Features
15 - 9
Mirroring coordinate systems always preserves the right-hand rule. Pro/ENGINEER mirrors the x- and y-axes of the coordinate system appropriately and determines the Z-axis. Mirror features use the original references.
Copying Features by Moving with Rotation and Translation

You can copy features to new locations on the part by translating them with respect to a coordinate system. How to Copy Features by Moving With Rotation and Translation 1. Choose Copy from the FEAT menu, then Move from the COPY FEATURE menu. 2. Choose Select to select individual features to copy, or All Feat to copy all features. 3. Choose Independent or Dependent to establish whether the dimensions of the translated feature depend on those of the parent. When you have finished, choose Done from the COPY FEATURE menu. After you have selected the features, choose Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. 4. Use the MOVE FEATURE menu to define the movement of the copied features. You can use the options Translate and Rotate together to define a single movement. The MOVE FEATURE options are as follows: TranslateMove (translate) the copied features using the GEN SEL DIR menu to specify the direction. Then, enter the translation (offset) distance. RotateRotate the copied features using the GEN SEL DIR menu to specify the direction. Then, enter the rotation angle. The GEN SEL DIR options are as follows: PlaneSelect a plane, or create a new datum plane to which the direction will be normal. Crv/Edg/AxisSelect as the direction an edge, curve, or axis. If you select a non-linear edge or curve, the system prompts you to select an existing datum point on the edge or curve to specify a tangent. CsysSelect an axis of a coordinate system as the direction, then enter the translation value for the coordinate system type.
15 - 10
For features created by translating copies of two other features (for which the dimensions of one of the original features is only referenced to the other feature being copied), Pro/ENGINEER translates the copied dimension references, along with the geometry. The copy and translation process automatically creates a group for the geometry and its dimensions. You can use the Ungroup option in the GROUP menu to allow independent selection of the individual dimensions and redefinition of the features.
Copying Features
Copying Features by Selection

You can change placement references immediately after you copy a feature to change the placement. If you chose Select from the COPY FEATURE menu, after you have selected the feature to copy, the system displays the GP VAR DIMS menu, which lists all the dimensions on the part. As you highlight each dimension, the system highlights the corresponding dimension on the part. Check off the dimensions you want to copy, then choose Done. You can redefine a copied feature when you are in the copy environment only. How to Redefine the Copied Element 1. Highlight the element in the dialog box that you want to modify and click Define. 2. If you selected the variable dimensions, the system displays the GP VAR DIMS toggle menu. If you selected the references, Pro/ENGINEER displays the GP REFS toggle menu. In either case, toggle on the items you want to change, then choose Done. 3. Enter the new values, as prompted. 4. When you have finished, choose OK from the dialog box to regenerate the part.
Making Dependent Copied Features Independent

The Make Indep option in the MODIFY menu causes the system to display the MAKE INDEP menu, which enables you to make a dependent copied feature independent of its parent, as if it had been copied using the Independent option. For more information, see Making Copied Feature Dimensions Independent on page 16 - 6.
Copying Features
15 - 11
User-Defined Features
User-defined features can be subordinate or standalone. Consider the following definitions: SubordinateA subordinate UDF gets its values directly from the original model at run time, so the latter must be present for the subordinate UDF to function. If you make any changes to the dimension values in the original model, they are automatically reflected in the UDF. A model can have more than one subordinate UDF associated with it. Items in the family table of a subordinate UDF show the identifiers and symbols from the original model. StandaloneA standalone UDF copies all the original model information into the UDF file. Because of this, a standalone UDF requires more storage space than a subordinate UDF. If you make any changes to the reference model, they are not reflected in the UDF. When you create a standalone UDF, you have the option of creating a reference part by copying the original part from which the UDF is derived. The reference part has the same name as the UDF, with the extension _gp. For example, if you name a UDF radial_holes, the reference part is named radial_holes_gp.prt. A reference part displays UDF references and elements through the original features.
Required Information for UDFs

Each UDF consists of selected features, all their associated dimensions, any relations between the selected features, and a list of references for placing the UDF on a part. The UDF dialog box provides a running status of these UDF elements during UDF creation and modification. Note: Reference dimensions, geometric tolerances, and surface finishes will not appear in any group instance, so you do not need to place them in the generic features. The following figure illustrates a patterned UDF, shown with its reference part.
15 - 12
Patterned UDF of Countersunk Holes

UDF members Reference part
Copying Features
Variable dimensions to be entered UDF members
Follow these recommendations for creating a UDF: Make sure you have the desired dimensioning scheme. Provide the necessary relations between the defining features before you create the UDF. For example, a simple relation was added to the pattern shown in the figure above before the UDF was created. When you enter the number of instances in the pattern, the features are always spaced evenly. If a relation contains external dimensions (external to the features you are referencing), you can copy them by defining the Ext Symbols element when you create the UDF (see Defining External Symbols on page 15 - 20). Although a reference part is not required for a standalone UDF, it is useful to have a reference part displayed when you place a UDF. The system highlights the dimensions to be entered and the reference information at the appropriate times during the UDF placement. If you have no reference part, the number of UDF elements you can modify is limited. See the following figure for an illustration of a UDF and its reference part.
Copying Features
15 - 13
Placement References on a Reference Part

Placement surface Reference part
Angular reference datum Axis for radial placement
Restrictions on UDFs
Consider the following restrictions when working with UDFs: When creating a UDF or copying features, you cannot mix features from the merged geometry group (created with the By Copy option) with features outside of this group. Parameters not used in relations are not copied with UDFs to another part. A UDF created in Part mode can be used in Assembly mode to create assembly features, as long as that UDF does not contain features that are not allowed for assembly features (such as rounds). When you copy a group with an advanced round which contains user-defined transitions, the system removes user-defined transitions from the resulting feature. Redefine the round transitions in the new feature, as appropriate.
Dimension Types
You can create a UDF with the following dimension types: Variable dimensionsDimensions for which you will enter values when you place the UDF in a part. Invariable dimensionsDimensions that you will not change when you place the UDF in a part.
15 - 14
Table-driven dimensionsDimensions and dimension tolerances for which values are given in a family table. Every instance in the family table has its own dimension values. For more information, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Creating a UDF
Copying Features How to Create a UDF 1. Choose UDF Library from the FEAT menu. The UDF menu lists the following options: CreateAdd a new UDF to the UDF library. ModifyModify an existing UDF. If there is a reference part, the system displays the UDF in a separate part window. This option is not available in Assembly mode. ListList all the UDF files in the current directory. DbmsPerform database management functions for the current UDF. See DBMS Functions with UDFs on page 15 - 24. IntegrateResolve the differences between the source and the target UDFs.
2. Enter a name for the UDF. 3. Choose one of the following options in the UDF OPTIONS menu, followed by Done: Stand AlonePro/ENGINEER copies all the required information to the UDF. Respond to the prompt whether to include a reference part. SubordinatePro/ENGINEER copies most of the information from the original part at run time.
Notes: A standalone UDF cannot have an assembly as a reference model, but a subordinate UDF can. See The Copy Feature Menu on page 15 - 3 for more information. Punch and Notch UDFs (Pro/SHEETMETAL) cannot be subordinate.
4. The system displays the UDF feature creation dialog box with the following elements: FeaturesSelect features to include in the UDF.
Copying Features
15 - 15
Ref PromptsEnter prompts for specifying placement references. The system will print these prompts to guide you when you place the UDF. Var ElementsSpecify feature elements that you want to be able to redefine when you place the UDF in a part. Var Dims(Optional) Select dimensions that you want to modify when you place the UDF in a part and enter prompts for them. Dim Values(Optional) Select a dimension that belongs to the UDF and enter its new value. Family Table(Optional) Create a family table of UDFs. Units(Optional) Change the current units. Ext Symbol(Optional) Include external dimensions and parameters in the UDF.
5. Choose the Features element and Define from the dialog box. 6. Pro/ENGINEER displays the UDF FEATS menu, which lists the following options: AddAdd a feature to the UDF. RemoveRemove a feature from the UDF. ShowHighlight all the features in the UDF. InfoList all the features in the UDF in the Information Window.
7. Choose Add from the UDF FEATS menu. 8. Using the SELECT FEAT menu, select the features to add to the UDF. When you have finished, choose Done from the SELECT FEAT menu and Done/Return from the UDF FEATS menu. 9. Enter the prompts for the references used by the selected features. The system highlights each reference and asks you to enter the prompt. For example, if you enter [bottom surface] for the highlighted surface, then when you place the UDF, the system will prompt you, Select the bottom surface. When you specify a prompt for a placement reference that is used by more than one feature in the UDF, the system lets you specify either single or multiple prompts for this reference. Choose the desired option from the PROMPTS menu and then select Done:
15 - 16
SingleSpecify a single prompt for the reference used in several features. When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the reference you select for this prompt applies to all features in the group that use the same reference. MultipleSpecify an individual prompt for each feature that uses this reference. If you select Multiple, the system highlights each feature that uses this reference, so you can enter a different prompt for each of them.
Copying Features
10. After you have entered all the prompts, the system displays the MOD PRMPT and SET PROMPT menus so you can change any prompt as follows: Use Next and Previous from the MOD PRMPT menu to select the prompt you want to change, and enter the new prompt instead. To change a single prompt (specified for the placement reference used in several features) into multiple prompts, find a prompt that you want to change, choose Multiple, and enter an individual prompt for each feature, as prompted by the system.
11. If you are satisfied with the prompts, choose Done/Return from the SET PROMPT menu. 12. The required elements in the UDF dialog box have been defined. You can complete the creation of the UDF by choosing Done/Return from the UDF menu and then clicking OK in the UDF dialog box, or define any optional elements as described in the following sections.
Defining Optional Elements

The following sections describe how to define optional elements for the UDF. Defining Variable Elements When you create a UDF, you can specify feature elements (for example, attributes or a section of a particular feature) that you want to redefine when you place the UDF. Note: As an alternative to defining variable elements, you can skip references during the placement of the UDF, and the system will ask you to redefine the features that have missing references.
Copying Features
15 - 17
How to Define Variable Elements in the UDF 1. Select the Var Elements element in the dialog box and click Define. 2. Select a feature that belongs to the UDF for which you want to specify variable elements. 3. The system displays the SEL ELEMENT menu, which lists the elements of the selected feature. Place a check mark in front of the elements you want to define as variable, then choose Done. 4. When you finish selecting variable elements, choose Done Sel from the GET SEL menu. Creating a Family Table of UDFs You can create a family table of UDFs by defining the Family Table element in the UDF dialog box. For more information on creating family tables, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER. Defining Variable Dimensions You can select dimensions that you may want to modify when you place the UDF.
How to Define Variable Dimensions in the UDF 1. Select the Var Dims element and Define in the dialog box. 2. The VAR DIMS menu appears with the following options: AddAdd one or more dimensions to those that are variable. Choose the Add Dims option to select or show the dimensions, and choose Done/Return when you have selected all the dimensions. RemoveChange the variable dimensions to be invariable. Choose the Remove Dims option to select or show the dimensions, then choose Done/Return. ShowHighlight all the variable dimensions in the reference color.
3. To add a variable dimension, choose Add. 4. Specify the selection method by choosing one of the options in the ADD DIMS menu: Select DimSelect one of the UDF dimensions. Select AllSelect all the UDF dimensions.
15 - 18
Show AllHighlight all the invariable UDF dimensions in the reference color.
5. After you have selected dimensions, choose Done/Return from the ADD DIMS menu. 6. If you want to remove a variable dimension, choose Remove from the VAR DIMS menu. Specify the selection method by choosing one of the options in the REMOVE DIMS menu: Select DimSelect one of the UDF dimensions. Select AllSelect all the UDF dimensions. Remove LastChange the last variable dimension selected to be invariable.
Copying Features
Select dimensions and choose Done/Return from the REMOVE DIMS menu. 7. Enter prompts for variable dimensions. Using Pro/PROGRAM Pro/PROGRAM is available only for subordinate UDFs. In your Pro/PROGRAM design, include only features needed to define the UDF. You can add any standard Pro/PROGRAM control statements (for details, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). How to Activate Pro/PROGRAM in the UDF Dialog Box 1. Select the Pro/PROGRAM element in the UDF dialog box and click Define. 2. The system displays the PROGRAM menu, which lists the following options: Show DesignShow the current design in an Information Window. Edit DesignModify the design with the system editor. The GET INPUT menu allows you to choose the source of values for the Pro/PROGRAM inputs for the model. Choose Current Vals to use the current values, Enter to enter new values from the keyboard, or Read File to read in new values from a file.The system then adds the Pro/PROGRAM design for the UDF features to the model. If a Pro/PROGRAM already exists in the model, the system integrates the changes. Choose one of the options, then Done/Return.
Copying Features
15 - 19
When you add an instance of a subordinate UDF on a model, the system copies any Pro/PROGRAM control statements that affect the UDF features into the model, and executes the program. Pro/ENGINEER also copies INPUT statements (see the Fundamentals manual). You copy relations in the same way as regular UDFs (see Required Information for UDFs on page 15 - 12). Note: The control statements are copied only once at placement time. They are not recopied on regeneration, even if the group is UDF-driven. Defining External Symbols You can define any symbols in the group relations (dimensions and parameters) that are external to the group being defined. How to Define External Symbols 1. Select the Ext Symbols element in the UDF dialog box and click Define. 2. The system displays the EXT SYMBOLS menu, which lists the following options: AddAdd the undefined external symbols to the UDF. RemoveRemove the defined external symbols from the UDF. ModifyModify the defined external symbols in the UDF. ShowShow the external symbols and their corresponding status in an Information Window.
3. Choose Add to add a symbol. 4. The system also displays the SEL SYMBOLS menu, which lists the following options: SelectSelect the symbols from a data menu. From RelsUse all the external symbols in the relations. EnterEnter the name of an external symbol at the input prompt. Choose Select. 5. Pro/ENGINEER displays the EXTERNAL menu, which lists all the external symbols in the UDF being created, along with the options Select All and Unsel All. Place a check mark in front of the external symbols that should be defined, then choose Done Sel from the EXTERNAL menu.
15 - 20
6. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SYMBOL ACTION menu, which lists the following options: ConvertConvert the external symbol to Pro/PROGRAM input. ReplaceReplace the symbol with an alternate symbol at the time of group placement. Copying Features
Select the action for the specified symbol, then choose Done. 7. At the prompt, enter the alternate name for the symbol. 8. For each external dimension that is being defined, the system highlights the external symbol in the reference part and prompts you for a new prompt to be displayed for the dimension (or parameter) when you place the group. Enter the prompt for the external symbol. During placement of the group, after you have resolved the placement references, any external symbols that have been previously defined in the UDF are highlighted in the reference part, one by one. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to select the alternate dimension or parameter in the target part. External symbols that were defined with the Pro/PROGRAM Convert option during creation are converted to Pro/PROGRAM input dimensions or parameters.
Example for Creating a UDF

The UDF in this example has a family table and variable dimensions and contains a countersunk hole. The callouts in the figure correspond to the step numbers in the procedure.
Copying Features
15 - 21
Countersunk Hole Feature
head height head half angle placement

radial
diameter depth
in pattern
How to Create the UDF
number of holes
1. Choose UDF Library from the FEAT menu, then choose Create from the UDF menu. 2. Enter a name for the UDF. The name in this example is RAD_HOLES. 3. Choose Stand Alone and Done from the UDF OPTIONS menu, then reply to the prompt of whether to include a reference part. If a UDF is being created from a large part, you may want to answer no to the prompt to save disk space. Immediately after creating the UDF, place the UDF on a simple part that contains the same placement references. At this time, you can save the UDF with a reference part. In this example, the part is small and is saved as a reference part by answering the system prompt with yes. 4. In the dialog box, select the Var Dims element and click Define. Choose Add from the UDF FEATS menu.
15 - 22
5. Select all the features needed to define the UDF. You need to select only one of the holes because it is part of a pattern. Choose Done, then Done/Return from the UDF FEATS menu when you have finished. 6. Enter the prompts for the placement references. For example, you can enter: [the axis at the center of hole pattern]. At placement time, the system prompts you to select the axis at the center of the hole pattern. 7. After you have entered all prompts, choose Done/Return from the SET PROMPT menu. 8. Use the VAR DIMS and ADD DIMS menus to select the variable dimensions. In this example, the variable dimensions selected are the distance between holes, the depth of the hole, and the number of features in the pattern. Enter the prompts for these dimensions. For example, when the pattern symbol is selected, enter the prompt Specify the number of holes. When the UDF is used, the user will be prompted to enter the number of holes. 9. To create a family table, select the Family Table element in the dialog box and click Define. Choose Add Item from the FAMILY TABLE menu (see the Fundamentals manual), then choose Dimension from the ITEM TYPE menu. Select the dimensions to add to the table. These include the head height, hole basic diameter, and a standard offset from the reference faces. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to enter a symbol for the dimension in the table [d#]: symbol-name where d# is the dimension name, and the symbol name appears in the family table below the corresponding dimension name. For example, in the figure Family Table in the UDF on page 15 - 24, d8 is the dimension name corresponding to the symbol name CHAMF_DIST. 10. Choose Edit from the FAMILY TABLE menu. When the table appears in the editor, add the instances QUARTER_INCH, THREE_EIGHTH, and ONE_HALF. Enter the dimension values for each instance. See the figure Family Table in the UDF for an illustration of a family table. 11. Choose Done/Return and Done when you have finished. At this time, any dimensions not entered in the family table or selected as variable dimensions are now invariable dimensions. You can modify these values by using the option Dim Values, or you can modify the generic feature or the values after the UDF is placed.
Copying Features
Copying Features
15 - 23
12. Pro/ENGINEER saves the UDF in the current working directory. You can copy the UDF to the library directory so others can use it. Family Table in the UDF
DBMS Functions with UDFs

The Dbms option in the UDF menu displays the DBMS menu, enabling you to perform standard database management commands specifically on UDFs. The DBMS menu lists the following options: SaveSave the UDF to disk. Save AsSave a copy of the UDF under a new name. BackupSave the UDF to a specific directory on disk. RenameChange the name of a UDF object. EraseErase the UDF from memory. EraseNotDispErase all the objects that are not being displayed in the current session. PurgePurge all previous copies from the disk. InstDbmsGenerate an instance index file for UDF instances regenerated and stored in the current directory. See Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for more information. Delete AllDelete the UDF from memory and disk. Note: When you use DBMS options, consider their effects on UDFs. When UDF-driven groups are present in your part, renaming and deleting removes needed references.
15 - 24
UDF Library Directory

Before you create a UDF, you may want to create a UDF library directory. By default, Pro/ENGINEER creates the UDF in the current directory. If you create a UDF library directory, make sure all users have Read access permission. When you create a UDF for general use, copy the UDF files, name.gph and name_gp.prt, to this UDF library directory. To access the UDF library directory in Pro/ENGINEER, specify the directory name with the configuration file option pro_group_dir. You can set up the directory tree to support the UDF library hierarchy. You can easily walk through this directory tree to search for a specific UDF to place on a part as a group. However, when you retrieve a part with a dependent group, the group file must be located in the directory set by the pro_group_dir option. For information on how to use family tables to create a library of features, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Copying Features
Placing a UDF
When you place a UDF, you copy the features into your model. The copied features become a group.
Types of Group Created from a UDF

Groups created from a UDF can be as follows: Independent groupsWhen you place a UDF on a part, you can create the resulting group as being independent of any changes to the UDF. The system copies all the required UDF values into the part, along with the UDF. UDF-driven groupsWhen you place a UDF on a part, you can create the resulting group as being a UDF-driven group. Changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the group when you choose Update from the GROUP menu. When a UDF is subordinate, a UDF-driven group is indirectly driven by the original model of the UDF. When you retrieve the part with a UDF-driven group, the variables are also updated.
Copying Features
15 - 25
Note: UDF-driven groups update dimension values only if the features included in the UDF have not changed since the UDF was placed. If features are added to or removed from a UDF, updating the UDF in a model does not add or remove the features. To add or remove features to/from a UDF, make a copy of the old UDF, rename it, and then recreate this new UDF in all models in which the old UDF was placed.
Changing the Group Type

If you no longer want a UDF-driven group feature to be UDF-driven, choose Disassociate from the GROUP menu. Select the UDF-driven groups to make independent, then choose Done/Return when you have finished. If, as variable elements, you redefine all the dimensions of a UDF-driven group, the group is no longer UDF-driven. Pro/ENGINEER disassociates the group and issues a message stating it has done so.
Procedure for Placing a UDF in a Model

The following procedure explains how to place a UDF. How to Place a UDF 1. Choose Create from the FEAT menu, User Defined from the FEAT CLASS menu, and retrieve a UDF to place as a group by using the GROUP RETRIEVE menu. ...or... Choose Group from the FEAT menu, Create from the GROUP menu, From UDF Lib from the CREATE GROUP menu, and retrieve a UDF using the UDF RETRIEVE menu. 2. A subordinate UDF always displays the original model. If a standalone UDF has a reference part, the system displays it in a subwindow if you answer yes to the prompt to retrieve the reference part. If the UDF has a family table, Pro/ENGINEER displays the RETR INST menu and the INSTANCES menu, which lists the instances. Choose the Retr Inst option (see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). The following figure illustrates a UDF with a reference part. Note that the reference part is displayed in the subwindow in the upper right corner.
15 - 26
UDF to Be Used in a New Part
Copying Features
3. The system displays the PLACE OPTS menu. Choose Independent and specify a scaling option from the middle portion of the menu, or choose UDF Driven, then Done. The PLACE OPTS menu lists the following options: IndependentCopy all the required UDF values into the part to create a group that will be independent of any changes to the UDF. UDF DrivenThe group remains driven by the UDF. The dimensions of a UDF-driven group update either automatically whenever the model is retrieved, or when you choose Update from the GROUP menu. Because the variable dimensions of a group are not UDF-driven, they are unaffected by any change to the dimensions of the UDF. In addition, variable elements are unaffected.
4. Specify the placement scale by choosing one of the options in the SCALE menu, followed by Done. The SCALE menu options are as follows: Same SizeKeep the group the same size as when you created it, by rescaling the dimension values while you place the UDF. This option converts dimensions as needed (for example, millimeters to inches). This option is available only when the model and the group have different units.
Copying Features
15 - 27
Same DimsKeep the same numeric value for all the dimension values, regardless of any difference in units for the model and the group. For example, the dimension 25 inches will become 25 millimeters. User ScaleScale all the dimensions by a scale factor you enter when prompted, but do not change the units of the group.
5. If the UDF you are placing has variable dimensions, enter their values at the system prompt. 6. Select the display option for invariable dimensions by choosing an option from the DISP OPTION menu, followed by Done. The DISP OPTION menu options are as follows: NormalCreate normal dimensions. You can then modify these dimension values to create a unique version of the group. Read OnlyMake the dimensions read-only. You can display them, but cannot modify them. BlankBlank the dimensions so they cannot be displayed or modified in any mode. Be careful using this option. The only way to retrieve the dimensions is to delete the group features and place the UDF again.
7. Place the UDF by selecting placement references. When you place the UDF, you can skip some of the placement references and redefine them later. As each placement prompt appears, select an action from the WHICH REF menu: AlternateSelect a corresponding reference by picking on the model. SameUse the current reference. This option appears only if the group is placed in the same model where it was originally created. SkipSkip the current reference and move on to the next one. Later, you must redefine the feature that requires the current reference.
15 - 28
8. After you have either defined or skipped all the references, an Information Window appears with a list of the skipped references. At this point you can do one of the following: If you want to redefine the missing references, choose Confirm from the CONFIRMATION menu. The system places you in the feature creation environment so you can redefine the feature element that uses the skipped reference. For more information, see Defining Skipped References on page 15 - 30. If you do not want to redefine the missing references, choose Cancel from the CONFIRMATION menu. The system displays the GP REFS menu. Place a check mark in front of the references that you want to respecify and choose Done. The system brings up the SEL REF menu with the Alternate and Skip options so you can resume the process of specifying the references which you identified with the checkmarks.
Copying Features
Note: The Skip option is available for features created in Release 16.0 and later through the dialog user interface. 9. After you complete the placement process, the GRP PLACE menu appears with the following options: RedefineRedefine the group references in the same way as you defined them. For more information, see the following section. Show ResultPreview the geometry. InfoShow the current status of the group prompts.
10. If you are satisfied with the group placement, choose Done from the GRP PLACE menu. The system creates the group.
Redefining the References Element

When you redefine the References element of the group feature, the GR REFS menu appears with all placement references listed according to their prompts. As you move the cursor across the list of references (with the exception of skipped references), the system highlights the corresponding reference geometry in both the model window and UDF subwindow. A system message reports on each highlighting action, explaining the colors used. Place a check mark in front of the references that you want to redefine.
Copying Features
15 - 29
Defining Skipped References

In order for the system to place the UDF correctly, you must define missing references by using the same options that you used to specify this reference originally. Typically, the system brings up the dialog box for the feature that uses the skipped reference. The dialog box lists only elements with skipped references and variable elements. Each skipped element has the status comment References are missing. To define the skipped reference, select the corresponding element from the feature dialog box and click Define. Depending on the type of reference skipped, the procedure for defining skipped references follows one of these scenarios: The skipped reference is used by an element other than a sketched section For the skipped reference, the system places you into the feature creation environment so you can redefine the element that uses the skipped reference. The skipped reference is a sketching plane or horizontal references of a section If you must redefine a sketching plane or horizontal references, the system displays the dialog box for the feature that used the skipped reference. From the dialog box, select the Section element and Define. Choose Sketch Plane from the SECTION menu and define it as appropriate. The skipped reference is used by a section (other than a sketching plane or horizontal reference) If you must redefine a section reference (for example, edges used as dimensioning references), the system displays the dialog box for the feature that used the skipped reference. Select the Section element and Define from the dialog box. Choose the Sketch option from the SECTION menu; the part reappears in the sketching view, and the SECTION PLACE menu appears with the following options: DragAndDropPlace the existing UDF section directly on the part by using the drag-and-drop technique. After you select this option, a red outline of the section, attached to the cursor, appears on the screen. Using the mouse, move the section to its new location and place it by pressing the left mouse button. Dimension the section to the part and regenerate it. To quit section placement, press the middle mouse button.
15 - 30
Note: The DragAndDrop option is not available for the sections that are either fully aligned to part geometry or created with the Use Edge option. Create NewDiscard the existing UDF section and create a new section. Confirm your intent by choosing Confirm. The SKETCH menu appears and you can sketch a new section.
Copying Features
When you redefine a missing reference used by several features, consider the following: If the skipped reference has a single prompt for all features, you must redefine this reference for each feature where it is used. For example, if you use an edge to place a hole and a cut, and you have set up a single prompt for both features, you must reselect the reference edge for both the hole and the cut if you skip the edge reference when you place the group. If the skipped reference has individual prompts for all features, you must redefine this reference only for the feature where it was skipped.
Failed Regeneration
When placement of a UDF fails because of incorrect references, you can either redefine the failed features or place the UDF incompletely by including only the fully defined or successful features. If you place an incomplete UDF, the excluded (or incomplete) features are still listed as group members in the Model Tree; however, they are marked as incomplete. When you redefine the incomplete group to specify missing feature referencesthe properly redefined features will appear in the group. Note: When a fully defined feature fails during placement, you can leave the group incomplete. How to Resolve the Placement Failure 1. When the UDF placement fails, the system brings up the FAILED FEAT menu and shows the reason for failure in the Message window. 2. Select an option from the FAILED FEAT menu, followed by Done. The options are: INFOObtain information about the features that could not be placed and reasons for failure. For example, Feature #12 (protrusion) failed regeneration. Could not determine feature depth.
Copying Features
15 - 31
IncompleteMake the failed feature incomplete, and place the group without regenerating that feature. Clip IncompleteMake the failed and all subsequent features incomplete, and place the group without regenerating these features. Redefine UDFRedefine the group so all of its features can be placed.
3. The GRP PLACE menu appears so you can continue with the group placement.
Feature and Dimension Names in a Group

After you place the UDF in a new part, the system gives new names to the groups parameters according to the consecutive sequence of dimension numbers of the part. If the UDF has features or dimensions with user-defined names, these names will be preserved in the resulting group. If these names already exist in the destination model, the system places the group using default names. You can view the original parameter names by choosing Info, Feat Infothe original names appear in parentheses next to the new parameter names.
Local Groups
Local groups differ from the groups defined from UDFs (see Placing a UDF on page 15 - 25) in the following ways: You cannot replace local groups. When you create a local group, you do not give placement references. Local groups provide the only way to collect several features to pattern in one operation as if they were a single feature.
When you create a local group, you must select the features in the consecutive sequential order of the regeneration list. A quick way to do this is to select the intended group by range (see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). If there are features between the specified features in the regeneration list, Pro/ENGINEER asks if you want
15 - 32
to group all the features in between. If you do not want to group some of the features within the sequential order, first reorder the features. For example, you can select features 2, 3, and 4, but you cannot select features 2, 3, and 17. In this case, reorder feature 17 to feature 4. Features that are already in other groups cannot be grouped again. Copying Features How to Create a Local Group 1. Choose Create from the GROUP menu and Local Group from the CREATE GROUP menu. 2. Select each feature to include in the local group. ...or... Select the starting and ending features. Choose Done. 3. Answer yes to the prompt asking if you want to group all the features in between. If you answer no to this prompt, the system does not create the local group.
Operations on a Group
After you place a UDF on a part, all features that were copied from that UDF become a group. The following feature operations treat groups as a single feature: Suppress Delete Layer Group/Pattern Ungroup Note: To pattern a group with external references in Assembly mode, the parent assembly must be in session.
Copying Features
15 - 33
Selecting a Group by Name

For operations such as Replace, Pattern, Unpattern, and Ungroup, you can select a group from the Model Tree, or you can use the Sel By Menu option in the GET SELECT menu. When you choose Sel By Menu, the SEL OPTIONS menu appears with the following options: GroupSelect the group name from the Group Names dialog box. When you move the cursor over a group name in the dialog box, the group will highlight on the screen. FeaturesSelect the group by its ID, number, or name from the SPECIFY BY menu. You can also select the last feature using this menu.
Replacing a Group
After you placed the UDF, you can replace it with another one that has the same number of references and lists them in the same sequence. When you replace the group, the system suppresses the original group and keeps it in the model. The suppressed groups are available for selection when you replace the group next time. Children of the suppressed group are suppressed with the group. For example, when you replace a patterned group, the pattern becomes inactive, and it becomes active when the original group is replaced back. In a group defined from a UDF that has a family table, you can replace any instance with any other instance of the same family table. Note the following restrictions: Both groups must have the same number of prompts, type, and order of references. For example, a group that uses a linearly placed hole cannot be replaced with a group that uses a radially placed hole; one has two references to edges or surfaces for linear dimensions, the other has one reference to axis for rotational center and one reference to the edge or surface for angular dimension. These are not compatible. See Replacement Conditions on page 15 - 35 for more information. Groups with suppressed children cannot be replaced. Local groups cannot be replaced.
See the Assembly Modeling Users Guide for information on creating an interchangeable group.
15 - 34
Replacement Procedure
Each time a group is replaced, Pro/ENGINEER keeps track of the group being replaced as it becomes inactive and adds it to a list of inactive groups. How to Replace One Group With Another, or Replace a Group With an Instance From a Family Table 1. From the GROUP menu, choose Replace. 2. Select the group feature to replace in the part using the SELECT FEAT menu. 3. Select the new UDF to place on the part to replace the group selected in Step 2. Choose Retrieve or Search/Retr to retrieve a new UDF for placement, or choose PrevReplaced to select from the namelist of the groups that has been previously replaced. Note: If the group is table-driven, you must also select an instance. 4. If the old and new groups are interchangeable, the system proceeds with the selections for scale and variable dimensions (if any). 5. If any features reference the group, the CHILD menu appears, which allows you to reroute, delete, suspend, or suppress the child feature. In this case, the Suppress option means that Pro/ENGINEER will make the child feature inactive, along with the group being replaced. As soon as you place the group back, the system resumes the child feature. 6. The replaced group and its children (if suppressed) become inactive.
Copying Features
Replacement Conditions
The system always attempts replacement for group instances that are from the same family table. The following examples illustrate when the system attempts replacement for groups that are not members of the same table, or that do not have a defined table. The system attempts replacement when the types of references are similar. For example, the existing group has the following references and prompts: edgeleft edge surfaceplace surface
Copying Features
15 - 35
axisAxis If the replacement group has the following references and prompts, Pro/ENGINEER replaces the groups: edgeleft edge surfaceplace surface axisaxis Replacement is not possible when the types of references are different. For example, the existing group has the following references and prompts: edgeright surfaceleft If the replacement group has the following references and prompts, Pro/ENGINEER does not replace the groups: edgeright edgeleft
Deleting a Replacement Group

Deleting the active group from the part deletes all the associated groups.
Patterning a Group
You can pattern groups created from UDFs and local groups using Pattern from the GROUP menu. You can select all the dimensions in the selected group, except those used to create a feature pattern within the group, as incremental dimensions. When you create a patterned group, one member represents the whole group. When regenerating, however, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates all the features individually. How to Pattern a Group 1. Choose Pattern from the GROUP menu. 2. Using the SELECT FEAT menu, select the group to be patterned. 3. Create a pattern as described in the Patterning Features chapter. 4. Specify the variable dimensions, increments, and number of instances.
15 - 36
When you pattern or copy a group, be careful which placement dimensions you select to increment or vary. If a feature in a group references another for placement (for example, a chamfer references the edge of a hole), you need to change only the placement dimensions of the referenced feature (see the following figure). Patterning or Copying a Group
Select placement dimensions of the hole.
Copying Features
If you place features in a group separately, you must change the placement dimensions of each member; otherwise, features with unchanged dimensions will have several copies superimposed on each other. As mentioned in Setting Up the Sketching Plane on page 4 - 3, a feature created using the Use Prev option (to select sketching and reference planes) has its own dimension if the previous section plane has one. To pattern a group that includes this feature, you must select and modify these dimensions.
Using the Group Menu

Another way to copy features quickly, without having to specify all the references is to combine the GROUP menu options Local Group, Pattern, Unpattern, and Ungroup. How to Copy Features Using the GROUP Menu Options 1. Choose Pattern from the GROUP menu. 2. Select the group to be patterned. 3. Specify the variable dimensions, increments, and number of instances.
Copying Features
15 - 37
4. Choose Unpattern to remove the pattern setting for a family table generic part, then select the pattern. 5. Choose Ungroup to disassemble the groups into individual features and select each group instance.
Rules to Remember
Remember the following rules when you work with groups and patterns: If the features of a group reference a pattern, you can create a pattern of the group referencing that base pattern (that is, a group reference pattern). If patterned groups are unpatterned, each group member behaves like a group of copied features. For dimension patterns, variable dimensions again become variable dimensions and can be modified individually. Other dimensions are still shared by the group unless you ungroup them and make them independently modifiable using the Make Indep option (see Making Dependent Copied Features Independent on page 15 - 11). You can delete an individual group to create an irregular pattern-like setting. You cannot ungroup patterned groups. You must first unpattern the groups, then ungroup them. The process of unpatterning and ungrouping features does not automatically give them individual dimensions. The original parent dimensions selected for the group and pattern still control all the features. To make them independently modifiable, use the Make Indep option (see the Modifying the Part chapter). You cannot pattern a feature that belongs to a group pattern. The workaround is to modify the number of group members to one, pattern the feature, then pattern the group again. If you redefined a feature in a group pattern, the system will recreate the pattern and assign new ids to pattern instances. Children of the original pattern members will fail because they lost their references. When you replace a patterned group, the pattern becomes inactive.
15 - 38
Mirroring the Model

All the geometry of a part can be mirrored at one time using the Mirror Geom option in the FEAT menu. This is similar to copying geometry by reference. The Mirror Geom option creates a merge featurethe mirrored geometry merged with the original geometry. Dimensions of a merge feature cannot be shown in drawings. To show the dimensions of features that are created by mirroring and copying, create the features instead using Copy, Mirror, and All Feat (see Copying Features by Mirror on page 15 - 8). How to Mirror All Geometry at One Time and Create a Merge Feature 1. Choose Mirror Geom from the FEAT menu. 2. Select a plane about which to mirror. Mirroring Part Geometry
Mirror plane Cut added after mirror
Copying Features
Original part
Mirror plane
Note: Mirroring coordinate systems follows the right hand rule. Pro/ENGINEER mirrors the x- and y-axes of the coordinate system appropriately, then determines the Z-axis.
Copying Features
15 - 39
16
Modifying the Part
You can modify a part by simply revising its dimension values or units, or you can redefine the way in which the part is built. This chapter describes all the ways you can make changes to a part. Topic Read-Only Features Modifying Dimensions Modifying Points in a Datum Point Array Modifying Features Redefining Features Redefining Datum Features Inserting Features Reordering Features Suppressing and Resuming Features Deleting Features Rerouting Features Simplified Representations Changing Part Accuracy Page 16 - 2 16 - 2 16 - 9 16 - 11 16 - 14 16 - 25 16 - 34 16 - 35 16 - 36 16 - 39 16 - 40 16 - 42 16 - 51
16 - 1
Read-Only Features
You may want to ensure that certain features cannot be modified at a later time. You can protect such features by declaring them to be read- only using the Read Only option from the Feat menu. The dimensions, attributes, scheme, and so on of read-only features cannot be modified and will not be regenerated when the part is regenerated. However, you can add features to the part that intersect the read-only features. When you make a feature read-only, Pro/ENGINEER makes it, and all the features that came before it in the regeneration list, read-only. How to Make a Read-Only Feature 1. Choose Feature from the PART menu. 2. Choose Read Only from the FEAT menu. 3. To select features to make them read only, choose one of the following options from the R-ONLY FEAT menu: SelectPick a feature to make it and all previous features read only. Feat NumEnter a feature external identifier to make it and all previous features read-only. All FeatMake all features read-only. CleanRemove the read-only setting from the features.
Modifying Dimensions
To modify dimensions, choose Modify then Value from the MODIFY menu and select a feature. The system displays all the dimensions associated with the specified feature. If you pick an edge that is shared by two features while you are using the Query Sel option, the system highlights the associated features in turn. The system displays the Confirm menu, which lets you step back and forth through the highlighted features to accept the ones you want.
16 - 2
Notes: Assembly features that are visible in Part mode do not contain dimensions unless the assembly in which they were created is also in session. See the Using Assembly Features in Part Mode section in the Assembly Operations chapter in the Assembly Modeling Users Guide for more information. If you created a feature using the commands Copy, Dependent, modifying the original feature changes the copied feature. When you select a mirror copy of a feature to modify, the system displays the dimensions and section on the original feature.
Modifying the Part
Modifying Dimension Values

To modify dimension values, choose Modify from the Part menu, and enter a new number or a relation. When you have completed all the changes, choose Regenerate to recalculate the part using the new dimension values. Because Pro/ENGINEER supports the use of negative dimensions, the value you enter depends on the displayed sign of the dimension. Normally, the system displays all dimensions as positive values, and entering a negative value tells Pro/ENGINEER to create the section geometry to the opposite side. However, when the configuration file option show_dim_sign is set to yes, the system takes your input literally. For example, if the current displayed value is negative, entering another negative number increases or decreases the value for the section on the same side. Entering a positive value causes the geometry to flip. Notes: You cannot change the direction of feature creation by entering a negative number. To redefine the direction of the feature, use the Redefine option. Dimensions created with respect to coordinate systems and datum point offsets display the negative or positive value, even if the option show_dim_sign is set to no.
Modifying the Part
16 - 3
The following table lists the dimensions and the corresponding ranges of valid values. Dimension Type Tolerance values External angular dimensions (placement) Internal angular dimensions Dimensions that cannot be negative All others Range -1e5 to +1e5 -360 to +360 0 < angle < 359.99 0 < value < +1e5 -1e5 to +1e5
Modifying the Number of Decimal Places of Dimensions

The default number of decimal places for dimensions is two. To increase the precision of a particular dimension, enter a new value with the desired precision. How to Decrease the Precision of a Particular Dimension 1. Turn the tolerances on, if desired, by choosing Display Tol from the ENVIRONMENT menu. 2. Choose Modify, DimCosmetics, Format. 3. Choose Nominal from the DIM FORMAT menu, then pick a dimension. Its tolerance display changes to nominal. 4. To modify the number of decimal places to display for one or more dimensions (including reference dimensions), choose Num Digits from the DIM COSMETIC menu. Enter the number of significant digits (the default value is 2 for non-angular dimensions, and 1 for angular dimensions). 5. Select the dimensions whose display is to be changed. You can also set the default number of digits using the configuration file option default_dec_places, with a value in the range 0 to 14. Note: Modifying the number of decimal places for a dimension rounds the value of the dimension.
16 - 4
Modifying Tolerance Values

When working with tolerances, you can modify the following: Tolerance formatUse the options Modify, DimCosmetics, Format. Default tolerance valuesUse the options Modify, Value. These values appear in the lower right of the Main Window. Global default tolerance settingsUse the appropriate options in your configuration file. Individual tolerance values for selected dimensionsUse the options Modify, Value.
Modifying the Part
For detailed information on dimension tolerances, see the Fundamentals manual.
Adding Text to a Dimension

The Text option from the DIM COSMETIC menu allows you to add text to a dimension value (for example, diameter, ref, and typ), as well as special symbols. How to Add Text 1. Choose Text from the DIM COSMETIC menu. 2. Pick the dimension to which to add the text. 3. Enter the text. You can enter several lines of text, but each line must end with ENTER. For more information on text fonts and special characters, see the section Entering Special Symbols in the Drawing Notes chapter in the Drawing Users Guide. To place the dimension within the text at other than the start of the line, enter [@D] where you want to locate the dimension when you are typing the text. 4. To complete the text string, follow the last line with two carriage returns, just as with text notes. You can also define your own special fonts and symbols (for more information, see the Installation and Administration Guide).
Modifying the Part
16 - 5
Modifying Dimension Symbols

The Symbol option in the DIM COSMETIC menu allows you to rename the symbolic name of a dimension. For example, you can change the symbol for the diameter of the hole from d8 to hole_dia. How to Change a Dimension Symbol 1. Choose Symbol from the DIM COSMETIC menu. 2. Pick the symbolic dimension to be renamed. 3. Enter the desired text followed by enter. If you select a symbolic dimension and you press ENTER for the text input, the symbolic dimension remains unchanged. Notes: When you change a dimension symbol, the system updates any relations or family tables that use that symbol. Pattern symbols cannot be modified. If you must name the symbol, use a parameter and establish a relation, setting the pattern symbol to the appropriately named parameter. See Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for more information. You cannot modify the name of a tolerance symbol. For example, if you have a dimension d0 with tolerances +p0 and +m0, you cannot modify the name of +p0 or +m0.
Making Copied Feature Dimensions Independent

When you create a feature by copying another feature using the option Dependent (see The Copy Feature Menu on page 15 - 3), all the dimensions of the parent feature (except those selected as variable when copying by References) become shared between the parent feature and its copy. If you modify the value of a shared dimension, both features change simultaneously. The Make Indep option in the MODIFY menu allows you to make any shared dimension (including the number of pattern instances) of the copied feature independent from that of the parent feature. The MAKE INDEP menu contains the following options: DimensionSelect the dimensions that the copied feature shares with its parent to make them independent of the parent feature. SectionPick a copied feature to make its section independent from its parent feature.
16 - 6
How to Make a Shared Dimension Independent 1. Choose Modify, then Make Indep. 2. Select a copied feature. The system displays all the dimensions of the features. If you copied the feature using Dependent, the system displays the dimensions on the parent feature. 3. Select a shared dimension to make independent. Once you select a dimension, the system highlights all the features that share the dimension in yellow. 4. Select the features that are to have that dimension independent. 5. Choose Done Sel when you have finished. Once a dimension is made independent, modifying it for one of the features does not affect another feature. Modifying the Part
Modifying the Dimension Format

The system can display dimensions in decimal or fractional format. You can specify configuration file options to cause the system to automatically use one format or the other. If you want to convert only a few dimensions to the other format, use the Fraction and Decimal options from the FORMAT menu. When converting to fractions, remember the following: The system prompts you for the value of the largest allowable denominator. Valid denominators are the numbers that the largest denominator can be divided evenly by. A fraction is separated with a hyphen. When you enter fraction values, always enter them as #+#/#, such as 1+5/8.
When converting to decimals, remember that Pro/ENGINEER uses the current number of digits of each selected dimension. Normally, a fraction to decimal conversion is exact. However, if the current number of digits is too small, the system truncates and changes the value. For all exact conversions, you need a maximum of five digits only. You can mark approximate fractional dimensions driven by a relation by setting the mark_approximate_dims configuration option.
Modifying the Part
16 - 7
How to Convert a Dimension From One Format to Another 1. Choose the options Modify, DimCosmetics, and Format. 2. Select what you want as a result of the conversion, Decimal or Fraction. 3. Select any number of dimensions to convert. You can convert fraction to fraction, decimal to fraction, and so on. 4. Choose Done Sel when you have finished. 5. If you are converting to fractions, enter the denominator you want. Note: The specified denominator overrides any value set for the dim_fraction_denominator option in the configuration file.
Modifying Dimension Locations

The following procedure explains how to move a dimension. How to Move a Dimension 1. Choose Move Dim from the DIM COSMETIC menu. 2. Pick on the feature to display the dimensions, then select the dimension to be moved. Pick the new location with the left mouse button. The dimension, the extension lines, and the leader lines automatically adjust to the new location. 3. You can repeat this option simply by picking another dimension to be moved, then placing it in the new location.
Moving Dimension Text and Datum Name Text

The Move Dim option moves both the dimension and its text to any new location. The Move Text option is actually a special case of the Move Dim option for dimensions, allowing movement of the dimension text only. How to Move Dimension Text 1. Choose Modify, DimCosmetics, then Move Text. 2. Pick the dimension text to be moved, and pick a new location for the text. The dimension moves only with respect to its leader line.
16 - 8
How to Move the Text of Datum Planes and Coordinate Systems 1. Choose Modify, then Move Datum. 2. Pick the datum plane name text to be moved, then pick a new location. The system displays the name with a leader line attached to the corner where the text originally appeared. Note: Datum text cannot be moved when the datum is normal to the screen (appearing as a line).
Switching Dimension Arrowheads

You use the Flip Arrows option from the DIM COSMETIC menu to toggle the display of arrowheads between inside and outside the extension lines (see the following figure). Modifying the Part
Flip Arrows
Modifying Points in a Datum Point Array

If you want to modify only a few points in the array, Pro/ENGINEER lets you display those dimensions and pick them from the model. If you want to modify many points, you can either display and select them from the model, or modify the array by editing a file.
Modifying the Part 16 - 9
How to Modify a Datum Point Within an Array 1. Choose Modify and pick on a datum point name. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the whole array and the corresponding coordinate system in red, and highlights the selected point name in yellow. 2. The system displays the MOD ARR OPT menu, which has the following options: Show DimDisplay the coordinates of the selected datum point (or all the datum points in the array) and select each dimension you want to modify. To display the dimensions, choose from the following: SingleDisplay the dimensions of the selected point only. AllDisplay the dimensions of all the points in the array.
TableModify the whole array using the array table. The system displays the MOD ARR TBL menu, which has the following options: Enter PointsEnter coordinates of the datum points by typing in the Message Window. Edit PointsModify the coordinates of the datum points by editing the array table. Pro/ENGINEER puts you in the system editor and saves the array table to disk before displaying it for editing. You can edit the table many times between regenerations. After each edit, the system indicates the new positions of the points using white Xs. On regeneration, the system displays datum points in yellow, with their names. InputAdd datum points to the current array by entering the name of a file containing their X, Y, and Z coordinates. The system adds new coordinates at the end of the current array table. (This operation does not save the array table to disk.) OutputSave the array table to disk. ShowDisplay the array table in the Information Window.
3. Choose Done/Return from the PNT ARR TBL menu. 4. Choose Regenerate to see the changes.
16 - 10
Note: You cannot add or delete datum points if the datum point array is used in a pipe feature (see Pipe on page 7 - 22).
Modifying Features
This section describes how to modify features, including feature names.
Modifying Feature Names

You can give names to all features, which makes selecting them easier. For example, you could name an alignment hole for assembly align_hole_1. When you use the Sel By Menu option, the system displays this name in the namelist menu. Notes: You cannot change the names of family table instances. Names can contain up to 31 characters. They cannot include spaces. Modifying the Part
How to Change a Feature Name 1. Choose Name from the SETUP menu and select one of the following options: FeatureName or rename all features, including datum points. OtherName datum axes that were created as part of another feature (such as a hole), curve segments making up composite curves, datum points, surface features, and feature edges.
2. Pick the feature or axis to be modified. 3. Enter the new name. Note: If a datum point array feature contains a single point only, the name of the point and the name of the feature are identical.
Modifying the Part
16 - 11
Modifying Features with Multiple Sections

You can modify sweeps, non-parallel blends, and advanced form features (such as Var Sec Swp and Helical Swp) using all the basic methods. The difference in the procedure is how you select the sections or profiles and how the system displays them for modification. When you select one of these features using the Modify or Redefine/Section option, the system displays the SEL SECTION and SPECIFY menus. The SPECIFY menu lists all the sections in the feature. The SEL SECTION menu lists the following options: SelectSelect the approximate location of the section to modify. The system selects the closest section to the pick, moving in the direction towards the first section. AllDisplay the dimensions for all the sections and trajectories in the feature. SpecifySelect the section from a namelist. They are titled Trajectory # and Section # in the menu. Select as many sections and trajectories for which want to display the dimensions for, then choose Done.
Select the option you want and proceed with modifying the feature. Note the following: The system displays general blend sections, other than the first section, in a subwindow. You can modify rotation angles for all blend sections except the first. The first section is fixed in the sketching plane. To move the complete blend feature at one time, modify the location of the coordinate system relative to the part. If you did not use the coordinate system to locate the dimensions, use Redefine/Scheme to change the dimensioning scheme of the coordinate system.
Modifying Merged and Cutout Reference Part

The following procedure explains how to modify a merged or cutout feature created with the Reference option. When you modify a merged or cutout part, the change is reflected in the reference part and the merged part.
16 - 12
How to Modify the Dimensions of the Reference Part Through the Merge or Cutout Feature 1. Choose Modify from the PART menu. 2. Use Query Sel to select the merge feature. 3. The system highlights the feature, but does not display any dimensions. This is the merge feature itself. 4. Continue to choose Next from the CONFIRM menu until the system displays the name of the reference part. Choose Accept. 5. Pro/ENGINEER displays the reference part dimensions for modification. Once you modify the dimensions, the reference part updates, and these changes are propagated to the merge feature.
Modifying the Part
Modifying the Line Style of a Datum Curve

You can change the line style of datum curves. How to Change the Line Style Attributes 1. Choose Modify, then Line Style from the MODIFY menu. 2. Select the curve whose attributes you want to modify. 3. The system displays the Line Style dialog box (see the following figure). Line Style Dialog Box
The Line Style dialog box is divided into three sections: Copy From, Attributes, and command buttons. The Copy From section contains the following text boxes: StyleAllows you to set the line style name by selecting from a list of existing line style names. Existing LineAllows you to use Select Line... to select an existing line.
The line style Attributes section contains the following text boxes:
Modifying the Part
16 - 13
Line FontAllows you to set a line font by selecting from a list of all available line fonts. ColorAllows you to set the color of selected lines. The system displays the Color dialog box. The command buttons for the dialog box are as follows: ApplyApplies the line style (as defined in the dialog box) to the selected lines. It does not close the dialog box. CancelIf you did not make a change and did not select Apply, this option closes the dialog box without making any changes. If you select this button after you make a change and select Apply, it changes to Close and closes the dialog box without making further changes. ResetResets the dialog box controls to their initial values. If you select Apply immediately after you select Reset, the system resets all the selected lines to the style they had before you selected the Modify option.
See Drawing Notes chapter in the Drawing Users Guide for a detailed description of how to use the Line Style dialog box.
Redefining Features
The Redefine option in the FEAT menu allows you to change how a feature is created. The types of changes you can make depend on the selected feature. For example, if a feature was created using a section, you can redefine the section, feature references, and so on. Note: After redefining, features with no external reference regenerate starting from the first modified feature, which can be other than the feature being redefined or rerouted. In calculating where to begin regeneration during the redefining operations, Pro/ENGINEER does not consider features with an external reference. For example, if you modify feature 10, then redefine feature 15, the regeneration begins with feature 10. Pro/ENGINEER recreates the feature using the new feature definitions. When you redefine the feature sections, you may need to redefine or reroute any child feature whose reference edge or surface was replaced. If you make any changes to the feature that cause the feature redefinition to abort, you enter the Resolve environment (see Resolving Feature Failures on page 17 - 2).
16 - 14
When you use the Redefine option for a feature that was created using the options Copy, Mirror, and Dependent, the system issues a warning message stating that the selected feature is a dependent copy of the highlighted feature. If you choose Continue from the WAITING menu, the system displays the Redefine menu with the options Attribute, Direction, Section, and Depth. For example, if you choose Section after you select the options to redefine, the system asks for confirmation because the section of the selected feature will become independent. When you preview the redefinition, the system removes the feature geometry and creates temporary geometry for your changes. When you exit from the user interface, the system regenerates the part. Modifying the Part If you quit the redefinition of a feature, Pro/ENGINEER attempts to restore the part to its original state, without regenerating the geometry of the model. After you have redefined certain part features, if you quit the redefinition, the system must still regenerate the geometry of later features.
Redefining Features with Elements

You redefine features with elements using the following procedure. How to Redefine a Feature That Has Elements 1. Choose the option Redefine from the FEAT menu. 2. Pick the feature to be redefined. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays the feature definition dialog box, which lists each element and its current value. Double-click the element or select the element and click Define. 4. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you for the information needed to redefine the element. See Feature Creation Basics on page 5 - 1 and Construction Features on page 7 - 1 for information on the specific elements for a particular feature.
Redefining Features with No Elements

The following procedure explains how to redefine features without elements. How to Redefine Features That Have No Elements 1. Choose the option Redefine from the FEAT menu. 2. Choose the feature to be redefined.
Modifying the Part
16 - 15
3. The system displays the REDEFINE toggle menu, which lists the following options: AttributesRetrieve and redefine the feature attributes. DirectionRedefine the direction in which the feature is created, relative to the sketching plane. SectionRedefine the feature section sketches using the
SECTION submenu options:
Sketch PlaneRedefine the sketching plane and enter Sketcher mode to define the section. SketchEnter Sketcher mode to redefine this section. SchemeEnter Sketcher mode to redefine the dimensioning scheme. FlipChange the side to which material is added or removed. ReferencesRespecify the placement references of the feature (such as Until, From, and To surfaces), removing edges from a round definition, and so on. BoundariesResize the selected surface. SchemeChange the dimensioning scheme without revising the feature section so there is no chance you could delete entities referenced by other features. CurvesRedefine curves created from file (see Datum Curves from File on page 16 - 26). PatternRedefine the pattern type and the pattern increment options. See Redefining Patterns on page 16 - 16 for more information. Style CurvesRedefine a scan curve feature or scan curves of a blended surface.
Note: Not all options are available for all features.
Redefining Patterns
You can redefine the type and increment of a pattern. How to Access Tools for Redefining the Pattern 1. Select Feature, Redefine. 2. Select any member of the pattern.
16 - 16
3. For pattern members that normally use a dialog box, the corresponding feature creation dialog box appears. Select the Pattern element and click on Define. For pattern members that do not use the dialog box interface, the REDEFINE menu appears; choose the Pattern option from the menu. 4. The system displays the REDEF PATT menu, which lists the following options: Pat OptionsRedefine the type of pattern (identical, varying, or general). Pat Incr TypeSpecify whether a pattern dimension is controlled by a value or a relation (see the procedure below). To TableConvert the pattern to a table-driven pattern (that is, a pattern with variable dimensions controlled by a table). You cannot redefine a table-driven pattern to become value- or relation-driven. The system prompts you to name the table. Modifying the Part
How to Specify the Increment Type of a Pattern Dimension 1. Choose Pat Incr Type. 2. Select the direction for the dimension that you want to redefine. Choose First Dir for the first direction, or Second Dir for the second direction. 3. Select the pattern-driving dimension to redefine from the list in the DRIVER DIMS menu. The system displays the REDEF INCR menu, which lists the following options: To ValueControl the incremental dimension with a single value. If you choose this option, the system prompts you for an incremental value and deletes the relations that apply to the dimension. To RelationControl the incremental dimension with a relation. If you choose this option, the system displays the MOD PATT REL menu, which allows you to add relations for the dimension.
4. Pro/ENGINEER dims the menu option corresponding to the current status of the dimension. Choose the new option. If a patterned feature fails regeneration because its parent reference entity has become unusable, the system prompts you to delete the pattern, or abort its redefinition. Pro/ENGINEER warns you in advance, however, if you are about to modify a feature that is referenced by others, such as a pattern.
Redefining Sections
When you redefine a section, you can resketch any portion of the section. When you are about to delete an entity that is referenced by another feature, the system asks for confirmation. You can respond in one of the following ways: YesThe system suspends the child feature, and regeneration may fail after you have redefined the parent. If regeneration fails, Pro/ENGINEER enters the Resolve environment. For more information, see Resolving Feature Failures on page 17 - 2. No (carriage return)The entity will not be deleted. You can then replace the sketched entity with another entity, thereby keeping the reference that the child feature needs. Abort the section redefineReroute or modify the scheme of the child feature so that the section redefinition is successful. Note: Redefining the section of a copied feature is synonymous with redefining its parent. When you attempt to redefine a copy, Pro/ENGINEER displays the section used to define the parent.
Replacing Section Entities

Instead of resketching a section entity, you can replace it with another one by using the Replace command in the GEOM TOOLS menu. This allows the new entity to keep the id of the original one and to preserve any data (for example, geometric tolerances) that may be associated with the original entity. The following procedure explains how to replace a sketched entity with another one. How to Replace One Sketched Entity With Another 1. Sketch the entity that will be used to replace the current section entity. You can replace existing entities with new entities only. (When an entity is split using Intersect, one part of the entity is old, and the other is newand can be used to replace another entity of the section). 2. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu, then Replace. 3. Select the existing entity to be replaced. 4. Select the new entity. The system deletes the old entity and any dimensions associated with it. You cannot restore the deleted entity or its dimensions.
16 - 18
Note: You can intersect or fillet all entities except circles without losing the children. In the following example, one entity with children is being deleted, and two entities with children are being intersected. When an entity is intersected, one part of it retains the old entity identifier, and the other part gets a new identifier. To retain the children, you can use this new entity to replace the old one. You can also replace a dimension by choosing Dimension > Replace (see Replacing a Dimension on page 2 - 38). In the following example, entities 1 and 3 have children. Instead of deleting them, you can replace 1 with 2 and 3 with 5 in order to preserve children of the entities 1 and 3. Modification Example
New line 1 2 3 2 4
Modifying the Part
Old section Step 1: Sketch 2. Step 2: Replace 1 with 2. Step 3: Delete 1. Step 6: Replace 3 with 5. Step 7: Delete 3 and new entity ends.
Step 4: Intersect 3 and 4 with 2. Step 5: Delete 3 and 4. You are notified that 3 has children. Answer no.
3 5
Redefining Text Sections

You can redefine features that were created using the Sketcher text just as any other features of the same type. Redefining the section allows you to edit the text, modify the font, and so on. See Modifying Text Entities on page 2 - 61 for more information on changing the text style attributes of Sketcher text.
Adding or Replacing Sections in Blends

You can add or remove a section when you are redefining a parallel or non-parallel blend. You cannot add or remove sections for swept blends. Pro/ENGINEER renumbers all blend sections as necessary after you have added or removed one or more sections.
For a parallel blend subsection, deleting all entities in the subsection automatically removes it. To add a new subsection, toggle to an empty subsection and sketch. If the total number of subsections changes, you must enter all the required depth values again. How to Remove a Section of a Parallel Blend 1. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu and choose the blend feature. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. 2. Select the Section attribute, then click Define. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SECTION menu. 3. Choose Sketch from the SECTION menu. The system displays the SKETCHER menu and displays the blend subsections on the model. 4. Use the SEC TOOLS menu Toggle option to toggle to the subsection that you want to remove. 5. To delete the subsection, delete all the sketcher entities that comprise it. 6. When you have finished, choose Regenerate to solve the section. 7. Choose Done. The system prompts you to enter new values for the distance between each section. 8. Click OK in the dialog box to regenerate the blend feature. How to Add a Section of a Parallel Blend 1. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu and choose the blend feature. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. 2. Select the Section attribute, then click Define. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SECTION menu. 3. Choose Sketch from the SECTION menu. The system displays the SKETCHER menu and displays the blend subsections on the model. 4. Toggle to a blank subsection. 5. Choose Sketch, and sketch the entities for the new subsection. 6. Regenerate the sketch. Choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. 7. Enter the depth between each blend section. 8. Click OK in the dialog box to regenerate the feature.
16 - 20
How to Redefine a Parallel Blend Section 1. If you choose the Section attribute, the system displays the SECTIONS menu with the following options: Sketch PlaneRedefine the sketching plane. SketchModify the section. SchemeModify dimensioning scheme.
2. Select Sketch. 3. The system shows all blend section superimposed on the same sketch. The active (modifiable) sketch is highlighted in blue, while the inactive sketches are grey. Use Sketcher commands to alter the section as desired. To toggle between the sections of the blend, choose Toggle in the SEC TOOLS menu. Any additional sketches added to the blend, are placed behind the last section created before the redefine. Note: You cannot insert a new section between two existing sections. How to Remove a Section of a Non-Parallel Blend 1. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu and choose the blend feature. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. 2. Select the Section attribute, then select the Define button. The system displays the SECTIONS and SPECIFY menus. The SPECIFY menu lists the existing blend sections. 3. Choose Remove, then choose one of the sections in the SPECIFY menu. The system redisplays the SPECIFY menu with an updated list of blend sections, so you can add, remove, or modify another section, if desired. 4. When you have finished redefining the blend, choose Done from the SECTIONS menu. 5. Click OK in the dialog box to regenerate the feature. How to Add a Section of a Non-Parallel Blend 1. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu and choose the blend feature. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. 2. Select the Section element, then the Define button. The system displays the SECTIONS and SPECIFY menus. The SPECIFY menu lists the existing blend sections.
Modifying the Part
Modifying the Part
16 - 21
3. Choose Add from the SECTIONS menu, then choose the number of the section you are adding from the SPECIFY menu. This allows you to insert a new section after an existing one. For example, if you are adding a section to a blend that already has three sections, the options in the SPECIFY menu are Section 2, Section 3, and Section 4. The Section 2 option inserts your new section between the existing sections 1 and 2. The Section 3 option inserts your new section between the existing sections 2 and 3. The Section 4 option places your new section after the existing section 3. 4. Enter the x-, y-, and z-axis rotation angles for the section you are creating. 5. The system displays a subwindow with the sketcher grid. Sketch the new section and regenerate it. 6. Enter the depth value for the new section. 7. Pro/ENGINEER redisplays the SECTION and SPECIFY menus, so you can redefine another section, if desired. When you have finished, click OK in the dialog box to regenerate the feature.
Redefining Dimensioning Schemes

You can change the dimensioning scheme (how a feature is dimensioned) by choosing Scheme from the SECTION menu. Redefining the dimensioning scheme changes only how the feature is dimensioned. How to Redefine the Dimensioning Scheme 1. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu and choose the feature. The system displays the feature definition dialog box. 2. Select the Section element from the dialog box, then select the Define button. 3. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SECTION menu. Choose Scheme. 4. Select a feature. The system rolls the part back to the state it was in at the time the feature was created. This prevents you from dimensioning the feature to a feature created after it. 5. For sketched entities, add or delete dimensions to change the scheme.
16 - 22
When you add new dimensions, Pro/ENGINEER numbers the symbolic dimensions sequentially, starting with the most current value. For example, if the current model has dimensions d0, d1, ..., d27, when you modify the scheme to add new dimensions, the new dimensions start with d28. 6. When you have finished, choose Done. Select one of the buttons in the dialog box, if desired, then select OK. Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the part to its full state with the new dimensioning scheme. For successful regeneration to occur, the revised dimensioning scheme must be sufficient (not over- or underdimensioned). Modifying the Part
Side Effects of Modifying Schemes

When you modify the scheme of a feature, you can delete or add dimensions, and align or unalign the features. This causes a change in the symbolic representation of feature dimensions that affects drawings and relation files of parts and assemblies. Deleting dimensions using the Scheme option obsoletes any relations that contain the deleted dimensions. You must update the relations file to reflect the changes to the relations, or use Dimension > Replace instead. See Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for more information. New dimensions added to a scheme will not retain any cosmetic modifications made to the old dimensions. Note: Dimension notes with obsolete symbolic dimensions replace the dimension with asterisks (***).
Redefining Imported Geometry

How to Redefine an Imported Feature 1. Choose Redefine and select the imported feature. 2. The system displays the REDEF IMPT menu, which lists the following options: FileReplace the existing imported feature with another imported feature. Enter a new interface file name. DeleteSelectively delete wireframe or surface entities using the GET SELECT options.
Modifying the Part
16 - 23
Line StyleModify the line style of wireframe entities. The procedure is the same as for modifying the line style of feature entities. See Modifying the Line Style of a Datum Curve on page 16 - 13 for details. Exclude SrfsUnjoin some of the imported surfaces after they have been joined with the Join Surfs option, or specify surfaces to which Join Surfs should not be applied. See the Interface Guide. AttributesRedefine the surface intersection attributes of the imported surface geometry. The system displays the INTF ATTRB menu with the following toggle options: Make SolidMake a solid protrusion from the imported feature. Join SurfsJoin together trimmed surfaces that share the same boundary curve into a single surface. If you do not like the results, you can turn off the option and merge the surfaces using the options Surface and Merge.
Fix BndriesManually close the gaps that remain between surfaces after using the Join Surfs option. For detailed information, see the Interface Guide. Modify SrfModify the shape of the surface and control the display as you do in Pro/SCAN-TOOLS.
3. Redefine the feature using any or all of the available options. When you have finished, choose Done/Return from the REDEF IMPT menu.
Redefining Merged Surface Features

You can redefine merged surfaces that were created by merging surface features using the References option in the REDEFINE menu. For the merged surface to be redefined, you can: Specify a new surface to replace the second surface of the merge (Sel Surf), or continue to use the previous surface (Previous). Respecify the direction arrows for the portion of the surfaces to keep.
Redefining Merged and Cutout Features

You can redefine a merge or mold feature created using the Reference option. The redefinition allows you to replace the reference member with another instance from the same family.
16 - 24
How to Redefine a Merged Part 1. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu and select a reference member feature in the merged part. 2. Choose References and Done from the REDEFINE menu. 3. The system displays the INSTANCES menu, which allows you to select an instance, or show or edit the family table. 4. Choose the appropriate option. As soon as you have selected an instance name, Pro/ENGINEER replaces the reference member with the new instance. Modifying the Part
Redefining Datum Features

You can redefine portions of the definitions for datum points, datum planes, coordinate systems, curves, and graphs. This section describes how to redefine portions of these datum features.
Datum Points
There are three cases for redefining datum points: Redefining a parametric datum point arrayYou can change the values and the number of points in the array. Redefining a non-parametric datum point arrayYou can change the values, but not the number of points in the array. Redefining all other datum pointsYou can choose Redefine, References, which allows you to use the same DTM PNT MODE menu options as when you created the points.
Datum Planes
You can redefine datum planes that have been explicitly created (using Feature, Create), as well as sketching planes created on-the-fly. Although you can redefine regular datum planes at any time, you can redefine sketching planes created on-the-fly only if they fail regeneration. You can redefine regular datum planes using the options Attributes, Direction, and References. You can redefine planes created on-the-fly using only the References option.
Modifying the Part
16 - 25
If you redefine the sketching plane of a feature so it is geometrically different from the original plane (for example, one that is not parallel to the previous position) and the sketch cannot be regenerated using the new versions of the known entities, you can still make the necessary changes. Pro/ENGINEER restores the section using the old values (as the section was last regenerated) and issues an error message saying the old values were used. You can then enter Sketcher to see both the new and the old values of the entities. Redimension and resketch as necessary to get the new model to solve. Note: You cannot redefine dimensional patterns of datum planes. For a failed sketching plane, the system asks if you want to redefine the references of the plane. If you respond yes, you can choose new sketching plane references using the SETUP PLANE and SKET VIEW menus. If you respond no, you can redefine the feature that the sketching plane is being used to create.
Coordinate Systems
You can redefine the attributes, references, and orientation of a coordinate system, including coordinate systems created as a pattern.
Datum Curves from File

The Curves option in the Redefine menu allows you to manipulate datum curves imported From File (see Importing Datum Curves on page 3 - 26 for more information). The system displays the EDIT CURVES menu, which lists the following options: Edit FileEdit the current curve file. The system displays the file feat_#.ibl (where # is the internal identifier) in the system window. This file follows the .ibl format, regardless of how it was imported. All the changes are reflected on the curve as you exit the editor. Note: When you open a file in the .ibl format, it loses the tangency information. CreateAdd additional curves to the same feature by selecting points on the model (datum points, vertices, curves, and coordinate systems). Spline PntsDisplay the SPLINEPNTS menu (see Modifying Imported Curves on page 16 - 27). AdjustAdjust the datum curves so they intersect.
16 - 26
Trim/ExtendTrim or extend selected curves up to a curve or surface. SplitSplit a curve at the intersection with another. MergeMerge curves together. DeleteDelete all the curves selected. MeasureMeasure a curve. See Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for more information. Note: When you redefine a From File curve with children, the Merge and Delete options are not available.
Creating New Curves

You can add new curve segments to the curve feature using the Create option in the EDIT CURVES menu. You create the curve by selecting points for it to pass through. These points can be datum points, edge and curve vertices, curves, and coordinate systems. Selecting a datum curve creates a point for the new curve on the selected datum curve. The points are used only to establish the offset from the reference coordinate system for the original feature. You can edit all the curves using the Edit option.
Modifying the Part
Modifying Imported Curves

Choosing the Spline Pnts option from the EDIT CURVES menu allows you to modify imported curves in many ways. The SPLINEPNTS menu lists the following options: Sparse, Smooth, Add, Remove, Move, Show, and Blank. These options are described in detail in the following sections. Note: You cannot edit datum curves From File using the Modify option. How to Decrease the Number of Spline Points Using a Deviation Value 1. Choose Sparse from the SPLINEPNTS menu. 2. Choose the spline on which you wish to reduce the number of points.
Modifying the Part
16 - 27
3. Enter a deviation value that will cause the spline to be redrawn without one or more of its points. This value must be a positive number. The system displays the spline resulting from the change in green, and tells you how many points will be removed. If the changed spline is acceptable, choose Accept from the MOD ACTION menu. If not, choose Reject, and enter a different deviation value. For each spline, you may need to try several different deviation values before achieving the desired result, because the proportion of the spline by which points are interpolated varies from spline to spline. How to Make a Spline Smoother 1. Choose Smooth from the SPLINEPNTS menu. 2. Choose the spline that you want to make smoother. 3. Enter an odd number of points that will be averaged together to smooth the spline. For example, you could enter 1 (which does not change the spline at all), 3, or 5. Pro/ENGINEER averages the centermost point on the spline, and the appropriate equal number of points on each side of it (one point on each side if you entered 3, or two points on each side if you entered 5). 4. The system displays the spline resulting from the change in green. If the resulting spline is acceptable, choose Accept. Otherwise, choose Reject and try again with a different number of points. How to Add Points to the Spline 1. Choose Show (if you want to see each point as you add it). 2. Choose Add. 3. Select the curve at the locations where you want the points added. How to Decrease the Number of Spline Points by Deleting One or More Points 1. If the points on the spline are not already visible, choose Show from the SPLINEPNTS menu and pick the curve from which you will be removing a point. The system displays the points in red. 2. Choose Remove from the SPLINEPNTS menu. Pick the point that you want to delete. The system displays the spline resulting from the removal of this point in green. If the resulting spline is acceptable, choose Accept. Otherwise, choose Reject and try again.
16 - 28
3. Pro/ENGINEER deletes the point and changes the spline accordingly. How to Move Curve Points 1. Choose Move from the SPLINEPNTS menu. 2. Select a curve. 3. Select a reference plane. Choose an option from the REF PLANE TYPE menu: View PlaneThe reference plane is parallel to the screen. SelectSelect any planar surface or datum plane. Modifying the Part OscPlnAtPntThe reference plane will be through the point being moved. Pro/ENGINEER constructs the reference plane from the spline tangent and curvature vectors at the selected point.
Note: You can move the splines only in the reference plane. 4. Select the point to move and an adjustment range. The adjustment range is between any two points (the point being moved must be within this range) and establishes the area where the spline curve will change. If you click the middle button or select the two endpoints, the entire curve can change shape. You must accept or reject changes to the spline after you move each point. Use the Done move option in the MOVE SPL PNT menu to accept the changes, or the Quit move option to cancel the process. The Show option displays the points of a spline. Choose Show and pick a curve. The system displays the spline points like small white axes. The points remain displayed until you choose Blank from the SPLINEPNTS menu.
Adjusting the Curve

To adjust imported datum curves so they intersect, redefine the datum curve using the Adjust option in the EDIT CURVES menu. All curves to be adjusted must belong to the same curve feature. Note that when you select curves to adjust, selecting the curve itself adjusts the curve, while selecting the endpoint for the curve trims the curve to the intersection (see the following figures).
Modifying the Part
16 - 29
Adjusting the Curve
Select these two spline points as the extents of the adjustment. Select this curve for the second direction. The curve adjusts to intersect the other curve.
Select this curve as Fixed for the first direction.
Adjusting Curve Endpoints

Select this curve at the endpoint for the second direction. Select these two spline points as the extents of the adjustment.
The curve adjusts to intersect the other curve.
Select this curve as Fixed for the first direction.
16 - 30
How to Adjust a Curve 1. Choose Adjust from the EDIT CURVES menu. Select one of the options from the ADJUST TYPE menu: FixedThe curves selected remain fixed. If you select this option for the first set of curves, the second set will be adjustable automatically. AdjustableThe curves selected will be adjusted.
2. Select curves in the first direction. These are curves that cross the second set of curves. Choose Done Sel. 3. If you chose Adjustable for the first set of curves, you need to select again from the ADJUST TYPE menu for the second set of curves. Select curves in the other direction. 4. For the curves to be adjusted, you need to set the extent of the curve that will change. To set the extent, select spline points that are highlighted in green. 5. When the curve is adjusted, answer the Pro/ENGINEER prompt to keep the changes. Modifying the Part
Splitting a Curve
How to Split a Curve 1. Choose Split from the EDIT CURVES menu. 2. Select the curve segments to split. Choose Done Sel when you have finished. 3. Select a surface, or another datum curve that intersects the first curve. 4. Pro/ENGINEER splits the selected segments of the first curve at the points of intersection. If the reference curve or surface intersects a segment between its points, the system adds a new point. The system highlights new curves in green, and you can accept or reject the changes.
Trimming or Extending a Curve

You can trim or extend a curve by selecting the curves to trim or extend, then selecting the reference curve or surface to which to trim or extend.
Modifying the Part
16 - 31
How to Trim or Extend a Curve 1. Choose Trim/Extend. 2. Select the curves to trim or extend. Choose Done Sel. 3. Select the reference curve or surface. 4. The system lengthens or shortens the curves, as needed, to the reference. If the curve is satisfactory, choose Accept.
Merging Curves
Merging curves connects imported curves at their endpoints and merges them into one curve. How to Merge Curves 1. Choose Merge. 2. Choose an option from the PICK CURVES menu, and select the curves (see the following figure). The PICK CURVES options are as follows: Two CurvesMerge any two imported curves. ChainMerge connected curves that form a chain with no gaps.
The next figure illustrates how to merge curves.
16 - 32
Examples of Merging Curves 1 2
Merge these 3 datum curves using the Chain option.
Merge these 3 datum curves using the Chain option.
3 Modifying the Part
Merge the resulting curves using the Two Curves option.
The resulting datum curve.
Composite Curves
You can interchange the entities that make up a composite datum curve with new curve entities. How to Redefine a Composite Curve 1. Choose Redefine and select the composite curve. 2. From the dialog box, choose the References element and click Define. 3. The system displays the CHAIN menu, which allows you to do the following: Add or remove a curve or edge in the curve definition. Trim or extend the chain ends. Specify a different chain start point. See Chain Processing on page 3 - 33 for more information.
4. When finished, choose Done from the CHAIN menu.
Modifying the Part
16 - 33
5. Click OK in the dialog box.
Graphs
Redefining a graph feature allows you to change its name, as well as its section. How to Redefine a Graph Feature 1. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu. 2. Select the graph feature using the options Sel By Menu and Name. Select the name from the NAMES menu. 3. The system prompts you to enter a new name for the graph. You can enter a new name without invalidating relations. To keep the same name, press ENTER. 4. Choose one of the following options from the REDEFINE menu, followed by Done: SectionRedefine the section of the graph. This allows you to delete sketcher geometry. SchemeRedefine the dimensioning scheme for the graph.
5. Modify the section or dimensioning scheme. Regenerate the sketch.
Inserting Features
Normally, Pro/ENGINEER adds a new feature after the last existing feature in the part, including suppressed features. Insert mode allows you to add new features at any point in the feature sequence, other than before the base feature or after the last feature.
How to Insert Features 1. Choose Insert Mode from the FEAT menu, then choose Activate. 2. Select a feature after which the new features will be inserted. All features after the selected one will be automatically suppressed. 3. Choose Create and create the new features as usual.
16 - 34
4. Cancel insert mode in one of the following ways: Choose Resume from the FEAT menu and select to resume the features that were suppressed when you activated insert mode. Choose Cancel from the INSERT MODE menu. Pro/ENGINEER asks you whether to resume the features that were suppressed when you activated insert mode, then automatically regenerates the part.
Note: The system dims out the Cancel and Activate options in the INSERT MODE menu in turn, depending on whether the insert mode is currently active. Modifying the Part At any time, you can choose the Return option from the Insert Mode menu to return to the previously active menu. If the feature after which the new features will be inserted is a merged-by-copy feature, the system redisplays the part to show only merged features. The INSERT FEAT menu appears with the options Create Copy and Mirror Geom. Once you choose Done from the INSERT FEAT menu, the system redisplays the whole part and exits Insert mode.
Reordering Features
You can move features forward or backward in the regeneration order list, thus changing the order in which they are regenerated. You can reorder multiple features in one operation, as long as these features appear in consecutive order. Feature reorder cannot occur under the following conditions: Parents cannot be moved so their regeneration occurs after the regeneration of their children. Children cannot be moved so their regeneration occurs before the regeneration of their parents.
Modifying the Part
16 - 35
How to Reorder a Feature 1. Use the command sequence Part, Feature, Reorder. 2. Specify the selection method by choosing an option from the SELECT FEAT menu: SelectSelect features to reorder by picking on the screen and/or from the tree tool. You can also choose Sel By Menu to enter the feature number. When finished selecting, choose Done Sel. LayerSelect all features from a layer by selecting the layer. When you finish, choose Done Sel from the LAYER SEL menu. RangeSpecify the range of features by entering the regeneration number of the starting and ending feature.
3. A system message lists the selected features for reorder and states the valid ranges for the new insertion point. 4. Choose Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. 5. Choose one of the options in the REORDER menu: BeforeInsert the feature before the insertion point feature. AfterInsert the feature after the insertion point feature.
6. Pick a feature indicating the insertion point, or choose Sel By Menu to enter the feature number.
Suppressing and Resuming Features

Suppressing features is like removing them from regeneration temporarily. However, you can unsuppress (resume) suppressed features at any time. You can suppress features on a part to simplify the part model and decrease regeneration time. For example, while you work on one end of a shaft, it may be desirable to suppress features on the other end of the shaft. Similarly, while working on a complex assembly, you can suppress some of the features and components for which the detail is not essential to the current assembly process. Suppress features to do the following: Concentrate on the current working area by suppressing other areas. Speed up a modification process because there is less to update.
16 - 36
Speed up the display process because there is less to display. Temporarily remove features to try different design iterations. Note: Unlike other features, the base feature cannot be suppressed. If you are not satisfied with your base feature, you can redefine the section of the feature, or delete it and start again.
Suppressing Features
How to Suppress Features 1. Choose Suppress from the FEAT menu. The system displays the SELECT FEAT and GET SELECT menus. 2. Choose one of the following options from the DELETE/SUPP menu: NormalSuppress the selected feature and all its children. ClipSuppress the selected feature and all the features that follow. UnrelatedSuppress any feature other than the selected ones and their parents. Modifying the Part
3. Select a feature to suppress by picking on it, selecting from the Model Tree, specifying a range, entering its feature number or identifier, or using layers (for more information on layers, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). 4. If any children are present and are not currently selected, the system highlights them in blue and displays the CHILD menu. Select one of the following options: Show RefShow the reference identifier and highlight the reference geometry for each reference of the highlighted child. step through the references using Next and Previous. You can also obtain information about the reference, showing the reference identifier and the total number of references, and what type of reference it is (feature or entity). RerouteReroute the references of the highlighted child feature to break the parent-child relationship (see Rerouting Features on page 16 - 40). Mod SchemeModify the dimensioning scheme of the child (see Redefining Dimensioning Schemes on page 16 - 22).
Modifying the Part
16 - 37
SuppressSuppress the highlighted child. Suppress AllSuppress the highlighted child and all its children (not just children of the childrenthis includes other children of the feature being suppressed). SuspendSuspend action on the highlighted child. The system retains the feature until it is actually regenerated, at which time you must decide how to handle it (by deletion, rerouting, and so on). Suspend AllSuspend action on all children of the feature being suppressed until they are actually being regenerated. FreezeKeep the highlighted feature in its current location. This option is available for components only. InfoProvides information about the highlighted child feature.
5. If you create a feature in a part and dimension it to another part in the assembly, the other part becomes the external parent. If you then suppress that external parent, the system highlights all the dependent children in blue, and displays the EXTCHILD menu. This menu allows you to abort the suppression of the feature, or suspend all the external children. 6. Repeat Step 3 for every feature you want to suppress. 7. Choose Done when you have finished selecting features.
Resuming Features
You can resume features (restore them to a fully updated state) by choosing Resume from the Feat menu. The system displays the Resume menu, which lists the following options: AllResume all suppressed features. LayerResume all the features on a specified layer. Last SetResume the last group of features that were suppressed. Feat IDResume features by internal identifier number.
16 - 38
Deleting Features
Deleting a feature removes the feature from the part permanently. When you select a feature for deletion that has children, you must account for the children. You can delete them, too, but Pro/ENGINEER provides a way to save the children by rerouting. Note: Normally, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates all the features from the first modified feature or the first feature with an external reference, onward, when you select Regenerate. In calculating where to begin regeneration during Delete operations, Pro/ENGINEER does not consider features with an external reference. How to Delete Features 1. Choose Delete from the FEAT menu. 2. Select a feature to delete. 3. If any children are present and not currently selected, follow Step 4 in the procedure for suppressing features. 4. Choose Done when you have finished selecting features. Pro/ENGINEER deletes the selected features.
Modifying the Part
Deleting Suppressed Features

You can delete suppressed features with the Delete command by selecting them from the Model Tree.
Side Effects of Deleting Features

When you delete a feature whose dimensions are used in relations, you must do something about the relations. The system displays the OBSOL RELS menu, which lists the following options: Commnt RelsConvert the obsolete relations to comments. Delete RelsDelete the obsolete relations. Edit RelsEdit the relations. This option allows you to comment, delete, and edit the relations. You cannot exit from the editor until all the obsolete relations are processed. Note: If the relations file contains conditional logic statements that depend on the deleted feature, the system forces you to edit the relations file to fix the statements. For more information on relations, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Modifying the Part
16 - 39
If you delete a feature that has a note attached to it, the note remains in the drawing but the extension line to the feature disappears. If there were dimensions of the feature in the note, they appear with the default display of ***. If you delete a feature that has dimensions included in a family table, the affected columns of the table become obsolete. If you delete a feature that was used in the assembling of parts, the parts will not reassemble. Pro/ENGINEER provides you with several options for recovering the assembly. For more information, see the Recovery Options section in the Assembly Operations chapter in the Assembly Users Guide.
Rerouting Features
Rerouting breaks the parent-child relationship by letting you change feature references. The Reroute option is available in the FEAT menu; it also appears with the CHILD menu when you have selected a feature that has children. You can only reroute external references in the environment (the level in an assembly) in which they were created. Pro/ENGINEER checks the rerouting of features to determine if the new reference and the old reference are compatible. If the references are not compatible, Pro/ENGINEER issues a warning message and continues processing. The following features cannot be rerouted: Rounds that have user-defined transitions Grouped patterned features Read-only features
16 - 40
Rerouting Features and Replacing References

How to Reroute a Feature or Replace a Reference 1. Choose Reroute from the FEAT menu. The system displays the REROUTE REFS and SELECT FEAT menus. 2. Choose one of the following options from the REROUTE REFS menu: Reroute FeatReroute a feature by selecting new references. If the feature has missing references, first choose one of the following options from the FEAT REROUTE submenu: Modifying the Part All RefsReroute all the feature references. Missing RefsReroute only the missing references for the feature.
Replace RefSelect a referenced entity and replace it with another entity, as prompted. Choose an option from the SELECT TYPE submenu. When you have replaced the references, go to Step 5. The SELECT TYPE submenu options are as follows: FeatureSelect a feature, then replace all the referenced (parent) entities. Indiv EntitySelect an individual reference entity, such as an edge, vertex, or plane.
3. If you chose Reroute Feat in Step 2, you have the option to roll back the part to just before the feature was created. This removes any feature created after the one being rerouted from the display. Roll back the part if many of the features are younger than (created after) the feature being rerouted. This prevents a younger feature from being used as a reference, which would void the reroute process. 4. Pro/ENGINEER highlights each reference of the feature, in turn. From the REROUTE menu, choose the appropriate options then Done, and go to Step 6. The REROUTE menu options are as follows: AlternateSelect or create an alternate reference for the feature. Use the Make Datum option, if necessary, to construct new references. Make sure the datum planes themselves do not reference the parent feature. Same RefThe current reference remains the same.
Modifying the Part
16 - 41
Ref InfoShow information about the highlighted reference. This option gives the reference identifier and the type of reference. This is important because you can only reroute to like reference types. DoneFinish the rerouting process. Quit RerouteQuit the reroute for the current feature. Even when you quit the reroute process, any datums created during feature reroute remain in the model.
5. If you chose Replace Ref in Step 2 and have successfully selected the referenced entity, the system displays the REF REROUTE menu. Choose one of the REF REROUTE options: Sel FeatReroute to the new reference a selected feature only. All ChildrenReroute to the new reference all features that used the old reference.
6. After all the features have been rerouted, or all the references replaced, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the feature. If the automatic regeneration is successful, the new parent-child relationships are established; if not, the original references are restored. Note that to permanently retain the references defined with the automatic regeneration, you must explicitly choose Regenerate from the PART menu before you save the part.
Simplified Representations
The design of a part can become quite complex. Pro/ENGINEER provides simplified representation functionality that allows you to do the following: Simplify the display of a design by showing less detail by including or excluding features. Limit the display of a design to a selected portion of the total part geometry by specifying a work region. Exclude (or include) selected surfaces from the display of the design.
Choose Simplfd Rep from the PART menu to display the SIMPLFD REP menu, which lists the following options: CreateCreate a new simplified representation of the model.
16 - 42
Set CurrentSet the representation to be current. Display the SELECT REP menu, which lists all the simplified representations that are present in the current model. Choose the representation that you want to make current, then choose Done. CopyMake a copy of an existing simplified representation. RedefineRedefine the current simplified representation by checking (toggling) the name in the SELECT REP menu. DeleteDelete a simplified representation that is present in the current model. ListDisplay the Information Window that lists all the existing simplified representations of the current model. Each simplified representation includes a brief description of what it does. Update RepsUpdate all the outdated accelerated simplified representations that are in session. Modifying the Part
Creating a Simplified Representation

Follow these basic steps to create a simplified representation of the model. How to Create a Simplified Representation of the Model 1. Choose Create from the SIMPLFD REP menu. 2. Enter the name for the simplified representation. 3. The REP ATTR menu appears. Select an option from each submenu and choose Done. The options are as follows: Set the rule for selecting features: Include FeatInclude all the features except those specified to be excluded. Exclude FeatRemove all the features except those specified to be included.
Specify how to retrieve the simplified representation: RegenerateRecreate the simplified representation by regenerating the master model. The master model must be in session. The GeomSnapshot option is not valid for the Regenerate option. AccelerateUse the accelerator file to speed up the retrieval of the simplified representation.
Modifying the Part
16 - 43
Define the type of data for the simplified representation: Whole ModelInclude the entire model (with geometry, dimensions, parameters, and so on) in the simplified representation. The resulting representation is fully associative and modifiable. This option requires the presence of the master model in memory. GeomSnpshotCreate an independent, read-only representation of the geometry only. A snapshot representation does not include any parametric information, such as dimensions or parametersjust visible geometry that can be used for referencing. Pro/ENGINEER can detect when a snapshot is out-of-date, but you must explicitly initiate the update. This option is available only if you selected Accelerate.
4. Select an option from the EDIT METHOD menu: AttributesUse the REP ATTR menu to set attributes of the simplified representation. FeaturesCreate a simplified representation by including or excluding features. For more information, see Using the Features Option on page 16 - 45. Work RegionCreate a simplified representation by creating a work region cut that removes a portion of the model from display. Each simplified representation can have its own work region. For more information, see Using the Work Region Option on page 16 - 48. SurfacesCreate a simplified representation by copying part surfaces to create a surface envelope. See Using the Surfaces Option on page 16 - 49 for more information.
Notes: When you modify a feature, you must regenerate all the features after that feature, even those that have been removed by a work region cut. To avoid regenerating features that are not visible in the specified work region, use both the Features and the Work Region options when you create the simplified representation. When you create features in a simplified representation with a work region, you cannot select edges and surfaces created by the work region cut. You cannot use both Work Region and Surfaces in the same simplified representation.
16 - 44
The following figure illustrates a part that has not been simplified. Sample Part with No Simplified Representation
Modifying the Part
Using the Features Option

Before you start defining a simplified representation, you can change the default rule for specifying features by choosing Attributes from the EDIT METHOD menu. How to Create a Simplified Representation With the Features Option 1. Choose Features from the EDIT METHOD menu. 2. The FEAT INC/EXC menu lists the following options: Exclude and IncludePick a feature to exclude from or include in the representation. (The opposite of the default rule appears.) UndoRemove an instruction for excluding or including a feature. UpdateScreenUpdate graphical view of the model according to the specified changes.
Modifying the Part
16 - 45
Display ModeModify the number of features displayed in the Model Tree window. Use the following options in the DISP MODE menu to change the structure of the tree: Show AllShow all features. Default FeatsShow only those features whose status conforms to the default rule. Marked FeatsShow only those feature whose status is opposite to the default rule.
3. To exclude features, choose Exclude and select features using the Pick Mdl, All, or From/To options in the SELECT MDL menu or by selecting from the Model Tree. 4. To undo the changes, choose Undo and specify the features to unselect by using options in the SELELCT MDL menu. 5. Choose Done from the FEAT INC/EXC menu to complete the selection. The following figure illustrates a part that uses a simplified representation. A Simplified Representation Excluding Features
16 - 46
Using the Model Tree to Edit a Simplified Representation

You can use the Model Tree shortcuts to edit existing simplified representations of the model by including/excluding features. To access simplified representations through the Model Tree, customize the Model Tree by adding columns showing existing simplified representations with the Columns and Add/Remove options. How to Edit a Simplified Representation 1. Choose Column and Add/Remove in the Model Tree. 2. Use the down arrow in the Add/Remove Columns window to select the type of information to showchoose Simplified Reps, and add columns for the simplified representations to be displayed in the Model Tree by selecting its name and the >> button. The Current Rep column in the Model Tree shows the name of the representation and lists its features status. How to Edit a Simplified Representation Through the Model Tree 1. In the column for the simplified representation that you want to edit, highlight a cell corresponding to the feature you want to include or exclude in/from this simplified representation (you either include or exclude, depending on the default rule you originally used). 2. Use the down arrow at the upper right corner of the Model Tree to open a drop-down menu, which lists the following choices: DefaultUndo the include/exclude action. IncludeInclude this feature in the model for this simplified representation (available for the exclude default rule). ExcludeExclude this feature from the model for this simplified representation (available for the include default rule). Modifying the Part
3. The system changes the status of the feature appropriately.
Modifying the Part
16 - 47
Using the Work Region Option

Work regions behave in a manner similar to cut features, except that geometry is removed from the display only, rather than physically removed from the model (that is, from the regeneration list). When a simplified representation is active, the system applies the work region cut; otherwise, the cut is suppressed. How to Create a Simplified Representation by Using the Work Region Option 1. Choose Work Region from the EDIT METHOD menu. 2. The system displays the SOLID OPTS menu (see Thin Features on page 5 - 5). Specify the type of cut you want to create by choosing one of the options in the SOLID OPTS menu. 3. The dialog box for defining the cut of the specified type appears. Define the cut feature. 4. When you finish defining the cut, choose OK from the dialog box. Once you create a work region, you can redefine it by using the Redefine option in the Work Region menu; this brings up the dialog box so you can select the feature elements that you want to redefine. To delete a work region, choose Delete from the Work Region menu. The next figure illustrates a simplified representation of a part that uses a work region. Simplified Representation Using a Work Region
16 - 48
Using the Surfaces Option

How to Create a Simplified Representation by Using the Surfaces Option 1. Choose Surfaces from the EDIT METHOD menu. 2. The dialog box appears, listing elements for defining surfaces. Select surfaces by using options in the SURF SELECT menu. For more information on surface selection, see Selecting Surfaces on page 10 - 14. 3. When you finish selecting surfaces, click OK from the dialog box. Modifying the Part
Using the Accelerate Option

The Accelerate option allows you to create accelerated simplified representations by setting special attributes. An accelerated simplified representation is a simplified representation that is saved to a file to make retrieval quicker. Instead of regenerating the master representation to get a simplified representation, you can simply retrieve the (accelerated) simplified representation by itself (without regenerating the master representation). Note the following information concerning accelerator files: An accelerator file is named part_name.xrp. There can be only one accelerator file per part. Accelerator files do not have version numbers. If you use the Save As or Backup option on the master model, the corresponding accelerator files are not created. If you rename or delete the master model, Pro/ENGINEER automatically renames or deletes the corresponding accelerator file.
How to Update Accelerated Simplified Representations 1. Choose Update Reps from the SIMPLFD REP menu. 2. The system displays the UPDATE REP menu. The possible options are as follows: UpdateUpdate and save outdated accelerated simplified representations to disk. Pro/ENGINEER updates all the outdated representations that are in the accelerator file, even if they are not in session.
Modifying the Part
16 - 49
InfoDisplay the Information Window, listing all outdated representations, including the name of the master representation, the name of the simplified representation, and whether it is in memory. CancelCancel the update.
3. If you choose Update, the system displays the CONFIRMATION menu. Choose Confirm to update the simplified representations, or Cancel to abort the process. Note that you can also update any out-of-date representations that are in session when you save the part.
Creating a Geometric Snapshot

Note the following restrictions on geometric snapshots in Part mode: You cannot make any modifications to geometric snapshots, such as changing dimensions or parameters. Because no dimension or parameter information is available, you cannot make any references to them in relations.
How to Create a Geometric Snapshot 1. Choose Simplfd Rep from the PART menu. 2. Choose Create from the SIMPLFD REP menu. 3. Enter the name for the geometric snapshot. 4. Pro/ENGINEER displays the REP ATTR menu. Choose Accelerate and GeomSnpshot, then Done. 5. Continue creating the simplified representation using the option Features (see page 16 - 45), Work Region (see page 16 - 48), or Surfaces (see page 16 - 49).
Erasing a Simplified Representation

You can erase a simplified representation of the current object from memory with or without the current object.
16 - 50
How to Erase a Simplified Representation From Memory 1. Choose File > Erase > Current. 2. Choose an option from the OBJ ERASE menu: Current ObjErase the current object and its simplified representation. Simplfd RepsErase the simplified representation by placing the check mark in front of its name in the SELECT REP menu.
3. Choose Done Sel. Modifying the Part
Changing Part Accuracy

The Accuracy option modifies the computational accuracy of geometry calculations. Part accuracy is relative to the size of the part. The valid range is 0.01 to 0.0001, and the default value is 0.0012. Note that if you decrease the value of part accuracy, the regeneration time also increases. You should use the default part accuracy unless you need to increase it. In general, you should set the accuracy to a value less than the ratio of the length of the smallest edge on the part to the length of the largest side of a box that would contain the part. Even so, use the default accuracy until you have a reason not to do so. In the following situations, you may need to change the part accuracy: Placing a very small feature on a large part. Intersecting (through merge or cutout) two parts of very different size. For the two parts to be compatible, they must have the same absolute accuracy. To use the same absolute accuracy, estimate each part size and multiply each by its respective current accuracy. If the results differ, enter a value for the accuracy of the parts that yields the same results for each. You may need to increase the part accuracy of the larger part by entering a smaller decimal number. For example, if the size of the smaller part is 100 and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is 1. If the size of the larger part is 1000 and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is 10. Change the accuracy of the larger part to .001 to yield the same product.
Modifying the Part
16 - 51
Modifying the Part Accuracy

How to Modify the Accuracy 1. Choose Set Up from the PART menu. 2. Choose Accuracy from the PART_SETUP menu. 3. Enter the value for the accuracy in the specified range. Modifying the part accuracy causes the entire part to regenerate.
Overriding the Lower Limit

The configuration file option accuracy_lower_bound can override the lower boundary of this range. The specified values for the lower boundary must be between 1.0000e-6 and 1.0000e-4.
Working with Absolute and Relative Accuracy

Absolute accuracy is the smallest size (measured in the current units) that Pro/ENGINEER can recognize. To enable the absolute accuracy functionality, set the configuration option enable_absolute_accuracy to yes. The absolute accuracy functionality improves the matching of parts of different sizes or different accuracies (for example, imported parts created on another system). Previous to Release 17.0, the accuracy of all parts was relativeit was specified as a fraction of the longest diagonal of a parts bounding box (default value 0.0012). Thus, when you were copying or merging geometries from parts of different sizes, you were working with different absolute accuracies. In general, you should continue to use relative accuracy for most part models. You should consider using absolute accuracy only when you are: Copying geometry from one model to another during core operations, such as Merge and Cutout. Designing parts for manufacturing and mold design. Matching accuracy of imported geometry to its destination part.
You can match the accuracies of a set of parts mainly in two ways: Give them all the same absolute accuracies. Designate one of them (perhaps the smallest) as the base part and assign its accuracy to the other parts.
16 - 52
You can control the absolute accuracy (or resolution) of parts through the ACCURACY menu. When you choose Accuracy from the PART SETUP menu, the ACCURACY menu appears as follows: RelativeSpecify relative accuracy. See Specifying Relative Accuracy. AbsoluteSpecify absolute accuracy. See Specifying Absolute Accuracy.
The first time you bring up the Accuracy menu for a part, the Relative option is active and highlighted (because the part is initially created with Relative accuracy). Thereafter, the accuracy type you used last will be active when you access the menu. Modifying the Part The configuration file option default_abs_accuracy sets a default value for absolute accuracy. The system may include it in the prompt when you select Enter Value from the ABS ACCURACY menu.
Specifying Relative Accuracy

When you select the Relative option from the Accuracy menu, the system prompts you, Enter relative part accuracy or ESC to return to Accuracy menu [0.0012]:. Note that the default value 0.0012 given in the brackets is the hard-coded default value for relative accuracy. Proceed in one of the following ways: Enter a value for relative accuracyThe system then informs you that the part needs to be fully regenerated and asks if you want to continue. Enter [Y] to continue, or [N] to abort. Press ESC if you do not want to enter a valueThe system keeps the previous accuracy settings and returns you to the ACCURACY menu.
Specifying Absolute Accuracy

If you select the Absolute option from the ACCURACY menu, the ABS ACCURACY menu appears with the following choices: Enter ValueEnter an absolute value. The system prompts you, Enter absolute part accuracy or ESC to return to ACCURACY menu [nnnn units]:. If the previous accuracy type was Relative, nnnn is the default value for absolute accuracy specified by the configuration file option
Modifying the Part
16 - 53
default_abs_accuracy. (If no value for default_abs_acuracy is specified, then the prompt shows only units inside the brackets.) If the previous accuracy type was Absolute, nnnn is the current absolute value. Note that units is the parts units (for example, inches). Proceed in one of the following ways: Enter a valueThe system informs you that the part needs to be fully regenerated and asks if you want to continue. Enter [Y] to continue, or [N] to abort. Press ESC if you do not want to enter a valueThe system keeps the previous accuracy settings and returns you to the ACCURACY menu.
Select PartAssign absolute accuracy value from a different part in session. The IN SESSION namelist menu appears with a list of parts currently in session. Select one of them. The system informs you of that parts absolute accuracy and prompts you to accept it. If you accept it, the system informs you that the part needs to be fully regenerated and asks if you want to continue. Enter [Y] to continue, or [N] to abort.
16 - 54
17
Regenerating the Part
This chapter describes how to regenerate a part and explains how to correct some error conditions you may encounter when regenerating the part. Topic Resolving Feature Failures Reducing the Regeneration Time Regeneration Information Geometry Checking Page 17 - 2 17 - 8 17 - 9 17 - 10
17 - 1
Resolving Feature Failures

Sometimes model geometry cannot be constructed because features that have been modified or created conflict with or invalidate other features.
Resolving Feature Failures During Creation/Redefinition

Depending on the type of environment used to create a feature (that is, whether the feature uses the dialog box interface), the system handles feature failures that may occur during feature creation or redefinition in two different ways: For features that use the dialog box interfaceIf the feature fails after you press OK or Preview, the Resolve button appears in the feature creation dialog box. You can either stay in the dialog box environment and redefine feature elements with the Define button, or click Resolve to access the Resolve environment so you can obtain diagnostics or make changes to other parts of the model. For features that do not use the dialog box interfaceIf the feature fails, the system brings up the FAILED FEAT menu (see Using the Feat Failed Menu for more information).
Using the Feat Failed Menu

If a feature fails during creation and it does not use the dialog box interface, Pro/ENGINEER displays the Feat Failed menu with the following options: RedefineRedefine the feature. Show RefDisplay the SHOW REF menu so you can see the references of the failed feature. The system displays the reference number in the Message Window. See the Investigate command for further details. Geom CheckCheck for problems with overlapping geometry, misalignment, and so on. This command may be dimmed. If a shell, offset surface, or thickened surface fails, the system stores information about the surfaces that could not be offset. The GEOM CHECK menu displays a list of features with failed geometry and a Restore command. For detailed information, see Geometry Checking on page 17 - 10. Feat InfoGet information about the feature.
17 - 2
If a feature fails, you can redisplay the part with all failed geometry highlighted in different colors. The system displays the corresponding error messages in an Information Window. Features can fail during creation for the following reasons: Overlapping geometryA surface intersects itself. If Pro/ENGINEER finds a self-intersecting surface, it does not perform any further surface checks. The system highlights the overlapping geometry in red and the corresponding points of intersection in white, and displays an error message. Surface has edges that coincideThe surface has no area. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the surface in red and displays an error message. Inverted geometryPro/ENGINEER highlights the inverted geometry in purple and displays an error message. Bad edgesPro/ENGINEER highlights bad edges in blue and displays an error message. Sheetmetal formPro/ENGINEER highlights sheetmetal form features that fail in red. Regenerating the Part
Working in the Resolve Environment

When a model regeneration fails, you must resolve the problem before continuing with normal model processing. Pro/ENGINEER provides a special error resolution environment (the Resolve environment) for recovering from changes that have caused the model to fail regeneration. As soon as a regeneration fails, Pro/ENGINEER enters the Resolve environment, where the following occurs: The File > Save command is unavailable and the model cannot be saved. The failed feature and all subsequent features remain unregenerated. The current model displays only the regenerated features as they were at the last successful regeneration. Pro/ENGINEER displays a message that indicates the problem in the Message Window. Pro/ENGINEER displays the RESOLVE FEAT menu and the feature diagnostic window.
17 - 3
The Resolve environment allows you to do the following: Undo all the changes made since the last successful regeneration. Diagnose the cause of the model failure. Fix the problems within this special environment while using standard part or assembly functionality. Attempt a quick fix of the problems using shortcuts for performing standard operations on the failed feature, including redefine, reroute, suppress (for parts), and freeze (for assemblies).
For both diagnosing and fixing the problem, you can choose to work on the current (failed) model or backup model. The backup model shows all features in their pre-regenerated state, and can be used to modify or restore dimensions of the features that are not displayed in the current (failed) model. If the ENVIRONMENT menu Regen Backup option is toggled on, Pro/ENGINEER uses the regenerated backup model (as described in Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). If you specify this option, the system saves a copy of the model to disk with the name regen_backup_model####.prt prior to each regeneration, and removes it when you exit the Resolve environment. Otherwise, the system uses the last pre-failure version of the current model saved on disk. The failed feature diagnosis window displays the following options: OverviewDisplay an overview of the Resolve environment. Feature InfoDisplay the feature Information Window. Resolve HintsIf a resolve hint exists, the system displays this button. Click on it to see a hint on how to fix the problem.
If you select any of these options, Pro/ENGINEER opens a new window and displays information on the selected topic.
Using the Resolve Feat Menu

The RESOLVE FEAT menu options are as follows: Undo ChangesUndo the changes that caused the failed regeneration attempt, and return to the last successfully regenerated model. The system displays the Confirmation menu so you can confirm or cancel this request. InvestigateInvestigate the cause of the regeneration failure using the Investigate submenu.
17 - 4
Fix ModelRoll the model back to the state before failure and select commands to fix the problem. Quick FixUse the QUICK FIX menu to immediately perform the specified option on the current model. The possible options are as follows: RedefineRedefine the failed feature. RerouteReroute the failed feature. SuppressSuppress the failed feature and its children. Clip SuppSuppress the failed feature and all the features after it. DeleteDelete the failed feature. To manage its children, use the Delete All, Suspend All, or Reroute All command.
Using the Investigate Option If you choose the Investigate option, either Current Modl or Backup Modl and an appropriate option from the INVESTIGATE menu. The INVESTIGATE menu lists the following options: Current ModlPerform operations on the current active (failed) model. Backup ModlPerform operations on the backup model, displayed in a separate window (the system displays the current model in the active window). DiagnosticsToggle on or off the display of the failed feature diagnostic window. List ChangesShow the modified dimensions in the Main Window and in a pre-regenerated model window (Review Window), if available. Also, display a table that lists all the modifications and changes. Show RefDisplay the SHOW REF menu to show all the references for the failed feature in the models, in both the Review Window and the Main Window. The system highlights the first reference in the reference color (such as magenta), and displays the SHOW REF menu, which lists the following options: NextHighlight the next reference. PreviousHighlight the previous reference. Regenerating the Part
17 - 5
InfoDisplay an Information Window that provides information about the entity and the feature to which it belongs.
Failed GeomDisplay the invalid geometry of the failed feature. This command may be unavailable. The FAILED GEOM menu displays a list of features with failed geometry and a restore command. Roll ModelRoll the model back to the option selected in the ROLL MDL TO submenu. The options are as follows: Failed FeatRoll the model back to the failed feature (for the backup model only). Before FailRoll the model back to the feature just before the failed feature. Last SuccessRoll the model back to the state it was in at the end of the last successful feature regeneration. SpecifyRoll the model back to the specified feature.
Using the Fix Model Option If you choose the Fix Model option, Pro/ENGINEER displays the
FIX MODEL menu. Choose either Current Modl or Backup Modl and an appropriate option from the FIX MODEL menu.
The FIX MODEL menu has the following options: Current ModlPerform operations on the current active (failed) model. Backup ModlPerform operations on the backup model, displayed in a separate window from the current model in the active window. FeaturePerform feature operations on the model using the standard FEAT menu. The system displays the CONFIRMATION menu so you can confirm or cancel the request only if the Undo Changes option is not possible. However, the Undo Changes option is always possible if you used the Regen Backup option in the ENVIRONMENT menu.
17 - 6
The SELECT FEAT menu Failed Feat command selects the latest failed feature. Pro/ENGINEER displays a message in the Message Window when you successfully redefine the feature and automatically regenerates the model. When you choose Done from the FEAT menu, the system displays an Information Window with a message stating that the model has been successfully regenerated. The system also displays instructions so you can either exit the Resolve environment or continue to make changes before you exit. ModifyModify dimensions using the standard MODIFY menu. RegenerateRegenerate the model. Switch DimSwitch the dimension display from symbols to values or vice versa. RestoreDisplay the restore menu so you can restore dimensions, parameters, relations, or all of these to their values prior to the failure. The RESTORE menu options are as follows: Regenerating the Part All ChangesRestore all the changed items. DimensionsRestore the dimensions. ParametersRestore the parameters. RelationsRestore the relations.
RelationsAdd, delete, or modify relations, as necessary, to be able to regenerate the model, using the MODEL REL and RELATIONS menus (for more information, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). Set UpDisplay the standard PART SETUP menu to perform additional part setup procedures. X-SectionCreate, modify, or delete a cross-sectional view using the CROSS SEC menu (for more information, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). ProgramAccess Pro/PROGRAM capabilities using the PROGRAM menu (for more information, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER).
17 - 7
Relation Constraint Violation

When the part has been modified so a relation constraint has been violated, Pro/ENGINEER displays the violated constraint in the Information Window. After you exit the Information Window, the system prompts whether to continue regeneration. If you answer no, Pro/ENGINEER restores the previous dimension values. Otherwise, regeneration continues.
Reducing the Regeneration Time

When you regenerate a part after modifying it, Pro/ENGINEER recalculates the geometry of the part. For example, changing dimensional values, editing relations, or altering dimension tables require part regeneration. Pro/ENGINEER performs a fast regeneration by regenerating only the features affected by certain actions. Pro/ENGINEER performs fast regeneration in the following situations: Modifying dimension valuesThe part regenerates from the earliest modified feature only. Resuming featuresThe part regenerates from the earliest resumed feature. Redefining features, and modifying schemes and patternsThe part regenerates from the earliest modified feature only.
Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the entire part when you modify the following: The part accuracy The part unit value (see Setting Up the Part on page 1 - 2 for more information)
You can significantly enhance regeneration time by doing the following: Create identical or varying patterns instead of general patterns. Suppress features that have not been modified since the last regeneration.
17 - 8
See the the Assembly Modeling Users Guide for information on regenerating a part in Assembly mode. For information on regenerating a part or assembly that requires Pro/PROGRAM input, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Regeneration Information
The Regen Info option lets you observe how a part is built and aids in the diagnosis of bad features in a part. You can use this option at any time, or instead of the Regenerate option after you have modified the part. How to Regenerate a Part Using the Regen Info Option 1. Choose the option Regen Info from the INFO menu. 2. Select where to start regenerating the part by choosing one of the following options from the START OPTS menu: BeginningStart part regeneration with feature number 1. SpecifySpecify the feature from which to start regenerating by entering its number at the prompt. Quit RegenReturn to the INFO menu. Regenerating the Part
3. Pro/ENGINEER regenerates and displays the specified feature of the part, then displays the INFO REGEN menu. The options are as follows: Info FeatProvide regular feature information about the last feature regenerated. If you choose this option, the system displays a window with the feature information. Show DimsDisplay the dimensions of the last regenerated feature. Geom CheckInvestigate the geometry error for the feature just regenerated. This option is accessible only when a geometry error has been encountered. Fix ModelActivate the special Resolve functionality (see Working in the Resolve Environment on page 17 - 3) by forcing the feature to abort regeneration. SkipSkip a designated number of features. The features regenerate without waiting and without allowing you to select any options from this menu. Enter the number of features you want to skip.
17 - 9
ContinueContinue to the next feature for regeneration. QuitComplete the regeneration of the part without giving the option for further information.
4. If a feature is one that intersects any other feature on the part, the system displays the geometry of the feature in red wireframe before intersection.
Geometry Checking
To prevent regeneration problems, Pro/ENGINEER checks for geometry errors. If needed, the system automatically activates the Geom Check option in the INFO, INFO REGEN, and TRIM MODEL menus for those features that are successfully created. For example, during creation or regeneration of a feature, if the system detects a geometric condition, it issues the warning message WARNING: Design intent is unclear. Use Info/Geom Check menu for more details. The Geom Check option allows you to view the feature that has the possible error and then revise its definition to eliminate the potential problem. The system displays the GEOM CHECK menu, which provides a namelist of problem features and a Restore command. If you choose a feature, the system displays the SHOW ERRS menu. This menu lets you highlight the entities that cause the geometry check. The system provides corresponding messages in the Information Window, including suggested workarounds. The SHOW ERRORS menu lists the following options: Prev ItemHighlight information for the previous item that causes a geometry check. Next ItemHighlight information for the next item that causes a geometry check. All ItemsHighlight information for all items that cause a geometry check. Feature InfoOpen an Information Window for the selected feature. Item InfoOpen an Information Window to describe the error. Hide ItemSuppress the warning that the system had issued as a possible design error, because the feature is designed as intended.
17 - 10
Note: The option Hide Item applies only to the SHOW ERRS window processing and does not affect the regenerated geometry. If you choose Restore from the GEOM CHECK menu, the system displays the RESTORE ERR menu. This menu allows you to restore specific geometry checks that you have hidden with the Hide Item command. The possible options are as follows: Select AllRestore geometry checks for all features. Unsel AllRemoves the checks from the entire list, allowing you to select individual features again.
For example, the following cases might cause the system to issue a geometry check warning: Using blind features to extrude all the way through a part or intersect another surface When the blind depth is not quite enough, there will be a little gap, which will be detected by Pro/ENGINEER. Do not modify the extruded value onlyredefine the feature to use one of the Thru depth options. Sketching intersecting features on drafted surfaces You may not notice the slight angle of the draft, but the feature you sketch will not quite align with the feature to be intersected. You should either sketch the feature on the original non-drafted surface or use the option Use Edge so the entities align exactly.
Misalignment Example
In the example in the figure Checking Geometry on page 17 - 12, Pro/ENGINEER issues the warning because of the very small edge and surface between the corner round cut and the revolved blind cut. If this is what you really intended, increase the accuracy of the part. If, however, you do not want the small surface and edge, but rather a razor-sharp edge, you must modify one of the features. To do this, do not modify the size of either feature until the warning disappears, because adding extra digits to the dimension may still cause problems later. Instead, do the following: Redefine the cut and tell the system that the edges align exactly. ...or...
17 - 11
Replace the round with a round through point. Then, no matter how the cut changes, the round will be resized so the sharp intersection is maintained. Checking Geometry
Cuts
Should these be aligned at vertices? Feature creates a tiny edge.
17 - 12
Appendixes
A
Sketcher with Intent Manager
This chapter describes how to work in standalone Sketcher mode. You use Sketcher mode to create a section which you can later retrieve when you define a feature. You can also create a section as you define the feature; then Pro/ENGINEER places you in Sketcher automatically. For more information on creating sections in the process of part modeling, see the Sketching on a Model with Intent Manager chapter. Topic About Sketcher Mode Creating Geometry in Sketcher Mode Sketcher Constraints Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry Modifying Dimension Values Updating Geometry Modifying a Section Moving Entities Deleting Entities Undoing Sketcher Operations Manipulating Sketcher Geometry Section Geometry Information Setting the Sketcher Environment Options Resolving Problems in Sketches Sketcher Hints Page A-2 A-6 A - 16 A - 21 A - 35 A - 36 A - 37 A - 47 A - 48 A - 49 A - 49 A - 57 A - 59 A - 62 A - 63
A-1
About Sketcher Mode

Sketcher enables you to create two-dimensional sections.
Entering Sketcher Mode

To start a new section in 2-D mode, choose File > New > Sketch. Enter the name for the section and choose OK from the New dialog box. To open an existing section, choose File > Open, and select a file with the extension .sec, or of the type Sketch from the filter in the dialog box.
Using Sketcher with Intent Manager

This chapter describes how to use Sketcher with Intent Manager that enables you to dynamically dimension and constrain geometry as you sketch. Before you enable Intent Manager for an existing section, make sure the section is successfully regenerated. Any extra dimensions found by Sketcher will be converted into reference dimensions. You can turn off Intent Manager by clicking Intent Manager. This restores Sketcher to its pre-Release 20.0 behavior. To set Sketcher to use Intent Manager by default, set the configuration option to sketcher_intent_manager to yes.
Read Me File
To read the summary of the Release 20.0 Sketcher, click Read Me in the DYNDIM menu. You can remove the Read Me button from the menu by setting the sketcher_readme_button configuration option to no. When you enter Sketcher mode for the first time, the Read Me alert dialog box appears, instructing you to read the Read Me file. To prevent this dialog box from showing up for future sessions, set the sketcher_readme_alert configuration option to no.
A-2
Terminology in Sketcher
The following glossary lists terminology used in Sketcher.
Term Entity
Definition Any element of the section geometry (such as line, arc, circle, spline, conic, point, or coordinate system). You create entities when you sketch, divide, or intersect the section geometry, or when you reference geometry outside the section. An entity of the section that is created in 3-D Sketcher when you reference geometry outside the section. The referenced geometry (for example, part edge) is known to Sketcher. For example, creating a dimension to a part edge creates a reference entity in the section which is the projection of that part edge onto the sketching plane. A measurement of an entity or a relationship among entities. A condition defining the geometry of the entity or a relationship among entities. A constraint symbol appears next to the entity to which the constraint is applied. For example, you can constrain two lines to be parallel. A parallel constraint symbol appears to indicate this. An auxiliary numerical value in Sketcher. An equation relating dimensions and/or parameters. For example, a relation can be used to set the length of one line to be half the length of some other line. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Reference entity
Dimension Constraint
Parameter Relation
A-3
Term Weak dimension or constraint
Definition A dimension or constraint is called weak if Sketcher can remove it when appropriate without any confirmation from the user. Dimensions created by Sketcher are weak. When you add a dimension, Sketcher can remove an extra weak dimension or constraint without any confirmation. Weak dimensions and constraints appear in grey. A dimension or constraint is called strong if Sketcher cannot delete it automatically. Dimensions and constraints created by the user are always strong. If several strong dimensions or constraints are in conflict, Sketcher asks you to remove one. Strong dimensions and constraints appear in yellow. Contradicting or redundant conditions of two or more strong dimensions or constraints. When this occurs, the conflict must be resolved immediately by removing an undesired constraint or dimension.
Strong dimension or constraint
Conflict
Basic Steps for Creating a Section

The following basic procedure outlines how to create a section in Sketcher mode. How to Create a Section 1. Sketch the section geometry. The system adds dimensions and constraints automatically as you create the section. See Creating Geometry in Sketcher Mode on page A - 6 for more information. 2. Redefine the dimensioning scheme, as needed.
A-4
You can modify the dimensioning scheme created by Sketcher by adding your own dimensions and constraints. You cannot explicitly delete any system dimensions. As you add dimensions and constraints, the system automatically deletes system (weak) dimensions and constraints that are no longer necessary. If you want to keep the system dimensions and constraints, strengthen them before exiting Sketcher. See Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry on page A - 21 for more information. 3. Add section relations, if desired. Add relations to control the behavior of your section. See Manipulating Sketcher Geometry on page A - 49 for more information. 4. Save the section before exiting. See Saving a Section on page A - 5. 5. Choose Done to exit Sketcher.
Using Shortcuts with the Right Mouse Button

You can access the most frequently used drafting operations by pressing the right mouse button. Note: You cannot access this menu when you are in rubberband mode. As you select a drafting command from the menu, the system simultaneously brings up the GEOMETRY menu. For a menu description, see The Right Mouse Menu on page A - 56. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Using the Toolbar Icons

After you enter Sketcher, the toolbar displays the icons for the Undo, Redo, Disp Dims, Disp Const, Disp Verts, and Disp Grid options.
Saving a Section
To save the section before exiting Sketcher, choose File, Save or click the Save icon from the toolbar. The system creates a file with the extension .sec.
A-5
Exiting Sketcher Mode

To exit Sketcher after you are finished creating a section, choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. To exit Sketcher and discard any sketched geometry, choose Quit from the SKETCHER menu and Confirm from the CONFIRMATION menu.
Creating Geometry in Sketcher Mode

To start sketching, choose Sketch from the SKETCHER menu, select an option for a particular entity type from the Geometry menu, and start sketching entities by picking points on the sketch. As you move the mouse and the cursor, the Sketcher determines applicable constraints and displays them; the current constraint is shown in red. The geometry snaps to satisfy these constraints (for example, horizontal or vertical line constraint). After the entities are sketched, you can apply additional constraints by choosing the Constrain option in the SKETCHER menu (see Sketcher Constraints on page A - 16). You use the mouse in Sketcher in different ways: Use the left mouse button to pick points on the screen and the middle mouse button to abort the current action. You can also use the middle mouse button to switch from line to arc creation and vice versa. While drafting, you can disable the current constraint (shown in red) by pressing the right mouse button and lock the constraint by pressing <Shift> and the right mouse button. You can open the right mouse menu to access most frequently used drafting commands (while you are not in the rubberband mode). See Using Shortcuts with the Right Mouse Button on page A - 5.
The system automatically dimensions geometry as you sketch entities by adding only those dimensions that are necessary to solve the section. The system dimensions are called weak dimensions (they appear in gray), because the system can remove them without your input. Use the Dimension option in the SKETCHER menu to add strong dimensions (they appear in yellow). For information on dimensioning, see Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry on page A - 21.
A-6
Drafting Commands
To sketch an entity, select the appropriate entity type from the GEOMETRY menu (for shortcuts, see the next section). The following options are listed in the GEOMETRY menu: PointCreate a point. Pick a point on the screen with the left mouse button. LineCreate lines and centerlines using options in the LINE TYPE menu. See Sketching Lines on page A - 7. RectangleCreate a rectangle by rubberbanding a box. See Sketching a Rectangle on page A - 8. ArcCreate an arc by using options in the ARC TYPE menu. See Sketching an Arc on page A - 8. CircleCreate a circle and construction circle by using options in the CIRCLE TYPE menu. See Sketching a Circle on page A - 9. Adv GeometryCreate a conic, coordinate system, elliptical fillet, spline, text, axis through a point, and blend vertex by using options in the ADV GEOMETRY menu. See Creating Advanced Geometry on page A - 10.
Sketching Lines
Sketcher with Intent Manager Use the Line option to sketch geometry lines and centerlines. Centerlines aid you in creating feature geometry, but they do not create actual geometry. Centerlines have infinite length. They appear in phantom line font. How to Sketch a Line 1. Choose GEOMETRY > Line. 2. Choose Geometry or Centerline from the LINE TYPE menu. Select the drafting method by choosing one of these options in the LINE TYPE menu: 2 PointsCreate a line by picking two endpoints. To end line creation, press the middle mouse button. 2 TangentCreate a line tangent to two arcs, circles, or splines. Select two entities to which the line will be tangent.
3. Continue creating lines in sequence.
A-7
Sketching a Rectangle
Use the Rectangle option in the GEOMETRY menu to sketch a rectangle with vertical and horizontal sides. How to Sketch a Rectangle 1. Choose GEOMETRY > Rectangle. 2. Place one vertex with the left mouse button and drag the rectangle to the desired size. 3. To place the other vertex, click the left mouse button. The four lines of the rectangle are independent and you can handle them (trim, align, and so on) individually.
Sketching an Arc
How to Sketch an Arc 1. Choose GEOMETRY > Arc. 2. The ARC TYPE menu appears. Choose one of the following options from the ARC TYPE menu: Tangent EndCreate an arc that is tangent to an entity at its endpoint. Pick an end of an existing entity to determine tangency, then pick a location for the other endpoint of the arc. 3 TangentCreate an arc that is tangent to three entities. Select three entities to which the arc will be tangent. The system creates the arc in the same direction as the reference picks. FilletCreate an arc between two entities. Pick two entities between which to create a tangent arc. See the next section. Center/EndsCreate an arc by picking the center point of the arc and the endpoints of the arc. 3 PointCreate an arc by picking its endpoints and an additional point on the arc.
A-8
Fillet Arc
The Fillet option creates a rounded intersection between any two entities. The size and location of the fillet depends on the pick locations. You cannot create a fillet between the following entities: Parallel lines A centerline and another entity
When a fillet is inserted between two entities, the system automatically divides two entities at the fillet tangency points. If you add the fillet between two non-parallel lines, the lines are automatically trimmed to the fillet. If you add the fillet between any other entities, you must delete leftover segments manually. The following figure shows an example of fillets between a line and a spline, and a line and a circle. Fillets Between Different Entities
Division points

Resulting geometry after deleting entities between division points
Fillets between lines, splines, and circles
How to Create a Fillet Arc Between Two Lines 1. Choose Fillet from the ARC TYPE menu. 2. Use the left mouse button to pick two entities.
Sketching a Circle
Use the Circle option in the GEOMETRY menu to create two types of circles: geometry circles and construction circles. Construction circles aid you in creating feature geometry, but they do not create actual geometry. Construction entities appear in a phantom line font.
A-9
How to Sketch Circles 1. Choose GEOMETRY > Circle. 2. Choose Geometry or Construction from the top portion of the CIRCLE TYPE menu. 3. Select the creation method by choosing one of the following options in the bottom part of the CIRCLE TYPE menu: ConcentricCreate a concentric circle. Pick a reference circle or an arc to define the center point. As you move the cursor, the circle rubberbands until you press left mouse to finish. The selected referenced circle can be a sketched entity or a model edge. If the selected circle reference is a model entity that is unknown to Sketcher, this entity automatically becomes a reference entity. Center/PointCreate a circle by picking the center point and a point that lies on the circle. 3 TangentCreate a circle tangent to three entities. Pick three reference entities. FilletCreate a circle tangent to two entities. 3 PointCreate a circle by picking three points that lie on the circle.
Creating Advanced Geometry

To sketch advanced geometry, choose the Adv Geometry option from the GEOMETRY menu. The ADV GEOMETRY menu has the following options: ConicSketch a conic. Coord SysAdd a coordinate system to the sketch. Elliptical FilletCreate an elliptical fillet. SplineSketch a spline. TextInclude a text entry in the sketch. Axis PointCreate an axis that is normal to the sketching plane and goes through the pick point (available only in 3-D Sketcher). Blend VertexSketch blended features with unequal numbers of segments in their sections.
A - 10
The following sections describe these options in detail.
Sketching a Conic
Use the Conic option to sketch a conic curve (see the following figure). Conic
How to Create a Conic 1. Choose Conic from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. 2. Pick the first endpoint for the conic using the left mouse button. 3. Pick the second endpoint for the conic using the left mouse button. 4. Pick the location for the shoulder using the left mouse button. The conic rubberbands as you move the cursor. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Adding a Coordinate System

You can add a coordinate system to a section to be used with the following: SplineYou can dimension a spline to a coordinate system. This allows you to modify the spline points by specifying the X-, Y-, and Z-axis coordinates, with respect to the coordinate system. For information on how to associate a spline to a coordinate system, see Associating a Spline to a Coordinate System on page A - 28. ReferenceYou can add coordinate systems to any section to aid dimensioning. Blend feature sectionYou can use the coordinate system to establish the relative origin for each of the sections used for blends.
A - 11
How to Add a Coordinate System to a Sketch 1. Choose Coord Sys from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. 2. Pick a location to locate the coordinate system.
Sketching an Elliptic Fillet

Use the Elliptic Fillet option to create an elliptic fillet. For this operation, you can select the same entities as for Arc, Fillet. The axes of the elliptic fillet are horizontal and vertical. The elliptic fillet is tangent at its endpoints to the entities selected for its creation. How to Create an Elliptic Fillet 1. Choose ADV GEOMETRY > Elliptic Fillet. 2. Pick the entities between which you want to create an elliptic fillet.
Sketching a Spline
Splines are curves that pass smoothly through any number of intermediate points. Spline Curve
Intermediate points
Endpoint
For additional control of the shape of a spline, you can specify the tangency angle and radius of curvature at the ends of a spline. You can do this while you define the spline by using the TANGENCY menu options, or you can modify an existing spline with the Modify option in the Sketcher menu (see Modifying the Tangency of a Spline on page A - 42).
A - 12
Consider the following information on spline tangency: When you define the spline as tangent to other geometry, the reference geometry does not have to be present in the section when you sketch the spline. However, when you complete the section, the spline must have either an adjacent entity or an angular dimension. If a spline endpoint is dimensioned with an angular dimension and the endpoint has not been defined with a tangency, you must add the tangency, or remove the dimension. You must also set tangency if you are controlling the curvature of the spline at its endpoints with curvature dimensions. A closed spline must have a tangency condition of None; endpoints of a closed spline are always tangent. In a spline with one or more tangent endpoints, if you move the first or last interior point on the spline, the spline immediately adjusts to its new shape.
How to Create a Spline 1. Choose GEOMETRY > Spline. 2. The system displays the SPLINE MODE menu. The Sketch Points option is selected by default. Sketcher with Intent Manager 3. Define the tangency condition for the spline by selecting one of the options in the TANGENCY menu: NoneCreate a spline with no tangency. StartCreate a spline with explicit control of the tangency angle at the start. EndCreate a spline with explicit control of the tangency angle at the end. BothCreate a spline with explicit control of the tangency angle at both ends. Control PolyCreate a spline with both endpoints tangent to a control polygon. Pick spline points as usual. The line entities that form the control polygon of the spline are added to the section database as parents of the spline. Entities of the control polygon can be dimensioned as regular sketched entities.
A - 13
Approx ChainCreate an approximate chain spline, which replaces a chain of entities. The spline approximates the chain very closely, but the curvature varies continuously along the spline, smoothing out any jumps in curvature in the original chain of entities.
4. Start picking spline points. Click the middle mouse button to end spline creation. If you are creating an approximate chain spline, pick the entities (lines, arcs, splines, elliptical fillets, and conics) that form a continuous chain. Pro/ENGINEER transforms the selected entities to phantom line font and creates the approximate chain spline on top of these entities. 5. Choose Done/Return to complete the spline. Using Splines Created with the Control Poly Option Note the following rules for splines created with Control Poly: If you delete the control polygon, the spline becomes a standard spline with no tangency conditions. If you delete the spline, the entities of the corresponding control polygon are also deleted. You cannot dimension the spline to coordinate systems or use its interpolation points for dimensioning. You cannot specify the radius-of-curvature dimension. If no entities of its control polygon are dimensioned, you can modify the spline using the Move Pnts and Control Poly options in the MOD SPLINE menu.
Using the Splines Created with Approx Chain Note the following rules for deleting approximate chain splines: If you delete an approximate chain spline, Pro/ENGINEER removes it and turns the entities from the chain back into geometry. If you delete an entity from the chain, Pro/ENGINEER deletes the entire chain. The spline itself remains in the section, but it is no longer driven by the entity chain from which it was created. You can then modify the spline like any other spline in Sketcher mode.
A - 14
If you restore a deleted chain, Pro/ENGINEER brings the whole chain back into the section. If you modified the spline in the meantime, the system regenerates it back to its original form and reattaches it to the controlling chain.
If you move the approximate chain using the Move Entity option from the GEOM TOOLS, note the following: If you pick on the interior of the spline, Pro/ENGINEER translates it along with the construction entities. If you select an endpoint of the spline or the adjacent construction entity, the system applies an extend and rotate transformation to both the spline and the chain. If you select an entity of the approximated chain, Pro/ENGINEER translates the spline together with the chain.
Using Sketcher Text

You can include text in a section for extruded protrusions that do not use the Thin option and cuts, trimming surfaces, and cosmetic features. The characters that are in the section for an extruded feature must use the font font3d. For cosmetic features, you can later modify the font, as described in Modifying Text Entities on page A - 46. Sketcher with Intent Manager How to Add a Text String to a Section 1. Choose Sketch and Adv Geometry. 2. Choose Text from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. 3. Enter a single line of up to 79 characters of text, followed by a carriage return for each line of text you want to enter. 4. To complete the text entry portion of the process, enter a carriage return in an empty text input line. 5. Place the text by picking two opposite corners of a text box using the left mouse button. The box determines the original text height, width factor, and location. After you place the text, the box becomes invisible (see the next figure).
A - 15
Text Placement Box

text box
text origin
To abort text placement, press the middle mouse button. You can then select another location for the text placement.
Creating an Axis in Sketcher

Use the Axis Point option from the ADV GEOMETRY menu to create an axis that goes through the pick point and is normal to the sketching plane. The depth of the axis is determined by the geometry of the feature similar to an axis of a cylindrical hole. You can use the axis created in Sketcher for referencing and dimensioning both in Sketcher and throughout Pro/ENGINEER. The Axis Point behaves as an axis created with Datum > Axis in Part mode. You can include the Sketcher axis in a punch UDF and slot. How to Create a Feature Axis in Sketcher 1. Choose GEOMETRY > Axis Point. 2. Pick a point. 3. The system creates an axis through the pick point.
Sketcher Constraints
When you sketch geometry, the system uses certain assumptions to help you locate geometry. When the cursor comes within the tolerance of some constraints, the system snaps to that constraint and shows its graphical symbol next to that entity. Before you pick the location with the left mouse button, you can: Disable a constraint by pressing the right mouse button. To enable it again, press the right mouse button again. Lock in a constraint by holding the Shift key and pressing the right mouse button. To unlock the constraint, repeat your actions.
A - 16
When more than one constraint is active, you can change the active constraint by using the Tab key.
Constraints that appear in grey are called weak constraints. They can be removed by the system without warning. You can add your own constraints with the Constrain option in the SKETCHER menu. See Creating Constraints on page A - 19.
Graphic Display of Constraints

The system shows constraints as follows: Current constraintred Weak constraint gray Strong constraintyellow Locked constraintenclosed in a circle Disabled constraintwith a line crossing the constraint symbol
The following table lists constraints with the corresponding graphical symbols.
Constraint Same points Horizontal entities Vertical entities Point on entity Tangent entities Perpendicular entities Parallel lines Equal radii Line segments with equal lengths Symmetry
1
Symbol Sketcher with Intent Manager
H V
R with an index in subscript L with an index in subscript (for example, L1)
A - 17
Constraint Entities are lined up horizontally or vertically Collinear Alignment Use Edge/Offset Edge
Symbol
Symbol for the appropriate alignment type. ~
Constraints for the Entities Created with Use Edge or Offset Edge
An entity or a chain of entities created with Use Edge or Offset Edge has the ~ symbol on the entity. If the endpoints of the new entity are fixed, the Same Points constraint symbol appears next to the endpoints.
Turning the Display of Constraints On or Off

You can turn the display of constraints on or off in one of the following ways: Choose Sec Tools from the SKETCHER menu, choose Sec Environ from the SEC TOOLS menu, and add or remove a check mark in front of the Disp Constr option. To disable the constraints display by default, set the configuration option sketcher_disp_constraints to no. Use the Constraint icon in the toolbar.
Strengthening a Constraint
You can turn weak constraints into strong constraints by using the Strengthen option in the CONSTRAINTS menu. Strengthen those system constraints that you do not want the system to delete. Note: When you strengthen a constraint from a group (for example, Equal Lengths), the whole group will be strengthened.
A - 18
Creating Constraints
Use the Constrain option in the SKETCHER menu to access constraints that you want to apply to entities. The constraints you add are strong constraints. How to Apply a Constraint 1. Choose SKETCHER > Constrain > Create. 2. Choose a constraint from the CONSTR TYPES menu. The CONSTRAINTS menu lists the following constraints: Same PointsMake points coincident. Pick two points to be coincident. HorizontalMake a line horizontal. VerticalMake a line vertical. Point On EntityPlace a point on entity. Pick a point and then pick the entity on which (or along which) the point is to be placed. TangentMake entities tangent. Pick two entities to be tangent. PerpendicularMake two entities perpendicular. Pick two entities to be perpendicular. ParallelMake two lines parallel. Pick two lines to be parallel. Equal RadiiMake arcs or circles of equal radius. Pick arcs or circles to have the same radius. Equal LengthsMake segments of equal length. Pick segments to have equal lengths. SymmetricApply symmetry to points. Pick a centerline and then pick two entities to be symmetric about the centerline. Line Up HorizontalLine up two vertices horizontally. Pick two vertices to line up. Line Up VerticalLine up two vertices vertically. Pick two vertices to line up. CollinearMake two lines collinear. AlignmentAlign two entities. Sketcher with Intent Manager
A - 19
Note: Interior spline points become visible and available for selection when you choose a constraint option that allows point selection, for example, Alignment. 3. Pick entities as prompted by the system. 4. After you add a constraint, the system updates the section to the new conditions.
Obtaining Information About a Constraint

Use the Explain option in the CONSTRAINTS menu to obtain information about a constraint. Select a constraint symbol from the sketch. The system highlights entities to which the selected constraint applies and prints a message explaining the selected constraint.
Deleting a Constraint
To delete a constraint, choose Delete from the SKETCHER menu and Delete Item from the DELETION menu. Then pick a constraint. When you delete a constraint, the system automatically adds a dimension to keep the section solved.
Conflict Resolution
When you add a dimension or constraint that conflicts or is redundant with existing strong dimensions or constraints, Sketcher highlights dimensions and constraints in conflict and asks you to remove one of the highlighted constraints or dimensions. Use the following options from the CONFLICT RESOLUTION menu when you resolve the conflict: DeleteSelect a constraint or dimension to remove. If you choose Quit Sel without selecting an item to delete, Sketcher will remove an item without your input. ExplainSelect a constraint to get a description of the constraint. Sketcher highlights entities associated with this constraint. UndoUndo changes to bring the section to the state just before the action that lead to the conflict. The redo is not available after you choose Undo, because the last operation was not finished.
A - 20
Dimensioning Sketcher Geometry

Sketcher makes sure that the section is adequately constrained and dimensioned at any stage of the section creation. As you sketch a section, the system automatically dimensions the geometry. These dimensions are called weak dimensions, because the system creates and removes them without warning. Weak dimensions appear in gray. You can also add your own dimensions to create the desired dimensioning scheme. User dimensions are considered strong dimensions by the system. As you add strong dimensions, the system automatically removes unnecessary weak dimensions and constraints. If adding a dimension leads to a conflict or redundancy in the dimensioning scheme and constraints, Sketcher issues a warning and lets you resolve the conflict as described in Conflict Resolution on page A - 20.
Strengthening Weak Dimensions

You can selectively turn weak dimensions into strong by using the Strengthen option in the DIMENSION menu. It is good practice to strengthen weak dimensions that you intend to keep in a section before you exit Sketcher. This ensures that the system does not delete these dimensions without your input. Note: When you strengthen a dimension, the system rounds its value. How to Strengthen a Dimension 1. Choose DIMENSION > Strengthen. 2. Select a dimension to strengthen. 3. After strengthened, the dimension changes from gray to yellow. Note: Throughout Pro/ENGINEER, whenever you modify a value of a weak dimension or use it in a relation, that dimension becomes strong.
Deleting Weak Dimensions

Weak dimensions cannot be deleted. They are automatically removed when you create strong dimensions that make the weak dimensions unnecessary.
A - 21
Turning the Display of Dimensions On or Off

You can turn the display of dimensions on or off in any of the following ways: Choose Sec Tools from the SKETCHER menu, choose Sec Environ from the SEC TOOLS menu, and then add or remove a check mark in front of the Disp Dims option. To disable the constraints display by default, set the configuration option sketcher_disp_dimensions to no. Use the Dimension icon in the toolbar.
Relations
You can create relations between dimensions in Sketcher mode. This allows you to lock in design relations as soon as you create the section. For information on how to add relations to a section, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.
Fractions
You can create dimensions in decimal format or by using fractions. For more information, see Fractions on page 1 - 7.
Adding Dimensions
Use the Dimension command in the SKETCHER menu to add strong dimensions or to replace existing dimensions. To create a dimension you pick the entity or entities with the left mouse button and then place the dimension at the desired position with the middle mouse button. The commands in the DIMENSION menu work in continue mode: you continue creating dimensions of one type until you choose another option.
Different Types of Dimension

When you create a dimension, select the desired dimension type from the DIMENSION menu. You can create the following dimension types in 2-D Sketcher: NormalCreate linear, angular, diameter, and radial dimensions. PerimeterCreate a perimeter dimension with the fixed value.
A - 22
ReferenceCreate a dimension that you want to keep for reference. Note: When you retrieve an old section into Release 19.0 Sketcher with Dynamic Dimensioning on, Sketcher converts all extra dimensions into reference dimensions.
BaselineEstablish a baseline for creating linear dimensions in ordinate format.
Linear Dimensions
You can create linear dimensions as follows: To dimension the length of a linePick the line, then place the dimension. To dimension the distance between two parallel linesPick the two lines, then place the dimension. To dimension the distance between a point and a linePick the line, pick the point, and place the dimension. To create a dimension between two pointsPick the points and location for the dimension. Select an option in the DIM PNT menu: HorizontalIndicate the horizontal distance between the points. VerticalIndicate the vertical distance between the points. SlantedIndicate the shortest distance between the points. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Notes: You cannot dimension the length of a centerline because it is infinite. When you are creating a dimension between two arc or circle extents (tangency points), only horizontal and vertical dimensions are allowed. Pro/ENGINEER creates the dimension to the tangency point closest to the pick point.
Diameter Dimensions
Diameter dimensions measure the diameters of sketched circles and arcs or diameters for sketching sections about an axis. The following sections describe how to dimension arcs and circles, and revolved sections.
A - 23
Dimensioning Arcs and Circles To create a diameter dimension for an arc or a circle, pick the arc or circle twice and then place the dimension. Diameter Dimension for a Circle
Place dimension here.
Pick twice on circle.
Dimensioning Revolved Sections The following procedure explains how to dimension a section of a revolved feature. How to Create a Diameter Dimension 1. Pick the entity to be dimensioned. 2. Pick the centerline that will be the axis of revolution. 3. Pick the entity again. 4. Place the dimension. Note: The diameter dimension for a revolved feature extends beyond the centerline, indicating that it is a diameter dimension, not a radius dimension. The following figure shows how to create a diameter dimension for a revolved feature section.
A - 24
Creating a Diameter Dimension

pick 4 - places dimension pick 2 - on centerline
pick 3 pick 1
section
Radial Dimensions
Radial dimensions measure the radii of circles or arcs and circles and arcs created by revolving a section about an axis. To create a radial dimension for an arc or circle, pick on the circle or arc and then place the dimension. To create a radial dimension for a revolved section, pick the entity, pick on the centerline axis, then place the dimension.
Angular Dimensions
Angular dimensions measure the angle between two lines or the angle of an arc between its endpoints. To create an angular dimension between lines, pick the first line, pick the second line, and then place the dimension. Where you place the dimension determines how the angle is measured (either acute or obtuse). The next figure illustrates angular dimensions.
A - 25
Creating an Angular Dimension

Pick edges, then place a dimension.
How to Create an Angle Dimension for an Arc 1. Pick one endpoint of the arc. 2. Pick the other endpoint of the arc. 3. Pick the arc. 4. Place the dimension (see the following figure). Arc Angle Dimension
pick 1 - on endpoint
pick 2 - on endpoint pick 3 - on arc pick 4 - places dimension
Spline Dimensions
You can add dimensions to a spline by using its endpoints or interpolation points. To dimension a spline, you must dimension its endpoints. You need not add spline dimensions if the spline is attached to other geometry and the endpoints are dimensioned.
A - 26
You can dimension spline endpoints using linear dimensions, tangency (angular) dimensions, and radius-of-curvature dimensions. The following sections describe linear dimensions, tangency dimensions, radius-of-curvature dimensions, dimensioning interpolation points, and associating a spline to a coordinate system.
Linear Dimensions
You can add linear dimensions to a spline. How to Create Linear Dimensions 1. Pick the spline endpoint. 2. Place the dimension.
Tangency Dimensions
You can create tangency dimensions for endpoints and intermediate control points of the spline. Note that the spline must have tangency defined before you can use a tangency dimension at the ends. You can modify the spline to add tangency and then create angle dimensions. Sketcher with Intent Manager Note: When you create a tangency dimension on the spline, Sketcher removes the tangency assumption. How to Create a Tangency Dimension 1. Select the spline twice. 2. Select the endpoint where the tangency is defined or any spline interpolation point. 3. Select geometry to which the spline tangency is defined. 4. Place the dimension.
Radius-of-Curvature Dimensions
You can create radius-of-curvature dimensions. The spline must have tangency defined before you can use a radius-of-curvature dimension. Note: If no tangency exists and the endpoint is dimensioned with a radius-of-curvature dimension, you must modify the spline to add tangency, or Pro/ENGINEER will report the dimension as extra.
A - 27
How to Create a Radius-of-Curvature Dimension 1. Select the spline endpoint with the left mouse button. 2. Place the dimension with the middle mouse button.
Dimensioning Interpolation Points

You can dimension the spline interpolation points (the points you picked to define the spline). How to Dimension the Spline Interpolation Points 1. Select the spline. The system displays the interpolation points. 2. Select the interpolation point to dimension. 3. Select the geometry to which you want to dimension.
Associating a Spline to a Coordinate System

Before you dimension the interpolation points of the spline to the coordinate system, you must first associate the spline to a coordinate system. How to Associate a Spline to a Coordinate System 1. Choose Dimension from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Pick the spline twice. 3. Select the coordinate system, then click the middle mouse button. The spline is now associated to a local coordinate system. However, the system does not display any dimensions. For information on how to modify spline points to change the shape of the spline, see Modifying a Spline on page A - 40.
Conic Dimensions
There are two dimensioning schemes to dimension a conic. One uses an rho value to define the shape of the conic. The other requires you to add a distinct Sketcher point to anchor the conic at the selected location. The resulting conic is defined by the two endpoints and the distinct third point. How to Dimension the Conic 1. Dimension the endpoints to locate the conic spline. 2. Create angular dimensions to define the endpoint tangency.
A - 28
How to Create a Conic Tangency Dimension 1. Pick a conic. 2. Pick the endpoint where the tangency is to be defined. 3. Select geometry to which the spline tangency is defined (such as a centerline or straight edge). 4. Place the dimension. For two conics that are tangent to each other at a common point, you need to create only one tangency dimension. For some end tangency angles, a conic cannot be created. For example, it is not possible to make a single conic that represents one half or more of an ellipse. If a conic fails, modify the tangency angles. If no tangency angles are present, add them, because the problematic tangents must then be determined by adjacent entities.
The rho Dimension

The rho dimension of a conic segment PQ defines the shape of the conic. The rho dimension specifies a ratio along a vector from the chord (PQ) through a point C to the vertex (R). Point C is at the maximum distance (CD), measured by a normal from the chord PQ to the conic segment PQ. Sketcher with Intent Manager Conic rho Dimension
R
b
C a D
rho = a/(a+b)
A - 29
How to Dimension the rho Parameter Value of the Conic 1. Pick the conic with the left button and create the dimension with the middle button. The default rho value is 0.5. 2. You can modify rho to be one of the following values: For an ellipse: 0.05 < parameter < 0.5 When you are creating a closed ellipse section from four conic segments, the only value for rho that gives a true ellipse is (sqrt (2)1). Enter this value exactly as shown (not as the approximation .4142). For a parabola: parameter = 0.5 For a hyperbola: 0.5 < parameter < 0.95 Ellipse Consisting of Four Conics
Centerlines .414 .414
rho dimension enter as sqrt(2)1 Conic
.414 .414
Angular dimension at common endpoint
Linear dimensions
The Three-Point Dimension

For conics that are defined by three distinct points, the system determines the shoulder point from the user-defined point through which it passes. If this is a model point (vertex or datum), you need not add another dimensionyou can align the conic to this model point. However, if it is a Sketcher point or vertex, you must dimension the point to regenerate the sketch.
A - 30
How to Dimension a Conic Defined by Three Points 1. Perform the two rho dimensioning steps to define the conic endpoint and tangency dimensions (see The rho Dimension on page A - 29). 2. Create a Sketcher point on the conic where the conic is to remain anchored. Note: If you place the conic close enough to the Sketcher point on a curve (such as during creation of a swept feature), the conic passes through that point, behaving the same as a conic for which you define a third point.
Dimensioning an Elliptic Fillet

The horizontal and vertical endpoints of the ellipse and its center point can be dimensioned as regular Sketcher points. You can also dimension the X- and Y-radii of the elliptical fillet. How to Dimension the X- and Y-Radii of the Ellipse 1. Pick the fillet (do not pick endpoints). 2. Place the dimension with the middle mouse button. 3. Choose an option from the ELLIPSE DIM menu: Sketcher with Intent Manager X RadiusDimension the horizontal half-axis. Y RadiusDimension the vertical half-axis.
Perimeter Dimension
You can use the Perimeter option in the DIMENSION menu to dimension the total length of a chain or loop of entities. You must select a dimension that the system can adjust to obtain the desired perimeter. This dimension is called the varying dimension. When you modify the perimeter dimension, the system modifies the varying dimension accordingly. Note the following rules for the perimeter dimension: You cannot modify varying dimensions, because they are driven dimensions. If you delete the varying dimension, the system deletes the perimeter dimension.
A - 31
The following figure shows a sample sketch with a perimeter dimension. Using the Perimeter Dimension
Perimeter dimension
Varying dimension When you modify the perimeter dimension, the varying dimension adjusts accordingly.
How to Add a Perimeter Dimension 1. Choose Dimension, Perimeter. 2. Select an entity from a chain or loop. 3. All vertices in the chain or loop are highlighted in white. Do one of the following: If you want to select the entire chain/loop, choose Done Sel. ...or... If you want to select a portion of the chain/loop, select two vertices and then use options in the CHOOSE menu to highlight the desired portion. Conclude the selection by choosing Accept.
4. Select a dimension that the system can vary. The perimeter dimension shows up with the current value of the perimeter and points to the chain/loop that it is dimensioning. Note: Perimeter dimensions are not supported for parallel blends and variable section sweeps.
A - 32
Reference Dimensions
Use the Reference option in the DIMENSION menu to create reference dimensions in Sketcher. The symbolic name for the reference dimensions is rsd# REF. You can include reference dimensions in Sketcher as sd# or rsd#. Note: Reference dimension names rsd# and sd# cannot be used as parameter names.
Baseline (Ordinate) Dimensions

You can create linear dimensions in ordinate format. Creating ordinate dimensions involves two basic steps: designating the baseline and dimensioning geometry to the baseline. You can create the baseline dimension on lines, arc and circle centers, and geometry endpoints (lines, arcs, conics, and splines), or you can select model geometry to dimension as a baseline. Note that if the baseline resides in the model, the ordinate dimension to that baseline also resides in the model. How to Create Ordinate Dimensions 1. Establish the baseline by choosing SKETCHER > Dimension > Baseline. 2. Select the geometry to dimension as a baseline with the left mouse button. Locate the dimension text by pressing the middle mouse button. For lines, the baseline is oriented the same way. For arc and circle centers, and for geometry endpoints, choose one of the following options from the VERT HORIZ menu: VertOrient the baseline vertically. HorizOrient the baseline horizontally. Sketcher with Intent Manager
3. To create ordinate dimensions to the specified baseline, choose Normal. 4. To add a dimension, pick the baseline dimension and then pick the entity to dimension using the left mouse button. Place the ordinate dimension by pressing the middle mouse button. 5. To add other ordinate dimensions, repeat Step 4.
A - 33
The following figure illustrates how to create an ordinate baseline. Creating an Ordinate Baseline
pick 1 - select entity pick 2 - place baseline dimension
The following figure illustrates how to create an ordinate dimension. Creating an Ordinate Dimension
Pick 1 - select baseline dimension.
Pick 2 - select entity to dimension.
Pick 3 - Place a dimension.
Replacing a Dimension
You can replace an existing Sketcher dimension with an equivalent one so that the new dimension retains the symbolic dimension (sd#) of the original. Replacing a dimension is useful when you want to preserve additional data associated with the original dimension (for example, geometric tolerance symbol or extra text added in Drawing mode).
A - 34
How to Replace a Dimension 1. Choose SKETCHER > Dimension. 2. Choose Replace from the DIMENSION menu. 3. Select a dimension to replace. The dimension is deleted. 4. Create a new equivalent dimension.
Adding Relations to a Section

You can add relations to sections while you are in Sketcher mode. Relations in Sketcher mode follow the same rules as in Part mode, except the parameters must belong to a model and cannot be created in Sketcher mode. The relations apply to the section, but you can modify and use them in part or assembly relations. You can also enter a section relation when you modify the driven dimension. Enter the relation (for example, sd4=sd2+sd3/2) when you are modifying dimension values. Pro/ENGINEER displays the new relation and prompts you to accept it. When you add the relation, use dimension symbols as follows: sd# for normal Sketcher dimensions, rsd# for reference Sketcher dimensions, and kd# for known dimensions. See Known Dimensions on page B - 19 for more information. Sketcher with Intent Manager Note: Only Sketcher, reference, and known dimensions are allowed in relations created within Sketcher mode.
Modifying Dimension Values

Use the Mod Entity option in the MOD SKETCH menu to change dimension values of entities. How to Modify the Value of a Dimension 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu. 2. The Mod Entity option in the MOD SKETCH menu is active by default. Pick the dimension to be changed with the left mouse button. The system highlights the dimension in red. 3. Enter a new dimension value or relation. The modified value changes from red to white.
A - 35
Negative Dimensions
For linear dimensions, you can enter a negative dimension value. This causes the geometry to reverse direction. In Sketcher, the negative sign always appears next to the dimension. In Part mode, dimension values always appear as positive.
Updating Geometry
When you start a new section, the Delay Modify option is turned on. This means that Sketcher lets you do multiple changes to the section before it updates geometry. After the section is changed, Delay Modify is replaced by Regenerate in the SKETCHER menu. To update the section, choose Regenerate. After you regenerate the section, the Delay Modify option is turned off, and Sketcher will update the section each time it changes. If you want to modify several values without immediately updating the section, check on Delay Modify. When the system updates geometry, it animates the modification process so you can see how the size and shape of the section changes according to new dimension values. The system dynamically refits the section into the window, if necessary. Animated modification is enabled by default. If you want to turn animation off, set the sketcher_animated_modify configuration option to no.
Restoring Dimensions
If a regeneration fails, the system terminates the animated modification at the point of failure so that you can see which dimensional change caused that failure. Use RestoreDim or Restore All to restore original dimensions; then you can try to modify the section dimensions again. The SECTION FAIL menu lists the following options: RestoreDimPick individual dimensions that you want to restore to their original values. If this does not help, modify some dimensions, or delete features. RestoreAllRestore all the dimensions to their original values. Note: If a regeneration failed because values were changed in a relation, either edit the relation or modify the dimensions used in the relation.
A - 36
For more information, see Working in the Resolve Environment on page 17 - 3.
Modifying a Section
Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu to modify the size and shape of the section. The MOD SKETCH menu lists the following options: Mod EntityModify dimensions, splines, or sketch text entities. To modify a dimension, pick this dimension and enter a new dimension value. ScaleScale the section by modifying a single linear dimension. Drag Dim ValModify or scale up to 5 dimension values with a slider control. Drag EntitySelect a dimension and then an entity to drag to the desired location using the mouse buttons. Drag VertexPick two dimensions and then a vertex; drag the vertex to the desired location using the mouse buttons. Set AnchorSet the point that will be fixed during drag operations. This option is available only when there is no solid object present. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Scaling a Dimension
Use the Scale option in the MOD SKETCH menu to shrink or expand the entire section. Enter a new value for a linear dimension; the system will use the ratio of the change applied to the modified dimension to modify all section dimensions. Notes: You can scale a feature section only if there is no existing geometry in the model, with the exception of datum planes. You cannot pick angular dimensions for this option.
A - 37
Modifying a Section by Dragging

Use the Drag Dim Val, Drag Entity, and Drag Vertex options to dynamically modify section dimensions over a continuous range of values and watch the section update smoothly. The system maintains all constraints during the dynamic modification and automatically updates the sketch. With the options Drag Vertex and Drag Entity, you drag the geometry to the desired location while Sketcher calculates the dimensions for you. With the Drag Dim Val option, you change dimensions by using a slider control. As you dynamically modify a dimension, the sketch may fail regeneration. For example, if the section cannot be solved at a current position, it remains displayed in the last generated position until you move the cursor into a region where the section can be solved. If the section fails regeneration, the system issues a warning message. The following sections describe the different kinds of dynamic modification in detail.
Using the Drag Dim Val Option

Use Drag Dim Val option to vary dimensions. How to Vary Dimensions 1. Choose Drag Dim Val from the MOD SKETCH menu. 2. Select up to five dimensions and choose Done Sel. 3. The system displays a thermotool with the Modify Dims sliders and the Scale slider. Use the appropriate Move Dims sliders to vary corresponding dimensions. Use the Scale slider to vary all the selected dimensions at once. When you use the Scale slider, the system multiplies all dimensions in other sliders by the scale, except for dimensions that do not control length directly (for example, angular dimensions and conic rho dimensions). 4. By moving the mouse, slide the red arrows to point to new values. Sketcher automatically changes the sketch to reflect your changes. The system displays only the dimensions that you are changing. If you are satisfied with the change, click the left mouse button in the top bar of the thermotool. To reset the tool, click the right mouse button. Use the middle mouse button to abort the process.
A - 38
Note that you can change the Sensitivity value, which in effect changes the range of the slider control.
Using the Drag Entity Option

Use the Drag Entity option to drag an entity. How to Drag an Entity 1. Choose Drag Entity from the MOD SKETCH menu. 2. Select a dimension to vary and then select an entity. When you move the mouse, the Sketcher modifies the dimension to make the entity follow the cursor. Note that only the selected dimension changes; all the other dimensions remain fixed. 3. To accept the new value of the dimension, click the left mouse button. To abort the changes and restore the original value, click the middle mouse button. 4. To continue the process, select another entity for dragging or pick a new dimension.
Using the Drag Vertex Option

Use the Drag Vertex option to drag vertices. Sketcher with Intent Manager How to Drag a Vertex 1. Choose Drag Vertex from the MOD SKETCH menu. 2. Select two dimensions to vary and then select a vertex. The sketch adjusts so the vertex always stays on top of the cursor. 3. To accept the new value of the dimension, click the left mouse button. To abort the changes and restore the original value, click the middle mouse button. 4. To continue the process, select another vertex for dragging or pick new dimensions.
Setting an Anchor Point

The notion of anchor point is applicable only when you are not sketching on preexisting geometry (for example, while creating the first feature of a solid or when entering Sketcher mode directly). The system stores the anchor point with the sketch.
A - 39
Note that if you later create a default coordinate system, the system places it at the anchor point and updates its location if the anchor point is changed while you are redefining the section of the base feature. How to Change the Anchor Point 1. Choose Set Anchor from the MOD SKETCH menu. This option is available only when no three-dimensional geometry exists for locating the section. 2. Select the point that you want to use as the anchor for the sketch.
Modifying a Spline
There are several ways to modify a spline: Modify the location of spline endpoints and interpolation points. You can modify the location of spline points by moving them with the Move Pnts and Control Poly options (see Modifying the Spline Points Location on page A - 41). ...or... You can change the points coordinates by entering new values from the keyboard or by reading in a data file (see Modifying the Spline by Its Coordinates on page A - 43). Modify end tangency (see Modifying the Tangency of a Spline on page A - 42). Modify the number of points in the spline (see Modifying the Number of Points on a Spline on page A - 45). You can add and delete spline points. You can also smooth the spline and sparse the points.
Displaying Spline Curvature

You can display the spline curvature and see how it dynamically updates as you modify the spline. How to Set the Curvature Display for a Spline 1. Choose SKETCHER > Modify. 2. Pick the spline. 3. Choose MOD SPLINE > CrvtureDispl. 4. Place a check mark in front of the Display Curvature option.
A - 40
5. To set the scale of the curvature display, choose Scale from the CRVT PARAMS menu and enter a scale value. To set the density of the curvature display, choose Density from the CRVT PARAMS menu and enter the density factor.
Modifying the Spline Points Location

To modify the location and orientation of a spline, modify the location of its endpoints. Pro/ENGINEER resizes and rotates the spline to fit. Note: You cannot move the endpoints of a spline if they are dimensioned. To modify the shape of the spline, you move its interpolation points. Several ways to do this are described in the following sections. Moving Spline Points With the Move Points Option The Move Points command lets you move spline points by dragging them to a new location. How to Move Spline Points 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Pick the spline. The system displays the spline points as white circles. 3. Choose Move Points from the MOD SPLINE menu. 4. Select an option from the MOVE PNTS menu: Single PntMove individual spline points. Pick a spline point to be moved using the left mouse button. The system highlights the point in red. Drag the point to its new location and place it by clicking the left mouse button. Pnt RangeMove spline points that lie within the range defined by two spline points. Pick two points to bound the range to be moved. You then select any point within this range and pick its new position. All the points within the range follow. Sketcher with Intent Manager
5. When finished moving points, choose Done Move from the MOVE DONE menu. 6. To complete the process, choose Done Modify.
A - 41
Modifying the Spline Using the Control Poly Option The Control Poly option enables you to modify the shape of a spline by moving vertices of the splines control polygon. Notes: You cannot move spline endpoints using the Control Poly option. You cannot use Control Poly on a spline that has a tangency condition defined for one end only.
How to Modify a Spline 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu and pick the spline that you want to modify. The system displays the MOD SPLINE menu. 2. Choose Control Poly. The system displays the control polygon of the spline in white. 3. To adjust the shape of the spline, pick a vertex on the control polygon and drag it to a new location. You cannot pick endpoints. The spline rubberbands to its new shape as you move the point. Place the vertex with the left mouse button.
Modifying the Tangency of a Spline

You can modify the tangency of the endpoints of an existing spline. How to Modify the Tangency of Endpoints 1. Choose Modify > Mod Entity. 2. Pick a spline. 3. Choose Tangency from the MOD SPLINE menu. 4. Pick the start or end point. The system displays the current status of the point (tangent or non-tangent). 5. The system displays the MOD TANG menu, which has the following options: AddAdd a tangency condition to the selected point. RemoveRemove a tangency condition from the selected point.
6. To modify another endpoint, pick the other endpoint and choose Add or Remove. 7. Choose Done Modify to exit the MOD SPLINE menu.
A - 42
Modifying the Spline by Its Coordinates

When a spline has been associated to a local coordinate system, you can move the spline points by entering values relative to the coordinate system. You can change the type of coordinate system between Cartesian (X, Y, and Z), cylindrical (radius, theta, and Z), and spherical (radius, theta, and phi) when you read or save points to a file. However, when you enter new values from the keyboard, you can enter Cartesian values only. Use the following options from the MOD SPLINE menu to work with coordinates: CoordsModify the X- and Y- coordinates of the points by entering values. Read PntsRead in coordinates from a specified text file. Save PntsWrite the current coordinates into a specified text file. You can then edit and read this file using the option Read Pnts. Info PntsDisplay the coordinates of a spline in an Information Window. You must select the coordinate type you want used in the value display.
How to Modify a Spline by Changing the Coordinates of its Points Sketcher with Intent Manager 1. Modify the X,Y, Z coordinates and the tangency of the spline endpoints. Modifying the endpoints alters the location of other spline points. 2. Modify the X, Y, Z coordinates of the intermediate spline points. You need to do this only if the Pro/ENGINEER adjustments to the spline are not satisfactory, or if the spline needs to be explicitly defined with specified input values. Modifying Spline Point Coordinates from the Keyboard You can modify spline point coordinates by entering their values from the keyboard. Note: You can enter new coordinate values only if the spline is associated to a local coordinate system. See Associating a Spline to a Coordinate System on page A - 28.
How to Modify Spline Point Coordinates by Entering Their Values 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu and then pick on the spline. The system displays the spline points. 2. Choose Coords from the MOD SPLINE menu.
A - 43
3. Pick a point for which you want to enter new coordinates. 4. Enter values for the X- and Y- coordinates. You can enter a new value, or accept the default one. 5. Choose Done Modify to save the changes. Note: If you have a license for Pro/FEATURE, you can also modify the Z-coordinates of a spline when you create certain features (for example, a sweep). For more information, see Three-Dimensional Sweeps on page 6 - 7. Saving Spline Points to a File You can save spline points to a file with values in Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate systems. How to Save Spline Points to a File 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu and pick on a spline. 2. Choose Save Pnts from the MOD SPLINE menu. 3. Enter a file name. 4. Choose the coordinate system type from the COORD TYPE menu. 5. Pro/ENGINEER creates a spline point definition file with the coordinate system type printed in the file. This is a standard text file that you can edit using the operating system editor. You can read in the edited file with Read Pnts. Modifying Spline Point Coordinates by Reading in a File You can modify the coordinates of spline points by reading in a data file. How to Modify Spline Point Coordinates Using a File 1. Create a spline point definition file and modify it. 2. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu. 3. Pick the spline that you want to modify. 4. Choose Read Pnts from the MOD SPLINE menu and enter the name of the spline points. 5. Choose the coordinate system type from the COORD TYPE menu. 6. The system reads in the spline points file.
A - 44
7. If the number of points in the file is not equal to the number of points in the spline, Pro/ENGINEER asks if you want to automatically add points to, or remove points from, the spline. Respond yes to adjust the number of spline points to correspond to the number of points in the file. Respond no to abort the reading of the point file. Notes: If the spline does not appear as expected, you probably specified the wrong type of coordinate system. Try reading in the file again and specifying a different type of coordinate system. If the spline endpoints are dimensioned, the system ignores the modifications to the endpoint coordinates.
Obtaining Information About the Point Coordinates You can check the current values of spline point coordinates. How to View the Current Coordinate Values of Spline Points 1. Choose Modify from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Pick the spline you want to modify. 3. Choose Info Pnts from the MOD SPLINE menu. 4. Pro/ENGINEER displays the current values for spline coordinates in the Information Window. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Modifying the Number of Points on a Spline

To modify the number of spline points, use the following options in the MOD SPLINE menu: Add Pnts Add spline points. Choose one of following options from the NEW POINTS menu: InteriorAdd points to the interior of the spline. Pick any location on the spline between any two existing points. ExteriorExtend the spline by adding points beyond its current endpoints. Pick the spline endpoint to extend, then pick additional points.
Note: If you try to add a new spline point very close to an existing point, Sketcher may tell you that the new point is too close to the existing point. In this case, add the new point farther away, then move it to the desired location.
A - 45
Delete Pnts Delete interior spline points. SparseDecrease the number of points on a spline. See Modifying Imported Curves on page 16 - 27. SmoothMake the spline smoother. See Modifying Imported Curves on page 16 - 27.
Modifying Text Entities

When you choose Modify and select Sketcher text, the system displays the MOD SEC TEXT2 menu, which lists the following options: Text LineModify the text message. Enter the new text at the system prompt. The system replaces the old text string with the new string. Text StyleModify the text style using the dialog box.
Using the Dialog Box to Modify the Text

If you choose the Text Style option in the MOD SEC TEXT2 menu, the system displays the Sketcher Text Style dialog box, enabling you to define the following text attributes: FontEnter the font name in the input table. The available fonts are as follows.
Font Name font3d font leroy cal_grek cal_alf
Description Pro/ENGINEER 3-D font used for extruded text (also the default for all text features) Pro/ENGINEER ASCII font Leroy Calcomp Greek characters Calcomp alphanumeric characters
HeightEnter the new text height in this field. WidthEnter the new text width factor in this field. AngleEnter the new text angle in this field. This value affects the rotation angle of the rectangle containing the text. A positive value rotates the rectangle counterclockwise.
A - 46
Slant AngleEnter the new text slant angle in this field. This option affects how the text is slanted with respect to the sides of the rectangle that contains it.
The action buttons are as follows: ApplyApply the new values to the text. CloseExit from the dialog box. ResetReset the value to the default value.
To change any of the fields, enter the new value in the appropriate field. Select the Apply button to apply the new value. When you finish changing the text style attributes, select the Cancel button.
Moving Entities
Use the Move command in the SKETCHER menu to move Sketcher entities. Sketcher preserves the constraints and dimensioning scheme as they were before the move. How to Move Entities 1. Choose Move from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Select the appropriate options from the MOVE SKETCH menu and select entities as prompted by the system. The options in the MOVE SKETCH menu are: DragDrag an entity or dimension to its new location. Pick an entity, its vertex, or its center point. Drag ChainDrag a chain of entities by picking an entity in the chain. Pick the first and the last entity in the chain, or pick an entity from the chain and press Done Sel for the entire chain. Then pick a vertex, and drag the chain by this vertex to its new location. Lock/UnlockLock or unlock entities and their dimensions for the move operation. Pick a vertex, entity, or a dimension. Locking a line fixes its angular orientation during dragging. Locking an arc or circle fixes its radius. Locking a dimension prevents its value from changing. Locking a point prevents it from moving. Sketcher show a locked dimension with an L preceding the dimension value, and a locked entity with a triangle symbol over the item. Lock All DimsLock all dimensions to prevent their values from changing during the drag operation.
A - 47
3. Drag entities to their new locations. For more information on locking dimensions, see Using Move in Conjunction with Locking Dimensions on page A - 64.
Deleting Entities
Select Delete from the SKETCHER menu to display the DELETION menu with the following options: Delete ItemDelete a selected section entity, dimension, or constraint. Delete ManyDelete several items by enclosing them in the selection box. Delete AllDelete all section geometry and references entities. Delete All affects only entities and dimensions and does not undo changes made to the Sketcher environment. If you have sketched multiple subsections for a blend, Delete All deletes all entities in all subsections. To delete all the entities of the current subsection without affecting those in other subsections, use Delete Many. All GeometryDelete all Sketcher geometry, leaving all model references intact. All ReferencesDelete all model references for the current section.
Consider the following information about the Delete command: You can use Delete Item in combination with Delete Many. If two entities lie on top of each other, the system deletes the entity that was created first. You can use Query Sel to select the desired one. When you redefine a section with Redefine > Scheme, Delete All deletes only section dimensions without deleting section entities. Note: When you delete an entity, Sketcher tries to replace constraints associated with the deleted entity by the equivalent assumptions.
A - 48
Undoing Sketcher Operations

Use the Undo option in the SKETCHER menu to undo the most recent operation. To reverse the Undo operation, choose Redo from the SKETCHER menu. If the last operation was not completed, Redo may not be available. You can also access the Undo option through the right mouse menu or by selecting the Undo icon from the toolbar. Up to 500 operations can be undone using Undo. You can set your own undo limit by setting the sketcher_undo_stack_limit configuration option. The default is 200.
Manipulating Sketcher Geometry

To access tools for manipulating sketcher geometry, choose SKETCHER > Geom Tools. For 2-D Sketcher, the GEOM TOOLS menu lists the following options: IntersectIntersect two entities. TrimTrim an entity using options in the DRAFT TRIM menu. DivideDividing an entity into multiple segments. MirrorMirror geometry about a centerline. Move EntityMove geometry by dragging or rotating. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Intersecting Two Entities

The Intersect option determines the intersection point of two entities that cross, and divides both of them at the point of intersection. Note: Centerlines, edges, axes, and planes can be used for intersections; however, they cannot be split.
A - 49
The following figure illustrates the Intersect option. Intersecting a Circle with a Line
Pick at these points to divide two entities at the first point of intersection.
Both circle and line are divided. The circle is divided near the selection point.
How to Intersect Two Entities 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Intersect from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Pick the first entity near the intersection point. 4. Pick the second entity near the intersection point. 5. Pro/ENGINEER splits the entities. If desired, delete any unnecessary entities.
Trimming Entities
Use the Trim option in the GEOM TOOLS menu to trim entities to a bounding entity, at the intersection point, to a certain length, or by an increment.
Trimming to a Bounding Entity

Use the Bound option to trim several entities to the same bounding entity in one operation. The bounding entity is not changed during the operation. Consider the following information on using the Bound option: You can use a centerline, datum plane, datum axis, or tangent edges. You cannot use a feature axis or cosmetic feature entities as bounding entities. To extend two entities so they intersect, first select one of them as the bounding entity and trim the other; then reverse the process.
A - 50
The following figure illustrates the Trim > Bound option. Using the Bound Option
Bounding entity
Select this line to extend.
Select this line to shorten.
How to Trim Entities to a Bounding Entity 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Trim from the GEOM TOOLS menu and then choose Bound from the DRAFT TRIM menu. 3. Select a bounding entity. 4. Select entities to trim. Pro/ENGINEER shortens or extends this entity up to the intersection with the bounding entity or its extension. If the trimmed entity is to be shortened, select the portion of the entity to keep.
Trimming to a Specific Length

Use the Length option to trim an entity to a specific length. How to Trim an Entity to a Specific Length 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Trim from the GEOM TOOLS menu; then choose Length from the DRAFT TRIM menu. 3. Enter the length. 4. Select an entity to trim. Select near the end of the entity to lengthen or shorten it. 5. If the dimension exists, Pro/ENGINEER asks if you want to delete the highlighted dimension. Answer yes to trim the entity; answer no to abort the process.
A - 51
Trimming an Entity by an Increment

Use the Increment option to trim an entity by an increment. How to Trim an Entity by an Incremental Length Change 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Trim from the GEOM TOOLS menu; then choose Increm from the DRAFT TRIM menu. 3. Enter the incremental length. A positive value lengthens an entity, and a negative value shortens it. 4. Pro/ENGINEER asks if you want to delete the highlighted dimension. Answer yes to trim the entity; answer no to abort the process.
Trimming Two Entities to Each Other

Use the Corner option to trim two entities to each other. How to Trim Two Entities to Each Other 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Trim from the GEOM TOOLS menu; then choose Corner from the DRAFT TRIM menu. 3. Select any two entities (they do not have to intersect) on the portion of the entity that you want to keep. 4. Reply yes to the prompt that asks if you want to delete the highlighted dimensions.
Splitting or Trimming Entities with Dimensions

If splitting (intersecting or filleting) or trimming an entity causes existing dimensions to be deleted, the system issues a warning. Pro/ENGINEER highlights in red the dimensions to be deleted. If you answer no to the prompt, the system aborts the split or trim; if you enter yes, it splits or trims the entities and deletes the dimensions.
Dividing Entities
Use the Divide command in the GEOM TOOLS menu to divide a section entity into two or more new entities.
A - 52
How to Divide an Entity into Two or More New Entities 1. Delete the dimensions for each entity you are dividing. 2. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 3. Choose Divide from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 4. Pick the entity at the locations where you want to divide. Pick points appear as yellow points on the entity. 5. If the entity is dimensioned, the system asks you if you want to delete the corresponding dimension. 6. Pro/ENGINEER divides the entity at the pick location. You can now dimension each new entity.
Mirroring Geometry
Use the Mirror option from the GEOM TOOLS menu to mirror Sketcher geometry about a sketched centerline. For example, you can create half of the section and then mirror it. Pro/ENGINEER uses the dimensions of one side to solve the other. This reduces the number of dimensions necessary to solve the section. When you mirror geometry, Sketcher mirrors constraints too. Note: You cannot mirror dimensions, text entities, centerlines, and reference entitiesonly geometric entities. The following figure illustrates the Mirror option. Using the Mirror Option Sketcher with Intent Manager
How to Mirror Sketched Geometry 1. Make sure the sketch contains a centerline. 2. Choose Mirror from the GEOM TOOLS menu.
A - 53
3. Pick the centerline about which the entities will be mirrored. The system displays the MIRROR menu, which has the following options: PickMirror individual entities. Select entities to mirror. AllMirror all sketched entities for mirroring.
Moving Sketcher Entities

The Move Entity command in the GEOM TOOLS menu displays the MOVE ENTITY menu, which enables you to move Sketcher entities, including dimensions. The MOVE ENTITY menu lists the following options: Drag ItemDrag a selected entity to a new location. Drag ManyDrag one or more selected entities simultaneously to a new location. Rotate90Rotate the selected entities counterclockwise in multiples of 90 degrees. DimensionMove a Sketcher dimension to a new location. Note: The Move Entity command does not keep old constraints, and Sketcher may solve the sketch differently after you use Move Entity. The following sections describe each of these options in detail.
Dragging Individual Entities

Use the Drag Item option to drag single a Sketcher entity. How to Drag a Single Sketcher Entity 1. Choose Drag Item from the MOVE ENTITY menu. 2. Pick an entity or one of its endpoints. The system highlights the entity and attaches the entity to the cursor. If you pick an endpoint on a vertex, the system briefly highlights the point in red and briefly highlights the rest of the entity in blue to indicate that you have selected it. If you pick an endpoint that is a common endpoint to more than one entity, all the entities move. 3. Move the entity to its new location. Click the left mouse button to place the entity.
A - 54
Dragging Multiple Entities

Use the Drag Many option to drag several Sketcher entities. How to Drag Multiple Sketcher Entities 1. Choose Drag Many from the MOVE ENTITY menu. 2. Select one or more entities to move. Alternatively, you can use Pick Many to enclose the entities to mode within the pick box. 3. Choose Done Sel or click the middle mouse button to finalize your selections. 4. Pick a drag point on the selected geometry. 5. Drag the entities to a new location and click the left mouse button to place them.
Rotating Entities
Use the Rotate option to rotate entities. How to Rotate Sketcher Entities 1. Choose Rotate90 from the MOVE ENTITY menu. 2. Pick one or more entities to rotate. Choose Done Sel, or click the middle mouse button to finalize your selections. Or, choose the Pick Many command to draw a pick box around the entities you want to select. All the entities completely within the pick box are selected. 3. Enter a multiple of 90 degrees by which to rotate the selected entities. If desired, you can enter a negative value. 4. Pick a center point around which the geometry will be rotated. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Moving Dimensions
To move a dimension, use Move from the SKETCHER menu or Dimension from the MOVE ENTITY menu. Select a dimension with the left mouse button. To place the dimension in its new location, click the left mouse button.
Moving a Spline Created with the Control Poly Option

You can move a spline that was created using the Control Poly option in the TANGENCY menu using the options in the MOVE ENTITY menu.
A - 55
If you choose the Rotate90 or Drag Many option from the MOVE ENTITY menu, the system moves the spline and the control polygon used to create it as a single unit. If you choose the Drag Item option, Pro/ENGINEER moves the spline in one of the following ways, depending on which entities you pick: If you pick a point on the spline or control polygon other than an endpoint, the system drags the spline and all the entities belonging to its control polygon as a single unit. If you pick an endpoint on the spline, the system scales and rotates the spline and all its control polygon entities as you drag the endpoint. If you pick a vertex on the control polygon, the system moves only the two adjacent control polygon lines as you drag the vertex. The spline changes its shape in the same way as if you had selected the Control Poly option from the MOD SPLINE menu.
The Right Mouse Menu

The menu lists the following sketching commands: Disable Constraint/Enable ConstraintDisable or enable the constraint. Only one command is available at a time. You can access this option when you move the cursor over a constraint while the Sketch command is active. LineCreate a line by picking two endpoints. This is equivalent to selecting Line from the GEOMETRY menu and then 2 Points. Tangent ArcCreate a tangent arc. Pick an endpoint of an entity to establish tangency. This is equivalent to selecting Arc from the GEOMETRY menu and then Tangent End. CircleCreate a circle using the Center/Point option. CenterlineCreate a centerline. 3 Point ArcCreate an arc by picking its two endpoints and a point on the arc. This is equivalent to selecting Arc from the GEOMETRY menu and then 3 Point. FilletCreate a fillet between two entities. This is equivalent to selecting Arc from the GEOMETRY menu, and then Fillet.
A - 56
The menu, in its lower portion, lists the following commands: DeleteDelete selected entities. See Deleting Entities on page A - 48. ModifyModify geometry using options in the MOD SKETCH menu. See Modifying a Section on page A - 37. DimensionAdd user dimensions. See Adding Dimensions on page A - 22. UndoUndo the most recent operation. See Undoing Sketcher Operations on page A - 49. MoveMove Sketcher entities. See Moving Entities on page A - 47.
Copying Imported Drawings

You can create a new section by selecting and copying imported two-dimensional geometry into an empty Sketcher file using the Copy Draw option in the SEC TOOLS menu. How to Copy an Imported Drawing in Sketcher 1. Import a two-dimensional drawing in Drawing mode. 2. Choose the Copy Draw option from the SEC TOOLS menu. 3. Pro/ENGINEER asks you to name a drawing from which to copy. 4. The system displays the imported geometry in a separate window. Select all the entities to import. 5. The system places the copied entities in the section. You can then dimension the entities or move them using the Move option from the SKETCHER menu. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Section Geometry Information

To access information about the section, choose Sec Tools from the SKETCHER menu and then Sec Info from the SEC TOOLS menu. The following options are listed in the SEC INFO menu: EntitySelect a single entity about which to get information. The system displays the type of geometry, endpoint tangencies, and endpoint coordinates (only if a coordinate system is selected).
A - 57
Intersect PtSelect two entities to determine their intersection points. If the selected entities do not physically intersect, Sketcher extrapolates the entities to find an intersection. If the extrapolated entities do not intersect (for example, parallel lines), the system does not return an intersection value. The system displays the angle of slope at the intersection point for both entities and the intersection coordinate values (if a coordinate system is selected). Tangent PtSelect two entities to determine where their slopes are equal. The selected entities do not have to be touching. The system displays the angle of slope at the tangency points, the distance between the two tangency points, and, if a coordinate system is selected, the coordinates of the tangency points. ReferencesGraphically highlight the references used by the section. The color code is as follows: SurfacesYellow EdgesBlue Axes, datums, and featuresRed
AngleMeasure the angle between any two lines. Select the two lines. Pro/ENGINEER displays the measured angle in the Message Window. DistanceMeasure the distance between any two parallel lines, two points, or a point and a line. CrvtureDispDisplay the curvature of splines in the section using the CRV DISPLAY menu options (for details, see Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER). The options in the CRV DISPLAY menu are as follows: Select CurveSelect a curve for curvature analysis display. ScaleChange the scale of the curvature display. DensityChange the density of the curvature display.
Grid InfoDisplay the current grid values in the Message Window (spacing and angle, in degrees).
A - 58
For the options Entity, Intersect Pt, and Tangent Pt, you can also choose a coordinate system to identify pertinent coordinate values for the Sketcher entities, as follows: Use CsysSelect a coordinate system from which to obtain entity coordinate values.You can select only Sketcher coordinate systems that were created in the current sketch. When you pick on the coordinate system, it is highlighted in magenta until you do one of the following: Exit the SEC INFO menu. Choose No Csys. Choose Use Csys again and pick another coordinate system. Choose an option from the SEC INFO menu that does not require a coordinate system.
No CsysThe system does not give any coordinate values in the section information. Pro/ENGINEER determines other information, such as length or angles, relative to the sketch coordinate system. The sketch coordinate system has the X-axis along the horizontal and the Y-axis along the vertical.
Setting the Sketcher Environment Options

You can set up the Sketcher environment to switch the display of vertices, constraints, dimensions, and the screen grid. You can also change the grid parameters, Sketcher accuracy, and the number of decimal places in dimensions. You can use icons in the toolbar to toggle the display of vertices, dimensions, constraints, and the grid. How to Set the Sketcher Environment Options 1. Choose Sec Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Sec Environ from the SEC TOOLS menu. 3. The SEC ENVIRON menu lists the following options: Disp Verts Switch the display of vertices on and off by placing or removing a check mark. You can preset the display of vertices by setting the configuration option sketcher_disp_vertices.
A - 59
Disp ConstrSwitch the display of constraints on and off by placing or removing a check mark. You can preset the display of constraints by setting the configuration option sketcher_disp_constraints. Disp DimsSwitch the display of all section dimensions on and off by placing or removing a check mark. GridAccess the grid options. For details, see Using the Grid on page A - 60. Num DigitsChange the number of decimal places for new dimensions. For more information, see Adding Dimensions on page A - 22. AccuracyChange Sketcher accuracy. For more information, see Sketcher Accuracy on page A - 63.
Using the Grid

Sketcher mode supports both Cartesian and polar grids. When you first enter Sketcher mode, the system displays a Cartesian grid. Before beginning the sketch, the grid can be one of two sizes: For the first feature section of a part and for auxiliary sketches such as blind holes, the grid has a spacing equal to one model unit. For example, sketching a box 4x6 grid spaces creates a box measuring 4x6 units. Additional section sketches for a model use a grid for reference only. You can modify this grid spacing, but the first grid displayed is scaled for the current part size and does not have a value of one unit between grid lines.
Modifying the Grid

You can modify the grid type and spacing to ease drafting and dimensioning. How to Modify the Grid 1. Choose Sec Tools > Sec Environ > Grid. 2. Choose an option from the MODIFY GRID menu: Grid On/OffSwitch the display of the grid on or off.
Note: Turning the grid on or off does not affect the snapping of sketched entities to grid intersections. See Setting the Grid Snap on page A - 62 for information on turning the grid snap on or off.
A - 60
TypeModify the type of grid. Choose Cartesian or Polar. OriginModify the origin of the grid. ParamsModify the parameters of the grid.
Moving the Grid Origin You can set the grid intersection at the following locations: Sketched entity endpoint and center of arc/circle Sketched point and coordinate system Datum point and coordinate system Edge or curve vertex
To do so, choose Origin from the MODIFY GRID menu. Select the appropriate geometry to locate the origin. Modifying the Grid Spacing The Params option allows you to modify the grid spacing and angle. You can use this option when you first start a sketch (before any geometry has been created) to control the approximate size of the section. For example, if you have a blank sketch and a 20x17 Cartesian grid in your window, and you change the X and Y spacing from 1.0 to 0.5, instead of seeing a 40x34 grid, you will have decreased the size of the sketching area to 10 x8.5 units. If you have sketched at least one entity, when you modify the grid spacing the grid spacing changes while the sketched entities remain unchanged. To modify the grid spacing or angle, choose Params from the
MODIFY GRID menu. The options available depend on the grid type.
For a Cartesian grid, the available options are as follows: X&Y SpacingSet the spacing in both the X- and Y- directions to the same value. X SpacingSet the X-direction spacing only. Y SpacingSet the Y-direction spacing only. AngleModify the angle between the horizontal and the X-direction grid.
For a polar grid, the options are as follows: Ang SpacingSet the angular spacing between radial lines. The specified value must divide evenly into 360.
A - 61
Num LinesSet the number of radial lines. The angular spacing is 360 divided by the number of lines. Rad SpacingModify the spacing of the circular grid. AngleModify the angle between the horizontal and the 0 degree radial line.
Setting the Grid Snap

With grid snapping turned on, Sketcher can snap to the intersection of grid lines, as well as to applicable constraints. By default, grid snapping is turned off. To enable grid snapping, choose the Grid Snap option from the ENVIRONMENT menu. You can also turn on grid snapping by default by setting the grid_snap configuration option to yes.
Sketcher Color
The default color for section geometry is cyan. You can change this color by using the configuration file option system_section_color. You can also change the color by selecting Utilities > Colors > System. The new color applies to both new and modified geometry.
Dimension Precision
You can set the default number of decimal places by specifying the configuration file option sketcher_dec_places, or you can choose the Num Digits option in the SEC ENVIRON menu. How to Modify the Number of Decimal Places in the Dimension 1. Choose SEC TOOLS > Sec Environ > Num Digits. 2. Enter a value from 0 to 14. 3. When you add dimensions, Pro/ENGINEER rounds values to the specified number of decimal places.
Resolving Problems in Sketches

When the system updates the section, it may report some problems. The following sections explain how the system checks the section and what actions to take to rectify errors.
A - 62
Inappropriate Sections
If Pro/ENGINEER recognizes the purpose for which a section will be used, it also checks whether the section is appropriate. For example, if you create a revolved feature, Pro/ENGINEER checks to make sure that you have a centerline and that the section is closed. If the section does not satisfy the required conditions, you can either modify the section or leave it incomplete.
Sketcher Accuracy
Modify the Sketcher accuracy to help solve certain section regeneration problems. For example, if a problem occurs because the length of a segment is less than Sketcher accuracy, you can increase the accuracy by entering a smaller number. How to Change the Sketcher Accuracy 1. Choose Sec Environ from the SEC TOOLS menu. 2. Choose Accuracy from the SEC ENVIRON menu. 3. At the prompt for the new accuracy, enter a value between 1.0E-9 (0.000000001) and 1.0. If the section still fails to regenerate successfully, try increasing the accuracy again (entering a smaller number), or evaluate the section for other problems. Note that the system remembers the relative accuracy of each section when you redefine a feature that contains the section. Sketcher with Intent Manager
Sketcher Hints
This section provides hints that may be helpful when you are working in Sketcher mode: Sketching lines and tangent arcs Using points to locate fillets and arcs. Locking dimensions when using Move
A - 63
Shortcut for Sketching Lines and Tangent Arcs

After completing a polyline with the middle mouse button, press the middle button again to activate the Tangent Arc command. After sketching a tangent arc, press the middle mouse button to activate the Line command.
Using Points to Locate Fillets and Arcs

When you create fillets between non-horizontal and non vertical lines, create a point at the intersection of the lines to dimension to theoretical sharps (see the following figure). Using a Point When Dimensioning
Using Move in Conjunction with Locking Dimensions

When you use Move from the SKETCHER menu without locking dimensions, Sketcher determines which dimensions to lock and which to vary. You can tell Sketcher specifically which dimensions to lock by using the Lock/Unlock command in the MOVE SKETCH menu. Notice that as you pick a dimension to lock, the letter L is added in front of the dimension value. Optionally, you may want to lock all dimensions with the Lock All Dims command and then choose Lock/Unlock to selectively unlock dimensions that you allow to change during dragging. Notice that when you choose Lock/Unlock and pick a locked dimension, it becomes unlocked and the lock symbol is removed from the dimension value. When you lock all dimensions in Sketcher mode, you cannot change the sectionyou can only drag the section around.
A - 64 Part Modeling Users Guide
B
Sketching on a Model with Intent Manager
This chapter explains how to create feature sections by sketching on the model. Topic Creating Feature Sections Sketching Section Geometry Retrieving an Existing Section Dimensioning a Section to a Part Working in the Sketcher Environment Leaving Sketcher with an Incomplete Section Page B-2 B-7 B - 15 B - 17 B - 20 B - 21
B-1
Creating Feature Sections

When you create features, often you must create sections to define the feature geometry. When you sketch sections on a part, sketch only what is necessary to do the job. If you do not want to create a new surface, do not sketch a line in the section. For example, when sketching the corner cut as shown in the following illustration, sketch the open section as shown, and not the closed section. If Pro/ENGINEER has problems intersecting the feature with the part, you must close the section. Sketching on a Part
Sketch only these two lines (open section). An open section is easier to sketch and is more efficient.
This closed section creates extra work, but may be necessary, such as in an Up To Surface cut.
When sketching on the model, you use the same tools as standalone Sketcher, plus additional techniques. The latter are described in the following sections. Note: If you have the Pro/PIPING license, you can use the centerlines of pipe segments as references in the 3-D Sketcher just as you use curves in the following descriptions. You cannot import any IGES features into Sketcher environment.
B-2
Basic Steps for Creating a Section on the Model

The following basic procedure outlines how to create a feature section when working with the part. How to Create a Feature Section 1. Select and orient the sketching plane. 2. Specify reference entities by selecting model geometry. The section geometry must be dimensioned to the part geometry. When you enter Sketcher, the Specify Refs option is active. Select the part geometry (for example, edges) to which you want to dimension the section. Notes: It is important to specify the right references before sketching so that Sketcher can create appropriate dimensions and constraints to position the section with respect to the part or assembly geometry. If you select Sketch before selecting sufficient references, Sketcher issues a warning.
3. Sketch the section geometry. After you specify model references, choose Sketch or press the middle mouse button to start sketching. If you have specified appropriate references, the section is complete after sketching. 4. Refine the section. You may wish to change the dimensioning scheme or to apply additional constraints. 5. Optionally, you may want to save the section. 6. Choose Done to exit Sketcher. Sketching on a Model
Entering the Sketcher Environment

Before you start creating a feature section, the system prompts you to do the following: Select or create a sketching plane (see Setting Up the Sketching Plane on page B - 4). Specify the direction of feature creation (see Selecting Feature Direction on page 5 - 4). Orient the sketching plane (see Orienting the Sketching Plane on page B - 5).
B-3
After the sketching plane is defined, the system automatically places you in Sketcher so you can start creating the section.
Setting Up the Sketching Plane

All sections are created on two-dimensional planes. Therefore, when you sketch on a three-dimensional part, you must define and orient the sketching plane. You can select a datum plane or a planar surface as the sketching plane. Optionally, you can create a datum plane on-the-fly on which to sketch. The sketching plane is infinitely large. How to Specify the Sketching Plane 1. When the SETUP SK PLN menu appears, choose one of the following options: Use PrevUse the sketching plane and orientation of the previous sketch. Setup NewSelect or create a sketching plane and define its orientation. Choose an option from the SETUP PLANE menu: PlanePick an existing planar surface or datum. Make DatumCreate a datum plane to use as a reference. See Datum Planes for information on creating datum planes.
2. Define the feature direction, as described in Selecting Feature Direction on page 5 - 4, and orient the sketching plane, as described in Orienting the Sketching Plane. It is possible to create several datum planes on-the-fly and use the last one created as the sketching plane. To make such a chain of internal datums, create the first one by using Make Datum. Choose Setup New again and then choose Make Datum. The plane that you previously created on-the-fly is then available as a reference for the current one. You can use Make Datum repeatedly without Setup New. However, only the plane that you create or select immediately after the last Setup New will be used for the sketching plane.
B-4
Orienting the Sketching Plane

Before you start sketching, you must orient the sketching plane to the screen normal axis. Do this in one of the following ways: Use the default system orientationYou can let the system orient the sketch for you by choosing Default from the SKET VIEW menu or by pressing the middle mouse button. The Default option is available only if the system has sufficient information to orient the plane. Using this option does not add new parent/child relationships. ...or... Specify a horizontal or vertical referenceChoose Top, Bottom, Right, or Left from the SKET VIEW menu and pick the corresponding plane. The reference plane or edge must be normal to the sketching plane. If the Default option is not available, the Top option is the default selection in the Sket View menu when you first start the session; otherwise, the previous selection becomes the default.
If you are creating a feature that is not aligned with the existing edges of the part, you may want to create a datum plane as a horizontal or vertical reference that will be added. This is especially useful when you create radial feature patterns (see the Patterning Features chapter for information about creating patterns). When you create a datum plane as a reference, first select the direction you want the plane to represent (Top, Bottom, and so on) and then create it. The yellow side of the datum plane will face towards the specified side of the screen.
Sketching in 3-D Orientation

The Use 2D Sketcher option in the ENVIRONMENT menu controls whether Sketcher reorients the solid object when it starts up. When this option is set (the default), Sketcher makes the sketching plane parallel to the screen. If this option is not set, Sketcher does not reorient the solid object when it starts. Use the Sketch View option in the SKETCHER menu to reorient the model so the sketching plane is parallel to the screen. You can use the sketcher_starts_in_2d configuration option to set the starting value of the Use 2D Sketcher option.
B-5
Defining Model References for a Section

When you sketch a 3-D section, Sketcher must position the section with respect to part geometry by using dimensions and constraints to reference entities. To establish a reference entity, you must select model geometry (for example, part edge). Sketcher then projects the selected reference onto the sketching plane and makes its position known. It is recommended that you create reference entities immediately upon entering Sketcher. Then, when you sketch geometry, it will snap to the known model references. The model references that you select determine the dimensioning scheme for locating the section. How to Define References for a Section 1. Choose Specify Refs from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Select a perpendicular surface, an edge, or a vertex relative to which the section will be dimensioned or constrained. 3. The system shows reference entities as orange phantom lines. In addition to using Specify Refs, you can make an entity known to Sketcher by: Picking an entity as a reference for dimensioning Picking an entity as a reference for an operation (trimming, filleting, and so on) Creating entities with the Use Edge or Offset Edge option Creating reference entities with the XSec Ref Ent option (see Creating Reference Entities by Intersection on page B - 15)
If you add known entities after you create some geometry, the system may add some weak constraints to resolve the section. You can delete known entities with the Delete option. When you exit Sketcher, unused model references are deleted.
B-6
Sketching Section Geometry

After you are in Sketcher and have established reference entities, you can start sketching. When sketching on a part, you use the same techniques as in 2D Sketcher mode and additional tools that are detailed in the following sections.
Query Alignment
When you sketch geometry and Sketcher determines that entities can be aligned without violating existing strong constraints, the QUERY menu appears with the following options: AlignAlign entities as proposed. Dont AlignReject the proposed alignment. DoneReject the alignment and cancel the query.
Creating Sketcher Geometry from Model Geometry

The following tools in the GEOM TOOLS menu are used exclusively in 3-D sketching: XSecRefEnt, Use Edge, Offset Edge, and Pick Curve. Sketching on a Model
The Use Edge Option

The Use Edge option in the GEOM TOOLS menu creates Sketcher geometry by projecting selected model edges onto the sketching plane. The system aligns endpoints of the entity to the endpoints of the edge. The entity created with Use Edge has the ~ constraint symbol. After you create geometry with the Use Edge option, you can use Intersect, Trim, Divide, and Fillet on it. In Sketcher mode, the Use Edge option allows you to pick an existing part axis to create a centerline that is automatically aligned to the axis. Note: The Use Edge option is especially useful for duplicating splines in non-parallel planes. Note the following restrictions: A circle is broken into two arcs. You must select each segment separately.
B-7
You cannot select a composite datum curve for Use Edge. Instead, use Query Sel to select the underlying segments. A spline silhouette edge is not selectable for the Use Edge operation.
For the Use Edge option, you can orient the model any way that is convenient (see the following illustration). Creating a Section Using Use Edge and Sketched Entities
Select this contour, to be projected onto the sketching plane.
Sketching plane
Sketched geometry dimensioned to part can be used to intersect the projected geometry.
How to Create Geometry With the Use Edge Option 1. Choose Use Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 2. To create sketched entities offset from a single edge, choose Sel Edge from the USE EDGE menu. To create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities, choose Sel Loop from the USE EDGE menu. Select a face containing the edges or entities. If more than one loop is possible, use Next and Previous from the CHOOSE menu to select the desired loop. To create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities, choose Sel Chain from the USE EDGE menu. Select the beginning and ending entities of the chain. If you select curves, they must both belong to the same datum curve. If you select edges, they must belong to the same surface or face. You can pick two edges on a parts geometry or two one-sided edges of a quilt.
B-8
With Sel Chain, if you pick two entities that belong to an IGES wireframe or a datum curve in a uniquely defined plane, the Sketcher tries to choose a chain that connects the entities and lies in that plane. If more than one chain is possible, use Next and Previous from the CHOOSE menu to select the desired chain. 3. The selected geometry is highlighted temporarily in blue, then in sketching color (cyan or white). After the process has been completed, Pro/ENGINEER displays an appropriate message in the Message window. The following figure shows an example of using the Use Edge option. Completed Feature Created with Use Edge
The completed section
Determining the End of a Trimmed Use Edge Spline Sketcher can determine the end of a trimmed Use Edge spline by using the end tangency angle as a dimension. Sketcher looks for lines and centerlines that are tangent to the trimmed ends of the spline created by the Use Edge option. If the angle of the line can be determined without determining where the point is, Sketcher determines the point location by finding where the tangent to the spline has the specified angle.
B-9
The Offset Edge Option

The Offset Edge option in the GEOM TOOLS menu creates Sketcher geometry by offsetting. You can create offset entities from edges that are lines, arcs, or splines. When you create an offset entity, each point of the original lines, arcs, or splines is first projected onto the sketching plane. Each point is then offset normal to the projected entities by the specified distance. For example, creating an offset arc results in a concentric arc of a different diameter, rather than in a translated copy of the same arc. Offset entities can be created from a single entire edge (untrimmed), a portion of a single edge (trimmed), a chain of edges or entities, or a loop of edges or entities. Note the following restrictions: A circle is broken into two arcs. You must select each segment separately. You cannot offset edges that have tangency that meets in a sharpened point. When you select tangent edges to offset, select them all at the same time using the Sel Chain option. Otherwise, the section will fail regeneration because the individual offsets of the tangent entities will not be connected. Invalid Tangency for Offset Edge
Direction of offset
Select Loop cannot be used here to create the offset edge because the tangency meets in a sharpened point.
B - 10
Feature Created with Offset Edge, Sel Chain

Protrusion created with Offset Edge, Sel Chain
Select these edges to indicate the chain to offset.
The following sections describe how to use the Offset Edge option to offset an entire edge, a portion of an edge, a chain, and a loop. Using Offset Edge to Offset an Entire Edge To use the whole edge to create an offset entity, you must create an untrimmed offset edge from a single edge. How to Create an Untrimmed Offset Edge from a Single Edge 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Offset Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Choose Sel Edge from the OFFSET SEL menu (or Sel Loop or Sel Chain, if desired). 4. Select the desired edge. You can select two edges on a part geometry or two one-sided edges of a quilt. 5. If you chose Sel Edge, choose one of the options in the OFFSET TYPE menu: FixedCreate an entity with fixed offset at any point. TaperedCreate an entity with different offsets for each endpoint. Sketching on a Model
6. Choose Untrimmed from the OFFSET TYPE menu. 7. Choose Done. 8. If you chose Fixed, Pro/ENGINEER displays a red arrow near the middle of the edge. Enter an offset in the indicated direction. If you chose Tapered, the system displays an arrow at each end and prompts for the offset value for both endpoints of the edge.
B - 11
The following figure shows an example of using the Offset Edge > Tapered options. Feature Created with Untrimmed Offset Edge, Tapered
Protrusion created using Offset Edge, Tapered
Select edge to offset.
Select edge to offset
When you delete an offset edge, Pro/ENGINEER retains the corresponding reference entities. If you do not use these references in the section, the system deletes them when you exit Sketcher. Using Offset Edge to Offset a Portion of an Edge To use a portion of the edge to create an offset entity, you must create a trimmed offset edge from a single edge. How to Create a Trimmed Offset Edge From a Single Edge 1. Use the Point option from the GEOMETRY menu to place points on the edge at the locations to which you will trim before you create entities offset from the edge. 2. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 3. Choose Offset Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 4. Select the desired edge. 5. Choose either Fixed or Tapered from the OFFSET TYPE menu. 6. Choose the OFFSET TYPE menu option Trimmed. This option requires that you have first placed points on the edge at the locations to which you will trim the edge. 7. Choose Done. 8. The system prompts you to select a point to trim the edge. Pick one of the points.
B - 12
9. Enter the offset value in the indicated direction. 10. Select the second point. If you chose Tapered, enter the offset value for the second endpoint. Using Offset Edge to Offset a Chain You can offset a chain of edges and curves with the Offset Edge, Sel Chain options. How to Offset a Chain of Edges or Curves 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Offset Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Choose Sel Chain from the OFFSET SEL menu. 4. Select the beginning and ending entities of the chain to be offset. If you select curves, they must both belong to the same datum curve. If you select edges, they must belong to the same surface or face. 5. If more than one chain is possible, use Next and Previous from the CHOOSE menu to select the desired chain. 6. Enter the offset value. A red arrow indicates the default direction of the offset. To offset in the opposite direction, enter a negative value. Sketching on a Model Pro/ENGINEER offsets the whole chain in the same direction. The entities are extended and trimmed, as necessary, to remain connected. When you use Offset Edge, Select Chain to offset a chain of entities by a large distance, the system creates offset geometry according to the following guidelines: If the offset is inward along an arc and the offset value exceeds the radius of the arc, the system removes the arc from the offset chain. Similarly, the system might remove other entities because of excessive offset value. If you lower the offset value later, the entities reappear. The following figure illustrates such a case.
B - 13
Offsetting a Curve
Original geometry
r
Offset distance
Original geometry Offset distance
Offset geometry
Offset geometry
If the offset value is more than the local minimum radius of curvature for entities that compose the offset chain, the system creates an offset chain that might have a different number of entities. In the following example, offsetting a spline by a large value causes the resulting spline to be broken into several pieces. If the offset value is changed, the system can piece together the broken spline so it becomes a single entity again. Offsetting a Spline
Offset distance Original geometry Offset geometry
Using Offset Edge to Offset a Loop

You can offset a loop of edges or Sketcher entities by using Offset Edge, Sel Loop. How to Offset a Loop of Edges or Entities 1. Choose Geom Tools from the SKETCHER menu. 2. Choose Offset Edge from the GEOM TOOLS menu. 3. Choose Sel Loop from the OFFSET SEL menu. 4. Select a face containing the edges or entities to offset.
B - 14
5. If more than one loop is possible, use Next and Previous from the CHOOSE menu to select the desired loop. 6. Enter the offset value. A red arrow indicates the default direction of the offset. To offset in the opposite direction, enter a negative value.
The Pick Curve Option

The Pick Curve option is available only in 3-D sketching with no sketching plane assigned, such as when you create composite datum curves. With this option, you can select edges or three-dimensional curves, as you do for the Use Edge operation. You can pick two edges on the geometry of a part, or two one-sided edges of a quilt. For each entity selected, Pro/ENGINEER creates a three-dimensional sketched entity (displayed in cyan) directly on top of it. The system displays the CRV SKETCHER menu with the options described in Datum Curve Offset From a Curve on page 3 - 47.
Creating Reference Entities by Intersection

You can create reference entities from the intersection of a surface with the sketching plane. For example, when the sketching plane intersects a cylinder lengthwise, you can use the curves created from this intersection as model references. How to Create Reference Entities by Intersection 1. Choose SKETCHER > Geom Tools > XSec Ref Ent. 2. Pick a part surface that intersects the sketching plane. 3. The system creates a reference entity and shows entities as orange phantom lines.
Retrieving an Existing Section

The Place Section option in the SEC TOOLS menu allows you to retrieve a section from disk or from memory and place it on the current sketch as an independent copy of the original section. The target section can be empty or can contain existing entities (and dimensions). Placing a section does not alter other sketched geometry.
B - 15
In a parallel blend, the retrieved section is added to the current subsection. The Place Section option copies the entities and relations (if any) of the original section without reference to the original context in which they were created. Thus, the accuracy, grid parameters, and units of measure are those of the current model. The placed section behaves as a regular sketched section. After you place the section, it is no longer associated with the source section. You can easily replace the retrieved section with another one. For parallel blends, you can place the retrieved section into different subsections with variations in rotation angle and size. How to Retrieve an Existing Section 1. Choose Place Section from the SEC TOOLS menu. 2. Select a section file in the Open dialog box. 3. The system retrieves the section and displays it in a subwindow. 4. If the section sketch is being placed on a part sketching plane (not an auxiliary section, such as for a sketched blind hole or a shaft), you can modify the location, orientation, and scaling of the section. For these actions, continue with Step 5. 5. Enter a rotation angle for the sketch. Be aware that some dimensioning schemes may change because of the change of sketch orientation, as shown in the following illustration. Effect of Sketch Orientation on Dimensions
Vertical dimension
8.00
0.00
Original section
Section rotated 90 degrees
6. Select an origin point on the sketch for scaling. When scaling the section using the mouse, the origin point remains stationary.
B - 16
7. Select a drag point on the sketch. This is the point that will follow the mouse during positioning. The drag point cannot be coincident with the scaling point. 8. Enter a preliminary scale factor for the sketch. 9. Move the mouse from the subwindow to your part window. The section appears in red and follows your mouse pointer as it moves around the screen. 10. Using the mouse, you can do any of the following: Click the left button to place the section. The section changes from red to the normal section color and the system displays any dimensions. Click the middle button to abort the section placement and return you to Step 5. Click the right mouse button to switch between scaling and drag modes. When scaling, your scale origin remains stationary, and moving the mouse increases or decreases the size of the section. Returning to drag mode causes the drag origin to follow the mouse again.
11. Locate the section with respect to the part by dimensioning or aligning.
Dimensioning a Section to a Part

Sections sketched on a part must be dimensioned for size and relative placement on the part. For dimensioning, the sketching plane does not have to be parallel to the screenthe part can be in any orientation. In fact, sometimes dimensioning the section with the model in a 3-D view helps avoid invalid dimensioning (see the illustration Dimensioning to Part Edges on page B - 19). When sketching on a part, you can create the four dimension types by using the DIMENSION menu: NormalCreate a dimension that references sketched entities only, or between a sketched entity and part geometry. These dimensions are used to solve the section and eventually become regular part dimensions. PerimeterCreate a perimeter dimension. See Perimeter Dimension on page A - 31. ReferenceCreate a dimension that you want to use for reference. Reference dimensions have the symbolic form rsd#.
B - 17
KnownCreate a dimension that references part geometry only. These dimensions are used to drive Sketcher dimensions through a relation; they are necessary to solve the section and are not displayed anywhere except in this section. Known dimensions have the symbolic form kd#. BaselineEstablish a baseline for ordinate dimensioning. See Baseline (Ordinate) Dimensions on page A - 31 for more information.
Tips for Dimensioning to Part Edges

When dimensioning to a part edge, you must consider what type of entity the part edge is. Splines and arcs may appear in the sketching plane as straight lines to which you can dimension. But, if the plane that was used as the sketching plane is modified (for example, if the angle of a datum plane changed), the spline or arc no longer appears as a straight line. Thus, the dimensioning scheme becomes invalid, Pro/ENGINEER will not be able to place the feature, and the feature creation or regeneration will fail. One way to avoid this situation is to not dimension to splines or arcs that project onto the sketching plane as straight lines. However, if the situation does occur, modify the dimensioning scheme to dimension section geometry to linear geometry. You can orient the part in an iso-type view to help you select proper geometry on the part.
B - 18
The following illustration shows how to dimension to part edges. Dimensioning to Part Edges
When dimensioning in 3-D, select this edge.
When the datum angle is modified, projection of this edge on the sketching plane becomes a spline.
This feature fails because d16 cannot be placed.
Feature regenerates successfully.
Known Dimensions
Known dimensions allow you to establish meaningful parametric dependencies when creating a section of a feature. How to Use Known Dimensions in Sketcher Mode 1. Sketch and dimension as usual. 2. Create Known dimensions on part geometry that will be used to drive the feature section. 3. From the SKETCHER menu, choose Relation.
B - 19
4. Add relations connecting Normal section dimensions with the Known ones (see the following illustration). 5. When the system updates the section, values of normal dimensions change according to the relations. Dimensions driven by Sketcher relations cannot be modified directly. To access Sketcher relations, choose Redefine and Section. You can also do it in Part mode by choosing Relations, Feat Rel, selecting the feature, and choosing Section. Using Known and Normal Dimensions
Sketched entity
sd0 kd4
Part geometry sd1 kd3 Add relations: sd1=kd3/2 sd2=kd4/2
sd2
Working in the Sketcher Environment

While in Sketcher, the model can be reoriented by choosing View > Orientation or by using the CTRL key and mouse.
Sketcher Grid
When you enter Sketcher, the system displays the grid and enables grid snap for any sketching plane orientation except perpendicular. If you select a new origin for the grid, the system projects that point onto the sketching plane to determine the new origin. Note: Only the Cartesian grid is supported for sketching in 3-D.
B - 20
Leaving Sketcher with an Incomplete Section

You can exit Sketcher with unfinished sections by choosing Done from the SKETCHER menu. This creates an incomplete section, which you can finish later. A feature that has an incomplete section becomes an incomplete feature. For more information on how the system handles incomplete features, see Creating Incomplete Features on page 1 - 5. How to Exit Sketcher With an Incomplete Section 1. When you want to exit Sketcher with an unfinished section, choose Done from the SKETCHER menu. 2. The system informs you that the section is unresolved and asks you for a confirmation to exit. Press ENTER. 3. You can leave feature creation by choosing OK from the feature creation dialog box, or you can continue feature definition by selecting another element from the dialog box. The following procedure explains how to complete the section. How to Complete a Section 1. Choose Redefine. 2. Select a feature with an incomplete section. 3. Choose Section from the dialog box. 4. Complete the section. Sketching on a Model
B - 21
Index
Symbols
"rho" dimension 2-33 .ibl le 3-27
Numerics
180, REV TO 5-18 2 Axes, OPTIONS 3-54 2 Points, LINE TYPE 2-8 2 Points, OFFSET DIR 3-17 2 Points, SET AXIS 3-55 2 Projections 3-51 2 Side Blind, SPEC TO 5-9 2 Tangent, LINE TYPE 2-9 270, REV TO 5-18 3 Planes, OPTIONS 3-53 3 Point, ARC TYPE 2-11 3 Point, CIRCLE TYPE 2-13 3 Tangent, ARC TYPE 2-11 3 Tangent, CIRCLE TYPE 2-13 360, REV TO 5-18 3D curves selecting 3-40 3D sweep 6-7 45 x d, SCHEME 7-13 90, REV TO 5-18
A
Absolute, ACCURACY 16-53 Accelerated simplied representation updating 16-49 Accept, CHOOSE 3-34 Accept, CONFIRM 6-42 Accept, DEFAULT TAN 6-34 Accept, DISP ON SURF 13-6
Accept, MEASURE DIST 3-50 Accept, PATCH 8-22 Accuracy absolute 16-53 assigning other part accuracy 16-54 model 16-51 relative 16-52 Accuracy, PART SETUP 16-51 Accuracy, SEC ENVIRON 2-48 accuracy_lower_bound option 16-52 Activate, INSERT MODE 16-34 Actual Len, PNT DIM MODE 3-15 ADD DIMS menu options 15-18 Add features 1-5 Add Inn Fcs, SWEEP OPT 6-5 Add Item, OPTIONS 11-6 Add New, DTM PNT MODE 3-16 Add Pnts, MOD SPLINE 2-60 Add Point, CONNECT TYPE 3-20 Add Point, DEFINE GRAPH 6-45 Add Points, CRV TWEAK 3-22 Add, DEFINE BEND 9-36 Add, EXT SYMBOLS 15-20 Add, MOD TANG 2-56 Add, PATT TABLE 14-23 Add, RELATIONS 2-39 Add, ROUND SETS 8-13 Add, ROUND TRANS 8-19 Add, SPLINEPNTS 16-28 Add, UDF FEATS 15-16 Add, VAR DIMS 15-18 ADJUST TYPE menu options 16-31 Adjust, EDIT CURVES 16-29 Adjustable, ADJUST TYPE 16-31 Adv Geometry 3-43 ADV GEOMETRY menu options 2-14
Index - i
Advanced, ROUND SETS 8-13 Advanced, SOLID OPTS 6-23 Advanced, SRF OPTS 10-6 Align to model edge 4-17 to points 4-18 Align, QUERY B-7 Align, SKETCHER 4-17 Alignment removing 4-18 unaligning pick many 4-19 unalign many 4-19 All Changes, RESTORE 17-7 All Children, REF REROUTE 16-42 All Feat, COPY FEATURE 15-4 All Feat, R-ONLY FEAT 16-2 All Geometry, DELETION A-48 All Items, SHOW ERRORS 17-10 All References, DELETION A-48 All Refs, FEAT REROUTE 16-41 All, GATHER FILL 10-20 All, MIRROR 2-24 All, MOD ARR NUM 16-10 All, RESUME 16-38 All, SEL SECTION 16-12 Along Dir, OPTIONS 12-20 Along Edge, MEASURE DIST 12-13 Alternate, REROUTE 16-41 Alternate, WHICH REF 15-28 Ang Spacing, POLAR PARAMS 2-6 Ang x d, SCHEME 7-14 ANGLE menu options 7-16 Angle of revolution 5-17 Angle, CART PARAMS 2-5 Angle, GET MEASURE 3-61 Angle, POLAR PARAMS 2-6 Angle, SEC INFO 2-64 Angular dimensions 2-29 Angular reference creating 14-11 Approx Blend, BNDRS OPTS 11-22 Approx Blend, OPTIONS 11-3 Approx Chain, TANGENCY 2-17 Approx Dir, OPTIONS 11-23 Approx Srf, OPTIONS 12-17 Approximate blended surface 11-22 Approximate curve 3-33 benets and drawbacks 3-28 Approximate, CURV TYPE 3-33 Arc creating 2-7 llet 2-11 sketched 2-11 dimensioning 2-27 Arc Length, BLEND TYPE 11-14
ARC TYPE menu options 2-11 Area graph 6-39 Area Offset, QUILT SURF 10-3 Area, GET MEASURE 3-61 ARROW FLIP menu options 5-5 Arrowhead switching display 16-9 Assembly feature pipe 7-26 At Center, DATUM POINT 3-12 ATTACHMENT menu options 8-29 Attributes, EDIT METHOD 16-44 Attributes, REDEF IMPT 16-24 Attributes, REDEFINE 16-16 Auto Blend, RND EXTENT 8-8 Auto Fit, OFFSET TYPE 10-9 AutoDim, SKetcher 4-21 Automatic, SEC ORIENT 6-41 Axis, DATUM 3-9
B
Backup Modl, FIX MODEL 17-6 Backup Modl, INVESTIGATE 17-5 Backup, DBMS 15-24 Base feature creating 1-4 datum plane as 1-4 denition 1-4 thin 5-6 UDF as 1-5 Baseline dimension creating 2-37 Baseline, DIMENSION 4-16 Before Fail, ROLL MDL TO 17-6 Beginning, START OPTS 17-9 Blank, DISP OPTION 15-28 Blend capped 6-19 closed 6-16 general no prole 6-22 using IGES les 6-17 imported from le 6-55 sample le 6-56 non-parallel advantages 6-15 creating 6-17 open 6-16 parallel creating 6-13 making cuts in 6-13 rotational 6-20 section dimensioning 6-14
Index - ii
sketching section active section 6-14 toggling 6-13 surface-to-surface 6-53 swept creating 6-39 modifying 6-45 restrictions 6-38 types 6-8 vertex 6-18 BLEND OPTS menu options 6-12 Blend Srfs, TRANS TYPE 8-15 BLEND TYPE menu options 11-14 Blend Vertex, ADV GEOMETRY 2-14 Blend, SECTION DOME 9-24 Blend, SOLID OPTS 6-8 Blend, SRF OPTS 10-6 Blended Surf, OPTIONS 11-2 BlendSection, DATUM PLANE 3-6 Bndry Chain, CHAIN 3-34 Both Sides, ATTRIBUTES 5-14 Both, SPLITCRV OPTS 3-45 Both, TANGENCY 2-17 Both, THIN OPT 5-6 Bound, DRAFT TRIM 2-22 Boundaries, ADV FEAT OPT 11-2 Boundaries, REDEFINE 16-16 Boundary region for free-form features 13-3 Boundary, SURF&BND 10-16
C
C1 continuous 9-40 curves 3-28 helical sweep prole 6-49 C2 continuous curves 3-28 Cancel, INSERT MODE 16-35 Cancel, UPDATE REP 16-50 CAP TYPE menu 6-20 Capped Ends, ATTRIBUTES 10-7 Cartesian, GRID TYPE 2-5 Center/Point, CIRCLE TYPE 2-13 Centerline 5-17 Centerline, LINE TYPE 2-8 CHAIN menu options 3-33 CHAIN OPT menu options 3-34 Chain, PICK CURVES 16-32 Chain, SELECT ITEM 11-6 Chamfer 7-13 corner 7-14 dimensioning schemes 7-13 edge 7-13 Chamfer, SOLID 7-14 Change Value, DEFINE GRAPH 6-45
Change, DTM PNT MODE 3-16 CHILD menu options 16-37 CHOOSE menu options 3-34 Circle creating 2-7 sketched 2-13 dimensioning 2-27 CIRCLE TYPE menu options 2-13 Circular, ATTRIBUTES 8-14 Clean, R-ONLY FEAT 16-2 Clear, DEF TAN 3-21 Clip Incomplete, FAILED FEAT 15-32 Clip Supp, QUICK FIX 17-5 Clip, DELETE/SUPP 16-37 Closed, ATTRIBUTES 6-16 CNTRL POLY menu options 13-7 Coaxial, PLACEMENT 7-8 Color datums 3-2 section geometry 2-3 Commnt Rels, OBSOL RELS 16-39 Composite 16-33 Composite datum curve 3-27 chain processing 3-33 naming 3-36 redening 3-36 Composite, CURVE OPTS 3-32 Concentric, ARC TYPE 2-11 Concentric, CIRCLE TYPE 2-13 Conguration le options accuracy_lower_bound 16-52 create_fraction_dim 1-7 datum_point_symbol 3-11 default_abs_accuracy 16-53 dim_fraction_denominator 1-7 enable_absolute_accuracy 16-52 ip_arrow_scale 5-5 grid_snap 2-6 model_grid_spacing 1-3 pro_group_dir 15-25 repeat_datum_create 3-5 retain_pattern_denition 14-21 select_on_dtm_edges 3-3 shade_surface_feat 10-4 show_axes_for_extr_arcs 3-8 show_dim_sign 1-8 sketcher_dec_places 2-25 solid_grid_neg_prex 1-3 solid_grid_num_dig 1-3 system_curves_color 3-17 system_section_color 2-3 use_dimensioned_edges 4-18 use_major_units 1-8 CONFIRM menu options 6-42 Conic
Index - iii
"rho" dimension 2-33 creating 2-14 dimensions 2-32 three-point dimension 2-34 Conic Surf, OPTIONS 11-3 Conic, ADV GEOMETRY 2-14 Conic, ATTRIBUTES 8-15 Constant Rad, OPTIONS 7-23 Constant, ATTRIBUTES 9-6 Constant, OPTIONS 6-47 Constant, RND SET ATTR 8-3 Constant, SECTION TYPE 6-27 Constraints datum 3-6 Constraints, SKETCHER 2-44 Continue, INFO REGEN 17-10 Continue, TRANS TYPE 8-15 Control points moving 13-10 Control Poly, FREE FORM 13-4 Control Poly, TANGENCY 2-17 Control polyhedron moving control points 13-10 setting the region 13-8 using 13-7 Controlled Fit, OFFSET TYPE 10-9 Convert, SYMBOL ACTION 15-21 COORD SYS menu options 3-55 Coord Sys, ADV GEOMETRY 2-15 Coord Sys, DATUM 3-54 Coord Sys, OFFSET DIR 3-17 Coordinate system 3-53 adding to a sketch 2-15 creating 3-54 default 1-4 offset creating 3-56 redening 16-26 renaming 16-11 Coordinates to modify a spline 2-58 Coords, MOD SPLINE 2-58 Copy datum curve 3-52 feature 15-3 by mirroring 15-9 using GROUP menu options 15-37 imported drawings 2-24 Copy Draw, SEC TOOLS 2-24 Copy, CURVE OPTS 3-53 Copy, FEAT 15-3 Copy, INSERT FEAT 16-35 Copy, SIMPLFD REP 16-43 Copy, SRF OPTS 10-6 Copy, SURF FORM 10-14 Corner Sphere, ATTRIBUTES 8-15
Corner Sphere, TRANS TYPE 8-15 Corner Sweep, ATTRIBUTES 8-15 Corner Sweep, TRANS TYPE 8-16 Corner, CHAMF 7-14 Corner, DRAFT TRIM 2-23 Cosm Font, GEOM TOOLS 7-29 Cosmetic feature groove 7-37 line style, setting 7-29 sketched 7-29 thread 7-31 creating custom threads 7-35 Cosmetic, FEAT CLASS 7-30 Cosmetic, SHADING OPTS 13-5 Create angular reference 14-11 arc 2-7 base feature 1-4 baseline dimension 2-37 blend parallel 6-13 circle 2-7 sketched 2-13 conic 2-14 coordinate system 3-54 cosmetic threads 7-33 dimension pattern 14-7 extrusion 5-13 feature specifying direction 5-4 llet arc 2-11 free-form features 13-2 geometry in Sketcher mode 2-6 graph 3-59 group from existing UDF 15-26 line 2-7 linear dimensions 2-26 local group 15-33 merge feature 15-39 model grid 1-2 new curve segments 16-27 offset coordinate system 3-56 parallel blend 6-13 rectangle 2-10 revolved feature 5-16 section dome 9-24 spline 2-17 split datum curve 3-44 sweep 6-2 sweep along 3D spline 6-8 swept blend 6-39 table-driven patterns 14-24 tangency dimension 2-31 UDFs 15-15 Create Axis, DEF TAN 3-21 Create New, SECTION PLACE 15-31
Index - iv
Create Points, GEN PNT SEL 3-16 Create, EDIT CURVES 16-26 Create, INSERT FEAT 16-35 Create, MEASURE PARAM 3-60 Create, SIMPLFD REP 16-42 Create, UDF 15-15 create_fraction_dim option 1-7 CRV DISPLAY menu options 2-64 Crv X Crv, DATUM POINT 3-12 Crv/Edg/Axis, GEN SEL DIR 3-41 Crv/Edge/Axis, DEF TAN 3-21 Crvs To Disp, PREVIEW 3-26 Crvtr Cont, BNDRY COND 11-10 Crvtr Scale, SET PARAMS 3-25 Crvtr Setup, CNTRL POLY 13-7 CrvtrDensity, SET PARAMS 3-25 Crvture Disp, SEC INFO 2-64 Csys, GEN SEL DIR 3-41 Ctr/Ends, ARC TYPE 2-11 Current Modl, FIX MODEL 17-6 Current Modl, INVESTIGATE 17-5 Current Obj, OBJ ERASE 16-51 Current Vals, GET INPUT 15-19 CURV TYPE menu options 3-33 Curvature continuous spine 9-40 Curvature, CRV OPTS 3-25 Curvature, DEF TAN 3-21 Curve Chain, CHAIN 3-34 Curve Plane, MOT PLANE 3-23 Curve X Srf, DATUM POINT 3-11 Curve, SELECT ITEM 11-6 Curve, TRIM AT 3-35 Curves, REDEFINE 16-26 Customized, SPACING OPTS 13-7 Cut 7-3 in parallel projected blends 6-13 using surface feature 12-30 Cut, SOLID 7-3
D
d x d, SCHEME 7-13 d1 x d2, SCHEME 7-13 Datum axis 3-8 color 3-2 creating 3-9 patterning 14-12 renaming 16-11 curve 3-17 at surface intersections 3-18 composite 3-27 copied 3-52 erasing display 3-24 formed 3-42
from equation 3-51 from le, redene 16-26 importing 3-26 offset from surface 3-45 projected 3-37 redene composite 16-33 sketched 3-17 split 3-44 through points 3-19 tweaking 3-22 two-projection 3-51 using cross-sections 3-36 name changing 16-11 modifying 16-11 plane 3-2 chain of internal 4-4 creating 3-5 creating on-the-y 3-3 default 1-4 offset 1-4 redening 16-25 renaming 16-11 specifying 4-4 point 3-10 array 7-23 modifying array 16-9 redening 16-25 text 16-8 DATUM AXIS menu options 3-9 Datum Planes, PROJCRVREFS 3-39 DATUM POINT menu options 3-11 Datum, FEAT CLASS 3-5 DBMS menu options 15-24 Dbms, UDF 15-15 DEF TAN menu options 3-20 Default Feats, DISP MODE 16-46 DEFAULT TAN menu 6-34 Default, MENUDTM OPT 1-4 Default, OPTIONS 3-4 Default, SELECT REFS 11-11 default_dec_places option 16-4 DEFINE GRAPH menu options 6-45 Dene, GRAPH 6-45 Del Pattern, FEAT 14-21 Delay Modify, SKETCHER A-36 Delete pattern 14-21 suppressed features 16-39 Delete All, DBMS 15-24 Delete All, DELETION 2-63 Delete All, SURF SELECT 10-15 Delete features 16-39 Delete Grid, MODEL GRID 1-3
Index - v
Delete Item, DELETION 2-62 Delete Many, DELETION 2-62 Delete Pnts, MOD SPLINE 2-60 Delete Point, CONNECT TPYE 3-20 Delete Points, CRV TWEAK 3-22 Delete Rels, OBSOL RELS 16-39 Delete, EDIT CURVE 16-27 Delete, FEAT 16-39 Delete, MEASURE PARAM 3-61 Delete, QUICK FIX 17-5 Delete, REDEF IMPT 16-23 Delete, SIMPLFD REP 16-43 Delete, SKETCHER 2-62 Delete, SURF SELECT 10-15 Delete, WORK REGION 16-48 DELETE/SUPP menu options 16-37 Density, CRV DISPLAY 2-64 Dependent features 15-11 Dependent, ATTRIBUTES 9-15 Dependent, COPY FEATURE 15-4 DesignerIn feature creating 12-36 redening 12-37 tolerance 12-37 DesignerIn, FEAT CLASS 12-36 Diagnostics, INVESTIGATE 17-5 Diameter, DIM TYPE 7-9 Diameter, GET MEASURE 3-61 DIM FORMAT menu options 16-4 Dim Pattern, PRO PAT TYPE 14-3 DIM PNT PNT menu options 2-27 dim_fraction_denominator option 1-7 DimCosmetics, MODIFY 16-8 Dimension "rho" 2-33 arrowhead display 16-9 baseline 2-37 deleting 16-22 format 16-7 fractional values 1-7 sketcher 2-25 invariable 15-14 known 6-32 symbolic form 4-16 linear 2-26 modifying 16-3 displaying for modication 16-2 location 16-8 scheme 16-22 values 16-3 moving 2-41 negative values 1-8 number of decimal places 16-4 obsolete 16-23 of a revolved section 2-28 Index - vi
ordinate 2-37 perimeter 2-35 precision 2-25 reference dimensions 1-8 references determining hole placement 7-8 section (see Section dimensions) 2-1 spline 2-30 linear 2-31 radius of curvature 2-31 tangency 2-31 symbol modifying 16-6 special 16-6 table-driven 15-15 tangency creating 2-31 text adding 16-5 moving 16-8 three-point 2-34 types 15-14 variable 15-14 zero dimension values 2-54 Dimension, MAKE INDEP 16-6 Dimension, MOVE ENTITY 2-41 Dimension, SKETCHER 2-25 Dimensioning interpolation points 2-32 section to part edges 4-19 sketcher points 2-8 the part 1-7 Dimensions, RESTORE 17-7 Dir1 TaninrEdge, ADV TECH 11-19 Dir2 TanInrEdge, ADV TECH 11-19 Direction arrow 5-4 Direction, REDEFINE 16-16 Disable, CONSTRAINTS 2-45 Disassociate, GROUP 15-26 DISP ON SURF menu options 13-6 Display Mode, FEAT INC/EXC 16-46 Display, DISPLAY HATCH 3-18 DisplayOnSrf, SETUP DISP 13-5 DispOnNewCrv, PREVIEW 3-26 DispOnNewSrf, PREVIEW 13-12 DispOnOldCrv, PREVIEW 3-26 DispOnOldSrf, PREVIEW 13-12 Dist In Pln, OPTIONS 12-12 Dist On Surf, OPTIONS 12-12 Distance, GET MEASURE 3-61 Distance, SEC INFO 2-64 Divide, GEOM TOOLS 2-20 Dome feature 9-21 Dont Align, QUERY B-7 Done Modify, MOD SPLINE 2-56
Done, QUERY B-7 Draft 9-3 angle 9-10 creating 9-8 modifying 9-19 multiple 9-12 neutral curve 9-14 neutral plane 9-7 reference plane 9-3 restrictions 9-4 split at sketch 9-10 split lines 9-10 variable 9-6 Draft offset bevel angle 12-24 for quilts 12-22 for solid surfaces 12-22 Draft Offset, QUILT SURF 12-22 Draft Offset, TWEAK 9-3 DRAFT OPS menu 9-4 Draft, QUILT SURF 10-3 Draft, TWEAK 9-3 Drag Dim Val, MOD SKETCH 2-50 Drag Entity, MOD SKETCH 2-50 Drag Item, MOVE ENTITY 2-40 Drag Many, MOVE ENTITY 2-40 Drag Vertex, MOD SKETCH 2-50 Drag, FACTOR OPTS 11-20 Drag, TRIM/EXTEND 3-35 DragAndDrop, SECTION PLACE 15-30 DTM PNT ARR menu options 3-13 Dynamic modication 2-51
E
Ear 9-29 section 9-31 Ear, TWEAK 9-2 Edg/Crv Curv, GET MEASURE 3-61 Edg/Crv Len, GET MEASURE 3-60 Edge Chain, RND SET ATTR 8-3 Edge Pair, RND SET ATTR 8-4 Edge, CHAMF 7-13 Edges, DEF EXTEND 12-16 Edges, INFO EXTEND 12-20 Edge-Surf, RND SET ATTR 8-3 Edit Design, PROGRAM 15-19 Edit File, EDIT CURVES 16-26 EDIT METHOD menu options 16-44 Edit Points, DTM PNT ARR 3-14 Edit Points, MOD ARR TBL 16-10 Edit Rels, OBSOL RELS 16-39 Edit, PATT TABLE 14-23 Elliptic Fillet, ADV GEOMETRY A-12 Enable, CONSTRAINTS 2-45
End Cond, DEF EXTEND 12-16 End Plane, SPINAL BEND 9-44 End, DEF TAN 3-20 End, TANGENCY 2-17 Enter Length, TRIM/EXTEND 3-35 Enter Points, DTM PNT ARR 3-13 Enter Points, MOD ARR TBL 16-10 Enter Prompt, SET PROMPT 15-18 Enter Value, ABS ACCURACY 16-53 Enter Value, OFFSET 3-8 Enter, FACTOR OPTS 11-20 Enter, GET INPUT 15-19 Enter, SEL SYMBOL 15-20 Enter-input, PICK/ENTER 7-14 Entity, SEC INFO 2-63 Entity/Edge, OFFSET DIR 3-17 Entity/Edge, SET AXIS 3-55 Equations, SPINAL BEND 9-44 Erase, DBMS 15-24 EraseNotDisp, DBMS 15-24 Evaluate, DATUM 3-60 Exact, CURV TYPE 3-33 Exclude Feat, PART DEF RULE 16-43 Exclude Srfs, REDEF IMPT 16-24 Exclude, FEAT INC/EXC 16-45 Exclude, SURF SELECT 10-18 Explain, CONSTRAINTS 2-45 Ext Dist, DEF EXTEND 12-16 Ext Dist, INFO EXTEND 12-20 Ext SideEdge, SIDE EDGE DIR 12-14 EXT SYMBOLS menu options 15-20 Extend, QUILT SURF 12-10 Exterior, NEW POINTS 2-60 External identier 16-2 Extrude direction of creation 5-13 section 5-15 sketching feature 5-15 Extrude, SOLID OPTS 5-13 Extrude, SRF OPTS 10-5
F
Failed Feat, ROLL MDL TO 17-6 Failed Feat, SELECT FEAT 17-7 Failed Geom, INVESTIGATE 17-6 Feat ID, RESUME 16-38 FEAT INC/EXC menu 16-45 Feat Info, FEAT FAILED 17-2 FEAT menu 15-15 Feat Num, R-ONLY FEAT 16-2 Feat Pat, PATTERN TYP 14-20 FEAT REROUTE menu options 16-41 Feature adding 1-5 advanced form 6-23 base Index - vii
creating 1-4 denition 1-4 UDF as 1-5 blend IGES les 6-17 sections 6-10 starting points 6-10 specifying tangent surfaces 6-16 chamfer (see Chamfer) 7-13 copy 15-3 by mirroring 15-9 by moving 15-10 using GROUP menu options 15-37 cosmetic (see Cosmetic feature) 7-29 creating 5-1 cut 7-3 delete 16-39 dependent 15-11 depth options 5-9 blind 5-9 from-to 6-12 direction 5-4 illustration 5-5 draft (see Draft) 9-3 ear (see Ear) 9-29 failure 17-3 ange (see Flange) 7-16 form options blend (see Blend) 6-8 extrusion (see Extrusion) 5-13 revolved (see Revolved feature) 5-16 sweep (see Sweep) 12-36 free-form (see Free-form features) 13-2 groove (see Cosmetic feature, groove) 7-37 hole (see Hole) 7-3 independent 15-11 local push (see Local push) 9-20 mirroring (see Mirroring) 15-8 neck (see Neck) 7-15 offset (see Offset feature) 9-28 patterning 15-36 patterning (see Pattern) 14-1 pipe (see Pipe) 7-22 protrusion (see Protrusion) 7-2 radius dome (see Radius dome) 9-21 read only 16-2 redene 16-14 imported geometry 16-23 reorder 16-35 reroute 16-40 restrictions 16-40 resume 16-36 rib (see Rib) 7-17 round (see Round) 8-2
section dome (see Section dome) 9-23 shaft (see Shaft) 7-12 shell (see Shell) 7-20 slot 7-3 specifying side 5-4 suppress 16-36 thin 5-5 extruded, illustrated 5-6 revolved, illustrated 5-6 thread (see Cosmetic feature, thread) 7-31 unaligning 16-23 unsuppress 16-36 Feature Info, SHOW ERRORS 17-10 Feature with multiple sections modifying 16-12 Feature, FIX MODEL 17-6 Feature, NAME SETUP 16-11 Feature, SELECT TYPE 16-41 Features, EDIT METHOD 16-44 File, REDEF IMPT 16-23 Fillet arc 2-11 Fillet, ARC TYPE 2-12 Fillet, CIRCLE TYPE 2-13 Fillet, SRF OPTS 10-21 First Dir, GRIDLINE DIR 13-8 First Dir, OPTIONS 11-6 First Dir, PATTERN DIR 14-20 Fit Axis, OPTIONS 3-4 Fit Edge, OPTIONS 3-4 Fit Feature, OPTIONS 3-4 Fit Part, OPTIONS 3-4 Fit Radius, OPTIONS 3-4 Fit Surface, OPTIONS 3-4 Fix Model, INFO REGEN 17-9 Fixed, ADJUST TYPE 16-31 Fixed, OFFSET TYPE 4-10 Flange feature 7-16 Flange, SOLID 7-16 Flat, SRF OPTS 10-6 Flip Arrows, MODIFY 16-9 Flip, ARROW FLIP 5-5 Flip, REDEFINE 16-16 Flip, THIN OPT 5-6 ip_arrow_scale option 5-5 FORM OPTS menu 13-3 Fraction, FORMAT 16-7 Fractions as dimensions 1-7 sketcher 2-25 Free Ends, ATTRIBUTES 6-5 FREE FORM menu options 13-4 Free Form, ADV FEAT OPT 13-1 Free Form, TWEAK 9-3 Free, BNDRY COND 11-10 Free, ON SURF 3-22
Index - viii
Free-form features creating 13-2 manipulating 13-4 new surfaces 13-4 setting up boundary regions 13-3 Freeze, CHILD 16-38 From Bndry, CRV OPTIONS 3-48 From Curve, CRV OPTIONS 3-47 From File, ADV FEAT OPT 6-23 From File, OPTIONS 3-26 From Rels, SEL SYMBOLS 15-20 From UDF, CREATE GROUP 15-26 FromDifModel, COPY FEATURE 15-4 FromDifVers, COPY FEATURE 15-4 From-To, CHAIN OPT 3-34 Full Round, RND SET ATTR 8-3 Full Round, RND SET ATTS 8-25
G
Gauss Curv, SHADING OPTS 13-5 GEN PNT SEL menu 3-16 General patterns 14-5 General, BLEND OPTS 6-22 General, PAT OPTIONS 14-3 Geom Check, FEAT FAILED 17-2 Geom Check, INFO 17-10 Geom Check, INFO REGEN 17-9 Geometric snapshot 16-50 Geometry aligning to model edges 4-17 aligning to points 4-18 arc 2-7 checking errors 17-10 circle 2-7 conic 2-14 creating using mouse buttons 2-6 dimensioning to part edges 4-19 llet 2-11 geometry information 2-63 line 2-7 mirroring 2-24 point 2-7 spline (see Spline) 2-15 text entities creating 2-19 modify 2-61 unaligning 4-18 Geometry, LINE TYPE 2-8 Geometry, PIPE OPTS 7-22 GeomSnpshot, REP ATTR 16-44 GET EXT DIST menu options 3-48 GET INPUT menu options 15-19 GET MEASURE menu options 3-60 Graph evaluation 6-32
redene 16-34 relations 6-38 GRAPH menu options 6-45 Graph, DATUM 3-59 Graph, OPTIONS 9-40 Graph, SPINAL BEND 9-44 Grid model 1-2 sketcher 2-4 Grid Info, SEC INFO 2-64 Grid Off, MODEL GRID 1-3 Grid On, MODEL GRID 1-3 Grid On/Off, MODIFY GRID 2-4 Grid Snap, ENVIRONMENT 2-6 Grid Spacing, MODEL GRID 1-3 GRID TYPE menu 2-5 Grid, DISP ON SURF 13-6 Grid, PART SETUP 1-3 Grid, SEC ENVIRON 2-4 grid_snap option 2-6 GRIDLINE DIR menu 13-8 Groove (see Cosmetic feature, groove) 7-37 Groove, COSMETIC 7-37 Group 15-1 creating example 15-21 failed regeneration 15-31 local 15-32 operations 15-33 pattern restrictions 15-38 patterning 15-36 replacement 15-35 conditions 15-35 skipped references 15-30 type changing 15-26 Group Pat, PATTERN TYP 14-20 Group, FEAT 15-26
H
Helical sweep 6-47 constant pitch 6-48 variable pitch 6-50 Helical Swp, ADV FEAT OPT 6-47 Hide Item, SHOW ERRORS 17-10 Hole 7-3 blind 5-9 placing 7-7 datum plane 7-7 dimensioning 7-8 linear 7-8 radial 7-9 surface 7-7 rotational pattern 14-8
Index - ix
sketched 7-6 straight 7-4 Hole, SOLID 7-3 Hollow, PIPE OPTS 7-23 Horiz, VERT HORIZ 2-37 Horizontal, DIM PNT PNT 2-27 Horizontal, LINE TYPE 2-9
I
Identical patterns 14-4 Identical, PAT OPTIONS 14-3 IGES les for non-parallel blends 6-17 IGES, INTF IMPORT 6-17 Import, INTERFACE 6-17 Imported geometry redening 16-23 Importing blends 6-55 Include Feat, PART DEF RULE 16-43 Include, FEAT INC/EXC 16-45 Include, SURF SELECT 10-15 Incomplete, FAILED FEAT 15-32 Increm, DRAFT TRIM 2-23 Independent features 15-11 Independent, ATTRIBUTES 9-15 Independent, COPY FEATURE 15-4 Independent, PLACE OPTS 15-27 Indiv Entity, SELECT TYPE 16-41 Indiv Surf, SURF OPTIONS 10-15 Indiv Surfs, BND METHOD 10-16 Inections, CRV OPTS 3-25 Info Feat, INFO REGEN 17-9 Info Pnts, MOD SPLINE 2-58 INFO REGEN menu 17-9 Info, CHILD 16-38 Info, GRAPH 6-45 Info, GRP PLACE 15-8 Info, MAIN 7-22 Info, MEASURE PARAM 3-61 Info, SHOW REF 17-6 Info, SURF EXTEND 12-20 Info, UDF FEATS 15-16 Info, UPDATE REP 16-50 Information sketched sections 2-63 Input, MOD ARR TBL 16-10 Insert feature 16-34 Insert Item, OPTIONS 11-7 Insert Mode, FEAT 16-34 Insert Point, CONNECT TYPE 3-20 Instance spacing and size 14-13 INSTANCES menu 16-25 InstDbms, DBMS 15-24 Integrate, UDF 15-15 Index - x
Intent Manager A-2 Interface, SEC TOOLS 6-17 Interior, NEW POINTS 2-60 Internal identier 16-38 Interpolation points dimensioning 2-32 IntersctSrfs, TRANS TYPE 8-15 IntersecCrvs, DISP ON SURF 13-6 IntersecCrvs, SETUP OPTS 13-6 Intersect Pt, SEC INFO 2-63 Intersect, GEOM TOOLS 2-21 Intersect, SURF MERGE 12-2 INTR SURFS menu options 3-19 Invariable dimension 15-14 INVESTIGATE menu options 17-4 Investigate, RESOLVE FEAT 17-4 Item Info, SHOW ERRORS 17-10
J
Join Surfs, INTF ATTRB 16-24 Join, JOIN SRFS 10-7 Join, SURF MERGE 12-2
K
Keep Current, SHADING OPTS 13-5 Keep Current, SPACING OPTS 13-7 Known dimension symbol 2-39 using 4-20 Known, DIMENSION 4-20
L
Last Set, RESUME 16-38 Last Success, ROLL MDL TO 17-6 Layer, RESUME 16-38 Layer, SELECT FEAT 16-36 Left Handed, OPTIONS 6-47 Length Ratio, PNT DIM MODE 3-15 Length, DRAFT TRIM 2-22 Line creating 2-7 Line style modifying 16-13 setting 7-29 Line Style, MODIFY 16-13 Line Style, REDEF IMPT 16-24 LINE TYPE menu 2-8 Linear, DIM TYPE 7-9 Linear, OPTIONS 9-40 Linear, PLACEMENT 7-8 Lip, TWEAK 9-33 List Changes, INVESTIGATE 17-5 List, SIMPLFD REP 16-43 List, UDF 15-15
Local groups (see Group, local) 15-32 Local push 9-20 boundary 9-21 creating 9-20 height 9-21 Local Push, TWEAK 9-20 Local, POLY MOTION 13-8 Lock All Dims, MOVE SKETCH A-47 Lock/Unlock, MOVE SKETCH A-47 Loop Surfs, BND METHOD 10-16 Loop Surfs, SURF OPTIONS 10-16 Loops, GATHER FILL 10-20
M
Make Indep, MODIFY 15-11 Make Plane, GET DTMSEL 3-39 Make Solid, ATTACHMENT 8-29 Make Solid, INTF ATTRB 16-24 Make Surface, ATTACHMENT 8-29 Mapping a graph or function 6-32 mark_approximate_dims 16-7 Marked Feats, DISP MODE 16-46 MEASURE DIST menu options 3-49 MEASURE PARAM menu options 3-60 Measure, EDIT CURVES 16-27 Merge Ends, ATTRIBUTES 6-5 Merge feature 15-9 Merge, EDIT CURVES 16-32 Merging quilts 12-2 Mesh Setup, CNTRL POLY 13-7 Mesh, DISP ON SURF 13-6 Mesh, SETUP OPTS 13-6 Mesh, SHOW OPTS 10-15 Messages geometry check 17-11 MIN RADIUS menu options 3-61 Min Radius, ATTRIBUTES 8-10 Mirror to copy features 15-8 Mirror Geom, FEAT 15-39 Mirror Geom, INSERT FEAT 16-35 MIRROR menu 2-24 Mirror, COPY FEATURE 15-3 Mirror, FEAT 15-8 Mirror, GEOM TOOLS 2-24 Mirror, SURF MODEL 12-21 Missing Refs, FEAT REROUTE 16-41 MOD ARR OPT menu 16-10 MOD ARR TBL menu 16-10 Mod Entity, MOD SKETCH 2-50 Mod Scheme, CHILD 16-37 MOD TANG menu options 2-56 Model grid 1-2 MODEL GRID menu options 1-3
model_grid_spacing option 1-3 Modication dynamic 2-51 Modify cutout feature 16-12 datum point array 16-9 datum points in array 16-9 decimal places, number of 16-4 dependent copy 16-3 dimension format 16-7 dimensions 16-2 feature names 16-11 feature with multiple sections 16-11 features 16-11 ipping dimension arrows 16-9 moving a dimension 16-8 moving text 16-8 parts 1-8 pattern relations 14-20 Sketcher grid 2-4 spline using coordinates 2-58 using the control polygon 2-57 using the mouse 2-56 swept blend 6-45 table-driven patterns 14-25 tangency of a spline 2-56 Modify Srf, REDEF IMPT 16-24 Modify, EXT SYMBOLS 15-20 Modify, FEAT 16-2 Modify, FIX MODEL 17-7 Modify, PATCH 8-22 Modify, UDF 15-15 Mouse buttons to create geometry 2-6 Move control points 13-10 dimensions 2-41 Move Datum, MODIFY 16-9 Move Dim, MODIFY 16-8 MOVE ENTITY menu options 2-39 MOVE FEATURE menu options 15-10 MOVE PNTS menu options 2-56 Move Pnts, MOD SPLINE 2-56 Move Point, CNTRL POLY 13-7 Move Points, CONTROL POLY 3-23 Move Points, CRV TWEAKd 3-23 Move Polygon, CRV TWEAK 3-23 Move Text, DIM COSMETIC 16-8 Move, COPY FEATURE 15-3 Move, GEOM TOOLS 2-39 Move, OPTIONS 12-21 Move, SPLINEPNTS 16-29
Index - xi
Movement Pln, CONTROL POLY 3-23 Multiple Rad, CONNECT TYPE 3-20 Multiple Rad, PIPE OPTS 7-23 Multiple, PROMPTS 15-17
Num Lines, POLAR PARAMS 2-6
O
OBSOL RELS menu options 16-39 Offs By View, OPTIONS 3-54 Offset Csys, DATUM POINT 3-12 Offset Edge, GEOM TOOLS 4-8 Offset entities 4-8 Offset feature 9-28 Offset Planes, DATUM 3-5 Offset Point, DATUM POINT 3-12 Offset Surf, DATUM POINT 3-11 Offset surface 10-8 OFFSET TYPE menu options 4-10 Offset, ATTRIBUTES 12-24 Offset, MENUDTM OPT 1-4 Offset, OPTIONS 3-54 Offset, PNT DIM MODE 3-15 Offset, SRF OPTS 10-8 Offset, TWEAK 9-28 Okay, FLIP ARROW 5-5 Okay, THIN OPT 5-6 Old Surf, SRF TO DISP 13-12 On Curve, DATUM POINT 3-12 On Point, PLACEMENT 7-8 On Surface, DATUM POINT 3-11 On Surface, ON SURF 3-22 On Vertex, DATUM POINT 3-12 One By One, CHAIN 3-33 One Prole, SECTION DOME 9-24 One Side, ATTRIBUTES 5-14 Open Ends, ATTRIBUTES 10-7 Open, ATTRIBUTES 6-21 Ordinate dimensions 2-37 Orig + Pnt, SET AXIS 3-55 Orig + ZAxis, OPTIONS 3-54 Origin, MODIFY GRID 2-5 OscPlnAtPnt, REF PLANE TYPE 16-29 Other, NAME SETUP 16-11 Output, MOD ARR TBL 16-10
N
Name, PART SETUP 16-11 Neck 7-15 creating 7-15 Neck, SOLID 7-15 Negative dimensions 1-8 Neutral (pivot) plane 9-7 Neutral Crv, DRAFT OPTS 9-4 Neutral Pln, DRAFT OPTS 9-4 New Quilt, ATTACHMENT 8-29 New Refs, COPY FEATURE 15-3 New Srf, SRF TO DISP 13-12 New, QUILT SURF 10-5 Next Along, MEASURE DIST 12-13 Next Item, SHOW ERRORS 17-10 Next Normal, MEASURE DIST 12-13 Next, CHOOSE 3-34 Next, CONFIRM 6-42 Next, COORD SYS 3-55 Next, SHOW REF 17-5 NextSideEdge, SIDE EDGE DIR 12-14 No Csys, SEC INFO 2-65 No Display, DISPLAY HATCH 3-18 No geometry, PIPE OPTS 7-23 No Inn Fcs, SWEEP OPT 6-5 No Join, JOIN SRFS 10-7 No Prole, SECTION DOME 9-24 No Prop Ctrl, OPTIONS 9-40 No Split, ATTRIBUTES 9-7 Nominal, FORMAT 16-4 None, SHADING OPTS 13-5 None, SPACING OPTS 13-7 None, TANGENCY 2-17 Norm To Bnd, MEASURE DIST 12-13 Norm To Bnd, SIDE EDG DIR 12-14 Norm to Sket, ATTRIBUTES 12-24 Norm To Spine, ATTRIBUTES 8-14 Norm to Surf, ATTRIBUTES 12-24 Norm to Surf, SEC ORIENT 6-41 Norm To Traj, OPTIONS 6-47 Norm To Traj, SWEEP OPTS 6-31 Normal Off, OPTIONS 9-28 Normal Pln, DATUM AXIS 3-9 Normal to Surf, OFFSET TYPE 10-9 Normal, BNDRY COND 11-10 Normal, DELETE/SUPP 16-37 Normal, DIMENSION 4-16 Normal, DISP OPTION 15-28 NormToOriginTraj, SWEEP OPTS 6-30 Num Digits, DIM COSMETIC 16-4 Num Digits, SEC ENVIRON 2-25 Index - xii
P
Parallel Edge, END EDGE DIR 12-15 Parallel projected blend cuts in 6-13 Parallel, BLEND 6-9 Parallel, BLEND OPTS 6-13 Parallel, LINE TYPE 2-8 Parameters, RESTORE 17-7 Parameters, SETUP DISP 3-25 Params, MODIFY GRID 2-5 Parent-child relationship breaking 16-40 changing 1-5 Part
dimensioning fractions 1-7 layers 1-7 overview 1-7 relations 1-7 merging/cutting out modifying dimensions 16-13 redening 16-24 model grid 1-2 setting up 1-2 sketching sections dimensioning to part 4-16 PART SETUP menu options 1-3 PAT DIM INCR menu options 14-7 Patch, ATTRIBUTES 8-15 Patch, TRANS TYPE 8-16 Patch, TWEAK 12-29 PATT TABLE menu options 14-23 Pattern benets 14-2 creating variations 14-26 datum axes 14-12 deleting 14-21 dimension 14-6 dimension type creating 14-7 general 14-5 identical 14-4 instance 14-4 modifying 14-20 parameters 14-14 reducing to a single feature 14-21 reference patterns 14-19 relations adding 14-14 modifying 14-20 rotational 14-8 rules 14-18 table-driven 14-23 modifying 14-25 types 14-3 varying 14-4 Pattern, FEAT 14-2 Pattern, GROUP 15-36 Pattern, REDEFINE 16-16 PatternTable, MODIFY 14-28 Perimeter dimension 2-35 Perimeter, DIMENSION 2-35 Perpendicular, LINE TYPE 2-8 PICK CURVES menu options 16-32 Pick Point, PICK/ENTER 7-14 Pick Surf, FORM OPTS 13-3 Pick XVector, SEC ORIENT 6-41 Pick, MIRROR 2-24
PICK/ENTER menu options 7-14 Pipe 7-22 connections 7-27 creating 7-22 Pipe, SOLID 7-22 Pitch cosmetic threads 7-32 graph variable pitch helical sweep 6-50 helical sweeps 6-47 Pivot Dir, SWEEP OPTS 6-30 PLACE OPTS menu options 15-27 Place Section, SEC TOOLS 4-14 Plane Norm, OFFSET DIR 3-17 Plane, GEN SEL DIR 6-30 Plane, SETUP PLANE 4-4 Plane/Norm, SET AXIS 3-55 Pln + 2Axes, OPTIONS 3-54 Pnt + 2Axes, OPTIONS 3-53 PNT DIM MODE menu options 3-15 Pnt Norm Pln, DATUM AXIS 3-9 Pnt on Surf, DATUM AXIS 3-10 Pnt Range, MOVE PNTS 2-57 Pnt/Tangent, LINE TYPE 2-9 Point sketching 2-7 POINT ARRAY menu options 3-13 Point, GEOMETRY 2-7 Point, TRIM AT 3-35 Point/Vertex, SELECT ITEM 11-6 Points, CRV OPTS 3-25 Pointwise, BLEND TYPE 11-14 Polar, GRID TYPE 2-5 POLY MOTION menu options 13-8 Poly Motion, CNTRL POLY 13-8 Porcupine, DISP ON SURF 13-6 Porcupine, SETUP OPTS 13-6 Prev Item, SHOW ERRORS 17-10 PREVIEW menu options 13-12 Preview, CNTRL POLY 13-12 Preview, CONTROL POLY 3-26 Previewing modied surface 13-12 Previous, CONFIRM 6-42 Previous, COORD SYS 3-55 Previous, SHOW REF 17-5 PRO PAT TYPE menu options 14-3 Pro/DESIGNER data retrieving 12-36 Pro/FEATURE 6-7 functionality 15-1 modifying Z-coordinates 2-59 Pro/PIPING
Index - xiii
using pipe segments 4-2 Pro/SURFACE 9-2 pro_group_dir option 15-25 PROGRAM menu options 15-19 Program, FIX MODEL 17-7 Proj Sec, OPTIONS 7-30 Project Sec, BLEND OPTS 6-14 Projected parallel blend cuts in 6-13 Protrusion 7-2 multiple contours 7-2 restrictions 7-2 using surface feature 12-30 Protrusion, SOLID 5-2 Purge, DBMS 15-24
Q
Quick Fix, RESOLVE FEAT 17-5 Quilt creating solid geometry 12-26 display 10-4 merging 12-2 mirroring 12-21 rotating 12-21 transforming 12-21 translating 12-21 trimming 12-5 Quilt Surfs, SURF OPTIONS 10-16 Quilt Surfs, SURFACE LIST 3-44 Quilt/Solid, SPINAL BEND 9-44 Quit Regen, START OPTS 17-9
R
Rad Spacing, POLAR PARAMS 2-6 Radial dimensions 2-28 Radial, PLACEMENT 7-8 Radius Dome, TWEAK 9-2 Radius, DIM TYPE 7-9 Range, SELECT FEAT 16-36 Read File, GET INPUT 15-19 Read Me A-2 Read Only, DISP OPTION 15-28 Read Only, FEAT 16-2 Read Pnts, MOD SPLINE 2-58 Read Points, DTM PNT ARR 3-14 Read, PATT TABLE 14-24 Rectangle creating 2-10 Rectangle, GEOMETRY 2-10 Redene composite curve 16-33 datum curve from le 16-25 datum features 16-25
dependent copy 16-15 dimensioning scheme 16-16, 16-22 feature 16-14 features with elements 16-15 features with no elements 16-15 graph 16-34 imported geometry 16-23 pattern 16-16 section 16-18 sketch 16-16 sketching plane 16-16 surface size 16-24 Redene UDF, FAILED FEAT 15-32 Redene, FEAT 16-14 Redene, FEAT FAILED 17-2 Redene, GRP PLACE 15-8 Redene, QUICK FIX 17-5 Redene, ROUND SETS 8-13 Redene, ROUND TRANS 8-19 Redene, SIMPLFD REP 16-43 Redene, SURF SELECT 10-19 Redene, WORK REGION 16-48 Redo Item, OPTIONS 11-7 Redo, MEASURE PARAM 3-61 Redo, SKETCHER A-49 Redraw Dims, PAT DIM INCR 14-7 Ref Info, REROUTE 16-42 Ref Info, WHICH REF 15-6 Ref Pattern, PRO PAT TYPE 14-3 REF PLANE TYPE menu options 16-29 REF REROUTE menu options 16-42 Reference dimension 1-8 Reference pattern 14-19 Reference plane 9-3 References, REDEFINE 16-16 References, SEC INFO 2-64 Reect Crvs, DISP ON SURF 13-6 Regen Info, INFO 17-9 RegenBackup, ENVIRONMENT 17-4 Regenerate, FIX MODEL 17-7 Regenerate, REP ATTR 16-43 Regenerate, SKETCHER 2-54 Regeneration 3D section sketch 4-22 checking geometry 17-10 failed UDF 15-31 information 17-9 resolving feature failures 17-2 speed 17-8 unsuccessful 2-45 Regular Sec, BLEND OPTS 6-12 Regular Sec, OPTIONS 7-30 Reject, DEFAULT TAN 6-34 Relation, PAT DIM INCR 14-7 Relation, SKETCHER 2-39 Relations
Index - xiv
adding to sections 2-39 constraint violation 17-8 obsolete 16-23 parametric graph 6-38 pattern 14-20 Sketcher 2-39 sweep 6-35 Relations, FIX MODEL 17-7 Relations, RESTORE 17-7 Relative, ACCURACY 16-53 Remove Item, OPTIONS 11-7 Remove Last, REMOVE DIMS 15-19 Remove Point, DEFINE GRAPH 6-45 Remove, DEFINE BEND 9-36 Remove, DTM PNT MODE 3-16 Remove, EXT SYMBOLS 15-20 Remove, MOD TANG 2-56 Remove, PATT TABLE 14-23 Remove, ROUND SETS 8-13 Remove, ROUND TRANS 8-19 Remove, SPLINEPNTS 16-28 Remove, UDF FEATS 15-16 Remove, VAR DIMS 15-18 Rename, DBMS 15-24 Rename, PATT TABLE 14-23 Reorder features 16-35 Reorder, FEAT 1-5 repeat_datum_create option 3-5 Replace Ref, REROUTE REFS 16-41 Replace, DIMENSION 2-38 Replace, GEOM TOOLS 16-18 Replace, GROUP 15-35 Replace, SYMBOL ACTION 15-21 Replace, TWEAK 9-2 Replacement conditions group 15-35 Reroute Feat, REROUTE REFS 16-41 REROUTE menu options 16-41 REROUTE REFS menu options 16-41 Reroute, CHILD 16-37 Reroute, FEAT 16-40 Reroute, QUICK FIX 17-5 Reset to Def, SPEC THICK 7-20 Resolve environment 17-3 RESTORE ERR menu options 17-11 RESTORE menu options 17-7 Restore, FIX MODEL 17-7 Restore, GEOM CHECK 17-11 RestoreAll, SECTION FAIL 2-51 RestoreDim, SECTION FAIL 2-51 Resume features 16-38 RESUME menu options 16-38 Resume, FEAT 16-35 retain_pattern_denition option 14-21 Return, INSERT MODE 16-35 REV TO menu options 5-17
Reverse, COORD SYS 3-55 Revolve, SOLID OPTS 5-16 Revolve, SRF OPTS 10-5 Revolved feature 5-16 angle of revolution 5-17 modifying 12-36 sketching 5-17 Revolved section dimensioning 2-28 Rib 7-17 rotational 7-18 straight 7-18 Right Handed, OPTIONS 6-47 ROLL MDL TO menu options 17-6 Roll Model, INVESTIGATE 17-6 Rolling Ball, ATTRIBUTES 8-14 R-ONLY FEAT menu options 16-2 Rotate entities 2-41 Rotate, MOVE 3-56 Rotate, MOVE FEATURE 15-10 Rotate90, MOVE ENTITY 2-41 Rotational patterns 14-8 Rotational, BLEND 6-20 Rotational, BLEND OPTS 6-12 Round advanced 8-11 attachment type 8-29 corner transitions 8-19 entering radius values 8-6 full round 8-25 Round Extent element 8-7 Round Shape element 8-14 simple 8-2 surface edges 12-5 Transitions element 8-15 transitions with existing round geometry 8-24 variable radius 8-9 ROUND TRANS menu options 8-19 Round, SOLID 8-2
S
Same Dims, SCALE 15-28 Same Offset, POLY MOTION 13-8 Same Quilt, ATTACHMENT 8-29 Same Ref, REROUTE 16-41 Same Refs, COPY FEATURE 15-3 Same Size, SCALE 15-27 Same Srf, OPTIONS 12-10 Same, WHICH REF 15-28 Save As, DBMS 15-24 Save Pnts, MOD SPLINE 2-58 Save, DBMS 15-24 Scale, CRV DISPLAY 2-64 Index - xv
Scale, MOD SKETCH A-37 Scheme, REDEFINE 16-16 Scheme, SECTION 16-22 Sec Environ, SEC TOOLS 2-26 Sec Info, INFO 2-63 Second Dir, GRIDLINE DIR 13-8 Second Dir, OPTIONS 11-14 Second Dir, PATTERN DIR 14-20 SecProp Ctrl, OPTIONS 9-40 Sect Curv, SHADING OPTS 13-5 Sect to Srfs, ADV FEAT OPT 6-53 Section dimensions angular 2-29 conic 2-32 diameter 2-27 fractions 2-25 linear 2-26 restrictions 2-27 ordinate 2-37 precision 2-25 radial 2-28 relations 2-25 revolved sections 2-28 sketcher sections 2-25 spline 2-30 Section dome 9-23 blended 9-26 single prole 9-27 without prole 9-26 creating 9-24 restrictions 9-23 swept 9-24 creating 9-25 SECTION DOME menu options 9-24 Section Dome, TWEAK 9-24 SECTION FAIL menu options 2-51 Section geometry (see Geometry) 2-6 Section property 9-40 Section, MAKE INDEP 16-6 Section, REDEFINE 16-16 Seed Surface, SURF&BND 10-16 Sel By Menu, GET SELECT 16-11 Sel Feat, REF REROUTE 16-42 Sel Pnt/Vert, GET EXT DIST 12-13 SEL SYMBOLS menu options 15-20 Select All, ADD DIMS 15-18 Select All, CHAIN OPT 3-34 Select All, REMOVE DIMS 15-18 Select All, RESTORE ERR 17-11 Select Dim, ADD DIMS 15-18 Select Dim, REMOVE DIMS 15-18 Select Part, ABS ACCURACY 16-54 Select Plane, GET DTMSEL 3-39 Select Plane, MOT PLANE 3-23 Select Points, SPLINE MODE 2-17
Select Sec, BLEND OPTS 6-13 Select Spine, OPTIONS 9-40 Select Traj, SWEEP TRAJ 6-4 SELECT TYPE menu options 16-41 Select, CHAIN 3-35 Select, COPY FEATURE 15-3 Select, GEN PNT SEL 3-16 Select, PRJCRVTYPE 3-37 Select, REF DIR 9-9 Select, REF PLANE TYPE 16-29 Select, R-ONLY FEAT 16-2 Select, SEL SECTION 16-12 Select, SEL SYMBOLS 15-20 Select, SELECT FEAT 14-22 Select, SELECT REFS 11-12 select_on_dtm_edges option 3-3 Set Anchor, MOD SKETCH 2-51 SET AXIS menu options 3-55 Set Current, SIMPLFD REP 16-43 Set Origin, MODEL GRID 1-3 SET PROMPT menu options 15-18 Set Thicknss, SPEC THICK 7-20 Set Up, FIX MODEL 17-7 SETUP DISP menu options 13-5 Setup New, SETUP SK PLN 4-4 Setup New, SETUP_SK_PLN 14-11 SETUP OPTS menu options 13-6 SETUP PLANE menu options 4-4 SetupDisplay, CRV TWEAK 3-24 SetupDisplay, FREE FORM 13-4 SetupDisplay, STRETCH 11-20 SetupOptions, SETUP DISP 13-6 Shaded Image, SETUP DISP 13-5 SHADING OPTS menu options 13-5 Shaft 7-12 rotational pattern 14-8 Sharp, CAP TYPE 6-20 Shell creating 7-20 restrictions 7-21 Shell, SOLID 7-20 Shouldr Crv, OPTIONS 11-21 Show All, ADD DIMS 15-19 Show All, DISP MODE 16-46 Show All, DISPLAY MODE 16-46 Show Design, PROGRAM 15-19 Show Dim, MOD ARR OPT 16-10 Show Dims, INFO REGEN 17-9 Show Item, OPTIONS 11-7 Show Ref, CHILD 16-37 Show Ref, FEAT FAILED 17-2 Show Ref, INVESTIGATE 17-5 Show Result, GRP PLACE 15-8 Show, EXT SYMBOLS 15-20 Show, MEASURE PARAM 3-61
Index - xvi
Show, MOD ARR TBL 16-10 Show, SPLINEPNTS 16-28 Show, SURF SELECT 10-15 Show, UDF FEATS 15-16 Show, VAR DIMS 15-18 show_axes_for_extr_arcs option 3-8 show_dim_sign option 1-8 SideCrvInfInc, INFLUENCE 11-18 SideNrmToSkt, OPTIONS 9-28 SideNrmToSrf, OPTIONS 9-28 Silhouette, FORM 12-9 Simple, ROUND TYPE 8-3 SIMPLFD REP menu options 16-42 Simplfd Rep, PART 16-42 Simplfd Reps, OBJ ERASE 16-51 Simplied representation 16-42 create 16-43 using work region 16-48 Single Dst, OPTIONS 12-12 Single Pnt, MOVE PNTS 2-57 Single Point, CONNECT TYPE 3-20 Single Point, PIPE GEOM 7-23 Single Rad, CONNECT TYPE 3-20 Single, INTR SURFS 3-19 Single, MOD ARR NUM 16-10 Single, PROMPTS 15-17 Size of instances 14-13 Sket On Pln, FORM OPTS 13-3 Sket Region, OPTIONS 9-28 Sketch Plane, SECTION 16-16 Sketch Plane, SELECT REFS 11-11 Sketch Points, SPLINE MODE 2-17 Sketch Sec, BLEND OPTS 6-22 Sketch Spine, OPTIONS 9-40 Sketch Traj, SWEEP TRAJ 6-4 Sketch View, SKETCHER 4-5 Sketch, HOLE OPTS 7-6 Sketch, PRJCRVTYPE 3-37 Sketch, SECTION 16-16 Sketch, SKETCHER 2-6 Sketched feature in rotational pattern 14-9 Sketcher accuracy 2-48 assumptions 2-42 basic steps for use 2-2 constraints 2-44 coordinate system 2-15 creating geometry (see Geometry) 2-6 deleting entities 2-62 dimensioning sections (see also Section dimensions) 2-25 dimensioning to part 4-16 dimensions modifying 2-53
modifying spline points 2-55 moving 2-41 precision 2-25 zero values 2-48 dividing entities 2-20 restrictions 2-21 dynamic modication 2-51 geometry (see Geometry) 2-6 grid 2-4 hints 2-65 mirroring geometry 2-24 retrieving a section 4-14 sketching on a part illustration 4-2 sketching plane (see Sketching plane) 4-3 text 2-19 trimming entities 2-21 restrictions 2-23 undeleting entities 2-62 working in 3D 4-6 Sketcher dimensions dimensioning to a part 4-16 known 4-20 precision 2-25 Sketcher Read Me le A-2 Sketcher section redening 16-18 saving 2-3 Sketcher sections adding relations to 2-39 assumptions for solving overriding 2-45 modifying 2-50 overdimensioning 2-47 regenerating 2-42 revolved dimensions 2-28 underdimensioning 2-46 unregenerating 2-49 unsuccessful regeneration 2-45 zero-length segment 2-48 Sketcher with Intent Manager A-2 conict resolution A-20 creating constraints A-19 dimensioning the section A-21 redoing operations A-49 right mouse button pop-up menu A-56 specifying model references B-6 terminology A-3 undoing operations A-49 updating geometry A-36 sketcher_dec_places 2-25 Sketching plane 4-3 horizontal/vertical reference 4-4 redening 16-16
Index - xvii
Skip, INFO REGEN 17-9 Skip, WHICH REF 15-28 Slanted, DIM PNT PNT 2-27 Slope, SHADING OPTS 13-5 Slot 7-3 Slot, SOLID 7-3 Smooth, ATTRIBUTES 6-11 Smooth, CAP TYPE 6-20 Smooth, SPLINEPNTS 16-28 Solid Surfs, SURF OPTIONS 10-16 Solid Surfs, SURFACE LIST 3-42 Solid, PIPE OPTS 7-23 solid_grid_neg_prex option 1-3 solid_grid_num_dig option 1-3 SPACING OPTS menu options 13-7 Sparse, SPLINEPNTS 16-27 SPEC FROM menu options 5-14 SPEC THICK menu options 7-20 SPEC TO menu options 5-14 Specify Dist, MEASURE DIST 12-13 Specify Refs, SKETCHER B-6 Specify, ROLL MDL TO 17-6 Specify, SEL SECTION 16-12 Specify, START OPTS 17-9 Spectrum, SETUP OPTS 13-6 Spinal Bend, TWEAK 9-39 Spline 2-15 associating to a coordinate system 2-32 creating 2-17 dimensions 2-30 linear 2-31 radius of curvature 2-31 tangency 2-31 modifying using coordinates 2-58 using the control polygon 2-57 using the mouse 2-56 modifying points adding points 2-60 deleting points 2-60 manually 2-58 number of points 2-60 saving points in a le 2-59 using spline points le 2-59 modifying the tangency 2-56 moving created with control polygon 2-41 viewing coordinate values 2-61 SPLINE MODE menu options 2-17 Spline Pnts, EDIT CURVES 16-26 Spline, ADV GEOMETRY 2-14 Spline, ATTRIBUTES 8-10 Spline, CONNECT TYPE 3-20 Split at Crv, ATTRIBUTES 9-14
Split at Pln, ATTRIBUTES 9-7 Split at Skt, ATTRIBUTES 9-7 Split at Srf, ATTRIBUTES 9-14 Split, EDIT CURVES 16-31 Srf Analysis, FREE FORM 13-4 Srf Analysis, STRETCH 11-20 Srf Nrm Edge, DEF TAN 3-21 SRF TO DISP menu options 13-12 Srfs To Disp, PREVIEW 13-12 Srfs to Srfs, ADV FEAT OPT 6-54 StandAlone, UDF OPTIONS 15-15 START OPTS menu options 17-9 Start point of blend subsection 6-14 Start Point, CHAIN 3-35 Start Point, SEC TOOLS 6-10 Start, DEF TAN 3-20 Start, TANGENCY 2-17 Stop, TRANS TYPE 8-15 Straight, ATTRIBUTES 6-11 Straight, HOLE OPTS 7-4 Straight, PROF TYPE 12-25 Strengthen, CONSTRAINTS A-18 Strengthen, DIMENSION A-21 StretchFactor, STRETCH 11-20 Style Curves, REDEFINE 16-16 Subordinate, UDF OPTIONS 15-15 Subsection start point 6-14 Suppress All, CHILD 16-38 Suppress features 16-37 Suppress, CHILD 16-38 Suppress, FEAT 16-37 Suppress, QUICK FIX 17-5 Surf & Bnd, SURF OPTIONS 10-16 Surf Chain, CHAIN 3-34 Surface approximate blend 11-22 blended 11-3 dening boundary conditions 11-9 dening boundary inuence 11-15 selecting reference entities 11-5 using control points 11-12 using side curve inuence 11-15 conic 11-21 deformation 9-2 envelopes 13-2 grid redening 13-12 patching 12-29 previewing 13-12 redene merged surfaces 16-24 replacement 12-27 setting up the display of 13-5 using control polyhedron 13-7 Surface feature approximate blend 11-22 blended (see also Surface, boundary Part Modeling Users Guide
Index - xviii
blend) 11-3 conic 11-21 copying solid surface (see also Surface copy) 10-14 creating 10-5 creating solid geometry 12-30 dening 10-5 display setting colors 10-4 extending 12-10 along direction 12-19 at 10-7 form attributes 10-6 from boundaries 11-2 merge 12-2 offset 10-8 replacement 12-27 round between surfaces 10-21 rounds on surface edges 12-5 trimming 12-5 Surface, FEAT CLASS 10-5 Surface, TRIM AT 3-35 Surfaces, EDIT METHOD 16-44 Surfaces, PROJCRVREFS 3-39 Surf-Surf, RND SET ATTR 8-3 Suspend All, CHILD 16-38 Suspend, CHILD 16-38 Sweep 6-2 along a composite curve 6-35 creating 6-4 helical 6-47 modifying 16-12 sketching section 6-32 three-dimensional 6-7 trajectory along non-tangent entities 6-7 restrictions 6-4 trajectory parameter 6-35 variable section parametric graph relations 6-38 SWEEP OPTS menu 6-30 SWEEP TRAJ menu 6-40 Sweep, SECTION DOME 9-24 Sweep, SOLID OPTS 6-4 Sweep, SRF OPTS 10-5 Swept blend feature 6-38 Swept Blend, ADV FEAT OPT 6-23 Switch Dim, FIX MODEL 17-7 Switch, PATT TABLE 14-24 SYMBOL ACTION menu options 15-21 Symbol, DIM COSMETIC 16-6 system_curves_color option 3-17 system_section_color option 2-3 SystemColors, MISC 2-3
T
Table, MOD ARR OPT 16-10 Table, PAT DIM INCR 14-7 Table-driven dimension 15-15 Table-driven patterns 14-23 Tan Curve, DATUM AXIS 3-10 Tangency dimension creating 2-31 TANGENCY menu options 2-17 Tangency, MOD SPLINE 2-56 Tangent Crv, OPTIONS 11-21 Tangent Edge, END EDGE DIR 12-15 Tangent End, ARC TYPE 2-11 Tangent Pt, SEC INFO 2-64 Tangent spine 9-40 Tangent Srf, OPTIONS 12-11 Tangent, BNDRY COND 11-10 Tangent, LINE TYPE 2-9 Tangent, PROF TYPE 12-25 TangentToSrf, ADV FEAT OPT 11-26 Tangnt Chain, CHAIN 3-34 Tapered, OFFSET TYPE 4-10 Term Surfs, RND EXTENT 8-8 Text sketcher 2-19 modifying 2-61 Text Line, MOD SEC TEXT 2 2-61 Text Style, MOD SEC TEXT 2 2-61 Text, ADV GEOMETRY 2-19 The 16-8 Thin, SOLID OPTS 5-5 Thread (see Cosmetic feature, thread) 7-31 Three Srf, DATUM POINT 3-12 Three-point dimension 2-34 Thru All, SPEC TO 5-9 Thru Axis, OPTIONS 6-47 Thru Curve, RND SET ATTR 8-28 Thru Cyl, DATUM AXIS 3-10 Thru Edge, DATUM AXIS 3-9 Thru Next, SPEC TO 5-10 Thru Point, OFFSET 3-7 Thru Until, SPEC TO 5-11 To Plane, SURF EXTEND 12-20 Toggle, SEC TOOLS 6-13 Tolerance modifying 16-5 ToroidalBend, TWEAK 9-35 Trajectory helical 6-47 variable section sweep 6-31 Trajectory parameter 6-35 Trajpar in sweeps 6-32
Index - xix
trajpar_of_pnt 6-35 Transform, QUILT SURF 12-21 Transforming quilts 12-21 Transl Off, OPTIONS 9-28 Translate, ATTRIBUTES 12-24 Translate, MOVE 3-56 Translate, MOVE FEATURE 12-21 TRIM AT menu options 3-35 Trim At, TRIM/EXTEND 3-35 Trim feature for quilt surfaces 12-5 Trim, GEOM TOOLS 2-22 Trim, QUILT SURF 12-6 Trim/Extend, CHAIN 3-35 Trim/Extend, EDIT CURVES 16-32 Trimmed, OFFSET TYPE 4-11 Tweak features 9-2 freeform 13-2 TWEAK menu options 9-2 Tweak, SOLID 9-8 Two Curves, PICK CURVES 16-32 Two Planes, DATUM AXIS 3-10 Two Pnt/Vtx, DATUM AXIS 3-10 Two Points, CHAIN 3-34 Type, MODIFY GRID 2-5
U
UDF as base feature 1-5 creating 15-12 DBMS functions and 15-24 dening 15-12 dimension types 15-14 example 15-21 failed regeneration 15-31 library directory 15-25 required information 15-12 restrictions 15-14 using to create a group 15-25 UDF Driven, PLACE OPTS 15-27 UDF FEATS menu options 15-16 UDF Library, FEAT 15-15 UDF OPTIONS menu options 15-15 Unalign All, ALIGNMENT 4-18 Unalign Many, ALIGNMENT 4-18 Unalign, ALIGNMENT 4-18 Undelete Last, DELETION 2-63 Undo Changes, RESOLVE FEAT 17-4 Undo, FEAT INC/EXC 16-45 Undo, SKETCHER A-49 Ungroup, GROUP 15-37 Uniform, SPACING OPTS 13-7 Index - xx
Units, PART SETUP 1-2 Unpattern, GROUP 15-37 Unregenerate, SKETCHER 2-49 Unrelated, DELETE/SUPP 16-37 Unsel All, RESTORE ERR 17-11 Unselect, CHAIN 3-35 Unselect, GEN PNT SEL 3-16 Untrim Last, DRAFT TRIM 2-23 Untrimmed, OFFSET TYPE 4-10 Up To Plane, OPTIONS 12-20 Up To Vertex, MEASURE DIST 12-14 UPDATE REP menu options 16-49 Update Reps, SIMPLFD REP 16-43 Update, GROUP 15-25 Update, UPDATE REP 16-49 UpdateScreen, FEAT INC/EXC 16-45 UpTo Curve, SPEC TO 5-9 UpTo Plane, REV TO 5-18 UpTo Pnt/Vtx, REV TO 5-18 UpTo Pnt/Vtx, SPEC TO 5-9 UpTo Surface, SPEC FROM 5-9 UpTo Surface, SPEC TO 5-9 Use 2D Sketcher, ENVIRONMENT 4-5 Use Csys, SEC INFO 2-64 Use Curves, SOLID OPTS 12-7 Use Edge, GEOM TOOLS 4-6 Use Neut Pln, REF DIR 9-9 Use Prev, SETUP SEC PLN 4-4 Use Quilt, FORM 12-6 use_dimensioned_edges option 4-18 use_major_units option 1-8 User Dened, FEAT CLASS 7-38 User Scale, SCALE 15-28
V
Value, MODIFY 16-2 Value, PAT DIM INCR 14-7 VAR DIMS menu options 15-18 VAR SEC SWP menu options 6-31 Var Sec Swp, ADV FEAT OPT 6-30 Variable 6-27 Variable dimension 15-14 Variable, ATTRIBUTES 9-6 Variable, OPTIONS 6-47 Variable, REV TO 5-17 Variable, RND SET ATTR 8-3 Varying patterns 14-4 Varying, PAT OPTIONS 14-3 VaryLinearly, POLY MOTION 13-8 VarySmoothly, POLY MOTION 13-8 Vert By Vert, GET EXT DIST 12-13 VERT HORIZ menu options 2-37 Vert, VERT HORIZ 2-37 Vertex Round, FORM 12-9 Vertical, DIM PNT PNT 2-27 Part Modeling Users Guide
Vertical, LINE TYPE 2-9 View Plane, MOT PLANE 3-23 View Plane, REF PLANE TYPE 16-29
W
WHICH REF menu options 15-6 Whole Array, CONNECT TYPE 3-20 Whole Array, PIPE GEOM 7-23 Whole Model, REP ATTR 16-44 Whole Surf, OPTIONS 9-28 Whole, INTR SURFS 3-19 Wireframe, SHOW OPTS 10-15 With Dims, POINT ARRAY 3-13 Without Dims, POINT ARRAY 3-13 Work region for simpleed representations 16-48 Work Region, EDIT METHOD 16-44 Write, PATT TABLE 14-24
X
X Radius, ELLIPSE DIM A-31 X Spacing, CART PARAMS 2-5 X&Y Spacing, CART PARAMS 2-5 X-Axis, COORD SYS 3-55 XSec Ref Ent, GEOM TOOLS B-15 X-Section, FIX MODEL 17-7
Y
Y Radius, ELLIPSE DIM A-31 Y Spacing, CART PARAMS 2-5 Y-Axis, COORD SYS 3-55
Z
Z-Axis, COORD SYS 3-55
Index - xxi

Part Modeling

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part Modeling

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pro/ENGINEER

Part Modeling Users Guide

Parametric Technology Corporation

About This Guide

Chapter 1: Starting Out in Part Mode

Part Modeling Users Guide

Part Modeling Users Guide

Chapter 4: Sketching on a Model

Part Modeling Users Guide

4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23

Chapter 5: Feature Creation Basics

Chapter 6: Sweeps, Blends, and Advanced Features

Chapter 7: Construction Features

Part Modeling Users Guide

8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-28 8-29

Chapter 9: Tweak Features

Chapter 10: Creating Surface Features

Part Modeling Users Guide

Chapter 11: Creating Advanced Surface Features

Chapter 12: Working with Quilts

Chapter 13: Freeform Manipulation

Chapter 14: Patterning Features

Part Modeling Users Guide

Chapter 15: Copying Features

Chapter 16: Modifying the Part

Part Modeling Users Guide

Chapter 17: Regenerating the Part

Part Modeling Users Guide

Appendix B: Sketching on a Model with Intent Manager

Part Modeling Users Guide

About This Guide

About This Guide - i

ii - About This Guide

Part Modeling Users Guide

About This Guide

About This Guide - iii

Model Object Option

iv - About This Guide

Part Modeling Users Guide

Software Product Concerns and Documentation Comments

About This Guide - v

Setting Up the Part

Opening a Part File

Creating a Model Grid

Part Modeling Users Guide

Starting Out in Part Mode

Creating the First Feature

Creating the Initial Solid Feature

Creating Datums as the Base Feature

Creating a User-Defined Feature as the First Feature

Starting Out in Part Mode

Creating Incomplete Features

Starting Out in Part Mode

Using the Model Tree in Part Mode

Part Modeling Users Guide

Modifying Geometry and Dimensions

Starting Out in Part Mode

Negative Dimensions Environment

Part Modeling Users Guide

Working in the Sketcher Environment

Using Sketcher Mode

Using the Toolbar Icons

Part Modeling Users Guide

Setting the Sketcher Environment Options